s

SINAMICS
SINAMICS G120
Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual

Edition 01/2016
s Fundamental safety
instructions 1

Parameters 2

SINAMICS Function diagrams 3

SINAMICS G120 Faults and alarms 4

Control Units
CU240B-2/CU240E-2 Appendix A
List Manual
Index

Valid for
Control Units Firmware version
CU240B-2 4.7 SP6
CU240B-2_DP 4.7 SP6
CU240E-2 4.7 SP6
CU240E-2_DP 4.7 SP6
CU240E-2_DP_F 4.7 SP6
CU240E-2_F 4.7 SP6
CU240E-2_PN 4.7 SP6
CU240E-2_PN_F 4.7 SP6

01/2016
A5E33839529
Legal information
Warning concept
This Manual contains information which you must observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to avoid
material damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to equipment damage have no safety alert symbol. Depending on the hazard level,
warnings are indicated in a descending order as follows:

DANGER
indicates that death or serious injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or serious injury could result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one level of danger is simultaneously applicable, the warning notice for the highest level is used. A
notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may only be operated by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and safety
instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying
risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products are only permitted to be used for the applications envisaged in the catalog and in the associated
technical documentation. If third-party products and components are to be used, they must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. These products can only function correctly and safely if they are transported, stored, set up,
mounted, installed, commissioned, operated and maintained correctly. The permissible ambient conditions must be
adhered to. Information in the associated documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified with ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any other names used in this publication may
be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of liability
We have verified that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Since
variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. The information given in this document
is reviewed at regular intervals and any corrections that might be necessary are made in the subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: A5E33839529 Copyright © Siemens AG 2009 - 2016.

Division Digital Factory 01/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Fundamental safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.1 General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2 Industrial security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1 Overview of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.1.1 Explanation of the parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.1.2 Number ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2 List of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.3 Parameters for data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
2.3.1 Command Data Sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
2.3.2 Drive Data Sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
2.3.3 Motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
2.3.4 Power unit Data Sets (PDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
2.3.5 Encoder Data Sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
2.4.1 Binector inputs (BI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
2.4.2 Connector inputs (CI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
2.4.3 Binector outputs (BO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
2.4.4 Connector outputs (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
2.4.5 Connector/binector outputs (CO/BO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
2.5 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
2.5.1 Parameters with "WRITE_NO_LOCK". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
2.5.2 Parameters with "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
2.5.3 Parameters with "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
2.6 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
3 Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
3.1 Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
3.3 Input/output terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
3.4 PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
3.7 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
3.8 Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
3.11 Safety Integrated PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 5
Table of contents

3.12 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

3.13 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
3.16 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
3.17 Free function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
3.18 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
3.19 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
3.20 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
3.21 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
4 Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
4.1.2 Explanation of the list of faults and alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
4.1.3 Number ranges of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
4.2 List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
A.1 ASCII table (characters that can be displayed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
A.2 Motor code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
A.3 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

6 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
Fundamental safety instructions 1
Content

1.1 General safety instructions 8

1.2 Industrial security 9

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 7
1 Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Risk of death if the safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully observed
If the safety instructions and residual risks are not observed in the associated hardware
documentation, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.
• Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
• Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.

WARNING
Danger to life or malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed
parameterization
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
• Respond to possible malfunctions by applying suitable measures
(e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP or EMERGENCY-OFF).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

8 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 1 Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Industrial security

1.2 Industrial security

Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, devices, and/or networks. They are important
components of a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’ products and
solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly
check for product updates.
To ensure that Siemens products and solutions are operated securely, suitable preventive
measures (e.g. cell protection concept) and each component must be integrated into a state-
of-the-art holistic industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You will find more information about industrial security at:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
To receive information about product updates on a regular basis, register for our product
newsletter. You will find more information at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com

WARNING
Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulation (e.g. by viruses, Trojan horses, malware, worms) can cause unsafe
operating states to develop in your installation which can result in death, severe injuries
and/or material damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
Information and newsletters can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
For more information, visit:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security
concept.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016 9
1 Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Industrial security

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

10 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
Parameters 2
Content

2.1 Overview of parameters 12

2.2 List of parameters 26

2.3 Parameters for data sets 529

2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors) 540

2.5 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection 551

2.6 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) 553

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 11
2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

2.1 Overview of parameters

2.1.1 Explanation of the parameter list

Basic structure of the parameter descriptions

The data in the following example have been chosen at random. The table below contains all
the information that can be included in a parameter description. Some of the information is
optional.
The "List of parameters" (Page 26) has the following structure:

- - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

pxxxx[0...n] BICO: Full parameter name / abbreviated name

CU/PM variants Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(x), U, T Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8070
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 10.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Text
Value: 0: Name and meaning of value 0
1: Name and meaning of value 1
2: Name and meaning of value 2
etc.
Recommendation: Text
Index: [0] = Name and meaning of index 0
[1] = Name and meaning of index 1
[2] = Name and meaning of index 2
etc.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Name and meaning of bit 0 Yes no 8060
01 Name and meaning of bit 1 Yes no -
02 Name and meaning of bit 2 Yes no 8052
etc.
Dependency: Text
Refer to: pxxxx, rxxxx
Refer to: Fxxxxx, Axxxxx
Danger: Warning: Caution: Safety notices with a warning triangle

Notice: Safety notice without a warning triangle

Note: Information that might be useful.

- - - - - - - - - - - - End of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The individual pieces of information are described in detail below.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

12 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

pxxxx[0...n] Parameter number

The parameter number is made up of a "p" or "r", followed by the parameter number and the
index or bit field (optional).
Examples of the representation in the parameter list:
• p... Adjustable parameters (read and write)
• r... Display parameters (read only)
• p0918 Adjustable parameter 918
• p2051[0...13] Adjustable parameter 2051, indices 0 to 13
• p1001[0...n] Adjustable parameter 1001, indices 0 to n (n = configurable)
• r0944 Display parameter 944
• r2129.0...15 Display parameter 2129 with bit field from bit 0 (smallest bit) to bit 15
(largest bit)
Other examples of notation in the documentation:
• p1070[1] Adjustable parameter 1070, index 1
• p2098[1].3 Adjustable parameter 2098, index 1 bit 3
• p0795.4 Adjustable parameter 795, bit 4
The following applies to adjustable parameters:
The parameter value as delivered is specified under "Factory setting" with the relevant unit in
square brackets. The value can be adjusted within the range defined by "Min" and "Max".
The term "linked parameterization" is used in cases where changes to adjustable parameters
affect the settings of other parameters.
Linked parameterization can occur, for example, as a result of the following actions and
parameters:
• Setting the PROFIBUS telegram (BICO interconnection)
p0922
• Setting component lists
p0230, p0300, p0301, p0400
• Automatically calculating and pre-assigning
p0340, p3900
• Restoring the factory settings
p0970
The following applies to display parameters:
The fields "Min", "Max" and "Factory setting" are specified with a dash "-" and the relevant unit
in square parentheses.

Note
The parameter list can contain parameters that are not visible in the expert lists of the particular
commissioning software (e.g. parameters for trace functions).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 13
2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name

The following abbreviations can appear in front of the BICO parameter name:
• BI: Binector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of a digital signal.
• BO: Binector Output
This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection with other
parameters.
• CI: Connector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of an "analog" signal.
• CO: Connector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnection with other
parameters.
• CO/BO: Connector/Binector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" and digital signal for interconnection
with other parameters.

Note
A BICO input (BI/CI) cannot be interconnected with just any BICO output (BO/CO, signal
source).
When interconnecting a BICO input using the commissioning software, only the corresponding
possible signal sources are listed.
Function diagrams 1020 ... 1030 explain the symbols for BICO parameters and how to deal
with BICO technology.

CU/PM variants
Indicates for which Control Units (CU) and/or Power Modules (PM) the parameter is valid. If no
CU or PM is listed, then the parameter is valid for all variants.
The following information relating to "CU" and "PM" can be displayed under the parameter
number:

Table 2-1 Information in the "CU/PM variants" field

CU/PM variants Meaning

All Control Units have this parameter.

CU240B-2 CU240B-2
CU240B-2_DP CU240B-2 with PROFIBUS interface
CU240E-2 CU240E-2
CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2 with PROFIBUS interface
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2 with PROFIBUS interface and extended integrated safety
functions
CU240E-2_F CU240E-2 with extended integrated safety functions
CU240E-2_PN CU240E-2 with PROFINET interface
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 with PROFINET interface and extended integrated safety
functions

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

14 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Table 2-1 Information in the "CU/PM variants" field, continued

CU/PM variants Meaning

PM230 Power Module for pumps and fans (3 AC 400 V)

PM240 Power Module for standard applications with dynamic braking (3 AC 400 V)
PM240-2 Power Module for standard applications with dynamic braking
(1 AC / 3 AC 200 V; 3 AC 400 V; 3 AC 600 V)
PM250 Power Module (3 AC 400 V with energy recovery)
PM260 Power Module (3 AC 690 V with energy recovery)
PM340 Power Module for standard applications with dynamic braking
(1 AC 200 V)

Access level
Specifies the minimum access level required to be able to display and change the relevant
parameter. The required access level can be set using p0003.
The system uses the following access levels:
• 1: Standard (not adjustable, included in p0003 = 3)
• 2: Extended (not adjustable, included in p0003 = 3)
• 3: Expert
• 4: Service
Parameters with this access level are password protected.

Note
Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to the Control Unit).
A higher access level will also include the functions of the lower levels.

Calculated
Specifies whether the parameter is influenced by automatic calculations.
p0340 determines which calculations are to be performed:
• p0340 = 1 includes the calculations from p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5.
• p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360, p0625).
• p0340 = 3 includes the calculations from p0340 = 4, 5.
• p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
• p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.

Note
For p3900 > 0, p0340 = 1 is also called automatically.
After p1900 = 1, 2, p0340 = 3 is also called automatically.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 15
2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Parameters with a reference to p0340 after "Calculated" depend on the Power Module being
used and the motor. In this case, the values at "Factory setting" do not correspond to the actual
values because these values are calculated during the commissioning. This also applies to the
motor parameters.

Data type
The information on the data type can consist of the following two items (separated by a slash):
• First item
Data type of the parameter.
• Second item (for binector or connector input only)
Data type of the signal source to be interconnected (binector-/connector output).
Parameters can have the following data types:
• Integer8 I8 8-bit integer number
• Integer16 I16 16-bit integer number
• Integer32 I32 32-bit integer number
• Unsigned8 U8 8 bits without sign
• Unsigned16 U16 16 bits without sign
• Unsigned32 U32 32 bits without sign
• FloatingPoint32 Float 32-bit floating point number
Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO output
parameter (signal source), the following combinations are possible when creating BICO
interconnections:

Table 2-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections

BICO input parameter

CI parameter BI parameter

BICO output parameter Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 /

Integer16 Integer32 FloatingPoint32 Binary

CO: Unsigned8 x x – –
CO: Unsigned16 x x – –
CO: Unsigned32 x x – –
CO: Integer16 x x r2050 –
CO: Integer32 x x r2060 –
CO: FloatingPoint32 x x x –
Legend: x : BICO interconnection permitted
–: BICO interconnection not permitted
rxxxx: BICO interconnection is only permitted for the specified CO parameters

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

16 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Table 2-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections, continued

BICO input parameter

CI parameter BI parameter

BICO output parameter Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 /

Integer16 Integer32 FloatingPoint32 Binary

BO: Unsigned8 – – – x
BO: Unsigned16 – – – x
BO: Unsigned32 – – – x
BO: Integer16 – – – x
BO: Integer32 – – – x
BO: FloatingPoint32 – – – –
Legend: x : BICO interconnection permitted
–: BICO interconnection not permitted
rxxxx: BICO interconnection is only permitted for the specified CO parameters

Can be changed
The "-" sign indicates that the parameter can be changed in any object state and that the
change will be effective immediately.
The information "C(x), T, U" ((x): optional) means that the parameter can be changed only in
the specified drive unit state and that the change will not take effect until the unit switches to
another state. This can be a single state or multiple states.
The following states are available:
• C(x) commissioning C: Commissioning
Drive commissioning is in progress (p0010 > 0).
Pulses cannot be enabled.
The parameter can only be changed in the following drive commissioning settings
(p0010 > 0):
• C: Can be changed for all settings p0010 > 0.
• C(x): Can only be changed for the settings p0010 = x.
A modified parameter value does not take effect until drive commissioning mode is
exited with p0010 = 0.
• U Operation U: Run
Pulses are enabled.
• T Ready T: Ready to run
The pulses are not enabled and the status "C(x)" is not active.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 17
2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Scaling
Specification of the reference variable with which a signal value is automatically converted for
a BICO interconnection.
The following reference variables are available:
• p2000 … p2007: Reference speed, reference voltage, etc.
• PERCENT: 1.0 = 100 %
• 4000H: 4000 hex = 100 % (wort) or 4000 0000 hex = 100 % (double word)
• p0514: specific normalization
Refer to the description for p0514[0…9] and p0515[0…19] to p0524[0…19]

Dyn. index (dynamic index)

For parameters with a dynamic index [0...n], the following information is specified here:
• Data set (if available).
• Parameter for the number of indices (n = number - 1).
The following information can be contained in this field:
• "CDS, p0170" (Command Data Set, CDS count)
Example:
p1070[0]  main setpoint [command data set 0]
p1070[1]  main setpoint [command data set 1], etc.
• "DDS, p0180" (Drive Data Set, DDS count)
• "EDS, p0140" (Encoder Data Set, EDS count)
• "MDS, p0130" (Motor Data Set, MDS count)
• "PDS, p0120" (Power unit Data Set, PDS count)
Data sets can only be created and deleted when p0010 = 15.

Note
Information on the data sets can be taken from the following references:
Operating Instructions SINAMICS G120 Frequency Converter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2
Control Units.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

18 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Unit group and unit selection

The standard unit of a parameter is specified in square brackets after the values for "Min",
"Max", and "Factory setting".
For parameters where the unit can be switched over, the specifications for "Unit group" and
"Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with which parameter
the unit can be changed over.
Example:
Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505
The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be changed over using p0505.
All the potential unit groups and possible unit selections are listed below.

Table 2-3 Unit group (p0100)

Unit group Unit selection for p0100 = Reference variable for %

0 1 2

7_4 Nm lbf ft Nm -
14_6 kW hp kW -
25_1 kg m2 lb ft2 kg m2 -
27_1 kg lb kg -
28_1 Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A -

Table 2-4 Unit group (p0505)

Unit group Unit selection for p0505 = Reference variable for %

1 2 3 4

2_1 Hz % Hz % p2000
3_1 1 rpm % 1 rpm % p2000
5_1 Vrms % Vrms % p2001
5_2 V % V % p2001
5_3 V % V % p2001
6_2 Arms % Arms % p2002
6_5 A % A % p2002
7_1 Nm % lbf ft % p2003
7_2 Nm Nm lbf ft lbf ft -
14_5 kW % hp % r2004
14_10 kW kW hp hp -
21_1 °C °C °F °F -
21_2 K K °F °F -
2 1/s2
39_1 1/s % % p2007

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 19
2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Table 2-5 Unit group (p0595)

Unit group Unit selection for p0595 = Reference variable for %

Value Unit

9_1 The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in p0595.

Function diagram
The parameter is included in this function diagram. The structure of the parameter function and
its relationship with other parameters is shown in the specified function diagram.

Parameter values
Min. Minimum value of the parameter [unit]
Max Maximum value of the parameter [unit]
Factory setting Value when delivered [unit]
In the case of a binector/connector input, the signal source of the
default BICO interconnection is specified. A non-indexed connector
output is assigned the index [0].
A different value may be displayed for certain parameters (e.g. p1800)
at the initial commissioning stage or when establishing the factory
settings.
Reason:
The setting of these parameters is determined by the operating
environment of the Control Unit (e.g. depending on converter type,
power unit).

Description
Explanation of the function of a parameter.

Values
Lists the possible values of a parameter.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

20 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Recommendation
Information about recommended settings.

Index
The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parameters.
The following applies to the values (Min, Max, Factory setting) of indexed adjustable
parameters:
• Min, Max:
The adjustment range and unit apply to all indices.
• Factory setting:
When all indices have the same factory setting, index 0 is specified with the unit to
represent all indices.
When the indices have different factory settings, they are all listed individually with the unit.

Bit field
For parameters with bit fields, the following information is provided about each bit:
• Bit number and signal name
• Meaning for signal states 0 and 1
• Function diagram (FP) (optional).
The signal is shown on this function diagram.

Dependency
Conditions that must be fulfilled in conjunction with this parameter. Also includes special effects
that can occur between this parameter and others.
Where necessary, "Refer to:" indicates the following information:
• List of other relevant parameters to be considered.
• List of faults and alarms to be considered.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 21
2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Safety guidelines
Important information that must be observed to avoid the risk of physical injury or material
damage.
Information that must be observed to avoid any problems.
Information that the user may find useful.

Danger The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this
manual, see "Legal information" (Page 4).

Warning The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this
manual, see "Legal information" (Page 4).

Caution The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this
manual, see "Legal information" (Page 4).

Notice The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this
manual, see "Legal information" (Page 4).

Note Information that the user may find useful.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

22 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

2.1.2 Number ranges of parameters

Note
The following number ranges represent an overview for all the parameters available for the
SINAMICS drive family.
The parameters for the product described in this List Manual are described in detail in "List of
parameters" (Page 26).

Parameters are grouped into the following number ranges:

Table 2-6 Number ranges for SINAMICS

Range Description

From To

0000 0099 Display and operation

0100 0199 Commissioning
0200 0299 Power section
0300 0399 Motor
0400 0499 Encoder
0500 0599 Technology and units, motor-specific data, probes
0600 0699 Thermal monitoring, maximum current, operating hours, motor data,
central probe
0700 0799 Control Unit terminals, measuring sockets
0800 0839 CDS, DDS data sets, motor changeover
0840 0879 Sequence control (e.g. signal source for ON/OFF1)
0880 0899 ESR, parking, control and status words
0900 0999 PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive
1000 1199 Setpoint channel (e.g. ramp-function generator)
1200 1299 Functions (e.g. motor holding brake)
1300 1399 U/f control
1400 1799 Closed-loop control
1800 1899 Gating unit
1900 1999 Power unit and motor identification
2000 2009 Reference values
2010 2099 Communication (fieldbus)
2100 2139 Faults and alarms
2140 2199 Signals and monitoring
2200 2359 Technology controller
2360 2399 Staging, hibernation
2500 2699 Position control (LR) and basic positioning (EPOS)
2700 2719 Reference values, display

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 23
2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Table 2-6 Number ranges for SINAMICS, continued

Range Description

From To

2720 2729 Load gearbox

2800 2819 Logic operations
2900 2930 Fixed values (e. g. percentage, torque)
3000 3099 Motor identification results
3100 3109 Real-time clock (RTC)
3110 3199 Faults and alarms
3200 3299 Signals and monitoring
3400 3659 Infeed closed-loop control
3660 3699 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), Braking Module internal
3700 3779 Advanced Positioning Control (APC)
3780 3819 Synchronization
3820 3849 Friction characteristic
3850 3899 Functions (e. g. long stator)
3900 3999 Management
4000 4599 Terminal Board, Terminal Module (e. g. TB30, TM31)
4600 4699 Sensor Module
4700 4799 Trace
4800 4849 Function generator
4950 4999 OA application
5000 5169 Spindle diagnostics
5200 5230 Current setpoint filter 5 ... 10 (r0108.21)
5400 5499 System droop control (e. g. shaft generator)
5500 5599 Dynamic grid support (solar)
5600 5614 PROFIenergy
5900 6999 SINAMICS GM/SM/GL/SL
7000 7499 Parallel connection of power units
7500 7599 SINAMICS SM120
7700 7729 External messages
7770 7789 NVRAM, system parameters
7800 7839 EEPROM read/write parameters
7840 8399 Internal system parameters
8400 8449 Real-time clock (RTC)
8500 8599 Data and macro management
8600 8799 CAN bus
8800 8899 Communication Board Ethernet (CBE), PROFIdrive

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

24 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.1 Overview of parameters

Table 2-6 Number ranges for SINAMICS, continued

Range Description

From To

8900 8999 Industrial Ethernet, PROFINET, CBE20

9000 9299 topology
9300 9399 Safety Integrated
9400 9499 Parameter consistency and storage
9500 9899 Safety Integrated
9900 9949 topology
9950 9999 Diagnostics, internal
10000 10199 Safety Integrated
11000 11299 Free technology controller 0, 1, 2
20000 20999 Free function blocks (FBLOCKS)
21000 25999 Drive Control Chart (DCC)
50000 53999 SINAMICS DC MASTER (closed-loop DC current control)
61000 61001 PROFINET

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 25
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

2.2 List of parameters

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng
Objects: CU240B-2, CU240B-2_DP, CU240E-2, CU240E-2_DP, CU240E-2 PN, CU240E-2_F, CU240E-2_PN_F, CU240E-2_DP_F

r0002 Drive operating display / Drv op_display

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 200 -
Description: Operating display for the drive.
Value: 0: Operation - everything enabled
10: Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142)
12: Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141)
13: Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140)
14: Operation - MotID, excit. running
15: Operation - open brake (p1215)
16: Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1"
17: Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
18: Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge
19: Operation - DC braking active (p1230, p1231)
21: Ready for operation - set "Operation enable" = "1" (p0852)
22: Ready for operation - de-magnetizing running (p0347)
31: Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840)
35: Switching-on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010)
41: Switching-on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840)
42: Switching-on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845)
43: Switching-on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849)
44: Switching-on inhibited - supply STO terminal w/ 24 V (hardware)
45: Switching-on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO
46: Switching-on inhibited - exit commissioning mode (p0010)
70: Initialization
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
Dependency: Refer to: r0046
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Note: OC: Operating condition
RFG: Ramp-function generator
COMM: Commissioning
MotID: Motor data identification

p0003 Access level / Acc_level

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C, U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
3 4 3
Description: Sets the access level to read and write parameters.
Value: 3: Expert
4: Service
Note: A higher set access level also includes the lower one.
Access level 3 (experts):
Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization).
Access level 4 (service):
For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

26 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt

CU240B-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800, 2818
Min Max Factory setting
0 49 1
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power unit commissioning
3: Motor commissioning
5: Technological application/units
15: Data sets
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
39: Only Siemens int
49: Only Siemens int
Dependency: Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: The drive can only be switched on outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically
reset to 0.
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have
been defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0.
p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 =
15).
p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt

PM230_STO Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM240 Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800, 2818
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0 95 1
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power unit commissioning
3: Motor commissioning
5: Technological application/units
15: Data sets
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
39: Only Siemens int
49: Only Siemens int
95: Safety Integrated commissioning
Dependency: Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 27
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The drive can only be switched on outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically
reset to 0.
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have
been defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0.
p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 =
15).
p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt

PM230 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800, 2818
CU240E-2 PN Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_F 0 49 1
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power unit commissioning
3: Motor commissioning
5: Technological application/units
15: Data sets
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
39: Only Siemens int
49: Only Siemens int
Dependency: Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: The drive can only be switched on outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically
reset to 0.
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have
been defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0.
p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 =
15).
p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!

p0014 Buffer memory mode / Buf mem mode

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Sets the mode for the buffer memory.
Value: 0: Save in a non-volatile fashion (RAM)
1: Buffer memory active (non-volatile)
2: Clear buffer memory

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

28 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: If p0014 = 1, changes in the same parameter, as well as in following parameters will not be copied to the buffer
memory:
Refer to: p0015, p0040, p0340, p0650, p0802, p0803, p0804, p0952, p0969, p0970, p0971, p0972, p1900, p1910,
p1960, p2111, p3900, p3981, p7759, p7761, p7762, p7763, p7764, p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768, p7769, p7775
Refer to: A01066, A01067
Notice: For p0014 = 1:
The following applies if a memory card is optionally inserted:
- the data in the buffer memory are not automatically written to the memory card.
- when switching off/switching on, a possibly valid parameter set is loaded from the memory card.
- remedy: manually save the parameters before switching off the Control Unit (e.g.. p0971 = 1).
For p0014 = 2:
- with this delete operation, entries in the buffer memory are lost and cannot be retrieved.
In general:
- after the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
For p0014 = 0:
Parameter changes are saved in the volatile memory (RAM).
Non-volatile storage from RAM to ROM is carried out in the following cases:
- p0971 = 1
- change from p0014 = 0 to 1
For p0014 = 1:
With this setting, alarm A01066 followed by alarm A01067 can occur if parameters are continually changed via a
fieldbus system.
Parameter changes are entered in the volatile memory (RAM) and also in the non-volatile buffer memory.
In the following cases, the entries in the buffer memory are transferred into the ROM and then the buffer memory is
cleared:
- p0971 = 1
- switch off/switch on the Control Unit
- change from p0014 = 1 to 0
For p0014 = 2:
The procedure to clear the entries in the buffer memory is initiated.
p0014 is automatically set to 0 after the entries have been cleared.

p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: C, C(1) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
0 999999 7
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.
Note: Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.

p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit

CU240B-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: C, C(1) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 12
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 29
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.
Note: Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.

r0018 Control Unit firmware version / CU FW version

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 -
Description: Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed / n_set smth

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5020, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the
interpolator).
Dependency: Refer to: r0060
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).

r0021 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display of the calculated and smoothed rotor speed.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are not included.
Dependency: Refer to: r0022, r0063
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063).

r0022 Speed actual value rpm smoothed / n_act rpm smooth

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display of the calculated and smoothed rotor speed.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are not included.
r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over.
Dependency: Refer to: r0021, r0063

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

30 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms

The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063).

r0024 Output frequency smoothed / f_outp smooth

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Display of the smoothed output frequency.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are included.
Dependency: Refer to: r0066
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).

r0025 CO: Output voltage smoothed / U_outp smooth

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6300, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0072
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: r0070
Notice: When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module a valid measured value is not supplied. In this
case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display
parameter.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0026 sets itself to the lower value of the pulsating DC link voltage.

r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8850,
8950
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0068

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 31
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).

r0028 Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8950
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: r0074
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

r0029 Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0076
Note: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

r0030 Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0078
Note: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030) and unsmoothed (r0078).

r0031 Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5730, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0080
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

32 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: r2004 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8750,
8850, 8950
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.
Dependency: Refer to: r0082
Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note: Power delivered at the motor shaft.
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).

r0033 Torque utilization smoothed / M_util smooth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit, scaled using
p2196.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for vector control. For U/f control r0033 = 0 %.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
For M_set total (r0079) > 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = M_set total
- Actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538)
For M_set total (r0079) <= 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = - M_set total
- Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539)
For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 %
For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %

r0034 CO: Motor utilization thermal / Mot_util therm

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8017
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the motor utilization from motor temperature model 1 (I2t) or 3.
For motor temperature model 1 (I2t) (p0612.0 = 1), the following applies:
For firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.12 = 0:
- r0034 = (motor model temperature - 40 K) / (p0605 - 40 K) * 100 %
From firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.12 = 1:
- r0034 = (motor model temperature - p0613) / (p0605 - p0613) * 100 %
For motor temperature model 3 (p0612.2 = 1), the following applies:
- r0034 = (motor model temperature - p5397) / (p5398 - p5397) * 100 %

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 33
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The thermal motor utilization is only determined when the motor temperature model 1 (I2t) or 3 is activated.
The following conditions are a prerequisite for additional information.
- a temperature sensor has not been parameterized (p0600, p0601).
- the current corresponds to the stall current (p0318).
- speed n > 1 [rpm].
For firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.12 = 0, the following applies:
- the temperature model operates with an ambient temperature of 20 °C.
A motor utilization of 100% is displayed (r0034 = 100 %) when the following conditions are permanently fulfilled:
- the ambient temperature is 40 °C (model 1: p0625 = 40 °C, model 3: p0613 = 40 °C).
From firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.12 = 1, the following applies:
- the ambient temperature can be adapted to the conditions using p0613.
Refer to: p0605, p0611, p0612, p0613, p0627, r0632
Refer to: F07011, A07012
Notice: After the drive is switched on, the system starts to determine the motor temperature with an assumed model value.
This means that the value for the motor utilization is only valid after a stabilization time.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
For r0034 = -200.0 %, the following applies:
The value is invalid (e.g. the motor temperature model is not activated or has been incorrectly parameterized).

r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Mot temp

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8016, 8017
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual temperature in the motor.
Note: For r0035 not equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is valid.
- a KTY/PT1000 temperature sensor is connected.
- the thermal model for the induction motor is activated (p0612 bit 1 = 1 and temperature sensor de-activated: p0600
= 0 or p0601 = 0).
For r0035 equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error).
- a PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected.
- the temperature sensor of the synchronous motor is de-activated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0).

r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8021
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation.
A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be
conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current
of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.).
If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed.
In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip.
Dependency: Refer to: p0290, p0294
Refer to: F30005

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

34 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8021
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Display and connector output for the temperature in the power unit.
Index: [0] = Inverter maximum value
[1] = Depletion layer maximum value
[2] = Rectifier maximum value
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Inverter 2
[7...10] = Reserved
[11] = Rectifier 1
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[14] = Depletion layer 2
[15] = Depletion layer 3
[16] = Depletion layer 4
[17] = Depletion layer 5
[18] = Depletion layer 6
[19] = Reserved
Notice: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier.
r0037[2, 3, 6, 11, 14...18] is only relevant for chassis power units.
In the case of a fault, the particular shutdown threshold depends on the power unit, and cannot be read out.

r0038 Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6799, 8850, 8950
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the smoothed actual power factor. This refers to the electrical power of the basic fundamental signals at the
converter output terminals.
Notice: For infeed units, the following applies:
For active powers < 25 % of the rated power, this does not provide any useful information.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.

r0039[0...2] CO: Energy display / Energy displ

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kWh] - [kWh] - [kWh]
Description: Displays the energy values at the output terminals of the power unit.
Index: [0] = Energy balance (sum)
[1] = Energy drawn
[2] = Energy fed back

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 35
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: p0040

Note: For index 0:
Difference between the energy drawn and energy that is fed back.

p0040 Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Setting to reset the display in r0039 and r0041.
Procedure:
Set p0040 = 0 --> 1
The displays are reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero.
Dependency: Refer to: r0039
Note: When this display is reset (p0040), then the process energy display (r0042) is also reset.

r0041 Energy consumption saved / Energy cons saved

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kWh] - [kWh] - [kWh]
Description: Displays the saved energy referred to 100 operating hours.
Dependency: Refer to: p0040
Note: This display is used for a fluid-flow machine.
The flow characteristic is entered into p3320 ... p3329.
For an operating time of below 100 hours, the display is interpolated up to 100 hours.

r0042[0...2] CO: Process energy display / Proc energy disp

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Wh] - [Wh] - [Wh]
Description: Display and connector output for the energy values at the output terminals of the power unit.
Index: [0] = Energy balance (sum)
[1] = Energy drawn
[2] = Energy fed back
Dependency: Refer to: p0043
Note: The signal can be displayed as process variable (scaling: 1 = 1 Wh).
This is enabled in p0043.
The display is also reset with p0040 = 1.
If an enable is present in r0043 when the Control Unit powers up, then the value from r0039 is transferred into r0042.
As r0039 serves as a reference signal for r0042, due to format reasons, the process energy display can only process
values of r0039 up to 2147483 kWh. r0039 should also be reset using this value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

36 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0043 BI: Enable energy usage display / Enab energy usage

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to enable/reset the process energy display in r0042.
BI: p0043 = 1 signal:
The process energy display is enabled in r0042.
Dependency: Refer to: r0042

p0045 Display values smoothing time constant / Disp_val T_smooth

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6714, 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values:
r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1].

r0046.0...31 CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2634
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being
commissioned.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 OFF1 enable missing Yes No 7954
01 OFF2 enable missing Yes No -
02 OFF3 enable missing Yes No -
03 Operation enable missing Yes No -
04 DC braking enable missing Yes No -
08 Safety enable missing Yes No -
10 Ramp-function generator enable missing Yes No -
11 Ramp-function generator start missing Yes No -
12 Setpoint enable missing Yes No -
16 OFF1 enable internal missing Yes No -
17 OFF2 enable internal missing Yes No -
18 OFF3 enable internal missing Yes No -
19 Pulse enable internal missing Yes No -
20 DC braking internal enable missing Yes No -
21 Power unit enable missing Yes No -
26 Drive inactive or not operational Yes No -
27 De-magnetizing not completed Yes No -
28 Brake open missing Yes No -
30 Speed controller inhibited Yes No -
31 Jog setpoint active Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r0002

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 37
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a "switching-on inhibited".
Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
Bit 02 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal.
Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal.
Bit 04 =1 (DC brake active) when:
- the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal.
Bit 08 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- safety functions have been enabled and STO is active.
- STO is selected via onboard terminals or PROFIsafe.
- a safety-relevant signal is present with STOP A response.
- the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function is selected.
Bit 10 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1140 is a 0 signal.
Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because:
- the signal source in p1141 is a 0 signal.
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056)
have a 1 signal.
Bit 12 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1142 is a 0 signal.
Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the
"switching-on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- commissioning mode is selected (p0010 > 0).
- there is an OFF2 fault response.
- the drive is not operational.
Bit 18 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:
- sequence control does not have a finished message.
Bit 20 = 1 (internal DC brake active), if:
- the drive is not in the state "Operation" or in "OFF1/3".
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Bit 21 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the power unit does not issue an enable signal (e.g. because DC link voltage is too low).
- the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired.
- the hibernation mode is active.
Bit 26 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the drive is not operational.
Bit 27 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- de-magnetization not completed.
Bit 28 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened.
Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present:
- the pole position identification is active.
- motor data identification is active (only certain steps).
Bit 31 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

38 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0047 Motor data identification and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 300 -
Description: Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (stationary measurement) and the speed controller
optimization (rotating measurement).
Value: 0: No measurement
115: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2)
120: Speed controller optimization (vibration test)
140: Calculate speed controller setting
150: Measurement moment of inertia
170: Measurement magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
195: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1)
200: Rotating measurement selected
220: identification leakage inductance
230: Identification rotor time constant
240: Identification stator inductance
250: Identification stator inductance LQLD
260: Identification circuit
270: Identification stator resistance
290: Identification valve lockout time
300: Stationary measurement selected

r0050.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8560
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 CDS eff bit 0 ON OFF -
01 CDS eff bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: p0810, p0811, r0836
Note: The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836.

r0051.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8565
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DDS eff bit 0 ON OFF -
01 DDS eff bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: p0820, p0821, r0837
Note: When selecting the motor data identification routine and the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is
suppressed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 39
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Status word 1 / ZSW 1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for status word 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ready for switching on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No -
04 Coast down active (OFF2) No Yes -
05 Quick Stop active (OFF3) No Yes -
06 Switching-on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No -
08 Deviation setpoint/actual speed No Yes -
09 Control request Yes No -
10 Maximum speed reached Yes No -
11 I, M, P limit reached No Yes -
12 Motor holding brake open Yes No -
13 Alarm motor overtemperature No Yes -
14 Motor rotates forwards Yes No -
15 Alarm drive converter overload No Yes -
Notice: p2080 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.
Note: For bit 03:
This signal is inverted if it is interconnected to a digital output.
For r0052:
The status bits have the following sources:
Bit 00: r0899 Bit 0
Bit 01: r0899 Bit 1
Bit 02: r0899 Bit 2
Bit 03: r2139 Bit 3 (or r1214.10 for p1210 > 0)
Bit 04: r0899 Bit 4
Bit 05: r0899 Bit 5
Bit 06: r0899 Bit 6
Bit 07: r2139 Bit 7
Bit 08: r2197 Bit 7
Bit 09: r0899 Bit 7
Bit 10: r2197 Bit 6
Bit 11: r0056 Bit 13 (negated)
Bit 12: r0899 Bit 12
Bit 13: r2135 Bit 14 (negated)
Bit 14: r2197 Bit 3
Bit 15: r2135 Bit 15 (negated)

r0053.0...11 CO/BO: Status word 2 / ZSW 2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word 2.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DC braking active Yes No -
01 |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

40 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

02 |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) Yes No -

03 I_act >= p2170 Yes No -
04 |n_act| > p2155 Yes No -
05 |n_act| <= p2155 Yes No -
06 |n_act| >= r1119 (n_set) Yes No -
07 Vdc <= p2172 Yes No -
08 Vdc > p2172 Yes No -
09 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No -
10 Technology controller output at the lower Yes No -
limit
11 Technology controller output at the upper Yes No -
limit
Notice: p2081 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.
Note: The following status bits are displayed in r0053:
Bit 00: r1239 Bit 8
Bit 01: r2197 Bit 5 (negated)
Bit 02: r2197 Bit 0 (negated)
Bit 03: r2197 Bit 8
Bit 04: r2197 Bit 2
Bit 05: r2197 Bit 1
Bit 06: r2197 Bit 4
Bit 07: r2197 Bit 9
Bit 08: r2197 Bit 10
Bit 09: r1199 Bit 2 (negated)
Bit 10: r2349 Bit 10
Bit 11: r2349 Bit 11

r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Control word 1 / STW 1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays control word 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 No Yes -
02 OC / OFF3 No Yes -
03 Operation enable Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator enable Yes No -
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Speed setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030
10 Master control by PLC Yes No -
11 Direction reversal (setpoint) Yes No -
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No -
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No -
15 CDS bit 0 Yes No -
Note: The following control bits are displayed in r0054:
Bit 00: r0898 Bit 0
Bit 01: r0898 Bit 1
Bit 02: r0898 Bit 2
Bit 03: r0898 Bit 3
Bit 04: r0898 Bit 4
Bit 05: r0898 Bit 5
Bit 06: r0898 Bit 6

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 41
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit 07: r2138 Bit 7

Bit 08: r0898 Bit 8
Bit 09: r0898 Bit 9
Bit 10: r0898 Bit 10
Bit 11: r1198 Bit 11
Bit 13: r1198 Bit 13
Bit 14: r1198 Bit 14
Bit 15: r0836 Bit 0

r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Supplementary control word / Suppl STW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2513
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for supplementary control word.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed setp bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed setp bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed setp bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed setp bit 3 Yes No -
04 DDS select. bit 0 Yes No -
05 DDS select. bit 1 Yes No -
08 Technology controller enable Yes No -
09 DC braking enable Yes No -
11 Droop enable Yes No -
12 Torque control active Yes No -
13 External fault 1 (F07860) No Yes -
15 CDS bit 1 Yes No -
Note: CDS: Command Data Set
DDS: Drive Data Set
The following control bits are displayed in r0055:
Bit 00: r1198.0
Bit 01: r1198.1
Bit 02: r1198.2
Bit 03: r1198.3
Bit 04: r0837.0
Bit 05: r0837.1
Bit 08: r2349.0 (negated)
Bit 09: r1239.11
Bit 11: r1406.11
Bit 12: r1406.12
Bit 13: r2138.13 (negated)
Bit 15: r0836.1

r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM230_STO Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2526
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the closed-loop control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Initialization completed Yes No -
01 De-magnetizing completed Yes No -
02 Pulse enable available Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

42 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

03 Soft starting present Yes No -

04 Magnetizing completed Yes No -
05 Voltage boost when starting Active Inactive 6301
06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6301
07 Frequency negative Yes No -
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714
10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310
11 Frequency limit active Yes No -
12 Current limiting controller voltage output Yes No -
active
13 Current/torque limiting Active Inactive 6060
14 Vdc_max controller active Yes No 6220,
6320
15 Vdc_min controller active Yes No 6220,
6320

r0056.0...13 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl

PM250 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2526
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the closed-loop control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Initialization completed Yes No -
01 De-magnetizing completed Yes No -
02 Pulse enable available Yes No -
03 Soft starting present Yes No -
04 Magnetizing completed Yes No -
05 Voltage boost when starting Active Inactive 6301
06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6301
07 Frequency negative Yes No -
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714
10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310
11 Frequency limit active Yes No -
12 Current limiting controller voltage output Yes No -
active
13 Current/torque limiting Active Inactive 6060

r0060 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 2701, 6030, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the interpolator).
Dependency: Refer to: r0020
Note: The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).

r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6030, 6031
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 43
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0063[0...2] CO: Speed actual value / n_act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the speed actual value.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are not included.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip (unsmoothed)
Dependency: Refer to: r0021, r0022
Note: The speed actual value r0063[0] – smoothed with p0045 – is additionally displayed in r0063[1]. r0063[1] can be used
as process variable for the appropriate smoothing time constant p0045.
The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual
value (r0063[0]) in the steady-state.
For U/f control, the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063[2] even if
slip compensation is de-activated.

r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl sys dev

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller.

r0065 Slip frequency / f_Slip

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6310, 6700, 6727,
6730, 6732
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM).

r0066 CO: Output frequency / f_outp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6300, 6700, 6730,
6731, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Display and connector output for the unsmoothed output frequency of the power unit.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (induction motor) are included.
Dependency: Refer to: r0024
Note: The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

44 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0067 CO: Output current maximum / I_outp max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6300, 6640, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the maximum output current of the power unit.
Dependency: The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal
protection.
Refer to: p0290, p0640

r0068[0...1] CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6300, 6714, 6799,
7017, 8017, 8021, 8022
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays actual absolute current.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: Refer to: r0027
Notice: The value is updated with the current controller sampling time.
Note: Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)
The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0068[0]).

r0069[0...8] CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act val

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6730, 6731
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Display and connector output for the measured actual phase currents as peak value.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
[3] = Phase U offset
[4] = Phase V offset
[5] = Phase W offset
[6] = Total U, V, W
[7] = Alpha component
[8] = Beta component
Note: In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed.
The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.

r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6723, 6724, 6730,
6731, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Display and connector output for the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 45
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: r0026

Notice: When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module a valid measured value is not supplied. In this
case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display
parameter.
Note: The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).

r0071 Maximum output voltage / U_output max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6301, 6640, 6700,
6722, 6723, 6724, 6725, 6727
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the maximum output voltage.
Dependency: The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth
(p1803).
Note: As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link
voltage.

r0072 CO: Output voltage / U_output

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5700, 6730, 6731,
6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual output voltage of the power unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0025
Note: The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

r0073 Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: p1803

r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Mod_depth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6730, 6731,
6799, 8940, 8950
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: r0028
Note: For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol.
Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol.
The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 x r0070) / (sqrt(2) x 100 %).
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

46 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0075 CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6700, 6714, 6725
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.

r0076 CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5700, 5714, 5730,
6700, 6714, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the field-generating current actual value (Id_act).
Dependency: Refer to: r0029
Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

r0077 CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6700, 6710
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque-generating current setpoint.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.

r0078 CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6310, 6700, 6714,
6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act).
Dependency: Refer to: r0030
Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).

r0079 CO: Torque setpoint / M_set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6060, 6710
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 47
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0080[0...1] CO: Torque actual value / M_act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6714, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for actual torque value.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: r0031, p0045
Note: The value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0080[0]).

r0081 CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque referred to the torque limit.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for vector control. For U/f control r0081 = 0 %.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: r0033
Note: The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
The torque utilization is obtained from the required torque referred to the torque limit as follows:
- Positive torque: r0081 = (r0079 / r1538) * 100 %
- Negative torque: r0081 = (-r0079 / -r1539) * 100 %

r0082[0...2] CO: Active power actual value / P_act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: r2004 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6714, 6799
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the instantaneous active power.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Electric power
Dependency: Refer to: r0032
Note: The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0082[0]).

r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5722
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the flux setpoint.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

48 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0084[0...1] CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6730, 6731
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the flux actual value.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed

r0087 CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual active power factor.
This value refers to the electrical power of the basic fundamental signals at the output terminals of the converter.

r0089[0...2] Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6719
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the actual phase voltage.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Note: The values are determined from the transistor switch-on duration.

r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2005 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the transformation angle.
Dependency: Refer to: r1778
Note: The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle.

p0096 Application class / Appl_class

PM240 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6019
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Setting the commissioning and control view for various application classes.
Value: 0: Expert
1: Standard Drive Control (SDC)
2: Dynamic Drive Control (DDC)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 49
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The parameter is preset when commissioning the system for the first time and for the factory setting, depending on
the power unit that is connected.
Depending on the setting, the ability to see control parameters is restricted depending on the particular application.
The following applies for p0096 > 0:
The motor data identification routine is preset (p1900 = 12). After the motor data identification, the system
immediately goes into operation.
The following applies for p0096 = 1:
The motor type (p0300) synchronous or reluctance motor is not possible.
Note: When changing p0096 to 1 or 2, when completing commissioning, fast parameterization should be executed (p3900
> 0).
Depending on the setting, after quick commissioning and/or automatic parameterization, the procedure for motor
data identification as well as the setting of the operating mode and parameterization of the closed-loop control must
be appropriately adapted.

p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power, p0307) are expressed in [kW]
or [hp].
Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
For p0100 = 0, 2, the following applies: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized.
For p0100 = 1, the following applies: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized.
Value: 0: IEC-Motor (50 Hz, SI units)
1: NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units)
2: NEMA motor (60 Hz, SI units)
Dependency: If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made.
The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307,
r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1969).
Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323,
p0335, r0337, p1800
Note: The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).

p0124[0...n] CU detection via LED / CU detection LED

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: PDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Identification of the Control Unit using an LED.
Note: While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Control Unit.

p0133[0...n] Motor configuration / Motor config

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Configuration of the motor when commissioning the motor.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor connection type Delta Star -
01 Motor 87 Hz operation Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

50 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: For standard induction motors (p0301 > 10000), bit 0 is automatically pre-assigned the connection type of the
selected data set.
For p0100 > 0 (60 Hz rated motor frequency), it is not possible to select bit 1.
Refer to: p0304, p0305, p1082
Note: For bit 00:
When changing the bits, the rated motor voltage p0304 and the rated motor current p0305 are automatically
converted to the selected connection type (star/delta).
For bit 01:
87 Hz operation is only possible in the delta connection type. When selected, the maximum speed p1082 is
automatically pre-assigned for a maximum output frequency of 87 Hz.

p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C(15) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8560
Min Max Factory setting
2 4 2
Description: Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS).
Dependency: Refer to: p0010, r3996
Notice: When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.

p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C(15) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8565
Min Max Factory setting
1 4 1
Description: Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS).
Dependency: Refer to: p0010, r3996
Notice: When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

r0197[0...1] Bootloader version / Bootloader vers

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the bootloader version.
Index 0:
Displays the bootloader version.
Index 1:
Displays the bootloader version 3 (for CU320-2 and CU310-2)
Value 0 means that boot loader 3 is not available.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 51
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0198[0...2] BIOS/EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version.
r0198[0]: BIOS version
r0198[1]: EEPROM data version EEPROM 0
r0198[2]: EEPROM data version EEPROM 1
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0197
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: PDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the unique code number of the power unit.
Note: r0200 = 0: No power unit data found

p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(2) Scaling: - Dyn. index: PDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used.
When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201.
Note: The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time.
The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers are
identical (p0010 = 2).
When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted.

r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: PDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
2 400 -
Description: Displays the type of power unit found.
Value: 2: MICROMASTER 440
3: MICROMASTER 411
4: MICROMASTER 410
5: MICROMASTER 436
6: MICROMASTER 440 PX
7: MICROMASTER 430
100: SINAMICS S
101: SINAMICS S (value)
102: SINAMICS S (combi)
103: SINAMICS S120M (distributed)
112: PM220 (SINAMICS G120)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

52 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

113: PM230 (SINAMICS G120)

114: PM240 (SINAMICS G120)
115: PM250 (SINAMICS G120 / S120)
116: PM260 (SINAMICS G120)
118: SINAMICS G120 Px
120: PM340 (SINAMICS S120)
126: SINAMICS ET200PRO
130: PM250D (SINAMICS G120D)
133: SINAMICS G120C
135: SINAMICS PMV40
136: SINAMICS PMV60
137: SINAMICS PMV80
138: SINAMICS G110M
150: SINAMICS G
151: PM330 (SINAMICS G120)
200: SINAMICS GM
250: SINAMICS SM
260: SINAMICS MC
300: SINAMICS GL
350: SINAMICS SL
400: SINAMICS DCM
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.

r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: PDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 RFI filter available Yes No -
07 F3E regenerative feedback into the line Yes No -
supply
08 Internal Braking Module Yes No -
12 Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported No Yes -
13 Safety Integrated supported Yes No -
14 Internal LC output filter Yes No -
15 Line voltage 1-phase 3-phase -

p0205 Power unit application / PU application

PM230 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: C(1, 2) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
Description: The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and
after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: r3996
Notice: The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters (p0305 ... p0311), the technological application (p0500)
and the control mode (p1300) are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no
influence when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 53
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0205 Power unit application / PU application

PM240 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1, 2) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 7 0
Description: The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and
after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
6: S1 duty cycle (for internal use)
7: S6 duty cycle (for internal use)
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: r3996
Notice: The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters (p0305 ... p0311), the technological application (p0500)
and the control mode (p1300) are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no
influence when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.

p0205 Power unit application / PU application

PM250 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM260 Can be changed: C(1, 2) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and
after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: r3996
Notice: The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters (p0305 ... p0311), the technological application (p0500)
and the control mode (p1300) are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no
influence when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.

r0206[0...4] Rated power unit power / PU P_rated

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rated value
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

54 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
Refer to: p0100, p0205

r0207[0...4] Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8021
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rated value
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205

r0208 Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU U_rated

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit.
r0208 = 400: 380 - 480 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 500: 500 - 600 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 690: 660 - 690 V +/-10 %

r0209[0...4] Power unit maximum current / PU I_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8750, 8850, 8950
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
Index: [0] = Catalog
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205

p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / U_connect

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(2), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [V] 63000 [V] 400 [V]
Description: Sets the drive unit supply voltage (rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage).
Dependency: Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0.
The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller (r1242, r1282) are then directly determined using p0210.
Notice: If, in the switched-off state (pulse inhibit), the supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may
be automatically de-activated in some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating the next time the system is
switched on. In this case, an appropriate alarm A07401 is output.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 55
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage:
U_rated = 230 V:
- p0210 = 200 ... 240 V
U_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V
U_rated = 690 V:
- p0210 = 660 ... 690 V

p0219 Braking resistor braking power / R_brake P_brake

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 2), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kW] 20000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the braking power of the connected braking resistor.
Dependency: Refer to: p1127, p1240, p1280, p1531
Note: When setting a value for the braking power, the following calculations are made:
- p1240, p1280: Vdc_max control is de-activated.
- p1531 = - p0219: the power limit when generating is set (limited to - p1530).
- the minimum ramp-down time is calculated (p1127) as a function of p0341, p0342 and p1082 (not for vector control
with speed encoder).
If the parameter is reset again to zero, then the Vdc_max controller is reactivated and the power limit as well as the
ramp-down time are recalculated.

p0230 Drive filter type motor side / Drv filt type mot
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1, 2) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0
Description: Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.
Value: 0: No filter
1: Motor reactor
2: dv/dt filter
3: Sine-wave filter Siemens
4: Sine-wave filter third-party
Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230:
p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
p0230 = 3:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

56 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0230 = 4:
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user must
check whether they are permitted.
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note: The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.
For sine-wave filters, the test pulse evaluation to detect short-circuits is always de-activated.
If a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the power unit.
p0230 = 1:
Power units with output reactor are limited to output frequencies of 150 Hz.
p0230 = 3:
Power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 200 Hz.

r0231[0...1] Power cable length maximum / Cable length max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [m] - [m] - [m]
Description: Displays the maximum permissible cable lengths between the drive unit and motor.
Index: [0] = Unshielded
[1] = Shielded
Note: The display value is used to provide information for service and maintenance.

p0233 Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(2), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mH] 1000.000 [mH] 0.000 [mH]
Description: Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note: When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined
SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside
the commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out.
The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit has an internal sine-wave filter.

p0234 Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(2), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [µF] 1000.000 [µF] 0.000 [µF]
Description: Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 57
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined
SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside
the commissioning phase (p0010 = 0).
The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit has an internal sine-wave filter.

r0238 Internal power unit resistance / PU R internal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance).

p0287[0...1] Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] [0] 6.0 [%]
[1] 16.0 [%]
Description: Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring.
The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum current of the power unit (r0209).
Index: [0] = Threshold at which precharging starts
[1] = Threshold at which precharging stops
Dependency: Refer to: p1901
Refer to: F30021
Note: This parameter is only relevant for chassis power units.

r0289 CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors.

p0290 Power unit overload response / PU overld response

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8021
Min Max Factory setting
0 13 2
Description: Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.
The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heat sink temperature (r0037[0]).
- chip temperature (r0037[1]).
- power unit overload I2t (r0036).
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed or torque control) or the output frequency (for
U/f control) indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller).
- reduce the pulse frequency.
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

58 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: Reduce output current or output frequency

1: No reduction shutdown when overload threshold is reached
2: Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t)
3: Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
12: I_output or f_output and automatic pulse frequency reduction
13: Automatic pulse frequency reduction
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without
pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
For a thermal power unit overload, an appropriate alarm or fault is output, and r2135.15 or r2135.13 set.
Refer to: r0036, r0037, p0230, r2135
Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805
Notice: If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut
down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
Note: The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with
variable torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden
speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed through.
For p0290 = 2, 3, 12, 13, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the response "Reduce pulse
frequency".
When the motor data identification routine is selected, p0290 cannot be changed.
For short-circuit/ground fault detection, when the test pulse evaluation is active via p1901 "Test pulse evaluation
configuration", the pulse frequency at the instant of switch on is briefly reduced.

p0292[0...1] Power unit temperature alarm threshold / PU T_alrm thresh

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [°C] 25 [°C] [0] 5 [°C]
[1] 15 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for power unit overtemperatures. The value is set as a difference to the tripping (shutdown)
temperature.
Drive:
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Infeed:
When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.
Index: [0] = Heat sink temperature
[1] = Power semiconductor (chip) temperature
Dependency: Refer to: r0037, p0290
Refer to: A05000

p0294 Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8021
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 95.0 [%]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload.
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Dependency: Refer to: r0036, p0290
Refer to: A07805
Note: The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 59
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0295 Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 600 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled.
Note: - Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the excessively
high heat sink temperature).
- For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is active.
- for a PM230 power unit, sizes D - F the parameter is ineffective.

r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc U_lower_thresh

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Threshold to detect a DC link undervoltage.
If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the drive unit is tripped due to a DC link undervoltage condition.
Dependency: Refer to: F30003

r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc U_upper_thresh

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8750, 8760, 8850,
8864, 8950, 8964
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Threshold to detect a DC link overvoltage.
If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage.
Dependency: Refer to: F30002

p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0 101 0
Description: Selecting the motor type.
The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor
belonging to a motor list:
1 = induction motor
2 = synchronous motor
xx = motor without code number
xxx = motor with code number
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics
and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/IOP).
The following applies for values < 100:
Motor data must be manually entered.
The following applies for values >= 100:
Motor data are automatically loaded from an internal list.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

60 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: No motor
1: Induction motor
2: Synchronous motor
10: 1LE1 induction motor (not a code number)
13: 1LG6 induction motor (not a code number)
17: 1LA7 induction motor (not a code number)
19: 1LA9 induction motor (not a code number)
100: 1LE1 induction motor
101: 1PC1 induction motor
Dependency: When selecting a motor type from the 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627, and p0628 of the thermal
motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Caution: If a motor is selected, which is not contained in the motor lists (p0300 < 100), then the motor code number must be
reset (p0301 = 0), if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list.

Notice: If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters
that are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor
type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 1 for p0301 = 1xxxx). Write protection is
automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
The motor type of a catalog motor corresponds to the upper three digits of the code number or the following
assignment (if the particular motor type is listed):
Type/code number ranges
100 / 100xx, 110xx, 120xx, 130xx, 140xx, 150xx
Note: Once the Control Unit has been switched on for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the motor type is pre-configured to induction motor (p0300 = 1).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.

p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0 277 0
Description: Selecting the motor type.
The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor
belonging to a motor list:
1 = induction motor
2 = synchronous motor
xx = motor without code number
xxx = motor with code number
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics
and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/IOP).
The following applies for values < 100:
Motor data must be manually entered.
The following applies for values >= 100:
Motor data are automatically loaded from an internal list.
Value: 0: No motor
1: Induction motor
2: Synchronous motor
10: 1LE1 induction motor (not a code number)
13: 1LG6 induction motor (not a code number)
17: 1LA7 induction motor (not a code number)
19: 1LA9 induction motor (not a code number)
100: 1LE1 induction motor
101: 1PC1 induction motor
108: 1PH8 induction motor
271: 1FG1 synchronous geared motor without encoder
277: 1FK7 synchronous motor without encoder

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 61
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: When selecting p0300 = 10 ... 19, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627, and p0628 of the thermal motor model are pre-
assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
For p0096 = 1 (Standard Drive Control) synchronous motor types cannot be selected.
Caution: If a motor is selected, which is not contained in the motor lists (p0300 < 100), then the motor code number must be
reset (p0301 = 0), if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list.

Notice: If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters
that are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor
type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 1 for p0301 = 1xxxx). Write protection is
automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
The motor type of a catalog motor corresponds to the upper three digits of the code number or the following
assignment (if the particular motor type is listed):
Type/code number ranges
100 / 100xx, 110xx, 120xx, 130xx, 140xx, 150xx
108 / 108xx, 118xx, 128xx, 138xx, 148xx, 158xx
271 / 271xx, 281xx
277 / 277xx, 287xx, 297xx
Note: Once the Control Unit has been switched on for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the motor type is pre-configured to induction motor (p0300 = 1).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.

p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel

PM250 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM260 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0 277 0
Description: Selecting the motor type.
The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor
belonging to a motor list:
1 = induction motor
2 = synchronous motor
xx = motor without code number
xxx = motor with code number
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics
and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/IOP).
The following applies for values < 100:
Motor data must be manually entered.
The following applies for values >= 100:
Motor data are automatically loaded from an internal list.
Value: 0: No motor
1: Induction motor
2: Synchronous motor
10: 1LE1 induction motor (not a code number)
13: 1LG6 induction motor (not a code number)
17: 1LA7 induction motor (not a code number)
19: 1LA9 induction motor (not a code number)
100: 1LE1 induction motor
101: 1PC1 induction motor
271: 1FG1 synchronous geared motor without encoder
277: 1FK7 synchronous motor without encoder
Dependency: When selecting a motor type from the 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627, and p0628 of the thermal
motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Caution: If a motor is selected, which is not contained in the motor lists (p0300 < 100), then the motor code number must be
reset (p0301 = 0), if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

62 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters
that are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor
type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 1 for p0301 = 1xxxx). Write protection is
automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
The motor type of a catalog motor corresponds to the upper three digits of the code number or the following
assignment (if the particular motor type is listed):
Type/code number ranges
100 / 100xx, 110xx, 120xx, 130xx, 140xx, 150xx
271 / 271xx, 281xx
277 / 277xx, 287xx, 297xx
Note: Once the Control Unit has been switched on for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the motor type is pre-configured to induction motor (p0300 = 1).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.

p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list.
When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned
from the internally available parameter lists.
Dependency: Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300.
Refer to: p0300
Note: The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300.
When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is
selected.
If a change is made to a non-catalog motor, then the motor code number should be reset (p0301 = 0).

p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
0 [Vrms] 20000 [Vrms] 0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate).
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.

p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the rated motor current (rating plate).
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 63
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.

p0306[0...n] Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 50 1
Description: Sets the number (count) of motors that can be operated in parallel using one motor data set.
Depending on the motor number entered, internally an equivalent motor is calculated.
The following should be observed in motors connected in parallel:
Rating plate data should only be entered for one motor: p0305, p0307
The following parameters are also only valid for one motor: p0320, p0341, p0344, p0350 ... p0361
All other motor parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333).
Recommendation: For motors connected in parallel, external thermal protection should be provided for each individual motor.
Dependency: Refer to: r0331, r0370, r0373, r0374, r0376, r0377, r0382
Caution: The motors to be connected in parallel must be of the same type and size (same order no. (MLFB)).
The mounting regulations when connecting motors in parallel must be carefully maintained!
The number of motors set must correspond to the number of motors that are actually connected in parallel.
After changing p0306, it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted (e.g. using automatic calculation with
p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0).
For induction motors that are connected in parallel, but which are not mechanically coupled with one another, then
the following applies:
- an individual motor must not be loaded beyond its stall point.
Notice: If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is appropriately pre-
assigned.
Note: Only operation with U/f characteristic makes sense if more than 10 identical motors are connected in parallel.

p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the rated motor power (rating plate).
Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
NEMA drives (p0100 = 2): Unit kW
Refer to: p0100
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.

p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos phi rated

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1.000 0.000
Description: Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

64 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: This parameter is only available for p0100 = 0, 2.

Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.

p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 99.9 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only visible for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1, 2).
Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.

p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency: The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically re-calculated when the parameter is changed (together with
p0311), if p0314 = 0.
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz.
Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. The pre-assignment has been completed if the status display
r3996 returns to zero.
Note: Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.

p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate).
For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330.
It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for U/f
control.
Dependency: If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is re-calculated automatically.
Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0311 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. The pre-assignment has been completed if the status display
r3996 returns to zero.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 65
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.

p0312[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the rated motor torque (rating plate).
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.

r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5300
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations.
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.
Dependency: For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313.
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated
frequency (p0310) and rated speed (p0311).
Refer to: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314
Note: For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency is
zero.

p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Sets the motor pole pair number.
p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
p0314 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.
Dependency: For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated
speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313.
Notice: If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly.
For induction motors, it is only necessary to enter the value if the rated motor slip is so high that the pole pair number
r0313, obtained when making the calculation based on the rated frequency and rated speed, is too low.

p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 28_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm/A] 400.00 [Nm/A] 0.00 [Nm/A]
Description: Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

66 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0316 = 0:
The torque constant is calculated from the motor data.
p0316 > 0:
The selected value is used as torque constant.
Dependency: Refer to: r0334
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).

p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: The parameter has no influence on the closed-loop control.
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.

p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Arms] 5000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
Description: Induction motors:
Sets the rated motor magnetizing current.
For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.
Synchronous motors:
Sets the rated motor short-circuit current.
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The magnetizing current p0320 for induction motors is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0),
then the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant.

p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum motor speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0322 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly.
Note: The parameter has no significance for a value of p0322 = 0.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 67
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 20000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. de-magnetizing current for synchronous motors).
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly.
Note: The parameter has no effect for induction motors.
The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is
entered into p0640.

p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Arms] 10000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine.
The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329.
The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987
Refer to: F07969
Notice: When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned.
p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3.
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events:
- For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3).
- for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).

p0326[0...n] Motor stall torque correction factor / Mot M_stall_corr

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
5 [%] 300 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the correction factor for the stall torque/force at a 600 V DC link voltage.
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6721
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°] 135.0 [°] 90.0 [°]
Description: Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque.
The load angle is measured at the rated motor current.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

68 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [mH] 1000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]
Description: Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.

p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0000 [Arms] 10000.0000 [Arms] 0.0000 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current for the pole position identification routine (p1980 = 1).
For a two-stage technique (p1980 = 4), the current is set here for the 2nd phase.
The current of the 1st phase is set in p0325.
Dependency: If a maximum current (p0323) was not parameterized, then p0329 is limited to the rated motor current.
If p0329 is too small in order to determine the pole position (for p1980 = 1), then p0323 must be first parameterized
and significantly greater than p0329.
Refer to: p0325, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987
Refer to: F07969
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.

r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the rated motor slip.
Dependency: The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs.
Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 69
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Induction motor:
Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320.
For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320.
Dependency: If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.

r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos phi rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the rated power factor for induction motors.
For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0):
For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed.
For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1, 2):
For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.
Dependency: If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 7_4 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the rated motor torque.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft
Note: For induction motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311.
For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328.

r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 28_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]
Description: Displays the torque constant of the synchronous motor used.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm / A
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft / A
Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 is calculated from p0305, p0307 and p0311.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

70 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Mot cool type

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1, 3), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 128 0
Description: Sets the motor cooling system used.
Value: 0: Natural ventilation
1: Forced cooling
2: Liquid cooling
128: No fan
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model.
1LA7 motors, frame size 56 are operated without fan.

r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the rated EMF of the motor.
Note: EMF: Electromotive force

p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation motor/control parameters / Calc auto par

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(3), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 0
Description: Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and U/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the
rating plate data.
Value: 0: No calculation
1: Complete calculation
2: Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters
3: Calculation of closed-loop control parameters
4: Calculation of controller parameters
5: Calculation of technological limits and threshold values
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
The following parameters are influenced using p0340:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341, p0342, p0344, p0612, p0640, p1082, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1611, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828
... p1832, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p3927, p3928
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350, p0354 ... p0360
--> p0625 (matching p0350), p0626 ... p0628
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0346, p0347, p0622, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1616, p1755, p1756, p2178

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 71
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0340 = 4:
--> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1461, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472,
p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740, p1756, p1764, p1767, p1780, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1574, p1750, p1759, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2148, p2150,
p2157, p2159, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2170, p2175, p2177, p2179, p2194
Note: p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5.
p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.

p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: 6020, 6030, 6031
Min Max Factory setting
0.000000 [kgm²] 100000.000000 [kgm²] 0.000000 [kgm²]
Description: Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load).
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor.
Refer to: p0342, r0345
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.

p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6030, 6031
Min Max Factory setting
1.000 10000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of inertia/mass
(no load).
Dependency: This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector
drive.
Refer to: p0341, r0345, p1498
Note: The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.

r0343[0...n] Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the identified rated motor current.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

72 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 27_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [kg] 50000.0 [kg] 0.0 [kg]
Description: Sets the motor weight.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor.
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [s] - [s] - [s]
Description: Displays the rated motor starting time.
This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor rated speed and the acceleration with
motor rated torque (r0333).
Dependency: Refer to: r0313, r0333, p0341, p0342

p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor.
This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction
motor is magnetized during this time.
Caution: If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can stall
(refer to the note).

Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.

For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this
can result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while
building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant
(r0386). Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses have
been enabled.

p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the de-magnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled.
The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 73
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.

For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate de-magnetizing of the induction motor and in
an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is activated
and the motor is rotating).

p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance cold / Mot R_stator cold

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [ohm] 2000.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625 (phase value).
Dependency: Refer to: p0625, r1912
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable
resistance (p0352).

p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / R_cable

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [ohm] 120.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Resistance of the power cable between the power unit and motor.
Caution: The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference by
which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must be
repeated.
Note: The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.
The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the time
that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator
resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value.
The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.

p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6727
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [ohm] 300.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor data
identification routine (p1910).
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

74 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Induction machine: sets the stator leakage inductance of the motor.
Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor
identification routine (p1910).
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to
repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for a
low current.

p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance d axis / Mot L_stator d

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor
identification routine (p1910).
Note: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low current.

p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / Mot L_rot leak

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6727
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.
The value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine
(p1910).
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised
to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).

p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance / Mot Lh

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6727
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 10000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor
identification routine (p1910).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 75
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).

p0362[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0366
Note: For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0363[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 85.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0367
Note: For induction motors, p0363 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0364[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0368
Note: For induction motors, p0364 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

76 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0365[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 125.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0369
Note: For induction motors, p0365 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0366[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0362
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0367[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated
magnetization current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0363
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 77
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0368[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 150.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0364
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0369[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 210.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0365
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance cold / Mot R_stator cold

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature (p0625).
The value does not include the cable resistance.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625

r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the total cable resistance between power unit and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance.
Dependency: Refer to: r0238, p0352

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

78 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627).
Dependency: Refer to: p0627
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the motor rotor resistance at an ambient temperature p0625.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot rated R_rotor

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the nominal rotor resistance of the motor at the rated temperature.
The rated temperature is the sum of p0625 and p0628.
Dependency: Refer to: p0628
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance total / Mot L_leak total

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor including the motor reactor (p0233).

r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance d axis / Mot L_stator d

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the motor reactor (p0233).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 79
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Mot L_magn transf

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the rotor time constant.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor
resistance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into account.

r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant.
Note: The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0358) divided by the total of all
motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.

r0394[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the rated motor power.
Note: The parameter displays p0307. For p0307 = 0, r0394 is calculated from p0304 and p0305 (only for induction motors).
Depending on the actual motor type, deviations can occur from the actual rated motor power.

r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value).
The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance.
Dependency: In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model.
Refer to: p0350, p0352, p0620
Note: In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the
thermal motor model.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

80 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the actual rotor resistance (phase value).
The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model.
Dependency: Refer to: p0354, p0620
Note: In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the
thermal motor model.
This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

p0422[0...n] Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: C(4) Scaling: - Dyn. index: EDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 4704
Min Max Factory setting
0 [nm] 4294967295 [nm] 100 [nm]
Description: Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder.
Notice: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400).
When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The serial protocol of an absolute encoder provides the position with a certain resolution, e.g. 100 nm. This value
must be entered here.

p0490 Invert measuring probe / Probe inv

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - - 0000 bin
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Setting to invert the digital input signals to connect a measuring probe.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
03 DI 3 (T. 8) Inverted Not inverted -
Dependency: Refer to: p0580
Note: When the measuring probe is inverted, this has no effect on the status displays of the digital inputs (r0721, r0722,
r0723).

p0500 Technology application / Tec application

PM230 Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
3 3 3
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 3: Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization
Dependency: For p0096 = 1, 2 (Standard, Dynamic Drive Control) p0500 cannot be changed.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 81
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
Note: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1580 = 80 % (efficiency optimization)
- p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency.
- p1802 = 10 (SVM/FLB with overmodulation and modulation depth reduction over 57 Hz)
- p1803 = 115 %

p0500 Technology application / Tec application

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 0: Standard drive
1: Pumps and fans
2: Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads)
3: Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization
Dependency: For p0096 = 1, 2 (Standard, Dynamic Drive Control) p0500 cannot be changed.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Notice: If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
Note: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0500 = 0 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 10 V
- p1750.2 = 0
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0, PM260: p1802 = 2)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
- p3855
For p0500 = 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750.2 = 0
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
For p0500 = 2 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V (separately-excited synchronous motor: 4 V)
- p1750.2 = 1
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750.2 = 1
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

82 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For p1750:
The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors.
p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate
regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses are
inhibited.
For p1802 / p1803:
p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.

p0501 Technological application (standard drive control) / Techn appl SDC

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 0: Constant load (linear characteristic)
1: Speed-dependent load (parabolic characteristic)
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300
Notice: If the technological application is set to p0501 = 0, 1 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
Note: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0501 = 0, 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1802 = 0
- p1803 = 106 %
- p3855.0 = 1 (DC quantity control on)
For p1802 / p1803:
These parameters are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.

p0502 Technological application (dynamic drive control) / Techn appl DDC

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 0
Description: Sets the technology application for dynamic applications (p0096 = 2).
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 or p3900.
Value: 0: Standard drive (e.g. pumps, fans)
1: Dynamic starting or reversing
5: Heavy-duty starting (e.g. extruders, compressors)
Dependency: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3 or 5
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1610, p1750

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 83
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: When entering p0502 and initiating the calculation, the following parameters are set:
p0502 = 0:
- p1750.0/1/7 = 1 (start and reverse in open-loop control with rugged switchover limits)
- p1610 = 50 %, p1611 = 30 % (low up to average starting torque)
p0502 = 1:
- p1750.0/1/7 = 0 (start and reverse in closed-loop control with shorter acceleration times)
- p1610 = 50 %, p1611 = 30 % (only effective, if the drive is switched-on with a speed setpoint of zero)
p0502 = 5:
- p1750.0/1/7 = 1 (start and reverse in open-loop control with rugged switchover limits)
- p1610 = 80 %, p1611 = 80 % (average up to higher starting torque)

p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(5) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 4 1
Description: Sets the actual system of units.
Value: 1: SI system of units
2: System of units referred/SI
3: US system of units
4: System of units referred/US
Dependency: The parameter can only be changed in an offline project using the commissioning software.
Caution: If a per unit representation is selected and if the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then
the physical significance of several control parameters is also adapted at the same time. As a consequence, the
control behavior can change (see p1576, p1621, p1744, p1752, p1755 and p1609, p1612, p1619, p1620).
Note: Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been
selected, these are displayed using either SI or US units.

p0514[0...9] Scaling-specific reference values / Scal spec ref val

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000001 10000000.000000 1.000000
Description: Sets the reference values for the specific scaling of BICO parameters.
The specific scaling is active when interconnecting with other BICO parameters, and can be used in the following
cases:
1. Parameter with the marking "Scaling: p0514".
2. Changing the standard scaling for parameters with the marking "Scaling: p2000" ... "Scaling: p2007".
Relative values refer to the corresponding reference value. The reference value corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex
(word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
To specifically scale BICO parameters, proceed as follows:
- set the reference value (p0514[0...9]).
- set the numbers of the parameters, which should be active for the scaling, corresponding to the index of p0514
(p0515[0...19] ... p0524[0...19]).
For parameters with the marking "Scaling: p0514", which are not entered in p0515[0...19] to p0524[0...19], the
reference value 1.0 (factory setting) applies.
Index: [0] = Parameters in p0515[0...19]
[1] = Parameters in p0516[0...19]
[2] = Parameters in p0517[0...19]
[3] = Parameters in p0518[0...19]
[4] = Parameters in p0519[0...19]
[5] = Parameters in p0520[0...19]
[6] = Parameters in p0521[0...19]
[7] = Parameters in p0522[0...19]

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

84 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[8] = Parameters in p0523[0...19]

[9] = Parameters in p0524[0...19]
Dependency: Refer to: p0515, p0516, p0517, p0518, p0519, p0520, p0521, p0522, p0523, p0524

p0515[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[0] / Scal spec p514[0]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[0] for the specific scaling.
p0515[0]: parameter number
p0515[1]: parameter number
p0515[2]: parameter number
...
p0515[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0516[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[1] / Scal spec p514[1]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[1] for the specific scaling.
p0516[0]: parameter number
p0516[1]: parameter number
p0516[2]: parameter number
...
p0516[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0517[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[2] / Scal spec p514[2]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[2] for the specific scaling.
p0517[0]: parameter number
p0517[1]: parameter number
p0517[2]: parameter number
...
p0517[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0518[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[3] / Scal spec p514[3]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[3] for the specific scaling.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 85
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0518[0]: parameter number

p0518[1]: parameter number
p0518[2]: parameter number
...
p0518[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0519[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[4] / Scal spec p514[4]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[4] for the specific scaling.
p0519[0]: parameter number
p0519[1]: parameter number
p0519[2]: parameter number
...
p0519[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0520[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[5] / Scal spec p514[5]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[5] for the specific scaling.
p0520[0]: parameter number
p0520[1]: parameter number
p0520[2]: parameter number
...
p0520[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0521[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[6] / Scal spec p514[6]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[6] for the specific scaling.
p0521[0]: parameter number
p0521[1]: parameter number
p0521[2]: parameter number
...
p0521[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

86 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0522[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[7] / Scal spec p514[7]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[7] for the specific scaling.
p0522[0]: parameter number
p0522[1]: parameter number
p0522[2]: parameter number
...
p0522[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0523[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[8] / Scal spec p514[8]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[8] for the specific scaling.
p0523[0]: parameter number
p0523[1]: parameter number
p0523[2]: parameter number
...
p0523[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0524[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[9] / Scal spec p514[9]

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[9] for the specific scaling.
p0524[0]: parameter number
p0524[1]: parameter number
p0524[2]: parameter number
...
p0524[19]: parameter number
Dependency: Refer to: p0514

p0530[0...n] Bearing version selection / Bearing vers sel

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 104 0
Description: Sets the bearing version.
Corresponding to the bearing version entered, its code number (p0531) is automatically set.
0 = No selection
1 = Manual entry

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 87
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

101 = STANDARD
102 = PERFORMANCE
103 = HIGH PERFORMANCE
104 = ADVANCED LIFETIME
Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0531, p0532, p1082
Notice: For p0530 = 101, 102, 103, 104, the maximum bearing speed (p0532) is write protected. Write protection is
withdrawn with p0530 = 1.
If p0530 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also
associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the
motor (p0010 = 3). The maximum speed of the bearing is factored into the limit for the maximum speed p1082.
Note: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0530 can only be set to 1.

p0531[0...n] Bearing code number selection / Bearing codeNo sel

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Display and setting the code number of the bearing.
When setting p0301 and p0530 the code number is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. The
information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0530, p0532, p1082
Notice: If p0531 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also
associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the
motor (p0010 = 3). The maximum speed of the bearing is factored into the limit for the maximum speed p1082.
Note: p0531 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.

p0532[0...n] Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed of the bearing.
The following applies when calculating the maximum speed (p1082):
- for p0324 = 0 or p0532 = 0, p0322 is used.
- for p0324 > 0 and p0532 > 0, the minimum value from the two parameters is used.
Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0322, p0530, p1082
Notice: This parameter is pre-assigned in the case of motors from the motor list (p0301) if a bearing version (p0530) is
selected.
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). The information in p0530
should be observed when removing write protection.
If p0532 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also
associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the
motor (p0010 = 3).

p0541[0...n] Load gearbox code number / Load grbx CodeNo

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Display and setting the code number of the load gearbox.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

88 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0542[0...n] Load gearbox maximum speed / Load grbx n_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [rpm] 340.28235E36 [rpm] 0 [rpm]
Description: Maximum permissible input speed at the load gearbox.
The following applies when calculating the maximum speed (p1082):
- for p0324 = 0 or p0532 = 0 or p0542 = 0, p0322 is used.
- for p0324 > 0, p0532 > 0 and p0542 > 0, the minimum value from the parameters is used.

p0543[0...n] Load gearbox maximum torque / Load grbx M_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [Nm] 340.28235E36 [Nm] 0 [Nm]
Description: Maximum permissible input torque at the load gearbox.

p0544[0...n] Load gearbox overall ratio (absolute value) numerator / Load grbx ratio N
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2147483647 0
Description: Sets the numerator for the overall ratio of the load gearbox.

p0545[0...n] Load gearbox overall ratio (absolute value) denominator / Load grbx ratio D
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2147483647 0
Description: Sets the denominator for the overall ratio of the load gearbox.

p0546[0...n] Load gearbox output direction of rotation inversion / Load grbx outp inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2147483647 0
Description: Sets the inversion for the direction of rotation of the load gearbox.

p0550[0...n] Brake type / Brake type

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Sets the brake version.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 89
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0551[0...n] Brake code number / Brake code no.

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Display and setting the code number of the brake.

p0552[0...n] Maximum brake speed / Brake n_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [rpm] 340.28235E36 [rpm] 0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum brake speed.

p0553[0...n] Brake holding torque / Brake M_hold

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [Nm] 340.28235E36 [Nm] 0 [Nm]
Description: Sets the brake holding torque.

p0554[0...n] Brake moment of inertia / Brake J

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [kgm²] 2147483647 [kgm²] 0 [kgm²]
Description: Sets the brake moment of inertia.

p0573 Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Setting to inhibit the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and
closed-loop control parameters (p0340, p3900).
Value: 0: No
1: Yes
Notice: The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.g. p0305) are entered and
only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning.
Once the motor and control parameters have been calculated (p0340, p3900), the inhibit for the reference value
calculation is automatically re-activated.
Note: If value = 0:
The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters.
If value = 1:
The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

90 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0580 Measuring probe input terminal / MT input terminal

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 23 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the input terminal for the measuring probe for speed actual value measurement.
Value: 0: No meas probe
23: DI 3 (T. 8)
Dependency: Refer to: p0581
Note: DI: Digital Input

p0581 Measuring probe edge / MT edge

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 1 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the edge to evaluate the measuring probe signal for speed actual value measurement.
0: 0/1 edge
1: 1/0 edge
Dependency: Refer to: p0580

p0582 Measuring probe pulses per revolution / MT pulses per rev

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1 12 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the number of pulses per revolution (e.g. for disks with holes).

p0583 Measuring probe maximum measuring time / MT t_meas max

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0.040 [s] 10.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the maximum measuring time for the measuring probe.
If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measuring time has expired, then the speed actual value in r0586
is set to zero. This timer is re-started with the next pulse.
Dependency: Refer to: r0586

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 91
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0585 Measuring probe gear factor / Probe gear factor

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00000 1000.00000 1.00000
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the BERO gear factor.
The measured speed is multiplied by the BERO gear factor and is displayed in r0586.

r0586 CO: Measuring probe speed actual value / MT n_act

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the speed actual value measured using the BERO.
Dependency: Refer to: p0580, p0583
Note: For p0580 = 0 (no measuring probe), a value of zero is displayed here.

r0587 CO: Measuring probe measuring time measured / MT t_meas measured

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the time between the last two BERO pulses.
The measuring time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 µs.
If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measured time in p0583 expires, then r0587 is set to the
maximum measuring time.
Dependency: Refer to: p0580
Note: For p0580 = 0 (no measuring probe), a value of zero is displayed here.

r0588 CO: Measuring probe pulse counter / MT pulse counter

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the number of measuring pulses that have occurred (been received) up until now.
Dependency: Refer to: p0580
Note: After reaching 4294967295 (2^32 - 1), the counter starts again at 0.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

92 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0589 Measuring probe delay time / MT t_delay

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the time since the last measuring pulse was detected.
The delay time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 µs.
When a measuring pulse occurs (is received) the delay time is reset and is limited to the maximum measuring time in
p0583.
Dependency: Refer to: p0580
Note: For p0580 = 0 (no measuring probe), a value of zero is displayed here.

p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(5) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 47 1
Description: Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller.
For p0595 = 1, 2, the reference quantity set in p0596 is not active.
Value: 1: %
2: 1 referred no dimensions
3: bar
4: °C
5: Pa
6: ltr/s
7: m³/s
8: ltr/min
9: m³/min
10: ltr/h
11: m³/h
12: kg/s
13: kg/min
14: kg/h
15: t/min
16: t/h
17: N
18: kN
19: Nm
20: psi
21: °F
22: gallon/s
23: inch³/s
24: gallon/min
25: inch³/min
26: gallon/h
27: inch³/h
28: lb/s
29: lb/min
30: lb/h
31: lbf
32: lbf ft
33: K
34: rpm
35: parts/min
36: m/s
37: ft³/s
38: ft³/min

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 93
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

39: BTU/min
40: BTU/h
41: mbar
42: inch wg
43: ft wg
44: m wg
45: % r.h.
46: g/kg
47: ppm
Dependency: Only the unit of the technology controller parameters are switched over (unit group 9_1).
Refer to: p0596
Note: When switching over from % into another unit, the following sequence applies:
- set p0596
- set p0595 to the required unit

p0596 Technological unit reference quantity / Tech unit ref qty

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 340.28235E36 1.00
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the technological units.
When changing over using changeover parameter p0595 to absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the
reference quantity.
Dependency: Refer to: p0595
Notice: When changing over from one technological unit into another, or when changing the reference parameter, a
changeover is not made.

p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8016
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
1: PTC alarm & timer
2: KTY84
4: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
6: PT1000
Dependency: A thermal motor model is calculated corresponding to p0612.
Caution: For p0601 = 2, 6:
If the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another encoder, then the temperature adaptation of the motor
resistances must be switched out (p0620 = 0). Otherwise, in controlled-loop operation, torque errors will occur that
will mean that the motor will not be able to be stopped.
Note: For p0601 = 1:
Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm. Wire breakage and short-circuit monitoring.

p0604[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor alarm threshold / Mod 2/sens A_thr

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8016
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 240.0 [°C] 130.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 2 or KTY/PT1000.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

94 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

After the alarm threshold is exceeded, alarm A07910 is output and timer (p0606) is started.
If the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011
is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0606, p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The hysteresis is 2 K.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0605[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value / Mod1/2/sens T_thr

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8016, 8017
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 240.0 [°C] 145.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the threshold and temperature value to monitor the motor temperature.
Temperature model 1 (I2t, p0612.0 = 1):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
- sets the alarm threshold. If the model temperature (r0034) exceeds the alarm threshold, then alarm A07012 is
output.
- this value is simultaneously used as rated winding temperature.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
- p5390: when commissioning a catalog motor for the first time, p0605 is copied to p5390.
- p5390: p5390 is of significance when evaluating the alarm threshold.
- p5390: the stator winding temperature (r0632) is used to initiate the signal.
- p0627: when a catalog motor is commissioned for the first time, p0605 -40 °C is copied to p0627.
- p0627: p0627 is of significance for the rated temperature.
Motor temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1) or measurement:
- sets the fault threshold. If the temperature (r0035) exceeds the fault threshold, then fault F07011 is output.
Dependency: Refer to: r0034, p0606, p0611, p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07012
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
p0605 also defines the final temperature of the model for r0034 = 100 %. Therefore, p0605 has no influence on the
time up to alarm A07012 being issued. The time is only determined by time constant p0611, the actual current and
the reference value p0318. For p0318 = 0, the rated motor current is used as reference value.
Note: The hysteresis is 2 K.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0606[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor timer / Mod 2/sens timer

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8016
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the timer for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 2 or KTY/PT1000.
This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded.
If the timer has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011 is
output.
If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault F07011 is
immediately output.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 95
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: p0604, p0605

Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note: With p0606 = 0 s, the timer is de-activated and only the fault threshold is effective.
KTY/PT1000: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is
exceeded.
PTC, bimetallic NC contact: The timer minimum value has no special significance.

p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8016
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.100 [s]
Description: Sets the timer between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault.
If there is a sensor fault, this timer is started.
If the sensor fault is still present after the timer has expired, a corresponding fault is output.
Notice: The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of 48 ms.
Note: If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output.
Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model.

p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(3), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8016, 8017, 8018
Min Max Factory setting
0 12 12
Description: Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
Value: 0: No response only alarm no reduction of I_max
1: Messages, reduction of I_max
2: Messages, no reduction of I_max
12: Messages, no reduction of I_max, temperature storage
Dependency: Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605, p0614, p0615
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910
Note: The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4).
The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency.
If value = 0:
An alarm is output and I_max is not reduced.
If value = 1:
An alarm is output and a timer is started. A fault is output if the alarm is still active after this timer has expired.
- for KTY/PT1000, the following applies: I_max. is reduced
- for PTC, the following is valid: I_max. is not reduced
If value = 2:
An alarm is output and a timer is started. A fault is output if the alarm is still active after this timer has expired.
If value = 12:
Behavior is always the same as for value 2.
For motor temperature monitoring without temperature sensor, when switching off, the model temperature is saved in
a non-volatile fashion. When switching on, the same value (reduced by p0614) is taken into account in the model
calculation. As a consequence, the UL508C specification is fulfilled.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

96 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8017
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 20000 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the winding time constant.
The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill current
(rated motor current, if the motor standstill current is not parameterized) up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the
continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached.
Dependency: The parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4) and synchronous reluctance motors (p0300 =
6xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910
Notice: This parameter is automatically pre-set from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be
carefully observed when removing write protection.
When exiting commissioning, p0612 is checked, and where relevant, is pre-assigned to a value that matches the
motor power, if a temperature sensor was not parameterized (see p0601).
Note: When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (refer to p0612).
If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to
p0625.

p0612[0...n] Mot_temp_mod activation / Mot_temp_mod act

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8017, 8018
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0010 0000 0010 bin
Description: Setting to activate the motor temperature model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activate mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) Yes No -
01 Activate mot_temp_mod 2 Yes No -
02 Activate mot_temp_mod 3 Yes No -
08 Activate mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) extensions Yes No -
09 Activate mot_temp_mod 2 extensions Yes No -
12 Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) ambient temperature Yes (via p0613) No (fixed 20 °C) -
can be adjusted
Dependency: For synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors, when exiting commissioning, temperature model 1 is
automatically activated if a time constant has been entered in p0611.
Refer to: r0034, p0604, p0605, p0606, p0611, p0613, p0615, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628, r0630, r0631, r0632,
r0633, p5350, r5389, p5390, p5391
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07014, A07910
Notice: For bit 00:
This bit is only automatically activated for permanent-magnet 1FT7 synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance
motors. For other permanent-magnet synchronous motors, the user himself must activate motor temperature model
1 (I2t).
It is only possible to activate this motor temperature model (I2t) for a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0).
Note: Mot_temp_mod: motor temperature model
For bit 00:
This bit is used to activate/de-activate the motor temperature model for permanent-magnet synchronous motors and
synchronous reluctance motors.
For bit 01 (see also bit 9):
This bit is used to activate/de-activate the motor temperature model for induction motors.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 97
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For bit 02:

This bit is used to activate/de-activate the motor temperature model for 1FK7 Basic and 1FL5 motors.
Motor temperature model 3 cannot be simultaneously activated with another motor temperature model.
For bit 08:
This bit is used to extend the motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 (only bit 0):
- this bit has no function. Temperature model 1 operates in the standard mode.
Overtemperature at rated load: p0605 - 40 °C
Alarm threshold: p0605
Fault threshold: p0615
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 (bits 0 and 8):
- temperature model 1 operates in the extended mode.
Overtemperature at rated load: p0627
Alarm threshold: p5390
Fault threshold: p5391
For bit 09:
This bit is used to extend the motor temperature model 2.
For firmware version < 4.7 following applies (only bit 1):
- this bit has no function. Temperature model 2 operates in the standard mode.
From firmware version 4.7 the following applies (bits 1 and 9):
- this bit should be set. Temperature model 2 then operates in the extended mode and the result of the model is more
precise.
For bit 12 (only effective if a temperature sensor has not been parameterized):
This bit is used to set the ambient temperature for the motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 (only bit 0):
- this bit has no function. Temperature model 1 operates with an ambient temperature of 20 °C.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 (bits 0 and 12):
- the ambient temperature can be adapted to the conditions using p0613.

p0613[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 ambient temperature / Mod 1/3 amb_temp

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8017
Min Max Factory setting
-40 [°C] 100 [°C] 20 [°C]
Description: Sets the ambient temperature for motor temperature model 1 or 3.
- temperature model 1 (I2t, p0612.0 = 1):
For firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.12 = 0, the following applies:
The parameter is not relevant.
From firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.12 = 1, the following applies:
The parameter defines the current ambient temperature.
- temperature model 3 (p0612.2 = 1):
The parameter defines the current ambient temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07012

p0614[0...n] Thermal resistance adaptation reduction factor / Therm R_adapt red

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 100 [%] 30 [%]
Description: Sets the reduction factor for the overtemperature of the thermal adaptation of the stator/rotor resistance.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

98 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The value is a starting value when switching on. Internally, after switch-on, the reduction factor has no effect
corresponding to the thermal time constant.
Dependency: Refer to: p0610
Note: The reduction factor is only effective for p0610 = 12, and refers to the overtemperature.

p0615[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) fault threshold / I2t F thresh

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8017
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 220.0 [°C] 180.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6:
- fault F07011 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded.
- fault threshold for r0034 = 100 % * (p0615 - 40) / (p0605 - 40).
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
- the fault threshold in p0615 is preset when commissioning.
- when a catalog motor with motor temperature model 1 (I2t) is being commissioned for the first time, the threshold
value is copied from p0615 to p5391.
- p5391 is of significance for evaluating the fault threshold.
Dependency: The parameter is only used for motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07012
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The hysteresis is 2 K.

p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
Description: Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance according
to r0395 and r0396.
Value: 0: No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances
1: Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model
2: Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature
Note: For p0620 = 1, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model
temperature in r0633.
For p0620 = 2, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting the
rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows:
theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035

p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(3), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Selects the identification of the stator resistance after booting the Control Unit (only for vector control).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 99
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data
identification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator
winding is calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model.
p0621 = 1:
Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is switched on for the first time (pulse enable) after booting
the Control Unit.
p0621 = 2:
Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is switched on (pulse enable).
Value: 0: No Rs identification
1: Rs identification after switching-on again
2: Rs identification after switching-on each time
Dependency: - perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor.
- enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0622, r0623
Notice: The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor
(KTY/PT1000) to a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the
measured value of identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding.
Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase
of the induction motor.
Note: The measurement is carried out:
- For induction motors
- When vector control is active (see p1300)
- if a temperature sensor (KTY/PT1000) has not been connected
- When the motor is at a standstill when switched on
When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a third
of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure).
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing
(p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the
measurement.

p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after switching on again / t_excit Rs_id
Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after switching on again (restart).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0621, r0623
Note: For p0622 < p0346 the following applies:
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement is
complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also
depends on the settling time of the measured current.
For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies:
Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possible
magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling time
plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346.

r0623 Rs identification stator resistance after switch on again / Rs-id Rs aft sw-on
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the stator resistance determined using the Rs identification after switching on again.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

100 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0621, p0622

p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature during commissioning / Mot T_ambient

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8017, 8018
Min Max Factory setting
-40 [°C] 80 [°C] 20 [°C]
Description: Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model.
Dependency: Refer to: p0350, p0354
Note: The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature.
If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is
included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601).

p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8018
Min Max Factory setting
10 [K] 200 [K] 50 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator iron referred to ambient temperature in the motor temperature model
2 (p0612.1 = 1).
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Notice: When selecting a standard induction motor listed in the catalog (p0300 > 100, p0301 > 10000), this parameter is
automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8017, 8018
Min Max Factory setting
15 [K] 200 [K] 80 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature.
- motor temperature model 1 (I2t, p0612.0 = 1):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
p0605 is of significance for the rated temperature.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
Overtemperature at the rated operating point.
- motor temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1):
Overtemperature at the rated operating point.
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Notice: When selecting a standard induction motor listed in the catalog (p0300 > 100, p0301 > 10000), this parameter is
automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 101
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor / Mot T_over rotor

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8018
Min Max Factory setting
20 [K] 200 [K] 100 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature in the motor
temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1).
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Notice: When selecting a standard induction motor listed in the catalog (p0300 > 100, p0301 > 10000), this parameter is
automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).

r0630[0...n] Mot_temp_mod ambient temperature / Mod T_ambient

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8018
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model (models 2 and 3).

r0631[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator iron temperature / Mod T_stator

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8018
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the stator iron temperature of the motor temperature model (models 2 and 3).
Note: For motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1), this parameter is not valid:

r0632[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature / Mod T_winding

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8017, 8018
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.
Dependency: Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910

r0633[0...n] Mot_temp_mod rotor temperature / Mod rotor temp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8018
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model (models 2 and 3).
Note: For motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1), this parameter is not valid:

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

102 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Vsrms] 100.000 [Vsrms] 0.000 [Vsrms]
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
The parameter weights the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis flux function.

p0635[0...n] Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis current.
Dependency: Refer to: p0634

p0636[0...n] Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the direct axis current.
Dependency: Refer to: p0634

p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mH] 10000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current.
Dependency: Refer to: p0634, p0635, p0636

p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6640
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current limit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0209, p0323
Note: The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0305. The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209.
The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the power
unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 103
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated
when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5.
p0640 is limited to 4.0 x p0305.
p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g. to 1.5 x p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]).
p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the
automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0).

p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit variable / Curr lim var

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6640
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the variable current limit.
The value is referred to p0640.

p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor.
The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is
withdrawn, the counter is held and the value saved.
Dependency: Refer to: p0651
Refer to: A01590
Note: For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0.
The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).

p0651[0...n] Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [h] 150000 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor.
An appropriate fault is output when the operating hours set here are reached.
Dependency: Refer to: p0650
Refer to: A01590
Note: For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
When setting p0651 to 0, then p0650 is automatically set to 0.
The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).
If there is no temperature monitor, then interconnect to a fixed value.
For index 3:
When the binector input is interconnected, precharging is switched-on independent of the magnitude of the
precharging threshold.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

104 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0720[0...4] CU number of inputs and outputs / CU I/O count

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2119
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of inputs and outputs.
Index: [0] = Number of digital inputs
[1] = Number of digital outputs
[2] = Number of digital input/outputs bidirectional
[3] = Number of analog inputs
[4] = Number of analog outputs

r0721 CU digital inputs terminal actual value / CU DI term act val

CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
2221, 2255, 2256
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the
simulation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
Note: AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

r0721 CU digital inputs terminal actual value / CU DI term act val

CU240E-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
CU240E-2_F 2221, 2255, 2256
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - -
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the
simulation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Note: AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 105
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0722.0...11 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status / CU DI status

CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
2221, 2255, 2256, 2810
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
Dependency: Refer to: r0723
Note: AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

r0722.0...12 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status / CU DI status

CU240E-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
CU240E-2_F 2221, 2255, 2256, 2810
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Dependency: Refer to: r0723
Note: AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

r0723.0...11 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status inverted / CU DI status inv

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
2221, 2255, 2256
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

106 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: r0722

Note: AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

r0723.0...12 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status inverted / CU DI status inv

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
CU240E-2_F 2221, 2255, 2256
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - -
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Dependency: Refer to: r0722
Note: AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

p0724 CU digital inputs debounce time / CU DI t_debounce

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [ms] 20.000 [ms] 4.000 [ms]
Description: Sets the debounce time for digital inputs.
Note: The digital inputs are read in cyclically every 2 ms (DI 11, DI 12 every 4 ms).
To debounce the signals, the set debounce time is converted into integer multiple debounce clock cycles Tp (Tp =
p0724 / 2 ms).
DI: Digital Input

p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2119, 2030, 2130
Min Max Factory setting
- - 52.3
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18).
Recommendation: r0052.0 Ready for switching on
r0052.1 Ready for operation
r0052.2 Operation enabled
r0052.3 Fault present
r0052.4 Coast down active (OFF2)
r0052.5 Quick stop active (OFF3)
r0052.6 Switching-on inhibited active
r0052.7 Alarm present
r0052.9 Control request

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 107
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0052.14 Motor rotates forwards

r0053.0 DC braking active
r0053.1 n_act > p2167 (n_off)
r0053.2 n_act <= p1080 (n_min)
r0053.3 I_act > p2170
r0053.4 n_act > p2155
r0053.5 n_act <= p2155
r0053.6 n_act >= n_set
r0053.10 Technology controller output at the lower limit
r0053.11 Technology controller output at the upper limit
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU S_src DO 1

CU240E-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2119, 2030, 2130
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - 52.7
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (NO: T. 21).
Recommendation: r0052.0 Ready for switching on
r0052.1 Ready for operation
r0052.2 Operation enabled
r0052.3 Fault present
r0052.4 Coast down active (OFF2)
r0052.5 Quick stop active (OFF3)
r0052.6 Switching-on inhibited active
r0052.7 Alarm present
r0052.9 Control request
r0052.14 Motor rotates forwards
r0053.0 DC braking active
r0053.1 n_act > p2167 (n_off)
r0053.2 n_act <= p1080 (n_min)
r0053.3 I_act > p2170
r0053.4 n_act > p2155
r0053.5 n_act <= p2155
r0053.6 n_act >= n_set
r0053.10 Technology controller output at the lower limit
r0053.11 Technology controller output at the upper limit
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU S_src DO 2

CU240E-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2119, 2030, 2130
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - 52.2
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 (NO: T. 24 / NC: T. 23).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

108 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Recommendation: r0052.0 Ready for switching on

r0052.1 Ready for operation
r0052.2 Operation enabled
r0052.3 Fault present
r0052.4 Coast down active (OFF2)
r0052.5 Quick stop active (OFF3)
r0052.6 Switching-on inhibited active
r0052.7 Alarm present
r0052.9 Control request
r0052.14 Motor rotates forwards
r0053.0 DC braking active
r0053.1 n_act > p2167 (n_off)
r0053.2 n_act <= p1080 (n_min)
r0053.3 I_act > p2170
r0053.4 n_act > p2155
r0053.5 n_act <= p2155
r0053.6 n_act >= n_set
r0053.10 Technology controller output at the lower limit
r0053.11 Technology controller output at the upper limit
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

r0747 CU digital outputs status / CU DO status

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2130, 2131, 2132,
2133
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) High Low -
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.

r0747 CU digital outputs status / CU DO status

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2130, 2131, 2132,
CU240E-2_F 2133
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - -
Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) High Low -
01 DO 1 (NO: T. 21) High Low -
02 DO 2 (NO: T. 24 / NC: T. 23) High Low -
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 109
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0748 CU invert digital outputs / CU DO inv

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2240,
2242
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) Inverted Not inverted -
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

p0748 CU invert digital outputs / CU DO inv

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2240,
CU240E-2_F 2242
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) Inverted Not inverted -
01 DO 1 (NO: T. 21) Inverted Not inverted -
02 DO 2 (NO: T. 24 / NC: T. 23) Inverted Not inverted -
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

r0751.0...9 BO: CU analog inputs status word / CU AI status word

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2250, 2251
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the status of the analog inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Analog input AI0 wire breakage Yes No -
01 Analog input AI1 wire breakage Yes No -
08 Analog input AI0 no wire breakage Yes No -
09 Analog input AI1 no wire breakage Yes No -
Note: AI: Analog Input

r0752[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs input voltage/current actual / CU AI U/I_inp act

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p0514 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input.
Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched in.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

110 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)

[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: The type of analog input AIx (voltage or current input) is set using p0756.
Refer to: p0756
Note: AI: Analog Input
T: Terminal

p0753[0...1] CU analog inputs smoothing time constant / CU AI T_smooth

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter for the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: AI: Analog Input
T: Terminal

r0755[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs actual value in percent / CU AI value in %

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs.
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: AI: Analog Input
T: Terminal

p0756[0...1] CU analog inputs type / CU AI type

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 [0] 4
[1] 4
Description: Sets the type of analog inputs.
p0756[0...1] = 0, 1, 4 corresponds to a voltage input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in V).
p0756[0...1] = 2, 3 corresponds to a current input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in mA).
In addition, the associated DIP switch must be set.
For the voltage input, DIP switch AI0/1 must be set to "U".
For the current input, DIP switch AI0/1 or AI2 must be set to "I".
Value: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V)
1: Unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)
2: Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA to +20 mA)
4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
8: No sensor connected
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 111
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Warning: The maximum voltage difference between analog input terminals AI+, AI-, and the ground must not exceed 35 V.
If the system is operated when the load resistor is switched on (DIP switch set to "I"), the voltage between differential
inputs AI+ and AI- must not exceed 10 V or the injected 80 mA current otherwise the input will be damaged.
Note: When changing p0756, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0757, p0758, p0759, p0760) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p0756 = 0, 4, p0757 is set to 0.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 1, p0757 is set to 2.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 2, p0757 is set to 0.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 3, p0757 is set to 4.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.

p0757[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value x1 / CU AI char x1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
-50.000 160.000 0.000
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0758[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 / CU AI char y1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0759[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value x2 / CU AI char x2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
-50.000 160.000 10.000
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

112 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0760[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 / CU AI char y2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568, 9576
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0761[0...1] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring response threshold / CU WireBrkThresh

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 20.00 2.00
Description: Sets the response threshold for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs.
The unit for the parameter value depends on the set analog input type.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active:
p0756[0...1] = 1 (unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)), unit [V]
p0756[0...1] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)), unit [mA]
Refer to: p0756
Note: AI: Analog Input
When p0761 = 0, wire breakage monitoring is not carried out.

p0762[0...1] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring delay time / CU wire brk t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: AI: Analog Input

p0764[0...1] CU analog inputs dead zone / CU AI dead zone

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2251
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 20.000 0.000
Description: Determines the width of the dead zone at the analog input.
Analog input type unipolar (e.g. 0 ... +10 V):
The dead zone starts with the characteristic value x1/y1 (p0757/p0758).
Analog input type bipolar (e.g. -10 V ... +10 V):
The dead zone is located at the symmetrical center between characteristic value x1/y1 (p0757/p0758) and x2/y2
(p0759/p0760). The set value doubles the dead zone.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 113
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)

[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: AI: Analog Input
T: Terminal

p0771[0...1] CI: CU analog outputs signal source / CU AO S_src

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2261
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 21[0]
[1] 27[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: AO: Analog Output
T: Terminal

r0772[0...1] CU analog outputs output value currently referred / CU AO outp act ref
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: AO: Analog Output
T: Terminal

p0773[0...1] CU analog outputs smoothing time constant / CU AO T_smooth

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter for the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: AO: Analog Output
T: Terminal

r0774[0...1] CU analog outputs output voltage/current actual / CU AO U/I_outp

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual output voltage or output current at the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: Refer to: p0776
Note: AO: Analog Output
T: Terminal

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

114 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0775[0...1] CU analog outputs activate absolute value generation / CU AO absVal act

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs.
Value: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched in
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: AO: Analog Output
T: Terminal

p0776[0...1] CU analog outputs type / CU AO type

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Sets the analog output type.
p0776[x] = 1 corresponds to a voltage output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in V).
p0776[x] = 0, 2 corresponds to a current output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in mA).
Value: 0: Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA)
1: Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V)
2: Current output (+4 mA ... +20 mA)
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: When changing p0776, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p0776 = 0, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA.
For p0776 = 1, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 V, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 10.0 V.
For p0776 = 2, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 4.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA.

p0777[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x1 / CU AO char x1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: Refer to: p0776
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 115
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0778[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 / CU AO char y1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type.
Refer to: p0776
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0779[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x2 / CU AO char x2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: Refer to: p0776
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0780[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y2 / CU AO char y2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 20.000 [V]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type.
Refer to: p0776
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

116 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0782[0...1] BI: CU analog outputs invert signal source / CU AO inv S_src

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: AO: Analog Output
T: Terminal

r0785.0...1 BO: CU analog outputs status word / CU AO ZSW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9572
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of analog outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 AO 0 negative Yes No -
01 AO 1 negative Yes No -
Note: AO: Analog Output

p0791[0...1] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.000 [%] 200.000 [%] 0.000 [%]
Description: Setting and connector output to control the analog outputs via fieldbus.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: Refer to: p0771
Note: AO: Analog Output
The following interconnections must be established to control the analog outputs via fieldbus:
- AO 0: p0771[0] with p0791[0]
- AO 1: p0771[1] with p0791[1]

p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
2221, 2255, 2256
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) Simulation Terminal eval -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) Simulation Terminal eval -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) Simulation Terminal eval -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) Simulation Terminal eval -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 Simulation Terminal eval -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 117
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Refer to: p0796
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
CU240E-2_F 2221, 2255, 2256
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) Simulation Terminal eval -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) Simulation Terminal eval -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) Simulation Terminal eval -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) Simulation Terminal eval -
04 DI 4 (T. 16) Simulation Terminal eval -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) Simulation Terminal eval -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 Simulation Terminal eval -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 Simulation Terminal eval -
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Refer to: p0796
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
2221, 2255, 2256
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Refer to: p0795
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

118 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2201, 2202, 2220,
CU240E-2_F 2221, 2255, 2256
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (T. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (T. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (T. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Refer to: p0795
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

p0797[0...1] CU analog inputs simulation mode / CU AI sim_mode

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs.
Value: 0: Terminal evaluation for analog input x
1: Simulation for analog input x
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p0798.
Refer to: p0798
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
AI: Analog Input

p0798[0...1] CU analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU AI sim setp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-50.000 2000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input value in the simulation mode of the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p0797.
If AI x is parameterized as a voltage input (p0756), the setpoint is a voltage in V.
If AI x is parameterized as a current input (p0756), the setpoint is a current in mA.
Refer to: p0756, p0797

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 119
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).

AI: Analog Input

p0802 Data transfer: memory card as source/target / mem_card src/targ

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Description: Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to memory card.
Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1):
- sets the source of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 48 --> PS048xxx.ACX is the source).
Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2):
- sets the target of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 23 --> PS023xxx.ACX is the target).
Dependency: Refer to: p0803, p0804
Note: The volatile device memory is not influenced by data transfer.

p0803 Data transfer: device memory as source/target / Dev_mem src/targ

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
Description: Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to the non-volatile device memory.
Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1):
- sets the target of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 10 --> PS010xxx.ACX is the target).
Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2):
- sets the source of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 11 --> PS011xxx.ACX is the source).
Value: 0: Source/target standard
10: Source/target with setting 10
11: Source/target with setting 11
12: Source/target with setting 12
30: Source/target with setting 30
Dependency: Refer to: p0802, p0804
Note: The volatile device memory is not influenced by data transfer.

p0804 Data transfer start / Data transf start

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
0 1100 0
Description: Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory.
Example 1:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the non-volatile device memory to the memory card with setting 0.
The parameter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0)
p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card)
--> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX.
--> the parameter backup PS022xxx.ACX on the memory card can be used for data backup.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

120 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Example 2:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the non-volatile device memory with setting 22.
The parameter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 10.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22)
p0803 = 10 (define parameter backup with setting 10 as target in the device memory)
p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory)
--> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS010xxx.ACX.
--> this parameter backup can be loaded to the volatile device memory using p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 10.
--> to permanently save in the device memory and also on the memory card, this parameter backup should be saved
using p0971 = 1.
Example 3 (only supported for PROFIBUS/PROFINET):
The PROFIBUS or PROFINET device master data (GSD) should be transferred from the device memory to the
memory card.
p0802 = (not relevant)
p0803 = (not relevant)
p0804 = 12 (start transferring the GSD files to the memory card)
--> The GSD files are transferred from the device memory to the memory card and stored in the
/SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG directory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Memory card to device memory
2: Device memory to memory card
12: Device memory (GSD files) to memory card
1001: File on memory card cannot be opened
1002: File in device memory cannot be opened
1003: Memory card not found
1100: File cannot be transferred
Recommendation: When switching off/switching on, a possibly valid parameter backup is loaded to the memory card with setting 0.
Therefore, we do not recommend parameter backup with setting 0 (p0803 = 0) in the non-volatile device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p0802, p0803
Notice: The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred.
For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on
(PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory.
When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to the
memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM").
Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the
parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes:
p0804 = 1001:
The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient
memory space available on the memory card.
p0804 = 1002:
The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient
memory space available in the device memory.
p0804 = 1003:
No memory card has been inserted.

p0804 Data transfer start / Data transf start

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1100 0
Description: Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 121
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Example 1:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the non-volatile device memory to the memory card with setting 0.
The parameter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0)
p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card)
--> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX.
--> the parameter backup PS022xxx.ACX on the memory card can be used for data backup.
Example 2:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the non-volatile device memory with setting 22.
The parameter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 10.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22)
p0803 = 10 (define parameter backup with setting 10 as target in the device memory)
p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory)
--> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS010xxx.ACX.
--> this parameter backup can be loaded to the volatile device memory using p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 10.
--> to permanently save in the device memory and also on the memory card, this parameter backup should be saved
using p0971 = 1.
Example 3 (only supported for PROFIBUS/PROFINET):
The PROFIBUS or PROFINET device master data (GSD) should be transferred from the device memory to the
memory card.
p0802 = (not relevant)
p0803 = (not relevant)
p0804 = 12 (start transferring the GSD files to the memory card)
--> The GSD files are transferred from the device memory to the memory card and stored in the
/SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG directory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Memory card to device memory
2: Device memory to memory card
1001: File on memory card cannot be opened
1002: File in device memory cannot be opened
1003: Memory card not found
1100: File cannot be transferred
Recommendation: When switching off/switching on, a possibly valid parameter backup is loaded to the memory card with setting 0.
Therefore, we do not recommend parameter backup with setting 0 (p0803 = 0) in the non-volatile device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p0802, p0803
Notice: The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred.
For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on
(PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory.
When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to the
memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM").
Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the
parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes:
p0804 = 1001:
The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient
memory space available on the memory card.
p0804 = 1002:
The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient
memory space available in the device memory.
p0804 = 1003:
No memory card has been inserted.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

122 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to block the master control.
Dependency: Refer to: r0807
Note: The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example.

r0807.0 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays what has the master control.
The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Master control active Yes No 3030,
6031
Dependency: Refer to: p0806
Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control word/setpoints can be
transferred from another automation device.
Note: Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active
Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP
The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example.

p0809[0...2] Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8560
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Command Data Set
[1] = Target Command Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Dependency: Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the command data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied.
2. In index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.

p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
CU240B-2_DP Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8560
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - 722.3
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 123
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.

p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8560
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.

p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8560
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 1 (CDS bit 1).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, r0836
Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.

p0819[0...2] Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C(15) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8565
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Drive Data Set
[1] = Target Drive Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Dependency: Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the drive data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied.
2. In index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

124 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: C(15), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8565
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, p0826, r0837
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: C(15), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8565, 8570
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0826[0...n] Motor changeover motor number / Mot_chng mot No.

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(3), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the freely-assignable motor number for the drive data set changeover.
If the same motor is driven by different drive data sets, the same motor number must also be entered in these data
sets.
If the motor is also switched with the drive data set, different motor numbers must be used. In this case, the data set
can only be switched when the pulse inhibit is set.
Note: If the motor numbers are identical, the same thermal motor model is used for calculation after data set changeover. If
different motor numbers are used, different models are also used for calculating (the inactive motor cools down in
each case).
For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set
changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797).

r0835.2...8 CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8575
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Internal parameter calculation active Yes No -
04 Armature short circuit active Yes No -
05 Identification running Yes No -
06 Friction characteristic plot running Yes No -
07 Rotating measurement running Yes No -
08 Motor data identification running Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 125
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: For bit 02:

A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
For bit 04:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated.
For bit 05:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running.
For bit 07:
A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running.
For bit 08:
A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running.

r0836.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8560
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 CDS select. bit 0 ON OFF -
01 CDS select. bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811
Note: Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.

r0837.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8565
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DDS select. bit 0 ON OFF -
01 DDS select. bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, p0820, p0821
Note: Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following.
The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051.
If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs.

p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 2512
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2090.0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0).
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

126 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056.
The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056.
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switching-on inhibited is acknowledged.
Only the signal source that originally switched on can also switch off again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switching-on
inhibited)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse suppression
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse cancelation when standstill is detected (p1226,
p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled)

p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 2512
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 722.0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0).
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056.
The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056.
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switching-on inhibited is acknowledged.
Only the signal source that originally switched on can also switch off again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switching-on
inhibited)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse suppression
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse cancelation when standstill is detected (p1226,
p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 127
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 8720, 8820,
CU240E-2_PN_F 8920
CU240E-2_DP_F Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 2090.1
[1] 1
[2] 2090.1
[3] 2090.1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
- BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching-on inhibited)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- no OFF2 (enable is possible)
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 8720, 8820,
8920
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
- BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching-on inhibited)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- no OFF2 (enable is possible)
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0845[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_src 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 8720, 8820,
8920
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

128 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The following signals are AND'ed:

- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
- BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching-on inhibited)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- no OFF2 (enable is possible)
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.

p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1
CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2090.2
[1] 1
[2] 2090.2
[3] 2090.2
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2).
BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching-on inhibited)
BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal
- no OFF3 (enable is possible)
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
BI: p0848 = 0 signal:
- no dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227).

p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1
CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2).
BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching-on inhibited)
BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal
- no OFF3 (enable is possible)
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 129
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
BI: p0848 = 0 signal:
- no dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227).

p0849[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_src 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2).
BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching-on inhibited)
BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal
- no OFF3 (enable is possible)
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.

Note: For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
BI: p0849 = 0 signal:
- no dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227).

p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2090.3
[1] 1
[2] 2090.3
[3] 2090.3
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 (STW1.3).
BI: p0852 = 0 signal
Inhibit operation (suppress pulses).
BI: p0852 = 1 signal
Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 (STW1.3).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

130 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

BI: p0852 = 0 signal

Inhibit operation (suppress pulses).
BI: p0852 = 1 signal
Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2090.10
[1] 1
[2] 2090.10
[3] 2090.10
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10).
BI: p0854 = 0 signal
No control by PLC
BI: p0854 = 1 signal
Master control by PLC.
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then binector input p0854 should be set to 1.
If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies
regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).

p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10).
BI: p0854 = 0 signal
No control by PLC
BI: p0854 = 1 signal
Master control by PLC.
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then binector input p0854 should be set to 1.
If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies
regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 131
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 2701
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p0858
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally
open holding brake).

p0856[0...n] BI: Enable speed controller / n_ctrl enable

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 2701
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12).
0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero.
1 signal: Enable speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: r0898
Note: If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, then an existing brake will be closed.
If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, the pulses are not suppressed.

p0857 Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8760, 8864, 8964
Min Max Factory setting
100.0 [ms] 60000.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the power unit.
The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a
READY signal within the monitoring time, fault F07802 is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F07802, F30027
Notice: The maximum time to precharge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum
precharging duration depends on the power unit.
The monitoring time for the precharging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is
output when the maximum precharging duration is exceeded.
Note: The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power unit.
The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to precharge the DC link and, if relevant,
the de-bounce time of the contactors.
If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault.

p0858[0...n] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 2701
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally close holding brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p0855

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

132 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally
open holding brake).
For a 1 signal via BI: p0858, the command "unconditionally close the holding brake" is executed and internally a zero
setpoint is entered.

p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback signal / Line contact feedb

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2634
Min Max Factory setting
- - 863.1
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal from the line contactor.
Recommendation: When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), then to control the line contactor, signal BO:
r0863.1 of its own drive object should be used.
Dependency: Refer to: p0861, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Notice: The line contactor monitoring is de-activated if the control signal of the particular drive object is set as the signal
source for the feedback signal of the line contactor (BI: p0860 = r0863.1).
Note: The state of the line contactor is monitored depending on signal BO: r0863.1.
When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), fault F07300 is then also output if the contactor is
closed before it is controlled using r0863.1.

p0861 Line contactor monitoring time / LineContact t_mon

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2634
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor.
This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the line
contactor within the time, a message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0860, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Note: The monitoring function is disabled for the factory setting of p0860.

r0863.0...1 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word and control word of the drive coupling.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Closed-loop control operation Yes No -
01 Energize contactor Yes No 2634
Note: For bit 01:
Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 133
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p0867 Power unit main contactor holding time after OFF1 / PU t_MC after OFF1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 500.0 [ms] 50.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the main contactor holding time after OFF1
Dependency: Refer to: p0869
Note: After withdrawing the OFF1 enable (source of p0840), the main contactor is opened after the main contactor holding
time has elapsed.
For p0869 = 1 (keep main contactor closed for STO), after withdrawing STO, the switching-on inhibited must be
acknowledged via the source of p0840 = 0 (OFF1) – and before the main contactor holding time expires, should go
back to 1, otherwise the main contactor will open.
When operating a drive connected to SINUMERIK, which only closes the main contactor with the OFF1 command
(blocksize, chassis), p0867 should be set as a minimum to 50 ms.

p0869 Sequence control configuration / Seq_ctrl config

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the sequence control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Keep main contactor closed for STO Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: p0867
Note: For bit 00:
After withdrawing the OFF1 enable (source of p0840), the main contactor is opened after the main contactor holding
time has elapsed.
For p0869.0 = 1, after withdrawing STO, the switching-on inhibited must be acknowledged via the source of p0840 =
0 (OFF1) – and before the main contactor holding time expires (p0867), should go back to 1, otherwise the main
contactor will open.

p0897 BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the "parking axis" function.
Dependency: BI: p0897 = 0 signal
The function "parking axis" is not selected.
BI: p0897 = 1 signal
The function "parking axis" is selected.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: After it has been selected the "parking axis" function only becomes active when the pulses are suppressed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

134 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0898.0...14 CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the control word of the sequence control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Operation enable Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator enable Yes No -
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Speed setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Command open brake Yes No -
08 Jog 1 Yes No 3001
09 Jog 2 Yes No 3001
10 Master control by PLC Yes No -
12 Speed controller enable Yes No -
14 Command close brake Yes No -
Note: OC: Operating condition

r0899.0...13 CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2503
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the sequence control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ready for switching on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Jog active Yes No -
04 No coasting active OFF2 inactive OFF2 active -
05 No Quick Stop active OFF3 inactive OFF3 active -
06 Switching-on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Drive ready Yes No -
08 Controller enable Yes No -
09 Control request Yes No -
11 Pulses enabled Yes No -
12 Open holding brake Yes No -
13 Command close holding brake Yes No -
Note: For bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09:
For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.

p0918 PROFIBUS address / PB address

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2401, 2410
Min Max Factory setting
1 126 126
Description: Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 135
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The address can be set as follows:

1) Using the DIP switch on the Control Unit.
--> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p0918
--> Only if all of the DIP switches are set to ON or OFF.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
For p0014 = 0, the following applies:
Before a changed setting becomes permanently effective, a non-volatile RAM to ROM data save is required. To do
this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.
Note: Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126
Address 126 is used for commissioning.
Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection / PZD telegr_sel

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2401, 2420
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
1 999 1
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p2038
Refer to: F01505
Note: For p0922 = 100 ... 199, p2038 is automatically set to 1 and p2038 can no longer be changed. This means that for
these telegrams, the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode is set and cannot be changed.
If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are
inhibited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.

r0944 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the counter for changes of the fault buffer.
This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes.
Recommendation: Used to check whether the fault buffer has been read out consistently.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

136 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0945[0...63] Fault code / Fault code

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
Notice: The properties of the fault buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
...
r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8

r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit.
The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code.
Dependency: The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.

r0947[0...63] Fault number / Fault number

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: This parameter is identical to r0945.

r0948[0...63] Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
Notice: The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 137
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0949[0...63] Fault value / Fault value

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.

p0952 Fault cases counter / Fault cases qty

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6700, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency: The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0.
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136

r0963 PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate.
Value: 0: 9.6 kbit/s
1: 19.2 kbit/s
2: 93.75 kbit/s
3: 187.5 kbit/s
4: 500 kbit/s
6: 1.5 Mbit/s
7: 3 Mbit/s
8: 6 Mbit/s
9: 12 Mbit/s
10: 31.25 kbit/s
11: 45.45 kbit/s
255: Unknown

r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

138 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = device type, see below
r0964[2] = 403 --> first part of the firmware version V04.03 (for second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2010 --> year 2010
r0964[4] = 1705 --> 17th of May
r0964[5] = 2 --> 2 drive objects
r0964[6] = 200 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V04.03.02.00)
Device type:
r0964[1] = 6100 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240B-2_DP
r0964[1] = 6103 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240B-2
r0964[1] = 6210 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_DP
r0964[1] = 6211 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_PN
r0964[1] = 6213 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2
r0964[1] = 6220 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_DP_F
r0964[1] = 6221 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_PN_F
r0964[1] = 6223 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_F

r0965 PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.
Constant value = 0329 hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile
Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1
Note: When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.

p0969 System runtime relative / t_System relative

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON.
Note: The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0.
The value overflows after approx. 49 days.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.

p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C(1, 30) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 300 0
Description: The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the drive parameters.
Parameters p0100, p0205 are not reset.
The following motor parameters are defined in accordance with the power unit: p0300 ... p0311.
When downloading settings 10, 11, 12, the buffer memory mode is automatically de-activated (p0014 = 0).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 139
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
3: Start download of volatile parameters from RAM
5: Starts a safety parameter reset
10: Start loading the parameters saved with p0971=10
11: Start loading the parameters saved with p0971=11
12: Start loading the parameters saved with p0971=12
30: Start loading the delivery state saved with p0971=30
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
300: Only Siemens int
Dependency: Refer to: F01659
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
When the buffer memory is active (see p0014), the actual parameters are backed up from RAM to ROM when a
parameter set is loaded (p0970 = 10, 11, 12).
Peculiarities of communication via PROFIBUS DP:
- Communication with Class 1 masters (e.g. S7 controllers) is interrupted.
- Communication with Class 2 masters (e.g. STARTER) is retained.
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.
Parameter reset is completed with p0970 = 0 and r3996[0] = 0.
For p0970 = 5 the following applies:
The password for Safety Integrated must be set.
When Safety Integrated is enabled, this can result in messages, which then require an acceptance test to be
performed.
Then save the parameters and carry out a POWER ON.
For p0970 = 1 the following applies:
If a Safety Integrated function is parameterized (p9601), then the safety parameters are not reset. In this case, a fault
(F01659) is output with fault value 2.
The following generally applies:
One index of parameters p2100, p2101, p2118, p2119, p2126, p2127 is not reset, if a parameterized message is
precisely active in this index.

p0971 Save parameters / Save par

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
Description: Setting to save parameters in the non-volatile memory.
When saving, only the adjustable parameters intended to be saved are taken into account.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save drive object
10: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 10
11: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 11
12: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 12
30: State when delivered, save in non-volatile memory as setting 30
Dependency: Refer to: p0970, p1960, p3845, r3996
Caution: If a memory card (optional) is inserted – and the USB interface is not used, the following applies:
The parameters are also saved on the card and therefore overwrite any existing data!

Notice: The Control Unit power supply may only be switched off after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.
For p0971 = 30:
The original state when delivered is overwritten when executing this memory function.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

140 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Parameters saved with p0971 = 10, 11, 12 can be loaded again with p0970 = 10, 11 or 12.
Identification and maintenance data (I&M data, p8806 and following) are only saved for p0971 = 1.

p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Hardware-Reset immediate
2: Hardware reset preparation
3: Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed
Danger: It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition.
The memory card/device memory of the Control Unit must not be accessed.

Note: If value = 1:
Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
If value = 2:
Help to check the reset operation.
Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no
longer acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
If value = 3:
The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized reset
by a control for several drive units.
If cyclic communication is not active, then the reset is immediately executed.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
To check the reset operation:
After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the
following:
p0972 = 0? --> the reset was successfully executed.
p0972 = 0? --> the reset was not executed.

r0980[0...299] List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0981, r0989
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 141
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r0981[0...299] List of existing parameters 2 / List avail par 2

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0989
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0989[0...299] List of existing parameters 10 / List avail par 10

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0990[0...99] List of modified parameters 1 / List chang par 1

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0991, r0999
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0991[0...99] List of modified parameters 2 / List chang par 2

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0999

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

142 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0999[0...99] List of modified parameters 10 / List chang par 10

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0991
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel

CU240B-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 200 2
Description: Sets the source for the speed setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus
10: Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint
11: Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer
12: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint
13: Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint
16: Motor potentiometer + fieldbus
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
21: Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
23: Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
30: Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint
31: Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer
32: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint
33: Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
36: Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
61: Fieldbus + motor potentiometer

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 143
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint

63: Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
200: Analog output connection
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
Caution: If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically:
p2051[1] = r0063

Notice: The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922.

For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 =
999.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 200 6
Description: Sets the source for the speed setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus
10: Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint
11: Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer
12: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint
13: Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint
16: Motor potentiometer + fieldbus
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
21: Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
23: Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
30: Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint
31: Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer
32: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint
33: Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
36: Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
61: Fieldbus + motor potentiometer
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
63: Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
200: Analog output connection
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
Caution: If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically:
p2051[1] = r0063

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

144 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922.

For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 =
999.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel

CU240E-2_DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_PN_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Min Max Factory setting
0 200 6
Description: Sets the source for the speed setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint
11: Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer
12: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint
13: Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint
16: Motor potentiometer + fieldbus
17: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
21: Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
23: Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
27: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2
30: Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint
31: Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer
32: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint
33: Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
36: Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus
37: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
61: Fieldbus + motor potentiometer
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
63: Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
67: Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2
70: Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint
71: Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer
72: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint
73: Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint
76: Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus
77: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2
200: Analog output connection
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 145
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Caution: If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically:
p2051[1] = r0063

Notice: The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922.

For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 =
999.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel

CU240E-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 200 2
Description: Sets the source for the speed setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint
11: Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer
12: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint
13: Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint
16: Motor potentiometer + fieldbus
17: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
21: Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
23: Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
27: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2
30: Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint
31: Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer
32: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint
33: Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
36: Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus
37: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
61: Fieldbus + motor potentiometer
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
63: Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
67: Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2
70: Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint
71: Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer
72: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint
73: Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint
76: Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus
77: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2
200: Analog output connection

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

146 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
Caution: If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically:
p2051[1] = r0063

Notice: The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922.

For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 =
999.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 147
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 5.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 6.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 7.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 8.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 9.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

148 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 10.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 11.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 12.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 13.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 14.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 149
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 15.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1016 Fixed speed setpoint select mode / n_set_fix select

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3010, 3011
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Description: Sets the mode to select the fixed speed setpoint.
Value: 1: Direct
2: Binary
Note: For p1016 = 1:
In this mode, the setpoint is entered via the fixed speed setpoints p1001 ... p1004.
Up to 16 different setpoints are obtained by adding the individual fixed speed setpoints.
For p1016 = 2:
In this mode, the setpoint is entered via the fixed speed setpoints p1001 ... p1015.

p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3010, 3011
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3010, 3011
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

150 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3010, 3011
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3010, 3011
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 3010, 3011
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the selected and active fixed speed setpoint.
This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with the
main setpoint).
Recommendation: Interconnect the signal with the main setpoint (CI: p1070 = r1024).
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1070, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1025.0 BO: Fixed speed setpoint status / n_setp_fix status

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the status when selecting the fixed speed setpoints.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed speed setpoint selected Yes No 3011
Dependency: Refer to: p1016

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 151
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: For bit 00:

When the fixed speed setpoints are directly selected (p1016 = 1), this bit is set if at least 1 fixed speed setpoint is
selected.

p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Data save active Yes No -
01 Automatic mode ramp-function generator Yes No -
active
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Save in NVRAM active Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator always active Yes No -
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: For bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to
save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
For bit 01:
0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode.
For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active.
For bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a
sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum
speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive
continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that
p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
For bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save de-activated.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1).
For bit 04:
When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output
value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r1050.

p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3020
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2090.13
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

152 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1035).
Dependency: Refer to: p1036
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1035).
Dependency: Refer to: p1036
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3020
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - [0] 2090.14
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1036).
Dependency: Refer to: p1035
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1036).
Dependency: Refer to: p1035
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 153
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).

p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized
potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1037, p1038
Note: The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".

p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has been
switched on.
Dependency: Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
Refer to: p1030

p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer.
In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the setpoint
must be interconnected via a connector input.
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042
Note: The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.

p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode.
Dependency: Refer to: p1041

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

154 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1044
Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).

p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1043
Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).

r1045 CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.

p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1048, p1082
Note: When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.

p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3020
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1047, p1082
Note: The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 155
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1050 CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator /

Mop setp after RFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 3020
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Recommendation: Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency: Refer to: p1070
Note: For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation,
suppress pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0).

p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
CU240E-2_DP Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 PN - - 1083[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Note: The OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) is effective when the limit is reduced.

p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 9733[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Note: The OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) is effective when the limit is reduced.

p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
CU240E-2_DP Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 PN
- - 1086[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Note: The OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) is effective when the limit is reduced.

p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 9733[1]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Note: The OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) is effective when the limit is reduced.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

156 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 0
[1] 722.0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1058
Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.

p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1058
Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.

p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 0
[1] 722.1
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 2.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1059
Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 157
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 2.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1059
Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.

p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 150.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed for jog 1.
Jogging (JOG) is level-triggered, and allows the motor to be incrementally traversed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056

p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] -150.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed for jog 2.
Jogging (JOG) is level-triggered, and allows the motor to be incrementally traversed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056

p1063[0...n] Setpoint channel speed limit / Setp_chan n_lim

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3040
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed limit effective in the setpoint channel.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

158 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3030
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2050[1]
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency: Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 755[0]
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency: Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.

r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective main setpoint.
The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 159
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1075[0...n] CI: Suppl setp / Suppl setp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: p1076, r1077, r1078

p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.

r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.

r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the total effective setpoint.
The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary setpoint.

p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050, 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 19500.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lowest possible motor speed.
This value is not undershot in operation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1106
Notice: The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106.
Note: The parameter value applies for both motor directions.
In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

160 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1081 Maximum speed scaling / n_max scal

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050, 3095
Min Max Factory setting
100.00 [%] 105.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the maximum speed (p1082).
For a higher-level speed control, this scaling allows the maximum speed to be briefly exceeded.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Notice: Continuous operation above a scaling of 100 % is not permitted.

p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max

Access level: 1 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3020, 3050, 3060,
3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 1500.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the highest possible speed.
Example:
Induction motor p0310 = 50 / 60 Hz without output filter and Blocksize power unit
p1082 <= 60 x 240 Hz / r0313 (vector control)
p1082 <= 60 x 550 Hz / r0313 (U/f control)
Dependency: For vector control, the maximum speed is restricted to 60.0 / (8.333 x 500 µs x r0313). This can be identified by a
reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode p1300 can be
changed over.
If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding to
the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). When using sine-wave filters (p0230 =
3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency of the filter capacitance and the motor
leakage inductance.
For reactors and dU/dt filters, it is limited to 120 Hz / r0313.
Refer to: p0230, r0313, p0322
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The parameter applies for both motor directions.
The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down
ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer).
The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0310, p0311, p0322.
The following limits are always effective for p1082:
p1082 <= 60 x minimum (15 x r0310, 550 Hz) / r0313
p1082 <= 60 x maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k x r0313), with k = 12 (vector control), k = 6.5 (U/f control)
During automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0), the parameter value is assigned the maximum motor speed
(p0322). For p0322 = 0 the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction
motors, the synchronous no-load speed is used as the default value (p0310 x 60 / r0313).
For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies:
During automatic calculation (p0340, p3900), p1082 is limited to speeds where the EMF does not exceed the DC link
voltage.
p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the value
is not changed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 161
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

r1084 CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050, 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the active positive speed limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085

p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1083[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction.

p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm] -210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed limit for the negative direction.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

r1087 CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050, 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the active negative speed limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1086, p1088

p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1086[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

162 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.
Note: The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.

p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101
Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.

p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101
Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.

p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101
Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.

p1098[0...n] CI: Skip speed scaling / n_skip scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the skip speeds.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 163
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1099.0 CO/BO: Skip band status word / Skip band ZSW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the skip bands.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 r1170 within the skip band Yes No 3050
Dependency: Refer to: r1170
Note: For bit 00:
With the bit set, the setpoint speed is within the skip band after the ramp-function generator (r1170).
The signal can be used to switch over the drive data set (DDS).

p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094
Note: The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101.
Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is
skipped.
Example:
p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20
--> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped.
For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies:
For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies:
r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm]
For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies:
r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm]

p1106[0...n] CI: Minimum speed signal source / n_min s_src

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for lowest possible motor speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1080
Notice: The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106.

p1108[0...n] BI: Total setpoint selection / Total setp sel

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the total setpoint.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

164 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The selection of the total speed setpoint is automatically interconnected to the status word of the technology
controller (r2349.4) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0.
Refer to: p1109
Caution: If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to withdraw the
interconnection to its status word (r2349.4).

p1109[0...n] CI: Total setpoint / Total setp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the total setpoint.
For p1108 = 1 signal, the total setpoint is read in via p1109.
Dependency: The signal source of the total setpoint is automatically interconnected to the output of the technology controller
(r2294) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0.
Refer to: p1108
Caution: If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to disable the
interconnection to its output (r2294).

p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3040
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction.
Dependency: Refer to: p1111

p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505, 3040
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction.
Dependency: Refer to: p1110

r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set aft min_lim
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 165
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2441, 2442, 2505,
CU240E-2_PN_F 3040
CU240E-2_DP_F Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 2090.11
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: r1198
Caution: If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using
p1113 when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to
positive couplings in the control loop.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2441, 2442, 2505,
3040
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 722.1
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: r1198
Caution: If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using
p1113 when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to
positive couplings in the control loop.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 3040, 3050
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.

p1115 Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3080
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator type.
Value: 0: Basic ramp-function generator
1: Extended ramp-function generator
Note: Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

166 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3050, 3070, 6300,
8022
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.

p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed
(p1082) in this time.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1123
Note: The ramp-up time can be scaled via connector input p1138.
The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating
measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized.
For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-up time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.

p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time

PM230 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the ramp-function generator.
The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time.
Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency: The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit.
Refer to: p1082, p1123
Note: For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-down time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.

p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time

PM240 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the ramp-function generator.
The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time.
Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1123
Note: For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-down time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 167
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0).
Caution: If the technology controller is operated in mode p2251 = 0 (technology controller as main speed setpoint), then it is
not permissible to disable the interconnection to its status word (r2349).

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: In the case of sensorless vector control, the ramp-function generator must not be bypassed, other than indirectly by
means of interconnection with r2349.

p1123[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-up time / RFG t_RU min

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the minimum ramp-up time.
The ramp-up time (p1120) is limited internally to this minimum value.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Note: The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1123 is re-calculated.

p1127[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM250, PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the minimum ramp-down time.
The ramp-down time (p1121) is limited internally to this minimum value.
The parameter cannot be set shorter than the minimum ramp-up time (p1123).
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Note: For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-down time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1127 is re-calculated.

p1127[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the minimum ramp-down time.
The ramp-down time (p1121) is limited internally to this minimum value.
The parameter cannot be set shorter than the minimum ramp-up time (p1123).
Dependency: Refer to: p1082

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

168 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-down time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1127 is re-calculated.
If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the minimum ramp-down time is automatically
adapted using p1127.

p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 2.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 2.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator.
The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator.
The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function
generator.
Value: 0: Cont smoothing
1: Discont smoothing

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 169
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s.

Note: p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up
completed. During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of
the previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new
setpoint.
p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint. For
the setpoint change there is no rounding-off.

p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 5400.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Dependency: The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit.
Note: This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.

p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 5400.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note: This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.

p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 2.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

170 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1138[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-up time scaling / RFG t_RU scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: Refer to: p1120
Note: The ramp-up time is set in p1120.

p1139[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-down time scaling / RFG t_RD scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the ramp-down time of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: Refer to: p1121
Note: The ramp-down time is set in p1121.

p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - [0] 2090.4
[1] 1
[2] 2090.4
[3] 2090.4
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 (STW1.4).
BI: p1140 = 0 signal:
Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero).
BI: p1140 = 1 signal:
Ramp-function generator enable.
Dependency: Refer to: r0054, p1141, p1142
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 (STW1.4).
BI: p1140 = 0 signal:
Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero).
BI: p1140 = 1 signal:
Ramp-function generator enable.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 171
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: r0054, p1141, p1142

Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2090.5
[1] 1
[2] 2090.5
[3] 2090.5
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 (STW1.5).
BI: p1141 = 0 signal:
Freezes the ramp-function generator.
BI: p1141 = 1 signal:
Continue ramp-function generator.
Dependency: Refer to: r0054, p1140, p1142
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.

p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 (STW1.5).
BI: p1141 = 0 signal:
Freezes the ramp-function generator.
BI: p1141 = 1 signal:
Continue ramp-function generator.
Dependency: Refer to: r0054, p1140, p1142
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

172 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 2090.6
[1] 1
[2] 2090.6
[3] 2090.6
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6).
BI: p1142 = 0 signal
Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero).
BI: p1142 = 1 signal
Setpoint enable.
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1141
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this binector input is interconnected as follows
as standard:
BI: p1142 = 0 signal

p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2501
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6).
BI: p1142 = 0 signal
Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero).
BI: p1142 = 1 signal
Setpoint enable.
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1141
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this binector input is interconnected as follows
as standard:
BI: p1142 = 0 signal

p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1144

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 173
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: 0/1 signal:

The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function
generator.
1 signal:
The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
1/0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the
input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time.
0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.

p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value.
Dependency: The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1143

p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3080
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 50.0 0.0
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator tracking.
The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible drive
acceleration.
The reference value is the deviation at the speed controller/velocity controller input that is necessary to ensure that
the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit.
Recommendation: If at least one speed setpoint filter/velocity setpoint filter is activated (p1414), then the ramp-function generator
tracking should be de-activated (p1145 = 0.0). When the speed setpoint filter is activated, the output value of the
ramp-function generator can no longer be tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible drive
acceleration.
For p1145 = 0.0:
This value de-activates the ramp-function generator tracking.
For p1145 = 0.0 ... 1.0:
Generally, these values are not practical. They cause the motor to accelerate below its torque limit. The lower the
selected value, the greater the margin between the controller and torque limit when accelerating.
For p1145 > 1.0:
The greater the value, the higher the permissible deviation between the speed setpoint and speed actual value.
Notice: If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady
acceleration.
Remedy:
- de-activate ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0).
- increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121).
Note: In the U/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active.
The speed difference is reduced if the integral component of the speed controller is not maintained when the torque
limit is reached (p1400.16 = 1).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

174 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen. tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 1000.000 [rpm] 19.800 [rpm]
Description: Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active).
If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered
tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.
Dependency: Refer to: r1199

r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator acceleration / RFG acceleration

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2007 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 39_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
Min Max Factory setting
- [rev/s²] - [rev/s²] - [rev/s²]
Description: Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: Refer to: p1145

r1150 CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 3080
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator.

p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3080, 5030,
6031
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller.
Dependency: The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6.
The signal source of the total setpoint is automatically interconnected to the output of the technology controller
(r2294) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 1.
Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170
Caution: If the technology controller is activated, then it is not permissible to withdraw the parameter interconnection.

Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3080
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2 of the speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1155, r1170

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 175
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective.

The ramp-function generator is set (to the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive corresponding to the ramp-down time
(p1121 or p1135). While stopping via the ramp-function generator, STW1.4 is effective (enable ramp-function
generator).

r1169 CO: Speed controller speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3080
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the addition of the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency: Refer to: p1155, p1160
Note: The value is only correctly displayed at r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled).

r1170 CO: Speed controller setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 3080, 6300
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator.
The value is the sum of speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency: Refer to: r1150, p1155, p1160

r1197 Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3010
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1198.0...15 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2505
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the control word of the setpoint channel.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed setp bit 0 Yes No 3010
01 Fixed setp bit 1 Yes No 3010
02 Fixed setp bit 2 Yes No 3010
03 Fixed setp bit 3 Yes No 3010
05 Inhibit negative direction Yes No 3040
06 Inhibit positive direction Yes No 3040
11 Setpoint inversion Yes No 3040
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No 3020
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No 3020
15 Bypass ramp-function generator Yes No 3060,
3070

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

176 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1199.0...8 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 3001, 3080
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ramp-up active Yes No -
01 Ramp-down active Yes No -
02 RFG active Yes No -
03 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator held Yes No -
05 Ramp-function generator tracking active Yes No -
06 Maximum limit active Yes No -
07 Ramp-function generator acceleration Yes No -
positive
08 Ramp-function generator acceleration Yes No -
negative
Note: For bit 02:
The bit is the result of the OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.

p1200[0...n] Flying restart operating mode / FlyRest op_mode

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0
Description: Sets the operating mode for flying restart.
The flying restart allows the drive converter to be switched on while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive
converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up
to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting.
Value: 0: Flying restart inactive
1: Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction)
4: Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction)
Dependency: A differentiation is made between flying restart for U/f control and for vector control (p1300).
Flying restart, U/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204
Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205
For synchronous motors, flying restart cannot be activated.
Refer to: p1201
Refer to: F07330, F07331
Notice: The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply
interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent.
Note: For p1200 = 1, 4, the following applies:
Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3.
For p1200 = 1, the following applies:
The search is made in both directions.
For p1200 = 4, the following applies:
The search is only made in the setpoint direction.
For U/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies:
The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is
assumed that the motor is at a standstill.
If p1200 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to
be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was set when
the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 177
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function.
Dependency: Refer to: p1200
Note: Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0.

p1202[0...n] Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 400 [%] 90 [%]
Description: Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.
The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0331
Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.

Note: In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the
flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the
frequency on the basis of voltage inputs.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).
For a reluctance motor, the parameter is only changed after the motor data identification has been carried out.

p1202[0...n] Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.
The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0331
Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.

Note: In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the
flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the
frequency on the basis of voltage inputs.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).
For a reluctance motor, the parameter is only changed after the motor data identification has been carried out.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

178 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 4000 [%] 150 [%]
Description: Sets the factor for the search speed for flying restart.
The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value results
in a longer search time.
Recommendation: For encoderless vector control and motor cables longer than 200 m, set the factor p1203 >= 300 %.
Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.

Note: The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and
restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with
U/f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).
For the flying restart of a reluctance motor, the minimum search velocity is limited (p1203 >= 50 %).

p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 4000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the factor for the search speed for flying restart.
The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value results
in a longer search time.
Recommendation: For encoderless vector control and motor cables longer than 200 m, set the factor p1203 >= 300 %.
Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.

Note: The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and
restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with
U/f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).
For the flying restart of a reluctance motor, the minimum search velocity is limited (p1203 >= 50 %).

r1204.0...13 CO/BO: Flying restart U/f control status / FlyRest Uf st

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the U/f control mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Current impressed Yes No -
01 No current flow Yes No -
02 Voltage input Yes No -
03 Voltage reduced Yes No -
04 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
05 Wait for execution Yes No -
06 Slope filter act Yes No -
07 Positive gradient Yes No -
08 Current < thresh Yes No -
09 Current minimum Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 179
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -

11 Stop after positive direction Yes No -
12 Stop after negative direction Yes No -
13 No result Yes No -

r1205.0...15 CO/BO: Flying restart vector control status / FlyRest vector st

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control
mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Speed adaptation circuit record angle Yes No -
01 Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0 Yes No -
02 Isd channel enable Yes No -
03 Speed control switched out Yes No -
04 Quadrature arm switched in Yes No -
05 Special transformation active Yes No -
06 Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0 Yes No -
07 Current control on Yes No -
08 Isd_set = 0 A Yes No -
09 Frequency held Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Search Started Yes No -
12 Current impressed Yes No -
13 Search interrupted Yes No -
14 Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 Yes No -
15 Speed control activated Yes No -
Note: For bit 00 ... 09:
Used to control internal sequences during the flying restart.
Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs.
For bits 10 ... 15:
Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.

p1206[0...9] Automatic restart faults not active / AR fault not act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Sets faults for which automatic restart should not be effective.
Dependency: The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16, 26.
Refer to: p1210

p1210 Automatic restart mode / AR mode

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 26 0
Description: Sets the automatic restart mode (AR).
The parameters must be saved in the non-volatile memory p0971 = 1 in order that the setting becomes effective.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

180 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: Inhibit automatic restart

1: Acknowledge all faults without restarting
4: Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts
6: Restart after fault with additional start attempts
14: Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment
16: Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment
26: Acknowledging all faults and reclosing for an ON command
Recommendation: For brief line supply failures, the motor shaft may still be rotating when restarting. The "flying restart" function (p1200)
might need to be activated to restart while the motor shaft is still rotating.
Dependency: The automatic restart requires an active ON command (e.g., via a digital input). If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active
ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted.
When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start.
For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgment is required for an automatic restart.
Refer to: p0840, p0857
Refer to: F30003
Danger: If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is switched on
as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns
or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is present again. This automatic switching-on operation can only be
interrupted by withdrawing the ON command.
Notice: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults
are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed.
For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started.
Note: For p1210 = 1:
Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment,
then these are also automatically acknowledged again. p1211 has no influence on the number of acknowledgment
attempts.
For p1210 = 4:
An automatic restart is only performed if fault F30003 has occurred on the power unit. If additional faults are present,
then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues. If, for external 24 V power supplies
of the Control Unit, additional faults subsequently occur, these are no longer interpreted as line faults and are
therefore also not acknowledged.
For p1210 = 6:
An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred.
For p1210 = 14:
as for p1210 = 4. However, active faults must be manually acknowledged.
For p1210 = 16:
as for p1210 = 6. However, active faults must be manually acknowledged.
For p1210 = 26:
as for p1210 = 6. For this mode, the switch-on command can be entered with a delay. The restart is interrupted with
either OFF2 or OFF3. Alarm A07321 is only displayed if the cause of the fault has been removed and the drive is
restarted by setting the switch-on command.

p1211 Automatic restart start attempts / AR start attempts

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 3
Description: Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, 26.
Dependency: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Refer to: F07320
Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the switch-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is re-activated.
After a complete power failure (blackout) the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the
power failure, and decrements this start attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknowledge is started by the automatic
restart function prior to power failure, e.g. when the CU remains active on power failure longer than the time p1212 /
2, the fault counter will already have been decremented once. In this case, the start counter is thus decreased by the
value 2.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 181
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the motor
was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired.
As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When
successfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been
completed, then acknowledgment starts again from the beginning.
Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached.
After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the
start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start
attempts is again available.
At least one start attempt is always carried out.
After a line supply failure, acknowledgment is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is switched on.
If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its
acknowledgment also causes the start counter to be decremented.
For p1210 = 26:
The start counter is decremented if after a successful fault acknowledgment, the on command is present.

p1212 Automatic restart delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [s] 1000.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time up to restart.
Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6, 26.
For p1210 = 1, the following applies:
Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the waiting time, no restart.
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Notice: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Note: The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the delay time has expired and the full delay time.
If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in
the delay time.

p1213[0...1] Automatic restart monitoring time / AR t_monit

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 10000.0 [s] [0] 60.0 [s]
[1] 0.0 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR).
Index: [0] = Restart
[1] = Reset start counter
Dependency: Refer to: p1210, r1214
Notice: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
After fault F07320 occurs, the switch-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is re-activated.
Note: For index 0:
The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgments are not successful, the
monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again
(flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output.
The monitoring is de-activated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time
p0346 and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for
p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart.
The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged
(e.g. for faults that are permanently present).
In the case of p1210 = 14, 16, the faults which are present must be acknowledged manually within the time in
p1213[0]. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

182 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For index 1:
The start counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in
p1213[1] has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgment without automatic restart (p1210 = 1).
After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control Unit boots. The
start counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the switch-on command is withdrawn and the fault is acknowledged.
The start counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed.
For p1210 = 26, the fault must have been successfully acknowledged and the switch-on command issued within the
time in p1213[0]. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time.

r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart status / AR status

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Initialization Yes No -
01 Wait for alarm Yes No -
02 Auto restart act Yes No -
03 Setting the acknowledgment command Yes No -
04 Acknowledge alarms Yes No -
05 Restart Yes No -
06 Delay time running after automatic switch- Yes No -
on
07 Fault Yes No -
10 Effective fault Yes No -
12 Start count. bit 0 ON OFF -
13 Start count. bit 1 ON OFF -
14 Start count. bit 2 ON OFF -
15 Start count. bit 3 ON OFF -
Note: For bit 00:
State to display the single initialization after POWER ON.
For bit 01:
State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state).
For bit 02:
General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgment has been initiated.
For bit 03:
Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the
acknowledge command is continually displayed.
For bit 04:
State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful
acknowledgment. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an
acknowledgment command (bit 3 = 1).
For bit 05:
State in which the drive is automatically switched on (only for p1210 = 4, 6).
For bit 06:
State in which the system waits after having been switched on, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the
magnetizing process).
For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged.
For bit 07:
State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after
acknowledging the fault and withdrawing the switch-on command.
For bit 10:
When the automatic restart function is active, r1214.7 is displayed, otherwise the active fault r2139.3.
For bits 12 ... 15:
Actual state of the start counter (binary coded).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 183
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For bit 04 in addition:

For p1210 = 26, the system waits in this state until the switch-on command is available.

p1215 Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2701
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the holding brake configuration.
Value: 0: No motor holding brake available
3: Motor holding brake like sequence control connection via BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228
Caution: For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.

Notice: If p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the motor is still rotating.
Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result of a fault with OFF2
response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using a 1 signal at p0855.
Note: if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be
interconnected as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.

p1215 Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2701
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the holding brake configuration.
Value: 0: No motor holding brake available
1: Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control
2: Motor holding brake always open
3: Motor holding brake like sequence control connection via BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228
Caution: For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.

Notice: If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the
motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result
of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using
a 1 signal at p0855.
Note: If a holding brake integrated in the motor is used, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3.
if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be
interconnected as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.

p1216 Motor holding brake opening time / Brake t_open

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2701
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the time to open the motor holding brake.
After the holding brake has been controlled (opened), the speed setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the
speed setpoint is enabled.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

184 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Recommendation: This time should be set longer than the actual opening time of the brake. This ensures that the drive cannot
accelerate when the brake is applied.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1217
Note: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and integrated brake, for p0300 = 10000, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in
the motor.

p1217 Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2701
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and the controlling (closing) of the holding brake, the drive remains stationary under closed-loop
control for this time with a speed setpoint of zero. The pulses are suppressed when the time expires.
Recommendation: This time should be set longer than the actual closing time of the brake. This ensures that the pulses are only
suppressed after the brake has closed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216
Notice: If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag.
If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works
against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime.
Note: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and integrated brake, for p0300 = 10000, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in
the motor.

p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 2701, 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.
Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified.
Dependency: Refer to: p1227
Caution: For closed-loop speed and torque control without encoder, the following applies:
If p1226 is set to values under approx. 1 % of the rated motor speed, then the model switchover limits of the vector
control must be increased in order to guarantee reliable shutdown (see p1755, p1750.7).
Note: Standstill is identified in the following cases:
- the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed
threshold is too low.

p1227 Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2701
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 300.000 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has
fallen below p1226 (also refer to p1145).
Dependency: The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit.
Refer to: p1226

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 185
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can therefore
cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not suppressed.
Note: Standstill is identified in the following cases:
- the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
For p1227 = 300.000 s the following applies:
Monitoring is de-activated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts" down.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.

p1228 Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2701, 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 299.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for pulse suppression.
After OFF1 or OFF3, the pulses are canceled, if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
- the speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- the speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1227
Notice: When the motor holding brake is activated, pulse cancellation is additionally delayed by the brake closing time
(p1217).

p1230[0...n] BI: DC braking activation / DC brake act

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7017
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to activate DC braking.
Dependency: Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, r1239
Note: 1 signal: DC braking activated.
0 signal: DC braking de-activated.

p1231[0...n] DC braking configuration / DCBRK config

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7014, 7016, 7017
Min Max Factory setting
0 14 0
Description: Setting to activate DC braking.
Value: 0: No function
4: DC braking
5: DC braking for OFF1/OFF3
14: DC braking below starting speed
Dependency: Refer to: p0300, p1232, p1233, p1234, r1239

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

186 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The function can only be used for induction motors (p0300 = 1).
For p1231 = 4:
The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
- the function can be superseded by an OFF2 response.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- binector input p1230 = 1 signal (DC braking activation, depending on the operating mode).
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in "S5x".
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
DC braking can only be withdrawn (p1231 = 0) if it is not being used as a fault response in p2101.
In order that DC braking is active as fault response, the corresponding fault number must be entered in p2100 and
fault response p2101 set = 6.
For p1231 = 5:
DC braking is activated if the OFF1 or OFF3 command is present. Binector input p1230 is ineffective. If the drive
speed still lies above the speed threshold p1234, then initially, the drive is ramped-down to this threshold,
demagnetized (see p0347) and is then switched into DC braking for the time set in p1233. After this, the drive is
switched-off. If, at OFF1, the drive speed is below p1234, then it is immediately demagnetized and switched into DC
braking. A change is made into normal operation if the OFF1 command is withdrawn prematurely (the system waits
for demagnetization). Flying restart must be activated if the motor is still rotating.
DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible.
For p1231 = 14:
In addition to the function for p1231 = 5, binector input p1230 is evaluated.
DC braking is only automatically activated when the speed threshold p1234 is fallen below if binector input p1230 = 1
signal. This is also the case, if no OFF command is present.
After demagnetization and after the time in p1233 has expired, the drive changes back into normal operation or is
switched-off (for OFF1/OFF3).
If a 0 signal is applied to binector input p1230, for OFF1 and OFF3 no DC braking is executed.
Note:
DCBRK: DC Braking

p1232[0...n] DC braking braking current / DCBRK I_brake

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7017
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the braking current for DC braking.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note: A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that DC braking is switched on.
The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the
same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640). The braking current is
internally limited to r0067.
For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used.

p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7017
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 3600.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Sets the DC braking time (as fault response).
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1234, r1239

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 187
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7017
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the starting speed for DC braking.
If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, r1239

r1239.8...13 CO/BO: DC braking status word / DCBRK ZSW

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Status word of the DC braking.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 DC braking active Yes No 7017
10 DC braking ready Yes No 7017
11 DC braking selected Yes No -
12 DC braking selection internally inhibited Yes No -
13 DC braking for OFF1/OFF3 Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234
Note: For bit 12, 13:
Only effective for p1231 = 14.

p1240[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) / Vdc ctr config vec
PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 1
Description: Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode.
For U/f control: see p1280.
Value: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enable Vdc_max controller
3: Enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1245
Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07405, F07406
Notice: An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note: p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the power unit is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased. If overvoltage faults occur in spite of the Vdc_max controller
being active, the ramp-down time in p1121 might need to be increased.
- set the input voltage p0210 as low as possible in line with the supply voltage (in so doing avoid A07401).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

188 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1240 = 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the
minimum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.
- the Vdc_min controller cannot be used when the line voltage is permanently below 380 V (if required, p1247 should
be reduced).

p1240[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) / Vdc ctr config vec
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 1
Description: Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode.
For U/f control: see p1280.
Value: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enable Vdc_max controller
2: Enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
3: Enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1245
Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07405, F07406
Notice: An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note: If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the Vdc_max control is automatically de-activated.
p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the power unit is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the
minimum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.

r1242 Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
PM230: r1242 is limited to Vdc_max - 50.0 V.
If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
r1242 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units)
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Notice: If the activation level of the Vdc_max controller is already exceeded in the de-activated state (pulse inhibit) by the DC
link voltage, then the controller can be automatically de-activated (see F07401), so that the drive is not accelerated
the next time that it is activated.
Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * r1242 and
the controller output is zero.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 189
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic
settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
65 [%] 150 [%] 73 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0210
Warning: An excessively high value possibly negatively influences normal drive operation, and can mean that after the line
supply returns, the Vdc minimum control can no longer be exited.

p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0210
Warning: An excessively high value possibly negatively influences normal drive operation, and can mean that after the line
supply returns, the Vdc minimum control can no longer be exited.

r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and
the controller output is zero.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

190 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 300 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic
settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller.
When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the
ramp-function generator.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in
the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function
generator (p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.

p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 1.00
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor) and the
DC link capacitance of the power unit.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: p1251 = 0: The integral component is de-activated.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 191
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
1: Automatic detection enabled
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
1: Automatic detection enabled
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1800.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1256 = 1
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: F07406
Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event
of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

192 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: F07405, F07406

p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
Kinetic buffering is not started below the speed threshold.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from
increasing significantly at low speeds, and after a pulse inhibit, means that the motor coasts down.
However, the maximum braking torque can be set via the appropriate torque limiting.

r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
PM240 Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6220
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to pre-control the Vdc_max controller. The lower the
power limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached.

p1271[0...n] Flying restart maximum frequency for the inhibited direction / FlyRes f_max dir
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [Hz] 650 [Hz] 0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the maximum search frequency for a flying restart in an inhibited setpoint direction (p1110, p1111).
Note: The parameter has no effect for an operating mode, which only searches in the setpoint direction (p1200 > 3).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 193
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1280[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6320
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode.
Value: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enable Vdc_max controller
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: For high input voltages (p0210), the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max
controller:
- set the input voltage as low as possible, and in so doing, avoid A07401 (p0210).
- set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
- increase the ramp-down times (p1121).
- reduce the integral time of the controller (p1291), factor 0.5.
- Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810.1 = 1) or reduce the derivative action time of the
controller (p1292, factor 0.5).
In this case, we generally recommend to use vector control (p1300 = 20) (Vdc controller, see p1240).

p1280[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6320
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 1
Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode.
Value: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enable Vdc_max controller
2: Enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
3: Enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: For high input voltages (p0210), the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max
controller:
- set the input voltage as low as possible, and in so doing, avoid A07401 (p0210).
- set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
- increase the ramp-down times (p1121).
- reduce the integral time of the controller (p1291), factor 0.5.
- Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810.1 = 1) or reduce the derivative action time of the
controller (p1292, factor 0.5).
In this case, we generally recommend to use vector control (p1300 = 20) (Vdc controller, see p1240).
The following measures are suitable to improve the Vdc_min controller:
- Optimize the Vdc_min controller (see p1287).
- Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810.1 = 1).
If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the Vdc_max control is automatically de-activated.

p1281[0...n] Vdc controller configuration / Vdc ctrl config

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the DC link voltage controller.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

194 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP

00 Vdc min control (U/f) without up ramp Yes No -
02 Vdc min shorter wait time when the line Yes No -
returns
Note: For bit 00:
De-activate the ramp-up for Vdc_min control.
For drives with a mechanical system that can oscillate and high moment of inertia, the speed can be more quickly
tracked.
For bit 02:
When the line supply returns, normal operation is resumed earlier, and the system does not wait until the Vdc min
controller reaches the setpoint speed.

r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-in level (U/f) / Vdc_max on_level

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
r1282 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units)
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Notice: If the activation level of the Vdc_max controller is already exceeded in the de-activated state (pulse inhibit) by the DC
link voltage, then the controller can be automatically de-activated (see F07401), so that the drive is not accelerated
the next time that it is activated.
Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * r1282 and
the controller output is zero.

p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their
basic settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

p1284[0...n] Vdc_max controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_max t_thresh

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 4.000 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the Vdc_max controller.
If the down ramp of the speed setpoint is held for longer than the time set in p1284, then fault F07404 is output.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 195
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
r1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Warning: An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation.

r1286 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * r1286 and
the controller output is zero.

p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic
settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (U/f) /

Vdc_max factor RFG
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100.000 0.500
Description: Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator.
Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal of the Vdc_max controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: For values p1288 = 0.0 to 0.5, the controller dynamics are automatically adapted internally.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

196 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 1.00
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link.
The parameter is pre-set to a value that is optimally adapted to the capacitance of the power unit.

p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (U/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim

PM240 Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (U/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing
function is de-activated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the
parameterized connection voltage p0210.
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
1: Automatic detection enabled
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 197
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1296 = 1
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event
of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.

p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f / Vdc_min response

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: For p1296 = 1:
The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is
triggered.

p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from
increasing significantly at low speeds, and after a pulse inhibit, means that the motor coasts down.

r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl output

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
PM240 Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6320
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

198 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301, 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0 22 0
Description: Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive.
Value: 0: U/f control with linear characteristic
1: U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: U/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: U/f control with parameterizable characteristic
4: U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: U/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
6: U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
19: U/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (encoderless)
22: Torque control (encoderless)
Dependency: Only operation with U/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
Operation with a U/f characteristic is not supported for 1LE4 synchronous motors.
The output voltage is used for efficiency optimization for all U/f control types, load-dependent (see p0500 = 3).
Refer to: p0300, p0311, p0500, p1501
Notice: Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note: Only by selecting closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) is it possible to change over in operation to closed-loop
torque control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is
displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping
p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set precisely.
The Imax voltage controller remains active.
During operation (pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over
drive data sets.

p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301, 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0 22 0
Description: Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive.
Value: 0: U/f control with linear characteristic
1: U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: U/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: U/f control with parameterizable characteristic
4: U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: U/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
6: U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
19: U/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (encoderless)
22: Torque control (encoderless)
Dependency: For Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1), settings p1300 = 0, 2 are possible, for Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)
only p1300 = 20 can be set.
Only operation with U/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
Refer to: p0300, p0311, p0500, p1501

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 199
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note: Only by selecting closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) is it possible to change over in operation to closed-loop
torque control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is
displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping
p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set precisely.
The Imax voltage controller remains active.
During operation (pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over
drive data sets.

p1302[0...n] U/f control configuration / U/f config

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM230_STO Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM250, PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the U/f control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
03 Motor holding brake with constant stop Yes No -
frequency
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: For bit 03:
When the bit is set, when the drive stops, the starting frequency of the motor holding brake is also not fallen below
when the actual slip frequency is less than the starting frequency.

p1302[0...n] U/f control configuration / U/f config

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the U/f control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
03 Motor holding brake with constant stop Yes No -
frequency
04 Field orientation Yes No -
05 Starting current when accelerating without Yes No -
flux boost
07 Inhibit Iq,max controller Yes No -
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: For bit 03:
When the bit is set, when the drive stops, the starting frequency of the motor holding brake is also not fallen below
when the actual slip frequency is less than the starting frequency.
For bit 04:
Field orientation for the closed-loop control of the basis application. The field orientation is activated with the
automatic calculation if p0096 is set = 1.
For bit 05 (only effective for p1302.4 = 1):
The starting current when accelerating (p1311) generally results in an increase in the absolute current and flux. With
p1302.5 = 1 the current is only increased in the direction of the load. This setting is recommended for drives with
higher power ratings or drives with extremely fast rates of acceleration.
For bit 07:
For field orientation (bit04 = 1), the Iq,max controller supports the current limiting controller (see p1341). For
diagnostic purposes, the Iq,max controller can be de-activated using this bit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

200 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1310[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent / I_start (Ua) perm

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM250, PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor
frequency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 x p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1310
(permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law U/f characteristics.
Dependency: The starting current (voltage boost) is limited by the current limit p0640.
The accuracy of the starting current depends on the setting of the stator and feeder cable resistance (p0350, p0352).
For vector control, the starting current is realized using p1610.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315
Notice: The starting current (voltage boost) increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note: The starting current as a result of the voltage boost is only effective for U/f control (p1300).
The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312

p1310[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent / I_start (Ua) perm

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301, 6851
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor
frequency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 x p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1310
(permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law U/f characteristics.
For field orientation (p1302.4 = 1, default setting for p0096 = 1), in the vicinity of low output frequencies, a minimum
current is impressed with the magnitude of the rated magnetizing current.
For p1310 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case. For p1610 = 100 %, a current
setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor current.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 201
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The starting current (voltage boost) is limited by the current limit p0640.
The accuracy of the starting current depends on the setting of the stator and feeder cable resistance (p0350, p0352).
For vector control, the starting current is realized using p1610.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315
Notice: The starting current (voltage boost) increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note: The starting current as a result of the voltage boost is only effective for U/f control (p1300).
The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312
For field orientation (p1302.4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), p1311 and p1312 of the voltage boost is also added
in the direction of the load current (non linear).

p1311[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating / I_start accel

PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM250, PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the
load.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows (not for field orientation):
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1311
(voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
For vector control, the starting current is realized using p1611.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310

p1311[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating / I_start accel

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301, 6851
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the
load.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows (not for field orientation):
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1311
(voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
For field orientation (p1302 bit 4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), p1311 is pre-assigned by the automatic
calculation.
For vector control, the starting current is realized using p1611.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

202 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
For field orientation (p1302 bit 4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), p1311 of the voltage boost is also added in the
direction of the load current (non-linear).

p1312[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) when starting / I_start start

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301, 6851
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Setting for an additional voltage boost when powering-up, however, only for the first acceleration phase.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
For field orientation (p1302.4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), p1312 of the voltage boost is also added in the
direction of the load current (non-linear).

r1315 Voltage boost total / U_boost total

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301, 6851
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt.
For field orientation (p1302.4 = 1, not for PM230, PM250, PM260), at low speeds, as a minimum the magnetizing
current is set, so that the voltage depends on r0331.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1312

p1320[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard
characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 203
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1321[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

p1322[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Uf char f2

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard
characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327

p1323[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Uf char U2

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327

p1324[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Uf char f3

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

204 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard
characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1325, p1326, p1327

p1325[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Uf char U3

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1326, p1327

p1326[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Uf char f4

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 10000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the frequency of the fourth point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
The following applies for the frequency values:
p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326
Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. For output
frequencies above p1326, the characteristic is extrapolated with the gradient between the characteristic points
p1324/p1325 and p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

p1327[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Uf char U4

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 205
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1330[0...n] CI: U/f control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ.

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the voltage setpoint for U/f control with an independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19).
Dependency: Selects the U/f control with independent voltage setpoint via p1300 = 19.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1300

p1331[0...n] Voltage limiting / U_lim

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6300
Min Max Factory setting
50.00 [Vrms] 2000.00 [Vrms] 1000.00 [Vrms]
Description: Limiting the voltage setpoint.
This means that the output voltage can be reduced with respect to the calculated maximum voltage r0071 and the
start of field weakening.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: The output voltage is only limited if, as a result of p1331, the maximum output voltage (r0071) is fallen below.

p1333[0...n] U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6301
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the starting frequency at which FCC (Flux Current Control) is activated.
Dependency: The correct operating mode must be set (p1300 = 1, 6).
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Warning: An excessively low value can result in instability.

Note: For p1333 = 0 Hz, the FCC starting frequency is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.

p1334[0...n] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start
Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor
frequency.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

206 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1335[0...n] Slip compensation scaling / Slip comp scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 600.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation de-activated.
p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated.
Dependency: Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335.
For U/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee
correct operation.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Note: The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact that
the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors.
For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in order
to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
If p1335 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to
be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1335 have been changed by a parameter that was set when
the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).

p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 600.00 [%] 250.00 [%]
Description: Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)

r1337 CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip).
Dependency: p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1335

p1338[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 0.00
Description: Sets the gain for resonance damping for U/f control.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1339, p1349

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 207
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load conditions.
The resonance damping is active in a range from approximately 6 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310). The
shutoff frequency is determined by p1349.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sectors), the resonance damping is internally disabled in
order that the output frequency can be precisely set.

p1339[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant for resonance damping for U/f control.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1300, p1338, p1349

p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 0.500 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the I_max frequency controller.
The I_max controller reduces the drive converter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded.
In the U/f operating modes (p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output frequency and
one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreasing the
converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip). If the
overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output voltage is
reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive is
accelerated along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time).
Dependency: In the U/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller
is used.
Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Notice: When de-activating the I_max controller, the following must be carefully observed:
When the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded, the output current is no longer reduced. The drive is switched off
when the overcurrent limits are exceeded.
Note: The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp-function generator is de-activated with p1122 = 1.
p1341 = 0:
I_max frequency controller de-activated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed range.

p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.300 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1340
Note: When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is de-activated and only the current limiting
controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346).
In the case of power units with regenerative feedback (PM250, PM260), current limitation control for a regenerative
load is always implemented by influencing the frequency. This current limiting function is de-activated with p1340 =
p1341 = 0.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

208 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6300
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective frequency limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1340

r1344 I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl U_outp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6300
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1340

p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 7017
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1340
Note: The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232).

p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 7017
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.030 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1340
Note: The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232).
For p1346 = 0, the following applies:
The integral time of the I_max voltage controller is de-activated.

r1348 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value / U/f Eco fac act v
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300, 6301
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the economic factor determined for optimizing motor consumption.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 209
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1335
Note: The value is only determined for operating modes with Economic (p1300 = 4, 7).

p1349[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for U/f control.
Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1338, p1339
Note: For p1349 = 0, the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 % of the rated motor frequency - however, to a max. of
45 Hz.

p1350[0...n] U/f control soft start / U/f soft start

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6300
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets whether the voltage is continuously increased during the magnetizing phase (p1350 = 1, On) or whether it jumps
directly to the voltage boost (p1350 = 0, Off).
Value: 0: OFF
1: ON
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: The settings for this parameter have the following advantages and disadvantages:
0 = off (jump directly to voltage boost)
Advantage: Flux is established quickly -> torque is quickly available
Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized
1 = on (voltage is continually established)
Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate
Disadvantage: The flux is established slower -> torque is available later

p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
-300.00 [%] 300.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor holding brake.
Dependency: When setting p1351 > 0, then slip compensation is automatically activated (p1335 = 100 %).
Refer to: p1302, p1352
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: Connected with p1352 a value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip (r0330).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

210 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1352[0...n] CI: Motor holding brake starting frequency signal source / Brake f_start
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6310
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1351[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor
holding brake.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096 = 2)
Refer to: p1216
Note: A value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip (r0330).
The setting of the starting frequency begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056.4) and ends once the brake opening
time (p1216) has elapsed and the starting frequency (p1334) has been reached.
A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take place.

p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6490
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0010
0001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
01 Sensorless vector control freeze I comp Yes No 6040
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
06 Free Tn adaptation active Yes No 6050
14 Torque pre-control Always active For n_ctrl enab 6060
15 Sensorless vector control speed pre-control Yes No 6030
16 I component for limiting Enable Hold 6030
20 Acceleration model ON OFF 6031
24 Accelerated moment of inertia estimator Yes No 6030
active
25 Acceleration torque instantaneous in the I/f Yes No -
mode
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: For bit 01:
When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled
mode.
For bit 20:
The acceleration model for the speed setpoint is only active if p1496 is not zero.
For bit 25:
When the bit is set, for high dynamic starting in the I/f mode, the acceleration precontrol torque smoothing only has a
short minimum time (4 ms).

p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6490
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0010
0001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 211
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP

00 Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
01 Sensorless vector control freeze I comp Yes No 6040
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
06 Free Tn adaptation active Yes No 6050
14 Torque pre-control Always active For n_ctrl enab 6060
15 Sensorless vector control speed pre-control Yes No 6030
16 I component for limiting Enable Hold 6030
18 Moment of inertia estimator active Yes No 6030
20 Acceleration model ON OFF 6031
22 Obtain moment of inertia estimator value for Yes No 6030
pulse inhibit
24 Accelerated moment of inertia estimator Yes No 6030
active
25 Acceleration torque instantaneous in the I/f Yes No -
mode
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: For bit 01:
When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled
mode.
For bit 16:
When the bit is set, the integral component of the speed controller is only held if it reaches the torque limit.
For bit 20:
The acceleration model for the speed setpoint is only active for encoderless vector control if p1496 is not zero.
For bit 25:
When the bit is set, for high dynamic starting in the I/f mode, the acceleration precontrol torque smoothing only has a
short minimum time (4 ms).

p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6491
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Flux setpoint soft starting active Yes No 6722
01 Flux setpoint differentiation active Yes No 6723
02 Flux build-up control active Yes No 6722,
6723
06 Quick magnetizing Yes No 6722
07 Pre-control speed limitation Yes No 6640
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: For bit 00 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346.
For bit 01 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected,
soft starting is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed.
The flux differentiation can be switched out if a significant ripple occurs in the field-generating current setpoint (r0075)
when entering the field weakening range. However, this is not suitable for fast acceleration operations because then,
the flux decays more slowly and the voltage limiting responds.
For bit 02 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
The flux build-up control operates during the magnetizing phase p0346 of the induction motor. If it is switched out, a
constant current setpoint is injected and the flux is built up corresponding to the rotor time constant. When quick
magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected and when flux build-up control is de-energized alarm A07416 is displayed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

212 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For bit 06 (not for induction motors):

Magnetizing is performed with maximum current (0.9 * r0067). With active identification of the stator resistance (see
p0621) quick magnetizing is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed. During a flying restart of a
rotating motor (see p1200) no quick magnetizing takes place.
For bit 07:
if the speed of the drive exceeds the effective speed limit of the speed limiting controller, the torque limit is reduced
linearly to zero as the deviation becomes greater. This reduces the integral component of the speed controller and, in
turn, the overshoot during load shedding (see also F07901 and p2162).

p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Current controller adaptation active Yes No -
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1406.4...15 CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2520
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the control word of the speed controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
04 Hold speed controller I component Yes No 6040
05 Set speed controller I component Yes No 6040
11 Droop enable Yes No 6030
12 Torque control active Yes No 6060
15 Set speed adaptation controller I Yes No -
component
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1407.0...27 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2522
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the speed controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 U/f control active Yes No -
01 Encoderless operation active Yes No -
02 Torque control active Yes No 6030,
6060,
8011
03 Speed control active Yes No 6040
05 Speed controller I component frozen Yes No 6040
06 Speed controller I component set Yes No 6040
07 Torque limit reached Yes No 6060
08 Upper torque limit active Yes No 6060
09 Lower torque limit active Yes No 6060
10 Droop enabled Yes No 6030

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 213
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

11 Speed setpoint limited Yes No 6030

12 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
13 Encoderless operation due to a fault Yes No -
14 I/f control active Yes No -
15 Torque limit reached (without pre-control) Yes No 6060
17 Speed limiting control active Yes No 6640
23 Acceleration model activated Yes No -
24 Moment of inertia estimator active Yes No -
25 Load estimate active Yes No -
26 Moment of inertia estimator stabilized Yes No -
27 Accelerated moment of inertia estimator Yes No -
active
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1408.0...14 CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2530
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the current controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Current controller act Active Not active -
01 Id control I component limiting Active Not active 6714
03 Voltage limiting Active Not active 6714
10 Speed adaptation limiting Active Not active -
12 Motor stalled Yes No -
13 Separately excited synchronous motor is Yes No -
excited
14 Current model SESM magnetizing excit. Yes No -
current limited to zero
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6030
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1438 CO: Speed controller speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 3001, 6020, 6031
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output of the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller.
For U/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: r1439
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

214 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1439 Speed setpoint I component / n_set I_comp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5030, 5040, 6031
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint for the I component of the speed controller (output of the reference model after the
setpoint limiting).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: r1438
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.

r1444 Speed controller speed setpoint steady-state (static) / n_ctrl n_set stat
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5030
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the sum of all speed setpoints that are present.
The following sources are available for the displayed setpoint:
- setpoint at the ramp-function generator input (r1119).
- speed setpoint 1 (p1155).
- speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
- speed setpoint for the speed pre-control (p1430).
- setpoint from DSC (for DSC active).
- setpoint via PC (for master control active).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: r1119, p1155, p1160

r1445 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual smoothed speed actual value of the speed control.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (sensorless) / n_C n_act T_s SL
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6040
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 32000.00 [ms] 10.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the
speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 215
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1454 CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the system deviation of the I component of the speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctr adapt_sig Kp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the source for the adaptation signal to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1456, p1457, p1458, p1459

p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed controller.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1455, p1457, p1458, p1459
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed
controller.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1458, p1459
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

216 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor lower / Adapt_factor lower

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the adaptation factor before the adaptation range (0 % ... p1456) to additionally adapt the P gain of the
speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1459
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor upper / Adapt_factor upper

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the adaptation factor after the adaptation range (> p1457) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity
controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1458
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed upper scaling / n_ctr Kp n up scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the P gain of the speed controller for the upper adaptation speed range (> p1465).
The entry is made referred to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to
p1470).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1464, p1465
Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be
implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed upper scaling / n_ctr Tn n up scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the integral time of the speed controller after the adaptation speed range (> p1465).
The entry is made referred to the integral time for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (%
referred to p1472).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1464, p1465

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 217
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
point p1464, then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463. This means that an adaptation can
be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl n lower

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller.
No adaptation is effective below this speed.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1461, p1463, p1465
Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be
implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed upper / n_ctrl n upper

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the upper adaptation speed of the speed controller.
No adaptation is effective above this speed.
For the proportional gain, p1470 x p1461 is effective.
For the integral time, p1472 x p1463 is effective.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1461, p1463, p1464
Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be
implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6050
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the P gain of the speed controller.
This also makes the effective P gain (including adaptations) scalable.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctr Kp eff

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency: The connector output signal r1468 is increased by a factor of 100 in order to improve the resolution.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

218 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1469 Speed controller integral time effective / n_ctr Tn eff

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5040, 5042, 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SL Kp

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6040, 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 999999.000 0.300
Description: Sets the P gain for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The product p0341 x p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 1, 3,
4).

p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SL Tn

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6040, 6050
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 100000.0 [ms] 20.0 [ms]
Description: Set the integral time for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The integral component is stopped if the complete controller output or the sum of controller output and torque pre-
control reach the torque limit.

p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setting value when starting up with motor holding brake.
Recommendation: To hold the actual torque when stopping the motor, you are advised to set p1400 bit 1 = 1. As a result, the integral
component of the speed controller is frozen when changing to the open-loop controlled operating range.
Dependency: The switching in of the torque setting value for the motor holding brake has a higher priority than the setting of the
integrator value using p1477 and p1478.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The setting of the integral output of the speed controller begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056 bit 4) and ends
at the end of the brake control opening time p1216. A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take
place.
If p1351 is used as a signal source for the torque setting value, the percentage value is interpreted in relation to the
rated torque (p2003).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 219
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2520, 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2520, 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to set the integrator setting value (p1478).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1478, p1479
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the integrator setting value for the velocity controller.
The signal to set this integrator setting value is interconnected via p1477.
Dependency: The setting value of the speed controller integrator is weighted with the scaling factor of the signal source in p1479.
If p1478 is interconnected to the integral output of the speed controller (r1482), then after the magnetizing time
(r0346) and if the speed controller is enabled, the integral component of the controller is set to the last value before
the pulse inhibit. This value is set if no setting command (p1477) is interconnected or, at the instant that the pulses
were inhibited, a setting command is available, which is not de-activated up to the next time that the pulses are
inhibited. For sensorless vector control, in addition p1400.1 should be set to 1 so that when the drive is stopped, the
integral component of the speed controller is not controlled down to zero.
In order that when setting the integrator output, only the static torque is detected, we recommend that the
accelerating torque is completely pre-controlled (e.g. p1496).
If p1478 is interconnected to another output other than r1482, then after magnetizing and speed controller enable,
the integral output is set once if the setting command is not interconnected (p1477 = 0).
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1477, p1479
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

220 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1477, p1478

r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_outp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5040, 5042, 5210,
6030, 6040
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the compensation torque to be output within the droop calculation.
This parameter should be interconnected with the torque setpoint of the drive (corresponding to the selection p1488),
with which load equalization should be performed.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6030
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the compensation torque within the droop calculation.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6030
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the source for droop feedback.
With increasing torque, the speed setpoint is reduced (enabled using p1492), so that for mechanically coupled drives
a load equalization (load compensation) is obtained.
A load difference compensation is also possible, if p1486 is interconnected with the torque setpoint of the other drive.
Value: 0: Droop feedback not connected
1: Droop from torque setpoint
2: Droop from speed controller output
3: Droop from integral output speed controller
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1489, r1490, p1492

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 221
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Caution: For active acceleration precontrol of the speed controller (refer to p1496), it is not recommended that p1488 is set to
1, as this could result in positive coupling effects. Instead of this, as source of the droop feedback, the output signal
of the speed controller should be used, which generally sets the load torque.

p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6030
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 0.500 0.050
Description: Sets the scaling for the droop feedback
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, r1490, p1492
Note: Example:
A value of 0.05 means that for a torque equal to the rated motor torque, the rated motor speed is reduced by 5 %.

r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6030
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the output signal of the droop calculation. The droop feedback result is subtracted from the speed setpoint
when activated (p1492).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, p1489, p1492

p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2520, 6030
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, p1489, r1490
Note: Even when not enabled, the droop speed is calculated but not subtracted from the setpoint speed. This makes it
possible to subtract the result of this calculation from the speed of another drive.

r1493 CO: Moment of inertia total, scaled / M_inert tot scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: 6031
Min Max Factory setting
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Description: Display and connector output for the parameterized total moment of inertia.
The value is calculated as follows: (p0341 * p0342) + p1496
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

222 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_prectrl scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6031
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 10000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration pre-control of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0341, p0342
Warning: The acceleration precontrol r1518 is kept at the old value if the ramp-function generator tracking (r1199.5) is active or
the ramp-function generator output is set (r1199.3). This is used to avoid torque peaks. Depending on the application,
it may therefore be necessary to disable the ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0) or the acceleration
precontrol (p1496 = 0).
The acceleration precontrol is set to zero, if the Vdc control is active (r0056.14/15).
Note: The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960).
The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint)
and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled.
We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.

p1498[0...n] Load moment of inertia / Load M_inertia

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: 6031
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [kgm²] 100000.00000 [kgm²] 0.00000 [kgm²]
Description: Sets the load moment of inertia.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: (p0341 * p0342) + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation.

p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control scaling / a for M_ctrl scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6030
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration integrator at low speeds (only for encoderless torque control).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p0341, p0342

p1500[0...n] Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel

CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240B-2_DP Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 66 0
Description: Sets the source for the torque setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 223
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1503, p1511
Notice: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1500[0...n] Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel

CU240E-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 77 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the source for the torque setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus
7: Analog setpoint 2
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
27: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
67: Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2
70: Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint
72: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint
76: Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus
77: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1503, p1511
Notice: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

224 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2520, 6020
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for toggling between speed and torque control.
0 signal: Closed-loop speed control
1 signal: Closed-loop torque control
Dependency: The input connectors to enter the torque are provided using p1511, p1512 and p1513.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p1300
Notice: If the closed-loop torque control is not activated (p1300) and a change is made to closed-loop torque control (p1501),
OFF1 (p0840) does not have its own braking response but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226,
p1227).
Note: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1502[0...n] BI: Freeze moment of inertia estimator / J_estim freeze

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to freeze the estimated moment of inertia.
0 signal:
Moment of inertia estimator active
1 signal:
Determined moment of inertia frozen.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1300
Note: Only active when the "moment of inertia estimator" function module is active (r0108.10 = 1) and p1400.18 =1.

p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setpoint for torque control.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the
selection was made using the changeover source in p1501.
it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501.

r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6030, 6060, 6722
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 225
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output; for closed-loop torque control,
r1508 corresponds to the torque setpoint of the signal source assigned in p1503.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 1.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5060, 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary torque 1.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 2.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6060
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1515 Supplementary torque total / M_suppl total

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the total supplementary torque.
The displayed value is the total of supplementary torque values 1 and 2 (p1511, p1512, p1513, p1514).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

226 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1516 CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the total supplementary torque and the accelerating torque.
The displayed value is the total of the smoothed supplementary torque and the accelerating torque (p1516 =
p1518[1] + r1515).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6060
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The acceleration pre-control is inhibited if the smoothing is set to the maximum value.

r1518[0...1] CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1496

p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6630
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the fixed, upper torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1521, p1522, p1523, r1538, r1539
Danger: Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an
uncontrollable fashion.

Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 227
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6630
Min Max Factory setting
-20000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the fixed, lower torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1520, p1522, p1523
Danger: Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an
uncontrollable fashion.

Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).

p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6630
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1520[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1523
Danger: Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.

p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6020, 6630
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1521[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the lower torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522
Danger: Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.

p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6630
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

228 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6630
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.

r1526 CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6060, 6630, 6640
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the upper torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

r1527 CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6060, 6630, 6640
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the lower torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6630
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1524[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6630
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1525[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 229
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6640
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the power limit when motoring.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0500, p1531
Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.

p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6640
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [kW] -0.01 [kW] -0.01 [kW]
Description: Sets the regenerative power limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: r0206, p0500, p1530
Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.
For power units without energy recovery capability, the regenerative power limit is preset to 30 % of the power
r0206[0]. For a braking resistor connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), the power limit when generating is
automatically adapted.
For power units with energy recovery, the parameter is limited to the negative value of r0206[2].

r1533 Current limit torque-generating total / Iq_max total

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6640
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1536[0...1] Current limit maximum torque-generating current / Isq_max

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6640, 6710
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component.
Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller.
Index: [0] = Limited
[1] = Unlimited
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

230 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1537[0...1] Current limit minimum torque-generating current / Isq_min

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6640, 6710
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component.
Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller.
Index: [0] = Limited
[1] = Unlimited
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6640
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual effective upper torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.

r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6020, 6640
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual effective lower torque limit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.

r1547[0...1] CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 231
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1548[0...1] CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the
power unit as well as the parameterization in p0640.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking
into account the current and power limits.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1553[0...n] Stall limit scaling / Stall limit scal

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
80.0 [%] 130.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the stall limit for the start of field weakening.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Danger: If the stall current limit is increased, then the q current setpoint can exceed the stall limit; as a consequence, a
hysteresis effect can occur when loading and unloading.

p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking into
account the current and power limits.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1560[0...n] Moment of inertia estimator accelerating torque threshold value / J_est M thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [%] 100.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Sets the threshold for the accelerating torque for the moment of inertia estimator.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

232 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The moment of inertia estimator is active above this threshold.

The value is referred to the rated torque (r0333).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1400, p1561, p1562
Note: The moment of inertia estimation is inaccurate at very low accelerating torques. As a consequence, below this
threshold, the estimator does not provide any new values.

p1561[0...n] Moment of inertia estimator change time moment of inertia / J_est t J

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the change time for the moment of inertia for the moment of inertia estimator.
Lower values mean that faster changes are possible.
For a higher value, this estimated value is smoothed more significantly.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1400, p1560, p1562

p1562[0...n] Moment of inertia estimator change time load / J_est t load

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
5.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 10.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the change time for the load torque for the moment of inertia estimator.
Lower values mean that faster changes are possible.
For a higher value, this estimated value is smoothed more significantly.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1400, p1560, p1561

p1563[0...n] CO: Mom. of inertia estimator load torque direction of rotation pos. / J_est M pos
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [Nm] 340.28235E36 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the monitored load torque in the positive direction of rotation.
The moment of inertia estimator estimates the load torque drawn while the speed is constant.
Dependency: Refer to: p1400, p1560, p1561

p1564[0...n] CO: Mom. of inertia estimator load torque direction of rotation neg. / J_est M neg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [Nm] 340.28235E36 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the monitored load torque in the negative direction of rotation.
The moment of inertia estimator estimates the load torque drawn while the speed is constant.
Dependency: Refer to: p1400, p1560, p1561

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 233
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722
Min Max Factory setting
50.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting
in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set.

p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux threshold value for enabling the speed setpoint and the end of magnetizing (r0056.4).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: The parameter only has an influence if the flux actual value reaches the threshold value p1573 more quickly during
magnetizing than the time set in p0346. This is generally the case when selecting fast magnetization (p1401 bit 6).
The parameter has no influence for flying restart (see p1200) and after DC braking (see p1231).

p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6723, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 150.0 [Vrms] 2.0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0500
Note: In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to
the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve.
Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).

p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6723, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 150.0 [Vrms] 10.0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0500
Note: In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to
the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve.
Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

234 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1575[0...n] Voltage target value limit / U_tgt val lim

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6725
Min Max Factory setting
50.00 [%] 300.00 [%] 200.00 [%]
Description: Sets the limit of the voltage target value.
In steady-state field weakening operation this corresponds to the required output voltage.
The value of 100% refers to p0304.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The output voltage is only limited if the maximum output voltage (r0071) minus the voltage reserve (p1574)
corresponds to a value higher than p1575.
Limiting via p1575 allows the influence of the voltage ripple of the line supply voltage to be eliminated at the operating
point.

p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 100 [%] 80 [%]
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization.
When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce
Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.

p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 100 [%] 0 [%]
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization.
When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce
Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.

p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
4 [ms] 5000 [ms] 15 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 235
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1583 Flux setpoint smoothed / Flux setp smooth

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722, 6723, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed flux setpoint.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6722
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range
Recommendation: Smoothing should be especially used if there is no regenerative feedback into the line supply. This means that the
DC link voltage can quickly increase in regenerative operation
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed

p1586[0...n] Field weakening characteristic scaling / Field weak scal

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
80.0 [%] 120.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the pre-control characteristic for the start of field weakening.
For values above 100 % and for partial load situations, the field weakening starts at higher speeds.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: If the start of field weakening is shifted to lower speeds, then the voltage reserve is increased for partial load
situations.
If the start of field weakening is shifted to higher speeds, the voltage reserve is appropriately reduced so that for fast
load changes, it can be expected that this will have a negative impact on the dynamic performance.

r1589 Field-weakening current pre-control value / I_FieldWeak prectr

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6724
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the pre-control value for the field weakening current.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

236 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 999999.0 10.0
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the flux controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated.

r1593[0...1] CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6724
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the output of the field weakening controller (synchronous motor).
Index: [0] = PI output
[1] = I output
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller P gain / Field_ctrl Kp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6724
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 1000.00 0.00
Description: Sets the P gain of the field-weakening controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1595[0...n] Field weakening controller additional setpoint / Field_ctr add_setp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6726
Min Max Factory setting
-80.00 [%] 50.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets an additional setpoint for the field weakening controller.
The value refers to the dynamic voltage reserve (p1574).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: For a value equal to zero, the field weakening controller is activated when the maximum voltage, calculated with the
average value of the DC link voltage, is reached.
Negative values cause the field weakening controller to intervene earlier, so that the voltage can move away from the
modulation depth limit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 237
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723, 6724
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 300 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1597 CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl outp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6714, 6723, 6724,
6725, 6726
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the effective flux setpoint.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (sensorless) / M_set static

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6700, 6721, 6722,
6726
Min Max Factory setting
-200.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the static torque setpoint for sensorless vector control in the low speed range.
This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
For sensorless vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed. p1610
represents the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Notice: p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur.
Note: For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (ASM: rated magnetizing
current, RESM: no-load magnetizing current).
For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque.
Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in the case of induction and permanent-magnet synchronous
motors as well as closed-loop controlled reluctance motors.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

238 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1611[0...n] Additional acceleration torque (sensorless) / M_suppl_accel

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6700, 6721, 6722,
6726
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 30.0 [%]
Description: Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for sensorless vector control.
This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an
appropriate current setpoint and controlled.
For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque pre-control of the speed controller (p1496).

r1614 EMF maximum / EMF max

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6725
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the actual maximum possible electromotive force (EMF) of the separately-excited synchronous motor.
Dependency: The value is the basis for the flux setpoint.
The maximum possible EMF depends on the following factors:
- Actual DC link voltage (r0070).
- Maximum modulation depth (p1803).
- Field-generating and torque-generating current setpoint.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6721, 6722
Min Max Factory setting
4 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the current setpoint.
The current setpoint is generated from p1610 and p1611.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for sensorless vector control.

r1623[0...1] Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: For index 1:
Reserved.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 239
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1624 Field-generating current setpoint total / Id_setp total

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6640, 6721, 6723,
6727
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only
set when changes are made to the flux setpoint.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6710
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [ms] 50.0 [ms] 4.8 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached.

p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 70.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the flux-generating current component Isd.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: The parameter is effective for permanent-magnet synchronous motors.

p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the torque/force-generating current component Isq.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the current controller.
This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

240 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5714, 6700, 6714,
7017
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 2.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the current controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1715

r1718 CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Isq current controller (torque/force generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1719 Isq controller integral component / Isq_ctrl I_comp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1723 CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1724 Isd controller integral component / Isd_ctrl I_comp

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the integral component of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 241
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1725 Isd controller integral component limit / Isd_ctrl I_limit

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling scaling / Transv_decpl scal

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the quadrature arm decoupling
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: This parameter is ineffective for sensorless vector control. In this case, p1727 is always used. If p1726 is set to 0,
then the quadrature de-coupling is de-activated. The integral component of the Isd current controller remains
effective in the complete speed control range.
For the closed-loop control of synchronous motors, this parameter is used to scale the current controller de-coupling.

p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6714
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of quadrature arm decoupling when the voltage limit is reached.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1728 De-coupling voltage in-line axis / U_dir-axis_decoupl

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the d axis.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1729 De-coupling voltage quadrature axis / U_quad_decoupl

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the q axis.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

242 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1730[0...n] Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd ctrl Tn shutd
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
30 [%] 150 [%] 30 [%]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for de-activating the integral component of the Isd controller.
The d current controller is only effective as P controller for speeds greater than the threshold value. Instead of the
integral component, the quadrature arm decoupling is effective.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Warning: For settings above 80%, the d current controller is active up to the field weakening limit. When operated at the
voltage limit, this can result in an unstable behavior. In order to avoid this, the dynamic voltage reserve p1574 should
be increased.
Note: The parameter value is referred to the synchronous rated motor speed.

p1731[0...n] Isd controller combination current time component / Isd ctr I_combi T1
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant to calculate the d current DC component difference (combination current) to add to the d
current controller actual value.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: It is not added for p1731 = 0.

r1732[0...1] CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct U set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5700, 5714, 6714,
5718
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Display and connector output for the direct axis voltage setpoint Ud.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1733[0...1] CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad U set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 5700, 5714, 5718,
6714, 6719
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Display and connector output for the quadrature axis voltage setpoint Uq.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 243
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp
Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.025
Description: Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with sensorless vector control in the range that
current is injected.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 5.0 [%]
Description: Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled.
If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then status signal r1408.12 is set to 1.
Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (r1408.12 = 1), fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p2178
Note: Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * (100% - p1756)).

r1746 Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Signal to initiate stall detection
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * (100 % - p1756)).

p1749[0...n] Motor model increase changeover speed encoderless operation / Incr n_chng no enc
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 99.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Minimum operating frequency for rugged operation.
If the minimum value is greater than the lower changeover limit parameterized with p1755 * (1 - 2 * p1756), then the
difference is displayed using p1749 * p1755. The parameter value cannot be changed.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1755, p1756

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

244 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Unsigned8
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 1100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model.
Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
Bit 7 = 1: Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model (open-loop/closed-loop controlled) for regenerative
operation (ASM).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled start Yes No -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No -
02 Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for Yes No -
passive loads
03 Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Yes No -
06 Closed-loop/open-loop controlled (PMSM) Yes No -
for a blocked motor
07 Use rugged changeover limits Yes No -
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0500
Caution: Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit. Long delay times due to
blocking (p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should de-activate the function or use closed-
loop control throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1).
Note: Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for encoderless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500.
For bit 2 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate
any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation
characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the
already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
For bit 2 = 0:
Bit 3 is also automatically de-activated.
For bit 6 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into
open-loop controlled operation.
The following applies for encoderless vector control of synchronous motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177), the speed ramp-function generator is held in open-loop speed controlled
operation, and a change is not made into closed-loop controlled operation.
For bit 7 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors:
If the changeover limits are parameterized too low (p1755, p1756), then they are automatically increased to rugged
values by the absolute amount p1749 * p1755.
The effective time condition for changing over into open-controlled operation is obtained from the minimum value of
p1758 and 0.5 * r0384.
Is recommended that bit 7 is activated for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies, and at the same
time require low speed gradients..
Adequate parameterization of the current setpoint must be ensured (p1610, p1611).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 245
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Unsigned8
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model.
Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
Bit 7 = 1: Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model (open-loop/closed-loop controlled) for regenerative
operation (ASM).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled start Yes No -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No -
02 Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for Yes No -
passive loads
03 Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Yes No -
06 Closed-loop/open-loop controlled (PMSM) Yes No -
for a blocked motor
07 Use rugged changeover limits Yes No -
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0500
Caution: Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit. Long delay times due to
blocking (p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should de-activate the function or use closed-
loop control throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1).
Note: Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for encoderless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500.
For bit 2 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate
any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation
characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the
already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
For bit 2 = 0:
Bit 3 is also automatically de-activated.
For bit 6 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into
open-loop controlled operation.
The following applies for encoderless vector control of synchronous motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177), the speed ramp-function generator is held in open-loop speed controlled
operation, and a change is not made into closed-loop controlled operation.
For bit 7 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors:
If the changeover limits are parameterized too low (p1755, p1756), then they are automatically increased to rugged
values by the absolute amount p1749 * p1755.
The effective time condition for changing over into open-controlled operation is obtained from the minimum value of
p1758 and 0.5 * r0384.
Is recommended that bit 7 is activated for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies, and at the same
time require low speed gradients..
Adequate parameterization of the current setpoint must be ensured (p1610, p1611).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

246 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1751 Motor model status / MotMod status

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the motor model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled operation Active Inactive 6721
01 Set ramp-function generator Active Inactive -
02 Stop RsLh adaptation Yes No -
03 Feedback Active Inactive -
05 Holding angle Yes No -
06 Acceleration criterion Active Inactive -
07 Set angular integrator PMSM Yes No -
08 Stop Kt adaptation PMSM Yes No -
09 PolID active PMSM encoderless Yes No -
10 I injection PMSM Yes No -
11 Speed controller output cannot be set to Yes No -
zero
12 Rs adapt waits Yes No -
13 Motor operation Yes No -
14 Stator frequency sign Positive Negative -
15 Torque sign Motor mode Regenerative mode -
16 Pulse injection active PMSM Yes No -
17 Operation with rugged model feedback Enabled Inhibited -
18 Operation of the current model with current Enabled Inhibited -
feedback
19 Current feedback in the current model Active Inactive -
20 Rugged increase of the changeover limits Active Inactive -
21 Motor blocked (RFG stop) PMSM No Yes -
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: For bit 17:
Displays the enabled status of the rugged model feedback (p1784).
The feedback is used to increase the parameter ruggedness of the motor model and is effective in the operating
range of the two-component closed loop current control.
For bit 18:
Displays the status when enabling the differential current feedback in the current model for operation with encoder.
The function is automatically enabled with p1784 > 0 or p1731 > 0. The feedback is used for a rugged change
between the current model and complete machine model with active rugged model feedback and combination
current.
For bit 19:
Displays the currently active stator circuit feedback in current model operation.
For bit 20:
Displays the currently effective increase of the changeover limits by the value p1749 * p1755.
For bit 21:
For a blocked synchronous motor, the speed ramp-function generator is held in the open-loop speed controlled
operating range if the torque setpoint reaches the torque limit and the speed is less than the threshold value in
p2175.

p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed to change over the motor model to encoderless operation.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 247
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1749, p1756
Notice: The changeover speed represents the steady-state minimum speed up to which the motor model can be used in
sensorless steady-state operation.
If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make sense to increase the parameter value.
On the other hand, very low changeover speeds can negatively impact the stability.
Note: The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode.

p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation /

MotMod n_chgov hys
Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6730, 6731
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 95.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for encoderless operation.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1755
Note: The parameter value refers to p1755.
Extremely small hystereses can have a negative impact on the stability in the changeover speed range, and very
high hystereses in the standstill range.

p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
100 [ms] 10000 [ms] 500 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed when changing from closed-loop controlled operation
to open-loop controlled operation.
Dependency: The wait time has no significance if the setpoint speed before the ramp-function generator lies in the open-loop
speed controlled operating range. In this case, the change is made without any delay.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1755, p1756
Note: If p1758 is changed, commissioning must be selected in order to validate the value for the blocking monitoring.

p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl
Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum time for a transition from open-loop controlled to closed-loop controlled operation after the lower
changeover speed p1755 * (1 - p1756 / 100 %) has been exceeded.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1755, p1756
Note: With p1759 = 2000 ms, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by the output
frequency only (changeover for p1755).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

248 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1762[0...1] Motor model deviation component 1 / MotMod dev comp 1

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6721, 6730, 6731
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Induction motor (ASM):
Displays the referred imaginary system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PMSM):
Displays the system deviation for speed adaptation.
r1762[0]: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the estimated EMF.
r1762[1]: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the low-level signal response for pulse technique.
Index: [0] = Deviation model 1
[1] = Deviation model 2
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1763 Motor model deviation component 2 / MotMod dev comp 2

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Induction motor (ASM):
Displays the referred real system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PMSM):
Not used.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6730
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 1000.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1765 Motor model speed adaptation Kp effective / MotM n_ada Kp act

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective proportional gain of the controller for the speed adaptation.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 249
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6730
Min Max Factory setting
1 [ms] 200 [ms] 4 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1768 Motor model speed adaptation Vi effective / MotM n_ada Vi act

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective gain of the integral component of the controller for speed adaptation.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1770 CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6730
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1771 CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 6730
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)

r1773[0...1] Motor model slip speed / MotMod slip

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays estimated (speed) signals of the motor model.
r1773[0]: Displays the estimated (mechanical) slip of the motor model.
r1773[1]: Displays the estimated input speed of the motor model.
Index: [0] = Slip speed estimated
[1] = Speed estimated
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

250 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1774[0...n] Motor model offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.

p1775[0...n] Motor model offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low
speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.

r1776[0...6] Motor model status signals / MotMod status sig

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the internal status signals of the motor model.
Index 0: Changeover ramp between current and voltage models
Index 1: Changeover ramp for model feedback (only for induction motors without encoder)
Index 2: Changeover ramp for zero frequency range (only for induction motors without encoder)
Index 6: Transition ramp for EMF deviation at PLL input (PMSM without encoder)
Index: [0] = Changeover ramp motor model
[1] = Changeover ramp model tracking
[2] = Changeover ramp zero frequency induction motor without encoder
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Reserved
[6] = Changeover ramp motor model PMSM without encoder
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: ASM: induction motor
PMSM: permanent-magnet synchronous motor

r1778 Motor model flux angle difference / MotMod ang diff

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2005 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 251
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0101 1100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Induction motor (ASM): Rs, Lh, and offset compensation.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PMSM): kT
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation Yes No -
02 Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Yes No -
03 Select motor model PMSM kT adaptation Yes No -
04 Select motor model offset adaptation Yes No -
06 Select pole position identification PMSM Yes No -
encoderless
07 Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation Yes No -
10 Filter time combination current like current Yes No -
ctrl integral time
12 Start PMSM sensorless with last angle Yes No -
13 Fast pulsed pole position identification Yes No -
14 Delay of the precontrol speed to the motor Yes No -
model
15 RESM Q flux model linear active Yes No -
Dependency: In U/f characteristic operating mode only bit 7 is relevant.
For active motor model feedback (see p1784), the Lh adaptation is internally de-activated automatically.
Note: ASM: Induction motor
PMSM: permanent-magnet synchronous motor
When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is de-
activated and is instead taken into account in the motor model.
In order that the correction values of the Rs, Lh and kT adaptation (selected using Bit 0 ... Bit 2) are correctly
accepted when changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each
different motor.
For bit 12 (only for synchronous motors and bit 6 = 1):
The pole position identification is only carried out after power on and after the motor has coasted down. The switch-
off speed p1226 should be as low as possible. If the power unit is switched off when the motor is stationary, then the
next time that the power unit is switched on, the old angle is used as starting value. The precondition applies that
while the power unit is switched off the motor does not rotate.
The duration of the pole position identification is shortened using bit 13. As a consequence, the pole wheel angle
error can be slightly greater.

p1784[0...n] Motor model feedback scaling / MotMod fdbk scal

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for model fault feedback.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Note: Feeding back the measured model fault to the model states increases the control stability and makes the motor
model rugged against parameter errors.
When feedback is selected (p1784 > 0), Lh adaptation is not effective.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

252 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.100
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the corrective value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)
Refer to: p0826, p1780
Note: The adaptation result is reset if the magnetizing inductance of the induction motor is changed (p0360, r0382). This
also happens when changing over the data set if a different motor is not being used (p0826).
The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.

r1791 Motor model Lh adaptation switch-on frequency / MotMod Lh f_on

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the switch-on stator frequency/ primary section frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor
(ASM).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1792 Motor model Lh adaptation switch-on slip / MotMod Lh fslip

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the switch-on slip frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 253
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6731
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PMSM).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1), "Dynamic Drive Control" (DDC, p0096
= 2)

r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6731
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]
Description: Displays the corrective value of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor
(PMSM).
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p0826, p1780
Note: The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.

p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8021
Min Max Factory setting
2.000 [kHz] 16.000 [kHz] 4.000 [kHz]
Description: Sets the pulse frequency for the converter.
This parameter is pre-set to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned.
Dependency: Refer to: p0230
Note: The maximum and minimum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used (minimum
pulse frequency: 2 kHz or 4 kHz).
When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be
reduced (derating, refer to r0067).
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be set below the
minimum value required for the filter.
For operation with output reactors, the pulse frequency is limited to 4 kHz (see p0230).
If p1800 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to
be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1800 have been changed by a parameter that was set when
the drive was commissioned (e.g. p1082).

r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual converter switching frequency.
Index: [0] = Actual
[1] = Modulator minimum value
Note: The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition (p0290).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

254 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 19 10
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Value: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: SVM without overcontrol
4: SVM/FLB without overcontrol
10: SVM/FLB with modulation depth reduction
19: Optimized pulse pattern
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without
overcontrol can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This does not apply to power units PM260.
p1802 = 10 can only be set for power units PM230 and PM240 and for r0204.15 = 0.
Refer to: p0230, p0500
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2, 10), the modulation depth
must be limited using p1803 (default, p1803 = 98%). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple
and torque ripple.
With p1802 = 10, the modulation depth limit is automatically reduced to 100% in the critical output frequency range
(over approx. 57 Hz).
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.

p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 0
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Value: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: SVM without overcontrol
4: SVM/FLB without overcontrol
10: SVM/FLB with modulation depth reduction
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without
overcontrol can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This does not apply to power units PM260.
p1802 = 10 can only be set for power units PM230 and PM240 and for r0204.15 = 0.
Refer to: p0230, p0500
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2, 10), the modulation depth
must be limited using p1803 (default, p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple
and torque ripple.
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.

p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode

PM250 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Integer16
PM260 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 4
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Value: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: SVM without overcontrol
4: SVM/FLB without overcontrol

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 255
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without
overcontrol can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This does not apply to power units PM260.
Refer to: p0230, p0500
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2, 10), the modulation depth
must be limited using p1803 (default, p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple
and torque ripple.
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.

p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
20.0 [%] 120.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: p0500
Note: p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).

p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 106.0 [%]
Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: p0500
Note: p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).

p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max

PM250 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6723
Min Max Factory setting
20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 106.0 [%]
Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: Default setting PM260: 103 %.
Refer to: p0500
Note: p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).

p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr

PM230 Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM230_STO Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM250, PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant for the DC link voltage.
This time constant is used to calculate the modulation depth.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

256 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant for the DC link voltage.
This time constant is used to calculate the modulation depth.

r1808 DC link voltage actual value for U_max calculation / Vdc act val U_max
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage.

r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 9 -
Description: Displays the effective modulator mode.
Value: 1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
9: Optimized pulse pattern

p1810 Modulator configuration / Modulator config

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the modulator.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Avg value filter for U_lim (only for Yes No -
Vdc_comp. in modulator)
01 DC link voltage compensation in the current Yes No -
control
Notice: Bit 1 = 1 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1.
Note: For bit 00 = 0:
Voltage limitation from the minimum of the DC link voltage (lower ripple in the output current, reduced output
voltage).
For bit 00 = 1:
Voltage limitation from averaged DC link voltage (higher output voltage with increased ripple in the output current).
The selection is only valid if the DC link compensation is not performed in the Control Unit (bit 1 = 0).
For bit 01 = 0:
DC link voltage compensation in the modulator.
For bit 01 = 1:
DC link voltage compensation in the current control.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 257
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(2), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor without setpoint change.
If the motor does not rotate in the required direction, then the output phase sequence can be reversed using this
parameter. This means that the direction of the motor is reversed without the setpoint being changed.
Value: 0: OFF
1: ON
Note: This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited.

p1822 Power unit line phases monitoring tolerance time / PU ph monit t_tol
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
500 [ms] 540000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
Description: Sets the tolerance time for line phase monitoring for blocksize power units.
If a line phase fault is present for longer than this tolerance time, then a corresponding fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F30011
Notice: When operating with a failed line phase, depending on the active power, values higher than the default value can
either immediately damage the power unit or damage it over the long term.
Note: For the setting p1822 = maximum value, line phase monitoring is de-activated.

p1825 Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 100.0 [Vrms] 0.6 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated.
Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.

p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U.
Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.

p1829 Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

258 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1830 Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.

p1832 Dead time compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Arms] 10000.0 [Arms] 0.0 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current level for the dead time compensation.
Above the current level, the dead time - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a
previously calculated constant value. If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by
p1832, the corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced.
Dependency: The factory setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207).

r1838.0...15 CO/BO: Gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word 1 of the power unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault time-critical ON OFF -
01 Gating unit mode bit 0 ON OFF -
02 Pulse enable ON OFF -
03 Switch-off signal path STO_B Inactive Active -
04 Switch-off signal path STO_A Inactive Active -
05 Gating unit mode bit 1 ON OFF -
06 Gating unit mode bit 2 ON OFF -
07 Brake state ON OFF -
08 Brake diagnostics ON OFF -
09 Armature short-circuit braking Active Not active -
10 Gating unit state bit 0 ON OFF -
11 Gating unit state bit 1 ON OFF -
12 Gating unit state bit 2 ON OFF -
13 Alarm status bit 0 ON OFF -
14 Alarm status bit 1 ON OFF -
15 Diagnostics 24 V ON OFF -

p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
PM230 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM230_STO Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250, PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.
The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary (p1900 = 1, 2; also refer to p1910). Based
on this, additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor
rotating (p1900 = 1, 3; also refer to p1960; not for p1300 < 20).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 259
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 1:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
With the following switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a
speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 2:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
p1900 = 3:
Sets p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
When the drive enable signals are present, with the next switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification
routine is carried out - and in addition, speed controller optimization by taking measurements at different motor
speeds.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Identifying motor data and optimizing the speed controller
2: Identifying motor data (at standstill)
3: Optimizing the speed controller (in rotating operation)
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1910, p1960
Refer to: A07980, A07981, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, F07988, F07990, A07991
Notice: p1900 = 3:
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameter (p0971).
For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The motor and control parameters of the vector control are only optimally set when both measurements are carried
out (initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating). The measurement with rotating motor is not performed for
p1300 < 20 (U/f controls).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The switch-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.
If a reluctance motor has been parameterized, a pole position identification is carried out during the stationary
measurement. As a consequence, faults that occur can also be assigned to the pole position identification.

p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 12 0
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.
The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary (p1900 = 1, 2; also refer to p1910). Based
on this, additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor
rotating (p1900 = 1, 3; also refer to p1960; not for p1300 < 20).
p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

260 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1900 = 1:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
With the following switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a
speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 2:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
p1900 = 3:
Sets p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
When the drive enable signals are present, with the next switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification
routine is carried out - and in addition, speed controller optimization by taking measurements at different motor
speeds.
p1900 = 11, 12:
The same as p1900 = 1, 2 with the difference, that after the measurement, the system immediately goes into
operation. For this purpose, p1909.18 is set = p1959.13 is set = 1 .
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Identifying motor data and optimizing the speed controller
2: Identifying motor data (at standstill)
3: Optimizing the speed controller (in rotating operation)
11: Motor data ident. and speed controller opt., switch to operation
12: Motor data identification (at standstill), switch to operation
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1910, p1960
Refer to: A07980, A07981, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, F07988, F07990, A07991
Notice: p1900 = 3:
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameter (p0971).
For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The motor and control parameters of the vector control are only optimally set when both measurements are carried
out (initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating). The measurement with rotating motor is not performed for
p1300 < 20 (U/f controls).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The switch-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.
If a reluctance motor has been parameterized, a pole position identification is carried out during the stationary
measurement. As a consequence, faults that occur can also be assigned to the pole position identification.

p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 261
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit 00: Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit once/always when the pulses are enabled.
Bit 01: Check for ground fault once/always when the pulses are enabled.
Bit 02: Activation of the tests selected using bit 00 and/or bit 01 each time the pulses are enabled
Recommendation: If the ground fault test is incorrectly initiated because the motor is not at a complete standstill, then the pulse
cancellation delay time (p1228) should be increased.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Phase short-circuit test pulse active Yes No -
01 Ground fault detection test pulse active Yes No -
02 Test pulse at each pulse enable Yes No -
Dependency: The ground fault test is only possible when the motor is stationary, and is therefore only realized when flying restart is
de-activated (p1200 = 0).
Refer to: p0287
Note: If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1.
If a ground fault is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.2.
For bit 02 = 0:
If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), it is not repeated.
For bit 02 = 1:
The test is not only performed after POWER ON, but also each time the pulses are enabled.

r1902 Test pulse evaluation status / Test puls ev stat

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the test pulse evaluation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Short-circuit test successfully performed Yes No -
01 Phase short-circuit detected Yes No -
02 Ground fault test successfully performed Yes No -
03 Ground fault detected Yes No -
04 Identification pulse width greater than the Yes No -
minimum pulse width
Note: If the ground fault test was selected, but not successfully performed, then sufficient current was not be able to be
established during the test pulses.
For bit 04:
A test pulse longer than one sampling time has occurred

p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor data identification.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Stator inductance estimate no Yes No -
measurement
02 Rotor time constant estimate no Yes No -
measurement
03 Leakage inductance estimate no Yes No -
measurement
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time Yes No -
range
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 De-activate vibration detection Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

262 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

11 De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -

12 De-activate rotor resistance Rr Yes No -
measurement
14 De-activate valve interlocking time Yes No -
measurement
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve Yes No -
voltage fault, dead time
16 Short motor identification (lower quality) Yes No -
17 Measurement without control parameter Yes No -
calculation
18 After motID direct transition into operation Yes No -
19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No -
20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No -
Note: The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors:
Without de-selection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature
inductance Lq are measured at a low current.
When de-selecting with bit 11 or in the U/f mode, the stator inductance is measured at half the rated motor current.
If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be de-
selected.
Bit 19 = 1:
All parameters are automatically saved after a successful motor data identification.
If a speed controller optimization run is then selected, the parameters are only saved after this measurement has
been completed.

Bit 22 = 1:
Only that measurement is carried out that is required for the flying restart of a reluctance motor. The bit is reset after
a successful measurement

p1910 Motor data identification selection / MotID selection

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 28 0
Description: Sets the motor data identification routine.
The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next switch-on command.
p1910 = 1:
All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parameters:
p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830
After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated.
p1910 = 20:
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data
2: Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance
20: Voltage vector input
21: Voltage vector input without filter
22: Rectangular voltage vector input without filter
23: Triangular voltage vector input without filter
24: Rectangular voltage vector input with filter
25: Triangular voltage vector input with filter
26: Enter voltage vector with DTC correction
27: Enter voltage vector with AVC
28: Enter voltage vector with DTC + AVC correction
Dependency: "Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1, p3900 > 0) before executing the motor data identification
routine!
When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1900
Refer to: F07990, A07991

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 263
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data
identification routine is carried out as follows at the next switch-on command:
- current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals.
- during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution.
- however, no torque torque is generated.
Note: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
When setting p1910, the following should be observed:
1. "With acceptance" means:
The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influence
on the controller setting.
2. "Without acceptance" means:
The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926 (service parameters). The controller
settings remain unchanged.
3. For settings 27 and 28, the AVC configuration set using p1840 is active.
The switch-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it. The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This
time is mainly influenced by the motor size. At the end of the motor data identification, p1910 is automatically set to 0,
if only the stationary measurement is selected, then p1900 is also reset to 0, otherwise, the rotating measurement is
activated.

p1911 Phases to be identified number / Ph to ident qty

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
Description: Sets the number of phases to be identified.
Value: 1: 1 phase U
2: 2 phases U, V
3: 3 phases U, V, W
Note: When identifying with several phases, the accuracy increases and also the time it takes to make the measurement.

r1912[0...2] Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1913[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the identified rotor time constant.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

264 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1914[0...2] Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the identified total leakage inductance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1915[0...2] Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1916[0...2] Identified stator inductance 1 / L_stator 1 ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator inductance identified for the 1st point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1917[0...2] Identified stator inductance 2 / L_stator 2 ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1918[0...2] Identified stator inductance 3 / L_stator 3 ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator inductance identified for the 3rd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 265
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r1919[0...2] Identified stator inductance 4 / L_stator 4 ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator inductance identified for the 4th point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1925[0...2] Identified threshold voltage / U_threshold ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1926[0...2] Identified effective valve lockout time / t_lock_valve id

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Displays the identified effective valve lockout time.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1927[0...2] Identified rotor resistance / R_rotor ident

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays identified rotor resistance (on separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance).
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned16
PM230_STO Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
PM240 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0001 1110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement.
For bit 12 = 1:
The selection only has an effect on the measurement p1960 = 1, 2. For the shortened measurement, the magnetizing
current and moment of inertia are determined with a somewhat lower accuracy.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

266 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For bit 13 = 1:
After the measurement has been completed, the system immediately goes into closed-loop speed controlled
operation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller Yes No -
parameters
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
11 Do not change the controller parameters Yes No -
during the measurement
12 Measurement shortened Yes No -
13 After measurement direct transition into Yes No -
operation
Dependency: Refer to: F07988
Note: The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496

p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config

PM250 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0001 1110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller Yes No -
parameters
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
11 Do not change the controller parameters Yes No -
during the measurement
Dependency: Refer to: F07988
Note: The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496

p1960 Rotating measurement selection / Rot meas sel

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the rotating measurement.
The rotating measurement is carried out after the next switch-on command.
The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300).
p1300 < 20 (U/f open-loop control):
It is not possible to select rotating measurement or speed controller optimization.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 267
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1300 = 20, 22 (encoderless operation):

Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Rotating measurement in encoderless operation
3: Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation
Dependency: Before the rotating measurement is carried out, the motor data identification routine (p1900, p1910, r3925) should
have already been done.
When selecting the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1300, p1900, p1959, p1967, r1968
Danger: For drives with a mechanical system that limits the distance moved, it must be ensured that this is not reached during
the rotating measurement. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out.

Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).

To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameter (p0971).
Note: When the rotating measurement is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971).
Parameter changes are automatically made for the rotating measurement (e.g. p1120); this is the reason that up to
the end of the measurement, and if no faults are present, no manual changes should be made.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) are limited, for the rotating measurement, to 900 s.

p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
26 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
Description: Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic.
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959
Refer to: F07983
Note: The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.

p1965 Speed_ctrl_opt speed / n_opt speed

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
Description: Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test.
Induction motor:
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Synchronous motor:
The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum speed).
Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959
Refer to: F07984, F07985
Note: In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried out - the specified value corresponds to the lower
speed setpoint. This value is increased by 20 % for the upper speed value.
The q leakage inductance (refer to p1959.5) is determined at zero speed and at 50 % of p1965 - however, with a
maximum output frequency of 15 Hz and at a minimum of 10% of the rated motor speed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

268 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1967 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization.
After optimization, the dynamic response achieved is displayed in r1968.
Dependency: Refer to: p1959, r1968
Refer to: F07985
Note: For a rotating measurement, this parameter can be used to optimize the speed controller.
p1967 = 100 % --> speed controller optimization according to a symmetric optimum.
p1967 > 100 % --> optimization with a higher dynamic response (Kp higher, Tn lower).
If the actual dynamic response (see r1968) is significantly reduced with respect to the required dynamic response
(p1967), then this can be as a result of mechanical load oscillations. If, in spite of this load behavior, a higher dynamic
response is required, then the oscillation test (p1959.4 = 0) should be de-activated and the measurement repeated.

r1968 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test
Dependency: Refer to: p1959, p1967
Refer to: F07985
Note: This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960.

r1969 Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined / n_opt M_inert det

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Description: Displays the determined moment of inertia of the drive.
After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1959
Refer to: F07984

r1970[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined / n_opt f_vib det
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test.
Index: [0] = Frequency low
[1] = Frequency high
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: F07985

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 269
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p1974 Speed_ctrl_opt saturation characteristic rotor flux maximum / n_opt rot_fl max
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
104 [%] 120 [%] 120 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum flux setpoint to measure the saturation characteristic.

p1980[0...n] PolID technique / PolID technique

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 10 4
Description: Sets the pole position identification technique.
p1980 = 1, 8: The current magnitude is set using p0329.
p1980 = 4, 6: The current magnitude of the first measurement section is set using p0325, the second using p0329.
p1980 = 10: The rated motor current is impressed to align.
The current magnitudes are limited to the rated power unit values.
Value: 1: Voltage pulsing 1st harmonic
4: Voltage pulsing 2-stage
6: Voltage pulsing 2-stage inverse
8: Voltage pulsing 2nd harmonic, inverse
10: DC current injection
Dependency: When commissioning a catalog motor, the technique is automatically selected depending on the motor type being
used.
Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1780
Refer to: F07969
Note: Voltage pulse technique (p1980 = 1, 4) cannot be applied to operation with sine-wave output filters (p0230).

r1984 PolID angular difference / PolID ang diff

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the angular difference between the actual electrical commutation angle and the angle determined by the
pole position identification.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1985, r1987
Note: When the pole position identification routine is executed several times, the spread of the measured values can be
determined using this value. At the same position, the spread should be less than 2 degrees electrical.

r1985 PolID saturation curve / PolID sat_char

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the saturation characteristic of the pole position identification routine (saturation technique).
Displays the current characteristic of the pole position identification routine (elasticity technique).
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1984, r1987

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

270 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: PolID: Pole position identification

Regarding the saturation technique:
The values for the characteristic of the last saturation-based pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms
in order to record signals (e.g. trace).

r1987 PolID trigger characteristic / PolID trig_char

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the trigger characteristic of the pole position identification routine.
The values for the characteristic of the last pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to record
signals (e.g. trace).
The values for trigger characteristic and saturation characteristic are always output in synchronism from a time
perspective.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985
Note: PolID: Pole position identification
The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic.
- the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement.
- the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the pole position identification routine.

p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and PollD scaling / Com_ang_offs scal
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 5000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the runtime of the pole position identification technique in which the current is injected.
Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342
Caution: For p1999 > 100 % (setting large moments of inertia) the following applies:
There is no locked rotor monitoring (F07970 fault value 2).

Note: For high moments of inertia, it is practical to scale the runtime of the calibration higher.

p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
6.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.
All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in ((rpm) / 60) x pole pair number)
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
Refer to: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004, r3996
Notice: When the reference speed / reference frequency is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
Example 1:
The signal of an analog input (e.g. r0755[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percentage
input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 271
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Example 2:
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is
converted to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000).

p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [Vrms] 100000 [Vrms] 1000 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for voltages.
All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. This also applies for direct voltage
values (= rms value) like the DC-link voltage.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Note:
This reference quantity also applies to direct voltage values. It is not interpreted as rms value, but as DC voltage
value.
Dependency: p2001 is only updated during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning has been carried
out first for drive data set zero and as a result overwriting of the parameter has not been blocked by setting p0573 =
1.
Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the reference voltage is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
For infeed units, the parameterized device supply voltage (p0210) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0070) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage value
is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the parameterized
scaling.

p2002 Reference current / I_ref

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [Arms] 100000.00 [Arms] 100.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for currents.
All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
Refer to: r3996
Notice: If various DDS are used with different motor data, then the reference quantities remain the same as these are not
changed over with the DDS. The resulting conversion factor must be taken into account.
Example:
p2002 = 100 A
Reference quantity 100 A corresponds to 100 %
p0305[0] = 100 A
Rated motor current 100 A for MDS0 in DDS0 --> 100 % corresponds to 100 % of the rated motor current
p0305[1] = 50 A
Rated motor current 50 A for MDS1 in DDS1 --> 100 % corresponds to 200 % of the rated motor current
When the reference current is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

272 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Pre-assigned value is p0640.

If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
For infeed units, the rated line current, which is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply
voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current value
is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the parameterized
scaling.

p2003 Reference torque / M_ref

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 1.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for torque.
All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the reference torque is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: Pre-assigned value is 2 * p0333.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
Example:
The actual value of the total torque (r0079) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is
cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized
scaling.

r2004 Reference power / P_ref

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the reference quantity for power.
All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This value is calculated as follows:
Infeed: Calculated from voltage times current.
Closed-loop control: Calculated from torque times speed.
Refer to: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 273
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2005 Reference angle / Reference angle

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
90.00 [°] 180.00 [°] 90.00 [°]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for angle.
All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.

p2006 Reference temp / Ref temp

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
50.00 [°C] 300.00 [°C] 100.00 [°C]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for temperature.
All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).

p2007 Reference acceleration / a_ref

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [rev/s²] 500000.00 [rev/s²] 0.01 [rev/s²]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for acceleration rates.
All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
The reference acceleration is calculated as follows:
p2007 = p2000 / 1 [s]

p2010 Comm IF baud rate / Comm baud

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
6 12 12
Description: Sets the baud rate for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Value: 6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
8: 38400 baud
9: 57600 baud
10: 76800 baud

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

274 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

11: 93750 baud

12: 115200 baud
Note: COMM-IF: Commissioning interface
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2011 Comm IF address / Comm add

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 31 2
Description: Sets the address for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2016[0...3] CI: Comm IF USS PZD send word / Comm USS send word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: 4000H Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via the commissioning interface USS.
The actual values are displayed on an intelligent operator panel (IOP).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4

r2019[0...7] Comm IF error statistics / Comm err

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the receive errors at the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams
[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors

p2020 Field bus interface baud rate / Field bus baud

CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
4 13 8
Description: Sets the baud rate for the field bus interface (RS485).
Value: 4: 2400 baud
5: 4800 baud
6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
8: 38400 baud
9: 57600 baud

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 275
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

10: 76800 baud

11: 93750 baud
12: 115200 baud
13: 187500 baud
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
For p0014 = 0, the following applies:
Before a changed setting becomes permanently effective, a non-volatile RAM to ROM data save is required. To do
this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.
Note: Fieldbus IF: Fieldbus interface
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected.
When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 4/13/8
When p2030 = 2 (Modbus), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 5/13/7

p2021 Field bus interface address / Field bus address

CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 247 0
Description: Displays or sets the address for the fieldbus interface (RS485).
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p2021 displays the address setting.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p2021
--> Only if an address of 0 or an address that is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the
address switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2030
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
For p0014 = 0, the following applies:
Before a changed setting becomes permanently effective, a non-volatile RAM to ROM data save is required. To do
this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected.
When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 0/30/0
When p2030 = 2 (Modbus), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 1/247/1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

276 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2022 Field bus int USS PZD no. / Field bus USS PZD
CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 2
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Dependency: Refer to: p2030
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2023 Field bus int USS PKW no. / Field bus USS PKW
CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 127 127
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: PKW 0 words
3: PKW 3 words
4: PKW 4 words
127: PKW variable
Dependency: Refer to: p2030
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2024[0...2] Fieldbus interface times / Fieldbus times

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] [0] 1000 [ms]
[1] 0 [ms]
[2] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the time values for the fieldbus interface.
For Modbus the following applies:
p2024[0, 1]: Not relevant.
p2024[2]: Telegram pause time (pause time between two telegrams).
Index: [0] = Max. processing time
[1] = Character delay time
[2] = Telegram pause time
Dependency: Refer to: p2020, p2030
Note: For p2024[2] (Modbus):
If the field bus baud rate is changed (p2020), the default time setting is restored.
The default setting corresponds to a time of 3.5 characters (dependent on the baud rate that has been set).

r2029[0...7] Field bus int error statistics / Field bus error

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the receive errors on the field bus interface (RS485).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 277
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams

[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors

p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 3
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
3: PROFIBUS
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol

CU240B-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
1: USS
2: Modbus RTU
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 7
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
7: PROFINET
10: EtherNet/IP
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

278 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2031 Fieldbus interface MODBUS parity / Modbus parity

CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 2
Description: Sets the parity for the Modbus protocol (p2030 = 2).
Value: 0: No parity
1: Odd parity
2: Even parity
Note: Fieldbus IF: Fieldbus interface
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected (p2030 = 2).

r2032 Master control control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Operation enable Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator enable Yes No -
05 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Speed setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030
10 Master control by PLC Yes No -
Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control word/setpoints can be
transferred from another automation device.
Note: OC: Operating condition

p2037 PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode / PD STW1.10=0

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
0 2 0
Description: Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC".
Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive
profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that
deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter.
Value: 0: Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life
1: Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life
2: Do not freeze setpoints
Recommendation: Do not change the setting p2037 = 0.
Note: If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then
p2037 should be set to 2.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 279
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
0 2 0
Description: Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words.
When selecting a telegram via p0922 (p2079), this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits in
the control and status words.
Value: 0: SINAMICS
2: VIK-NAMUR
Dependency: Refer to: p0922, p2079
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: - For p0922 (p2079) = 1, 350 ... 999, p2038 is automatically set to 0.
- For p0922 (p2079) = 20, p2038 is automatically set to 2.
It is not then possible to change p2038.

p2039 Select debug monitor interface / Debug monit select

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (commissioning interface, RS232) or COM2 (fieldbus interface,
RS485).
Value = 0: De-activated
Value = 1: COM1, commissioning protocol is de-activated
Value = 2: COM2, field bus is de-activated
Value = 3: Reserved
Note: Value = 2 is only possible for Control Units with RS485 as a field bus interface.

p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 9310
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1999999 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface.
If no process data is received within this time, then an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F01910
Note: p2040 = 0:
Monitoring is de-activated.

p2042 PROFIBUS Ident Number / PB Ident No.

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the PROFIBUS Ident Number (PNO-ID).
SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is
independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

280 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: SINAMICS
1: VIK-NAMUR
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

r2043.0...2 BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Setpoint failure Yes No -
02 Fieldbus oper Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: p2044
Note: When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered
when the setpoint fails.

p2044 PROFIdrive fault delay / PD fault delay

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F 0 [s] 100 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure.
The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the
failure while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction).
Dependency: Refer to: r2043
Refer to: F01910

p2047 PROFIBUS additional monitoring time / PB suppl t_monit

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the additional monitoring time to monitor the process data received via PROFIBUS.
Enables short bus faults to be compensated.
If no process data is received within this time, then an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F01910
Note: For controller STOP, the additional monitoring time is not effective.

r2050[0...11] CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive word / PZD recv word

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: 4000H Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2440, 2468, 9360
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 281
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or
FloatingPoint data types. A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060.

p2051[0...16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: 4000H Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2450, 2470, 9370
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - [0] 2089[0]
[1] 63[0]
[2...16] 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p2051[0...16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: 4000H Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2450, 2470, 9370
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

282 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

r2053[0...16] PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word / Diag send word

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2450, 2470, 9370
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

r2054 PROFIBUS status / PB status

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 -
Description: Status display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Value: 0: OFF
1: No connection (search for baud rate)
2: Connection OK (baud rate found)
3: Cyclic connection with master (data exchange)
4: Cyclic data OK

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 283
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r2055[0...2] PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Index: [0] = Master bus address
[1] = Master input total length bytes
[2] = Master output total length bytes

r2057 PROFIBUS address switch diagnostics / PB addr_sw diag

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the setting of the PROFIBUS address switch "DP ADDRESS" on the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: p0918
Notice: The display is updated after switching on, and not cyclically.

r2060[0...10] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / PZD recv DW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: 4000H Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2440, 2468
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Dependency: Refer to: r2050
Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or
FloatingPoint data types.
A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060.

p2061[0...15] CI: PROFIBUS PZD send double word / PZD send DW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: 4000H Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2470
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

284 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
Dependency: Refer to: p2051
Notice: A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on p2051 or p2061.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

r2063[0...15] PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / Diag send DW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2470
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
16 Bit 16 ON OFF -
17 Bit 17 ON OFF -
18 Bit 18 ON OFF -
19 Bit 19 ON OFF -
20 Bit 20 ON OFF -
21 Bit 21 ON OFF -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 285
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

22 Bit 22 ON OFF -
23 Bit 23 ON OFF -
24 Bit 24 ON OFF -
25 Bit 25 ON OFF -
26 Bit 26 ON OFF -
27 Bit 27 ON OFF -
28 Bit 28 ON OFF -
29 Bit 29 ON OFF -
30 Bit 30 ON OFF -
31 Bit 31 ON OFF -
Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.

r2067[0...1] PZD maximum interconnected / PZDmaxIntercon

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display for the maximum interconnected PZD in the receive/send direction
Index 0: receive (r2050, r2060)
Index 1: send (p2051, p2061)

p2071 PROFIdrive SIC/SCC start send / SIC/SCC start send

CU240E-2_PN_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_DP_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2423
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 2
Description: Sets the start for the SIC/SCC telegram (p60122) in the send words (p2051, p2061).
Dependency: Refer to: p0922, p2079, p60122
Note: For setting p0922/p2079, the value is preset to the end of the PZD telegram.
For p0922 equal to 999 and p2079 not equal to 999, the preset value can be increased.
The value must be set again after changing p0922/p2079.

p2072 Response receive value after PZD failure / Resp aft PZD fail
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the response for the receive value (r2090) after PZD failure.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Unconditionally open holding brake (p0855) Freeze value Zero the value -

r2074[0...11] PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / Diag addr recv
CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

286 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note: Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
65535: Not assigned

r2075[0...11] PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / Diag offs recv
CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned

r2076[0...16] PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / Diag offs send
CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 287
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Value range:

0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned

r2077[0...15] PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses / PB diag peer addr
CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Displays the addresses of the slaves (peers) where peer-to-peer data transfer has been configured via PROFIBUS.

p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PZD telegr ext

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
1 999 1
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p0922
Note: For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
For p0922 = 999 the following applies:
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

288 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 899.0
[1] 899.1
[2] 899.2
[3] 2139.3
[4] 899.4
[5] 899.5
[6] 899.6
[7] 2139.7
[8] 2197.7
[9] 899.9
[10] 2199.1
[11] 1407.7
[12] 899.12
[13] 2135.14
[14] 2197.3
[15] 2135.15
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 289
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p2081[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 2.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p2082[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

290 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p2083[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089

p2084[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 291
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 1010 1000 0000 0000 bin
[1...4] 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
Dependency: Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089

p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

292 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -

15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
Dependency: Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089

r2089[0...4] CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2472
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083
Note: r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector-connector converters.

r2090.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD1 receive bit-serial / PZD1 recv bitw

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468, 9360
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIdrive
controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 293
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

r2091.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial / PZD2 recv bitw

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIdrive controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

r2092.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial / PZD3 recv bitw

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIdrive controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

294 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r2093.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial / PZD4 recv bitw

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIdrive
controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

r2094.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468, 9360
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller.
The PZD is selected via p2099[0].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: p2099

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 295
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r2095.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468, 9360
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller.
The PZD is selected via p2099[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: p2099

p2098[0...1] Inverter connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468, 9360
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.
Using p2098[0], the signals of connector input p2099[0] are influenced.
Using p2098[1], the signals of connector input p2099[1] are influenced.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095, p2099

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

296 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2099[0...1] CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2468, 9360
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter.
A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on
(interconnection).
Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095
Note: From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted.
p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters:
Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15
Connector input p2099[1] to binector output in r2095.0...15

p2100[0...19] Change fault response fault number / Chng resp F_no

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8075
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2101
Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.

p2101[0...19] Change fault response response / Chng resp resp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8075
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault.
Value: 0: NONE
1: OFF1
2: OFF2
3: OFF3
5: STOP2
6: Internal armature short-circuit / DC braking
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2100
Notice: For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault:
- fault number does not exist (exception value = 0).
- Message type is not "fault" (F).
- fault response is not permissible for the set fault number.
Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.
The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and fault response = NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
--> The fault response NONE can be changed to OFF1 or OFF2.
For value = 1 (OFF1):
Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 297
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For value = 2 (OFF2):

Internal/external pulse inhibit.
For value = 3 (OFF3):
Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
For value = 5 (STOP2):
n_set = 0
For value = 6 (armature short-circuit, internal/DC braking):
This value can only be set for all drive data sets when p1231 = 4.
a) DC braking is not possible for synchronous motors.
b) DC braking is possible for induction motors.

p2103[0...n] BI: 1st acknowledge faults / 1st acknowledge

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2441, 2442, 2443,
CU240E-2_PN_F 2447, 2475, 2546, 9220, 9677, 9678
CU240E-2_DP_F Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 2090.7
[1] 722.2
[2] 2090.7
[3] 2090.7
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2103[0...n] BI: 1st acknowledge faults / 1st acknowledge

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2441, 2442, 2443,
2447, 2475, 2546, 9220, 9677, 9678
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 722.2
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2104[0...n] BI: 2nd acknowledge faults / 2nd acknowledge

CU240B-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546, 8060
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - [0] 722.2
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

298 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2104[0...n] BI: 2nd acknowledge faults / 2nd acknowledge

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2105[0...n] BI: 3rd acknowledge faults / 3rd acknowledge

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1.
Dependency: Refer to: F07860
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2.
Dependency: Refer to: F07861
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112
Refer to: F07862
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 299
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r2109[0...63] Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2130, r2133, r2136
Notice: The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.

r2110[0...63] Alarm number / Alarm number

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: This parameter is identical to r2122.

p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8065
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset.
Dependency: When p2111 is set to 0, the following is initiated:
- all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63].
- the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted.
Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.

p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.
Dependency: Refer to: A07850
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

r2114[0...1] System runtime total / Sys runtime tot

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit.
The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days).
After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

300 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = Milliseconds

[1] = Days
Dependency: Refer to: r0948, r2109, r2123, r2125, r2130, r2136, r2145, r2146
Note: When the electronic power supply is switched out, the counter values are saved.
After the drive unit is switched on, the counter continues to run with the last value that was saved.

p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2.
Dependency: Refer to: A07851
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3.
Dependency: Refer to: A07852
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2118[0...19] Change message type message number / Chng type msg_no

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8075
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed.
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2119
Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message
has gone.

p2119[0...19] Change message type type / Change type type

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8075
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
Description: Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm.
Value: 1: Fault (F)
2: Alarm (A)
3: No message (N)
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2118

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 301
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message
has gone.
The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification (exception, value = 0).
Example:
F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345.
In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically
removed.

r2120 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0944, r2121

r2121 CO: Counter alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125

r2122[0...63] Alarm code / Alarm code

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of alarms that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Notice: The properties of the alarm buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest)
...
r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest)
When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history:
r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest)
...
r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest)

r2123[0...63] Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146
Notice: The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

302 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

r2124[0...63] Alarm value / Alarm value

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

r2125[0...63] Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2134, r2145, r2146
Notice: The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

p2126[0...19] Change acknowledge mode fault number / Chng ackn F_no

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8075
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2127
Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.

p2127[0...19] Change acknowledge mode mode / Chng ackn mode

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8075
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Description: Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault.
Value: 1: Acknowledgment only using POWER ON
2: Ack IMMEDIATELY after the fault cause has been removed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2126
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode for a fault in the following cases:
- fault number does not exist (exception value = 0).
- Message type is not "fault" (F).
- Acknowledge mode is not permissible for the set fault number.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 303
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.
The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and acknowledge mode = IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
--> The acknowledge mode can be changed from IMMEDIATELY to POWER ON.

p2128[0...15] Faults/alarms trigger selection / F/A trigger sel

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8050, 8070
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Sets the faults/alarms for which a trigger signal should be generated in r2129.0...15.
Dependency: If the fault/alarm set in p2128[0...15] occurs, then the particular binector output r2129.0...15 is set.
Refer to: r2129

r2129.0...15 CO/BO: Faults/alarms trigger word / F/A trigger word

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8070
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the trigger signals of the faults/alarms set in p2128[0...15].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Trigger signal p2128[0] ON OFF -
01 Trigger signal p2128[1] ON OFF -
02 Trigger signal p2128[2] ON OFF -
03 Trigger signal p2128[3] ON OFF -
04 Trigger signal p2128[4] ON OFF -
05 Trigger signal p2128[5] ON OFF -
06 Trigger signal p2128[6] ON OFF -
07 Trigger signal p2128[7] ON OFF -
08 Trigger signal p2128[8] ON OFF -
09 Trigger signal p2128[9] ON OFF -
10 Trigger signal p2128[10] ON OFF -
11 Trigger signal p2128[11] ON OFF -
12 Trigger signal p2128[12] ON OFF -
13 Trigger signal p2128[13] ON OFF -
14 Trigger signal p2128[14] ON OFF -
15 Trigger signal p2128[15] ON OFF -
Dependency: If the fault/alarm set in p2128[0...15] occurs, then the particular binector output r2129.0...15 is set.
Refer to: p2128
Note: CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred.
CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred.

r2130[0...63] Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2133, r2136
Notice: The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
The value displayed in p2130 refers to 01.01.1970.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

304 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Act fault code

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the code of the oldest active fault.
Dependency: Refer to: r3131, r3132
Note: 0: No fault present.

r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred.
Note: 0: No alarm present.

r2133[0...63] Fault value for float values / Fault val float

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2136
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2134[0...63] Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2135.12...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2548
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the second status word of faults and alarms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
12 Fault motor overtemperature Yes No 8016
13 Fault power unit thermal overload Yes No 8021
14 Alarm motor overtemperature Yes No 8016
15 Alarm power unit thermal overload Yes No 8021

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 305
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r2136[0...63] Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv days

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133
Notice: The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2138.7...15 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the control word of faults and alarms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No 8060
10 External alarm 1 (A07850) effective Yes No 8065
11 External alarm 2 (A07851) effective Yes No 8065
12 External alarm 3 (A07852) effective Yes No 8065
13 External fault 1 (F07860) effective Yes No 8060
14 External fault 2 (F07861) effective Yes No 8060
15 External fault 3 (F07862) effective Yes No 8060
Dependency: Refer to: p2103, p2104, p2105, p2106, p2107, p2108, p2112, p2116, p2117, p3110, p3111, p3112

r2139.0...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 / ZSW fault/alarm 1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2548
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word 1 of faults and alarms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Being acknowledged Yes No -
01 Acknowledgment required Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No 8060
06 Internal message 1 present Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No 8065
08 Internal message 2 present Yes No -
11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low -
12 Alarm class bit 1 High Low -
13 Maintenance required Yes No -
14 Maintenance urgently required Yes No -
15 Fault gone/can be acknowledged Yes No -
Note: For bit 03, 07:
These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the
reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present" or "alarm present" has occurred, a
change in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121).
For bit 06, 08:
These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only.
For bit 11, 12:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes
only on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

306 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: Refer to: p2155, r2197

p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2142, r2199

p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO:
r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2141, r2199

p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable (0 = enable) of the motor stall monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2164, p2166, r2197, r2198
Refer to: F07900
Note: When interconnecting the enable signal with r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint -
actual value deviation.

r2145[0...63] Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2146
Notice: The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 307
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r2146[0...63] Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145
Notice: The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

p2148[0...n] BI: RFG active / RFG active

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8011
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The binector input is automatically interconnected to r1199.2 as a default setting.

p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 1001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for messages and monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable alarm A07903 Yes No 8011
01 Load monitoring only in the 1st quadrant Yes No 8013
03 n_act > p2155 own hysteresis Yes No 8010
05 Stall monitoring for encoderless speed Yes No -
control
Dependency: Refer to: r2197
Refer to: A07903
Note: For bit 00:
Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with r2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act).
For bit 01:
When the bit is set, the load monitoring is only executed in the 1st quadrant as a result of the positive characteristic
parameters (p2182 ... p2190).
For bit 03:
When the bit is set, r2197.1 and r2197.2 are determined using separate hysteresis functions.
For bit 05:
When this bit is set, a change to open-loop speed controlled operation is only possible when the motor is stationary.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

308 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010, 8011, 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0)
"n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5)
"n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3)
Dependency: Refer to: p2161, r2197, r2199

p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8011
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1170[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
"|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4)
"n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5)
Dependency: Refer to: r2197, r2198, r2199

p2152[0...n] Delay for comparison n > n_max / Del n > n_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8023
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 200 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for comparing the speed with the maximum speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, r1084, r1087, p2162

p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value.
The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and
signals.
Dependency: Refer to: r2169

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 309
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: Refer to: p2140, r2197

p2156[0...n] On delay comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-in delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2141, p2142, r2199

p2157[0...n] Speed threshold 5 / n_thresh val 5

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 5" (BO: r2198.0)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 5" (BO: r2198.1)
Dependency: Refer to: p2150, p2158

p2158[0...n] Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 5 / Del compar n_5
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Delay time for the comparison of the speed with the speed threshold value 5 (P2157).
Dependency: Refer to: p2150, p2157

p2159[0...n] Speed threshold 6 / n_thresh val 6

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 6" (BO: r2198.2)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 6" (BO: r2198.3)
Dependency: Refer to: p2150, p2160

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

310 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2160[0...n] Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 6 / Del compar n_6
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the speed with the speed threshold value 6 (p2159).
Dependency: Refer to: p2150, p2159

p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010, 8011
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0).
Dependency: Refer to: p2150, r2199

p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 60000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6).
Dependency: Refer to: r1084, r1087, r2197
Notice: For p0322 = 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 0.1 * p0311
For p0322 > 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 1.02 * p0322 - p1082
If one of the conditions is violated, p2162 is appropriately and automatically reduced when exiting the commissioning
mode.
Note: For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit
(r1084) above the limit value.
If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (e.g. due to load shedding), you are advised to increase
the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient, the hysteresis p2162 can only be
increased by more than 10% of the rated speed when the maximum speed (p0322) of the motor is sufficiently greater
than the speed limit p1082.

p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8011
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2164, p2166, r2197

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 311
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8011
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 200.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off"
signal/message (BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2166, r2197

p2165[0...n] Load monitoring stall monitoring upper threshold / Stall_mon up thr

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the upper speed threshold of the stall monitoring of the pump or fan.
The lower limit is formed by the speed threshold 1 of the load monitoring (p2182).
The stall monitoring is active between p2182 and p2165.
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2165
Refer to: p2181, p2182, p2193
Refer to: A07891, F07894, A07926
Note: For p2165 = 0 or p2165 < p2182, the following applies:
There is no special stall monitoring for the pump/fan, but only the remaining load monitoring functions (e.g. leakage
monitoring for a pump) for the pump or fan are active.

p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8011
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO:
r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2164, r2197

p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8011
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO:
r2199.4).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

312 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2168[0...n] Load monitoring stall monitoring torque threshold / Stall_mon M_thresh

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the torque threshold of the stall monitoring of the pump or fan.
If, in the monitored speed range from p2182 to p2165, the torque exceeds this threshold, then this is evaluated as
either the motor having stalled or heavy-duty starting.
Dependency: For pumps, the following applies (p2193 = 4):
- the leakage characteristic must lie below the torque threshold for the stall monitoring
- the torque threshold for dry running operation must lie below the torque threshold for stall monitoring
For fans, the following applies (p2193 = 5):
- the torque threshold for the stall monitoring must lie above the torque threshold to identify belt breakage (p2191).
Refer to: p2165, p2181, p2191, p2193
Refer to: A07891, F07894, A07926
Note: The following applies for p2168 = 0:
The special stall monitoring for pump/fan is de-activated.
Then, only the remaining load monitoring functions (e.g. the leakage monitoring for a pump) for pump or fan are
realized.

r2169 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8010
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output of the smoothed speed actual value for messages.
Dependency: Refer to: p2153

p2170[0...n] Current threshold value / I_thres

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the absolute current threshold for the messages.
"I_act >= I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2197.8)
"I_act < I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2198.8)
Dependency: Refer to: p2171

p2171[0...n] Current threshold value reached delay time / I_thresh rch t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the current actual value (r0068) with the current threshold value (p2170).
Dependency: Refer to: p2170

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 313
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2172[0...n] DC link voltage threshold value / Vdc thresh val

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2001 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [V] 2000 [V] 800 [V]
Description: Sets the DC link voltage threshold value for the following messages:
"Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.9)
"Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.10)
Dependency: Refer to: p2173

p2173[0...n] DC link voltage comparison delay time / t_del Vdc

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the DC link voltage r0070 with the threshold value p2172.
Dependency: Refer to: p2172

p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 5.13 [Nm]
Description: Sets the torque threshold value for the messages:
"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 and n_set reached" (BO: r2198.9)
"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.10)
"Torque setpoint > torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.13)
Dependency: Refer to: p2195, r2198

p2175[0...n] Motor blocked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 120.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6).
Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p2177, r2198
Refer to: F07900
Note: The following applies for encoderless vector control for induction motors:
At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a blocked motor cannot be detected.
The following applies for encoderless vector control for permanent magnet synchronous motors:
At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a blocked motor can only be detected if
p2175 = p1755, and p1750.6 is set to 1.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

314 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2176[0...n] Torque threshold value comparison delay time / M_thrsh comp T_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 200 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the torque actual value (r0080) with torque threshold value 1 (p2174).
Dependency: Refer to: p2174

p2177[0...n] Motor blocked delay time / Mot lock t_del

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 65.000 [s] 3.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6).
Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p2175, r2198
Refer to: F07900
Note: The following applies for sensorless vector control:
At low speeds a locked motor can only be detected if no change is made to open-loop speed controlled operation. If
this is the case, the value in p2177 must be reduced accordingly (p2177 < p1758) before time p2177 has elapsed in
order to detect the locked state reliably.
As countermeasure, it is generally also possible to set p1750.6. This is only not permitted if the drive is slowly
reversed by the load at the torque limit (speed below p1755 for longer than p1758).

p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7).
Dependency: Refer to: r2198
Note: In the open-loop speed controlled operating range (see p1755, p1756), vector control stall monitoring depends on
threshold p1745.
At higher speeds, the difference between flux setpoint r0083 and flux actual value r0084 is monitored.

p2179[0...n] Output load identification current limit / Outp_ld iden I_lim

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2002 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 1000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current limit for output load identification.
A missing output load is displayed using the "Output load not available" message (r2197.11 = 1).
This message is output with a delay time (p2180).
Dependency: Refer to: p2180
Notice: For synchronous motors the output current can be almost zero under no load conditions.
Note: Missing output load is signaled in the following cases:
- the motor is not connected.
- a phase failure has occurred.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 315
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2180[0...n] Output load detection delay time / Out_load det t_del

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8022
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 2000 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "output load not available" (r2197.11 = 1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2179

p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
Description: Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
Value: 0: Load monitoring disabled
1: A07920 for torque/speed too low
2: A07921 for torque/speed too high
3: A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
4: F07923 for torque/speed too low
5: F07924 for torque/speed too high
6: F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance
7: Pump/fan load monitoring as alarm
8: Pump/fan load monitoring as fault
Dependency: Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, p2193, r2198, p3230, p3231
Refer to: A07891, A07892, A07893, F07894, F07895, F07896, A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
Note: The response to the faults F07923 ... F07925 can be set.
This parameter setting has no effect on the generation of fault F07936.
p2181 = 7, 8 can only be combined with p2193 = 4, 5.

p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186
Refer to: A07926
Note: In order that the load monitoring can reliably respond, the speed threshold p2182 should always be set lower than the
minimum motor speed to be monitored.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

316 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2183[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188
Refer to: A07926

p2184[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190
Refer to: A07926
Note: In order that the load monitoring can reliably respond, the speed threshold p2184 should always be set higher than
the maximum motor speed to be monitored.

p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1 upper / M_thresh 1 upper

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2185 > p2186
Refer to: p2182, p2186
Refer to: A07926
Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.

p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1 lower / M_thresh 1 lower

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 317
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The following applies: p2186 < p2185

Refer to: p2182, p2185
Refer to: A07926
Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.

p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2 upper / M_thresh 2 upper

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2187 > p2188
Refer to: p2183, p2188
Refer to: A07926
Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.

p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower / M_thresh 2 lower

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2188 < p2187
Refer to: p2183, p2187
Refer to: A07926
Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.

p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3 upper / M_thresh 3 upper

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2189 > p2190
Refer to: p2184, p2190
Refer to: A07926
Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.

p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower / M_thresh 3 lower

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2190 < p2189
Refer to: p2184, p2189
Refer to: A07926
Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

318 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2191[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold no load / M_thresh no load

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Setting of the torque threshold to identify dry running operation for pumps or belt breakage for fans.
Dependency: The following applies: p2191< p2168 if p2168 <> 0
Refer to: p2181, p2182, p2184, p2193
Refer to: A07892, F07895, A07926
Note: For the setting p2191 = 0, the monitoring for dry running operation or belt breakage is de-activated.
Pre-assignment: p2191 = 5 % of the rated motor torque (p0333).

p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 65.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring.

p2193[0...n] Load monitoring configuration / Load monit config

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 1
Description: Sets the load monitoring configuration.
Value: 0: Monitoring switched out
1: Monitoring torque and load drop
2: Monitoring speed and load drop
3: Monitoring load drop
4: Pump monitoring
5: Fan monitoring
Dependency: Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, r2198, p3230, p3231, p3232
Refer to: A07891, A07892, A07893, F07894, F07895, F07896, A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925,
F07936
Note: p2193 = 4, 5 can only be combined with p2181 = 7, 8.

p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
Description: Sets the torque threshold value for the message "Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2" (BO: r2199.11).
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
Dependency: Refer to: r0033, p2195, r2199

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 319
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 800.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the negated signal "run-up completed".
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
Dependency: Refer to: p2174, p2194

p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling factor for torque utilization (r0033).

r2197.0...13 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2534
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the first status word of the monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |n_act| <= n_min p1080 Yes No 8022
01 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 p2155 Yes No 8010
02 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 p2155 Yes No 8010
03 n_act >= 0 Yes No 8011
04 |n_act| >= n_set Yes No 8022
05 |n_act| <= n_standstill p1226 Yes No 8022
06 |n_act| > n_max Yes No 8010
07 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance Yes No 8011
t_off
08 I_act >= I_threshold value p2170 Yes No 8022
09 Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold value p2172 Yes No 8022
10 Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold value p2172 Yes No 8022
11 Output load is not present Yes No 8022
12 |n_act| > n_max (delayed) Yes No 8023
13 |n_act| > n_max (F07901) Yes No -
Notice: For bit 06:
When the overspeed is reached, this bit is set and F07901 output immediately following this. The bit is canceled
again as soon as the next pulse inhibit is present.
Note: For bit 00:
The threshold value is set in p1080 and the hysteresis in p2150.
For bit 01, 02:
The threshold value is set in p2155 and the hysteresis in p2140.
For bit 03:
1 signal direction of rotation positive.
0 signal: direction of rotation negative.
The hysteresis is set in p2150.
For bit 04:
The threshold value is set in r1119 and the hysteresis in p2150.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

320 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For bit 05:

The threshold value is set in p1226 and the delay time in p1228.
For bit 06:
The hysteresis is set in p2162.
For bit 07:
The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164.
For bit 08:
The threshold value is set in p2170 and the delay time in p2171.
For bit 09, 10:
The threshold value is set in p2172 and the delay time in p2173.
For bit 11:
The threshold value is set in p2179 and the delay time in p2180.
For bit 12:
The threshold value is set in p2182, the hysteresis in p2162, and the delay time (for canceling the signal) in p2152.
For bit 13:
Only for internal Siemens use.

r2198.0...13 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2536
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the second status word of the monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 5 Yes No 8023
01 |n_act| > speed threshold value 5 Yes No 8023
02 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 6 Yes No 8023
03 |n_act| > speed threshold value 6 Yes No 8023
04 |n_set| < p2161 Yes No 8011
05 n_set > 0 Yes No 8011
06 Motor blocked Yes No 8012
07 Motor stalled Yes No 8012
08 |I_act| < I_threshold value p2170 Yes No 8022
09 |M_act| > torque threshold value 1 and Yes No 8023
n_set reached
10 |M_set| < torque threshold value 1 Yes No 8012
11 Load in the alarm range Yes No 8013
12 Load in the fault range Yes No 8013
13 |M_act| > torque threshold value 1 Yes No 8023
Note: For bit 10:
The torque threshold value 1 is set in p2174.
For bit 12:
This bit is reset after the fault cause disappears, even if the fault itself is still present.

r2199.0...11 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 / ZSW monitor 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2537
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the third status word of the monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 Yes No 8010
01 f or n comparison value reached or Yes No 8010
exceeded

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 321
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

04 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance Yes No 8011

t_on
05 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No 8011
11 Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 Yes No 8012
Note: For bit 00:
The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161.
For bit 01:
The comparison value is set in p2141. We recommend setting the hysteresis (p2142) for canceling the bit to a value
lower than that in p2141. Otherwise, the bit is not reset.
For bit 11:
The torque threshold value 2 is set in p2194.

p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller.
The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal.

p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 20.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 30.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 3 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

322 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 40.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 50.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 5 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 60.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 6 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 70.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 7 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 80.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 8 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 323
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 9 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 10 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 110.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 11 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 120.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 12 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

324 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 140.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 14 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 150.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 15 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Description: Sets the method to select the fixed setpoints.
Value: 1: Direct selection
2: Binary selection

p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2221, p2222, p2223

p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2222, p2223

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 325
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2223

p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222

r2224 CO: Technology controller fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7950, 7951
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the selected and active fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2229

r2225.0 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the fixed value selection of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Technology controller fixed value selected Yes No 7950,
7951

r2229 Technology controller number actual / Tec_ctrl No. act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7950
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2224

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

326 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Data save active Yes No -
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Non-volatile data save active for p2230.0 = Yes No -
1
04 Ramp-function generator always active Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r2231, p2240
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: For bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using r2231. In order to save in a
non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
For bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off.
The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of
specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent
of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237).
It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.0001 x max(p2237, |p2238|) [%] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk is effective until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p2237 [%] / p2247 [s] or a_max = p2238 [%]
/ p2248 [s]), after which the drive continues to run linearly with constant acceleration.
The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that p2247 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to
the set ramp-up time.
For bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save de-activated.
1. The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1).
For bit 04:
When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output
value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r2250.

r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory / Tec_ctrl mop mem
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2230

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 327
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-up time (p2247) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p2235).
Dependency: Refer to: p2236

p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint /

Tec_ctrl mop lower
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-down time (p2248) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p2236).
Dependency: Refer to: p2235

p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2238

p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2237

p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2230

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

328 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r2245 CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG /

Tec_ctr mop befRFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2250

p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2248
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended.

p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time /

Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2247
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended.

r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG /

Tec_ctr mop aftRFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7954
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the
technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2245

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 329
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2251 Technology controller mode / Tec_ctrl mode

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the mode for using the technology controller output.
Value: 0: Technology controller as main speed setpoint
1: Technology controller as supplementary speed setpoint
Dependency: p2251 = 0, 1 is only effective if the enable signal of the technology controller is interconnected (p2200 > 0).

p2252 Technology controller configuration / Tec_ctrl config

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
04 Ramp-up/ramp-down function generator De-activated Activated -
bypass
05 Integrator active for skip speeds Yes No -
06 Internal controller limit not displayed Yes No -
Dependency: For bit 04 = 0:
The setting is only effective when the PID controller is de-activated.
Refer to: p2280, p2285
Caution: For bit 04 = 1 (p2251 = 0):
The PID controller can oscillate if the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the speed setpoint channel are not taken into
account when setting controller parameters p2280 and p2285.
Note: For bit 04 = 0 (only for p2251 = 0):
The ramp-function generator in the speed setpoint channel is bypassed when the technology controller is
operational.
As a consequence, ramp times p1120, p1121 are not taken into consideration when configuring the controller.
For bit 04 = 1 (only for p2251 = 0):
The ramp-function generator in the speed setpoint channel is not bypassed when the technology controller is
operational.
As a consequence, the ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) remain effective, and must be taken into
account as controlled system variables when setting the PID controller parameters (p2280, p2285).
The enable ramps of the PID controller are ensured in this setting by p1120, p1121 as well as rounding functions
p1130 and p1131. The ramp-up/ramp-down time of the PID controller limiting p2293 must be set appropriately
shorter, as otherwise this has an impact on the speed setpoint channel.
For bit 05 = 0:
The integral component of the PID controller is held if a skip band or the minimum speed range is passed through in
the speed set point channel.
This prevents the speed from oscillating between the edges of the skip band.
For bit 05 = 1:
The setting is only effective if a skip band is no longer active.
The integral component of the PID controller is not held in the range of the skip speeds.
The skip band is passed through even for small system deviations and low controller gain factors. In so doing, the
controller integral time must be selected large enough so that no undesirable speed oscillations occur between the
skip band edges.
The influence of a minimum speed p1080 on the integration behavior can be reduced by raising the lower PID
controller limit to p1080 / p2000 * 100%.
For bit 06 = 1:
In r2349, bit 10 and bit 11 are not displayed when reaching internal limits (e.g. for OFF1/3).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

330 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2254, p2255

p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2253, p2256

p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctrl set1 scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2253

p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctrl set2 scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2254

p2257 Technology controller ramp-up time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2258
Note: The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 331
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2257
Note: The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.

r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator / Tec_ctr set aftRFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller.

p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctrl set T

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

p2263 Technology controller type / Tec_ctrl type

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the type of technology controller.
Value: 0: D component in the actual value signal
1: D component in system deviation

p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

332 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctrl act T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value / Tec_ctrl u_lim act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271
Refer to: F07426
Notice: If the actual value exceeds this upper limit, this results in fault F07426.

p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value / Tec_ctrl l_lim act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271
Refer to: F07426
Notice: If the actual value falls below this lower limit, this results in fault F07426.

p2269 Technology controller gain actual value / Tech_ctrl gain act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 500.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling factor for the actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2271
Note: For 100%, the actual value is not changed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 333
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2270 Technology controller actual value function / Tec_ctr ActVal fct

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Setting to use an arithmetic function for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Value: 0: Output (y) = input (x)
1: Root function (root from x)
2: Square function (x * x)
3: Cube function (x * x * x)
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2271

p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type) / Tech_ctrl act inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Setting to invert the actual value signal of the technology controller.
The inversion depends on the sensor type for the actual value signal.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion actual value signal
Caution: If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!

Note: The correct setting can be determined as follows:

- inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal of the technology controller.
--> If the actual value increases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 0 (no inversion).
--> If the actual value decreases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 1 (the actual value signal
is inverted).

r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the scaled actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, r2266, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2270, p2271

r2273 CO: Technology controller system deviation / Tec_ctrl sys_dev

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the system deviation between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2263

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

334 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant / Tec_ctrl D comp T

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller.
Note: p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled.

p2280 Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctrl Kp

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller.
Note: p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled.

p2285 Technology controller integral time / Tec_ctrl Tn

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller.
Notice: The following applies for p2251 = 0:
If the output of the technology controller lies within the range of a suppression (skip) bandwidth (p1091 ... p1094,
p1101) or below the minimum speed (p1080), the integral component of the controller is held so that the controller
temporarily works as a P controller. This is necessary in order to prevent the controller from behaving in an unstable
manner, as the ramp-function generator switches to the parameterized up and down ramps (p1120, p1121) at the
same time in order to avoid setpoint steps. This state can be exited or avoided by changing the controller setpoint or
by using the start speed (= minimum speed).
Note: When the controller output reaches the limit, the I component of the controller is held.
p2285 = 0:
The integral time is disabled and the I component of the controller is reset.

p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ hold

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 56.13
Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the technology controller.

p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctr prectr_sig

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the pre-control signal of the technology controller.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 335
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2290[0...n] BI: Technology controller limiting enable / Tec_ctrl lim enab

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source to enable the technology controller output.
The technology controller output is enabled with a 1 signal.
The technology controller output is held with a 0 signal.

p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_lim

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2292
Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).

p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2291
Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).

p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr t_RU/RD

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramping time for the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2291, p2292
Note: The time refers to the set maximum and minimum limits (p2291, p2292).

r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2295

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

336 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
-100.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller.

p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 2295[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2295

p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrMaxLimS_src

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1084[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2291
Note: In order that the output of the technology controller does not exceed the maximum speed limit, its upper limit p2297
should be connected to the actual maximum speed r1084.
In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must also be connected to the output of the ramp-function generator r1150.

p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1087[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2292
Note: If the technology controller is rotated in a negative direction in mode p2251 = 0, its lower limit p2298 should be
connected to the actual minimum speed r1087.
In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must also be connected to the output of the ramp-function generator r1150.

p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the offset of the output limiting of the technology controller.
Note: In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must be connected to the output of ramp-function generator r1150 so that the technology
controller stops when the speed limits are reached (see also p2297, p2298).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 337
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2302 Technology controller output signal starting value / Tec_ctr start val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the start value for the output of the technology controller.
If the drive is switched on and the technology controller is already enabled (see p2200, r0056.3), then its output
signal r2294 first goes to the start value p2302, before the controller starts to operate.
Dependency: The starting value is only effective in the mode "technology controller as main speed setpoint" (p2251 = 0).
If the technology controller is first enabled when the drive is switched on, a start speed remains ineffective, and the
controller output starts with the actual setpoint speed of the ramp-function generator.
Note: If the technology controller operates on the speed/setpoint channel (p2251 = 0), then the starting value is interpreted
as the starting speed and when operation is enabled, is connected to the output of the technology controller (r2294).
If fault F07426 "technology controller actual value limited" occurs while ramping up to the starting value and if the
associated reaction has been set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101), the starting value is kept as the speed setpoint
instead of a switch to closed-loop control operation.

p2306 Technology controller system deviation inversion / Tec_ctr SysDev inv

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Setting to invert the system deviation of the technology controller.
The setting depends on the type of control loop.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion
Caution: If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!

Note: The correct setting can be determined as follows:

- inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be switched out.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be set.
If value = 0:
The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor).
If value = 1:
The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps).

p2339 Techn. controller threshold value f. I comp. hold for skip speed / Tec_ctrl thr_skip
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 2.00 [%]
Description: Sets the threshold value for the system deviation of the technology controller, which controls holding the controller
integral component in the range of the skip speeds of the ramp-function generator.
Recommendation: To avoid speed setpoint steps in the range of the skip speeds, we recommend setting p2252 bit 4 = 1 (ramp-function
generator bypass de-activated).
Dependency: The parameter has no effect for p2252 bit 5 = 1 (integrator hold de-activated).
Refer to: r2273

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

338 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Only p2251 = 0:

If the output signal of the technology controller reaches a skip band in the speed setpoint channel, then the integral
component of the controller is held, if at the same time, the system deviation is lower than the threshold value set
here. By holding the integral component, it can be avoided that the controller oscillates in the range of the skip bands.

r2344 CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) / Tec_ctrl n_setp_sm
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed speed setpoint of the technology controller prior to switching to operation with fault response
(see p2345).
Dependency: Refer to: p2345
Note: Smoothing time = 10 s

p2345 Technology controller fault response / Tech_ctrl flt resp

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Sets the response of the technology controller to the occurrence of fault F07426 (technology controller actual value
limited).
The fault response is executed if status bit 8 or 9 in the technology controller status word r2349 is set. If both status
bits are zero, a switch back to technology controller operation will follow.
Value: 0: Function inhibited
1: On fault: Changeover to r2344 (or p2302)
2: On fault: Changeover to p2215
Dependency: The parameterized fault response is only effective if the technology controller mode is set to p2251 = 0 (technology
controller as main setpoint).
Refer to: p2267, p2268, r2344
Refer to: F07426
Notice: Dependent upon the application, the changing over of the setpoint when fault F07426 occurs can lead to the fault
condition disappearing and the re-activation of the technology controller. This can repeat itself and cause limit
oscillations. In this case, a different fault response or a different fixed setpoint 15 for the fault response p2345 = 2
should be selected.
Note: The parameterized fault response can only be achieved if the default fault response of the technology controller fault
F07426 is set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101). If a fault response other than "NONE" is entered in p2101 for F07426,
p2345 must be set to zero.
If the fault occurs during ramping up to the starting setpoint p2302, this starting setpoint is retained as the final value
(there is no changeover to the fault response setpoint).

r2349.0...13 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl status

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7958
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Technology controller de-activated Yes No -
01 Technology controller limited Yes No -
02 Technology controller motorized Yes No -
potentiometer limited max
03 Technology controller motorized Yes No -
potentiometer limited min

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 339
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

04 Technology controller speed setpoint total in Yes No -

setpoint channel
05 Technology controller RFG bypassed in the Yes No -
setpoint channel
06 Technology controller starting value at the No Yes -
current limit
08 Technology controller actual value at the Yes No -
minimum
09 Technology controller actual value at the Yes No -
maximum
10 Technology controller output at the Yes No -
minimum
11 Technology controller output at the Yes No -
maximum
12 Fault response active Yes No -
13 Technology controller limiting enable Yes No -
Note: While the technology controller is enabled, the following applies:
When switching off with OFF1, OFF3 and for pulse inhibit, bits 10 and 11 are simultaneously set to 1 as the controller
output is defined by the internal limiting.

p2350 Enable PID autotuning / PID autotuning

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0
Description: Activates the function to automatically tune the PID controller.
Value: 0: PID autotuning de-activated
1: PID autotuning with ZN technique
2: As 1 with low overshoot
3: As 2 + low or no overshoot
4: PID autotuning, only PI
Dependency: Active if the PID controller is enabled (see P2200).
Note: P2350 = 1
This is the Ziegler-Nichols standard tuning (ZN tuning). In this case, it should involve a response to a step.

P2350 = 2
For this tuning, a low overshoot is obtained (O/S). However, it should be faster than option 1.

P2350 = 3
For this tuning, a low or no overshoot is obtained. However, it is not as fast as option 2.

P2350 = 4
For this tuning, only values P and I are changed, and it should involve a dampened response.

Which option should be selected depends on the particular application. It can be generally stated that option 1
manifests a good response. However, if a faster response is required, then option 2 should be selected.
If no overshoot is desirable, then option 3 should be the preferred choice.
Option 4 should be selected for cases in which no D component is required.
The tuning technique is identical for all options.
Only the P, I and D values are calculated differently.

This parameter is set to zero after automatic tuning has been completed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

340 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p2354 PID autotuning monitoring time / PID tuning t_monit

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
60 [s] 65000 [s] 240 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the PID autotuning
This time is started after activating PID autotuning (p2350). If, within this time, the control loop is not excited, then the
automatic setting is canceled and an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p2350
Refer to: F07445

p2355 PID autotuning offset / PID autotun.offset

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 20 [%] 5 [%]
Description: This parameter is used to set the excitation type of the PID control loop to be used.

p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 1021
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Setting and connector output for a fixed percentage value.
Dependency: Refer to: p2901, r2902, p2930
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the main setpoint)

p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 1021
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Setting and connector output for a fixed percentage value.
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2930
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint)

r2902[0...14] CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 1021
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for frequently used percentage values.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 341
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = Fixed value +0 %

[1] = Fixed value +5 %
[2] = Fixed value +10 %
[3] = Fixed value +20 %
[4] = Fixed value +50 %
[5] = Fixed value +100 %
[6] = Fixed value +150 %
[7] = Fixed value +200 %
[8] = Fixed value -5 %
[9] = Fixed value -10 %
[10] = Fixed value -20 %
[11] = Fixed value -50 %
[12] = Fixed value -100 %
[13] = Fixed value -150 %
[14] = Fixed value -200 %
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2901, p2930
Note: The signal sources can, for example, be used to interconnect scalings.

p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 1021
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Setting and connector output for a fixed torque value.
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2901, r2902
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque.

r2969[0...6] Flux model value display / Psi_mod val displ

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the values of the direct access flux model for the synchronous reluctance motor (RESM) for diagnostic
purposes.
Valid values are only displayed when the pulses are inhibited.
For index 0:
Display of the entered direct axis current id in Arms:
For index 1, 2, 3:
Display of the saturation curves of the direct axis flux psid(id, iq):
- r2969[1]: flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq = 0
- r2969[2]: flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq = 0.5* p2950
- r2969[3]: flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq = p2950
For index 4, 5, 6:
Displays the relative error of the current inversion (id(psid, iq) - id) / p2950:
- r2969[4]: error with respect to direct axis current for iq = 0
- r2969[5]: error with respect to direct axis current for iq = 0.5 * p2950
- r2969[6]: error with respect to direct axis current for iq = p2950
Index: [0] = d-current
[1] = d-flux iq0
[2] = d-flux iq1
[3] = d-flux iq2
[4] = d-current error iq0
[5] = d-current error iq1
[6] = d-current error iq2
Note: RESM: reluctance synchronous motor (synchronous reluctance motor)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

342 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3110 External fault 3 switch-on delay / Ext fault 3 t_on

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2546
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for external fault 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3111, p3112
Refer to: F07862

p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable / Ext fault 3 enab

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112
Refer to: F07862

p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111
Refer to: F07862

r3113.0...15 CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status of the NAMUR message bit bar.
The faults and alarms are assigned to the appropriate signaling/message classes and influence a specific message
bit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault converter information Yes No -
electronics/software error
01 Network fault Yes No -
02 DC-link overvoltage Yes No -
03 Fault drive converter power electronics Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 343
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

04 Drive converter overtemperature Yes No -

05 Ground fault Yes No -
06 Motor overload Yes No -
07 Bus error Yes No -
08 External safety-relevant shutdown Yes No -
10 Error communication internal Yes No -
11 Fault infeed Yes No -
15 Other faults Yes No -
Note: For bit 00:
Hardware or software malfunction was identified. Carry out a POWER ON of the component involved. If it occurs
again, contact Technical Support.
For bit 01:
A line supply fault has occurred (phase failure, voltage level, ...). Check the line supply / fuses. Check the supply
voltage. Check the wiring.
For bit 02:
The DC link voltage has assumed an inadmissibly high value. Check the dimensioning of the system (line supply,
reactor, voltages). Check the infeed settings.
For bit 03:
An inadmissible operating state of the power electronics was identified (overcurrent, overtemperature, IGBT failure,
...). Check that the permissible load cycles are maintained. Check the ambient temperatures (fan).
For bit 04:
The temperature in the component has exceeded the highest permissible limit. Check the ambient temperature /
control cabinet cooling.
For bit 05:
A ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit was detected in the power cables or in the motor windings. Check the power
cable (connection). Check the motor.
For bit 06:
The motor was operated outside the permissible limits (temperature, current, torque, ...). Check the load cycles and
limits that have been set. Check the ambient temperature / motor cooling.
For bit 07:
The communication to the higher-level control system (internal coupling, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ...) is faulted or
interrupted. Check the state of the higher-level control system. Check the communication connection/wiring. Check
the bus configuration / clock cycles.
For bit 08:
A safety operation monitoring function (Safety) has detected an error.
For bit 09:
When evaluating the encoder signals (track signals, zero marks, absolute values, ...) an illegal signal state was
detected. Check the encoder / state of the encoder signals. Observe the maximum frequencies.
For bit 10:
The internal communication between the SINAMICS components is faulted or interrupted. Check the DRIVE-CLiQ
wiring. Ensure an EMC-compliant design. Observe the maximum permissible quantity structure / clock cycles.
For bit 11:
The infeed is faulted or has failed. Check the infeed and the surroundings (line supply, filter, reactors, fuses, ...).
Check the closed-loop infeed control.
For bit 15:
Group fault. Determine the precise cause of the fault using the commissioning tool.

p3117 Change safety message type / Ch. SI mess type

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the re-parameterization of all safety messages for faults and alarms.
The relevant message type during changeover is selected by the firmware.
0: Safety messages are not re-parameterized
1: Safety messages are re-parameterized
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

344 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r3120[0...63] Component fault / Comp fault

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 -
Description: Displays the component of the fault which has occurred.
Value: 0: No assignment
1: Control Unit
2: Power Module
3: Motor
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3122
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.

r3121[0...63] Component alarm / Comp alarm

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 -
Description: Displays the component of the alarm which has occurred.
Value: 0: No assignment
1: Control Unit
2: Power Module
3: Motor
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3123
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

r3122[0...63] Diagnostic attribute fault / Diag_attr fault

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the fault which has occurred.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware replacement recommended Yes No -
15 Message has gone Yes No -
16 PROFIdrive fault class bit 0 High Low -
17 PROFIdrive fault class bit 1 High Low -
18 PROFIdrive fault class bit 2 High Low -
19 PROFIdrive fault class bit 3 High Low -
20 PROFIdrive fault class bit 4 High Low -
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
For bits 20 ... 16:
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 0: not assigned
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 1: hardware fault/software error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 2: line fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 3: supply voltage fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 4: DC link fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 5: power electronics faulted

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 345
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 6: overtemperature electronic components
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 7: ground fault/phase fault detected
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 8: motor overload
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 9: communication error to the higher-level control
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 10: safe monitoring channel has identified an
error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 11: incorrect position actual value/speed actual
value or not available
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 12: internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 13: infeed unit faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 14: braking controller/Braking Module faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 15: line filter faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 16: external measured value/signal state outside
the permissible range
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 17: application/technology function faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 18: error in the
parameterization/configuration/commissioning sequence
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 19: general drive fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 20: auxiliary unit faulted

r3123[0...63] Diagnostic attribute alarm / Diag_attr alarm

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8065
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the alarm which has occurred.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware replacement recommended Yes No -
11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low -
12 Alarm class bit 1 High Low -
13 Maintenance required Yes No -
14 Maintenance urgently required Yes No -
15 Message has gone Yes No -
16 PROFIdrive fault class bit 0 High Low -
17 PROFIdrive fault class bit 1 High Low -
18 PROFIdrive fault class bit 2 High Low -
19 PROFIdrive fault class bit 3 High Low -
20 PROFIdrive fault class bit 4 High Low -
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
For bit 12, 11:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes
only on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.
For bits 20 ... 16:
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 0: not assigned
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 1: hardware fault/software error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 2: line fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 3: supply voltage fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 4: DC link fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 5: power electronics faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 6: overtemperature electronic components
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 7: ground fault/phase fault detected
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 8: motor overload
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 9: communication error to the higher-level control

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

346 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 10: safe monitoring channel has identified an
error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 11: incorrect position actual value/speed actual
value or not available
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 12: internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 13: infeed unit faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 14: braking controller/Braking Module faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 15: line filter faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 16: external measured value/signal state outside
the permissible range
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 17: application/technology function faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 18: error in the
parameterization/configuration/commissioning sequence
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 19: general drive fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 20: auxiliary unit faulted

r3131 CO: Actual fault value / Act fault val

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the fault value of the oldest active fault.
Dependency: Refer to: r2131, r3132

r3132 CO: Actual component number / Comp_no act

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the component number of the oldest fault that is still active.
Dependency: Refer to: r2131, r3131

p3230[0...n] CI: Load monitoring speed actual value / Load monit n_act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8012, 8013
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed actual value of the load monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: r2169, p2181, p2192, p2193, p3231
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
Note: The parameter is only effective for p2193 = 2.

p3231[0...n] Load monitoring speed deviation / Load monit n_dev

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the permissible speed deviation during load monitoring (for p2193 = 2).
Dependency: Refer to: r2169, p2181, p2193, p3230
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 347
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3232[0...n] BI: Load monitoring failure detection / Load_moni fail_det

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for detecting a failure.
Dependency: Refer to: p2192, p2193
Refer to: F07936
Note: Monitoring is triggered with a 0 signal, as soon as the time in p2192 has expired.

p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter time constant / M_act_filt T

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8013
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant for the PT1 element to smooth the torque actual value.
The smoothed torque actual value is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.

p3235 Phase failure signal motor monitoring time / Ph_fail t_monit

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 320 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for phase failure detection of the motor.
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: For p3235 = 0 the function is de-activated.
The monitoring is automatically de-activated during the flying restart operation for a motor that is still rotating.
3-phase phase failures cannot be detected and are indicated by other messages (e.g. F07902).

p3320[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 1 / Fluid_mach P1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 25.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 1 as a [%].
The characteristic comprises the following value pairs:
Power (P) / speed (n)
p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1)
p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2)
p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3)
p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4)
p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5)
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

348 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3321[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 1 / Fluid_mach n1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 0.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 1 as a [%].
The characteristic comprises the following value pairs:
Power (P) / speed (n)
p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1)
p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2)
p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3)
p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4)
p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5)
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3322[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 2 / Fluid_mach P2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 50.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 2 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3323[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 2 / Fluid_mach n2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 25.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 2 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 349
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3324[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 3 / Fluid_mach P3

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 77.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 3 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3325[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 3 / Fluid_mach n3

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 50.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 3 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3326[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 4 / Fluid_mach P4

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 92.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 4 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3327[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 4 / Fluid_mach n4

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 75.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 4 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3328, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

350 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3328[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 5 / Fluid_mach P5

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 100.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 5 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3329
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3329[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 5 / Fluid_mach n5

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 100.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 5 as a [%].
Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3330[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 / 2/3 wire cmd 1

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2272, 2273
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for command 1 for the two-wire control/three-wire control.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p3331, p3332, r3333, p3334
Note: The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.

p3331[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 / 2/3 wire cmd 2

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2272, 2273
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for command 2 for the two-wire control/three-wire control.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3332, r3333, p3334
Note: The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 351
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3332[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 / 2/3 wire cmd 3

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2273
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for command 3 for the two-wire control/three-wire control.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3331, r3333, p3334
Note: The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.

r3333.0...3 CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word / 2/3 wire STW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2272, 2273
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the control word for the two wire control/three wire control.
The control signals are dependent on the wire control set in p0015 and the signal states at the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON Yes No -
01 Reversing Yes No -
02 ON inverted Yes No -
03 Reversing inverted Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3331, p3332, p3334

p3334 2/3 wire control selection / 2/3 wire select

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2272, 2273
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0
Description: Sets the two wire control/three wire control.
Value: 0: No wire control
1: Two wire control clockwise/counterclockwise 1
2: Two wire control clockwise/counterclockwise 2
3: Three wire control enable clockwise/counterclockwise
4: Three wire control enable ON/reversing
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3331, p3332, r3333
Note: This value depends on the wire control set in p0015.

p3820[0...n] Friction characteristic value n0 / Friction n0

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 15.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3830, p3845

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

352 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3821[0...n] Friction characteristic value n1 / Friction n1

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 30.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3831, p3845

p3822[0...n] Friction characteristic value n2 / Friction n2

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 60.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3832, p3845

p3823[0...n] Friction characteristic value n3 / Friction n3

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 120.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3833, p3845

p3824[0...n] Friction characteristic value n4 / Friction n4

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 5th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3834, p3845

p3825[0...n] Friction characteristic value n5 / Friction n5

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 6th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3835, p3845

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 353
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3826[0...n] Friction characteristic value n6 / Friction n6

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 600.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 7th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3836, p3845

p3827[0...n] Friction characteristic value n7 / Friction n7

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1200.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 8th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3837, p3845

p3828[0...n] Friction characteristic value n8 / Friction n8

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 9th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3838, p3845

p3829[0...n] Friction characteristic value n9 / Friction n9

Access level: 2 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 10th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3839, p3845

p3830[0...n] Friction characteristic value M0 / Friction M0

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3820, p3845

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

354 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3831[0...n] Friction characteristic value M1 / Friction M1

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3821, p3845

p3832[0...n] Friction characteristic value M2 / Friction M2

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3822, p3845

p3833[0...n] Friction characteristic value M3 / Friction M3

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3823, p3845

p3834[0...n] Friction characteristic value M4 / Friction M4

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 5th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3824, p3845

p3835[0...n] Friction characteristic value M5 / Friction M5

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 6th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3825, p3845

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 355
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3836[0...n] Friction characteristic value M6 / Friction M6

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 7th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3826, p3845

p3837[0...n] Friction characteristic value M7 / Friction M7

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 8th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3827, p3845

p3838[0...n] Friction characteristic value M8 / Friction M8

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 9th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3828, p3845

p3839[0...n] Friction characteristic value M9 / Friction M9

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.0000 [Nm] 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm]
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 10th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3829, p3845

r3840.0...8 CO/BO: Friction characteristic status word / Friction ZSW

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the friction characteristic.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Friction characteristic OK Yes No -
01 Friction characteristic record activated Yes No -
02 Friction characteristic record completed Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

356 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

03 Friction characteristic record aborted Yes No -

08 Friction characteristic positive direction Yes No -

r3841 CO: Friction characteristic output / Frict outp

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque of the friction characteristic dependent on the speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p3842

p3842 Friction characteristic activation / Frict act

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Setting to activate and de-activate the friction characteristic.
Value: 0: Friction characteristic de-activated
1: Friction characteristic activated
Dependency: Refer to: r3841, p3845

p3845 Friction characteristic record activation / Frict rec act

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Setting for the friction characteristic record.
After the next switch-on command, the friction characteristic is automatically recorded.
Value: 0: Friction characteristic record de-activated
1: Friction char record activated for all directions
2: Friction char record activated for positive direction
3: Friction char record activated for negative direction
Dependency: When selecting the friction characteristic measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
For linear drives (refer to r0108 bit 12) it is not permissible to carry out the friction characteristic measurement for
mechanical systems that limit travel.
Danger: For drives with a mechanical system that limit the distance moved, it must be ensured that during recording, the
friction characteristic is not reached. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried
out.
Notice: To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Note: When the friction characteristic record is active, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977).
When the friction characteristic record is active (p3845 > 0), it is not possible to change p3820 ... p3829, p3830 ...
p3839 and p3842.
When recording the friction characteristic, in addition to the friction, the motor losses are also determined (e.g. iron
losses, eddy current losses and re-magnetizing losses). A differentiation is not made between these individual loss
components. We recommend that a motor temperature sensor is used because torque deviations can also be
emulated/mapped on the characteristic due to the thermal influence.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 357
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p3846[0...n] Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RU/RD

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up/ramp-down time of the ramp-up/ramp-down function generator to automatically record the friction
characteristic.
The drive is accelerated from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed/velocity (p1082) in this time.
Dependency: Refer to: p3845

p3847[0...n] Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7010
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 3600.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the warm-up time.
For an automatic trace (record) to start, the highest selected speed (p3829) is approached and this time is held. After
this, the measurement is started with the highest speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p3829, p3845

p3856[0...n] Compound braking current / Compound I_brake

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 250.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Compound braking current is used to define the amount of DC current that is produced on stopping the motor during
U/f operation to further increase the DC brake function.
Compound braking is a superimposition of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (net braking along the
ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This permits braking with controlled motor frequency and minimum power input into the
motor.
Effective braking without using additional hardware components is obtained by optimizing the ramp down time and
compound braking.
Dependency: The compound braking current is only activated if the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold value in r1282.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
- DC braking activated (p1230, r1239).
- motor is still not magnetized (e.g. for flying restart).
- vector control parameterized (p1300 >= 20).
- synchronous motor used (p0300 = 2xx).
Notice: Generally, increasing the braking current improves the braking effect when stopping the motor. However, if the value
is set too high, then the drive can be tripped (shut down) as a result of overcurrent or ground fault.
Recommendation: p3856 < 100 % x (r0209 - r0331) / p0305 / 2
Compound braking generates a current in the motor with a ripple manifesting the rotational frequency. The higher the
braking current is set, the higher the resulting ripple, especially when the Vdc_max control is simultaneously active
(refer to p1280).
Note: The parameter value is entered relative to the rated motor current (p0305).
Compound braking is de-activated with p3856 = 0%.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

358 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r3859.0 CO/BO: Compound braking/DC quantity control status word / Comp-br/DC_ctr ZSW
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 6797
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the status word of the compound braking and DC quantity control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Compound braking active Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: p3856

p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C(1) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Exits quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all parameters of all existing drive data sets that
depend on the entries made during quick commissioning.
p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive
object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning.
The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p15 and p1500 are
re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are calculated
(corresponding to p0340 = 1).
p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the
interconnections via p15 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1.
p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
corresponding to p0340 = 1.
Value: 0: No quick parameterization
1: Quick parameterization after parameter reset
2: Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters
3: Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only)
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of zero.
When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters
associated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten.
If a catalog motor has not been selected (p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in order to
restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time:
induction motor: p0320, p0352, p0362 ... p0369, p0604, p0605, p0626 ... p0628
synchronous motor: p0326, p0327, p0352, p0604, p0605

r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the commissioning steps that have been carried out.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor/control parameters calculated (p0340 Yes No -
= 1, p3900 > 0)
02 Motor data identification carried out at Yes No -
standstill (p1910 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 359
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

03 Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 = Yes No -

1, 2)
08 Motor identification data have been Yes No -
automatically backed up
11 Automatic parameterization as standard Yes No -
drive control
12 Automatic parameterization as dynamic Yes No -
drive control
15 Motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters Yes No -
changed
Note: The individual bits are only set if the appropriate action has been initiated and successfully completed.
When motor rating plate parameters are changed, the final display is reset.

r3926[0...n] Voltage generation alternating base voltage amplitude / U_gen altern base
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the base voltage for the alternating voltage in the context of motor data identification.
0:
No alternating voltages. The function is de-activated.
<0:
Automatic determination of the base voltage and wobbulation / self-setting based on the converter and the connected
motor.
Otherwise:
Base voltage for alternating current generation in volts (wobbulation active).

r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Successfully completed component of the last motor data identification carried out.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Stator inductance estimate no Yes No -
measurement
02 Rotor time constant estimate no Yes No -
measurement
03 Leakage inductance estimate no Yes No -
measurement
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time Yes No -
range
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 De-activate vibration detection Yes No -
11 De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
12 De-activate rotor resistance Rr Yes No -
measurement
14 De-activate valve interlocking time Yes No -
measurement
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve Yes No -
voltage fault, dead time
16 Short motor identification (lower quality) Yes No -
17 Measurement without control parameter Yes No -
calculation
18 After motID direct transition into operation Yes No -
19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No -
20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

360 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

21 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes No -

22 Only identify circle Yes No -
23 De-activate circle identification Yes No -
24 Circle identification with 0 and 90 degrees Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r3925
Note: The parameter is a copy of p1909.

r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Successfully completed component of the last rotating measurement carried out.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller Yes No -
parameters
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
05 q leakage inductance ident. (for current Yes No -
controller adaptation)
11 Do not change the controller parameters Yes No -
during the measurement
12 Measurement shortened Yes No -
13 After measurement direct transition into Yes No -
operation
14 Calculate speed actual value smoothing Yes No -
time
Dependency: Refer to: r3925
Note: The parameter is a copy of p1959.

r3929[0...n] Motor data identification modulated voltage generation / MotID U_gen mod
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Configuration of voltage generation for the various MotID sections in the case of the most recent successful MotID.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Wobble U_generate to determine dead-time Yes No -
correction
01 Wobble U_generate to determine stator Yes No -
resistance
02 Wobble U_generation to determine rotor Yes No -
time constant
03 Wobble U_generation to determine leakage Yes No -
inductance
04 Wobble U_generation to determine dynamic Yes No -
leakage inductance
05 Wobble U_generation to determine Yes No -
magnetizing inductance
08 Alternating U_generate to determine dead- Yes No -
time correction
09 Alternating U_generate to determine stator Yes No -
resistance
10 Alternating U_generate to determine rotor Yes No -
time constant
11 Alternating U_generate to determine Yes No -
leakage inductance

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 361
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

12 Alternating U_generate to determine dyn. Yes No -

leakage inductance
13 Alternating U_generate to determine Yes No -
magnetizing inductance

r3930[0...4] Power unit EEPROM characteristics / PU characteristics

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the characteristics (A5E number and versions) of the power unit.
[0]: A5E number xxxx (A5Exxxxyyyy)
[1]: A5E number yyyy (A5Exxxxyyyy)
[2]: File version (logistic)
[3]: File version (fixed data)
[4]: File version (calib data)

p3950 Service parameter / Serv par

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C, U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: For service personnel only.

r3960[0...1] Control Unit temperature measured / CU temp measured

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the measured Control Unit temperature.
An appropriate message is output when 87 °C is exceeded.
Index: [0] = Actual measured value
[1] = Maximum measured value
Dependency: Refer to: A01009
Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
For r3960[0]:
Displays the currently measured Control Unit temperature.
For r3960[1]:
Displays the highest measured Control Unit temperature. This value is saved on the module in a non-volatile fashion.

r3974 Drive unit status word / Drv_unit ZSW

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the drive unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

362 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP

00 Software reset active Yes No -
01 Writing of parameters disabled as Yes No -
parameter save in progress
02 Writing of parameters disabled as macro is Yes No -
running

r3978 BICO CounterDevice / BICO CounterDevice

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device.
The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.

p3981 Faults acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8060
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Setting to acknowledge all active faults of a drive object.
Notice: Safety messages cannot be acknowledged using this parameter.
Note: Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge.
After acknowledgment, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.

p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the mode to change over the master control / LOCAL mode.
Value: 0: Change master control for STW1.0 = 0
1: Change master control in operation
Danger: When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate
up to another setpoint.

r3986 Parameter count / Parameter No.

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit.
The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981, r0989

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 363
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r3988[0...1] Boot state / Boot_state

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 800 -
Description: Index 0:
Displays the boot state.
Index 1:
Displays the partial boot state
Value: 0: Not active
1: Fatal fault
10: Fault
20: Reset all parameters
30: Drive object modified
40: Download using commissioning software
50: Parameter download using commissioning software
90: Reset Control Unit
100: Start initialization
101: Only for internal Siemens use
110: Instantiate Control Unit basis
111: Insert drive object
112: Only for internal Siemens use
113: Only for internal Siemens use
114: Only for internal Siemens use
115: Parameter download using commissioning software
117: Only for internal Siemens use
150: Wait until Power Module is determined
160: Evaluate Power Module
170: Instantiate Control Unit reset
180: Only for internal Siemens use
200: First commissioning
210: Create drive packages
250: Wait for fault acknowledge
325: Wait for input of drive type
350: Determine drive type
360: Only for internal Siemens use
370: Wait until p0010 is set to 0
380: Only for internal Siemens use
550: Call conversion functions for parameter
625: Wait for non-cyclic start
650: Start cyclic operation
660: Evaluate drive commissioning status
670: Only for internal Siemens use
680: Only for internal Siemens use
690: Wait for non-cyclic start
700: Save parameters
725: Wait for cyclic
740: Check the ability to operate
745: Start cyclic calculations
750: Interrupt enable
800: Initialization finished
Index: [0] = System
[1] = Partial boot

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

364 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r3996[0...1] Parameter write inhibit status / Par_write inhib st

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited.
r3996[0] = 0:
Parameter write not inhibited.
0 < r3996[0] < 100:
Parameter write inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing.
Index: [0] = Progress calculations
[1] = Cause
Note: For index 1:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.

p5271[0...n] Online tuning configuration controller / Ot config ctrl

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 5045
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the online tuning.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Load adaptation Kp Yes No -
06 Do not change Kp Yes No -
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Note: For bit 00:
For significant differences between the motor and load moment of inertia, or for low dynamic performance of the
controller, then the P controller becomes a PD controller in the position control loop. As a consequence, the dynamic
performance of the position controller is increased.
This function should only be set when the speed pre-control (bit 3 = 1) or the torque pre-control (bit 4 = 1) is active.
For bit 01:
At low speeds, the controller gain factors are automatically reduced in order to avoid noise and oscillation at
standstill.
For bit 02:
The estimated load moment of inertia is taken into account for the speed controller gain (see p5273).
For bit 03:
Activates the speed pre-control for the basic positioner (EPOS).
For bit 04:
Activates the torque pre-control for the basic positioner (EPOS).
For bit 05:
The maximum setpoint acceleration for the basic positioner (EPOS) is determined based on the estimated moment of
inertia. This is realized by activating the bit once.
The prerequisite is that the drive pulses are inhibited, and the moment of inertia was previously determined.
For bit 06:
The speed controller gain set in p1460 is not changed when calculating the controller data.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 365
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p5310[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol configuration / J_est config

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Configuration of the moment of inertia precontrol when the moment of inertia estimator is active.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activating calculations Yes No -
01 Activating the moment of inertia precontrol Yes No -
Dependency: The function module "Moment of inertia estimator" (r0108.10) must be activated for the "Moment of inertia precontrol"
function.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: r5311, p5312, p5313, p5314, p5315
Note: Possible bit combinations:
Bit 1, 0
= 0, 0 --> function not active
= 0, 1 --> cyclic calculation of the coefficients without moment of inertia precontrol (commissioning)
= 1, 0 --> moment of inertia precontrol activated (without cyclic calculation of the coefficients)
= 1, 1 --> moment of inertia precontrol activated (with cyclic calculation of the coefficients)
For bit 00:
Calculation for the constant and linear coefficients of the moment of inertia precontrol is activated. The results are
written to parameters (p5312, p5313, p5314, p5315).
For bit 01:
The moment of inertia precontrol is activated.
The moment of inertia is calculated from the currently measured load torque and the saved coefficients (p5312,
p5313, p5314, p5315).

r5311[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol status word / J_prectrl ZSW

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the moment of inertia precontrol.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 New measuring points are available Yes No -
01 New parameters being calculated Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia precontrol active Yes No -
03 Calculation of positive coefficients Yes No -
completed
04 Calculation of negative coefficients Yes No -
completed
05 Results are being written to parameter Yes No -
Dependency: The function module "Moment of inertia estimator" (r0108.10) must be activated for the "Moment of inertia precontrol"
function.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p5310, p5312, p5313, p5314, p5315

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

366 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p5312[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol linear positive / J_est lin pos

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [s^2] 340.28235E36 [s^2] 0.000000 [s^2]
Description: Setting of the linear coefficients for moment of inertia precontrol in the positive direction when the moment of inertia
estimator is active.
The estimated moment of inertia is obtained according to the following formula:
Moment of inertia (J) = linear coefficient (p5312) * load torque + constant coefficient (p5313)
Dependency: The function module "Moment of inertia estimator" (r0108.10) must be activated for the "Moment of inertia precontrol"
function.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p5310, r5311, p5313, p5314, p5315

p5313[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol constant positive / J_est const pos

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [kgm²] 340.28235E36 [kgm²] 0.000000 [kgm²]
Description: Setting of the constant coefficients for moment of inertia precontrol in the positive direction when the moment of
inertia estimator is active.
The estimated moment of inertia is obtained according to the following formula:
Moment of inertia (J) = linear coefficient (p5312) * load torque + constant coefficient (p5313)
Dependency: The function module "Moment of inertia estimator" (r0108.10) must be activated for the "Moment of inertia precontrol"
function.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p5310, r5311, p5312, p5314, p5315

p5314[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol linear negative / J_est lin neg

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [s^2] 340.28235E36 [s^2] 0.000000 [s^2]
Description: Setting of the linear coefficients for moment of inertia precontrol in the negative direction when the moment of inertia
estimator is active.
The estimated moment of inertia is obtained according to the following formula:
Moment of inertia (J) = linear coefficient (p5314) * load torque + constant coefficient (p5315)
Dependency: The function module "Moment of inertia estimator" (r0108.10) must be activated for the "Moment of inertia precontrol"
function.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p5310, r5311, p5312, p5313, p5315

p5315[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol constant negative / J_est const neg

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [kgm²] 340.28235E36 [kgm²] 0.000000 [kgm²]
Description: Setting of the constant coefficients for moment of inertia precontrol in the negative direction when the moment of
inertia estimator is active.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 367
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The estimated moment of inertia is obtained according to the following formula:

Moment of inertia (J) = linear coefficient (p5314) * load torque + constant coefficient (p5315)
Dependency: The function module "Moment of inertia estimator" (r0108.10) must be activated for the "Moment of inertia precontrol"
function.
Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p5310, r5311, p5312, p5313, p5314

p5316[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol change time moment of inertia / J_prectrl t J

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the change time for the moment of inertia for the moment of inertia precontrol.
Lower values mean that faster changes are possible.
For a higher value, this estimated value is smoothed more significantly.
Dependency: Not visible with application class: "Standard Drive Control" (SDC, p0096 = 1)
Refer to: p1400, p1560, p1562

p5350[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 boost factor at standstill / Standst boost_fact

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8017
Min Max Factory setting
1.0000 2.0000 2.0000
Description: Sets the boost factor for the copper losses at standstill for motor temperature models 1 and 3.
The entered factor is active for speed n = 0 [rpm].
This factor is linearly reduced down to 1 between speeds n = 0 ... 1 [rpm].
The following values are required to calculate the boost factor:
- stall current (I_0, p0318, catalog value)
- thermal stall current (I_th0, catalog value)
The boost factor is calculated as follows:
- p5350 = (I_0 / I_th0)^2
Dependency: Refer to: p0318, p0612, p5390, p5391
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07014
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: Temperature model 1 (I2t):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
- parameter p5350 is not active. Internally, a fixed boost factor of 1.333 is used as basis for the calculation.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
- parameter p5350 becomes active as described above.

r5389.0...8 CO/BO: Mot_temp status word faults/alarms / Mot_temp ZSW F/A

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 8016
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for faults and alarms of the motor temperature monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor temperature measurement fault Yes No -
active
01 Motor temperature model fault active Yes No -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

368 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

02 Encoder temperature measurement fault Yes No -

active
04 Motor temperature measurement alarm Yes No -
active
05 Motor temperature measurement alarm Yes No -
active
08 Current reduction active Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r0034, p0612, r0632
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910
Note: For bit 00, 04:
The motor temperature is measured using a temperature sensor (p0600, p0601). When the bit is set, a high
temperature is identified, and a corresponding signal is additionally output.
For bit 01, 05:
The motor temperature is monitored based on a temperature model (p0612). When the bit is set, a high temperature
is identified, and a corresponding signal is additionally output.
For bit 02:
The encoder temperature is measured using a temperature sensor. When the bit is set, a high temperature is
identified, and a corresponding signal is additionally output.
For bit 08:
When reaching the motor temperature alarm threshold, reduction of the maximum current is set as response (p0610
= 1). When the bit is set, reduction of the maximum current is active.

p5390[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 alarm threshold / A thresh

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8017
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 110.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature models 1 and 3.
The stator winding temperature (r0632) is used to initiate the signal.
The following applies for temperature model 1 (I2t):
- only effective from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1.
- Alarm A07012 is output after the alarm threshold is exceeded.
- when commissioning a catalog motor for the first time, the threshold value is copied from p0605 to p5390.
The following applies for temperature model 3:
- after the alarm threshold is exceeded, alarm A07012 is output and a calculated delay time (t = p5371/p5381) is
started.
- if the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011
is output.
Dependency: Refer to: r0034, p0605, p0612, r0632, p5391
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07014
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The hysteresis is 2 K.

p5391[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 fault threshold / F thresh

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8017
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 120.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature models 1 and 3.
Fault F07011 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded.
The stator winding temperature (r0632) is used to initiate the signal.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 369
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The following applies for temperature model 1 (I2t):

- only effective from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1.
- when commissioning a catalog motor for the first time, the threshold value is copied from p0615 to p5391.
Dependency: Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615, r0632, p5390
Refer to: F07011, A07014
Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The hysteresis is 2 K.

r5397 Mot_temp_mod 3 ambient temperature image p0613 / AmbTmp image p0613

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8019
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the ambient temperature for motor temperature model 3.
This value is used to calculate the utilization display (p0034).
The parameter value is an image of p0613.
Dependency: Refer to: r0034
Note: Users cannot see and change parameter p0613 (only Siemens internal).

r5398[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 3 alarm threshold image p5390 / A thr image p5390

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8019
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 3.
This value is used to calculate the utilization display (p0034).
The parameter value is an image of p5390.
Dependency: Refer to: p5390
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07014
Note: Users cannot see and change parameter p5390 (only Siemens internal).

r5399[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 3 fault threshold image p5391 / F thr image p5391

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: MDS
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 8019
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 3.
Fault F07011 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded.
The parameter value is an image of p5391.
Dependency: Refer to: p5391
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07014
Note: Users cannot see and change parameter p5391 (only Siemens internal).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

370 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r5600 Pe energy-saving mode ID / Pe mode ID

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2381, 2382
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: Displays the PROFIenergy mode ID of the effective energy-saving mode.
Value: 0: POWER OFF
2: Energy-saving mode 2
240: Operation
255: Ready
Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

p5602[0...1] Pe energy-saving mode pause time minimal / Pe mod t_pause min

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2381
Min Max Factory setting
300000 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] [0] 300000 [ms]
[1] 480000 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum possible pause time for the energy-saving mode.
The value is the sum of the following times:
- Energy-saving mode transition time
- Operating state transition time regular
- Energy-saving mode, time of minimum stay
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Mode 2
Note: It is not permissible that the value is less than the sum of the "energy-saving mode transition time" and the "operating
state transition time" (system properties).
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

p5606[0...1] Pe energy-saving mode time of maximum stay / Pe t_max_stay

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2381
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] 4294967295 [ms]
Description: Sets the time of maximum stay for the energy-saving mode.
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Mode 2
Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

p5611 Pe energy-saving properties general / Pe properties gen

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2381, 2382
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the general properties for energy-saving.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 371
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP

00 Inhibit PROFIenergy control commands Yes No -
01 Drive initiates OFF1 when transitioning to Yes No -
energy-saving mode
02 Trans to energy-saving mode from Yes No -
PROFIdrive state S3/S4 poss
Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
PROFIdrive state S4: operation

p5612[0...1] Pe energy-saving properties mode-dependent / Pe properties mod

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 0110 bin
[1] 0000 bin
Description: Sets the mode-dependent properties for energy-saving.
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Mode 2
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Reserved Yes No -
Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

r5613.0...1 CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive / Pe save act/inact

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2382
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the state display PROFIenergy energy saving active or inactive.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Pe active Yes No -
01 Pe inactive Yes No -
Note: Bit 0 and bit 1 are inverse of one another.
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

p5614 BI: Pe set switching-on inhibited signal source / Pe sw on_inh s_src

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2382
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to set in the PROFIdrive state S1 "switching-on inhibited".
Dependency: Refer to: r5613
Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

r7758[0...19] KHP Control Unit serial number / KHP CU ser_no

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the Control Unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

372 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded.
Dependency: Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection

p7759[0...19] KHP Control Unit reference serial number / KHP CU ref ser_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Sets the reference serial number for the Control Unit.
Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again
adapt the project to the modified hardware.
Dependency: Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
- the OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data".
- SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or
when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory
card copy protection have been activated.

r7760.0...12 CO/BO: Write protection/know-how protection status / Wr_prot/KHP stat

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status for the write protection and know-how protection.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Write protection active Yes No -
01 Know-how protection active Yes No -
02 Know-how protection temporarily withdrawn Yes No -
03 Know-how protection cannot be de- Yes No -
activated
04 Extended copy protection is active Yes No -
05 Basic copy protection is active Yes No -
06 Trace and measuring functions for Yes No -
diagnostic purposes active
12 Reserved Siemens Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: p7761, p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
For bit 00:
Write protection can be activated/de-activated via p7761 on the Control Unit.
For bit 01:
The know-how protection can be activated by entering a password (p7766 ... p7768).
For bit 02:
If it has already been activated, know-how protection can be temporarily de-activated by entering the valid password
in p7766. In this case, bit 1 = 0 and bit 2 = 1 offset.
For bit 03:
Know-how protection cannot be de-activated, as p7766 is not entered in the OEM exception list (only the factory
setting is possible). This bit is only set if know-how protection is active (bit 1 = 1) and p7766 has not been entered in
the OEM exception list.
For bit 04:
When know-how protection has been activated, the contents of the memory card (parameter and DCC data) can be
additionally protected against being used with other memory cards/Control Units. This bit is only set if know-how
protection is active and p7765 bit 00 is set.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 373
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For bit 05:

When know-how protection has been activated, the contents of the memory card (parameter and DCC data) can be
additionally protected against being used with other memory cards. This bit is only set if know-how protection is
active and in p7765 bit 01 is set and not bit 00.
For bit 06:
When know-how protection is activated, the drive data can be traced using the device trace function. This bit is only
set if know-how protection is active and in p7765.2 is set.

p7761 Write protection / Write protection

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the write protection for adjustable parameters.
Value: 0: De-activate write protection
1: Activate write protection
Dependency: Refer to: r7760
Note: Parameters with the "WRITE_NO_LOCK" attributes are excluded from the write protection.
A product-specific list of these parameters is also available in the corresponding List Manual.

p7762 Write protection multi-master fieldbus system access behavior / Fieldbus acc_behav
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the behavior for write protection when accessing via multi-master fieldbus systems (e.g. CAN, BACnet).
Value: 0: Write access independent of p7761
1: Write access dependent on p7761
Dependency: Refer to: r7760, p7761

p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7764
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 500 1
Description: Sets the number of parameters for the OEM exception list (p7764[0...n]).
p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1
Dependency: Refer to: p7764
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to.

p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: p7763
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 [0] 7766
[1...499] 0
Description: OEM exception list (p7764[0...n] for setting parameters that should be excluded from know-how protection.
p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

374 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: The number of indices depends on p7763.

Refer to: p7763
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to.

p7765 KHP configuration / KHP config

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Configuration settings for know-how protection.
For bit 00, 01:
When KHP is activated, this means that the OEM can define whether the parameters and DCC data encrypted on the
memory card should be protected before using on other memory cards/Control Units.
For bit 02:
This means that the OEM can define whether it is possible or not to trace the drive data using the device trace
function although KHP is activated.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Extended copy protection - linked to the Yes No -
memory card and CU
01 Basic copy protection - linked to the Yes No -
memory card
02 Permit trace and measuring functions for Yes No -
diagnostic purposes
Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7767, p7768
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
For copy protection, the serial numbers of the memory card and/or Control Unit are checked.
The memory card copy protection and preventing data to be traced are only effective when the know-how protection
has been activated.
For bit 00, 01:
If both bits are inadvertently set to 1 (e.g. at the BOP), then the setting of bit 0 applies.
There is no copy protection if both bits are set to 0.

p7766[0...29] KHP password input / KHP passw input

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Sets the password for know-how protection.
Example of a password:
123aBc = 49 50 51 97 66 99 dec (ASCII characters)
[0] = character 1 (e.g. 49 dec)
[1] = character 2 (e.g. 50 dec)
...
[5] = character 6 (e.g. 99 dec)
[29] = 0 dec (completes the entry)
Dependency: Refer to: p7767, p7768
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
When using the STARTER commissioning software, the password should be entered using the associated dialogs.
The following rules apply when entering the password:
- Password entry must start with p7766[0].
- no gaps are permissible in the password.
- Entering a password is completed when writing to p7766[29] (p7766[29] = 0 for passwords less than 30 characters).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 375
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: KHP: Know-How Protection

When reading, p7766[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.
Parameters with the "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK" attribute are not involved in the know-how protection.
Parameters with the "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" attribute can be read even when know-how protection is activated.
A product-specific list of these parameters is also available in the corresponding List Manual.

p7767[0...29] KHP password new / KHP passw new

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Sets the new password for know-how protection.
Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7768
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
When reading, p7767[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.

p7768[0...29] KHP password confirmation / KHP passw confirm

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Confirms the new password for know-how protection.
Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7767
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
When reading, p7768[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.

p7769[0...20] KHP memory card reference serial number / KHP mem ref ser_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Sets the reference serial number for the memory card.
Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again
adapt the project to the modified hardware.
Dependency: Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
Note: KHP: Know-How Protection
- the OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data".
- SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or
when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory
card copy protection have been activated.

p7775 NVRAM data backup/import/delete / NVRAM backup

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C, U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 17 0
Description: Setting to backup/import/delete NVRAM data.
NVRAM data are non-volatile data in the device (e.g. fault buffer).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

376 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For NVRAM data actions, the following data are excluded:

- Crash diagnostics
- CU operating hours counter
- CU temperature
- safety logbook
Value: 0: Inactive
1: NVRAM data backup to memory card
2: Import NVRAM data from the memory card
3: Delete NVRAM data in the device
10: Error when clearing
11: Error when backing up, memory card not available
12: Error when backing up, insufficient memory space
13: Error when backing up
14: Error when importing, memory card not available
15: Error when importing, checksum error
16: Error when importing, no NVRAM data available
17: Error when importing
Notice: For value = 2, 3:
These actions are only possible when pulses are inhibited.
Note: After the action has been successfully completed, the parameter is automatically set to zero.
The actions importing and deleting NVRAM data immediately initiate a warm restart.
If the procedure was not successfully completed, then an appropriate fault value is displayed (p7775 >= 10).

r7841[0...15] Power Module serial number / PM serial no.

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the Power Module.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.

r7843[0...20] Memory card serial number / Mem_card ser.no

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the memory card.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
Note: Example: displaying the serial number for a memory card:
r7843[0] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 1
r7843[1] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 2
r7843[2] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 3
r7843[3] = 57 dec --> ASCII characters = "9" --> serial number, character 4
r7843[4] = 50 dec --> ASCII characters = "2" --> serial number, character 5
r7843[5] = 51 dec --> ASCII characters = "3" --> serial number, character 6
r7843[6] = 69 dec --> ASCII characters = "E" --> serial number, character 7
r7843[7] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 8
...
r7843[19] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 20
r7843[20] = 0 dec
Serial number = 111923E

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 377
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r7901[0...81] Sampling times / t_sample

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Displays the sampling times currently present on the drive unit.
r7901[0...63]: sampling times of hardware time slices.
r7901[64...82]: sampling times of software time slices.
r7901[x] = 0, means the following:
No methods have been registered in the time slice involved.
Note: The basis for the software time slices is T_NRK = p7901[13].

r7903 Hardware sampling times still assignable / HW t_samp free

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of hardware sampling times that can still be assigned.
These free sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC or FBLOCKS.
Note: OA: Open Architecture

r8540.0...15 BO: STW1 from BOP/IOP in the manual mode / STW1 OP

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: For the manual mode: Display of STW1 (control word 1) entered at the BOP/ IOP.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Reserved Yes No -
04 Reserved Yes No -
05 Reserved Yes No -
06 Reserved Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030
10 Reserved Yes No -
11 Direction reversal (setpoint) Yes No -
12 Reserved Yes No -
13 Reserved Yes No -
14 Reserved Yes No -
15 Reserved Yes No -

r8541 CO: Speed setpoint from BOP/IOP in the manual mode / N_set OP
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: For the manual mode: Display of the speed setpoint entered at the BOP/ IOP.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

378 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p8542[0...15] BI: Active STW1 in the BOP/IOP manual mode / STW1 act OP
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 8540.0
[1] 8540.1
[2] 8540.2
[3] 8540.3
[4] 8540.4
[5] 8540.5
[6] 8540.6
[7] 8540.7
[8] 8540.8
[9] 8540.9
[10] 8540.10
[11] 8540.11
[12] 8540.12
[13] 8540.13
[14] 8540.14
[15] 8540.15
Description: For the manual mode: Setting of the signal sources for STW1 (control word 1).
Index: [0] = ON/OFF1
[1] = OC / OFF2
[2] = OC / OFF3
[3] = Operation enable
[4] = Ramp-function generator enable
[5] = Continue ramp-function generator
[6] = Speed setpoint enable
[7] = Acknowledge fault
[8] = Jog bit 0
[9] = Jog bit 1
[10] = Master control by PLC
[11] = Direction reversal (setpoint)
[12] = Enable speed controller
[13] = Motorized potentiometer raise
[14] = Motorized potentiometer lower
[15] = CDS bit 0

p8543 CI: Active speed setpoint in the BOP/IOP manual mode / N_act act OP
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 8541[0]
Description: For the manual mode: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint.

p8552 IOP speed unit / IOP speed unit

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 2
Description: Sets the unit for displaying and entering speeds.
Value: 1: Hz
2: rpm

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 379
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p8558 BI: Select IOP manual mode / Sel IOP man mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

r8570[0...39] Macro drive object / Macro DO

Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

r8571[0...39] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

r8572[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p1000
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

r8573[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p1500
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

380 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r8585 Macro execution actual / Macro executed

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the macro currently being executed on the drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p1000, p1500, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573

p8805 Identification and maintenance 4 configuration / I&M 4 config

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the configuration for the content of identification and maintenance 4 (I&M 4, p8809).
Value: 0: Standard value for I&M 4 (p8809)
1: User value for I&M 4 (p8809)
Dependency: For p8805 = 0, if the user writes at least one value in p8809[0...53], then p8805 is automatically set to = 1.
When p8805 is reset = 0, then the content of the factory setting is set in p8809.
Note: For p8805 = 0:
PROFINET I&M 4 (p8809) contains the information for the SI change tracking.
For p8805 = 1:
PROFINET I&M 4 (p8809) contains the values written by the user.

p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- -
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 1" (I&M 1).
This information is known as "System identifier" and "Location identifier".
Dependency: Refer to: p8807, p8808
Notice: Only characters belonging to the standard ASCII character set may be used (32 dec to 126 dec).
Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
For p8806[0...31]:
System identifier.
For p8806[32...53]:
Location identifier.

p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- -
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 2" (I&M 2).
This information is known as "Installation date".
Dependency: Refer to: p8806, p8808

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 381
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
For p8807[0...15]:
Dates of installation or first commissioning of the device with the following format options (ASCII):
YYYY-MM-DD
or
YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm
- YYYY: year
- MM: month 01 ... 12
- DD: day 01 ... 31
- hh: hours 00 ... 23
- mm: minutes 00 ... 59
Separators must be placed between the individual data, i.e. a hyphen '-', space ' ' and colon ':'.

p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- -
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 3" (I&M 3).
This information is known as "Supplementary information".
Dependency: Refer to: p8806, p8807
Notice: Only characters belonging to the standard ASCII character set may be used (32 dec to 126 dec).
Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
For p8808[0...53]:
Any supplementary information and comments (ASCII).

p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 4" (I&M 4).
This information is known as "Signature".
Dependency: This parameter is pre-assigned as standard (see note).
After writing information to p8809, p8805 is automatically set to = 1.
Refer to: p8805
Note: For p8805 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
Parameter p8809 contains the information described below.
For p8809[0...3]:
Contains the value from r9781[0] "SI change tracking checksum functional".
For p8809[4...7]:
Contains the value from r9782[0] "SI change tracking time stamp checksum functional".
For p8809[8...53]:
Reserved.

r8854 PROFINET state / PN state

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: State display for PROFINET.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

382 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: No initialization
1: Fatal fault
2: Initialization
3: Send configuration
4: Receive configuration
5: Non-cyclic communication
6: Cyclic communications but no setpoints (stop/no clock cycle)
255: Cyclic communication

r8858[0...39] PROFINET read diagnostics channel / PN diag_chan read

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET diagnostics data.
Note: Only for internal Siemens diagnostics.

r8859[0...7] PROFINET identification data / PN ident data

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET identification data
Index: [0] = Version interface structure
[1] = Version interface driver
[2] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[3] = CB type
[4] = Firmware version
[5] = Firmware date (year)
[6] = Firmware date (day/month)
[7] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note: Example:
r8859[0] = 100 --> version of the interface structure V1.00
r8859[1] = 111 --> version of the interface driver V1.11
r8859[2] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r8859[3] = 0
r8859[4] = 1300 --> first part, firmware version V13.00 (second part, see index 7)
r8859[5] = 2011 --> year 2011
r8859[6] = 2306 --> 23rd June
r8859[7] = 1700 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V13.00.17.00)

r8909 PN device ID / PN device ID

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET Device ID.
Every SINAMICS device type has its own PROFINET Device ID and its own PROFINET GSD.
Note: List of the SINAMICS Device IDs:
0501 hex: S120/S150
0504 hex: G130/G150
050A hex: DC MASTER
050C hex: MV

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 383
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

050F hex: G120P

0510 hex: G120C
0511 hex: G120 CU240E-2
0512 hex: G120D
0513 hex: G120 CU250S-2 Vector
0514 hex: G110M

p8920[0...239] PN Name of Station / PN Name Stat

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Sets the station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual station name is displayed in r8930.
Dependency: Refer to: p8925, r8930
Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
PN: PROFINET

p8921[0...3] PN IP address / PN IP addr

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Sets the IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual IP address is displayed in r8931.
Dependency: Refer to: p8925, r8931
Note: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8922[0...3] PN Def Gateway / PN Def Gateway

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Sets the default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual standard gateway is displayed in r8932.
Dependency: Refer to: p8925, r8932
Note: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8923[0...3] PN Subnet Mask / PN Subnet Mask

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Sets the subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual subnet mask is displayed in r8933.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

384 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: p8925, r8933

Note: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8924 PN DHCP Mode / PN DHCP mode

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the DHCP mode for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual DHCP mode is displayed in r8934.
Value: 0: DHCP off
2: DHCP on, identification using MAC address
3: DHCP on, identification via name of station
Dependency: Refer to: p8925, r8934
Notice: When the DHCP mode is active (p8924 not equal to 0), then PROFINET communication via this interface is no longer
possible! However, the interface can be used by the STARTER/SCOUT commissioning tool.
Note: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The active DHCP mode is displayed in parameter r8934.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8925 PN interface configuration / PN IF config

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Setting to activate the interface configuration for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
p8925 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation.
Value: 0: No function
1: Reserved
2: Save and activate configuration
3: Delete configuration
Dependency: Refer to: p8920, p8921, p8922, p8923, p8924
Notice: When the DHCP mode is active (p8924 > 0), then PROFINET communication via this interface is no longer possible!
However, the interface can be used by the STARTER/SCOUT commissioning tool.
Note: For p8925 = 2:
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is saved and activated after the next POWER ON.
For p8925 = 3:
The factory setting of the interface configuration is loaded after the next POWER ON.

p8929 PN remote controller number / PN rem ctrl num

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Description: Sets the number of remote controllers expected for PROFINET onboard.
The "Shared Device" functionality is activated with a value = 2.
The drive is being accessed by two PROFINET controllers simultaneously:
- automation controller (SIMOTION or SIMATIC A-CPU).
- safety controller (SIMATIC F-CPU).
Value: 1: Automation or Safety
2: Automation and Safety

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 385
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: The F CPU may only use PROFIsafe telegrams.

Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.

r8930[0...239] PN Name of Station actual / PN Name Stat act

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8931[0...3] PN IP address actual / PN IP addr act

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: Displays the actual IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8932[0...3] PN Default Gateway actual / PN Def Gateway act

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: Displays the actual default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8933[0...3] PN Subnet Mask actual / PN Subnet Mask act

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: Displays the actual subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8934 PN DHCP Mode actual / PN DHCP Mode act

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 -
Description: Displays the actual DHCP mode for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
Value: 0: DHCP off
2: DHCP on, identification using MAC address
3: DHCP on, identification via name of station
Notice: When the DHCP mode is active (parameter value not equal to 0), PROFINET communication via this interface is no
longer possible! However, the interface can be used for commissioning tool such as STARTER or SCOUT.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

386 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r8935[0...5] PN MAC address / PN MAC addr

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00FF hex -
Description: Displays the MAC address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8939 PN DAP ID / PN DAP ID

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET Device Access Point ID (DAP ID) for the onboard PROFINET interface.
The combination of device ID (r8909) and DAP ID uniquely identifies a PROFINET access point.
Note: List of the SINAMICS DAP IDs:
20007 hex: CBE20 V4.5
20008 hex: CBE20 V4.6
20107 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.5
20108 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.6
20307 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.5
20308 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.6
20407 hex: CU230P-2 PN /CU240x-2 PN V4.5
20408 hex: CU230P-2 PN /CU240x-2 PN /CU250S-2 PN /G110M PN V4.6
20507 hex: CU250D-2 PN V4.5
20508 hex: CU250D-2 PN V4.6

r8960[0...2] PN subslot controller assignment / PN subslot assign

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 -
Description: Displays the controller assignment of a PROFINET subslot on the actual drive object.
Index: [0] = Subslot 2 PROFIsafe
[1] = Subslot 3 PZD telegram
[2] = Subslot 4 PZD supplementary data
Dependency: Refer to: r8961, r8962
Note: Example:
If the parameter contains the value 2 in index [1], then this means that subslot 3 is assigned to controller 2.

r8961[0...3] PN IP Address Remote Controller 1 / IP Addr Rem Ctrl1

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: Displays the IP address of the first PROFINET controller connected with the device via PN onboard.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 387
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r8962[0...3] PN IP Address Remote Controller 2 / IP Addr Rem Ctrl2

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
Description: Displays the IP address of the second PROFINET controller connected with the device via PN onboard.

p8980 Ethernet/IP profile / Eth/IP profile

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2473
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the profile for Ethernet/IP.
Value: 0: SINAMICS
1: ODVA AC/DC
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
ODVA: Open DeviceNet Vendor Association

p8981 Ethernet/IP ODVA STOP mode / Eth/IP ODVA STOP

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2473
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the STOP mode for the Ethernet/IP ODVA profile (p8980 = 1).
Value: 0: OFF1
1: OFF2
Dependency: Refer to: p8980
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling / Eth/IP ODVA n scal

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
123 133 128
Description: Sets the scaling for the speed for Ethernet/IP ODVA profile (p8980 = 1).
Value: 123: 32
124: 16
125: 8
126: 4
127: 2
128: 1
129: 0.5
130: 0.25
131: 0.125
132: 0.0625
133: 0.03125
Dependency: Refer to: p8980

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

388 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.

The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8983 Ethernet/IP ODVA torque scaling / Eth/IP ODVA M scal

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
123 133 128
Description: Sets the scaling for the torque for Ethernet/IP ODVA profile (p8980 = 1).
Value: 123: 32
124: 16
125: 8
126: 4
127: 2
128: 1
129: 0.5
130: 0.25
131: 0.125
132: 0.0625
133: 0.03125
Dependency: Refer to: p8980
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8991 USB memory access / USB mem acc

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Description: Selects the storage medium for access via the USB mass storage.
Value: 1: Memory card
2: Flash r/w internal
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8999 USB functionality / USB Fct

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 3
Description: Setting the USB functionality.
Value: 1: USS commissioning via the virtual COM port
2: Only memory access
3: USB commissioning and memory access
Note: COMM: Commissioning.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 389
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9301 SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 2) / SI Mtn enable P2

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable SI Motion Enable Inhibit -
17 Enable SDI Enable Inhibit 2824
Dependency: Refer to: p9501
Refer to: F01682, F01683
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For bit 30 = 1, PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured in the F host.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9301 SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 2) / SI Mtn enable P2

CU240E-2_PN_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable SI Motion Enable Inhibit -
16 Enable SSM hysteresis and filtering Enable Inhibit 2823
17 Enable SDI Enable Inhibit 2824
30 Enable F-DI in PROFIsafe telegram 900 Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: p9501
Refer to: F01682, F01683
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For bit 30 = 1, PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured in the F host.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9306 SI Motion function specification (processor 2) / SI Mtn fct spec P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1 3 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the function specification for the safe motion monitoring.
Value: 1: Safety without encoder and braking ramp(SBR)
3: Safety without encoder with accel_monitoring(SAM) / delay time

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

390 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: C30711

Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

p9307 SI Motion function configuration (processor 2) / SI Mtn config P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - 0011 bin
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the function configuration for safe motion monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Extended message acknowledgment Yes No -
01 Setpoint velocity limit for STOP F No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For bit 00:
When the function is activated, a safety-relevant acknowledgment (internal event acknowledge) can be performed by
selecting/deselecting STO.
For bit 01:
When the function is activated, the active setpoint velocity limit (CO: r9733) is set to zero when STOP F is active.

p9309 SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (processor 2) / SI Mtn behav IL P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
Description: Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 SDI during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
For bit 00:
If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit
speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1,
because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case,
the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be
increased.
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For bit 00:
For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level.
For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept
and the system goes into the STO state.
For bit 08:
For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive.
For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO
state.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 391
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9309 SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (processor 2) / SI Mtn behav IL P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
Description: Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SSM during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
08 SDI during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
For bit 00:
If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit
speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1,
because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case,
the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be
increased.
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For bit 00:
For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level.
For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept
and the system goes into the STO state.
For bit 08:
For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive.
For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO
state.

p9321[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load denominator (processor 2) / SI Mtn gear den P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1 2147000000 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9322
Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

392 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9322[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load numerator (processor 2) / SI Mtn gear num P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1 2147000000 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9321
Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active.
Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the
gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9321 = 1, p9322 = 8 (4 x 2)

p9331[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS lim P2

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 2000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLS4
Dependency: Refer to: p9363, p9531
Refer to: C01714
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p9342 SI Motion act. val. comparison tolerance (crossw.) (processor 2) / SI Mtn actV tol P2
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [°] 360.0000 [°] 12.0000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between processors 1 and 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p9542
Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm.
For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and factory setting of p9320, p9321 and p9322, the factory setting of p9342
corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 ° on the motor side.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 393
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9345 SI Motion SSM filter time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM filt P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2823
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1).
The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9346 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM v_limP2

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2823
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
Dependency: Refer to: p9546
Caution: The following applies for p9306 = 3:
The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot.

Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9347 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst P2

CU240E-2_PN_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2823
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [rpm] 500.0000 [rpm] 10.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9348 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (processor 2) / SI mtn SAM tol P2
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 120000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function.
Dependency: Refer to: p9548
Refer to: C01706
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

394 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9351 SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS t P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2819, 2820
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover for the function "safely limited speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely limited velocity/speed stage, within this delay time, the "old"
velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS is activated from the state "SLS in active", then this delay is still applied.
Dependency: Refer to: p9551
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p9356 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn IL t_del P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2819
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [µs] 3600000000.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for STOP A after STOP B / SS1.
Dependency: Refer to: p9360, p9556
Refer to: C01701
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SS1: Safe Stop 1

p9358 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc t P2
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
5000000.00 [µs] 100000000.00 [µs] 40000000.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.
Dependency: Refer to: p9558
Refer to: C01799
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

p9360 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (processor 2) / SI Mtn IL n_sh P2

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP A).
Dependency: Refer to: p9356, p9560
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 395
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The shutdown speed has no effect for a value = 0.

SS1: Safe Stop 1

p9363[0...3] SI Motion SLS stop response (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS stop P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 1 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safely Limited Speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLS4
Dependency: Refer to: p9331, p9563
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p9364 SI Motion SDI tolerance (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI tol P2

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2824
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 [°] 360.000 [°] 12.000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C30716 is initiated.
Dependency: Refer to: p9365, p9366
Refer to: C30716
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p9365 SI Motion SDI delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI t P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2824
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
After selecting the SDI function, then for a maximum of this time, motion in the monitored direction is permissible.
This time can therefore be used for braking any motion.
Dependency: Refer to: p9364, p9366
Refer to: C30716
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

396 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9366 SI Motion SDI stop response (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI Stop P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2824
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 1 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
This setting applies to both directions of motion.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
Dependency: Refer to: p9364, p9365
Refer to: C30716
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p9368 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn SAM v_limP2

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function.
SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM.

p9370 SI Motion acceptance test mode (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc_mod P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0000 hex 00AC hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Setting to select and de-select the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] De-select the acceptance test mode
172: [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Dependency: Refer to: p9358, r9371
Refer to: C01799
Note: Acceptance test mode can only be selected if the motion monitoring functions, which are integrated in the drives, are
enabled (p9601.2/p9801.2).

r9371 SI Motion acceptance test status (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc_stat P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0000 hex 00AC hex -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 397
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive

12: [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
13: [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9370
15: [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
172: [AC hex] Acc_mode active
Dependency: Refer to: p9358, p9370
Refer to: C01799

p9381 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (processor 2) / SI Mtn ramp ref P2
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
600.0000 [rpm] 240000.0000 [rpm] 1500.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9382, p9383
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

p9382 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn rp t_del P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
10000.00 [µs] 99000000.00 [µs] 250000.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.
Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.
Dependency: Refer to: p9381, p9383
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
Internally, the set time is limited downwards to 2 safety monitoring clock cycles (2 * 12 ms).

p9383 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (processor 2) / SI Mtn rp t_mon P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 500.00 [ms] 3600000.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9381, p9382
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

p9385 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless fault tolerance (MM) / ActVal sl tol MM
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F -1 4 -1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the tolerance of the plausibility monitoring of the current and voltage angle.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

398 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

A higher value results in a higher degree of ruggedness when reversing at low speeds, as well as in the field
weakening range for load steps.
An increase is advantageous, if the current or voltage at the motor become small.
Dependency: Refer to: p9507
Refer to: F30681, C30711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Reducing this value can adversely affect the actual value sensing and the plausibility check.
When the value is increased, this results in a longer evaluation delay and a higher velocity deviation (r9787).
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3).
For synchronous motors, the value 4 must be set.
If value = -1:
- for synchronous motors, the calculation is automatically made with the value 4.
- for induction motors, the calculation is automatically made with a value of 0 (if the code number of the power unit
p0201[0] < 14000, otherwise with a value of 2).

p9386 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless delay time (P2) / ActVal sl t_del P2
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
5.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the encoderless actual value sensing after the pulses have been enabled.
The value must be greater than or equal to the motor magnetizing time (p0346).
Dependency: Refer to: C30711
Caution: The safety functionality is only completely guaranteed after this time has expired.

Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
If this value is reduced, this can have a negative impact on the actual value acquisition and plausibility check – and
result in Safety message C30711 with the message value 1041 or 1042.
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3).
The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

p9387 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless filter time (P2) / Actv sl t_filt P2
PM240 Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 25000.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with sensorless actual value sensing.
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
A longer filter time results in a longer response time.

p9388 SI Motion actual value sensing minimum current (P2) / ActVal sl I_min P2
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing referred to 1 A (i.e. 1 % = 10 mA).
- the value must be increased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- the value must be decreased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1041.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 399
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

For synchronous motors, the following condition must be fulfilled:

|p0305 x p9783| >= p9388 x 1.2
Recommendation: If required, the correct value of the motor minimum current should be determined by making the appropriate
measurements.
Dependency: Refer to: r9785
Refer to: C30711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
If this percentage value is reduced excessively, then this can result in a safety message and an inaccurate actual
value.

p9389 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless accel. limit (P2) / ActVal sl a_lim P2
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
10.00 [%] 3300.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the acceleration limit to filter velocity fluctuations.
If this percentage value is increased, when accelerating, velocity peaks that do not reflect the real velocity
characteristic can occur.
If this value is decreased, and this dampens the velocity peaks when accelerating.
- the value must be increased if C30711 with message value 1043 has occurred.
- the value must be lowered if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive Safety actual velocity.
Recommendation: The setting of this parameter depends on the motor and closed-loop control, and must be newly determined for each
configuration.
To do this, a measurement should be performed while the actual value jumps, and the limit in r9785[0] must be set so
low using p9389, so that it is exceeded by the value in r9785[1] a maximum of four times per second. The actual
value correction filter intervenes at this instant in time. The step is no longer so drastic.
Dependency: Refer to: r9784
Refer to: C30711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

r9398[0...1] SI Motion actual checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI Mtn act CRC P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum) on processor 2.
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference
Dependency: Refer to: p9399

p9399[0...1] SI Motion setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI Mtn setp CRC P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum) on processor 2.
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

400 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: r9398

p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Description: Setting and display when memory card is "removed safely".
Procedure:
Setting p9400 = 2 results in a value of 3
--> The memory card can be removed safely. After removal the value sets itself to 0 automatically.
Setting p9400 = 2 results in a value of 100
--> The memory card cannot be removed safely. Removal may destroy the file system on the memory card. It may be
necessary to set p9400 = 2 again.
Value: 0: No memory card inserted
1: Memory card inserted
2: Request "safe removal" of the memory card
3: "Safe removal" possible
100: "Safe removal" not possible due to access
Dependency: Refer to: r9401
Notice: Removing the memory card without a request (p9400 = 2) and confirmation (p9400 = 3) may destroy the file system
on the memory card. The memory card will then no longer work properly and must be replaced.
Note: The status when the memory card is being "removed safely" is shown in r9401.
For value = 0, 1, 3, 100:
These values can only be displayed, not set.

r9401 Safely remove memory card status / Mem_card rem stat

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the memory card.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Memory card inserted Yes No -
01 Memory card activated Yes No -
02 SIEMENS memory card Yes No -
03 Memory card as USB data storage medium Yes No -
from the PC used
Dependency: Refer to: p9400
Note: For bit 01, 00:
Bit 1/0 = 0/0: No memory card inserted (corresponds to p9400 = 0).
Bit 1/0 = 0/1: "Safe removal" possible (corresponds to p9400 = 3).
Bit 1/0 = 1/0: Status not possible.
Bit 1/0 = 1/1: Memory card inserted (corresponds to p9400 = 1, 2, 100).
For bit 02, 00:
Bit 2/0 = 0/0: No memory card inserted.
Bit 2/0 = 0/1: Memory card inserted, but not a SIEMENS memory card.
Bit 2/0 = 1/0: Status not possible.
Bit 2/0 = 1/1: SIEMENS memory card inserted.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 401
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9406[0...19] PS file parameter number parameter not transferred / PS par_no n transf

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that were not able to be transferred when reading the parameter back-up files (PS files)
from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[0...x] > 0
--> indicates the parameter number in the following cases:
- parameter, whose value was not able to be completely accepted.
- indexed parameter, where at least 1 index was not able to be accepted. The first index that is not transferred is
displayed in r9407.
Dependency: Refer to: r9407, r9408
Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted

r9407[0...19] PS file parameter index parameter not transferred / PS parameter index

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the first index of the parameters that could not be transferred when the parameter backup files (PS files)
were read from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
If, from an indexed parameter, at least one index was not able to be transferred, then the parameter number is
displayed in r9406[n] and the first index that was not transferred is displayed in r9407[n].
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[n] > 0
--> Displays r9407[n] the first index of the parameter number r9406[n] that was not transferred.
Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9408
Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted

r9408[0...19] PS file fault code parameter not transferred / PS fault code

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9407
Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

402 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9409 Number of parameters to be saved / Qty par to save

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of modified parameters and those that have still not be saved for this drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p0971
Notice: Inherent to the system, the list of the parameters to be backed up is empty after the following actions:
- Download
- Warm restart
- Factory setting
In these cases, a new parameter backup must be initiated, which is then the starting point for the list of modified
parameters.
Note: The modified parameters that still need to be saved are internally listed in r9410 ... r9419.

r9451[0...29] Units changeover adapted parameters / Unit_chngov par

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters whose parameter would have to be changed during a units changeover.
Dependency: Refer to: F07088

r9463 Actual macro / Actual macro

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 -
Description: Displays the set valid macro.
Note: A value of 0 is displayed if a parameter set by a macro is changed.

p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the signal source (BO/CO parameter, BICO coded) to search in the signal sinks.
The signal source to be searched for is set in p9484 (BICO-coded) and the search result is specified using the
number (r9485) and the first index (r9486).
Dependency: Refer to: r9485, r9486

r9485 BICO interconnections signal source search count / BICO S_src srchQty
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of BICO interconnections to the signal sink being searched for.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 403
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: p9484, r9486

Note: The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486).

r9486 BICO interconnections signal source search first index / BICO S_src srchIdx
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the first index of the signal source being searched for.
The signal source to be searched for is set in p9484 (BICO-coded) and the search result is specified using the
number (r9485) and the first index (r9486).
Dependency: Refer to: p9484, r9485
Note: The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486).

p9501 SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 1) / SI Mtn enable P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable SI Motion Enable Inhibit -
17 Enable SDI Enable Inhibit 2824
Dependency: Refer to: F01682, F01683
Note: For bit 30 = 1, PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured in the F host.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9501 SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 1) / SI Mtn enable P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable SI Motion Enable Inhibit -
16 Enable SSM hysteresis and filtering Enable Inhibit 2823
17 Enable SDI Enable Inhibit 2824
30 Enable F-DI in PROFIsafe telegram Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: F01682, F01683

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

404 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: For bit 30 = 1, PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured in the F host.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9506 SI Motion function specification (processor 1) / SI Mtn fct_spc P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1 3 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the function specification for the safe motion monitoring.
Value: 1: Safety without encoder with braking ramp (SBR)
3: Safety without encoder with accel_monitoring(SAM) / delay time
Dependency: Refer to: C01711

p9507 SI Motion function configuration (processor 1) / SI Mtn config P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - 0011 bin
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the function configuration for safe motion monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Extended message acknowledgment Yes No -
01 Setpoint velocity limit for STOP F No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: For bit 00:
When the function is activated, a safety-relevant acknowledgment (internal event acknowledge) can be performed by
selecting/deselecting STO.
For bit 01:
When the function is activated, the active setpoint velocity limit (CO: r9733) is set to zero when STOP F is active.

p9509 SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (processor 1) / SI Mtn behav IL P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
Description: Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 SDI during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Notice: For bit 00:
If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit
speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1,
because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case,
the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be
increased.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 405
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For bit 00:
For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level.
For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept
and the system goes into the STO state.
For bit 08:
For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive.
For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO
state.

p9509 SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (processor 1) / SI Mtn behav IL P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
Description: Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SSM during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
08 SDI during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Notice: For bit 00:
If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit
speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1,
because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case,
the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be
increased.
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For bit 00:
For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level.
For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept
and the system goes into the STO state.
For bit 08:
For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive.
For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO
state.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

406 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9521[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load denominator (processor 1) / SI Mtn gear den P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1 2147000000 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9522
Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active.

p9522[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load numerator (processor 1) / SI Mtn gear num P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1 2147000000 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9521
Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active.
Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the
gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9521 = 1, p9522 = 8 (4 x 2)

p9531[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS lim P1

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 2000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLS4
Dependency: Refer to: p9563
Refer to: C01714

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 407
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p9533 SI Motion SLS setpoint speed limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS set_lim
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.000 [%] 100.000 [%] 80.000 [%]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: This is an evaluation factor to define the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed limit.
The active SLS limit value is evaluated with this factor and is made available as setpoint limit in r9733.
Dependency: This parameter only has to be parameterized for the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 = 1)
r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
r9733[1] = - p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
[x] = Selected SLS stage
Conversion factor from the motor side to the load side:
- motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520)
- otherwise: p9522 / p9521
Refer to: p9501, p9531, p9601
Note: The active actual speed limit is selected via PROFIsafe.
With STOP A, B, setpoint 0 is specified in r9733.
For p9533 = 0, the setpoint speed limit is de-activated and r9733[0] is set to p1082 and r9733[1] is set to -p1082.
SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p9542 SI Motion act. val. comparison tolerance (crossw.) (processor 1) / SI Mtn act tol P1
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [°] 360.0000 [°] 12.0000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between processors 1 and 2.
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm.
For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and factory setting of p9520, p9521 and p9522, the factory setting of p9542
corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 ° on the motor side.

p9545 SI Motion SSM filter time (processor 1) / SI Mtn SSM filt P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2823
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F 0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels.
The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

408 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9546 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn SSM v_limP1

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2823
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
Caution: The following applies for p9506 = 3:
The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot.

Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)

SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9547 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (processor 1) / SI Mtn SSM hyst P1

CU240E-2_PN_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_DP_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2823
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [rpm] 500.0000 [rpm] 10.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9548 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (processor 1) / SI mtn SAM tol P1
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 120000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function.
Dependency: Refer to: C01706
Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)

p9551 SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS t P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2819, 2820
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover for the function "safely limited speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely limited velocity/speed stage, within this delay time, the "old"
velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS is activated from the state "SLS in active", then this delay is still applied.
Note: SLS: Safely Limited Speed

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 409
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9556 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn IL t_del P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2819
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [ms] 3600000.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for STOP A after STOP B.
Dependency: Refer to: p9560
Refer to: C01701
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

p9558 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn acc t P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 5000.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 40000.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.
Dependency: Refer to: C01799
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

p9559 SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (processor 1) / SI Mtn dyn timer
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the time interval for carrying out the forced checking procedure and testing the safety motion monitoring
functions integrated in the drives.
Within the parameterized time, the safety functions must have been tested at least once (including de-selection of the
"STO" function).
This monitoring time is reset each time the test is carried out.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is set in p9705.
Dependency: Refer to: p9705
Refer to: A01697, C01798
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

p9560 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (processor 1) / SI Mtn IL v_sh P1

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP A).
Dependency: Refer to: p9556
Note: The shutdown speed has no effect for a value = 0.
SS1: Safe Stop 1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

410 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9563[0...3] SI Motion SLS-specific stop response (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS stop P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 1 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the SLS-specific stop response for the function "Safely Limited Speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLS4
Dependency: Refer to: p9531
Note: SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p9564 SI Motion SDI tolerance (processor 1) / SI Mtn SDI tol P1

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2824
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 [°] 360.000 [°] 12.000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C01716 is initiated.
Dependency: Refer to: p9565, p9566
Refer to: C01716
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p9565 SI Motion SDI delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn SDI t P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2824
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
After selecting the SDI function, then for a maximum of this time, motion in the monitored direction is permissible.
This time can therefore be used for braking any motion.
Dependency: Refer to: p9564, p9566
Refer to: C01716
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p9566 SI Motion SDI stop response (processor 1) / SI Mtn SDI Stop P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2824
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 1 1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
This setting applies to both directions of motion.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 411
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
Dependency: Refer to: p9564, p9565
Refer to: C01716
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p9568 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn SAM v_limP1

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function.
SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM.

p9570 SI Motion acceptance test mode (processor 1) / SI Mtn acc_mod P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0000 hex 00AC hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Setting to select and de-select the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] De-select the acceptance test mode
172: [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Dependency: Refer to: p9558, r9571, p9601
Refer to: C01799
Note: Acceptance test mode can only be selected if the motion monitoring functions, which are integrated in the drives, are
enabled (p9601.2/p9801.2).

r9571 SI Motion acceptance test status (processor 1) / SI Mtn acc_status

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0000 hex 00AC hex -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive
12: [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
13: [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9570
15: [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
172: [AC hex] Acc_mode active
Dependency: Refer to: p9558, p9570
Refer to: C01799

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

412 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9581 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (processor 1) / SI Mtn ramp ref P1
CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
600.0000 [rpm] 240000.0000 [rpm] 1500.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9582, p9583

p9582 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn ramp t P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
10.00 [ms] 99000.00 [ms] 250.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.
Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.
Dependency: Refer to: p9581, p9583
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
Internally, the set time is limited downwards to 2 safety monitoring clock cycles (2 * 12 ms).

p9583 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (processor 1) / SI Mtn rp t_mon P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.50 [s] 3600.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9581, p9582
Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

p9585 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless fault tolerance (CU) / ActVal sl tol CU
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F -1 4 -1
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the tolerance of the plausibility monitoring of the current and voltage angle.
A higher value results in a higher degree of ruggedness when reversing at low speeds, as well as in the field
weakening range for load steps.
An increase is advantageous, if the current or voltage at the motor become small.
Dependency: Refer to: r9787
Refer to: F01681, C01711
Notice: Reducing this value can adversely affect the actual value sensing and the plausibility check.
When the value is increased, this results in a longer evaluation delay and a higher velocity deviation (r9787).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 413
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3).
For synchronous motors, the value 4 must be set.
If value = -1:
- for synchronous motors, the calculation is automatically made with the value 4.
- for induction motors, the calculation is automatically made with a value of 0 (if the code number of the power unit
p0201[0] < 14000, otherwise with a value of 2).

p9586 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless delay time (P1) / ActVal sl t_del P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 5.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the encoderless actual value sensing after the pulses have been enabled.
The value must be greater than or equal to the motor magnetizing time (p0346).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Caution: The safety functionality is only completely guaranteed after this time has expired.

Notice: If this value is reduced, this can have a negative impact on the actual value acquisition and plausibility check – and
result in Safety message C01711 with the message value 1041 or 1042.
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3).
The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

p9587 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless filter time (P1) / Actv sl t_filt P1
PM240 Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 25.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with sensorless actual value sensing.
Notice: A longer filter time results in a longer response time.

p9588 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless minimum current (P1) / ActVal sl I_min P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing referred to 1 A (i.e. 1 % = 10 mA).
- the value must be increased if C01711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- the value must be decreased if C01711 has occurred with message value 1041.
For synchronous motors, the following condition must be fulfilled:
|p0305 x p9783| >= p9588 x 1.2
Recommendation: If required, the correct value of the motor minimum current should be determined by making the appropriate
measurements.
Dependency: Refer to: r9785
Refer to: C01711
Notice: If this percentage value is reduced excessively, then this can result in a safety message and an inaccurate actual
value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

414 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9589 SI Motion actual value sensing sensorless accel. limit (P1) / ActVal sl a_lim P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
10.00 [%] 3300.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the acceleration limit to filter velocity fluctuations.
If this percentage value is increased, when accelerating, velocity peaks that do not reflect the real velocity
characteristic can occur.
If this value is decreased, and this dampens the velocity peaks when accelerating.
- the value must be increased if C01711 with message value 1043 has occurred.
- the value must be lowered if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive Safety actual velocity.
Recommendation: The setting of this parameter depends on the motor and closed-loop control, and must be newly determined for each
configuration.
To do this, a measurement should be performed while the actual value jumps, and the limit in r9785[0] must be set so
low using p9589, so that it is exceeded by the value in r9785[1] a maximum of four times per second. The actual
value correction filter intervenes at this instant in time. The step is no longer so drastic.
Dependency: Refer to: r9784
Refer to: C01711

r9590[0...3] SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (processor 1) / SI Mtn version P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safe monitoring functions.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Dependency: Refer to: r9770
Note: Example:
r9590[0] = 2, r9590[1] = 60, r9590[2] = 1, r9590[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00

p9601 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 1.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 415
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 1) Enable Inhibit 2810
03 Enable PROFIsafe (processor 1) Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9601 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 1.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 1) Enable Inhibit 2810
Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9601 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 1.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

416 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 1) Enable Inhibit 2810
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9601 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_DP Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 PN - - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 1.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 1) Enable Inhibit 2810
03 Enable PROFIsafe (processor 1) Enable Inhibit -
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 417
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9601 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 1.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 1) Enable Inhibit 2810
02 Enable drive_integr motion_monitoring Enable Inhibit -
functions (processor 1)
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9601 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 1.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

418 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 1) Enable Inhibit 2810
02 Enable drive_integr motion_monitoring Enable Inhibit -
functions (processor 1)
03 Enable PROFIsafe (processor 1) Enable Inhibit -
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9610 SI PROFIsafe address (processor 1) / SI PROFIsafe P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP 0000 hex FFFE hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address for processor 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p9810

p9650 SI F-DI changeover discrepancy time (processor 1) / SI F-DI chg t P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2810
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the discrepancy time for the changeover of the failsafe digital input for STO on processor 1.
An F-DI changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels. After
an F-DI changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this discrepancy time.
Dependency: Refer to: p9850
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 419
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9651 SI STO debounce time (processor 1) / SI STO t_debou P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the debounce time for the failsafe digital inputs used to control the "STO" function.
The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds.
Note: The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. It specifies the maximum duration of a fault pulse at the fail-
safe digital inputs with no reaction/influence on the selection or deselection of the Safety Basic Functions.
Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.

p9659 SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FCP Timer

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2810
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the time interval for carrying out the forced checking procedure and testing the Safety switch-off signal paths.
Within the parameterized time, STO must have been de-selected at least once. The monitoring time is reset each
time that STO is de-selected.
Dependency: Refer to: A01699
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9660 SI forced checking procedure remaining time / SI frc chk remain

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 - [h] - [h] - [h]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the time remaining before dynamization and testing of the safety switch-off signal paths (forced checking
procedure).
Dependency: Refer to: A01699

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

420 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9661 SI forced checking procedure STO via PM terminals time / FCP_dyn STO PM-T t
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP
0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the time interval for monitoring the forced checking procedure and testing the Safety switch-off signal paths for
STO via terminals on the Power Module.
Within the parameterized time, STO must have been de-selected at least once.
Dependency: Refer to: r9662
Refer to: A01678
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9662 SI forced checking procedure STO via PM terminals remaining time /

FCP_dyn STO PM-T t
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP
- [h] - [h] - [h]
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the remaining time for monitoring the forced checking procedure and testing the Safety switch-off signal
paths for STO via terminals on the Power Module.
After the monitoring time set in p9661 has expired, an appropriate alarm is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p9661
Refer to: A01678
Note: PM: Power Module
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9670 SI module identification Control Unit / Module ID CU

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 0 4294967295 0
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: CRC via Node Identifier of the Control Unit.
Note: CU: Control Unit

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 421
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9672 SI module identifier Power Module / Module ID PM

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95), T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0 4294967295 0
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: CRC via the Node Identifier of a Power Module.
Note: PM: Power Module

p9700 SI copy function / SI copy function

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM240 Can be changed: C(95), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 0000 hex 00D0 hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Setting to start the required copy function.
After starting, the corresponding parameters are copied from processor 1 to processor 2.
Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to zero.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Copy function ended
29: [1D hex] Start copy function node identifier
87: [57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters
208: [D0 hex] Start copy function SI basic parameters
Dependency: Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the parameters are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: For value = 57 hex and D0 hex:
The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered.
For value = D0 hex:
The following parameters are copied after starting the copy function:
p9601 --> p9801, p9610 --> 9810, p9650 --> p9850, p9651 --> p9851

p9701 Acknowledge SI data change / Ackn SI data

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM240 Can be changed: C(95), U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0000 hex 00EC hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters,
hardware).
After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to zero.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

422 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 0: [00 hex] Data unchanged

172: [AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete
220: [DC hex] Acknowledge SI basic parameter change
236: [EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC
Dependency: Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899
Note: For value = AC and DC hex:
These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was
entered.

p9705 BI: SI Motion: Test stop signal source / SI Mtn test stop
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2837
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - - 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the signal source for the test stop of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Notice: Before setting the signal source in p9705 it must be ensured that the signal source is at a logical 0.
If, in the Safety commissioning mode, the signal source in p9705 is set - and it already has a logical 1 - then a test
stop is immediately initiated and the messages C01711/C30711 are output with message value 1005.

r9708[0...5] SI Motion diagnostics safe position / SI mtn safe pos

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2822, 2836
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference.
Index: [0] = Load-side actual value on the CU
[1] = Load-side actual value on the second channel
[2] = Load-side actual value difference CU - second channel
[3] = Load-side max. actual value difference CU - second channel
[4] = Load-side actual value as safe position via PROFIsafe
[5] = Load-side additional actual value difference CU - second channel
Dependency: Refer to: r9713
Note: For index 0:
The display of the load-side position actual value on processor 1 is updated in the monitoring clock cycle.
For index 1:
The display of the load-side position actual value on processor 2 is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and
delayed by one CDC clock cycle.
For index 2:
The difference between the load-side position actual value on processor 1 and load-side position actual value on
processor 2 is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle.
For index 3:
The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on processor 1 and the load-side position
actual value on processor 2.
For index 4:
The content corresponds to the value in index 0.
CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 423
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9710[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics result list 1 / SI Mtn res_list 1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays result list 1 that, for the crosswise data comparison between the monitoring channels, led to the fault.
Index: [0] = Result list processor 2
[1] = Result list processor 1
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
06 Actual value > upper limit SLS1 Yes No -
07 Actual value > lower limit SLS1 Yes No -
08 Actual value > upper limit SLS2 Yes No -
09 Actual value > lower limit SLS2 Yes No -
10 Actual value > upper limit SLS3 Yes No -
11 Actual value > lower limit SLS3 Yes No -
12 Actual value > upper limit SLS4 Yes No -
13 Actual value > lower limit SLS4 Yes No -
16 Actual value > upper limit SAM/SBR Yes No -
17 Actual value > lower limit SAM/SBR Yes No -
18 Actual value > upper limit SDI positive Yes No -
19 Actual value > lower limit SDI positive Yes No -
20 Actual value > upper limit SDI negative Yes No -
21 Actual value > lower limit SDI negative Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring)
SLS: Safely Limited Speed

r9712 CO: SI Motion diagnostics pos. act. val. motor side (processor 1) / SI Mtn s_act motP1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the actual motor-side position actual value for the motion monitoring functions on processor 1.
Note: The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle.

r9713[0...5] CO: SI Motion diagnostics position actual value load side / SI Mtn s_act load
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference.
Index: [0] = Load-side actual value on processor 1 (P1)
[1] = Load-side actual value on processor 2 (P2)
[2] = Load-side actual value difference P1 - P2
[3] = Load-side maximum actual value difference P1 - P2
[4] = Load-side actual value as safe position via PROFIsafe
[5] = Load-side additional actual value difference CU - second channel
Dependency: Refer to: r9708, r9724

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

424 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The value of this parameter is displayed in r9708 with units (mm or degrees).
The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle.
For index 0:
The display of the load-side position actual value on processor 1 is updated in the monitoring clock cycle.
For index 1:
The display of the load-side position actual value on processor 2 is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and
delayed by one CDC clock cycle.
For index 2:
The difference between the load-side position actual value on processor 1 and load-side position actual value on
processor 2 is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle.
For index 3:
The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on processor 1 and the load-side position
actual value on processor 2.
For index 4:
The content corresponds to the value in index 0.
CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison

r9714[0...2] CO: SI Motion diagnostics velocity (processor 1) / SI Mtn diag v P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the actual velocity values for the motion monitoring functions on processor 1.
Index: [0] = Load-side velocity actual value on processor 1
[1] = Actual SAM/SBR velocity limit on processor 1
[2] = Actual SLS velocity limit on the processor 1
Dependency: Refer to: r9732
Notice: For index 2:
This SLS velocity limit can, as a result of conversion into the internal monitoring format, deviate from the specified
SLS velocity limit (see r9732).
Note: The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle.

r9720.0...13 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ STW
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2840, 2855
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Control signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 De-select STO Yes No -
01 De-select SS1 Yes No -
04 De-select SLS Yes No -
07 Acknowledgment Signal edge active No -
09 Select SLS bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Select SLS bit 1 Set Not set -
12 Deselect SDI positive Yes No 2824
13 Deselect SDI negative Yes No 2824
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions (STO), the value is equal to zero.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 425
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9722.0...13 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 1) / SI Mtn int stat P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2840, 2855
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive on monitoring channel 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO or safe pulse suppression active Yes No -
01 SS1 active Yes No -
04 SLS active Yes No -
07 Internal event No Yes -
09 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Active SLS stage bit 1 Set Not set -
12 SDI positive active Yes No 2824
13 SDI negative active Yes No 2824
Notice: For bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions the value is equal to zero.

r9722.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 1) / SI Mtn int stat P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2840, 2855
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive on monitoring channel 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO or safe pulse suppression active Yes No -
01 SS1 active Yes No -
04 SLS active Yes No -
07 Internal event No Yes -
09 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Active SLS stage bit 1 Set Not set -
12 SDI positive active Yes No 2824
13 SDI negative active Yes No 2824
15 SSM (speed below limit value) Yes No 2823
Notice: For bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions the value is equal to zero.

r9723.0...16 CO/BO: SI Motion diagnostic signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ diag
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the diagnostic signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

426 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP

00 Forced checking procedure required Yes No -
01 STOP F and then STOP B active Yes No 2819
02 Communication failure Yes No -
03 Actual value sensing supplies valid value Yes No 2821
04 Encoderless act val sensing acc to Yes No -
technique for U/f control
09 Safe pulse suppression active Yes No -
12 Test stop active Yes No -
16 SAM/SBR active Yes No 2820
Note: For bit 01:
This bit can be used to execute a control-based ESR.
ESR: Extended Stop and Retract
SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring)

r9724 SI Motion crosswise comparison clock cycle / SI Mtn CDC clk cyc
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the crosswise comparison clock cycle.
The value indicates the clock cycle time with which each individual CDC value is compared between the two
monitoring channels.
Note: CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison

r9725[0...2] SI Motion diagnostics STOP F / SI Mtn Diag STOP F

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: For index 0:
Displays the message value that resulted in the STOP F on the drive.
Value = 0:
Processor 1 signaled a STOP F.
Value = 1 ... 999:
Number of the incorrect date in the crosswise data comparison between the monitoring channels.
Value >= 1000:
Additional diagnostic values of the drive.
For index 1:
Displays the value from processor 1 that resulted in the STOP F.
For index 2:
Displays the value from processor 2 that resulted in the STOP F.
Index: [0] = Message value for CDC
[1] = Processor 1 CDC actual value
[2] = Processor 2 CDC actual value
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: The significance of the individual message values is described in message C01711.
CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison
For index 1, 2:
When Safety message C01711 with message value >= 1000 occurs, these indices are not supplied with values.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 427
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9728[0...2] SI Motion actual checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI Mtn act CRC P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum).
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for hardware
Dependency: Refer to: p9729
Refer to: F01680

p9729[0...2] SI Motion setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI Mtn setp CRC P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the checksum using the checksum-tested Safety Integrated parameters for motion monitoring functions
(reference checksum).
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for hardware
Dependency: Refer to: r9728
Refer to: F01680

r9732[0...1] SI Motion velocity resolution / SI Mtn v_res

CU240E-2_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the velocity resolution for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
For index 0:
Displays the safe velocity resolution (load side). Setpoints for velocity limits or parameter changes for velocities
below this threshold have no effect.
For index 1:
Displays the safe velocity accuracy based on the safe encoder accuracy
Index: [0] = Actual velocity resolution
[1] = Minimum velocity resolution
Note: Index 0: This parameter does not provide any information about the actual accuracy of the velocity sensing. This
depends on the type of actual value sensing, the gear factors as well as the quality of the encoder being used.

Index 1: For a two-encoder system, with just non-safety capable encoders, this means the poorer value of the two
encoders. Index[1] takes into account the coarse resolution of the encoder only

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

428 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9733[0...2] CO: SI Motion setpoint speed limit effective / SI Mtn setp_lim

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: 2820, 2824, 3630
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the necessary setpoint speed limit as a result of the selected motion monitoring functions.
Contrary to the parameterization of the SI limit values, this parameter specifies the motor-side limit value and not the
load-side limit value.
Recommendation: For the ramp-function generator, by appropriately interconnecting the speed limits p1051 and p1052 with r9733[0, 1],
a drive-based setpoint velocity limiting can be realized.
- CI: p1051 = r9733[0]
- CI: p1052 = r9733[1]
Additional limiting can also be activated using connector input p1085 and p1088.
Index: [0] = Setpoint limiting positive
[1] = Setpoint limiting negative
[2] = Setpoint limit absolute
Dependency: For SLS: r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
For SDI negative: r9733[0] = 0
For SLS: r9733[1] = - p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
For SDI positive: r9733[1] = 0
[x] = Selected SLS stage
Conversion factor from the motor side to the load side:
- motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520)
- otherwise: p9522 / p9521
Refer to: p9531, p9533
Notice: If p1051 = r9733[0] is interconnected, p1052 = r9733[1] must also be interconnected and vice versa.
If only the absolute value of the setpoint velocity limiting is required, r9733[2] must be interconnected.
Note: If the "SLS" function is not selected, r9733[0] shows p1082 and r9733[1] shows -p1082.
The display in r9733 can be delayed by up to one Safety monitoring clock cycle as compared to the display in r9720
and r9722.

r9734.0...14 CO/BO: SI Safety Info Channel status word S_ZSW1B / SIC S_ZSW1B
PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word S_ZSW1B of the safety information channel.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO active Yes No -
07 Internal event Yes No -
14 ESR retract requested Yes No -
Notice: For bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions (STO), the value is equal to zero.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 429
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9734.0...14 CO/BO: SI Safety Info Channel status word S_ZSW1B / SIC S_ZSW1B
PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_F
- - -
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Display and BICO output for status word S_ZSW1B of the safety information channel.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO active Yes No -
01 SS1 active Yes No -
04 SLS active Yes No -
06 SLS selected Yes No -
07 Internal event Yes No -
09 Select SLS bit0 Yes No -
10 Select SLS bit1 Yes No -
12 SDI positive selected Yes No -
13 SDI neg selected Yes No -
14 ESR retract requested Yes No -
Notice: For bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions (STO), the value is equal to zero.

r9742.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 2) / SI Mtn int stat P2
PM240 Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2840, 2855
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO or safe pulse suppression active Yes No -
01 SS1 active Yes No -
04 SLS active Yes No -
07 Internal event No Yes -
09 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Active SLS stage bit 1 Set Not set -
15 SSM (speed below limit value) Yes No 2823
Notice: For bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions the value is equal to zero.

r9742.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 2) / SI Mtn int stat P2
PM240 Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2840, 2855
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

430 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP

00 STO or safe pulse suppression active Yes No -
01 SS1 active Yes No -
04 SLS active Yes No -
07 Internal event No Yes -
09 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Active SLS stage bit 1 Set Not set -
12 SDI positive active Yes No -
13 SDI negative active Yes No -
15 SSM (speed below limit value) Yes No 2823
Notice: For bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions the value is equal to zero.

p9761 SI password input / SI password inp

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: C, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Enters the Safety Integrated password.
Dependency: Refer to: F01659
Note: It is not possible to change Safety Integrated parameters until the Safety Integrated password has been entered.

p9762 SI password new / SI password new

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Enters a new Safety Integrated password.
Dependency: A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter:
Refer to: p9763

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 431
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9763 SI password acknowledgment / SI ackn password

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Acknowledges the new Safety Integrated password.
Dependency: Refer to: p9762
Note: The new password entered into p9762 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge.
p9762 = p9763 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully
acknowledged.

r9765 SI Motion forced checking procedure remaining time (processor 1) /

SI Mtn dyn rem P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- [h] - [h] - [h]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the time remaining until the next dynamization and testing of the safety motion monitoring functions
integrated in the drives.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is parameterized in p9705.
Dependency: Refer to: p9705
Refer to: C01798

r9768[0...7] SI PROFIsafe receive control words (processor 1) / SI Ps PZD recv P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP - - -
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the received PROFIsafe telegram on processor 1.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
Dependency: Refer to: r9769
Note: The PROFIsafe trailer at the end of the telegram is also displayed (2 words).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

432 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9769[0...7] SI PROFIsafe send status words (processor 1) / SI Ps PZD send P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP
- - -
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the PROFIsafe telegram to be sent on processor 1.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
Dependency: Refer to: r9768
Note: The PROFIsafe trailer at the end of the telegram is also displayed (2 words).

r9770[0...3] SI version drive-integrated safety function (processor 1) / SI version Drv P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2802
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the drive-integrated safety functions on processor 1.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Note: Example:
r9770[0] = 2, r9770[1] = 60, r9770[2] = 1, r9770[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00

r9771 SI common functions (processor 1) / SI general fct P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 1 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
06 Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 433
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9771 SI common functions (processor 1) / SI general fct P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 1 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9771 SI common functions (processor 1) / SI general fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 1 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9771 SI common functions (processor 1) / SI general fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_DP Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 PN - - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 1 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
06 Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9771 SI common functions (processor 1) / SI general fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 1 determines this display.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

434 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP

00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
02 Extended Functions supported (p9501 > 0) Yes No 2804
05 Extended Functions integrated in drive Yes No -
supported (p9601.2 = 1)
07 Extended Functions encoderless supported Yes No -
11 Extended Functions SDI supported Yes No -
12 Extended Functions SSM encoderless Yes No -
supported
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9771 SI common functions (processor 1) / SI general fct P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 1 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
02 Extended Functions supported (p9501 > 0) Yes No 2804
04 Extended Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
05 Extended Functions integrated in drive Yes No -
supported (p9601.2 = 1)
06 Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
07 Extended Functions encoderless supported Yes No -
11 Extended Functions SDI supported Yes No -
12 Extended Functions SSM encoderless Yes No -
supported
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9772.0...21 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1) / SI status P1

PM230_STO Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2 PN Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_F
- - -
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on processor 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected on processor 1 Yes No 2810
01 STO active on processor 1 Yes No 2810
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cause: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
19 STO cause actual value missing Yes No -
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
21 STO cause selection on the other Yes No -
monitoring channel

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 435
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Dependency: Refer to: r9872

Note: For bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 21.
For bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe.
For bit 19:
For the drive-integrated motion monitoring functions, due to OFF2, no actual value sensing possible.

r9772.0...25 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1) / SI status P1

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP
- - -
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on processor 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected on processor 1 Yes No 2810
01 STO active on processor 1 Yes No 2810
07 STO terminal state on processor 1 (Basic High Low -
Functions)
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cause: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
18 STO cause: Selection via motion monitoring Yes No -
functions
19 STO cause actual value missing Yes No -
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
21 STO cause selection on the other Yes No -
monitoring channel
25 STO cause selection via terminal on the Yes No -
Power Module
Dependency: Refer to: r9872
Note: For bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 21.
For bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe.
For bit 19:
For the drive-integrated motion monitoring functions, due to OFF2, no actual value sensing possible.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

436 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9773.0...31 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1 + processor 2) / SI status P1+P2

PM230_STO Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Display and BICO output for the Safety Integrated status on the drive (processor 1 + processor 2).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected in drive Yes No 2804
01 STO active in drive Yes No 2804
30 PM terminals switch-off signal paths must Yes No -
be tested
31 Switch-off signal paths must be tested Yes No 2810
Note: This status is formed from the AND operation of the relevant status of the two monitoring channels.

r9776 SI diagnostics / SI diag

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: The parameter is used for diagnostics.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Safety parameter changed POWER ON Yes No -
required
01 Safety functions enabled Yes No -
02 Safety component replaced and data save Yes No -
required
Note: For bit 00 = 1:
At least one Safety parameter has been changed that will only take effect after a POWER ON.
For bit 01 = 1:
Safety functions (basic functions or extended functions) have been enabled and are active.
For bit 02 = 1:
A safety-relevant component has been replaced. Data save required (p0977 = 1 or p0971 = 1 or "copy RAM to
ROM").

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 437
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9780 SI monitoring clock cycle (processor 1) / SI mon_clk cyc P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2802
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on processor 1.
Note: Information regarding the relationship between monitoring clock cycle and response times can be found in the
following references:
- SINAMICS G120 Function Manual Safety Integrated
- technical documentation for the particular product

r9781[0...1] SI checksum to check changes (processor 1) / SI chg chksm P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the checksum for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
These are additional checksums that are created to track changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) to
safety parameters (that are relevant for checksums).
Index: [0] = SI checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799
Refer to: F01690

r9782[0...1] SI time stamp to check changes (processor 1) / SI chg t P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- [h] - [h] - [h]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
The time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) made to
safety parameters are saved in parameters p9781[0] and p9781[1].
Index: [0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799
Refer to: F01690

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

438 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9784[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics sensorless acceleration / Diag sl a

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- [rev/s²] - [rev/s²] - [rev/s²]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Display to diagnose acceleration values of the encoderless actual values sensing.
Index: [0] = Setpoint acceleration value
[1] = Actual acceleration value
Dependency: Refer to: p9589
Note: For index 0:
Shows the parameterized acceleration value of p9589.
For index 1:
Shows the actually measured acceleration values of the encoderless actual value sensing

r9785[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics sensorless minimum current / Diag sl I_min

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: 6_3 Unit selection: p0505 Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- [mA] - [mA] - [mA]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Display to diagnose currents of the encoderless actual value sensing.
Index: [0] = Minimum current parameterized
[1] = Minimum current measured
Dependency: Refer to: p9588
Note: For index 0:
Displays the parameterized minimum current of p9588.
For index 1:
Displays the currently measured current of the encoderless actual value sensing

r9786[0...2] SI Motion diagnostics sensorless angle / Diag sl angle

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F - [°] - [°] - [°]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Display to diagnose the angle for sensorless actual value sensing.
Index: [0] = Plausibility angle actual value
[1] = Voltage angle actual value
[2] = Current angle actual value
Dependency: Refer to: p9585
Note: For index 0:
Displays the actual plausibility angle.
For index 1:
Displays the actual voltage angle.
For index 2:
Displays the actual current angle.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 439
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9787 SI Motion diagnostics sensorless velocity deviation / Diag sl v_dev

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the actual velocity deviation for sensorless actual value sensing.
This value is calculated when setting p9585/p9385.
The actual velocity has a deviation of +/- r9787 for 6 ms * p9585/p9385 within a monitoring time of 1 s.
Dependency: Refer to: p9585
Note: For linear axes, the following unit applies: millimeters per minute
For rotary axes, the following unit applies: revolutions per minute

r9794[0...19] SI crosswise comparison list (processor 1) / SI CDC_list P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2802
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 - - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the numbers of the data items that are currently being compared crosswise on processor 1.
The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application.
Note: Example:
r9794[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9794[1] = 2 (enable safety functions)
r9794[2] = 3 (F-DI changeover, tolerance time)
...
A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.

r9795 SI diagnostics STOP F (processor 1) / SI diag STOP F P1

PM230_STO Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2802
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the number of the cross-compared data item which caused STOP F on processor 1.
Dependency: Refer to: F01611
Note: A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

440 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9798 SI actual checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI act chksm P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
- - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 1 (actual
checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898

p9799 SI setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI setp_chksm P1

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 1 (setpoint
checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899

p9801 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 2) / SI enable fct P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F - - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 2.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 441
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 2) Enable Inhibit 2810
03 Enable PROFIsafe (processor 2) Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9801 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 2) / SI enable fct P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 2.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 2) Enable Inhibit 2810
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9801 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 2) / SI enable fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 2.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

442 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 2) Enable Inhibit 2810
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9801 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 2) / SI enable fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_DP Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 PN - - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 2.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 2) Enable Inhibit 2810
03 Enable PROFIsafe (processor 2) Enable Inhibit -
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 443
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9801 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 2) / SI enable fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 2.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 2) Enable Inhibit 2810
02 Enable drive_integr motion_monitoring Enable Inhibit -
functions (processor 2)
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9801 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 2) / SI enable fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on processor 2.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Power Module being used:
0000 hex:
Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function).
0001 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1).
0004 hex:
Extended functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.5 = 1).
0008 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).
0009 hex:
Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

444 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

000C hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1).
000D hex:
Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 =
1).
In addition to all of the combinations listed above, using bit 7, the "STO via Power Module terminals" function can be
enabled (this is permissible for r9771.19 = 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 2) Enable Inhibit 2810
02 Enable drive_integr motion_monitoring Enable Inhibit -
functions (processor 2)
03 Enable PROFIsafe (processor 2) Enable Inhibit -
07 Enable Power Module STO Enable Inhibit -
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
STO: Safe Torque Off

p9810 SI PROFIsafe address (processor 2) / SI PROFIsafe P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP 0000 hex FFFE hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address on processor 2.
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

p9850 SI F-DI changeover discrepancy time (processor 2) / SI F-DI chg t P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2810
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0.00 [µs] 2000000.00 [µs] 500000.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the discrepancy time for the changeover of the failsafe digital input for STO on processor 2.
An F-DI changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels. After
an F-DI changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this discrepancy time.
Dependency: Refer to: p9650
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 445
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9851 SI STO debounce time (processor 2) / SI STO t_debou P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the debounce time for the failsafe digital inputs used to control the "STO" function.
The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds.
Dependency: Refer to: p9651
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: Rounding effects can occur in the last decimal place of the parameterized time.
The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. It specifies the maximum duration of a fault pulse at the fail-
safe digital inputs with no reaction/influence on the selection or deselection of the Safety Basic Functions.
Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.

r9871 SI common functions (processor 2) / SI common fct P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2_DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2 PN Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 2 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
06 Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9871 SI common functions (processor 2) / SI common fct P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_F Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 2 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

446 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9871 SI common functions (processor 2) / SI common fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 2 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9871 SI common functions (processor 2) / SI common fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_DP Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 PN - - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 2 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
06 Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9871 SI common functions (processor 2) / SI common fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 2 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
02 Extended Functions supported (p9501 > 0) Yes No 2804
05 Extended Functions integrated in drive Yes No -
supported (p9601.2 = 1)
07 Extended Functions encoderless supported Yes No -
11 Extended Functions SDI supported Yes No -
12 Extended Functions SSM encoderless Yes No -
supported
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 447
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9871 SI common functions (processor 2) / SI common fct P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 2 determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
02 Extended Functions supported (p9501 > 0) Yes No 2804
04 Extended Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
05 Extended Functions integrated in drive Yes No -
supported (p9601.2 = 1)
06 Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
07 Extended Functions encoderless supported Yes No -
11 Extended Functions SDI supported Yes No -
12 Extended Functions SSM encoderless Yes No -
supported
19 Power Module STO is supported Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off

r9872.0...21 CO/BO: SI status (processor 2) / SI Status P2

PM230_STO Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
CU240E-2_DP Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2 PN Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_F - - -
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on processor 2.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected on processor 2 Yes No 2810
01 STO active on processor 2 Yes No 2810
07 STO terminal state on processor 2 (Basic High Low -
Functions)
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cause: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
18 STO cause: Selection via motion monitoring Yes No -
functions
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
21 STO cause selection on the other Yes No -
monitoring channel
Dependency: Refer to: r9772
Note: For bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 21.
For bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

448 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9872.0...25 CO/BO: SI status (processor 2) / SI Status P2

PM240 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2804
CU240E-2 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP
- - -
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on processor 2.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected on processor 2 Yes No 2810
01 STO active on processor 2 Yes No 2810
07 STO terminal state on processor 2 (Basic High Low -
Functions)
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cause: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
18 STO cause: Selection via motion monitoring Yes No -
functions
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
21 STO cause selection on the other Yes No -
monitoring channel
25 STO cause selection via terminal on the High Low -
Power Module
Dependency: Refer to: r9772
Note: For bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 21.
For bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe.

r9898 SI actual checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI act_chksm P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2 - - -
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 2 (actual
checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 449
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p9899 SI setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI setp_chksm P2

PM230_STO Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM240 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM250 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2800
PM260 Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
CU240E-2_DP
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2_F
CU240E-2_PN_F
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 2 (setpoint
checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898

r9925[0...99] Firmware file incorrect / FW file incorr

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the directory and name of the file whose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissible.
Dependency: Refer to: r9926
Refer to: A01016
Note: The directory and name of the file is displayed in the ASCII code.

r9926 Firmware check status / FW check status

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status when the firmware is checked when the system is booted.
0: Firmware not yet checked.
1: Check running.
2: Check successfully completed.
3: Check indicates an error.
Dependency: Refer to: r9925
Refer to: A01016

p9930[0...8] System logbook activation / SYSLOG activation

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Only for service purposes.
Index: [0] = System logbook stage (0: Not active)
[1] = COM2/COM1 (0: COM2, 1: COM1)
[2] = Activate file write (0: Not active)
[3] = Display time stamp (0: Not displayed)
[4...7] = Reserved
[8] = System logbook file size (stages, each 10 kB)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

450 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Notice: Before switching off the Control Unit, ensure that the system logbook is switched out (p9930[0] = 0).
If writing to the file is activated (p9930[2] = 1), writing to the file must be de-activated again before switching off the
Control Unit (p9930[2] = 0) in order to ensure that the system logbook has been completely written to the file.

p9931[0...179] System logbook module selection / SYSLOG mod select.

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Only for service purposes.

p9932 Save system logbook EEPROM / SYSLOG EEPROM save

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Only for service purposes.

r9935.0 BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for a delay after POWER ON.
After switch-on, binector output r9935.0 is set with the start of the first sampling time and is again reset after approx.
100 ms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 POWER ON delay signal High Low -

r9975[0...7] System utilization measured / Sys util meas

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the measured system utilization.
The higher the value displayed, the higher the system utilization.
Index: [0] = Computing time utilization (min)
[1] = Computing time utilization (averaged)
[2] = Computing time utilization (max)
[3] = Largest total utilization (min)
[4] = Largest total utilization (averaged)
[5] = Largest total utilization (max)
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: r9976
Refer to: F01054, F01205
Note: For index 3 ... 5:
The total utilizations are determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilizations are mapped here.
The sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 451
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r9976[0...7] System utilization / Sys util

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the system utilization.
If the utilization is greater than 100%, fault F01054 is output.
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Computing time utilization
[2] = Reserved
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Largest total utilization
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: F01054, F01205
Note: For index 1:
The value shows the total computing time load of the system.
For index 5:
The total utilization is determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilization is mapped here. The
sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).

r9999[0...99] Software error internal supplementary diagnostics / SW_err int diag

Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Diagnostics parameter to display additional information for internal software errors.
Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.

p10002 SI Motion F-DI changeover discrepancy time (processor 1) / SI Mtn DI chg t P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the discrepancy time for digital inputs.
The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this discrepancy time.
Dependency: Refer to: p10102

p10006 SI Motion acknowledgment internal event F-DI (processor 1) / SI Mtn ackn int P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Select a fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the signal "acknowledge internal event" (internal fault).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

452 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The falling edge at this input resets the status "internal event" in the drive.
The rising edge at this input acknowledges any existing discrepancy errors.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10106
Refer to: A01666, A30666
Note: The values "static selected" and "static deselected" result in an inactive function of the safe acknowledgment.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

p10017 SI Motion digital inputs debounce time (processor 1) / SI DI t_debounceP1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the debounce time for digital inputs.
The debounce time is accepted rounded off to whole milliseconds.
The debounce time acts on the following digital inputs:
- Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
- Single-channel digital inputs (DI).
- Single-channel digital input 5 (DI 5, read back input for the forced checking procedure).
Dependency: Refer to: p10117
Note: Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.
The debounce result can be read in r10051.

p10022 SI Motion STO input terminal (processor 1) / SI Mtn STO F-DI P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "STO" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10122
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
STO: Safe Torque Off

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 453
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p10023 SI Motion SS1 input terminal (processor 1) / SI Mtn SS1 F-DI P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SS1" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10123
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SS1: Safe Stop 1

p10026 SI Motion SLS input terminal (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS F-DI P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SLS" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10126
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p10030 SI Motion SDI positive input terminal (processor 1) / SI SDI pos F-DI P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI positive" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

454 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p10031 SI Motion SDI negative input terminal (processor 1) / SI SDI neg F-DI P1
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI negative" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

r10049 SI Motion F-DI monitoring status (processor 1) / SI F-DI status P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the monitoring status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
The F-DIs that are being used by the Safety Integrated functions are displayed.
If the module used has fewer than 3 F-DIs, "Freely available" is displayed for the F-DIs which are not in use.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0 Safety monitored Freely available -
01 F-DI 1 Safety monitored Freely available -
02 F-DI 2 Safety monitored Freely available -
Dependency: p10006 / p10106
p10022 / p10122
p10023 / p10123
p10026 / p10126
p10030 / p10130
p10031 / p10131
p10050 / p10150
Refer to: r10149

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 455
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p10050 SI Motion PROFIsafe F-DI transfer (processor 1) / SI Ps F-DI tran P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting for the transfer and evaluation of failsafe digital inputs (F-DI) via PROFIsafe.
The safe state of the selected F-DIs is transferred to the F-control via PROFIsafe. The F-DIs are monitored for
discrepancies. Discrepancy faults can be acknowledged via PROFIsafe.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0 processor 1 Transfer No transfer -
01 F-DI 1 processor 1 Transfer No transfer -
02 F-DI 2 processor 1 Transfer No transfer -
Dependency: Refer to: p10150
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

r10051.0...2 CO/BO: SI Motion digital inputs status (processor 1) / SI DI status P1

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Display and BICO output for the single-channel, logical and debounced status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
The parameter is updated in the SI Motion monitoring clock cycle.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0 processor 1 High Low -
01 F-DI 1 processor 1 High Low -
02 F-DI 2 processor 1 High Low -
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9601, p10017, p10050, r10151
Note: If a safety function is assigned to an input (e.g. via p10022), then the following applies:
- logical "0": Safety function is selected
- logical "1": Safety function is de-selected
The interrelationship between the logical level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the
parameterization (refer to p10040) of the input as either NC or NO contact and is aligned to the use of a safety
function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI selects the safety function, for
24 V at both inputs, de-selects the safety function.
With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level.
This means that for an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V selects the safety function, the level 24
V/0 V de-selects the safety function.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
The state of parameter r10151 is delayed by one monitoring clock cycle in relation to r10051.
The parameter is only updated in the following cases:
- if the Safety Extended Functions are enabled by means of activation via F-DI.
- if transfer of the F-DIs via PROFIsafe is enabled (see p9501).
In this case only the F-DIs transferred for PROFIsafe are displayed and updated (see p10050/p10150). All F-DIs
which have not been transferred have a static zero value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

456 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p10102 SI Motion F-DI changeover discrepancy time (processor 2) / SI Mtn F-DI t P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2850, 2851
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
1.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the discrepancy time for digital inputs.
The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this discrepancy time.
Dependency: Refer to: p10002
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

p10106 SI Motion acknowledgment internal event F-DI (processor 2) / SI ackn int evt P2
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F 0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Select a fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the signal "acknowledge internal event" (internal fault).
The falling edge at this input resets the status "internal event" in the drive.
The rising edge at this input acknowledges any existing discrepancy errors.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10006
Note: The values "static selected" and "static deselected" result in an inactive function of the safe acknowledgment.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

p10117 SI Motion digital inputs debounce time (processor 2) / SI DI t_debounceP2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the debounce time for digital inputs.
The debounce time acts on the following digital inputs:
- Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
- Single-channel digital input 2 (DI 2, read back input for the forced checking procedure).
The debounce time is accepted rounded off to whole milliseconds.
Dependency: Refer to: p10017
Note: Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.
The debounce result can be read in r10151.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 457
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p10122 SI Motion STO input terminal (processor 2) / SI STO F-DI P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "STO" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10022
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
STO: Safe Torque Off

p10123 SI Motion SS1 input terminal (processor 2) / SI SS1 F-DI P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SS1" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10023
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SS1: Safe Stop 1

p10126 SI Motion SLS input terminal (processor 2) / SI SLS F-DI P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SLS" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Dependency: Refer to: p10026

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

458 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p10130 SI Motion SDI positive input terminal (processor 2) / SI SDI pos F-DI P2
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI positive" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p10131 SI Motion SDI negative input terminal (processor 2) / SI SDI neg F-DI P2
PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
0 255 0
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI negative" function.
Value: 0: Static selected
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Static deselected
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always selected.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always deselected.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

r10149 SI Motion F-DI monitoring status (processor 2) / SI F-DI status P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Displays the monitoring status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 459
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The F-DIs that are being used by the Safety Integrated functions are displayed.
If the module used has fewer than 3 F-DIs, "Freely available" is displayed for the F-DIs which are not in use.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0 Safety monitored Freely available -
01 F-DI 1 Safety monitored Freely available -
02 F-DI 2 Safety monitored Freely available -
Dependency: p10006 / p10106
p10022 / p10122
p10023 / p10123
p10026 / p10126
p10030 / p10130
p10031 / p10131
p10050 / p10150
Refer to: r10049

p10150 SI Motion PROFIsafe F-DI transfer (processor 2) / SI Ps F-DI tran P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_PN_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_DP_F
- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting for the transfer and evaluation of failsafe digital inputs (F-DI) via PROFIsafe.
The safe state of the selected F-DIs is transferred to the F-control via PROFIsafe. The F-DIs are monitored for
discrepancies. Discrepancy faults can be acknowledged via PROFIsafe.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0 processor 2 Transfer No transfer -
01 F-DI 1 processor 2 Transfer No transfer -
02 F-DI 2 processor 2 Transfer No transfer -
Dependency: Refer to: p10050
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

r10151.0...2 CO/BO: SI Motion digital inputs status (processor 2) / SI DI status P2

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
PM250 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
PM260 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
CU240E-2_F Min Max Factory setting
CU240E-2_PN_F
- - -
CU240E-2_DP_F
Description: Display and BICO output for the single-channel, logical and debounced status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
The parameter is updated in the SI Motion monitoring clock cycle.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0 processor 2 High Low -
01 F-DI 1 processor 2 High Low -
02 F-DI 2 processor 2 High Low -
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9601, p10117, p10150
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
If a safety function is assigned to an input (e.g. via p10122), then the following applies:
- logical "0": Safety function is selected
- logical "1": Safety function is de-selected

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

460 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

The interrelationship between the logical level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the
parameterization (refer to p10140) of the input as either NC or NO contact and is aligned to the use of a safety
function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI selects the safety function, for
24 V at both inputs, de-selects the safety function.
With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level.
This means that for an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V selects the safety function, the level 24
V/0 V de-selects the safety function.
The state of parameter r10151 is delayed by one monitoring clock cycle in relation to r10051.
The parameter is only updated in the following cases:
- if the Safety Extended Functions are enabled by means of activation via F-DI.
- if transfer of the F-DIs via PROFIsafe is enabled (see p9501).
In this case only the F-DIs transferred for PROFIsafe are displayed and updated (see p10050/p10150). All F-DIs
which have not been transferred have a static zero value.

r20001[0...9] Run-time group sampling time / RTG sampling time

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the current sampling time of the run-time group 0 to 9.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 0
[1] = Run-time group 1
[2] = Run-time group 2
[3] = Run-time group 3
[4] = Run-time group 4
[5] = Run-time group 5
[6] = Run-time group 6
[7] = Run-time group 7
[8] = Run-time group 8
[9] = Run-time group 9

p20030[0...3] BI: AND 0 inputs / AND 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance AND 0 of the AND function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20031 BO: AND 0 output Q / AND 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 & I1 & I2 & I3 of instance AND 0 of the AND function block.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 461
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20032 AND 0 run-time group / AND 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance AND 0 of the AND function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20033 AND 0 run sequence / AND 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 10
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AND 0 within the run-time group set in p20032.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20034[0...3] BI: AND 1 inputs / AND 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance AND 1 of the AND function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20035 BO: AND 1 output Q / AND 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 & I1 & I2 & I3 of instance AND 1 of the AND function block.

p20036 AND 1 run-time group / AND 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance AND 1 of the AND function block is to be called.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

462 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 1: Run-time group 1

2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20037 AND 1 run sequence / AND 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 20
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AND 1 within the run-time group set in p20036.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20038[0...3] BI: AND 2 inputs / AND 2 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance AND 2 of the AND function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20039 BO: AND 2 output Q / AND 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 & I1 & I2 & I3 of instance AND 2 of the AND function block.

p20040 AND 2 run-time group / AND 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance AND 2 of the AND function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 463
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20041 AND 2 run sequence / AND 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2710
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 30
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AND 2 within the run-time group set in p20040.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20042[0...3] BI: AND 3 inputs / AND 3 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance AND 3 of the AND function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20043 BO: AND 3 output Q / AND 3 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 & I1 & I2 & I3 of instance AND 3 of the AND function block.

p20044 AND 3 run-time group / AND 3 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance AND 3 of the AND function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20045 AND 3 run sequence / AND 3 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7210
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 40
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AND 3 within the run-time group set in p20044.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

464 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20046[0...3] BI: OR 0 inputs / OR 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance OR 0 of the OR function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20047 BO: OR 0 output Q / OR 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 | I1 | I2 | I3 of instance OR 0 of the OR function block.

p20048 OR 0 run-time group / OR 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance OR 0 of the OR function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20049 OR 0 run sequence / OR 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 60
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance OR 0 within the run-time group set in p20048.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20050[0...3] BI: OR 1 inputs / OR 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance OR 1 of the OR function block.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 465
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = Input I0

[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20051 BO: OR 1 output Q / OR 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 | I1 | I2 | I3 of instance OR 1 of the OR function block.

p20052 OR 1 run-time group / OR 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance OR 1 of the OR function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20053 OR 1 run sequence / OR 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 70
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance OR 1 within the run-time group set in p20052.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20054[0...3] BI: OR 2 inputs / OR 2 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance OR 2 of the OR function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

466 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20055 BO: OR 2 output Q / OR 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 | I1 | I2 | I3 of instance OR 2 of the OR function block.

p20056 OR 2 run-time group / OR 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance OR 2 of the OR function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20057 OR 2 run sequence / OR 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 80
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance OR 2 within the run-time group set in p20056.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20058[0...3] BI: OR 3 inputs / OR 3 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance OR 3 of the OR function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20059 BO: OR 3 output Q / OR 3 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 | I1 | I2 | I3 of instance OR 3 of the OR function block.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 467
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20060 OR 3 run-time group / OR 3 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance OR 3 of the OR function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20061 OR 3 run sequence / OR 3 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7212
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 90
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance OR 3 within the run-time group set in p20060.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20062[0...3] BI: XOR 0 inputs / XOR 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance XOR 0 of the XOR function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20063 BO: XOR 0 output Q / XOR 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q of instance XOR 0 of the XOR function block.

p20064 XOR 0 run-time group / XOR 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance XOR 0 of the XOR function block is to be called.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

468 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 1: Run-time group 1

2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20065 XOR 0 run sequence / XOR 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 110
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance XOR 0 within the run-time group set in p20064.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20066[0...3] BI: XOR 1 inputs / XOR 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance XOR 1 of the XOR function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20067 BO: XOR 1 output Q / XOR 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q of instance XOR 1 of the XOR function block.

p20068 XOR 1 run-time group / XOR 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance XOR 1 of the XOR function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 469
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20069 XOR 1 run sequence / XOR 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 120
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance XOR 1 within the run-time group set in p20068.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20070[0...3] BI: XOR 2 inputs / XOR 2 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance XOR 2 of the XOR function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20071 BO: XOR 2 output Q / XOR 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q of instance XOR 2 of the XOR function block.

p20072 XOR 2 run-time group / XOR 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance XOR 2 of the XOR function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20073 XOR 2 run sequence / XOR 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 130
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance XOR 2 within the run-time group set in p20072.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

470 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20074[0...3] BI: XOR 3 inputs / XOR 3 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance XOR 3 of the XOR function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3

r20075 BO: XOR 3 output Q / XOR 3 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q of instance XOR 3 of the XOR function block.

p20076 XOR 3 run-time group / XOR 3 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance XOR 3 of the XOR function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20077 XOR 3 run sequence / XOR 3 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7214
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 140
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance XOR 3 within the run-time group set in p20076.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20078 BI: NOT 0 input I / NOT 0 input I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity I of instance NOT 0 of the inverter.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 471
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20079 BO: NOT 0 inverted output / NOT 0 inv output

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output of instance NOT 0 of the inverter.

p20080 NOT 0 run-time group / NOT 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NOT 0 of the inverter is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20081 NOT 0 run sequence / NOT 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 160
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NOT 0 within the run-time group set in p20080.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20082 BI: NOT 1 input I / NOT 1 input I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity I of instance NOT 1 of the inverter.

r20083 BO: NOT 1 inverted output / NOT 1 inv output

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output of instance NOT 1 of the inverter.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

472 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20084 NOT 1 run-time group / NOT 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NOT 1 of the inverter is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20085 NOT 1 run sequence / NOT 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 170
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NOT 1 within the run-time group set in p20084.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20086 BI: NOT 2 input I / NOT 2 input I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity I of instance NOT 2 of the inverter.

r20087 BO: NOT 2 inverted output / NOT 2 inv output

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output of instance NOT 2 of the inverter.

p20088 NOT 2 run-time group / NOT 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NOT 2 of the inverter is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 473
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20089 NOT 2 run sequence / NOT 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 180
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NOT 2 within the run-time group set in p20088.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20090 BI: NOT 3 input I / NOT 3 input I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity I of instance NOT 3 of the inverter.

r20091 BO: NOT 3 inverted output / NOT 3 inv output

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output of instance NOT 3 of the inverter.

p20092 NOT 3 run-time group / NOT 3 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NOT 3 of the inverter is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20093 NOT 3 run sequence / NOT 3 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 190
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NOT 3 within the run-time group set in p20092.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

474 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20094[0...3] CI: ADD 0 inputs / ADD 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance ADD 0 of the adder.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1
[2] = Input X2
[3] = Input X3

r20095 CO: ADD 0 output Y / ADD 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y = X0 + X1 + X2 + X3 of instance ADD 0 of the adder.

p20096 ADD 0 run-time group / ADD 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance ADD 0 of the adder is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20097 ADD 0 run sequence / ADD 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 210
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance ADD 0 within the run-time group set in p20096.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20098[0...3] CI: ADD 1 inputs / ADD 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance ADD 1 of the adder.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1
[2] = Input X2
[3] = Input X3

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 475
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20099 CO: ADD 1 output Y / ADD 1 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y = X0 + X1 + X2 + X3 of instance ADD 1 of the adder.

p20100 ADD 1 run-time group / ADD 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance ADD 1 of the adder is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20101 ADD 1 run sequence / ADD 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 220
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance ADD 1 within the run-time group set in p20100.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20102[0...1] CI: SUB 0 inputs / SUB 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of minuend X1 and subtrahend X2 of instance SUB 0 of the subtractor.
Index: [0] = Minuend X1
[1] = Subtrahend X2

r20103 CO: SUB 0 difference Y / SUB 0 difference Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the difference Y = X1 - X2 of instance SUB 0 of the subtractor.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

476 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20104 SUB 0 run-time group / SUB 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance SUB 0 of the subtractor is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20105 SUB 0 run sequence / SUB 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 240
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance SUB 0 within the run-time group set in p20104.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20106[0...1] CI: SUB 1 inputs / SUB 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of minuend X1 and subtrahend X2 of instance SUB 1 of the subtractor.
Index: [0] = Minuend X1
[1] = Subtrahend X2

r20107 CO: SUB 1 difference Y / SUB 1 difference Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the difference Y = X1 - X2 of instance SUB 1 of the subtractor.

p20108 SUB 1 run-time group / SUB 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance SUB 1 of the subtractor is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 477
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20109 SUB 1 run sequence / SUB 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 250
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance SUB 1 within the run-time group set in p20108.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20110[0...3] CI: MUL 0 inputs / MUL 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the factors X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance MUL 0 of the multiplier.
Index: [0] = Factor X0
[1] = Factor X1
[2] = Factor X2
[3] = Factor X3

r20111 CO: MUL 0 product Y / MUL 0 product Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the product Y = X0 * X1 * X2 * X3 of instance MUL 0 of the multiplier.

p20112 MUL 0 run-time group / MUL 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance MUL 0 of the multiplier is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20113 MUL 0 run sequence / MUL 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 270
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MUL 0 within the run-time group set in p20112.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

478 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20114[0...3] CI: MUL 1 inputs / MUL 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the factors X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance MUL 1 of the multiplier.
Index: [0] = Factor X0
[1] = Factor X1
[2] = Factor X2
[3] = Factor X3

r20115 CO: MUL 1 product Y / MUL 1 product Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the product Y = X0 * X1 * X2 * X3 of instance MUL 1 of the multiplier.

p20116 MUL 1 run-time group / MUL 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance MUL 1 of the multiplier is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20117 MUL 1 run sequence / MUL 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 280
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MUL 1 within the run-time group set in p20116.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20118[0...1] CI: DIV 0 inputs / DIV 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of dividend X1 and divisor X2 of instance DIV 0 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Dividend X0
[1] = Divisor X1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 479
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20119[0...2] CO: DIV 0 quotient / DIV 0 quotient

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for quotients Y = X1/X2, integer number quotients YIN, and division remainder MOD = (Y - YIN) x
X2 of instance DIV 0 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Quotient Y
[1] = Integer number quotient YIN
[2] = Div remainder MOD

r20120 BO: DIV 0 divisor is zero QF / DIV 0 divisor=0 QF

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QF that the divisor X2 of instance DIV 0 of the divider is zero.
X2 = 0.0 => QF = 1

p20121 DIV 0 run-time group / DIV 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DIV 0 of the divider is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20122 DIV 0 run sequence / DIV 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 300
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DIV 0 within the run-time group set in p20121.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20123[0...1] CI: DIV 1 inputs / DIV 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of dividend X1 and divisor X2 of instance DIV 1 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Dividend X0
[1] = Divisor X1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

480 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20124[0...2] CO: DIV 1 quotient / DIV 1 quotient

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for quotients Y = X1/X2, integer number quotients YIN, and division remainder MOD = (Y - YIN) x
X2 of instance DIV 1 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Quotient Y
[1] = Integer number quotient YIN
[2] = Div remainder MOD

r20125 BO: DIV 1 divisor is zero QF / DIV 1 divisor=0 QF

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QF that the divisor X2 of instance DIV 1 of the divider is zero.
X2 = 0.0 => QF = 1

p20126 DIV 1 run-time group / DIV 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DIV 1 of the divider is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20127 DIV 1 run sequence / DIV 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7222
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 310
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DIV 1 within the run-time group set in p20126.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20128 CI: AVA 0 input X / AVA 0 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the input quantity X of instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with sign evaluation.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 481
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20129 CO: AVA 0 output Y / AVA 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with sign evaluation.

r20130 BO: AVA 0 input negative SN / AVA 0 input neg SN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for signal SN that the input quantity X of instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with sign
evaluation is negative.
X < 0.0 => SN = 1

p20131 AVA 0 run-time group / AVA 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with sign
evaluation is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20132 AVA 0 run sequence / AVA 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 340
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AVA 0 within the run-time group set in p20131.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20133 CI: AVA 1 input X / AVA 1 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the input quantity X of instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with sign evaluation.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

482 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20134 CO: AVA 1 output Y / AVA 1 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with sign evaluation.

r20135 BO: AVA 1 input negative SN / AVA 1 input neg SN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for signal SN that the input quantity X of instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with sign
evaluation is negative.
X < 0.0 => SN = 1

p20136 AVA 1 run-time group / AVA 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with sign
evaluation is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20137 AVA 1 run sequence / AVA 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7224
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 350
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AVA 1 within the run-time group set in p20136.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20138 BI: MFP 0 input pulse I / MFP 0 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 483
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20139 MFP 0 pulse duration in ms / MFP 0 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator.

r20140 BO: MFP 0 output Q / MFP 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator.

p20141 MFP 0 run-time group / MFP 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20142 MFP 0 run sequence / MFP 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 370
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MFP 0 within the run-time group set in p20141.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20143 BI: MFP 1 input pulse I / MFP 1 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance MFP 1 of the pulse generator.

p20144 MFP 1 pulse duration in ms / MFP 1 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance MFP 1 of the pulse generator.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

484 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20145 BO: MFP 1 output Q / MFP 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance MFP 1 of the pulse generator.

p20146 MFP 1 run-time group / MFP 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance MFP 1 of the pulse generator is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20147 MFP 1 run sequence / MFP 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 380
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MFP 1 within the run-time group set in p20146.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20148 BI: PCL 0 input pulse I / PCL 0 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener.

p20149 PCL 0 pulse duration in ms / PCL 0 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener.

r20150 BO: PCL 0 output Q / PCL 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 485
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20151 PCL 0 run-time group / PCL 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20152 PCL 0 run sequence / PCL 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 400
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PCL 0 within the run-time group set in p20151.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20153 BI: PCL 1 input pulse I / PCL 1 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener.

p20154 PCL 1 pulse duration in ms / PCL 1 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener.

r20155 BO: PCL 1 output Q / PCL 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener.

p20156 PCL 1 run-time group / PCL 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener is to be called.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

486 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 5: Run-time group 5

6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20157 PCL 1 run sequence / PCL 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 410
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PCL 1 within the run-time group set in p20156.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20158 BI: PDE 0 input pulse I / PDE 0 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device.

p20159 PDE 0 pulse delay time in ms / PDE 0 t_del ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse delay time T in milliseconds of instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device.

r20160 BO: PDE 0 output Q / PDE 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device.

p20161 PDE 0 run-time group / PDE 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 487
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20162 PDE 0 run sequence / PDE 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 430
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDE 0 within the run-time group set in p20161.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20163 BI: PDE 1 input pulse I / PDE 1 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDE 1 of the closing delay device.

p20164 PDE 1 pulse delay time in ms / PDE 1 t_del ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse delay time T in milliseconds of instance PDE 1 of the closing delay device.

r20165 BO: PDE 1 output Q / PDE 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDE 1 of the closing delay device.

p20166 PDE 1 run-time group / PDE 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PDE 1 of the closing delay device is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20167 PDE 1 run sequence / PDE 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 440
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDE 1 within the run-time group set in p20166.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

488 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20168 BI: PDF 0 input pulse I / PDF 0 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device.

p20169 PDF 0 pulse extension time in ms / PDF 0 t_ext ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse extension time T in milliseconds of instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device.

r20170 BO: PDF 0 output Q / PDF 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device.

p20171 PDF 0 run-time group / PDF 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20172 PDF 0 run sequence / PDF 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 460
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDF 0 within the run-time group set in p20171.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 489
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20173 BI: PDF 1 input pulse I / PDF 1 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDF 1 of the breaking delay device.

p20174 PDF 1 pulse extension time in ms / PDF 1 t_ext ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse extension time T in milliseconds of instance PDF 1 of the breaking delay device.

r20175 BO: PDF 1 output Q / PDF 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDF 1 of the breaking delay device.

p20176 PDF 1 run-time group / PDF 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PDF 1 of the breaking delay device is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20177 PDF 1 run sequence / PDF 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 470
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDF 1 within the run-time group set in p20176.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20178[0...1] BI: PST 0 inputs / PST 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input pulse I and the reset input R of instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

490 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = Input pulse I

[1] = Reset input R

p20179 PST 0 pulse duration in ms / PST 0 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element.

r20180 BO: PST 0 output Q / PST 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element.

p20181 PST 0 run-time group / PST 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20182 PST 0 run sequence / PST 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 490
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PST 0 within the run-time group set in p20181.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20183[0...1] BI: PST 1 inputs / PST 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input pulse I and the reset input R of instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element.
Index: [0] = Input pulse I
[1] = Reset input R

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 491
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20184 PST 1 pulse duration in ms / PST 1 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element.

r20185 BO: PST 1 output Q / PST 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element.

p20186 PST 1 run-time group / PST 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20187 PST 1 run sequence / PST 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7234
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 500
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PST 1 within the run-time group set in p20186.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20188[0...1] BI: RSR 0 inputs / RSR 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for set input S and reset input R of instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop.
Index: [0] = Set S
[1] = Reset R

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

492 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20189 BO: RSR 0 output Q / RSR 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop

r20190 BO: RSR 0 inverted output QN / RSR 0 inv outp QN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for inverted output QN of instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop.

p20191 RSR 0 run-time group / RSR 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20192 RSR 0 run sequence / RSR 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 520
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance RSR 0 within the run-time group set in p20191.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20193[0...1] BI: RSR 1 inputs / RSR 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for set input S and reset input R of instance RSR 1 of the RS flipflop.
Index: [0] = Set S
[1] = Reset R

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 493
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20194 BO: RSR 1 output Q / RSR 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance RSR 1 of the RS flipflop

r20195 BO: RSR 1 inverted output QN / RSR 1 inv outp QN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for inverted output QN of instance RSR 1 of the RS flipflop.

p20196 RSR 1 run-time group / RSR 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance RSR 1 of the RS flipflop is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20197 RSR 1 run sequence / RSR 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 530
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance RSR 1 within the run-time group set in p20196.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20198[0...3] BI: DFR 0 inputs / DFR 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for trigger input I, D input D, set input S, and reset input R of instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop.
Index: [0] = Trigger input I
[1] = D input D
[2] = Set S
[3] = Reset R

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

494 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20199 BO: DFR 0 output Q / DFR 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop.

r20200 BO: DFR 0 inverted output QN / DFR 0 inv outp QN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output QN of instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop.

p20201 DFR 0 run-time group / DFR 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20202 DFR 0 run sequence / DFR 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 550
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DFR 0 within the run-time group set in p20201.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20203[0...3] BI: DFR 1 inputs / DFR 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for trigger input I, D input D, set input S, and reset input R of instance DFR 1 of the D flipflop.
Index: [0] = Trigger input I
[1] = D input D
[2] = Set S
[3] = Reset R

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 495
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20204 BO: DFR 1 output Q / DFR 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance DFR 1 of the D flipflop.

r20205 BO: DFR 1 inverted output QN / DFR 1 inv outp QN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output QN of instance DFR 1 of the D flipflop.

p20206 DFR 1 run-time group / DFR 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DFR 1 of the D flipflop is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20207 DFR 1 run sequence / DFR 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 560
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group of instance DFR 1 within the run-time group set in p20206.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20208[0...1] BI: BSW 0 inputs / BSW 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0 and I1 of instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

496 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20209 BI: BSW 0 switch setting I / BSW 0 sw_setting

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch.

r20210 BO: BSW 0 output Q / BSW 0 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Q of instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch.

p20211 BSW 0 run-time group / BSW 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20212 BSW 0 run sequence / BSW 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 580
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance BSW 0 within the run-time group set in p20211.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20213[0...1] BI: BSW 1 inputs / BSW 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0 and I1 of instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 497
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20214 BI: BSW 1 switch setting I / BSW 1 sw_setting

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch.

r20215 BO: BSW 1 output Q / BSW 1 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Q of instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch.

p20216 BSW 1 run-time group / BSW 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20217 BSW 1 run sequence / BSW 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 590
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance BSW 1 within the run-time group set in p20216.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20218[0...1] CI: NSW 0 inputs / NSW 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

498 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20219 BI: NSW 0 switch setting I / NSW 0 sw_setting

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch.

r20220 CO: NSW 0 output Y / NSW 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch.

p20221 NSW 0 run-time group / NSW 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch is to be
called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20222 NSW 0 run sequence / NSW 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 610
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NSW 0 within the run-time group set in p20221.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20223[0...1] CI: NSW 1 inputs / NSW 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 499
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20224 BI: NSW 1 switch setting I / NSW 1 sw_setting

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch.

r20225 CO: NSW 1 output Y / NSW 1 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch.

p20226 NSW 1 run-time group / NSW 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch is to be
called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20227 NSW 1 run sequence / NSW 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7250
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 620
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NSW 1 within the run-time group set in p20226.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20228 CI: LIM 0 input X / LIM 0 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

500 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20229 LIM 0 upper limit value LU / LIM 0 upper lim LU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the upper limit value LU of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.

p20230 LIM 0 lower limit value LL / LIM 0 lower lim LL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the lower limit value LL of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.

r20231 CO: LIM 0 output Y / LIM 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the limited output quantity Y of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.

r20232 BO: LIM 0 input quantity at the upper limit QU / LIM 0 QU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 0 of limiter QU (upper limit reached), i.e. QU = 1 for X >= LU.

r20233 BO: LIM 0 input quantity at the lower limit QL / LIM 0 QL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 0 of limiter QL (lower limit reached), i.e. QL = 1 for X <= LL.

p20234 LIM 0 run-time group / LIM 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LIM 0 of the limiter is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 501
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20235 LIM 0 run sequence / LIM 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 640
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LIM 0 within the run-time group set in p20234.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20236 CI: LIM 1 input X / LIM 1 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.

p20237 LIM 1 upper limit value LU / LIM 1 upper lim LU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the upper limit value LU of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.

p20238 LIM 1 lower limit value LL / LIM 1 lower lim LL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the lower limit value LL of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.

r20239 CO: LIM 1 output Y / LIM 1 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the limited output quantity Y of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.

r20240 BO: LIM 1 input quantity at the upper limit QU / LIM 1 QU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 1 of limiter QU (upper limit reached), i.e. QU = 1 for X >= LU.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

502 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20241 BO: LIM 1 input quantity at the lower limit QL / LIM 1 QL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 1 of limiter QL (lower limit reached), i.e. QL = 1 for X <= LL.

p20242 LIM 1 run-time group / LIM 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LIM 1 of the limiter is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20243 LIM 1 run sequence / LIM 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7260
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 650
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LIM 1 within the run-time group set in p20242.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20244[0...1] CI: PT1 0 inputs / PT1 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X and of setting value SV of instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element.
Index: [0] = Input X
[1] = Setting value SV

p20245 BI: PT1 0 accept setting value S / PT1 0 acc set val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the "accept setting value" signal of instant PT1 0 of the smoothing element.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 503
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20246 PT1 0 smoothing time constant in ms / PT1 0 T_smooth ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant T in milliseconds of instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element.

r20247 CO: PT1 0 output Y / PT1 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the smoothed output quantity Y of instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element.

p20248 PT1 0 run-time group / PT1 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20249 PT1 0 run sequence / PT1 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 670
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PT1 0 within the run-time group set in p20248.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20250[0...1] CI: PT1 1 inputs / PT1 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X and of setting value SV of instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element.
Index: [0] = Input X
[1] = Setting value SV

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

504 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20251 BI: PT1 1 accept setting value S / PT1 1 acc set val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the "accept setting value" signal of instant PT1 1 of the smoothing element.

p20252 PT1 1 smoothing time constant in ms / PT1 1 T_smooth ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant T in milliseconds of instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element.

r20253 CO: PT1 1 output Y / PT1 1 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the smoothed output quantity Y of instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element.

p20254 PT1 1 run-time group / PT1 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20255 PT1 1 run sequence / PT1 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7262
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 680
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PT1 1 within the run-time group set in p20254.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20256[0...1] CI: INT 0 inputs / INT 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X and of setting value SV of instance INT 0 of the integrator.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 505
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Index: [0] = Input X

[1] = Setting value SV

p20257 INT 0 upper limit value LU / INT 0 upper lim LU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the upper limit value LU of instance INT 0 of the integrator.

p20258 INT 0 lower limit value LL / INT 0 lower lim LL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the lower limit value LL of instance INT 0 of the integrator.

p20259 INT 0 integrating time constant in ms / INT 0 T_Integr ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the integrating time constant Ti in milliseconds of instance INT 0 of the integrator.

p20260 BI: INT 0 accept setting value S / INT 0 acc set val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the "accept setting value" signal of instant INT 0 of the integrator.

r20261 CO: INT 0 output Y / INT 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance INT 0 of the integrator.
If LL>= LU, then the output quantity Y = LU.

r20262 BO: INT 0 integrator at the upper limit QU / INT 0 QU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QU that output quantity Y of instance INT 0 of the integrator has reached the upper
limit value LU.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

506 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20263 BO: INT 0 integrator at the lower limit QL / INT 0 QL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QL that output quantity Y of instance INT 0 of the integrator has reached the lower
limit value LL.

p20264 INT 0 run-time group / INT 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance INT 0 of the integrator is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20265 INT 0 run sequence / INT 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 700
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance INT 0 within the run-time group set in p20264.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20266 CI: LVM 0 input X / LVM 0 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.

p20267 LVM 0 interval average value M / LVM 0 avg value M

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval average M of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 507
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20268 LVM 0 interval limit L / LVM 0 limit L

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval limit L of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.

p20269 LVM 0 hyst HY / LVM 0 hyst HY

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for hysteresis HY of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.

r20270 BO: LVM 0 input quantity above interval QU / LVM 0 X above QU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X > M + L and
X is >= M + L - HY.

r20271 BO: LVM 0 input quantity within interval QM / LVM 0 X within QM

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter that the input quantity X lies within the interval.

r20272 BO: LVM 0 input quantity below interval QL / LVM 0 X below QL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X < M - L and
X is <= M - L + HY.

p20273 LVM 0 run-time group / LVM 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

508 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20274 LVM 0 run sequence / LVM 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 720
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LVM 0 within the run-time group set in p20273.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20275 CI: LVM 1 input X / LVM 1 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.

p20276 LVM 1 interval average value M / LVM 1 avg value M

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval average M of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.

p20277 LVM 1 interval limit L / LVM 1 limit L

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval limit L of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.

p20278 LVM 1 hyst HY / LVM 1 hyst HY

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for hysteresis HY of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.

r20279 BO: LVM 1 input quantity above interval QU / LVM 1 X above QU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X > M + L and
X is >= M + L - HY.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 509
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20280 BO: LVM 1 input quantity within interval QM / LVM 1 X within QM

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter that the input quantity X lies within the interval.

r20281 BO: LVM 1 input quantity below interval QL / LVM 1 X below QL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X < M - L and
X is <= M - L + HY.

p20282 LVM 1 run-time group / LVM 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20283 LVM 1 run sequence / LVM 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7270
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 730
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LVM 1 within the run-time group set in p20282.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20284 CI: DIF 0 input X / DIF 0 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

510 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20285 DIF 0 differentiating time constant in ms / DIF 0 T_diff ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the differentiating time constant Td in milliseconds of instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element.

r20286 CO: DIF 0 output Y / DIF 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element.

p20287 DIF 0 run-time group / DIF 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20288 DIF 0 run sequence / DIF 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7264
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 750
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DIF 0 within the run-time group set in p20287.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20300 BI: NOT 4 input I / NOT 4 input I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity I of instance NOT 4 of the inverter.

r20301 BO: NOT 4 inverted output / NOT 4 inv output

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output of instance NOT 4 of the inverter.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 511
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20302 NOT 4 run-time group / NOT 4 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NOT 4 of the inverter is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20303 NOT 4 run sequence / NOT 4 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 770
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NOT 4 within the run-time group set in p20302.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20304 BI: NOT 5 input I / NOT 5 input I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity I of instance NOT 5 of the inverter.

r20305 BO: NOT 5 inverted output / NOT 5 inv output

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output of instance NOT 5 of the inverter.

p20306 NOT 5 run-time group / NOT 5 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NOT 5 of the inverter is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

512 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20307 NOT 5 run sequence / NOT 5 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7216
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 780
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NOT 5 within the run-time group set in p20306.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20308[0...3] CI: ADD 2 inputs / ADD 2 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance ADD 2 of the adder.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1
[2] = Input X2
[3] = Input X3

r20309 CO: ADD 2 output Y / ADD 2 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y = X0 + X1 + X2 + X3 of instance ADD 2 of the adder.

p20310 ADD 2 run-time group / ADD 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance ADD 2 of the adder is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20311 ADD 2 run sequence / ADD 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7220
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 800
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance ADD 2 within the run-time group set in p20310.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 513
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20312[0...1] CI: NCM 0 inputs / NCM 0 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1

r20313 BO: NCM 0 output QU / NCM 0 output QU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QU of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
QU is only set if X0 > X1.

r20314 BO: NCM 0 output QE / NCM 0 output QE

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QE of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
QE is only set if X0 = X1.

r20315 BO: NCM 0 output QL / NCM 0 output QL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QL of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
QL is only set if X0 < X1.

p20316 NCM 0 run-time group / NCM 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

514 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20317 NCM 0 run sequence / NCM 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 820
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NCM 0 within the run-time group set in p20316.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20318[0...1] CI: NCM 1 inputs / NCM 1 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1

r20319 BO: NCM 1 output QU / NCM 1 output QU

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QU of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
QU is only set if X0 > X1.

r20320 BO: NCM 1 output QE / NCM 1 output QE

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QE of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
QE is only set if X0 = X1.

r20321 BO: NCM 1 output QL / NCM 1 output QL

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QL of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
QL is only set if X0 < X1.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 515
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20322 NCM 1 run-time group / NCM 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20323 NCM 1 run sequence / NCM 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7225
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 830
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NCM 1 within the run-time group set in p20322.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20324[0...1] BI: RSR 2 inputs / RSR 2 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for set input S and reset input R of instance RSR 2 of the RS flipflop.
Index: [0] = Set S
[1] = Reset R

r20325 BO: RSR 2 output Q / RSR 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance RSR 2 of the RS flipflop

r20326 BO: RSR 2 inverted output QN / RSR 2 inv outp QN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for inverted output QN of instance RSR 2 of the RS flipflop.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

516 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20327 RSR 2 run-time group / RSR 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance RSR 2 of the RS flipflop is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20328 RSR 2 run sequence / RSR 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
0 7999 850
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance RSR 2 within the run-time group set in p20327.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20329[0...3] BI: DFR 2 inputs / DFR 2 inputs

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for trigger input I, D input D, set input S, and reset input R of instance DFR 2 of the D flipflop.
Index: [0] = Trigger input I
[1] = D input D
[2] = Set S
[3] = Reset R

r20330 BO: DFR 2 output Q / DFR 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance DFR 2 of the D flipflop.

r20331 BO: DFR 2 inverted output QN / DFR 2 inv outp QN

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output QN of instance DFR 2 of the D flipflop.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 517
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20332 DFR 2 run-time group / DFR 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DFR 2 of the D flipflop is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20333 DFR 2 run sequence / DFR 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7240
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 870
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group of instance DFR 2 within the run-time group set in p20332.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20334 BI: PDE 2 input pulse I / PDE 2 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDE 2 of the closing delay device.

p20335 PDE 2 pulse delay time in ms / PDE 2 t_del ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse delay time T in milliseconds of instance PDE 2 of the closing delay device.

r20336 BO: PDE 2 output Q / PDE 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDE 2 of the closing delay device.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

518 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20337 PDE 2 run-time group / PDE 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PDE 2 of the closing delay device is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20338 PDE 2 run sequence / PDE 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 890
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDE 2 within the run-time group set in p20337.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20339 BI: PDE 3 input pulse I / PDE 3 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDE 3 of the closing delay device.

p20340 PDE 3 pulse delay time in ms / PDE 3 t_del ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse delay time T in milliseconds of instance PDE 3 of the closing delay device.

r20341 BO: PDE 3 output Q / PDE 3 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDE 3 of the closing delay device.

p20342 PDE 3 run-time group / PDE 3 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PDE 3 of the closing delay device is to be called.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 519
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Value: 5: Run-time group 5

6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20343 PDE 3 run sequence / PDE 3 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7232
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 900
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDE 3 within the run-time group set in p20342.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20344 BI: PDF 2 input pulse I / PDF 2 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDF 2 of the breaking delay device.

p20345 PDF 2 pulse extension time in ms / PDF 2 t_ext ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse extension time T in milliseconds of instance PDF 2 of the breaking delay device.

r20346 BO: PDF 2 output Q / PDF 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDF 2 of the breaking delay device.

p20347 PDF 2 run-time group / PDF 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PDF 2 of the breaking delay device is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

520 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20348 PDF 2 run sequence / PDF 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 920
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDE 2 within the run-time group set in p20347.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20349 BI: PDF 3 input pulse I / PDF 3 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDF 3 of the breaking delay device.

p20350 PDF 3 pulse extension time in ms / PDF 3 t_ext ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse extension time T in milliseconds of instance PDF 3 of the breaking delay device.

r20351 BO: PDF 3 output Q / PDF 3 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDF 3 of the breaking delay device.

p20352 PDF 3 run-time group / PDF 3 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PDF 3 of the breaking delay device is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20353 PDF 3 run sequence / PDF 3 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7233
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 930
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDE 3 within the run-time group set in p20352.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 521
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20354 BI: MFP 2 input pulse I / MFP 2 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance MFP 2 of the pulse generator.

p20355 MFP 2 pulse duration in ms / MFP 2 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance MFP 2 of the pulse generator.

r20356 BO: MFP 2 output Q / MFP 2 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance MFP 2 of the pulse generator.

p20357 MFP 2 run-time group / MFP 2 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance MFP 2 of the pulse generator is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20358 MFP 2 run sequence / MFP 2 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 950
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MFP 2 within the run-time group set in p20357.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

522 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20359 BI: MFP 3 input pulse I / MFP 3 inp_pulse I

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance MFP 3 of the pulse generator.

p20360 MFP 3 pulse duration in ms / MFP 3 pulse_dur ms

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5400000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance MFP 3 of the pulse generator.

r20361 BO: MFP 3 output Q / MFP 3 output Q

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance MFP 3 of the pulse generator.

p20362 MFP 3 run-time group / MFP 3 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance MFP 3 of the pulse generator is to be called.
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20363 MFP 3 run sequence / MFP 3 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7230
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 960
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MFP 3 within the run-time group set in p20362.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20372 CI: PLI 0 input X / PLI 0 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input X of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 523
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

r20373 CO: PLI 0 output Y / PLI 0 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0

p20374[0...19] PLI 0 X-coordinate, A breakpoint / PLI 0 X-coordinate

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the x-coordinates for the breakpoints (A0...A19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0.
Index: [0] = Breakpoint 0
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5
[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9
[10] = Breakpoint 10
[11] = Breakpoint 11
[12] = Breakpoint 12
[13] = Breakpoint 13
[14] = Breakpoint 14
[15] = Breakpoint 15
[16] = Breakpoint 16
[17] = Breakpoint 17
[18] = Breakpoint 18
[19] = Breakpoint 19

p20375[0...19] PLI 0 Y-coordinate, B breakpoint / PLI 0 Y-coordinate

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the y-coordinates for the breakpoints (B0...B19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0.
Index: [0] = Breakpoint 0
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5
[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9
[10] = Breakpoint 10
[11] = Breakpoint 11
[12] = Breakpoint 12
[13] = Breakpoint 13
[14] = Breakpoint 14
[15] = Breakpoint 15

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

524 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[16] = Breakpoint 16
[17] = Breakpoint 17
[18] = Breakpoint 18
[19] = Breakpoint 19

p20376 PLI 0 run-time group / PLI 0 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PLI 0 of the polyline is to be called
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

p20377 PLI 0 run sequence / PLI 0 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 980
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PLI 0 within the run-time group set in p20376.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p20378 CI: PLI 1 input X / PLI 1 input X

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input X of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1.

r20379 CO: PLI 1 output Y / PLI 1 output Y

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1

p20380[0...19] PLI 1 X-coordinate, A breakpoint / PLI 1 X-coordinate

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the x-coordinates for the breakpoints (A0...A19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1.
Index: [0] = Breakpoint 0
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 525
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9
[10] = Breakpoint 10
[11] = Breakpoint 11
[12] = Breakpoint 12
[13] = Breakpoint 13
[14] = Breakpoint 14
[15] = Breakpoint 15
[16] = Breakpoint 16
[17] = Breakpoint 17
[18] = Breakpoint 18
[19] = Breakpoint 19

p20381[0...19] PLI 1 Y-coordinate, B breakpoint / PLI 1 Y-coordinate

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the y-coordinates for the breakpoints (B0...B19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1.
Index: [0] = Breakpoint 0
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5
[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9
[10] = Breakpoint 10
[11] = Breakpoint 11
[12] = Breakpoint 12
[13] = Breakpoint 13
[14] = Breakpoint 14
[15] = Breakpoint 15
[16] = Breakpoint 16
[17] = Breakpoint 17
[18] = Breakpoint 18
[19] = Breakpoint 19

p20382 PLI 1 run-time group / PLI 1 RTG

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PLI 1 of the polyline is to be called
Value: 5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

526 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

p20383 PLI 1 run sequence / PLI 1 RunSeq

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 7226
Min Max Factory setting
0 32000 990
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PLI 1 within the run-time group set in p20382.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

p60022 PROFIsafe telegram selection / Ps telegram_sel

CU240E-2_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2 PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 998 998
Description: Sets the telegram number for PROFIsafe.
Value: 0: No PROFIsafe telegram selected
30: PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1
998: Compatibility mode (as for firmware version < 4.6)
Note: For p9601.3 = p9801.3 = 1 (PROFIsafe enabled), the following variants exist when parameterizing PROFIsafe
telegram 30:
- p9611 = p9811 = 998 and p60022 = 0
- p9611 = p9811 = 998 and p60022 = 30
- p9611 = p9811 = 30 and p60022 = 30

p60022 PROFIsafe telegram selection / Ps telegram_sel

CU240E-2_PN_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240E-2_DP_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 998 998
Description: Sets the telegram number for PROFIsafe.
Value: 0: No PROFIsafe telegram selected
30: PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1
900: PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 900, PZD-2/2
998: Compatibility mode (as for firmware version < 4.6)
Note: For p9601.3 = p9801.3 = 1 (PROFIsafe enabled), the following variants exist when parameterizing PROFIsafe
telegram 30:
- p9611 = p9811 = 998 and p60022 = 0
- p9611 = p9811 = 998 and p60022 = 30
- p9611 = p9811 = 30 and p60022 = 30

p60122 PROFIdrive SIC telegram selection / Pd SIC telegr

CU240E-2_PN_F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2_DP_F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2423
Min Max Factory setting
700 999 999
Description: Sets the telegram for the Safety Info Channel (SIC).
The SIC telegram p60122 is attached directly to the PZD telegram p0922/p2079.
Value: 700: Supplementary telegram 700, PZD-0/3
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p0922, p2071, p2079

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 527
2 Parameters
2.2 List of parameters

Note: The clearance to the PZD telegram can be increased using p2071.
After changing p0922/p2079 or p2071, then p60122 must be set again.
The telegram interconnections can only be changed if p60122 and p0922 are both set to 999.

r61000[0...239] PROFINET Name of Station / PN Name of Station

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays PROFINET Name of Station.
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.

r61001[0...3] PROFINET IP of Station / PN IP of Station

CU240E-2 PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
CU240E-2_PN_F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dyn. index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Func. diagram: 2410
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays PROFINET IP of Station.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

528 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

2.3 Parameters for data sets

2.3.1 Command Data Sets (CDS)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: CDS
p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit variable / Curr lim var
p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)
p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1
p0845[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_src 2
p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1
p0849[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_src 2
p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable
p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake
p0856[0...n] BI: Enable speed controller / n_ctrl enable
p0858[0...n] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake
p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel
p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0
p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1
p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2
p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv
p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val
p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val
p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
p1075[0...n] CI: Suppl setp / Suppl setp
p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal
p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1098[0...n] CI: Skip speed scaling / n_skip scal
p1106[0...n] CI: Minimum speed signal source / n_min s_src
p1108[0...n] BI: Total setpoint selection / Total setp sel
p1109[0...n] CI: Total setpoint / Total setp
p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir
p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir
p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG
p1138[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-up time scaling / RFG t_RU scal
p1139[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-down time scaling / RFG t_RD scal
p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable
p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 529
2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v
p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1
p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2
p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src
p1230[0...n] BI: DC braking activation / DC brake act
p1330[0...n] CI: U/f control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ.
p1352[0...n] CI: Motor holding brake starting frequency signal source / Brake f_start
p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctr adapt_sig Kp
p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal
p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB
p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop
p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal
p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp
p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable
p1500[0...n] Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel
p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl
p1502[0...n] BI: Freeze moment of inertia estimator / J_estim freeze
p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set
p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1
p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal
p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
p2103[0...n] BI: 1st acknowledge faults / 1st acknowledge
p2104[0...n] BI: 2nd acknowledge faults / 2nd acknowledge
p2105[0...n] BI: 3rd acknowledge faults / 3rd acknowledge
p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2
p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2
p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
p2148[0...n] BI: RFG active / RFG active
p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg
p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable
p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower
p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1
p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2
p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val
p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ hold
p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctr prectr_sig
p2290[0...n] BI: Technology controller limiting enable / Tec_ctrl lim enab

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

530 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal

p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrMaxLimS_src
p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs
p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable / Ext fault 3 enab
p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
p3230[0...n] CI: Load monitoring speed actual value / Load monit n_act
p3232[0...n] BI: Load monitoring failure detection / Load_moni fail_det
p3330[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 / 2/3 wire cmd 1
p3331[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 / 2/3 wire cmd 2
p3332[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 / 2/3 wire cmd 3

2.3.2 Drive Data Sets (DDS)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: DDS
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit
p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1
p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2
p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3
p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4
p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5
p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6
p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7
p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8
p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9
p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10
p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11
p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12
p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13
p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14
p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15
p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration
p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max
p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min
p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value
p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set
p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set
p1063[0...n] Setpoint channel speed limit / Setp_chan n_lim
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max
p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1
p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2
p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3
p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4
p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth
p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
p1123[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-up time / RFG t_RU min
p1127[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 531
2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round

p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD
p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen. tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
p1200[0...n] Flying restart operating mode / FlyRest op_mode
p1202[0...n] Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch
p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact
p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh
p1240[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) / Vdc ctr config vec
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1271[0...n] Flying restart maximum frequency for the inhibited direction / FlyRes f_max dir
p1280[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f
p1281[0...n] Vdc controller configuration / Vdc ctrl config
p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1284[0...n] Vdc_max controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_max t_thresh
p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level
p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (U/f) / Vdc_max factor RFG
p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (U/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim
p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f / Vdc_min response
p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
p1302[0...n] U/f control configuration / U/f config
p1310[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent / I_start (Ua) perm
p1311[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating / I_start accel
p1312[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) when starting / I_start start
p1320[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1
p1321[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1
p1322[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Uf char f2
p1323[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Uf char U2
p1324[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Uf char f3
p1325[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Uf char U3
p1326[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Uf char f4
p1327[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Uf char U4
p1331[0...n] Voltage limiting / U_lim
p1333[0...n] U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start
p1334[0...n] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation scaling / Slip comp scal

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

532 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val

p1338[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain
p1339[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T
p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp
p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn
p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp
p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn
p1349[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max
p1350[0...n] U/f control soft start / U/f soft start
p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config
p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T
p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (sensorless) / n_C n_act T_s SL
p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow
p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up
p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor lower / Adapt_factor lower
p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor upper / Adapt_factor upper
p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed upper scaling / n_ctr Kp n up scal
p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed upper scaling / n_ctr Tn n up scal
p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl n lower
p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed upper / n_ctrl n upper
p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SL Kp
p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SL Tn
p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal
p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source
p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scal
p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_prectrl scal
p1498[0...n] Load moment of inertia / Load M_inertia
p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control scaling / a for M_ctrl scal
p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal
p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot
p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen
p1553[0...n] Stall limit scaling / Stall limit scal
p1560[0...n] Moment of inertia estimator accelerating torque threshold value / J_est M thresh
p1561[0...n] Moment of inertia estimator change time moment of inertia / J_est t J
p1562[0...n] Moment of inertia estimator change time load / J_est t load
p1563[0...n] CO: Mom. of inertia estimator load torque direction of rotation pos. / J_est M pos
p1564[0...n] CO: Mom. of inertia estimator load torque direction of rotation neg. / J_est M neg
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp
p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet
p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn
p1575[0...n] Voltage target value limit / U_tgt val lim
p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.
p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth
p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
p1586[0...n] Field weakening characteristic scaling / Field weak scal
p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp
p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller P gain / Field_ctrl Kp

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 533
2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p1595[0...n] Field weakening controller additional setpoint / Field_ctr add_setp

p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn
p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (sensorless) / M_set static
p1611[0...n] Additional acceleration torque (sensorless) / M_suppl_accel
p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth
p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal
p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal
p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp
p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn
p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling scaling / Transv_decpl scal
p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
p1730[0...n] Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd ctrl Tn shutd
p1731[0...n] Isd controller combination current time component / Isd ctr I_combi T1
p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp
p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall
p1749[0...n] Motor model increase changeover speed encoderless operation / Incr n_chng no enc
p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config
p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl
p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl
p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
p1774[0...n] Motor model offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A
p1775[0...n] Motor model offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B
p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf
p1784[0...n] Motor model feedback scaling / MotMod fdbk scal
p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp
p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn
r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr
p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn
r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp
p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode
p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max
p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr
p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev
p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2
p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1
p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1
p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config
p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3
p2152[0...n] Delay for comparison n > n_max / Del n > n_max
p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T
p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2
p2156[0...n] On delay comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd
p2157[0...n] Speed threshold 5 / n_thresh val 5
p2158[0...n] Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 5 / Del compar n_5
p2159[0...n] Speed threshold 6 / n_thresh val 6
p2160[0...n] Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 6 / Del compar n_6
p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3
p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max
p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4
p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

534 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p2165[0...n] Load monitoring stall monitoring upper threshold / Stall_mon up thr

p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so
p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set
p2168[0...n] Load monitoring stall monitoring torque threshold / Stall_mon M_thresh
p2170[0...n] Current threshold value / I_thres
p2171[0...n] Current threshold value reached delay time / I_thresh rch t_del
p2172[0...n] DC link voltage threshold value / Vdc thresh val
p2173[0...n] DC link voltage comparison delay time / t_del Vdc
p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1
p2175[0...n] Motor blocked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh
p2176[0...n] Torque threshold value comparison delay time / M_thrsh comp T_del
p2177[0...n] Motor blocked delay time / Mot lock t_del
p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
p2179[0...n] Output load identification current limit / Outp_ld iden I_lim
p2180[0...n] Output load detection delay time / Out_load det t_del
p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp
p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1
p2183[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2
p2184[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3
p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1 upper / M_thresh 1 upper
p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1 lower / M_thresh 1 lower
p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2 upper / M_thresh 2 upper
p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower / M_thresh 2 lower
p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3 upper / M_thresh 3 upper
p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower / M_thresh 3 lower
p2191[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold no load / M_thresh no load
p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del
p2193[0...n] Load monitoring configuration / Load monit config
p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2
p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off
p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal
p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val1
p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2
p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3
p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4
p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5
p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6
p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7
p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8
p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9
p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10
p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11
p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12
p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13
p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14
p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15
p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel
p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config
p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max
p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min
p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]
p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 535
2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]

p3231[0...n] Load monitoring speed deviation / Load monit n_dev
p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter time constant / M_act_filt T
p3320[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 1 / Fluid_mach P1
p3321[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 1 / Fluid_mach n1
p3322[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 2 / Fluid_mach P2
p3323[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 2 / Fluid_mach n2
p3324[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 3 / Fluid_mach P3
p3325[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 3 / Fluid_mach n3
p3326[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 4 / Fluid_mach P4
p3327[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 4 / Fluid_mach n4
p3328[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 5 / Fluid_mach P5
p3329[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 5 / Fluid_mach n5
p3820[0...n] Friction characteristic value n0 / Friction n0
p3821[0...n] Friction characteristic value n1 / Friction n1
p3822[0...n] Friction characteristic value n2 / Friction n2
p3823[0...n] Friction characteristic value n3 / Friction n3
p3824[0...n] Friction characteristic value n4 / Friction n4
p3825[0...n] Friction characteristic value n5 / Friction n5
p3826[0...n] Friction characteristic value n6 / Friction n6
p3827[0...n] Friction characteristic value n7 / Friction n7
p3828[0...n] Friction characteristic value n8 / Friction n8
p3829[0...n] Friction characteristic value n9 / Friction n9
p3830[0...n] Friction characteristic value M0 / Friction M0
p3831[0...n] Friction characteristic value M1 / Friction M1
p3832[0...n] Friction characteristic value M2 / Friction M2
p3833[0...n] Friction characteristic value M3 / Friction M3
p3834[0...n] Friction characteristic value M4 / Friction M4
p3835[0...n] Friction characteristic value M5 / Friction M5
p3836[0...n] Friction characteristic value M6 / Friction M6
p3837[0...n] Friction characteristic value M7 / Friction M7
p3838[0...n] Friction characteristic value M8 / Friction M8
p3839[0...n] Friction characteristic value M9 / Friction M9
p3846[0...n] Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RU/RD
p3847[0...n] Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm
p3856[0...n] Compound braking current / Compound I_brake
r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp
r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
r3929[0...n] Motor data identification modulated voltage generation / MotID U_gen mod
p5271[0...n] Online tuning configuration controller / Ot config ctrl
p5310[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol configuration / J_est config
r5311[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol status word / J_prectrl ZSW
p5312[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol linear positive / J_est lin pos
p5313[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol constant positive / J_est const pos
p5314[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol linear negative / J_est lin neg
p5315[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol constant negative / J_est const neg
p5316[0...n] Moment of inertia precontrol change time moment of inertia / J_prectrl t J

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

536 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

2.3.3 Motor data sets (MDS)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: MDS
p0133[0...n] Motor configuration / Motor config
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0306[0...n] Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty
p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos phi rated
p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated
p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated
p0312[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.
p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT
p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill
p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated
p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max
p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max
p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
p0326[0...n] Motor stall torque correction factor / Mot M_stall_corr
p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt
p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance
p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current
r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated
r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act
r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos phi rated
r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act
p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Mot cool type
r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated
p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert
p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
r0343[0...n] Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident
p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated
p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation
p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat
p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance cold / Mot R_stator cold
p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / R_cable
p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold
p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.
p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance d axis / Mot L_stator d
p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / Mot L_rot leak
p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance / Mot Lh
p0362[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1
p0363[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2
p0364[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3
p0365[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4
p0366[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1
p0367[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2
p0368[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3
p0369[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 537
2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance cold / Mot R_stator cold

r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable
r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated
r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold
r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot rated R_rotor
r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance total / Mot L_leak total
r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance d axis / Mot L_stator d
r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Mot L_magn transf
r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak
r0394[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act
r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act
p0530[0...n] Bearing version selection / Bearing vers sel
p0531[0...n] Bearing code number selection / Bearing codeNo sel
p0532[0...n] Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max
p0541[0...n] Load gearbox code number / Load grbx CodeNo
p0542[0...n] Load gearbox maximum speed / Load grbx n_max
p0543[0...n] Load gearbox maximum torque / Load grbx M_max
p0544[0...n] Load gearbox overall ratio (absolute value) numerator / Load grbx ratio N
p0545[0...n] Load gearbox overall ratio (absolute value) denominator / Load grbx ratio D
p0546[0...n] Load gearbox output direction of rotation inversion / Load grbx outp inv
p0550[0...n] Brake type / Brake type
p0551[0...n] Brake code number / Brake code no.
p0552[0...n] Maximum brake speed / Brake n_max
p0553[0...n] Brake holding torque / Brake M_hold
p0554[0...n] Brake moment of inertia / Brake J
p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type
p0604[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor alarm threshold / Mod 2/sens A_thr
p0605[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value / Mod1/2/sens T_thr
p0606[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor timer / Mod 2/sens timer
p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time
p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response
p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T
p0612[0...n] Mot_temp_mod activation / Mot_temp_mod act
p0613[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 ambient temperature / Mod 1/3 amb_temp
p0614[0...n] Thermal resistance adaptation reduction factor / Therm R_adapt red
p0615[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) fault threshold / I2t F thresh
p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R
p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart
p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after switching on again / t_excit Rs_id
p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature during commissioning / Mot T_ambient
p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core
p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator
p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor / Mot T_over rotor
r0630[0...n] Mot_temp_mod ambient temperature / Mod T_ambient
r0631[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator iron temperature / Mod T_stator
r0632[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature / Mod T_winding
r0633[0...n] Mot_temp_mod rotor temperature / Mod rotor temp
p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT
p0635[0...n] Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT
p0636[0...n] Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT
p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT
p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act
p0651[0...n] Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

538 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.3 Parameters for data sets

p0826[0...n] Motor changeover motor number / Mot_chng mot No.

p1231[0...n] DC braking configuration / DCBRK config
p1232[0...n] DC braking braking current / DCBRK I_brake
p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time
p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start
p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
p1980[0...n] PolID technique / PolID technique
p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and PollD scaling / Com_ang_offs scal
r3926[0...n] Voltage generation alternating base voltage amplitude / U_gen altern base
p5350[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 boost factor at standstill / Standst boost_fact
p5390[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 alarm threshold / A thresh
p5391[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 fault threshold / F thresh
r5398[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 3 alarm threshold image p5390 / A thr image p5390
r5399[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 3 fault threshold image p5391 / F thr image p5391

2.3.4 Power unit Data Sets (PDS)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: PDS
p0124[0...n] CU detection via LED / CU detection LED
r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act
p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no
r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type
r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property

2.3.5 Encoder Data Sets (EDS)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: EDS
p0422[0...n] Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 539
2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

2.4.1 Binector inputs (BI)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: BI
p0043 BI: Enable energy usage display / Enab energy usage
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU S_src DO 1
p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU S_src DO 2
p0782[0...1] BI: CU analog outputs invert signal source / CU AO inv S_src
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1
p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)
p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1
p0845[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_src 2
p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1
p0849[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_src 2
p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable
p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake
p0856[0...n] BI: Enable speed controller / n_ctrl enable
p0858[0...n] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake
p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback signal / Line contact feedb
p0897 BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel
p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0
p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1
p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2
p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv
p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
p1108[0...n] BI: Total setpoint selection / Total setp sel
p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir
p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir
p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG
p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable
p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable
p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v
p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src
p1230[0...n] BI: DC braking activation / DC brake act
p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop
p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable
p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

540 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

p1502[0...n] BI: Freeze moment of inertia estimator / J_estim freeze

p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1
p2081[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2
p2082[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3
p2083[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4
p2084[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5
p2103[0...n] BI: 1st acknowledge faults / 1st acknowledge
p2104[0...n] BI: 2nd acknowledge faults / 2nd acknowledge
p2105[0...n] BI: 3rd acknowledge faults / 3rd acknowledge
p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2
p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2
p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
p2148[0...n] BI: RFG active / RFG active
p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable
p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower
p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ hold
p2290[0...n] BI: Technology controller limiting enable / Tec_ctrl lim enab
p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable / Ext fault 3 enab
p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
p3232[0...n] BI: Load monitoring failure detection / Load_moni fail_det
p3330[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 / 2/3 wire cmd 1
p3331[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 / 2/3 wire cmd 2
p3332[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 / 2/3 wire cmd 3
p5614 BI: Pe set switching-on inhibited signal source / Pe sw on_inh s_src
p8542[0...15] BI: Active STW1 in the BOP/IOP manual mode / STW1 act OP
p8558 BI: Select IOP manual mode / Sel IOP man mode
p9705 BI: SI Motion: Test stop signal source / SI Mtn test stop
p20030[0...3] BI: AND 0 inputs / AND 0 inputs
p20034[0...3] BI: AND 1 inputs / AND 1 inputs
p20038[0...3] BI: AND 2 inputs / AND 2 inputs
p20042[0...3] BI: AND 3 inputs / AND 3 inputs
p20046[0...3] BI: OR 0 inputs / OR 0 inputs
p20050[0...3] BI: OR 1 inputs / OR 1 inputs
p20054[0...3] BI: OR 2 inputs / OR 2 inputs
p20058[0...3] BI: OR 3 inputs / OR 3 inputs
p20062[0...3] BI: XOR 0 inputs / XOR 0 inputs
p20066[0...3] BI: XOR 1 inputs / XOR 1 inputs
p20070[0...3] BI: XOR 2 inputs / XOR 2 inputs
p20074[0...3] BI: XOR 3 inputs / XOR 3 inputs
p20078 BI: NOT 0 input I / NOT 0 input I
p20082 BI: NOT 1 input I / NOT 1 input I
p20086 BI: NOT 2 input I / NOT 2 input I
p20090 BI: NOT 3 input I / NOT 3 input I
p20138 BI: MFP 0 input pulse I / MFP 0 inp_pulse I
p20143 BI: MFP 1 input pulse I / MFP 1 inp_pulse I
p20148 BI: PCL 0 input pulse I / PCL 0 inp_pulse I

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 541
2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

p20153 BI: PCL 1 input pulse I / PCL 1 inp_pulse I

p20158 BI: PDE 0 input pulse I / PDE 0 inp_pulse I
p20163 BI: PDE 1 input pulse I / PDE 1 inp_pulse I
p20168 BI: PDF 0 input pulse I / PDF 0 inp_pulse I
p20173 BI: PDF 1 input pulse I / PDF 1 inp_pulse I
p20178[0...1] BI: PST 0 inputs / PST 0 inputs
p20183[0...1] BI: PST 1 inputs / PST 1 inputs
p20188[0...1] BI: RSR 0 inputs / RSR 0 inputs
p20193[0...1] BI: RSR 1 inputs / RSR 1 inputs
p20198[0...3] BI: DFR 0 inputs / DFR 0 inputs
p20203[0...3] BI: DFR 1 inputs / DFR 1 inputs
p20208[0...1] BI: BSW 0 inputs / BSW 0 inputs
p20209 BI: BSW 0 switch setting I / BSW 0 sw_setting
p20213[0...1] BI: BSW 1 inputs / BSW 1 inputs
p20214 BI: BSW 1 switch setting I / BSW 1 sw_setting
p20219 BI: NSW 0 switch setting I / NSW 0 sw_setting
p20224 BI: NSW 1 switch setting I / NSW 1 sw_setting
p20245 BI: PT1 0 accept setting value S / PT1 0 acc set val
p20251 BI: PT1 1 accept setting value S / PT1 1 acc set val
p20260 BI: INT 0 accept setting value S / INT 0 acc set val
p20300 BI: NOT 4 input I / NOT 4 input I
p20304 BI: NOT 5 input I / NOT 5 input I
p20324[0...1] BI: RSR 2 inputs / RSR 2 inputs
p20329[0...3] BI: DFR 2 inputs / DFR 2 inputs
p20334 BI: PDE 2 input pulse I / PDE 2 inp_pulse I
p20339 BI: PDE 3 input pulse I / PDE 3 inp_pulse I
p20344 BI: PDF 2 input pulse I / PDF 2 inp_pulse I
p20349 BI: PDF 3 input pulse I / PDF 3 inp_pulse I
p20354 BI: MFP 2 input pulse I / MFP 2 inp_pulse I
p20359 BI: MFP 3 input pulse I / MFP 3 inp_pulse I

2.4.2 Connector inputs (CI)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: CI
p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit variable / Curr lim var
p0771[0...1] CI: CU analog outputs signal source / CU AO S_src
p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val
p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
p1075[0...n] CI: Suppl setp / Suppl setp
p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal
p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1098[0...n] CI: Skip speed scaling / n_skip scal
p1106[0...n] CI: Minimum speed signal source / n_min s_src
p1109[0...n] CI: Total setpoint / Total setp
p1138[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-up time scaling / RFG t_RU scal
p1139[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-down time scaling / RFG t_RD scal
p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1
p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

542 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

p1330[0...n] CI: U/f control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ.

p1352[0...n] CI: Motor holding brake starting frequency signal source / Brake f_start
p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctr adapt_sig Kp
p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal
p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB
p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal
p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp
p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set
p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1
p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal
p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
p2016[0...3] CI: Comm IF USS PZD send word / Comm USS send word
p2051[0...16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word
p2061[0...15] CI: PROFIBUS PZD send double word / PZD send DW
p2099[0...1] CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src
p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg
p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1
p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2
p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val
p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctr prectr_sig
p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrMaxLimS_src
p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs
p3230[0...n] CI: Load monitoring speed actual value / Load monit n_act
p8543 CI: Active speed setpoint in the BOP/IOP manual mode / N_act act OP
p20094[0...3] CI: ADD 0 inputs / ADD 0 inputs
p20098[0...3] CI: ADD 1 inputs / ADD 1 inputs
p20102[0...1] CI: SUB 0 inputs / SUB 0 inputs
p20106[0...1] CI: SUB 1 inputs / SUB 1 inputs
p20110[0...3] CI: MUL 0 inputs / MUL 0 inputs
p20114[0...3] CI: MUL 1 inputs / MUL 1 inputs
p20118[0...1] CI: DIV 0 inputs / DIV 0 inputs
p20123[0...1] CI: DIV 1 inputs / DIV 1 inputs
p20128 CI: AVA 0 input X / AVA 0 input X
p20133 CI: AVA 1 input X / AVA 1 input X
p20218[0...1] CI: NSW 0 inputs / NSW 0 inputs
p20223[0...1] CI: NSW 1 inputs / NSW 1 inputs
p20228 CI: LIM 0 input X / LIM 0 input X
p20236 CI: LIM 1 input X / LIM 1 input X
p20244[0...1] CI: PT1 0 inputs / PT1 0 inputs
p20250[0...1] CI: PT1 1 inputs / PT1 1 inputs
p20256[0...1] CI: INT 0 inputs / INT 0 inputs
p20266 CI: LVM 0 input X / LVM 0 input X
p20275 CI: LVM 1 input X / LVM 1 input X
p20284 CI: DIF 0 input X / DIF 0 input X
p20308[0...3] CI: ADD 2 inputs / ADD 2 inputs
p20312[0...1] CI: NCM 0 inputs / NCM 0 inputs

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 543
2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

p20318[0...1] CI: NCM 1 inputs / NCM 1 inputs

p20372 CI: PLI 0 input X / PLI 0 input X
p20378 CI: PLI 1 input X / PLI 1 input X

2.4.3 Binector outputs (BO)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: BO
r0751.0...9 BO: CU analog inputs status word / CU AI status word
r0785.0...1 BO: CU analog outputs status word / CU AO ZSW
r0807.0 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active
r1025.0 BO: Fixed speed setpoint status / n_setp_fix status
r2043.0...2 BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state
r2090.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD1 receive bit-serial / PZD1 recv bitw
r2091.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial / PZD2 recv bitw
r2092.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial / PZD3 recv bitw
r2093.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial / PZD4 recv bitw
r2094.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
r2095.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
r8540.0...15 BO: STW1 from BOP/IOP in the manual mode / STW1 OP
r9935.0 BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay
r20031 BO: AND 0 output Q / AND 0 output Q
r20035 BO: AND 1 output Q / AND 1 output Q
r20039 BO: AND 2 output Q / AND 2 output Q
r20043 BO: AND 3 output Q / AND 3 output Q
r20047 BO: OR 0 output Q / OR 0 output Q
r20051 BO: OR 1 output Q / OR 1 output Q
r20055 BO: OR 2 output Q / OR 2 output Q
r20059 BO: OR 3 output Q / OR 3 output Q
r20063 BO: XOR 0 output Q / XOR 0 output Q
r20067 BO: XOR 1 output Q / XOR 1 output Q
r20071 BO: XOR 2 output Q / XOR 2 output Q
r20075 BO: XOR 3 output Q / XOR 3 output Q
r20079 BO: NOT 0 inverted output / NOT 0 inv output
r20083 BO: NOT 1 inverted output / NOT 1 inv output
r20087 BO: NOT 2 inverted output / NOT 2 inv output
r20091 BO: NOT 3 inverted output / NOT 3 inv output
r20120 BO: DIV 0 divisor is zero QF / DIV 0 divisor=0 QF
r20125 BO: DIV 1 divisor is zero QF / DIV 1 divisor=0 QF
r20130 BO: AVA 0 input negative SN / AVA 0 input neg SN
r20135 BO: AVA 1 input negative SN / AVA 1 input neg SN
r20140 BO: MFP 0 output Q / MFP 0 output Q
r20145 BO: MFP 1 output Q / MFP 1 output Q
r20150 BO: PCL 0 output Q / PCL 0 output Q
r20155 BO: PCL 1 output Q / PCL 1 output Q
r20160 BO: PDE 0 output Q / PDE 0 output Q
r20165 BO: PDE 1 output Q / PDE 1 output Q
r20170 BO: PDF 0 output Q / PDF 0 output Q
r20175 BO: PDF 1 output Q / PDF 1 output Q
r20180 BO: PST 0 output Q / PST 0 output Q
r20185 BO: PST 1 output Q / PST 1 output Q
r20189 BO: RSR 0 output Q / RSR 0 output Q
r20190 BO: RSR 0 inverted output QN / RSR 0 inv outp QN
r20194 BO: RSR 1 output Q / RSR 1 output Q
r20195 BO: RSR 1 inverted output QN / RSR 1 inv outp QN

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

544 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

r20199 BO: DFR 0 output Q / DFR 0 output Q

r20200 BO: DFR 0 inverted output QN / DFR 0 inv outp QN
r20204 BO: DFR 1 output Q / DFR 1 output Q
r20205 BO: DFR 1 inverted output QN / DFR 1 inv outp QN
r20210 BO: BSW 0 output Q / BSW 0 output Q
r20215 BO: BSW 1 output Q / BSW 1 output Q
r20232 BO: LIM 0 input quantity at the upper limit QU / LIM 0 QU
r20233 BO: LIM 0 input quantity at the lower limit QL / LIM 0 QL
r20240 BO: LIM 1 input quantity at the upper limit QU / LIM 1 QU
r20241 BO: LIM 1 input quantity at the lower limit QL / LIM 1 QL
r20262 BO: INT 0 integrator at the upper limit QU / INT 0 QU
r20263 BO: INT 0 integrator at the lower limit QL / INT 0 QL
r20270 BO: LVM 0 input quantity above interval QU / LVM 0 X above QU
r20271 BO: LVM 0 input quantity within interval QM / LVM 0 X within QM
r20272 BO: LVM 0 input quantity below interval QL / LVM 0 X below QL
r20279 BO: LVM 1 input quantity above interval QU / LVM 1 X above QU
r20280 BO: LVM 1 input quantity within interval QM / LVM 1 X within QM
r20281 BO: LVM 1 input quantity below interval QL / LVM 1 X below QL
r20301 BO: NOT 4 inverted output / NOT 4 inv output
r20305 BO: NOT 5 inverted output / NOT 5 inv output
r20313 BO: NCM 0 output QU / NCM 0 output QU
r20314 BO: NCM 0 output QE / NCM 0 output QE
r20315 BO: NCM 0 output QL / NCM 0 output QL
r20319 BO: NCM 1 output QU / NCM 1 output QU
r20320 BO: NCM 1 output QE / NCM 1 output QE
r20321 BO: NCM 1 output QL / NCM 1 output QL
r20325 BO: RSR 2 output Q / RSR 2 output Q
r20326 BO: RSR 2 inverted output QN / RSR 2 inv outp QN
r20330 BO: DFR 2 output Q / DFR 2 output Q
r20331 BO: DFR 2 inverted output QN / DFR 2 inv outp QN
r20336 BO: PDE 2 output Q / PDE 2 output Q
r20341 BO: PDE 3 output Q / PDE 3 output Q
r20346 BO: PDF 2 output Q / PDF 2 output Q
r20351 BO: PDF 3 output Q / PDF 3 output Q
r20356 BO: MFP 2 output Q / MFP 2 output Q
r20361 BO: MFP 3 output Q / MFP 3 output Q

2.4.4 Connector outputs (CO)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: CO
r0021 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth
r0025 CO: Output voltage smoothed / U_outp smooth
r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth
r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth
r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth
r0034 CO: Motor utilization thermal / Mot_util therm
r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Mot temp
r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t
r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures
r0039[0...2] CO: Energy display / Energy displ
r0042[0...2] CO: Process energy display / Proc energy disp
r0060 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter
r0063[0...2] CO: Speed actual value / n_act

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 545
2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl sys dev

r0066 CO: Output frequency / f_outp
r0067 CO: Output current maximum / I_outp max
r0068[0...1] CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
r0069[0...8] CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act val
r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val
r0072 CO: Output voltage / U_output
r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Mod_depth
r0075 CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set
r0076 CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act
r0077 CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set
r0078 CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act
r0079 CO: Torque setpoint / M_set
r0080[0...1] CO: Torque actual value / M_act
r0081 CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization
r0082[0...2] CO: Active power actual value / P_act
r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp
r0084[0...1] CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val
r0087 CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act
r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle
r0289 CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max
r0586 CO: Measuring probe speed actual value / MT n_act
r0587 CO: Measuring probe measuring time measured / MT t_meas measured
r0588 CO: Measuring probe pulse counter / MT pulse counter
r0752[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs input voltage/current actual / CU AI U/I_inp act
r0755[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs actual value in percent / CU AI value in %
p0791[0...1] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO
r0944 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change
p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1
p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2
p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3
p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4
p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5
p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6
p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7
p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8
p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9
p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10
p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11
p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12
p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13
p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14
p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15
r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff
r1045 CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG
r1050 CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator / Mop setp after RFG
r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff
r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff
p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff
p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
r1087 CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff
r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set aft min_lim
r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

546 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp
r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator acceleration / RFG acceleration
r1150 CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp
r1169 CO: Speed controller speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2
r1170 CO: Speed controller setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum
r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output
r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl output
r1337 CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val
r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp
r1348 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value / U/f Eco fac act v
p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start
r1438 CO: Speed controller speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set
r1445 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth
r1454 CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn
r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctr Kp eff
r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_outp
r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction
r1493 CO: Moment of inertia total, scaled / M_inert tot scal
r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl
r1516 CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel
r1518[0...1] CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
r1526 CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs
r1527 CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs
r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff
r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff
r1547[0...1] CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl
r1548[0...1] CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall
p1563[0...n] CO: Mom. of inertia estimator load torque direction of rotation pos. / J_est M pos
p1564[0...n] CO: Mom. of inertia estimator load torque direction of rotation neg. / J_est M neg
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp
r1593[0...1] CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp
r1597 CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl outp
r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total
r1718 CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp
r1723 CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp
r1732[0...1] CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct U set
r1733[0...1] CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad U set
r1770 CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp
r1771 CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn
r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency
r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act
r2050[0...11] CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive word / PZD recv word
r2060[0...10] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / PZD recv DW
r2089[0...4] CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send
r2120 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
r2121 CO: Counter alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed
r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Act fault code
r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code
r2169 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message
p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val1
p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 547
2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3

p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4
p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5
p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6
p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7
p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8
p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9
p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10
p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11
p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12
p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13
p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14
p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15
r2224 CO: Technology controller fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff
r2245 CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG / Tec_ctr mop befRFG
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG / Tec_ctr mop aftRFG
r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator / Tec_ctr set aftRFG
r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt
r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt
r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal
r2273 CO: Technology controller system deviation / Tec_ctrl sys_dev
p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_lim
p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim
r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig
p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
r2344 CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) / Tec_ctrl n_setp_sm
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]
p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]
r2902[0...14] CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]
p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]
r3131 CO: Actual fault value / Act fault val
r3132 CO: Actual component number / Comp_no act
r3841 CO: Friction characteristic output / Frict outp
r8541 CO: Speed setpoint from BOP/IOP in the manual mode / N_set OP
r9712 CO: SI Motion diagnostics pos. act. val. motor side (processor 1) / SI Mtn s_act motP1
r9713[0...5] CO: SI Motion diagnostics position actual value load side / SI Mtn s_act load
r9714[0...2] CO: SI Motion diagnostics velocity (processor 1) / SI Mtn diag v P1
r9733[0...2] CO: SI Motion setpoint speed limit effective / SI Mtn setp_lim
r20095 CO: ADD 0 output Y / ADD 0 output Y
r20099 CO: ADD 1 output Y / ADD 1 output Y
r20103 CO: SUB 0 difference Y / SUB 0 difference Y
r20107 CO: SUB 1 difference Y / SUB 1 difference Y
r20111 CO: MUL 0 product Y / MUL 0 product Y
r20115 CO: MUL 1 product Y / MUL 1 product Y
r20119[0...2] CO: DIV 0 quotient / DIV 0 quotient
r20124[0...2] CO: DIV 1 quotient / DIV 1 quotient
r20129 CO: AVA 0 output Y / AVA 0 output Y
r20134 CO: AVA 1 output Y / AVA 1 output Y
r20220 CO: NSW 0 output Y / NSW 0 output Y
r20225 CO: NSW 1 output Y / NSW 1 output Y
r20231 CO: LIM 0 output Y / LIM 0 output Y
r20239 CO: LIM 1 output Y / LIM 1 output Y
r20247 CO: PT1 0 output Y / PT1 0 output Y
r20253 CO: PT1 1 output Y / PT1 1 output Y
r20261 CO: INT 0 output Y / INT 0 output Y

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

548 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

r20286 CO: DIF 0 output Y / DIF 0 output Y

r20309 CO: ADD 2 output Y / ADD 2 output Y
r20373 CO: PLI 0 output Y / PLI 0 output Y
r20379 CO: PLI 1 output Y / PLI 1 output Y

2.4.5 Connector/binector outputs (CO/BO)

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: CO/BO
r0046.0...31 CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig
r0050.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective
r0051.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective
r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Status word 1 / ZSW 1
r0053.0...11 CO/BO: Status word 2 / ZSW 2
r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Control word 1 / STW 1
r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Supplementary control word / Suppl STW
r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056.0...13 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0722.0...11 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status / CU DI status
r0722.0...12 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status / CU DI status
r0723.0...11 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status inverted / CU DI status inv
r0723.0...12 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status inverted / CU DI status inv
r0835.2...8 CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW
r0836.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected
r0837.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected
r0863.0...1 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW
r0898.0...14 CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl
r0899.0...13 CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl
r1099.0 CO/BO: Skip band status word / Skip band ZSW
r1198.0...15 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan
r1199.0...8 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW
r1204.0...13 CO/BO: Flying restart U/f control status / FlyRest Uf st
r1205.0...15 CO/BO: Flying restart vector control status / FlyRest vector st
r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart status / AR status
r1239.8...13 CO/BO: DC braking status word / DCBRK ZSW
r1406.4...15 CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl
r1407.0...27 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl
r1408.0...14 CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl
r1838.0...15 CO/BO: Gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1
r2129.0...15 CO/BO: Faults/alarms trigger word / F/A trigger word
r2135.12...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2
r2138.7...15 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm
r2139.0...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 / ZSW fault/alarm 1
r2197.0...13 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1
r2198.0...13 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2
r2199.0...11 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 / ZSW monitor 3
r2225.0 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
r2349.0...13 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl status
r3113.0...15 CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar
r3333.0...3 CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word / 2/3 wire STW
r3840.0...8 CO/BO: Friction characteristic status word / Friction ZSW
r3859.0 CO/BO: Compound braking/DC quantity control status word / Comp-br/DC_ctr ZSW
r5389.0...8 CO/BO: Mot_temp status word faults/alarms / Mot_temp ZSW F/A
r5613.0...1 CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive / Pe save act/inact
r7760.0...12 CO/BO: Write protection/know-how protection status / Wr_prot/KHP stat

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 549
2 Parameters
2.4 BICO parameters (connectors/binectors)

r9720.0...13 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ STW
r9722.0...13 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 1) / SI Mtn int stat P1
r9722.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 1) / SI Mtn int stat P1
r9723.0...16 CO/BO: SI Motion diagnostic signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ diag
r9734.0...14 CO/BO: SI Safety Info Channel status word S_ZSW1B / SIC S_ZSW1B
r9742.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 2) / SI Mtn int stat P2
r9772.0...21 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1) / SI status P1
r9772.0...25 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1) / SI status P1
r9773.0...31 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1 + processor 2) / SI status P1+P2
r9872.0...21 CO/BO: SI status (processor 2) / SI Status P2
r9872.0...25 CO/BO: SI status (processor 2) / SI Status P2
r10051.0...2 CO/BO: SI Motion digital inputs status (processor 1) / SI DI status P1
r10151.0...2 CO/BO: SI Motion digital inputs status (processor 2) / SI DI status P2

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

550 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.5 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection

2.5 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection

2.5.1 Parameters with "WRITE_NO_LOCK"

The following list contains the parameters with the "WRITE_NO_LOCK" attribute.
These parameters are not affected by the write protection.
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: WRITE_NO_LOCK
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection via LED / CU detection LED
p0791[0...1] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Save par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Faults acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8805 Identification and maintenance 4 configuration / I&M 4 config
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch

2.5.2 Parameters with "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK"

The following list contains the parameters with the "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK" attribute.
These parameters are not affected by the know-how protection.
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection via LED / CU detection LED
p0791[0...1] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Save par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Faults acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8805 Identification and maintenance 4 configuration / I&M 4 config
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 551
2 Parameters
2.5 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection

p8980 Ethernet/IP profile / Eth/IP profile

p8981 Ethernet/IP ODVA STOP mode / Eth/IP ODVA STOP
p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling / Eth/IP ODVA n scal
p8983 Ethernet/IP ODVA torque scaling / Eth/IP ODVA M scal
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch

2.5.3 Parameters with "KHP_ACTIVE_READ"

The following list contains the parameters with the "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" attribute.
These parameters can also be read with activated know-how protection.
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng, Type: KHP_ACTIVE_READ
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds
p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select
p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU S_src DO 1
p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU S_src DO 2
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit
p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection / PZD telegr_sel
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref
p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage
p2002 Reference current / I_ref
p2003 Reference torque / M_ref
p2005 Reference angle / Reference angle
p2006 Reference temp / Ref temp
p2007 Reference acceleration / a_ref
p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol
p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PZD telegr ext
p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7764
p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list
p9601 SI enable functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1
p9810 SI PROFIsafe address (processor 2) / SI PROFIsafe P2

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

552 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 2 Parameters
2.6 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)

2.6 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)

The parameters required for the quick commissioning (p0010=1) are shown in the following
table:
.
Table 2-7 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)

Par. no. Name Access level Can be

changed

p0010 Drive, commissioning parameter filter 1 C(1)T

p0015 Macro drive unit 1 C,C(1)
p0096 Application class 1 C(1)
p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds 1 C(1)
p0205 Power unit application 1 C(1,2)
p0230 Drive filter type, motor side 1 C(1,2)
p0300 Motor type selection 2 C(1,3)
p0301 Motor code number selection 2 C(1,3)
p0304 Rated motor voltage 1 C(1,3)
p0305 Rated motor current 1 C(1,3)
p0306 Number of motors connected in parallel 1 C(1,3)
p0307 Rated motor power 1 C(1,3)
p0308 Rated motor power factor 1 C(1,3)
p0309 Rated motor efficiency 1 C(1,3)
p0310 Rated motor frequency 1 C(1,3)
p0311 Rated motor speed 1 C(1,3)
p0314 Motor pole pair number 3 C(1,3)
p0316 Motor torque constant 3 C(1,3)UT
p0322 Maximum motor speed 1 C(1,3)
p0323 Maximum motor current 1 C(1,3)
p0335 Motor cooling type 2 C(1,3)T
p0500 Technology application 4 PM230 C(1,5)T
p0500 Technology application 2 PM240 C(1,5)T
PM250
PM260, PM330
p0640 Current limit 2 C(1,3)UT
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection 1 C(1)T
p0970 Reset drive parameters 1 C(1,30)
p1080 Minimum speed 1 C(1)T
p1082 Maximum rotation speed 1 C(1)T
p1120 Ramp-function generator ramp-up time 1 C(1)UT
p1121 Ramp-function generator ramp-down time 1 C(1)UT
p1135 OFF3 ramp-down time 2 C(1)UT

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 553
2 Parameters
2.6 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)

Table 2-7 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), continued

Par. no. Name Access level Can be

changed

p1300 Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode 2 C(1)T

p1500 Torque setpoint selection 2 C(1)T
p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement 2 C(1)T
p1905 Parameter tuning selection 1 C(1)T
p2196 Torque utilization scaling 1 C(1,3)UT
p3900 Completion of quick commissioning 1 C(1)

If p0010 = 1 is selected, p0003 (user access level) can be used to select the parameters that
are to be accessed.
At the end of the quick commissioning, set p3900 = 1 to perform the required motor
calculations and reset all other parameters (not included in p0010 = 1) to their default settings.

Note
This only applies for the quick commissioning.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

554 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
Function diagrams 3
Content

3.1 Table of contents 556

3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams 562

3.3 Input/output terminals 567

3.4 PROFIenergy 582

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP 585

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus) 601

3.7 Internal control/status words 608

3.8 Brake control 627

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions 629

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions 636

3.11 Safety Integrated PROFIsafe 646

3.12 Setpoint channel 649

3.13 Vector control 660

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1) 688

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2) 694

3.16 Technology functions 711

3.17 Free function blocks 714

3.18 Technology controller 735

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions 740

3.20 Diagnostics 754

3.21 Data sets 760

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 555
3 Function diagrams
3.1 Table of contents

3.1 Table of contents

3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

1020 – Explanation of the symbols (part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
1021 – Explanation of the symbols (part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
1022 – Explanation of the symbols (part 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
1030 – Handling BICO technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

3.3 Input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

2201 – Connection overview G120 CU240B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
2202 – Connection overview G120 CU240E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
2220 – CU240B-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
2221 – CU240E-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
2240 – CU240B-2: Digital output (DO 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
2242 – CU240E-2: Digital outputs (DO 0 ... DO 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
2250 – CU240B-2: Analog input 0 (AI 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
2251 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs 0 ... 1 (AI 0 ... AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
2255 – CU240B-2: Analog inputs as digital inputs (DI 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
2256 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs as digital inputs (DI 11 ... DI 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
2260 – CU240B-2: Analog output 0 (AO 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
2261 – CU240E-2: Analog outputs 0 ... 1 (AO 0 ... AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
2272 – Two-wire control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
2273 – Three-wire control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

3.4 PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

2381 – Control commands and interrogation commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
2382 – States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

2401 – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
2410 – PROFIdrive, EtherNet/IP - addresses and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
2420 – PROFIdrive - telegrams and process data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
2440 – PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
2441 – PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
2442 – PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
2446 – PROFIdrive - STW3 control word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
2450 – PROFIdrive - PZD send signals interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
2451 – PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

556 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 3 Function diagrams
3.1 Table of contents

2452 – PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

2456 – PROFIdrive - ZSW3 status word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
2468 – PROFIdrive - receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
2470 – PROFIdrive - send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
2472 – PROFIdrive - status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
2473 – EtherNet/IP - control word/status word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

9310 – Configuration, addresses and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
9342 – STW1 control word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
9352 – ZSW1 status word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
9360 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
9370 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
9372 – Status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

3.7 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

2501 – Control word sequence control (r0898) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
2503 – Status word sequence control (r0899) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
2505 – Control word, setpoint channel (r1198) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
2510 – Status word 1 (r0052) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
2511 – Status word 2 (r0053) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
2512 – Control word 1 (r0054) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
2513 – Supplementary control word (r0055) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
2520 – Control word, speed controller (r1406) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
2522 – Status word, speed controller (r1407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
2526 – Status word, closed-loop control (r0056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
2530 – Status word, current control (r1408) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
2534 – Status word monitoring functions 1 (r2197) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
2536 – Status word monitoring functions 2 (r2198) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
2537 – Status word monitoring functions 3 (r2199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms (r2138) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 (r2139 and r2135) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
2610 – Sequence control - sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
2634 – Sequence control - missing enable signals, line contactor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

3.8 Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

2701 – Basic brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 557
3 Function diagrams
3.1 Table of contents

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

2800 – Parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
2802 – Monitoring functions and faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
2804 – Status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
2810 – STO (Safe Torque Off) (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
2812 – STO (Safe Torque Off) (Part 2) - PM240-2 FS D-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
2813 – F-DI (Fail-safe Digital Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

2818 – Parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
2819 – SS1 (Safe Stop 1), internal STOP A, B, F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
2820 – SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
2823 – SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
2824 – SDI (Safe Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
2840 – Control and status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
2850 – Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
2855 – Extended Functions via F-DI (p9601.2 = 1 and p9601.3 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
2858 – Extended Functions via PROFIsafe (9601.2 = 1 and 9601.3 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

3.11 Safety Integrated PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

2915 – Standard telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
2917 – Manufacturer-specific telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

3.12 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

3001 – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
3010 – Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
3011 – Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
3020 – Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
3040 – Direction limitation and direction reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
3050 – Skip frequency bands and speed limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
3070 – Extended ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

558 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 3 Function diagrams
3.1 Table of contents

3.13 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

6019 – Application classes (p0096), overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
6020 – Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
6030 – Speed setpoint, droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
6031 – Precontrol balancing, acceleration model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
6035 – Moment of inertia estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
6040 – Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
6060 – Torque setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230/PM240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
6300 – U/f control, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
6301 – U/f characteristic and voltage boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (PM230/PM240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
6490 – Speed control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
6491 – Flux control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
6630 – Upper/lower torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
6640 – Current/power/torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
6700 – Current control, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
6710 – Current setpoint filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
6714 – Iq and Id controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
6721 – Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
6724 – Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
6730 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
6731 – Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
6799 – Display signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

6850 – U/f control, overview (p0096 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
6851 – U/f characteristic and voltage boost (p0096 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
6853 – Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f) (p0096 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
6854 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (p0096 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
6856 – Interface to the Power Module (p0096 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 559
3 Function diagrams
3.1 Table of contents

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

6820 – Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
6821 – Current control, overview (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
6822 – Speed setpoint, precontrol symmetrization, acceleration model (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
6823 – Moment of inertia estimator (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
6824 – Speed controller with Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
6826 – Torque setpoint (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
6827 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
6828 – Current/power/torque limits (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
6832 – Current setpoint filter (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
6833 – Iq and Id controller (p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
6836 – Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
6837 – Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
6838 – Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . 707
6839 – Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
6841 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
6842 – Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

3.16 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

7010 – Friction characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
7017 – DC braking (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

3.17 Free function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

7200 – Sampling times of the runtime groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
7210 – AND 0 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
7212 – OR 0 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
7214 – XOR 0 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
7216 – NOT 0 ... 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
7220 – ADD 0 ... 2, SUB 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
7222 – MUL 0 ... 1, DIV 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
7224 – AVA 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
7225 – NCM 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
7226 – PLI 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
7230 – MFP 0 ... 3, PCL 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
7232 – PDE 0 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
7233 – PDF 0 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
7234 – PST 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
7240 – RSR 0 ... 2, DFR 0 ... 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

560 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 3 Function diagrams
3.1 Table of contents

7250 – BSW 0 ... 1, NSW 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730

7260 – LIM 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
7262 – PT1 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
7264 – INT 0, DIF 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
7270 – LVM 0 ... 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734

3.18 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

7950 – Fixed value selection binary (p2216 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
7951 – Fixed value selection direct (p2216 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
7954 – Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
7958 – Closed-loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740

8005 – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
8010 – Speed messages 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
8011 – Speed messages 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
8012 – Torque signals, motor blocked/stalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
8013 – Load monitoring (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
8014 – Load monitoring (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
8016 – Thermal monitoring, motor, motor temperature status word, faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
8017 – Motor temperature model 1 (I2t) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
8018 – Motor temperature model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
8019 – Motor temperature model 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
8021 – Thermal monitoring, power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
8022 – Monitoring functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
8023 – Monitoring functions 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

3.20 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

8050 – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
8060 – Fault buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
8065 – Alarm buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
8070 – Faults/alarms trigger word (r2129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
8075 – Faults/alarms configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759

3.21 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760

8560 – Command Data Sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
8565 – Drive Data Sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 561
3 Function diagrams
3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams

3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams

Function diagrams

1020 – Explanation of the symbols (part 1) 563

1021 – Explanation of the symbols (part 2) 564

1022 – Explanation of the symbols (part 3) 565

1030 – Handling BICO technology 566

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

562 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-1 Parameters Connectors Binectors Connectors/binectors

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Parameter name [Unit] Monitoring parameter with Parameter name Connector input CI Parameter name Binector input BI with Parameter name
rxxxx[y..z] unit [Unit] and index range pxxxx[y..z] with index range [y..z] pxxxx[y..z] with index range [y..z] or rxxxx Connector/binector output
1020 – Explanation of the symbols (part 1)

[y..z] or data set [C/D] (Def) (Def.y) data set [C/D] and rxxxx CO/BO
or data set [C/D] factory setting.bit
and factory setting number (Def)
(Def) *)

Parameter name Setting parameter Parameter name [Unit] Parameter name

from ... to [Unit] with min/max value rxxxx[y..z] Connector output CO with rxxxx Binector output BO
pxxxx[C/D] (Def) and unit [Unit] data unit [Unit] and with index
Pre-assigned connectors and binectors
set [C/D] and factory range [y..z]
setting (Def) *) Symbol Meaning

Parameter name Setting parameter with

CI: Connector Input BI: Binector Input min/max value and unit
from ... to [Unit]
CO: Connector Output BO: Binector Output [Unit] data set [D] and
pxxxx[D] (Def)
CO/BO: Connector/Binector Output factory setting (Def)

Data sets Information on parameters, binectors, connectors Cross references between diagrams
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
pxxxx[C] Parameter belongs to the Parameter name Parameter name (up to 18 characters) Signal The function diagrams are sub-divided into
Command Data Set (CDS). path signal paths 1...8 in order to facilitate
[Unit] [dimension unit] orientation.
Text Text = Unique signal designation
pxxxx[D] Parameter belongs to the rxxxx[y] or "r" = monitoring parameter. These parameters are read-only [aaaa.b] aaaa = Signal to target diagram aaa
Drive Data Set (DDS). rxxxx[y...z] or "xxxx" stands for the parameter number
b = Signal to signal path b
rxxxx[y].ww or "[y]" specifies the applicable index, "[y…z]" specifies the index range
rxxxx.ww ".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0…15).
Text Text = Unique signal designation
pxxxx[E] Parameter belongs to the [cccc.d] cccc = Signal from source diagram cccc
Encoder Data Set (EDS). pxxxx[y] or "p" = setting parameter. These parameters can be changed.
d = Signal from signal path d

3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams

pxxxx[y...z] or "xxxx" stands for the parameter number,
pxxxx[y].ww or "[y]" specifies the applicable index, "[y…z]" specifies the index range ".ww" To "function diagram name" [aaaa.b] = binectors.
pxxxx[M] Parameter belongs to the pxxxx.ww specifies the bit number (e.g. 0…15).
Motor Data Set (MDS).
from ... to Value range.
Cross references for control bits
pxxxx[P] Parameter belongs to the (xxxx[y].ww) Parameter number (xxxx) with Index number [y] and bit number .ww.
Symbol Meaning
Power unit Data Set (PDS).
(Def) Factory setting. pxxxx pxxxx= Original parameter of signal
aaaa = Signal from source diagram aaaa
[aaaa.b]
(Def.w) Factory setting with bit number as prefix. b = Signal from signal path b

[aaaa.b] Diagram references for setting parameters that occur a multiple number of times.

3 Function diagrams
[Function diagram number, signal path]

*) For some parameters the value for the factory setting is calculated during commissioning for they are dependent on Power Module and motor (see Section 2.1.1 "Calculated").

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Explanations on the function diagrams fp_1020_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 1020 -
Explanation of the symbols (part 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
563
564

3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-2
Pre-assigned connectors and binectors Symbols for logic functions Symbols for computational and closed-loop control
Fixed percentage values functions
1 NOT element S
Fixed value 1 [%] Logical inversion (negation)
-10000.00 ... 10000.00 [%] Threshold value switch 1/0
p2900 [D] (0.00) AND element
1021 – Explanation of the symbols (part 2)

& x 1 y Outputs at y a logical "1" if x < S.

Fixed value 1 [%] with logical inversion of an input
or -10 000.00 … 10 000.00 [%]
p2900[D] 0
p2900[D] (0.00)
Fixed value 2 [%] 1 OR element S
-10 000.00 … 10 000.00 [%]
p2901[D]
p2901[D] (0.00) Threshold value switch 0/1
Fixed values [%] x1 y Exclusive-OR/XOR x 1 y Outputs at y a logical "1" if x > S.
p2902[0...14] (0.00) r2902[0...14]
=1 y = 1 when x1  x2 is.
x2 0
p2902[0] = +0 % p2902[5] = +100 % p2902[10] = -20 % x1 y Comparator S
p2902[1] = +5 % p2902[6] = +150 % p2902[11] = -50 % = y = 1 when x1 = x2 is.
p2902[2] = +10 % p2902[7] = +200 % p2902[12] = -100 % x2
p2902[3] = +20 % p2902[8] = -5 % p2902[13] = -150 % Threshold value 1/0 with hysteresis
p2902[4] = +50 % p2902[9] = -10 % p2902[14] = -200 % 1 Outputs a logical "1" at y if x < S.
R/S flip-flop x y
If x • S + H then y returns to 0.
S Q
S = setting input
Fixed speed values R = reset input 0
R Q Q = non-inverted output
n_set_fixed 1
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [rpm] Q = inverted output
p1001 [D] (0.000)
H
or n_set_fixed 1 S
-210 000.000 … 210 000.000 [1/min] Symbols for computational and closed-
p1001[D]
p1001[D] (0.000) loop control functions
Threshold value 0/1 with hysteresis
n_set_fixed 15 x 1 y
-210 000.000 … 210 000.000 [1/min] x y Sign reversal Outputs a logical "1" at y if x > S.
p1015[D] -1 If x ” S - H then y returns to 0.
p1015[D] (0.000) y = -x
0
Fixed torque value x y Absolute value generator
y = |x|
H
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fixed value M [Nm]

-100000.00 ... 100000.00 [Nm] x1 LU MLU
p2930 [D] (0.00)
y Divider
x
y= 1 Limiter
Fixed value M [Nm] x2 x2 x y
or -100 000.00 … 100 000.00 [Nm] x is limited to the upper limit LU and the lower limit LL
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p2930[D]
p2930[D] (0.00) x1 and output at y.
y Multiplier The digital signals MLU and MLL have the value "1", if
x2 y = x1 • x2 LL MLL the upper or lower limit is active.

Comparator greater than 0 or

x y
Symbol for monitoring >0 y = 1, if the analog signal x > 0, i.e. is
positive.
Axxxxx Sample & Hold element
Monitoring SET
Monitoring or Differentiator Sample and hold element.
In the bottom right-hand d
Fxxxxx corner of the diagram.
x
dt
y
dx
x S&H y y = x if SET = 1
y= (not retentively saved at POWER OFF)
dt

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Explanations on the function diagrams fp_1021_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 1021 -
Explanation of the symbols (part 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-3
Switch-on delay Switch symbol 2nd-order filter (bandstop/general filter)
pxxxx
x y pxxxx
Simple changeover switch
T 0
x T 0 y The switch position is shown according Natural frequency, numerator Damping, numerator
0 to the factory setting of pxxxx fn_n D_n
(in this case switch position 1).
1022 – Explanation of the symbols (part 3)

pxxxx pzzzz pwwww

1
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without any interruption
during the time T before output y changes to "1".
T T T T
|y| fs
x PT1 element x y
pxxxx f_B
f
y 2nd Order Filter
y
Switch-off delay
pxxxx
x y
0 T t Natural frequency, denominator Damping, denominator
x 0 T y
fn_d D_d
Delay element, first order. pxxxx pyyyy
pxxxx
The digital signal x must have the value "0" without interruption Used as bandstop filter
pxxxx = time constant
during the time T before output y changes to "0". - center frequency fs: fn_n = fs

T T T T PT2 low pass fn_d = fs

- bandwidth f_B: D_n = 0
x Natural frequency, denominator Damping, denominator f_B
fn_d D_d D_d =
pxxxx pyyyy 2 • fs
y
Transfer function when used as general filter
s 2 2 • D_n
+ •s+1
Delay (switch-on and switch-off) 2 fn_n 2 fn_n

3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams

H(s) =
pxxxx pyyyy s 2 2 • D_d
x y + •s+1
|y| 2 fn_d 2 fn_d
T1 T2
x D y
x T1 T2 y

fn
Analog adder can be activated
pxxxx pyyyy f
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without interruption
during time T1 or must have the value "0" during time T2 before
output y changes its signal state. Transfer function x1
T1 T1 T2 T2 y The following applies to I = 1 signal: y = x1 + x2
1
H(s) = x2
2 2 • D_d The following applies to I = 0 signal: y = x1

3 Function diagrams
s
+ •s + 1
x 2 fn_d 2 fn_d
I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Explanations on the function diagrams fp_1022_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 1022 -
Explanation of the symbols (part 3) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
565
566

3.2 Explanations on the function diagrams

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-4
Handling BICO technology

Binector: Binectors are binary signals that can be freely interconnected (BO = Binector Output).
r0723.15
They represent a bit of a "BO:" display parameter (e.g. bit 15 from r0723).
1030 – Handling BICO technology

Connector: r0723 Connectors are "analog signals" that can be freely interconnected (e.g. percentage variables, speeds or torques).
Connectors are also "CO:" display parameters (CO = Connector Output).

Parameterization:
At the signal destination, the required binector or connector is selected using appropriate parameters:
"BI:" parameter for binectors (BI = Binector Input)
or
"CI:" parameter for connectors (CI = Connector Input)

Example:
The main setpoint for the speed controller (CI: p1070) should be received from the output of the motorized potentiometer
(CO: r1050) and the "jog" command (BI: p1055) from Digital Input DI 0 (BO: r0722.0, Terminal 5 (Kl. 5)) on the CU.

Digital Input DI0 1 Control bit 8 r0967.8 Setpoint

channel
p1055[C]
Kl. 5 r0722.0 722.0

[2220] [2501]

Motorized potentiometer
2
Main setpoint
p1070[C] Speed controller
Raise
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r1050 (1050)
(2050[1])
Lower

Jog setpoint 1
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

[3020] [3030]

Parameterizing steps:

1 p1055[0] = 722.0 Terminal 5 (Kl. 5) acts as "Jog bit 0".

2 p1070[0] = 1050 The output of the motorized potentiometer acts as main setpoint for the speed controller.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Explanations on the function diagrams fp_1030_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 1030 -
Handling BICO technology 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
 3 Function diagrams
3.3 Input/output terminals

3.3 Input/output terminals

Function diagrams

2201 – Connection overview G120 CU240B-2 568

2202 – Connection overview G120 CU240E-2 569

2220 – CU240B-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 570

2221 – CU240E-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 5) 571

2240 – CU240B-2: Digital output (DO 0) 572

2242 – CU240E-2: Digital outputs (DO 0 ... DO 2) 573

2250 – CU240B-2: Analog input 0 (AI 0) 574

2251 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs 0 ... 1 (AI 0 ... AI 1) 575

2255 – CU240B-2: Analog inputs as digital inputs (DI 11) 576

2256 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs as digital inputs (DI 11 ... DI 12) 577

2260 – CU240B-2: Analog output 0 (AO 0) 578

2261 – CU240E-2: Analog outputs 0 ... 1 (AO 0 ... AO 1) 579

2272 – Two-wire control 580

2273 – Three-wire control 581

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 567
568

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-5 Simulation for DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 11
CU DI status inv
CU DI simulation CU DI t_debounce
p0795.0...11 p0724 r0723
Kl. 9 +24 V OUT r0721.0...11
1 r0723.0...11
0 CU DI status
Kl. 28 GND T 0
2201 – Connection overview G120 CU240B-2

r0722
Kl. 69 DI COM p0796.0...11 & r0722.0...11
1

Kl. 34 DI COM2 1 = Simulation on

[2220] 4 Digital inputs [2240] Digital output

Kl. 5 DI 0 CU DI status inv CU DO inv
24 V p0748
r0723 CU DI status
1 r0723.0 r0722 CU S_src DO 0 NC Kl. 18
Kl. 6 DI 1
r0722.0 p0730 0
NO Kl. 19
(52.3) DO 0
Kl. 7 DI 2 ... ... 1
1 COM Kl. 20
CU DI status inv
r0723 CU DI status
1 r0723.3 r0722
Kl. 8 DI 3 5V r0722.3

Kl. 1 +10 V OUT

Kl. 2 GND [2250] Analog input [2260] Analog output

AI 0+ CU AI value in % [%] CU AO S_src

Kl. 3 A
r0755 [0] p0771 [0] D Kl. 12
AI 0-
Kl. 4 D (21[0]) AO 0
A
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

[8016] Thermal monitoring, motor

Kl. 14 T1 MOTOR A Mot temp [°C]
r0035 [2]
D
Kl. 15 T2 MOTOR

Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2201_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2201 -
Connection overview G120 CU240B-2 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-6 Simulation for DI 0 ... DI 12, DI 11 … DI 12

CU DI status inv
CU DI simulation CU DI t_debounce
p0795.0...12 p0724 r0723
Kl. 9 +24 V OUT r0721.0...12
1 r0723.0...12
0 CU DI status
Kl. 28 GND T 0
2202 – Connection overview G120 CU240E-2

r0722
Kl. 69 DI COM p0796.0...12 & r0722.0...12
1

Kl. 34 DI COM2 1 = Simulation on

[2221] 6 Digital inputs [2242] 3 Digital outputs

Kl. 5 DI 0 <1> CU DI status inv CU DO inv
24 V p0748
Kl. 6 DI 1 <1> r0723 CU DI status
1 r0723.0 r0722 CU S_src DO 0 NC Kl. 18
r0722.0 p0730 0
Kl. 7 DI 2 <1> NO Kl. 19
(52.3) DO 0
Kl. 8 DI 3 <1> 1
1 COM Kl. 20
... ...
CU DI status inv CU S_src DO 1
Kl. 16 DI 4 <1> r0723 CU DI status p0731 0
1 r0723.5 r0722 NO Kl. 21
Kl. 17 DI 5 <1> (52.7)
5V r0722.5 1
1 DO 1
COM Kl. 22

CU S_src DO 2 NC Kl. 23
p0732 0
Kl. 1 +10 V OUT NO Kl. 24
(52.2) DO 2
Kl. 2 GND [2251] 2 Analog inputs 1
1 COM Kl. 25
AI 0+ A CU AI value in % [%]
Kl. 3
AI 0- r0755[0]
Kl. 4 D
[2261] 2 Analog outputs
AI 1+ A CU AI value in % [%]
Kl. 10 CU AO S_src
AI 1- r0755[1]
Kl. 11 D p0771 [0] D Kl. 12
(21[0]) AO 0
A
CU AO S_src
p0771 [1] D Kl. 26
(27[0]) AO 1
[8016] Thermal monitoring, motor A
Kl. 14 T1 MOTOR A Mot temp [°C]
r0035 [2]

3.3 Input/output terminals

D
Kl. 15 T2 MOTOR

3 Function diagrams
<1> If the Safety Integrated Extended Functions are activated, can also be used as F-DI, see [2850]. Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2202_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2202 -
Connection overview G120 CU240E-2 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
569
570

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-7

External power supply NPN or PNP

24 V DC
Kl. 9 +24 V OUT Kl. 9 +24 V OUT
2220 – CU240B-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3)

Kl. 28 GND Kl. 28 GND

Kl. 69 DI COM Kl. 69 DI COM Kl. 69 DI COM

1 = Simulation on
Kl. 34 DI COM2 Kl. 34 DI COM2 Kl. 34 DI COM2 CU DI simulation
p0795.0 CU DI status inv
CU DI t_debounce
r0721.0 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.0
0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 5 DI 0 Kl. 5 DI 0 Kl. 5 DI 0 r0722
p0796.0 &
1 r0722.0
p0795.1 CU DI status inv
24 V CU DI t_debounce
r0721.1 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.1
0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 6 DI 1 Kl. 6 DI 1 Kl. 6 DI 1 p0796.1 r0722
1 &
r0722.1
p0795.2 CU DI status inv
CU DI t_debounce
r0721.2 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.2
0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 7 DI 2 Kl. 7 DI 2 Kl. 7 DI 2 p0796.2 r0722
1 &
r0722.2
p0795.3 CU DI status inv
CU DI t_debounce
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r0721.3 p0724 r0723

5V 1 r0723.3
0
T 0 CU DI status
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Kl. 8 DI 3 Kl. 8 DI 3 Kl. 8 DI 3 p0796.3 r0722

1 &
r0722.3

Sampling time of the DI: 2 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2220_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2220 -
CU240B-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 … DI 3) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-8
External power supply NPN or PNP
24 V DC
Kl. 9 +24 V OUT Kl. 9 +24 V OUT

Kl. 28 GND Kl. 28 GND 1 = Simulation on

CU DI simulation
2221 – CU240E-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 5)

Kl. 69 DI COM Kl. 69 DI COM Kl. 69 DI COM p0795.0 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv
r0721.0 p0724 r0723
Kl. 34 DI COM2 Kl. 34 DI COM2 Kl. 69 DI COM2 1 r0723.0
0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 5 DI 0 Kl. 5 DI 0 Kl. 5 DI 0 r0722
p0796.0
1 r0722.0

p0795.1 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv

r0721.1 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.1
24 V 0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 6 DI 1 Kl. 6 DI 1 Kl. 6 DI 1 r0722
p0796.1
1 r0722.1

p0795.2 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv

r0721.2 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.2
0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 7 DI 2 Kl. 7 DI 2 Kl. 7 DI 2 r0722
p0796.2
1 r0722.2
p0795.3 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv
r0721.3 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.3
0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 8 DI 3 Kl. 8 DI 3 Kl. 8 DI 3 r0722
p0796.3
1 r0722.3

p0795.4 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv

r0721.4 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.4
0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 16 DI 4 Kl. 16 DI 4 Kl. 16 DI 4 r0722
p0796.4
1 r0722.4
5V
p0795.5 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv
r0721.5 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.5

3.3 Input/output terminals

0
T 0 CU DI status
Kl. 17 DI 5 Kl. 17 DI 5 Kl. 17 DI 5 r0722
p0796.5

3 Function diagrams
1 r0722.5

Sampling time of the DI: 2 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2221_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2221 -
CU240E-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 … DI 5) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
571
572

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-9
2240 – CU240B-2: Digital output (DO 0)

CU DO inv
p0748 .0
CU DO status
CU S_src DO 0 r0747
p0730 0
(52.3) DO 0
1
1 NC
Kl. 18
NO
Kl. 19
COM
Kl. 20
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Sampling time of the DO: 2 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2240_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2240 -
CU240B-2: Digital output (DO 0) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-10

CU DO inv
2242 – CU240E-2: Digital outputs (DO 0 ... DO 2)

p0748.0
CU DO status
CU S_src DO 0 r0747
p0730 0
(52.3) DO 0
1
1 NC
Kl. 18
NO
Kl. 19
COM
Kl. 20

CU DO inv
p0748.1
CU DO status
CU S_src DO 1 r0747
p0731 0
(52.7)
1
1
DO 1
1
24 V NO Kl. 21
0V
0
0V
Kl. 22

CU DO inv
p0748.2
CU DO status
CU S_src DO 2 r0747
p0732 0
(52.2) DO 2
1
1 NC
Kl. 23
NO
Kl. 24
COM
Kl. 25

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Sampling time of the DI: 2 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2242_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2242 -
CU240E-2: Digital outputs (DO 0 … DO 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
573
574

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-11

<2> <3>
CU AI type
0 ... 8
2250 – CU240B-2: Analog input 0 (AI 0)

[0] (4)(4)
p0756[0..1] <4>
CU WireBrkThresh CU wire brk t_del CU AI status word
CU AI sim_mode 0.00 ... 20.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
0 ... 1 [0] (2.00)
p0761[0..1] (2.00) p0762[0..1] r0751
[0] (100)
(100)
[0] (0)(0)
p0797[0..1]

3
20 mA T 0 F03505
1
20 mA "Wire
breakage"
3
0

<2>
CU AI U/I_inp act <2> <2>
I Current r0752 CU AI char x1 CU AI char x2
AI 0 U I -50.000 ... 160.000 -50.000 ... 160.000
CU AI sim_mode [0] (0.000)
p0757[0..1] [0] (10.000)
(0.000) p0759[0..1] (10.000) CU AI T_smooth
U Voltage
Kl. 3 0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
Hardware smoothing [0] (0)(0)
p0797[0..1] [0] (0.0)
p0753[0..1] (0.0)
AI 0 100 µs y [%]
CU AI char y2
U I + A -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] y2
<1> Type switching 0 [0] (100.00)
p0760[0..1] (100.00)
Analog input x y [%]
– D x1 x2 x
1 CU AI char y1
Kl. 4 -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] y1
[0] (0.000)
p0758[0..1] (0.00)
0 … 20 mA CU AI sim setp Scaling
-10 … +10 V -50.000 ... 2000.000
[0] (0.000)
p0798[0..1] (0.000)
<2>
Bezugsgrößen x1
y
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

CU AI value in % [%] p2000...r2004

x
r0755 [0]
x2 x1 • x2
100 %
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> Differential Input!

For an input signal referred to ground, terminal 4 must be connected to reference potential M. <3> Possible settings p0756[0]:
Notice: = 0: 0 V ... +10 V
The voltage between inputs and between input and the ground point must not exceed 35 V. = 1: +2 V ... +10 V with monitoring
When the load resistor is switched in (DIP switch in position ĹI), the voltage between the input terminals = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
must not exceed 10 V or the impressed current 80 mA. If this is not observed the input will be damaged. = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
<2> For p0756 = 2, 3 the units are mA. = 4: -10 V ... +10 V (Default for AI 0)
Kl. = Terminal For p0756 = 0, 1, 4 the units are V. Sampling time of the AI: 4 ms <4> Wire breakage sensing only activated when p0756 = 1, 3.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2250_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2250 -
CU240B-2: Analog input 0 (AI 0) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-12

<2> <3> <4>

CU AI type
2251 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs 0 ... 1 (AI 0 ... AI 1)

0 ... 8
p0756[0..1] (4)
CU WireBrkThresh CU wire brk t_del CU AI status word
CU AI sim_mode 0.00 ... 20.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
0 ... 1 p0761[0..1] (2.00) p0762[0..1] (100) r0751
p0797[0..1] (0)

3
1
20 mA T 0 F03505
20 mA "Wire
breakage"
3
0

<2>
CU AI U/I_inp act <2> <2>
Current
I I r0752 CU AI char x1 CU AI char x2
AI 0/1 U I -50.000 ... 160.000 -50.000 ... 160.000
CU AI sim_mode p0757[0..1] (0.000) p0759[0..1] (10.000) CU AI T_smooth
Kl. 3 U U Voltage 0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
Hardware smoothing p0797[0..1] (0) p0753[0..1] (0.0)
(Kl. 10) 100 µs
AI 0/1 CU AI char y2 y [%]
U I + A -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] y2
<1> Type switching 0 p0760[0..1] (100.00)
Analog input x y [%]
– D x1 x2 x
1 CU AI char y1
Kl. 4 -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] y1
p0758[0..1] (0.00)
(Kl. 11) <5>
CU AI sim setp Scaling
0 … 20 mA -50.000 ... 2000.000
-10 … +10 V p0798[0..1] (0.000)
<2>

Reference quantities x1
CU AI value in % [%] p2000 … r2004 x y
r0755[0..1]
x2
x1 • x2
100 %

<1> Differential Input! <3> Possible settings p0756[0] and p0756[1]:

3.3 Input/output terminals

For an input signal referred to ground, Kl. 4 (Kl. 11) must be connected to reference potential M. = 0: 0 V ... +10 V
Notice: = 1: +2 V ... +10 V with monitoring
The voltage between inputs and between input and the ground point must not exceed 35 V. = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA

3 Function diagrams
When the load resistor is switched in (DIP switch in position ĹI), the voltage between the input terminals = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
must not exceed 10 V or the impressed current 80 mA. If this is not observed, the input will be damaged. = 4: -10 V ... +10 V (Default for AI 0 and AI 1)
<2> For p0756 = 2, 3 the units are mA. <4> Wire breakage sensing only activated when p0756 = 1, 3.
Kl. = Terminal For p0756 = 0, 1, 4 the units are V. Sampling time of the AI: 4 ms <5> Values in brackets --> AI 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2251_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 2251 -
CU240E-2: Analog inputs 0 … 1 (AI 0 … AI 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
575
576

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-13
2255 – CU240B-2: Analog inputs as digital inputs (DI 11)

Kl. 1 +10 V OUT

Kl. 2 GND

1 = Simulation on
CU DI simulation
1.6 V 4.0 V p0795.11 CU DI t_debounce
r0721.11 p0724
CU DI status inv
Kl. 3 AI 0+ (DI 11) 1 r0723
0
T 0 1 r0723.11
Kl. 4 AI 0- CU DI status
0
p0796.11 r0722
1
r0722.11
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Sampling time of the DI: 4 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2255_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2255 -
CU240B-2: Analog inputs as Digital input (DI 11) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-14
I ICurrent
AI 0/1 U I <1>
U U Voltage
2256 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs as digital inputs (DI 11 ... DI 12)

Kl. 1 +10 V OUT

(Kl. 9) (+24 V OUT)

Kl. 2 GND

1 = Simulation on
CU DI simulation
1.6 V 4.0 V p0795.11 CU DI t_debounce
r0721.11 p0724 CU DI status inv
Kl. 3 AI 0+ (DI 11) 1 r0723
0
Kl. 4 AI 0- T 0 1 r0723.11 CU DI status
0 r0722
p0796.11 &
1 r0722.11

1 = Simulation on
CU DI simulation
1.6 V 4.0 V p0795.12 CU DI t_debounce
r0721.12 p0724 CU DI status inv
Kl. 10 AI 1+ (DI 12)
1 r0723
0
Kl. 11 AI 1- T 0 1 r0723.12 CU DI status
0 r0722
p0796.12 &
1 r0722.12

3.3 Input/output terminals

<1> Notice:
The operating mode selector switch of the
analog input has to be set to "Voltage" (U).

3 Function diagrams
The 10 V or 24 V voltage source will destroy
the analog input if the operating mode
selector switch is set to "Current input" (I).

Sampling time of the DI: 4 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2256_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 2256 -
CU240E-2: Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI 11 … DI 12) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
577
578

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-15
2260 – CU240B-2: Analog output 0 (AO 0)

CU AO outp act ref [%] <3>

r0772 [0] CU AO char x1 CU AO char x2
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] CU AO type
p0777 [0] (0)
(0.00) p0779 [0] (100)
(100.00) 0 ... 2
CU AO absVal act CU AO T_smooth p0776 [0]
(0) (0)
0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
p0775 [0]
(0)(0) p0773[0] (0)
(0.0) <1> <1>
CU AO char y2 y CU AO U/I_outp
CU AO S_src -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] 0, 1 r0774[0]
y2
p0771 [0] 0 p0780[0..1]
[0] (20.000)
(20.000) D
x 0 2 y AO 0+ Kl. 12

Voltage output
y (21[0]) x2 x
x1

0 … 20 mA
1 4 mA A

0 … 10 V
Current
CU AO char y1 [%]

output
Smoothing -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] y1
p0778[0..1] (0.000)
[0] (0.000)
<1> Scaling
GND
x1 % Kl. 13
y
[%]
x2 x1• 100 %
x2

Reference quantities
<2>
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> For p0776 = 0, 2 the units are mA.

For p0776 = 1 the units are V.
<2> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2000 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x).
<3> Possible settings p0776[0]:
= 0: 0 ... +20 mA
= 1: 0 ... +10 V
= 2: 4 ... +20 mA Sampling time of the AO: 4 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2260_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2260 -
CU240B-2: Analog output 0 (AO 0) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-16 CU AO outp act ref [%] <3>

r0772 [0] CU AO char x1 CU AO char x2
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] CU AO type
p0777 [0] (0)
(0.00) p0779 [0] (100)
(100.00) 0 ... 2
CU AO absVal act CU AO T_smooth p0776 [0]
(0) (0)
0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
2261 – CU240E-2: Analog outputs 0 ... 1 (AO 0 ... AO 1)

p0775 [0]
(0)(0) p0773[0] (0)
(0.0) <1> <1>
CU AO char y2 y CU AO U/I_outp
CU AO S_src -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] 0, 1 r0774[0]
y2
p0771 [0] 0 p0780[0..1] (20.000)
[0] (20.000) D
x 0 2 y AO 0+ Kl. 12

Voltage output
y (21[0]) x2 x
x1

0 … 20 mA
1 4 mA A

0 … 10 V
Current
CU AO char y1 [%]

output
Smoothing -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] y1
p0778[0..1] (0.000)
[0] (0.000)
<1> Scaling
GND
Kl. 13

x1
y
[%]
x2
x1 • 100 %
x2
Reference quantities

<2>
CU AO outp act ref [%]
r0772 [1] CU AO char x1 CU AO char x2
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] CU AO type
p0777[1] (0)
(0.00) p0779 [1] (100)
(100.00) 0 ... 2
CU AO absVal act CU AO T_smooth p0776 [1]
(0)(0)
0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
p0775 [1]
(0) (0) p0773[1] (0)
(0.0) <1> <1>
CU AO char y2 y CU AO U/I_outp
CU AO S_src -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] 0, 1 r0774 [1] AO 1+ Kl. 26
y2

Voltage output
p0771 [1] 0 p0780[0..1] (20.000)
[1] (20.000)
x 0 2 y D

0 … 20 mA

0 … 10 V
Current
y (27[0])
(21[0])

output
x1 x2 x
1 CU AO char y1 [%] 4 mA A
Smoothing -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] y1
[1] (0.000)
p0778[0..1] (0.000)
GND
<1>
Kl. 27

3.3 Input/output terminals

<1> For p0776 = 0, 2 the units are mA.
For p0776 = 1 the units are V.

3 Function diagrams
<2> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2000 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x).
<3> Possible settings p0776[0] and p0776[1]:
= 0: 0 ... +20 mA
= 1: 0 ... +10 V
= 2: 4 ... +20 mA Sampling time of the AO: 4 ms Kl. = Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2261_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2261 -
CU240E-2: Analog outputs 0 … 1 (AO 0 … AO 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
579
580

3.3 Input/output terminals

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-17
Two-wire control (p0015 = 17 or p3334 = 1) Two-wire control (p0015 = 18 or p3334 = 2)
clockwise/counterclockwise 1 clockwise/counterclockwise 2

0 ... 4 0 ... 4
p3334 (0) p3334 (0)
2272 – Two-wire control

CU DI status 2/3 wire cmd 1 2/3 wire STW ON / OFF (OFF1) CU DI status 2/3 wire cmd 1 2/3 wire STW ON / OFF (OFF1)
r0722 p3330[C] r3333 p0840[C] r0722 p3330[C] r3333 p0840[C]
r0722.x (0) r3333.0 (2090.0) r0722.x (0) r3333.0 (2090.0)

2/3 wire STW Setp inv 2/3 wire STW Setp inv
r3333 p1113[C] r3333 p1113[C]
r3333.1 (2090.11) r3333.1 (2090.11)
CU DI status 2/3 wire cmd 2 CU DI status 2/3 wire cmd 2
r0722 p3331[C] r0722 p3331[C]
r0722.x (0) 2/3 wire STW r0722.x (0) 2/3 wire STW
r3333 r3333
1 r3333.2
1 r3333.2
<1> <1>
2/3 wire STW 2/3 wire STW
r3333 r3333
1 r3333.3
1 r3333.3

Command ignored
ON / OFF1 ON / OFF1
Clockwise Clockwise
t t
Command ignored
ON / OFF1 ON / OFF1
Counterclockwise Counterclockwise
t t

OFF1
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Setpoint OFF1
OFF1 Setpoint OFF1
Motor speed Motor speed

Clockwise Clockwise
t
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Counterclockwise t Counterclockwise
Setpoint inverted OFF1 OFF1
Setpoint inverted OFF1

<1> Ongoing interconnection is either possible from r3333.0/r3333.1 or from the inverted signals
r3333.2/r3333.3.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2272_97_62.vsd Function diagram
- 2272 -
Two-wire control 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-18
Three-wire control (p0015 = 19 or p3334 = 3) Three-wire control (p0015 = 20 or p3334 = 4)
enable clockwise/counterclockwise enable ON/reversing

0 ... 4 0 ... 4
p3334 (0) p3334 (0)
2273 – Three-wire control

CU DI Status 2/3 wire cmd 1 CU DI Status 2/3 wire cmd 1

r0722 p3330[C] 2/3 wire STW ON / OFF (OFF1) r0722 p3330[C] 2/3 wire STW ON / OFF (OFF1)
r0722.x (0) r3333 p0840[C] r0722.x (0) r3333 p0840[C]
r3333.0 (2090.0) r3333.0 (2090.0)

2/3 wire STW Setp inv 2/3 wire STW Setp inv
r3333 p1113[C] r3333 p1113[C]
CU DI status 2/3 wire cmd 2 r3333.1 (2090.11) CU DI status 2/3 wire cmd 2 r3333.1 (2090.11)
r0722 p3331[C] r0722 p3331[C]
r0722.x (0) r0722.x (0)
2/3 wire STW 2/3 wire STW
r3333 r3333
1 r3333.2
1 r3333.2
CU DI Status 2/3 wire cmd 3 <1> CU DI Status 2/3 wire cmd 3 <1>
2/3 wire STW 2/3 wire STW
r0722 p3332[C] r3333 r0722 p3332[C] r3333
r0722.x (0) 1 r3333.3 r0722.x (0) 1 r3333.3

Enable / Enable /
OFF1 OFF1

Command ignored t Command ignored t

ON ON
Clockwise
t t
ON Reversing
Counterclockwise
t t
Setpoint Setpoint OFF1
Motor speed Motor speed

Clockwise Clockwise
Counterclockwise t Counterclockwise t

3.3 Input/output terminals

Setpoint inverted OFF1 OFF1 Setpoint inverted OFF1

3 Function diagrams
<1> Ongoing interconnection is either possible from r3333.0/r3333.1 or from the inverted signals
r3333.2/r3333.3.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input/Output Terminals fp_2273_97_62.vsd Function diagram
- 2273 -
Three-wire control 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
581
3 Function diagrams
3.4 PROFIenergy

3.4 PROFIenergy

Function diagrams

2381 – Control commands and interrogation commands 583

2382 – States 584

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

582 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-19 PROFIenergy

control commands
"Start_Pause"
PROFINET Pause_Time
"Start_Pause_with_time_response"
2381 – Control commands and interrogation commands

1 = Inhibit
PROFIenergy
p5611.0
1 &
0
min max

Port 1 p5602 p5606

Port 2
+ Time_to_pause
+ Time_to_operate

"End_Pause"

Ready for operation

r5600 = 255

Energy-saving mode 2
r5600 = 2
[2382]
PROFIenergy
interrogation commands
Time_to_pause Time_to_operate
"List_Energy_Saving_Modes“

"Get_Mode“
Pe mod t_pause min
"PEM_Status“
p5602

"PEM_Status_with_CTTO“

"PE_Identify“

"Query_Version“

"Get_Measurement_List“

"Get_Measurement_List_with_object_number“

3 Function diagrams
"Get_Measurement_Values“

3.4 PROFIenergy
"Get_Measurement_Values_with_object_number“

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIenergy fp_2381_97_62.vsd Function diagram
- 2381 -
Control commands and interrogation commands 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2_PN
583
584

3.4 PROFIenergy
3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-20 PROFIdrive states PROFIenergy states

<1>
POWER ON PROFIenergy POWER OFF
2382 – States

PROFIenergy Energy-
S1: Switching on inhibited <2> saving mode active
PROFIenergy Energy-saving mode 2 A08800

& 1 = PE active
r5613.0
1 = Inhibit PROFIenergy
p5611.0 &
1 = Trans into energy-saving Start_Pause
mode from PROFIdrive 1 = PE inactive
state S4 possible 1 r5613.1
S2: Ready for switching on p5611.2

Drive at standstill

Start_Pause
Pe mode ID
1 = Inhibit PROFIenergy r5600
p5611.0
&
1 = Drive initiates OFF1
CPU STOP
p5611.1
1 End_Pause
Connection termination
Pe sw on_inh s_src •1
p5614
(0)
&
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

1
OFF1 PROFIenergy Ready for
operation
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

S3:Ready for operation

Operation
S4: Operation

<1> Excerpt from: Basic state machine of a PROFIdrive drive axis (source: PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation (PNO)).
<2> Diagnostic alarms to the CPU inhibited.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIenergy fp_2382_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2382 -
States 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2_PN
 3 Function diagrams
3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET),

EtherNet/IP

Function diagrams

2401 – Overview 586

2410 – PROFIdrive, EtherNet/IP - addresses and diagnostics 587

2420 – PROFIdrive - telegrams and process data (PZD) 588

2440 – PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals interconnection 589

2441 – PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 590

2442 – PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 591

2446 – PROFIdrive - STW3 control word interconnection 592

2450 – PROFIdrive - PZD send signals interconnection 593

2451 – PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 594

2452 – PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 595

2456 – PROFIdrive - ZSW3 status word interconnection 596

2468 – PROFIdrive - receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 597

2470 – PROFIdrive - send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 598

2472 – PROFIdrive - status words, free interconnection 599

2473 – EtherNet/IP - control word/status word interconnection 600

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 585
586

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-21
Interconnecting the permanently assigned receive telegrams.

Signal Description Interconnection

... ... ...

2401 – Overview

... ... ... Receive telegram

Header
Permanently assigned [2440] ... [2446]
Data
telegrams
Interconnecting the permanently assigned send telegrams
Trailer
PB address
1 ... 126 Signal Description Interconnection
p0918 (126)

... ... ...

LED

Monitoring
Axxxxx ... ... ...
Fxxxxx

Diagnostics rxxxx [2450] ... [2456]

Interconnecting the free receive telegram
[2410] PROFIdrive, EtherNet/IP - addresses and diagnostics PROFIdrive
PZD1
PZD2
PZD telegr_sel
p0922 PZD3

...
Signal assignment
PZD1
Signal x PZD7
Free telegrams PZD8
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p0922 = 999 [2468] Send telegram

PZD8
Interconnecting the free send telegram Header
[2420] Telegrams and process data PZD1 Data
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

PZD2
Trailer
PZD3

...
PZD7
PZD8
[2470], [2472]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2401_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2401 -
Overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-22 Field bus protocol

CU-specific functions Drive-specific functions
p2030
PB suppl t_monit Monitoring functions Alarms Faults
0 ... 20000 [ms]
0 No protocol p2047 (0)
Cyclic telegrams from
2410 – PROFIdrive, EtherNet/IP - addresses and diagnostics

1/2 USS/Modbus [9310] … [9372] the master

Fieldbus 3 PD PZD state T 0 A01920 "PROFIBUS: Cyclic connection interrupted"
7/10 r2043.0
t > t_response <1>
t No cyclic telegrams PD fault delay
PB address from the master 0 ... 100 [s]
PB status
1 ... 126 p2044 (0)
r2054
p0918 (126)
PROFIBUS
PB diag standard No telegrams from the
r2055[0..2] T 0 master
S Q F01910
DIP switch on the control unit "PROFIBUS
BUS ADDRESS setpoint timeout"
R Q
ON
1...126 Memory

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

1 2 4 8 16 32 64 SET A01900 "PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram incorrect"

Significance
Diag offs recv
POWER ON Actual
All DIP switches to ON or OFF r2075
PROFIBUS Diagnostic parameters
==> set the address using p0918 address
Diag offs send <1> The response monitoring time t_An is automatically defined by
r2076 the configuration tool (e.g. HW Config made by Siemens) within
PB addr_sw diag p0918 the framework of PROFIBUS configuration.
r2057

PROFINET / EtherNet/IP No cyclic connection to a PROFINET

PN IP addr PN Subnet Mask controller
PD PZD state Cyclic telegrams from
p8921 p8923 r2043.0 the master A08526
PN Name Stat PN Def Gateway "PROFINET: Cyclic connection interrupted"
p8920 p8922

t
PN Name Stat act
r8930 PN IF config
p8925 =2 PD fault delay
PN Name of Station 0 ... 100 [s]
PROFINET / EtherNet/IP r61000 p2044 (0)
-
PN IP of Station Reception of setpoints from
Configuration r61001 PROFINET has been
Memory T 0 interrupted
S Q F08501
SET "PROFINET
R Q setpoint timeout"

3 Function diagrams
PN IP addr act PN Subnet Mask act
r8931[0..3] r8933[0..3] POWER ON
PN Def Gateway act
r8932[0..3]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2410_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2410 -
PROFIdrive, EtherNet/IP - addresses and diagnostics 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
587
588

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-23
2420 – PROFIdrive - telegrams and process data (PZD)

<1>
PZD telegr_sel
1 ... 999 [ms]
Pd SIC telegr
p0922 (1) p60122
Standard telegrams Manufacturer-specific telegrams Free telegram

Interconnec-
tion is made [2440], [2450] automatically
according to <5>

Telegram 1 20 350 352 353 354 700 999

PZD1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 <4> ZSW1 <4>

Transmit telegram length freely selectable

Receive telegram length freely selectable
PZD2 NSOLL_A NIST_A NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL

via central PROFIdrive configuration in

via central PROFIdrive configuration in

PZD3 IAIST_GL M_LIM IAIST_GL <3> IAIST_GL <3> IAIST_GL

PZD4 MIST_GL STW3 ZSW3 <3> MIST_GL <3> MIST_GL

PZD5 PIST_GL <3> WARN_CODE <3> WARN_CODE

PZD6 <2> <3> FAULT_CODE <3> FAULT_CODE

PROFIBUS/PROFINET
PRPFIBUS/PROFINET
Receive telegram from

PZD7
PZD8
Send telegram to

PZD9 S_ZSW1B (r9734)

the master.

the master.
PZD10 S_V_LIMIT_B
(r9733[2])
PZD11
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

PZD12
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned.
If p0922 unequal 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained!
<2> Freely interconnectable (pre-setting: MELD_NAMUR).
<3> Can be freely connected.
<4> In order to comply with the PROFIdrive profile, PZD1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1) or status word 1 (ZSW1).
p2037 = 2 should be set if STW1 is not transferred with PZD1 as specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
<5> Only for CU240E-2 DP-F/PN-F.
The arrangement of process data (PZD) for the telegram 700 depends on the telegram selection (p0922, p2079) and the receive and send words reserved (p2070, p2071).
The telegram 700 is appended to the telegram selected resp. the words reserved.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2420_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2420 -
PROFIdrive - Telegrams and process data (PZD) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-24
2440 – PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals interconnection

PROFIBUS
PROFINET

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

<3>
Signal receivers for PZD receive signals <1> <2>
PROFIdrive r2090...r2095 Bit
receive telegram
r2050[0...11] WORD PROFIdrive Interconnection Function
Signal Meaning Data type Scaling
Signal No. parameter diagram
Header ...
STW1 Control word 1 1 (bit serial) [2442] U16 -
Data
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint A (16-bit) 5 p1070 [3030.2] I16 4000 hex p2000
Trailer Telegram
assignment Torque limit p1552, p1554
according to p0922 <4> M_LIM 310 [6060.1] U16 4000 hex 100 %
[2420]
<4> STW3 Control word 3 304 (bit serial) [2446] U16 -

<1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection parameters

3 Function diagrams
of the command data set CDS are automatically set to 0.
<2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, U16 = Unsigned16.
<3> Display parameters for receive data according to [2468].
<4> Only SIEMENS telegram 350.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2440_97_64.vsd Function diagram
- 2440 -
PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
589
590

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-25
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2) <1>

Signal Meaning Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted

parameters internal control word signal target

= ON (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.0 p0840[0] = r2090.0 [2501.3] Sequence control -
2441 – PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2)

0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression & ready for switching on)

1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)

STW1.1 p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3] Sequence control -
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

1 = No OFF3 (enable is possible)

STW1.2 p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3] Sequence control -
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.3 p0852[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3] Sequence control -
0 = Inhibit operation (suppress pulses)

1 = Ramp-function generator enable p1140[0] = r2090.4 [3060], [3070], [3080]

STW1.4 [2501.3] -
0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)

1 = Continue ramp-function generator p1141[0] = r2090.5 [3060], [3070]

STW1.5 [2501.3] -
0 = Freezes the ramp-function generator

1 = Setpoint enable p1142[0] = r2090.6 [3060], [3070], [3080]

STW1.6 [2501.3] -
0 = Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)

STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] -

STW1.8 Reserved - - - -

STW1.9 Reserved - - - -

STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <2> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

STW1.11 1 = Dir of rot reversal <4> p1113[0] = r2090.11 [2505.3] [3040] -

STW1.12 Reserved - - - -
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

STW1.13 Reserved - - - -

STW1.14 Reserved - - - -

p0810[0] = 2090.15
STW1.15 1 = CDS selection - [8560] -
<3>

<1> Used in telegram 20. <3> Interconnection is not disabled.

<2> Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to ensure that the drive accepts the process data. <4> The direction reversal can be locked (see p1110 and p1111).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2441_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2441 -
PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-26
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
Signal Meaning Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target

= ON (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.0 p0840[0] = r2090.0 [2501.3] Sequence control -
2442 – PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0)

0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression & ready for switching on)

1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)

STW1.1 p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3] Sequence control -
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

1 = No OFF3 (enable is possible)

STW1.2 p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3] Sequence control -
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.3 p0852[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3] Sequence control -
0 = Inhibit operation (suppress pulses)

1 = Ramp-function generator enable

STW1.4 p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060], [3070], [3080] -
0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)

1 = Continue ramp-function generator

STW1.5 p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060], [3070] -
0 = Freezes the ramp-function generator

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

1 = Setpoint enable
STW1.6 p1142[0] = r2090.6 [2501.3] [3060], [3070], [3080] -
0 = Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)

STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] -

STW1.8 Reserved - - - -

STW1.9 Reserved - - - -

STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <1> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] -

STW1.11 1 = Dir of rot reversal <2> p1113[0] = r2090.11 [2505.3] [3040] -

STW1.12 Reserved - - - -

STW1.13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise p1035[0] = r2090.13 [2505.3] [3020] -

STW1.14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower p1036[0] = r2090.14 [2505.3] [3020] -

STW1.15 Reserved - - - -

3 Function diagrams
<1> Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to ensure that the drive accepts the process data.
<2> The direction reversal can be locked (see p1110 and p1111).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2442_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2442 -
PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
591
592

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-27
Signal targets for STW3 in Interface Mode SINAMICS <1>

Signal Meaning Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted

parameters internal control word signal target

STW3.0 1 = Fixed setp bit 0 p1020[0] = r2093.0 [3010.2] [3010.2] -

2446 – PROFIdrive - STW3 control word interconnection

STW3.1 1 = Fixed setp bit 1 p1021[0] = r2093.1 [2513.2] [3010.2] -

STW3.2 1 = Fixed setp bit 2 p1022[0] = r2093.2 [2513.2] [3010.2] -

STW3.3 1 = Fixed setp bit 3 p1023[0] = r2093.3 [2513.2] [3010.2] -

STW3.4 1 = DDS select. bit 0 p0820 = r2093.4 [2513.2] [8565.2] -

STW3.5 1 = DDS select. bit 1 p0821 = r2093.5 [2513.2] [8565.2] -

STW3.6 Reserved - - - -

STW3.7 Reserved - - - -

STW3.8 1 = Technology controller enable p2200[0] = r2093.8 [2513.2] [7958.4] -

STW3.9 1 = DC braking active p1230[0] = r2093.9 [2513.2] [7017.1] -

STW3.10 Reserved - - - -
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

STW3.11 1 = Droop enable p1492[0] = r2093.11 [2513.2] [6030.1] -

STW3.12 1 = Torque control p1501[0] = r2093.12 [2513.2] [6060.1] -

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

STW3.13 0 = External fault 1 (F07860) p2106[0] = r2093.13 [2513.2] [8060.1] -

STW3.14 Reserved - - - -

STW3.15 1 = CDS bit 1 p0811[0] = r2093.15 [2513.2] [8560.3] -

<1> Used in telegram 350.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2446_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 2446 -
PROFIdrive - STW3 control word interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-28
2450 – PROFIdrive - PZD send signals interconnection

Signal sources for PZD send signals <1> PZD send word 1...8
p2051[0...16] WORD PROFIdrive send
PROFIdrive Interconnection r2053[0...16] WORD telegram
Signal Description Function diagram Data type Scaling
Signal No. parameter
ZSW1 Status word 1 2 r2089[0] [2452] U16 - ... Header

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

NIST_A Actual speed A (16 bit) 6 r0063[0] - I16 4000 hex p2000 Data
IAIST_GLATT Absolute actual current, smoothed 51 r0068[1] [6799] I16 4000 hex p2002
Trailer
MIST_GLATT Actual torque smoothed 53 r0080[1] [6799] I16 4000 hex p2003 Telegram
assignment
PIST_GLATT Power factor, smoothed 54 r0082[1] [6799] I16 4000 hex p2004 according to p0922
[2420]
NIST_A_GLATT Actual speed, smoothed 57 r0063[1] - I16 4000 hex p2000
MELD_NAMUR VIK-NAMUR message bit bar 58 r3113 - U16
FAULT_CODE Fault code 301 r2131 [8060] U16 PROFIBUS
WARN_CODE Alarm code 303 r2132 [8065] U16 PROFINET

ZSW3 Status word 3 305 r0053 [2456] U16

3 Function diagrams
<1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, U16 = Unsigned16.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2450_97_64.vsd Function diagram
- 2450 -
PROFIdrive - PZD send signals interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
593
594

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-29
Signal sources for ZSW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2)
Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target
<1>

ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] Sequence control -

2451 – PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2)

ZSW1.1 1 = Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -

ZSW1.4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.5 1 = No Quick stop active (OFF3 inactive) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited active p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -

ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8011] -

ZSW1.9 1 = Control requested p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] -

ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2537.7] [8010] -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

ZSW1.11 1 = I, M, or P limit not reached p2080[11] = r0056.13 [2522.7] [6060]

ZSW1.12 Reserved - - - -
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

ZSW1.13 1 = No motor overtemperature alarm p2080[13] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016]

1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act • 0)

ZSW1.14 p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8011] -
0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)

p2080[15] = r0836.0
ZSW1.15 1 = Display CDS - - -
<2>

<1> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15)
<2> Interconnection is not disabled.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2451_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2451 -
PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-30
Signal sources for ZSW1 im Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target
<1>

ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] Sequence control -

2452 – PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0)

ZSW1.1 1 = Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -

ZSW1.4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.5 1 = No Quick stop active (OFF3 inactive) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] Sequence control -

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited active p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -

ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8011] -

ZSW1.9 1 = Control requested <2> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] -

ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] -

ZSW1.11 1 = I, M, or P limit not reached p2080[11] = r1407.7 [2522.7] [6060]

ZSW1.12 1 = Open holding brake p2080[12] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] -

ZSW1.13 1 = No motor overtemperature alarm p2080[13] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016]

1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act • 0)

ZSW1.14 p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8011] -
0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)

ZSW1.15 1 = No alarm, thermal overload, power unit p2080[15] = r2135.15 [2548.7] [8021]

3 Function diagrams
<1> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15).
<2> The drive is ready to accept data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2452_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2452 -
PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
595
596

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-31
Signal sources for ZSW3 im Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) <1>

Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]

Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal status word signal source

ZSW3.0 1 = DC braking active [2511.7] [7017.5] -

2456 – PROFIdrive - ZSW3 status word interconnection

ZSW3.1 1 = |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) [2511.7] [2534.7] -

ZSW3.2 1 = |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) [2511.7] [2534.7] -

ZSW3.3 1 = I_act • p2170 [2511.7] [2534.7] -

ZSW3.4 1 = |n_act| > p2155 [2511.7] [2534.7] -

ZSW3.5 1 = |n_act| ” p2155 [2511.7] [2534.7] -

ZSW3.6 1 = |n_act| • r1119 (n_set) [2511.7] [2534.7] -

ZSW3.7 1 = Vdc ” p2172 [2511.7] [2534.7] -

p2051[3] = r0053
ZSW3.8 1 = Vdc > p2172 [2511.7] [2534.7] -

ZSW3.9 1 = Ramping finished [2511.7] [3080.7] -

ZSW3.10 1 = Technology controller output at the lower limit [2511.7] [7958.7] -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

ZSW3.11 1 = Technology controller output at the upper limit [2511.7] [7958.7] -

ZSW3.12 Reserved - - -
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

ZSW3.13 Reserved - - -

ZSW3.14 Reserved - - -

ZSW3.15 Reserved - - -

<1> Used in telegram 350.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2456_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2456 -
PROFIdrive - ZSW3 status word interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-32
<4> <5> r2090.0
<1> <4> <4>
...
PZD1 recv bitw
r2090.15 PZD1 recv bitw
PROFINET PZD receive word 1 r2050 [0] PZD recv word
r2091.0
PROFIBUS r2060 [0] PZD recv DW ...
PZD2 recv bitw
r2091.15 PZD2 recv bitw
PZD receive word 2 r2050 [1] PZD recv word
r2092.0
r2060 [1] PZD recv DW ...
PZD3 recv bitw
2468 – PROFIdrive - receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)

PROFIdrive r2092.15 PZD3 recv bitw

PZD receive word 3 r2050 [2] PZD recv word
receive telegram r2093.0
r2060 [2] PZD recv DW ...
PZD4 recv bitw
Header r2093.15 PZD4 recv bitw
PZD receive word 4 r2050 [3] PZD recv word
Data r2060 [3] PZD recv DW PZD recv word
Trailer PZD receive word 5 r2050 [4]
2 connector-binector converter
r2060 [4] PZD recv DW PZD recv word Con/bin outp inv
PZD receive word 6 r2050 [5] p2098 [0].0
r2060 [5] <2>
PZD recv DW PZD recv word Con/bin S_src
PZD receive word 7 r2050 [6] p2099[0] 0 Con/bin outp
r2060 [6] PZD recv DW PZD recv word (0) r2094.0
1 1

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

PZD receive word 8 r2050 [7]
r2060 [7] PZD recv DW PZD recv word Con/bin outp inv
PZD receive word 9 r2050 [8] p2098 [0].15

r2060 [8] PZD recv DW PZD recv word

PZD receive word 10 r2050 [9] 0 Con/bin outp
r2060 [9] r2094.15
PZD recv DW PZD recv word 1 1
PZD receive word 11 r2050 [10]
r2060 [10] PZD recv DW PZD recv word Con/bin outp inv
PZD receive word 12 r2050 [11] p2098 [1].0
<2>
Con/bin S_src
<3>
p2099[1] 0 Con/bin outp
(0) r2095.0
Reference quantities for further 1
interconnection 1
p200x
Con/bin outp inv
p2098 [1].15

0 Con/bin outp
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) r2095.15
(due to bit 10 "control requested"). 1 1
<2> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 3 to 8 and used as binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.

3 Function diagrams
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 °C -> 100 % = 4000 hex, 0 °C -> 0 %.
<4> Every PZD word can be assigned a word or a double word. Only one of the 2 interconnection parameters r2050 or r2060 can have a value <> 0 for a PZD word.
<5> When interconnecting a connector output multiple times all the connector inputs must have either Integer or FloatingPoint data type.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2468_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2468 -
PROFIdrive - Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
597
598

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-33 Diag send DW
<3>
Diag send word
r2063 [0…15] r2053 [0…16]
PZD send word p2051[0]
<3> (2089[0]) <1> ...
PZD send word 1 <1>
PZD send DW p2061[0]
PZD send word p2051[1]
2470 – PROFIdrive - send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)

PZD 1+2 (0)

(2089[0])
(63[0])
PZD send word 2
PZD send DW p2061[1]
(0) PZD send word p2051[2]
PZD 2+3 (2089[0])
(0)
PROFIdrive send
PZD send word 3
PZD send DW p2061[2] telegram
(0) PZD send word p2051[3]
PZD 3+4 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 4 Header
PZD send DW p2061[3]
(0) PZD send word p2051[4] Data
PZD 4+5 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 5
PZD send DW p2061[4] Trailer
(0) PZD send word p2051[5]
PZD 5+6 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 6
PZD send DW p2061[5]
(0) PZD send word p2051[6]
PZD 6+7 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 7 PROFIBUS
PZD send DW p2061[6] PROFINET
(0) PZD send word p2051[7]
PZD 7+8 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 8
PZD send DW p2061[7]
(0) PZD send word p2051[8]
PZD 8+9 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send DW p2061[8] PZD send word 9
(0) PZD send word p2051[9]
PZD 9+10 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 10
PZD send DW p2061[9]
(0) PZD send word p2051[10]
PZD 10+11 (2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 11
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

PZD send word p2051[15]

(2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 16
PZD send DW p2061[15]
PZD send word p2051 [16]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

PZD 16+17 (0)

(2089[0])
(0)
PZD send word 17

<2>
Reference quantities for
further interconnection
p200x

<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (ZSW1).
<2> Physical word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex, if the input variable has the value p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0° C -> 0%.
<3> A PZD send word can either be supplied via connector input p2051[x] (WORD) or via p2061[x] (DWORD). The two corresponding connector inputs cannot be interconnected.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2470_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2470 -
PROFIdrive - Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-34
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [2].0

5 binector-connector converter Bin/con ZSW3

p2082[0…15] [0] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
(0) r2089[2]
1
2472 – PROFIdrive - status words, free interconnection

(0.0) [1] 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].0
Bin/con ZSW inv
Bin/con ZSW1 p2088 [2].15
p2080[0…15] [0] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
(899.0) r2089 [0]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1 0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].15
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [3].0
0
[15]
(0.0) Bin/con ZSW4

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

1 1 p2083[0…15] [0] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
(0) r2089[3]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1

Bin/con ZSW inv

Bin/con ZSW inv p2088 [3].15
p2088 [1].0

Bin/con ZSW2 0
[15]
p2081[0…15] [0] 0 Bin/con ZSW send (0.0)
(0) r2089 [1] 1 1
(0.0)
[1] 1 1

Bin/con ZSW inv Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [1].15 p2088 [4].0

Bin/con ZSW5
0 p2084[0…15] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
[15] [0]
(0.0) (0) r2089[4]
1 (0.0)
[1] 1 1
1

Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [4].15

3 Function diagrams
0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2472_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 2472 -
PROFIdrive - Status words, free interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240B/E-2_DP/PN
599
600

3.5 Communication PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-35
Eth/IP profile
0 ... 1 r2090...r2095 Bit
p8980 (0) r2050[0...7] WORD
r2060[0...10] DWORD Signal receivers for PZD receive signals
Fieldbus
0 SINAMICS (PROFINET)
[2401] – [2472]
... PROFIdrive Interconnection Data type
„EtherNet/IP“ Signal Equivalent at ODVA Signal No. parameter Scaling
2473 – EtherNet/IP - control word/status word interconnection

(p2030 = 10) ODVA

1 (bit serial)
STW1 Instance 20, Byte 0, 1 1 U16 -

PZD telegr_sel NSOLL_A Instance 20, Byte 2, 3 5 p1070 <1> I16 4000 hex p2000
1 ... 999 [ms]
PZD send word 1...8
p0922 (1)
p2051[0...16] WORD
r2061[0...15] DWORD
Signal sources for PZD send signals
...
Interconnection is made according to Signal Equivalent at ODVA PROFIdrive Interconnection Data type Scaling
Signal No. parameter

Telegram PZD1 PZD2 ZSW1 Instance 70, Byte 0, 1 2 (bit serial) U16 -

STW1 NSOLL_A NIST_A Instance 70, Byte 2, 3 6 r0063 I16 4000 hex p2000
1 PZDmaxIntercon
ZSW1 NIST_A r2067

Signal sources for Basic Speed Control (Instance 70), Byte 0, 1

Interconnection [Function
Signal Meaning parameters
diagram] internal
control word
Bit 0 1 = Fault present (pulses inhibited) p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2510]

Bit 1 Reserved

Bit 2 1 = Operation enabled (voltage at output terminals) p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2510]

Bit 3 … Bit 15 Reserved

Eth/IP ODVA STOP Signal targets for Basic Speed Control (Instance 20), Byte 0, 1
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

0 ... 1
p8981 (0) Interconnection [Function
Signal Meaning parameters diagram] internal
ON / OFF (OFF1) control word
p0840 [C]
p0840[0] = r2090.0
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

0
(2090.0) p0844[0] = r2090.1
Bit 0 = ON (pulses can be enabled) [2512]
OFF2 S_src 1 p0848[0] = r2090.2
1 0 = OFF p0852[0] = r2090.3
p0844 [C]
(2090.1) Bit 1 Reserved
OFF2 S_src 2
Bit 2 1 = Acknowledge fault p2103.0 = r2090.7 [2546]
p0845 [C]
(1) Bit 3 … Bit 15 Reserved

<1> p1070 will be scaled via p8982. ODVA: Open DeviceNet Vendor Association

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive (PROFIBUS/PROFINET), EtherNet/IP fp_2473_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2473 -
EtherNet/IP - Control word / status word interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_PN (_F)
 3 Function diagrams
3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

Function diagrams

9310 – Configuration, addresses and diagnostics 602

9342 – STW1 control word interconnection 603

9352 – ZSW1 status word interconnection 604

9360 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 605

9370 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 606

9372 – Status words, free interconnection 607

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 601
602

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-36
Fieldbus configuration Monitoring functions
Fieldbus t_monit
0 ... 1999999 [ms]
p2040 (100)
9310 – Configuration, addresses and diagnostics

Cyclic telegrams from

the master
F01910 "Fieldbus IF: setpoint
T 0 timeout"

Field bus address No telegrams from the master

p2021 p2021 t
Field bus baud
p2020

Memory Actual address

>0
SET
USS
Field bus USS PZD configuration
p2022
POWER ON
Field bus protocol
Field bus USS PKW 0 ... 3 [ms]
p2023 p2030 (3)

BUS ADDRESS
ON 0
No protocol
1 Telegrams to the
1
2 master
1 2 4 8 16 32 64

Significance
Field bus address
All DIP switches to OFF p2021 p2021
==> set the address using p2021
Field bus baud
p2020

>0 Memory
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

SET Modbus
Fieldbus times configuration
p2024
POWER ON
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Modbus parity
p2031

Field bus error

Diagnostic parameters r2029

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) fp_9310_97_66.vsd Function diagram
- 9310 -
Configuration, addresses and diagnostics 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-37
Signal targets for fieldbus STW1
Signal Meaning Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target

STW1.0 = ON (pulses can be enabled) Sequence control -

p0840[0] = r2090.0 [2501.3]
9342 – STW1 control word interconnection

0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression & ready for switching on)

STW1.1 1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) Sequence control -

p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3]
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

STW1.2 1 = No OFF3 (enable is possible) Sequence control -

p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3]
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

STW1.3 1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled) Sequence control -

p0852[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3]
0 = Inhibit operation (suppress pulses)

STW1.4 1 = Ramp-function generator enable p1140[0] = r2090.4 [3060], [3070], [3080] -

[2501.3]
0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)

STW1.5 1 = Continue ramp-function generator p1141[0] = r2090.5 [3060], [3070] -

[2501.3]
0 = Freezes the ramp-function generator

STW1.6 1 = Setpoint enable p1142[0] = r2090.6 [3060], [3070], [3080] -

[2501.3]
0 = Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)

STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] -

STW1.8 Reserved - - - -

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

STW1.9 Reserved - - - -

STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <1> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] -

STW1.11 1 = Dir of rot reversal <2> p1113[0] = r2090.11 [2505.3] [3040] -

STW1.12 Reserved - - - -

STW1.13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise p1035[0] = r2090.13 [2505.3] [3020] -

STW1.14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower p1036[0] = r2090.14 [2505.3] [3020] -

STW1.15 Reserved - - - -

3 Function diagrams
<1> Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to ensure that the drive accepts the process data.
<2> The direction reversal can be locked (see p1110 and p1111).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) fp_9342_97_62.vsd Function diagram
- 9342 -
STW1 control word interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
603
604

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-38
Signal sources for fieldbus ZSW1
Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target
<1>

ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] Sequence control -

9352 – ZSW1 status word interconnection

ZSW1.1 1 = Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -

ZSW1.4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.5 1 = No Quick stop active (OFF3 inactive) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited active p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] Sequence control -

ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -

ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8011] -

ZSW1.9 1 = Control requested <2> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] -

ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] -

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

ZSW1.11 1 = I, M, or P limit not reached p2080[11] = r1407.7 [2522.7] [6060]

ZSW1.12 1 = Open holding brake p2080[12] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] -

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

ZSW1.13 1 = No motor overtemperature alarm p2080[13] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016]

1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act • 0)

ZSW1.14 p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8011] -
0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)

ZSW1.15 1 = No alarm, thermal overload, power unit p2080[15] = r2135.15 [2548.7] [8021]

<1> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15).
<2> The drive is ready to accept data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) fp_9352_97_62.vsd Function diagram
- 9352 -
ZSW1 status word interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-39
r2090.0
...
PZD1 recv bitw
r2090.15 PZD1 recv bitw
<1> PZD receive word 1 r2050 [0] PZD recv word
r2091.0
...
PZD2 recv bitw
r2091.15 PZD2 recv bitw
<2> PZD receive word 2 r2050 [1] PZD recv word
r2092.0
...
PZD3 recv bitw
9360 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)

r2092.15 PZD3 recv bitw

Fieldbus PZD receive word 3 r2050 [2] PZD recv word
r2093.0
...
PZD4 recv bitw
r2093.15 PZD4 recv bitw
PZD receive word 4 r2050 [3] PZD recv word
Receive telegram
PZD recv word
PZD receive word 5 r2050 [4] 2 connector-binector converter
PZD recv word Con/bin outp inv
p2098[0].0
PZD receive word 6 r2050 [5]
<3>
PZD recv word Con/bin S_src
PZD receive word 7 r2050 [6] p2099 [0] 0 Con/bin outp
(0) r2094.0
PZD recv word 1 1
PZD receive word 8 r2050 [7]
Con/bin outp inv
PZD recv word p2098 [0].15
PZD receive word 9 r2050 [8]

PZD recv word

0 Con/bin outp
PZD receive word 10 r2050 [9]
r2094.15
1 1
PZD recv word
PZD receive word 11 r2050 [10]

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

PZD recv word Con/bin outp inv
p2098 [1].0
PZD receive word 12 r2050 [11]
<3>
<4> Con/bin S_src
p2099 [1] 0 Con/bin outp
Reference quantities for further (0) r2095.0
interconnection 1 1
p200x

Con/bin outp inv

p2098 [1].15

0 Con/bin outp
r2095.15
1 1
<1> The receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> The preconfiguration with the speed setpoint is set automatically via p1000 = 6.

3 Function diagrams
<3> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 3 to 8 and used as binectors.
<4> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 °C -> 100 % = 4000 hex, 0 °C -> 0 %.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) fp_9360_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 9360 -
Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
605
606

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-40
9370 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)

Diag send word

r2053[0 … 7]
PZD send word p2051[0] <1>
...
(2089[0]) PZD send word 1 <1>

PZD send word p2051[1]

(2089[0]) PZD send word 2 <2>

PZD send word p2051[2]

(2089[0]) PZD send word 3

PZD send word p2051[3]

(2089[0]) PZD send word 4
Send telegram
PZD send word p2051[4]
(2089[0]) PZD send word 5

PZD send word p2051[5]

(2089[0]) PZD send word 6
Fieldbus
PZD send word p2051[6]
(2089[0]) PZD send word 7

PZD send word p2051[7]

(2089[0]) PZD send word 8
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

<3>
Reference quantities for
further interconnection
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p200x

<1> The send word 1 must be used as status word (ZSW1).

<2> The preconfiguration with the speed setpoint is set automatically via p1000 = 6.
<3> Physical word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex,
if the input variable has the value p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0° C -> 0%.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) fp_9370_97_62.vsd Function diagram
- 9370 -
Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-41
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [2].0

5 binector-connector converter Bin/con ZSW3

p2082[0…15] [0] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
(0) r2089 [2]
1
9372 – Status words, free interconnection

[1]
(0.0) 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].0
Bin/con ZSW inv
Bin/con ZSW1 p2088 [2].15
p2080[0…15] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
[0]
(899.0) r2089 [0]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1 0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].15
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [3].0
0
[15]
(0.0) Bin/con ZSW4
1 1 p2083[0…15] [0] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
(0) r2089 [3]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1

Bin/con ZSW inv

Bin/con ZSW inv p2088 [3].15
p2088 [1].0

3.6 Communication fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus)

Bin/con ZSW2 0
[15]
p2081[0…15] 0 Bin/con ZSW send (0.0)
[0] 1
(0) r2089 [1] 1
(0.0)
[1] 1 1

Bin/con ZSW inv Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [1].15 p2088 [4].0

Bin/con ZSW5
0 p2084[0…15] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
[15] [0]
(0.0) (0) r2089 [4]
1 (0.0)
[1] 1 1
1

Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [4].15

3 Function diagrams
0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) fp_9372_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 9372 -
Status words, free interconnection 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
607
3 Function diagrams
3.7 Internal control/status words

3.7 Internal control/status words

Function diagrams

2501 – Control word sequence control (r0898) 609

2503 – Status word sequence control (r0899) 610

2505 – Control word, setpoint channel (r1198) 611

2510 – Status word 1 (r0052) 612

2511 – Status word 2 (r0053) 613

2512 – Control word 1 (r0054) 614

2513 – Supplementary control word (r0055) 615

2520 – Control word, speed controller (r1406) 616

2522 – Status word, speed controller (r1407) 617

2526 – Status word, closed-loop control (r0056) 618

2530 – Status word, current control (r1408) 619

2534 – Status word monitoring functions 1 (r2197) 620

2536 – Status word monitoring functions 2 (r2198) 621

2537 – Status word monitoring functions 3 (r2199) 622

2546 – Control word, faults/alarms (r2138) 623

2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 (r2139 and r2135) 624

2610 – Sequence control - sequencer 625

2634 – Sequence control - missing enable signals, line contactor control 626

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

608 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-42
PROFIdrive-Bit

OFF2 S_src 1 STW seq_ctrl

<2> p0844 [C] r0898
Bit No. Control word sequence control (r0898)
<3> (2090.1) r0898

OFF2 S_src 2 ON / OFF (OFF1) p0840 [C]

(2090.0) = ON To control word 1 [2512.4]
<3> 0 0 = OFF1 active r0898.0
2501 – Control word sequence control (r0898)

p0845 [C]
(1)
1 = Operating condition, no coast down active (OFF2 inactive)
1 r0898.1 To control word 1 [2512.4]
0 = OFF2 active
OFF3 S_src 1
1 = Operating condition, no quick stop active (OFF3 inactive)
<2> p0848 [C] 2 r0898.2 To control word 1 [2512.4]
0 = OFF3 active
<3> (2090.2)
Operation enable p0852 [C]
OFF3 S_src 2 <3> (2090.3) 3 1 = Enable operation r0898.3 To control word 1 [2512.4]
p0849 [C]
(1) RFG enable p1140 [C]
To control word 1 [2512.4]
<3> (2090.4) 4 1 = Enable ramp-function generator r0898.4
To the setpoint channel
[3060.6], [3070.7], [3080.5]
Continue RFG p1141 [C]
1 = Continue ramp-function generator To control word 1 [2512.4]
<3> (2090.5) 5 r0898.5
0 = Freeze ramp-function generator To the setpoint channel [3060.1], [3070.1]
Setpoint enable p1142 [C]
To control word 1 [2512.4]
<3> (2090.6) 6 1 = Enable speed setpoint r0898.6
To the setpoint channel
[3060.1], [3070.1], [3080.4]
Uncond open brake p0855 [C]
<3> (0) 7 1 = Command open brake r0898.7 To the brake control [2701.4]

Jog bit 0 p1055 [C]

To control word 1 [2512.4]
<3> (0) 8 1 = Jog 1 r0898.8 To jog [3030.6]
Jog bit 1 p1056 [C]
<3> (0) 9 1 = Jog 2 r0898.9 To control word 1 [2512.4]
To jog [3030.6]
Master ctrl by PLC p0854 [C]
<3> (2090.10) 10 1 = Control via PLC <1> r0898.10 To control word 1 [2512.4]

11 Reserved

n_ctrl enable p0856 [C]

<3> (1) 12 1 = Speed controller enable r0898.12 To the brake control [2701.4]
To the torque setpoint [6060.4]

3.7 Internal control/status words

13 Reserved

Uncond close brake p0858 [C]

<3> (0) 14 1 = Command close brake r0898.14 To the brake control [2701.4]
<1> Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to ensure that the drive
accepts the process data.
15 Reserved

3 Function diagrams
<2> PROFIdrive interconnection:
For PROFIdrive standard telegrams, the upper inputs are connected
with PROFIdrive-STW1 [2420].
Only relevant for CDS0.
<3> When the master control is retrieved, predefined by STARTER or IOP.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2501_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 2501 -
Control word, sequence control (r0898) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
609
610

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-43
PROFIdrive-Bit
ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899
Bit No. Status word sequence control (r0899)
r0899

From sequence control 1 = Ready for switch on [2510.1]

[2610] 0 r0899.0
2503 – Status word sequence control (r0899)

From sequence control 1 = Ready (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) [2510.1]
[2610] 1 r0899.1

From sequence control 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) [2510.1], [4015.1]
[2610] 2 r0899.2

From sequence control 1 = Jog active

[2610] 3 r0899.3

OFF2 S_src 2 From sequence control 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) [2510.1], [2701.1]
[2610] 4 r0899.4
p0845 [C]
(1)
From sequence control
5 1 = No quick stop active (OFF3 inactive) r0899.5 [2510.1]
OFF3 S_src 2 [2610]
p0849 [C]
From sequence control
(1) 6 1 = Switching on inhibited active r0899.6 [2510.1], [2701.1]
[2610]

OFF1
& 7 1 = Drive ready r0899.7 [2510.1]
OFF2
1 From sequence control
8 1 = Controller enable r0899.8
OFF3 [2610]

Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process

9 1 = Control requested <1> r0899.9
data
Enable internal
missing or Reserved
fault with 10
this reaction
From sequence control
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

[2610] 11 1 = Pulses enabled r0899.11

From the brake control [2701.8] 12 1 = Open holding brake r0899.12 [2510.1]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

From the brake control [2701.8] 13 1 = Command close holding brake r0899.13

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

<1> The drive is ready to accept data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2503_97_57.vsd Function diagram
- 2503 -
Status word, sequence control (r0899) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-44 STW setpoint chan

r1198
Bit No. Control word setpoint channel (r1198)
r1198
n_set_fixed Bit 0 p1020 [C]
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2], [3011.2]
(0) 0 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0 r1198.0 To control word 2 [2513.2]
2505 – Control word, setpoint channel (r1198)

n_set_fixed Bit 1 p1021 [C]

To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2], [3011.2]
(0) 1 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 1 r1198.1 To control word 2 [2513.2]
n_set_fixed Bit 2 p1022 [C]
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2], [3011.2]
(0) 2 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 2 r1198.2 To control word 2 [2513.2]
n_set_fixed Bit 3 p1023 [C]
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2], [3011.2]
(0) 3 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 3 r1198.3 To control word 2 [2513.2]

4 Reserved

Inhib neg dir p1110 [C]

To direction of rotation limiting and
(0) 5 1 = Inhibit negative direction of rotation r1198.5
direction of rotation reversal [3040.3]
Inhib pos dir p1111 [C]
To direction of rotation limiting and
(0) 6 1 = Inhibit positive direction of rotation r1198.6
direction of rotation reversal [3040.5]

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved

Setp inv p1113 [C]

To direction of rotation limiting and
(2090.11) 11 1 = Setpoint inversion r1198.11
direction of rotation reversal [3040.2]

12 Reserved

Mop raise p1035 [C] To control word 1 [2512.4]

3.7 Internal control/status words

(2090.13) 13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise r1198.13
To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
Mop lower p1036 [C] To control word 1 [2512.4]
(2090.14) 14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower r1198.14
To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
Bypass RFG p1122 [C]
(0) 15 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator r1198.15 To the ramp-function generator [3060.1], [3070.1]

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2505_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 2505 -
Control word, setpoint channel (r1198) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
611
612

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-45 ZSW 1
r0052
Bit No. Status word 1 (r0052)
r0052
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.0 0 1 = Ready for switch on r0052.0
2510 – Status word 1 (r0052)

r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.1 1 1 = Ready (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) r0052.1

r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.2 2 1 = Operation enabled (voltage at output terminals) r0052.2 [7958.1]

r2139
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 1 Signal is inverted if connected to a Digital
r2139.3 3 1 = Fault present (pulses inhibited) <1> r0052.3 Output.
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.4 4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) r0052.4

r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.5 5 1 = No quick stop active (OFF3 inactive) r0052.5

r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.6 6 1 = Switching on inhibited active r0052.6

r2139
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 1
r2139.7 7 1 = Alarm present r0052.7

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.7 8 0 = Deviation setpoint/actual speed r0052.8

r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.7 9 1 = Control request r0052.9

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1 1 = Maximum speed reached (f_act • p1082 (f_max))
r2197.6 10 r0052.10
0 = f_act < p1082 (f_max)
r0056
[2526.7] ZSW cl-loop ctrl
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r0056.13 11 0 = I, M, P limit reached r0052.11

r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.12 12 1 = Motor holding brake open r0052.12
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

r2135
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 2
r2135.14 13 0 = Alarm motor overtemperature r0052.13

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.3 14 1 = Motor rotates forwards r0052.14

r2135
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 2
r2135.15 15 0 = Alarm drive converter overload r0052.15

<1> When p1210 > 0, the source is r1214.10.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2510_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 2510 -
Status word 1 (r0052) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-46 ZSW 2

r0053
Bit No. Status word 2 (r0053)
r0053
r1239
[7017.5] DCBRK ZSW
r1239.8 0 1 = DC braking active r0053.0
2511 – Status word 2 (r0053)

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.5 1 1 = |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) r0053.1

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.0 2 1 = |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) r0053.2

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.8 3 1 = I_act • p2170 r0053.3

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.2 4 1 = |n_act| > p2155 r0053.4

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.1 5 1 = |n_act| ” p2155 r0053.5

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.4 6 1 = |n_act| • r1119 (n_set) r0053.6

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.9 7 1 = Vdc ” p2172 r0053.7

r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.10 8 1 = Vdc > p2172 r0053.8

r1199
[3080.7] RFG ZSW
r1199.2 9 1 = Ramping finished r0053.9

r2349
[7958.7] Tec_ctrl status
r2349.10 10 1 = Technology controller output at the lower limit r0053.10

r2349
[7958.7] Tec_ctrl status
r2349.11 11 1 = Technology controller output at the upper limit r0053.11

12 Reserved

3.7 Internal control/status words

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2511_97_59.vsd Function diagram
- 2511 -
Status word 2 (r0053) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
613
614

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-47 OFF2 S_src 1
STW 1
p0844 [C] r0054
Bit No. Control word 1 (r0054)
(2090.1) STW seq_ctrl r0054
ON / OFF (OFF1) p0840 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
OFF2 S_src 2 (2090.0) 0 = OFF1, Shutdown via ramp, followed by pulse inhibit Sequence control
r0898.0 0
2512 – Control word 1 (r0054)

p0845 [C] 1 = ON, operating condition (edge-controlled) Setpoint channel

(1) r0898 [2501.7]
1 = OFF2: Electrical stop, pulse inhibit, motor coasts down
r0898.1 1 Sequence control
0 = Operating condition
OFF3 S_src 1 r0898 [2501.7]
1 = OFF3: Quick stop Sequence control
p0848 [C] r0898.2 2
0 = Operating condition Setpoint channel
(2090.2) Operation enable p0852 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
OFF3 S_src 2 (2090.3)
r0898.3 3 1 = Operation enable Sequence control
p0849 [C]
(1) RFG enable p1140 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
(2090.4)
r0898.4 4 1 = Ramp-function generator enable Setpoint channel
1st acknowledge Continue RFG p1141 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
p2103 [C] (2090.5)
r0898.5 5 1 = Continue ramp-function generator Setpoint channel
(2090.7)
Setpoint enable p1142 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
(2090.6)
2nd acknowledge r0898.6 6 1 = Speed setpoint enable Setpoint channel
p2104 [C]
r2138 [2546.7]
(722.2)
r2138.7 7 1 = Acknowledge fault Sequence control
3rd acknowledge Jog bit 0 p1055 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
p2105 [C] (0) Sequence control
r0898.8 8 1 = Jog bit 0
(0) Setpoint channel
Jog bit 1 p1056 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
(0) Sequence control
Pulse generator r0898.9 9 1 = Jog bit 1
Setpoint channel
Master ctrl by PLC p0854 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
(2090.10) Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to ensure
r0898.10 10 1 = Master ctrl by PLC that the drive accepts the process
Setp inv p1113 [C] data.
r1198 [2505.7]
(2090.11)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r1198.11 11 1 = Directions reversal (setpoint) Setpoint channel

12 Reserved
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Mop raise p1035 [C] r1198 [2505.7]

(2090.13)
r1198.13 13 1 = Motorized potentiometer raise Setpoint channel
Mop lower p1036 [C] r1198 [2505.7]
(2090.14)
r1198.14 14 1 = Motorized potentiometer lower Setpoint channel

r0836 [8560.7]
r0836.0 15 1 = CDS bit 0 Sequence control

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2512_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 2512 -
Control word 1 (r0054) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-48 Suppl STW

r0055
Bit No. Supplementary control word (r0055)
r0055
r1198
[2505.7] STW setpoint chan
r1198.0 0 1 = Fixed setp bit 0 Fixed speed values
2513 – Supplementary control word (r0055)

r1198
[2505.7] STW setpoint chan
r1198.1 1 1 = Fixed setp bit 1 Fixed speed values

r1198
[2505.7] STW setpoint chan
r1198.2 2 1 = Fixed setp bit 2 Fixed speed values

r1198
[2505.7] STW setpoint chan
r1198.3 3 1 = Fixed setp bit 3 Fixed speed values

r0837
[8565.7] DDS selected
r0837.0 4 1 = DDS select. bit 0 Sequence control

r0837
[8565.7] DDS selected
r0837.1 5 1 = DDS select. bit 1 Sequence control

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

r2349
[7958.5] Tec_ctrl status
r2349.0 8 1 = Technology controller enable Technology controller

r1239
DCBRK ZSW
r1239.11 9 1 = DC brake enable DC braking control

10 Reserved

r1406
[2520.7] STW n_ctrl
r1406.11 11 1 = Droop enable Speed control

r1406
[2520.7] STW n_ctrl
r1406.12 12 1 = Torque control active Speed/torque control

r2138
[2546.7] STW fault/alarm

3.7 Internal control/status words

r2138.13 13 0 = External fault 1 (F07860) Sequence control

14 Reserved

r0836
[8560.7] CDS selected
r0836.0 15 1 = CDS bit 1 Sequence control

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2513_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2513 -
Supplementary control word (r0055) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
615
616

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-49 STW n_ctrl
r1406
Bit No. Control word speed controller (r1406)
r1406

0 Reserved
2520 – Control word, speed controller (r1406)

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

n_ctrl integ stop p1476 [C]

(0) 4 1 = speed controller, hold I component r1406.4 [6040.2]

n_ctrl integ set p1477 [C]

(0) 5 1 = speed controller, set I component r1406.5 [6040.2]

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved

Droop enable p1492 [C]

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

(0) 11 1 = Droop enable r1406.11 [2513.2], [6030.1]

Changeov n/M_ctrl p1501 [C]

(0) 12 1 = Closed-loop torque control active r1406.12 [2513.2], [2522.1], [6060.1]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 1 = Speed adaptation controller set I-comp. r1406.15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2520_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2520 -
Control word, speed controller (r1406) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-50 ZSW n_ctrl

r1407
Bit No. Status word, speed controller (r1407)
r1407

0 1 = U/f control active r1407.0

2522 – Status word, speed controller (r1407)

From the changeover, 1 1 = Sensorless operation active r1407.1

closed-loop control types

From the torque setpoint [6060.3] 2 1 = Closed-loop torque control active r1407.2
To speed setpoint, droop [6030.6]
To speed signals 2 [8011.4]
From the speed controller [6040.7] 3 1 = Closed-loop speed control active r1407.3

... Reserved

From the speed controller [6040.7] 5 1 = Speed controller, I component held r1407.5

From the speed controller [6040.7] 6 1 = Speed controller, I component set r1407.6

From the torque setpoint [6060.8] 7 1 = Torque limit reached r1407.7

From the torque setpoint [6060.5], [6060.8] 8 1 = Torque limiting, upper, active r1407.8

From the torque setpoint [6060.5], [6060.8] 9 1 = Torque limiting, lower, active r1407.9 To ramp-function generator tracking [3080.1]
To speed controller [6040.4]
To motor locked/stalled [8012.5]
From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.3] 10 1 = Droop enabled r1407.10

From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.4], [6030.5] 11 1 = Speed setpoint limited r1407.11

12 1 = Ramp-function generator set r1407.12

13 1 = Sensorless operation due to a fault r1407.13

14 1 = I/f control active r1407.14

From the torque setpoint [6060.5] 15 1 = Torque limit reached (without pre-control) r1407.15

... Reserved

From the speed limiting [6640.8] 17 1 = Speed limiting control active r1407.17

... Reserved

3.7 Internal control/status words

23 1 = Acceleration model activated r1407.23

From the moment of inertia estimator [6035.4], [6823.4] 24 1 = Moment of inertia estimator active r1407.24

From the moment of inertia estimator [6035.4], [6823.4] 25 1 = Load estimator active r1407.25

3 Function diagrams
From the moment of inertia estimator [6035.4], [6823.4] 26 1 = Moment of inertia estimator stabilized r1407.26

27 1 = moment of inertia estimator is actively accelerating the motor r1407.27

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2522_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2522 -
Status word, speed controller (r1407) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
617
618

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-51 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056
Bit No. Status word closed-loop control (r0056)
r0056

0 1 = Initialization completed r0056.0

2526 – Status word, closed-loop control (r0056)

1 1 = De-magnetization completed r0056.1

2 1 = Pulse enable available r0056.2

3 1 = Soft starting available <1> r0056.3

[6722.6] 4 1 = Magnetization completed r0056.4 [2701.1]

[6301.4] 5 1 = Starting boost active r0056.5

[6301.2] 6 1 = Acceleration voltage active <1> r0056.6

[6730.4], [6731.4] 7 1 = Frequency, negative r0056.7 [6710.5]

[6722.3] 8 1 = Field weakening active r0056.8

[6714.8] 9 1 = Voltage limit active r0056.9

[6310.8] 10 1 = Slip limiting active <1> r0056.10

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

[6730.4], [6731.4] 11 1 = Frequency limit active r0056.11

12 1 = Current limiting controller, voltage output active <1> r0056.12 [8012.5]

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

[6060.8] 13 1 = Current/torque limiting active <1> r0056.13 [2510.1], [8012.5]

[6220.8], [6320.8] 14 1 = Vdc_max controller active <2> r0056.14 [6031.6], [6710.1]

[6220.8], [6320.8] 15 1 = Vdc_min controller active <2> r0056.15 [6710.1]

<1> Only for U/f control.

<2> Only for Power Modules PM230/PM240.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2526_97_66.vsd Function diagram
- 2526 -
Status word, closed-loop control (r0056) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-52 ZSW I_ctrl

r1408
Bit No. Status word current control (r1408)
r1408

0 1 = Current controller active r1408.0

2530 – Status word, current control (r1408)

[6714.5] 1 1 = Id controller I comp. limitation r1408.1

2 Reserved

[6714.8] 3 1 = Voltage limitation r1408.3

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

[6730.3] 10 1 = Speed adaptation limitation r1408.10

11 Reserved

r2198
[2536.7] ZSW monitor 2
r2198.7 12 1 = Motor stalled r1408.12

3.7 Internal control/status words

13 1 = Separately-excited synchronous motor is excited r1408.13

14 1 = Current model SESM: Magnetizing excitation current set to 0 r1408.14

15 Reserved

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2530_97_64.vsd Function diagram
- 2530 -
Status word, current control (r1408) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
619
620

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-53 ZSW monitor 1
r2197
Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 1 (r2197)
r2197

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 0 1 = |n_act| ” n_min p1080 r2197.0 [2511.2]

2534 – Status word monitoring functions 1 (r2197)

From speed signals [8010.8] 1 1 = |n_act| ” speed threshold value 2 (p2155) <1> r2197.1 [2511.2]

1 2 1 = |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 (p2155) <1> r2197.2 [2511.2]

From speed signals [8011.8] 3 1 = n_act • 0 r2197.3 [2510.2]

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 4 1 = |n_act| • n_set r2197.4 [2511.2]

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 5 1 = |n_act| ” n_standstill p1226 r2197.5 [2511.2]

From speed signals [8010.8] 6 1 = |n_act| > n_max r2197.6 [2510.2], [8023.1]

From speed signals [8011.8] 7 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off r2197.7 [2510.2]

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 8 1 = I_act • I_threshold p2170 r2197.8 [2511.2]

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 9 1 = Vdc_act ” Vdc_threshold p2172 r2197.9 [2511.2]

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 10 1 = Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold p2172 r2197.10 [2511.2]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 11 1 = Load missing r2197.11

From monitoring functions [8023.8] 12 1 = |n_act| > n_max (with delay) r2197.12
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

13 1 = |n_act| > n_max (F07901) r2197.13

<1> n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2534_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 2534 -
Status word, monitoring functions 1 (r2197) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-54 ZSW monitor 2

r2198
Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 2 (r2198)
r2198

From monitoring functions [8023.8] 0 1 = |n_act| ” speed threshold 5 r2198.0

2536 – Status word monitoring functions 2 (r2198)

From monitoring functions [8023.8] 1 1 = |n_act| > speed threshold 5 r2198.1

From monitoring functions [8023.8] 2 1 = |n_act| ” speed threshold 6 r2198.2

From monitoring functions [8023.8] 3 1 = |n_act| > speed threshold 6 r2198.3

From speed signals [8011.8] 4 1 = |n_set| < p2161 r2198.4

From speed signals [8011.8] 5 1 = n_set > 0 r2198.5

From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 6 1 = Motor blocked r2198.6

From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 7 1 = Motor stalled r2198.7 [2530.2]

From monitoring functions [8022.8] 8 1 = |I_act| < I_threshold p2170 r2198.8

From monitoring functions [8023.8] 9 1 = |M_act| > torque threshold 1 and n_set reached r2198.9

From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.3] 10 1 = |M_set| < torque threshold 1 (p2174) r2198.10

From load monitoring [8013.8] 11 1 = Load monitoring signals an alarm r2198.11

From load monitoring [8013.8] 12 1 = Load monitoring signals a fault r2198.12

3.7 Internal control/status words

From monitoring functions [8023.8] 13 1 = |M_act| > torque threshold 1 r2198.13

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2536_97_63.vsd Function diagram
- 2536 -
Status word, monitoring functions 2 (r2198) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
621
622

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-55
PROFIdrive-Bit
ZSW monitor 3
r2199
Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 3 (r2199)
r2199

From speed signals [8010.8] 0 1 = |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 (p2161) <1> r2199.0
2537 – Status word monitoring functions 3 (r2199)

From speed signals [8010.8] 1 1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141) r2199.1

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

From speed signals [8011.8] 4 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on r2199.4

From speed signals [8011.8] 5 1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed r2199.5 [8012.1], [8023.1]

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

From speed signals [8012.5] 11 1 = Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 (p2194) r2199.11

12 Reserved
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

<1> n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2537_97_63.vsd Function diagram
- 2537 -
Status word, monitoring functions 3 (r2199) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-56
PROFIdrive-Bit
STW fault/alarm
r2138
Bit No. Control word, faults/alarms
r2138

0 Reserved
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms (r2138)

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

1st acknowledge
p2103 [C] 5 Reserved
(2090.7)
6 Reserved
2nd acknowledge
p2104 [C]
(722.2) 7 1 = Acknowledge fault r2138.7 [2512.4], [8060.1]

3rd acknowledge
p2105 [C] 8 Reserved
(0)
9 Reserved
Pulse generator
External alarm 1 p2112 [C]
(1) 1 10 1 = External alarm 1 (A07850) effective r2138.10 [8065.1]

External fault 3 External alarm 2 p2116 [C]

Ext fault 3 t_on
p2108 [C] 0 ... 1000 [ms] (1) 1 11 1 = External alarm 2 (A07851) effective r2138.11 [8065.1]
(1) p3110 (0)
External alarm 3 p2117 [C]
Ext fault 3 enab (1) 1 12 1 = External alarm 3 (A07852) effective r2138.12 [8065.1]
p3111 [C] T 0
(1) External fault 1 p2106 [C]

3.7 Internal control/status words

(1) 1 13 1 = External fault 1 (F07860) effective r2138.13 [2513.2], [8060.1]
Ext flt 3 enab neg
p3112 [C] External fault 2 p2107 [C]
(0) (1) 1 14 1 = External fault 2 (F07861) effective r2138.14 [8060.1]

1 15 1 = External fault 3 (F07862) effective r2138.15 [8060.1]

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2546_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 2546 -
Control word, faults/alarms (r2138) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
623
624

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-57 ZSW fault/alarm 1
r2139
Bit No. Status word, faults/alarms 1
r2139

0 1 = Acknowledgment running r2139.0

2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 (r2139 and r2135)

1 1 = Acknowledgment required r2139.1

... Reserved

From the fault buffer [8060.6] 3 1 = Fault present r2139.3 [2510.2]

... Reserved

6 1 = Internal signal 1 present r2139.6

From the alarm buffer [8065.4] 7 1 = Alarm present r2139.7 [2510.2]

8 1 = Internal signal 2 present r2139.8

... Reserved

From the alarm buffer [8065.4] 11 1 = Alarm class bit 0 r2139.11

From the alarm buffer [8065.4] 12 1 = Alarm class bit 1 r2139.12

From the alarm buffer [8065.4] 13 1 = Maintenance required r2139.13

From the alarm buffer [8065.4] 14 1 = Maintenance urgently required r2139.14

From the fault buffer [8060.6] 15 1 = Fault gone/can be acknowledged r2139.15

ZSW fault/alarm 2
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r2135
Bit No. Status word, faults/alarms 2
r2135
0
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

... Reserved
11

From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 12 1 = Fault motor overtemperature r2135.12

From the thermal monitoring, power module [8021.8] 13 1 = Fault, thermal overload, power module r2135.13

From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 14 1 = Alarm motor overtemperature r2135.14 [2510.2]

From the thermal monitoring, power module [8021.8] 15 1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module r2135.15 [2510.2]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2548_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2548 -
Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 (r2139 and r2135) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-58
p0857 … p0861 POWER ON <1>
<2> Pulse enable HW 2000.00 µs
1 Fault with OFF1- or
<4> [2701.8]
1 OFF3 response ...
S1: Switching on inhibited Drive at standstill
ZSWA.06 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0 From all states
ZSWA.00/01/02 = 0
2610 – Sequence control - sequencer

"0 = OFF" (STWA.00) Drive at standstill

Pulses inhibited "0 = Coast Stop" (STWA.01)
<3> <4> "0 = Coast Stop" (STWA.01) <3> <4> Pulse enable HW
"0 = Quick Stop" (STWA.02) <5> r0046.8 safety enable missing
•1 [2701.8]
1 1
<5> r0046.8 safety enable missing
& <3> "0 = Coast Stop" (STWA.01)
[2634]
<4> "0 = Quick Stop" (STWA.02)
[2634] 1
"Commissioning completed" (p0010 = 0)
<5> r0046.8 safety enable missing <4> <6>
[2634] "0 = Quick Stop"
<4> 1 1 S5b:Quick Stop
(STWA.02)
S2: Ready for switching on ZSWA.00/01 = 1
<3> <4> ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.00 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Main contactor is OPEN Bring the drive to n ” 0 along
Wait for power-up or jog Pulse enable HW the ramp-function generator,
[2701.8]
1 1 then inhibit the pulses
"0 = Coast Stop" "0 = OFF"
<3> <4>
(STWA.01) Jog 1 1 "0 = OFF" Drive at
"0 = Quick Stop" Jog 2 Jog 1 &
<3> <4>
(STWA.02)
1 Jog 2
standstill

<5> r0046.8 safety enable <4>

S5c: Jogging -
[2634] missing S3:Ready for operation down ramp
ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0 <6>
ZSWA.00/01 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
ZSWA.11 = 1
Closed-loop control ZSWA.02/06 = 0
1 = Energize contactor Wait for "Enable operation" <4>
operation Bring the drive to n ” 0 along
r0863.1 r0863.0 S5a: Ramp stop the ramp-function generator,
then inhibit the pulses
VDC charged ZSWA.00/01 = 1
& ZSWA.11 = 1 <6>
No PM_fault Enable operation ZSWA.02/06 = 0
<4> Enable operation (STWA.03) & 1 1
(STWA.03) Bring the drive to n ” 0 along
De-magnetization completed the ramp-function generator, 1 = Controller
then inhibit the pulses enable
<3> "0 = Coast Stop" (r0046.27 = 0)
<4>
<4> (STWA.01) 1 r0899.8
•1 No jogging

3.7 Internal control/status words

Jog 1 Jog 1
S4: Operation
<5> r0046.8 safety enable ZSWA.00/01/02 = 1
& 1 Jog 2 & [2503.3]
[2634] missing "0 = OFF" Jog 2 Jogging
OFF2 (has priority over jogging) ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.06 = 0

<1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics supply OFF --> ON or RESET button. Pulses enabled
Controller enabled
<2> The sequence control is implemented according to the PROFIdrive profile.

3 Function diagrams
No jog operation: Setpoints enabled OFF3 (has priority over jogging)
<3> These control commands can also be triggered by a fault response.
<4> STWA.xx = control word, sequence control, bit xx (r0898) [2501]; ZSWA.xx = status word, sequence control bit xx (r0899) [2503]. Faults
Missing enable
F07300...F07802 [2634]
<5> Only if "Safety Integrated" is active. signals (r0046)
F6000
<6> The parameters p1226, p1227 and p1228 influence this status.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2610_97_57.vsd Function diagram
- 2610 -
Sequence control - Sequencer 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
625
626

3.7 Internal control/status words

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-59
2000.00 µs
Missing enable sig
r0046 Control Unit
Bit No. Missing enable signals (r0046)
r0046
0 1 = OFF1 enable missing r0046.0 [3020.5]
2634 – Sequence control - missing enable signals, line contactor control

1 1 = OFF2 enable missing r0046.1

Line supply
2 1 = OFF3 enable missing r0046.2 [3060.2]
0 = Internal quick stop [3060.4]
3 1 = Operation enable missing r0046.3 Fault with OFF3 response 1 [3070.2]
[3070.4]
4 1 = DC current brake, enable missing r0046.4

... Reserved

8 1 = Safety enable missing r0046.8 1 = Internal RFG enable [3060.2]

1 [3070.2]
... Reserved

10 1 = Ramp-function generator enable missing r0046.10

11 1 = Ramp-function generator start missing r0046.11

Energize line contactor
DO
12 1 = Setpoint enable missing r0046.12 [2610.4] r0863.1 +24 V
Line contactor control [2242]
... Reserved from sequence control

16 1 = OFF1 enable internal missing r0046.16 Line contact feedb

p0860 DI
17 1 = OFF2 enable internal missing r0046.17 (863.1) 1
18 1 = OFF3 enable internal missing r0046.18 [2220], [2221]

19 1 = Pulse enable internal missing r0046.19 ON/OFF monitoring

LineContact t_mon
20 1 = DC current brake, internal enable missing r0046.20 p0861

21 1 = PU enable missing r0046.21

F07300 "Line
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

T 0 contactor
... Reserved 1 Converter
feedback signal
26 1 = Drive inactive or not operational missing"
r0046. 26
Time monitoring
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

27 1 = De-magnetizing not completed r0046. 27

28 1 = Brake open missing r0046. 28 Operating monitoring

... Reserved

30 1 = Speed controller inhibited r0046.30

&
31 1 = Jog setpoint active r0046.31

&

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words fp_2634_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2634 -
Sequence control - Missing enable signals, line contactor control 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
 3 Function diagrams
3.8 Brake control

3.8 Brake control

Function diagrams

2701 – Basic brake control 628

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 627
628

3.8 Brake control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-60
STW seq_ctrl
p0858 r0898
Pulse suppr t_del 1 = Unconditionally close Close "normal" brake
0.000 ... 299.000 [s] r0898.14
RESET [2501.3] the holding brake
p1228 (0.010) STW seq_ctrl
(Q=0) Q ZSW seq_ctrl
p0856 r0898
1 = Enable speed Close brake RESET r0899 <7>
r0898.12
n_act [rpm] 1 T 0 controller (Q=0) Q r0899.13 [2503.3]
SET
2701 – Basic brake control

r0063[0] Q p1215 = 0 1 = Command, close holding brake

(Q=1)
unsmoothed <1>
0 1 Open brake SET
Q
1 = Open the holding brake
(Q=1) [2503.3]
& ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899 <4>
r0899.12 [2503.3]
n_standst n_thresh
0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] n_standst t_monit 1 = Holding brake open
p1226 [D] (20.00) 0.000 ... 300.000 [s] <2>
p1227 (300.000) Brake t_close
0 ... 10000 [ms]
n_set before filt. p1217 (100)
[rpm] 1 T 0
[6030.2] r0060
0 T 0

& RESET
OFF 1 present 1 (Q=0) Q
<6>
OFF 3 present 1
Pulse enable HW
ZSW seq_ctrl
& SET
Q
(Q=1) [6730.6], [6731.6]
r0899 1 = No coast down active
[2503.7] r0899.4
Pulse enable
<3> <2> <8>
STW seq_ctrl Brake t_open
STW seq_ctrl 0 ... 10000 [ms]
p0852 r0898 1 = Operation enabled RESET 1 = Unconditionally Missing enable sig
[2501.3] r0898 .3
1 (Q=0) Q
p0855 r0898
open the holding brake p1216 (100)
[2501.3] r0898 .7 RESET r0046
ZSW seq_ctrl (Q=0) Q r0046 .21 <5>
r0899 SET T 0 PU enable internal missing
1 = Switching on & Q 1
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

[2503.7] r0899.6 (Q=1)

inhibited active p1215 = 2 SET
ZSW cl-loop ctrl & (Q=1)
Q
r0056 <1>
1 = Magnetizing completed
[2526.6] r0056.4
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856, sequence control.
<2> If p1215 = 0, 2 -> t = 0 ms.
<3> Only if "Safety Integrated" is active.
<4> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal.
<5> r0046.21 = 0, as long as r0046.0 = 1 (OFF1 enable missing or switching on inhibited).
r0046.21 = 1, if p0858 = 1 or p0856 = 0.
The signal generation is shown simplified.
<6> The internal signal includes signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3 (e. g. BICO or fault response).
<7> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215) the drive does not wait while the brake is released or applied.
<8> Start frequency with U/f control: p1351, p1352 [6310.6]; Start torque with vector control: p1475 [6040.3].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Brake Control fp_2701_97_57.vsd Function diagram
- 2701 -
Basic brake control 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
 3 Function diagrams
3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

Function diagrams

2800 – Parameter manager 630

2802 – Monitoring functions and faults/alarms 631

2804 – Status words 632

2810 – STO (Safe Torque Off) (Part 1) 633

2812 – STO (Safe Torque Off) (Part 2) - PM240-2 FS D-F 634

2813 – F-DI (Fail-safe Digital Input) 635

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 629
630

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-61 Changing safety parameters

Safety commissioning mode

2800 – Parameter manager

SI act chksm P1 SI setp_chksm P1

[2802.1], [2810.3] r9798 p9799
--> select STO

Safety parameterizing =
enable
Safety Integrated commissioning
p0010 = 95
SI password inp Enter password Safety parameters Safety parameters
p9761 & can be changed. & are valid.

SI password new x =
p9762 Checksum check
y for safety
parameters

SET
= y=x
Effective password
SI ackn password
p9763
=

SI act_chksm P2 SI setp_chksm P2
r9898 p9899
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Resetting safety parameters p0010  95

Exit safety
commissioning
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

mode
Inhibit safety functions
Safety parameters
SI enable fct P1 (except of the
p9601 = 0
[2810.1] password) can be
SI enable fct P2 reset to the factory
p9801 = 0 settings via p0970,
[2810.1] p3900.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Basic Functions fp_2800_97_63.vsd Function diagram
- 2800 -
Parameter Manager 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-62
Safety Integrated version Monitoring clock cycle

SI version Drv P1 SI mon_clk cyc P1 [ms]

2802 – Monitoring functions and faults/alarms

r9770 r9780

F01611
[2810.1] STO-Klemme P1 (r0722.4) Safety monitoring functions F30611
1 = Faults with response "NONE"
STOP F
[2810.1] STO terminal P2 (r0722.5)
1 = STOP F active
r9772.15 [2804.1]
[2800.3] Safety commissioning mode Faults/alarms
P1: F/A01600 ... 01699
P2: F/A30600 ... 30699 1 = STOP F active
1 = STOP A active
r9872.15 [2804.4]
[2810.6] DIAG_U 1 r9772.10 [2804.2]

1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse suppression"

[2810.6] DIAG_L 1 = STOP A active
r9872.10 [2804.5]

1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse suppression"

Additional diagnostic that cannot be acknowledged
information

SI CDC_list P1 SI diag STOP F P1

r9794 r9795
1 = STOP A
To Safe Torque Off
Cross checking list Diagnostics for STOP F [2810.3]

F01600/F30600
1 "STOP A initiated"

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active
r9772.9 [2804.2]

1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active

r9872.9 [2804.5]

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Basic Functions fp_2802_97_69.vsd Function diagram
- 2802 -
Monitoring functions and faults/alarms 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
631
632

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-63 Status word Safety Integrated Status word Safety Integrated Processor2 Status word Safety Integrated
Processor 1 SI status P1 SI Status P2 Processor 1 and Processor 2 SI status P1+P2
r9772 r9872 r9773
Bit No. Status (Processor 1) Bit No. Status (Processor 2) Bit No. Status (Processor 1 + Processor 2)
r9772 r9872 r9773
2804 – Status words

[2810.4] 0 1 = STO selected on Processor 1 [2810.4] 0 1 = STO selected on Processor 2 & 0 1 = STO selected in drive

[2810.7] 1 1 = STO active on Processor 1 [2810.6] 1 1 = STO active on Processor 2 & 1 1 = STO active in drive

... Reserved ... Reserved ... Reserved

1 = STO terminal state on Processor 1 (Basic 1 = PM terminals shutdown paths must be
[2810.2] 7 [2810.2] 7 1 = STO terminal state on Processor 2 [2810.6] 30
Functions) tested <1>
8 Reserved 8 Reserved [2810.5] 31 1 = The shutdown paths must be tested

[2802.7] 9 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active [2802.7] 9 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active

[2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active [2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active

... Reserved ... Reserved

[2802.5] 15 1 = STOP F active [2802.5] 15 1 = STOP F active

[2800.3] 16 1 = STO cause: Safety commissioning mode [2800.3] 16 1 = STO cause: Safety commissioning mode

1 = STO cause: selection via terminal (Basic 1 = STO cause: selection via terminal (Basic
[2810.2] 17 Functions) [2810.2] 17 Functions)
1 = STO cause: selection via motion 1 = STO cause: selection via motion
[2810.2] 18 monitoring functions [2810.2] 18 monitoring functions

[2819.8] 19 1 = STO cause: actual value missing 19 Reserved

1 = STO cause: selection PROFIsafe (Basic 1 = STO cause: selection PROFIsafe (Basic
[2810.2] 20 Functions) [2810.2] 20 Functions)

21 1 = STO cause selection on processor 2 21 1 = STO cause selection on processor 1

... Reserved ... Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

1 = STO cause, selection via terminal on 1 = STO cause, selection via terminal on
[2812.6] 25 [2812.6] 25
Power Module <1> Power Module <1>
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> Only for PM240-2 FS D-F.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Basic Functions fp_2804_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2804 -
Status words 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-64
<4>
[2812.6] r9772.25
+24 V 1 = STO cause, selection via
1 = STO selected on P1 Power Module
Control Unit SI status P1 terminal on Power Module 1 r9772.0
Processor 1 r9772
1 = STOP A [2802.8] A01699
r9772.17 SI FCP Timer "Shutdown
CU DI status [2804.1] 1 0.00 ... 9000.00 [h] paths must SI status P1
KL. 16 r0722
1
p9659 (8.00) be tested" [2804.2] r9772
2810 – STO (Safe Torque Off) (Part 1)

r0722.4 & r9772.1

1 SI status P1+P2
r9772.7 <4>
Enable STO via 1 <1> T 0 r9773
[2812.3] 1 = STO active on
terminals (P1) [2802.2]
1 = STO cause:
r9773.31 1 Control Unit
[2804.4]
selection PROFIsafe 1 = Shutdown +5 V
(Basic Functions) Timer for forced paths must
PROFIsafe enabled for checking procedure
Basic Functions r9772.20 & be tested Upper IGBT
(p9601.2 = 0 and [2804.1] 0 = Request pulse suppression P1 & bridge halve
p9601.3 = 1) (P1) & &
0 = Select PROFIsafe Shutdown
path from P1 <3>
via STO <4>
[2812.5] 0 = STO_P1
1 = STO cause: selection via
motion monitoring functions

Power Module Interface

r9772.18
1 = Safety
STO initiate [2804.2] commissioning mode SI F-DI chg t P1
[2819.8] [2800.3] 0.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p9650 (500.00) Safe pulse Gating unit U
SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (p9601  0) <2> suppression
1 F01611
1 = Enable SOS/SLS p9501.0 T 0 (P1) V
=1
Control Unit SI Status P2
1 = STO
selected on P2
F30611
(P2) <4> ~
M

r9872.0 [2812.3]
Processor 2 r9872 W
1 = STOP A [2802.8] SI F-DI chg t P2 +5 V
r9872.17
CU DI status 0.00 ... 2000000.00 [µs]
1 [2804.4] 1 p9850 (500000.00)
KL. 17 r0722 Lower IGBT
r0722.5 & Monitoring for simultaneous occurrence & bridge halve
1
Enable STO via r9872.7 1 0 = Request pulse suppression P2 Shutdown
terminals (P2) [2802.2] <3>
1 = STO cause: path from P2
[2804.4] 0 = STO_P2
selection PROFIsafe
(Basic Functions)
PROFIsafe enabled for
Basic Functions r9872.20 & 1 = "STO active" for

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

(p9801.2 = 0 and [2804.4] sequence control &
p9801.3 = 1) (P2) & &
[2802.1] DIAG_L
0 = Select PROFIsafe
via STO [2802.1] DIAG_U Gating unit
<4> [2812.5]
1 = STO cause: selection via
motion monitoring functions
r9872.18 1 = Safety commissioning mode
STO initiate [2804.2] [2800.3]

3 Function diagrams
[2819.8] <1> Switch-on delay starts when the "request pulse suppression P1" is withdrawn.
<2> Redundant functions in the Processor 1 (P1) and Processor 2 (P2).
SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (p9801  0)
1 <3> Transistors inhibited for a "0" signal.
1 = Enable SOS/SLS p9301.0 <4> Only for PM240-2 FS D-F.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Basic Functions fp_2810_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2810 -
STO (Safe Torque Off) (part 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2/E-2_DP
633
634

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-65
2812 – STO (Safe Torque Off) (Part 2) - PM240-2 FS D-F
PM CU

+24 V

Power Module Interface

DIP_B 4 ms Shutdown upper Power Module
IGBT bridge FCP_dyn STO PM-T t
Enable STO p9661
halve 1 = No request pulse
p9601.7/ suppression P1
STO_B [2810.7] [2810.5] 1 = PM terminals shutdown
p9801.7
<1> paths must be tested
DIAG_U T 0
[2810.6] & r9773.30 [2804.6]
1
1
DIP_A
4 ms
0 0 A01678
SI: Test stop for STO via
STO_A [2810.7] terminals required at the PM
Shutdown lower
IGBT bridge
halve 1 = STO cause, selection via terminal on Power Module
r9772.25 [2804.1], [2810.5]

1 = STO cause, selection via onboard PM terminal

r9872.25 [2804.3]

Missing enable sig

r0046
r0046.8 [2634]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> Switch-on delay starts when the "request pulse

suppression P1" is withdrawn.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Basic Functions fp_2812_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 2812 -
STO (Safe Torque Off) (part 2) - PM240-2 FS D-F 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2/E-2_DP
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-66
2813 – F-DI (Fail-safe Digital Input)

SI F-DI chg t P1 SI F-DI chg t P2

0.00 ... 2000.00 [ms] 0.00 ... 2000000.00 [µs]
p9650 (500.00) p9850 (500000.00)
SI STO t_debou P1
Kl. 9 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
+24V OUT p9651 (1.00)
T 0
=1 [2810.6]
Kl. 16 DI 4

Kl. 69 DI COM

Kl. 17 DI 5 & F-DI 0

Kl. 34 DI COM2

Kl. 28
GND
SI STO t_debou P2
0.00 ... 100000.00 [µs]
p9851 (0.00)

3.9 Safety Integrated Basic Functions

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Basic Functions fp_2813_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2813 -
F-DI (Fail-safe Digital Input) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2/E-2_DP
635
3 Function diagrams
3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

Function diagrams

2818 – Parameter manager 637

2819 – SS1 (Safe Stop 1), internal STOP A, B, F 638

2820 – SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) 639

2823 – SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) 640

2824 – SDI (Safe Direction) 641

2840 – Control and status word 642

2850 – Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 2) 643

2855 – Extended Functions via F-DI (p9601.2 = 1 and p9601.3 = 0) 644

2858 – Extended Functions via PROFIsafe (9601.2 = 1 and 9601.3 = 1) 645

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

636 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-67 Changing safety parameters

Safety commissioning mode

2818 – Parameter manager

[2802.1], [2810.3] SI Mtn act CRC P1 SI Mtn setp CRC P1

r9728 p9729
--> select STO

Safety parameterizing =
enable
Safety Integrated commissioning
p0010 = 95
SI password inp Enter password Safety parameters Safety parameters
p9761 & can be changed. & are valid.

SI password new x =
p9762 Checksum check
y for safety
parameters

SET
= y=x
Effective password
SI ackn password
p9763
=

SI Mtn act CRC P2 SI Mtn setp CRC P2

r9398 p9399

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

Resetting safety parameters p0010  95
Exit safety
commissioning
mode
Inhibit safety functions

Safety parameters
SI Mtn enable P2 (except of the
p9301 = 0
[2810.4]
password) can be
reset to the factory
SI Mtn enable P1
p9501 = 0 settings via p0970,

3 Function diagrams
[2810.4] p3900.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2818_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2818 -
Parameter Manager 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
637
638

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-68
2819 – SS1 (Safe Stop 1), internal STOP A, B, F

<1> r9722
1 = SS1 active Safe Acceleration Monitor /
[2855.5] r9722.1
<2> Safe Brake Ramp exceeded
[2858.6]
STO initiate
Actual value speed < p9360/p9560
& [2810.1]

<1> r9720
[2855.4] 1 = STO deselection r9722
<2> r9720.0 [2840.5]
r9722.0
[2858.3] SI Mtn IL t_del P1
0.00 ... 3600000.00 [ms] 1 = STO or safe pulse
<1> STOP A cancellation active
r9720 p9556 (600000.00)
[2855.4] 1 = SS1 deselection
<2> r9720.1
[2858.3]
STOP F T 0

STOP B

SI Mtn IL t_del P2
0.00 ... 3600000000.00 [µs] STO selection because of missing actual r9772
value (pulse suppression) [2804.1]
p9356 (600000000.00) r9772.19
1 = STO cause: actual
value missing

[2810.1]
r9722
[2819.1]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r9722.1
[2840.5]
1 = SS1 active
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> This applies to activation via F-DI (p9601.2 = 1, p9601.3 = 0).

<2> This applies to activation via PROFIsafe (p9601.2 = 1, p9601.3 = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2819_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2819 -
SS1 (Safe Stop 1), Internal STOP A, B, F 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-69
SI Mtn ramp t P1 SI Mtn rp t_del P2 SI Mtn ramp ref P1 SI Mtn ramp ref P2
10.00 ... 99000.00 [ms] 10000.00 ... 99000000.00 [µs] 600.0000 ... 240000.0000 [rpm] 600.0000 ... 240000.0000 [rpm]
p9582 (250.00) p9382 (250000.00) p9581 (1500.0000) p9381 (1500.0000)
2820 – SLS (Safely-Limited Speed)

<3> SI Mtn integ STW <2> <2>

SI Mtn integ diag
[2855.3] r9720 T 0 r9723
<4> r9720.4 1 Safe brake-ramp monitoring
r9723.16
[2858.3] SLS deselection
1 = SAM/SBR active
<1> <2>

SI Mtn SLS t P1 SI Mtn SLS t P2 SI Mtn rp t_mon P1 SI Mtn rp t_mon P2

0.00 ... 600000.00 [ms] 0.00 ... 600000000.00 [µs] 0.50 ... 3600.00 [s] 500.00 ... 3600000.00 [ms]
p9551 (100.00) p9351 (100000.00) p9583 (10.00) p9383 (10000.00)

SI Mtn SLS lim P1

0.01 ... 100000.00 [rpm]
p9531 (2000.00)

SI Mtn int stat P1

Safe speed monitoring r9722 [2855.5] <3>
Safe acceleration monitoring r9722.4 [2858.6] <4>
<1> SLS active

SI Mtn SLS lim P2

0.01 ... 100000.00 [rpm]
n_max p9331 (2000.00)
0.000 ... 210000.000 [rpm]
p1082 [D] (1500.000)
SI Mtn SLS lim P1 SI Mtn SLS lim P2 SI Mtn gear num P1 SI Mtn gear num P2

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

0.01 ... 100000.00 [rpm] 0.01 ... 100000.00 [rpm] 1 ... 2147000000 1 ... 2147000000
p9531 (2000.00) p9331 (2000.00) p9522 (1) p9322 (1)
SI Mtn integ STW
<4> r9720
[2840.4] r9720.9 0 SI Mtn setp_lim [rpm]
Select SLS bit 0 r9733[0..2]
Conversion load side --> motor side
SI Mtn integ STW 1
<4> r9720
[2840.4] r9720.10
SI Mtn SLS set_lim
Select SLS bit 1 0.000 ... 100.000 [%]
p9533 (80.000)
SI Mtn gear den P1 SI Mtn gear den P2

3 Function diagrams
<1> With p9306/p9506 = 3. 1 ... 2147000000 1 ... 2147000000
<2> With p9306/p9506 = 1. p9521 (1) p9321 (1)
<3> This applies to activation via F-DI (p9601.2 = 1, p9601.3 = 0).
<4> This applies to activation via PROFIsafe (p9601.2 = 1, p9601.3 = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2820_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2820 -
SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
639
640

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-70
2823 – SSM (Safe Speed Monitor)

SI Mtn SSM v_limP1 SI Mtn SSM v_limP2

0.00 ... 100000.00 [rpm] 0.00 ... 100000.00 [rpm]
p9546 (20.00) p9346 (20.00)
SI Mtn enable P1 SI Mtn enable P2
p9501.16 p9301.16 SI Mtn SSM filt P1
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
p9545 (0.00)

SI Mtn int stat P1

1
SI Mtn diag v P1 [rpm] 1 r9722
[2840.5]
r9714 [0] r9722.15
0
0 1 = SSM
(Speed below limit value)

SI Mtn SSM filt P2

0.00 ... 100000.00 [µs]
p9345 (0.00)

SI Mtn SSM hyst P1 SI Mtn SSM Hyst P2

0.0010 ... 500.0000 [rpm] 0.0010 ... 500.0000 [rpm]
p9547 (10.0000) p9347 (10.0000)

1
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

0
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2823_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2823 -
SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2 DP_F/PN_F
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-71
2824 – SDI (Safe Direction)

SI Mtn setp_lim [rpm]

SI Mtn enable P1 SI Mtn enable P2 r9733[0..2]
p9501.17 p9301.17 <1>
SI Mtn SDI tol P1 SI Mtn SDI Stop P1
0.001 ... 360.000 [°] 0 ... 1
p9564 (12.000) p9566 (1)
SI Mtn integ STW
r9720 SI Mtn SDI t P1
1 0.00 ... 600000.00 [ms] SI Mtn int stat P1
r9720.12 1
p9565 (100.00)
0 = SDI positive selected r9722
[2840.1] 0 r9722 .12
0
1 = SDI positive active
T 0 [2840.5]
SI Mtn integ STW Monitoring
r9720 SI Mtn int stat P1
1 r9722
r9720.13 1
0 = SDI negative selected r9722 .13
0 SI Mtn SDI t P2
[2840.1] 0 1 = SDI negative active
0.00 ... 600000000.00 [µs] [2840.5]
p9365 (100000.00)
SI Mtn SDI tol P2 SI Mtn SDI Stop P2
0.001 ... 360.000 [°] 0 ... 1
p9364 (12.000) p9366 (1)

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

r9733[0] r9733[1] r9733[2]
<1> Selected SI function
Setpoint limitation positive Setpoint limitation negative Setpoint limitation absolute
Deselection SDI positive p1082 0 |p1082|

Deselection SDI negative 0 p1082 |p1082|

3 Function diagrams
SDI positive + SLSx p9531[x] x p9533 0 |p9531[x] x p9533|

SDI negative + SLSx 0 p9531[x] x p9533 |p9531[x] x p9533|

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2824_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2824 -
SDI (Safe Direction) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
641
642

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-72
2840 – Control and status word

SI Mtn integ STW SI Mtn int stat P1

r9720 r9722
Bit No. Control word Bit No. Status word
r9720 r9722
<1> [2855.5] 1 = STO deselection <1> [2855.5] 1 = STO or safe pulse cancellation active
<2> [2858.6] 0 r9720.0 <2> [2858.6] 0 r9722.0

<1> [2855.5] <1> [2855.5]

<2> [2858.6] 1 1 = SS1 deselection r9720.1 <2> [2858.6] 1 1 = SS1 active r9722.1

2 Reserved 2 Reserved

3 Reserved 3 Reserved

<1> [2855.5] 1 = SLS deselection <1> [2855.5] 1 = SLS active

<2> [2858.6] 4 r9720.4 <2> [2858.6] 4 r9722.4

5 Reserved 5 Reserved

6 Reserved 6 Reserved

<1> [2855.5] 1/0 = Acknowledgment <1> [2855.5] 1 = Not an internal event

<2> [2858.6] 7 r9720.7 <2> [2858.6] 7 r9722.7

8 Reserved 8 Reserved

1 = SLS selection bit 0 active <1> [2855.5] 1 = Active SLS stage, bit 0
<2> [2858.3] 9 <3> r9720.9 <2> [2858.6] 9 r9722.9

1 = SLS selection bit 1 active <1> [2855.5] 1 = Active SLS stage, bit 1
<2> [2858.3] 10 <3> r9720.10 <2> [2858.6] 10 r9722.10

11 Reserved 11 Reserved
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

<1> [2855.5] <1> [2855.5]

<2> [2858.6] 12 Deselect SDI positive r9720.12 <2> [2858.6] 12 1 = SDI positive active r9722.12

<1> [2855.3] <1> [2855.5]

<2> [2858.3] 13 Deselect SDI negative r9720.13 <2> [2858.6] 13 1 = SDI negative active r9722.13
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

14 Reserved

<1> [2855.5]
<2> [2858.6] 15 1 = SSM (Speed below limit value) <4> r9722.15

<1> This applies to activation via F-DI (p9601.2 = 1, p9601.3 = 0).

<2> This applies to activation via PROFIsafe (p9601.2 = 1, p9601.3 = 1).
<3> Reserved for activation via F-DI.
<4> Only for CU240E-2 DP_F/PN_F.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2840_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2840 -
Control and status word 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-73
SI Mtn DI chg t P1 SI Mtn F-DI t P2
1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms] 1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p10002 (500.00) p10102 (500.00)
SI DI t_debounceP1
Kl. 9 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
+24V OUT SI DI status P1
p10017 (1.00)
r10051 T 0
r10051.0 =1 C01770 “Discrepancy error“
2850 – Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 2)

Kl. 5 DI 0

F-DI 0
F-DI 0
Kl. 6 DI 1 & [2855.1]

SI DI status P2
r10151
SI DI t_debounceP2 r10151.0
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
p10117 (1.00) SI Mtn DI chg t P1 SI Mtn F-DI t P2
1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms] 1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p10002 (500.00) p10102 (500.00)
SI DI t_debounceP1
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms] SI DI status P1
p10017 (1.00)
r10051 T 0
r10051.1 =1 C01770 “Discrepancy error“
Kl. 7 DI 2

F-DI 1 F-DI 1
Kl. 8 DI 3 & [2855.1]

SI DI status P2
r10151
SI DI t_debounceP2 r10151.1
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
p10117 (1.00) SI Mtn DI chg t P1 SI Mtn F-DI t P2
1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms] 1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p10002 (500.00) p10102 (500.00)
SI DI t_debounceP1
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms] SI DI status P1

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

p10017 (1.00)
r10051 T 0
r10051.2 =1 C01770 “Discrepancy error“
Kl. 16 DI 4

F-DI 2 F-DI 2
Kl. 17 DI 5 & [2855.1]

SI DI status P2
Kl. 69 DI COM r10151
SI DI t_debounceP2 r10151.2
Kl. 34 DI COM2 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]

3 Function diagrams
p10117 (1.00)
Kl. 28 GND

F-DI: Fail-safe Digital Input

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2850_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2850 -
Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI 0 … F-DI 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
643
644

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-74
2855 – Extended Functions via F-DI (p9601.2 = 1 and p9601.3 = 0)

F-DI assignment SI Motion

Statically active SI Mtn int stat P1

STO active
F-DI 0 r9722
[2850.8]
F-DI 1 r9722.0
[2850.8] SI Mtn integ STW [2819.7], [2840.5]
F-DI 2 Deselection STO
[2850.8] SS1 active
Statically inactive r9720
r9720.0 r9722.1
[2819.1, [2840.1]] [2819.7], [2840.5]
SI Mtn STO F-DI P1
0 ... 255 Deselection SS1 SLS active
SI STO F-DI P2 p10022 (0) r9720.1 r9722.4
0 ... 255
p10122 (0) SI Mtn SS1 F-DI P1 [2819.1], [2840.1] [2820.7], [2840.5]
0 ... 255
SI SS1 F-DI P2 p10023 (0) Deselection SLS Internal event
Safe motion
0 ... 255 r9720.4 monitoring r9722.7
p10123 (0) SI Mtn SLS F-DI P1 [2820.1], [2840.1] [2840.5]
0 ... 255
SI SLS F-DI P2 p10026 (0)
Acknowledgment Active SLS stage, bit 0
0 ... 255
p10126 (0) SI SDI pos F-DI P1 r9720.7 r9722.09
0 ... 255 [2840.1]
SI SDI pos F-DI P2 p10030 (0)
0 ... 255 Select SLS bit 0 Active SLS stage, bit 1
p10130 (0) SI SDI neg F-DI P1
0 ... 255 r9720.9 r9722.10
p10031 (0)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

SI SDI neg F-DI P2 [2820.1], [2840.1]

0 ... 255
p10131 (0) SI Mtn ackn int P1 Select SLS bit 1 SDI pos active
0 ... 255 r9720.10 r9722.12
SI ackn int evt P2 p10006 (0)
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

0 ... 255 [2820.1], [2840.1] [2824.7], [2840.5]

p10106 (0)
Deselection SDI positive SDI neg active
r9720.12 r9722.13
[2824.1], [2840.1] [2824.7], [2840.5]

Deselection SDI negative SSM (n below limit)

r9720.13 r9722.15
[2824.1], [2840.1] [2824.7], [2840.5]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2855_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2855 -
Extended Functions via F-DI (p9601.2 = 1 and p9601.3 = 0) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-75 Extended Functions

STO active
r9722.0
2858 – Extended Functions via PROFIsafe (9601.2 = 1 and 9601.3 = 1)

[2819.8], [2840.5]
Deselection STO
r9720.0 SS1 active
[2819.1], [2840.1] r9722.1
[2819.8], [2840.5]
Deselection SS1
r9720.1
[2819.1], [2840.1]

SLS active
r9722.4
[2820.7], [2840.5]
Internal event
Deselection SLS r9722.7
PROFIsafe r9720.4 [2840.5]
Communication via Safe motion PROFIsafe
[2820.1], [2840.1] monitoring Active SLS stage, bit 0 Communication via
PROFIBUS/
PROFINET functions PROFIBUS/
r9722.9 PROFINET
Acknowledgment
r9720.7
[2840.4], [2840.1] Active SLS stage, bit 1
r9722.10
Select SLS bit 0
r9720.9
[2820.1], [2840.1]

3.10 Safety Integrated Extended Functions

Select SLS bit 1
r9720.10 SDI pos active
[2820.1], [2840.1] r9722.12
[2824.7], [2840.5]
Deselection SDI positive
SDI neg active
r9720.12
r9722.13
[2824.1], [2840.1]
[2824.7], [2840.5]
Deselection SDI negative SSM (n below limit)
r9720.13 r9722.15

3 Function diagrams
[2824.1], [2840.1] [2823.7], [2840.5]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated Extended Functions fp_2858_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2858 -
Extended Functions via PROFIsafe (p9601.2 = 1 and p9601.3 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_F/DP_F
645
3 Function diagrams
3.11 Safety Integrated PROFIsafe

3.11 Safety Integrated PROFIsafe

Function diagrams

2915 – Standard telegrams 647

2917 – Manufacturer-specific telegrams 648

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

646 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-76 Ps telegram_sel

p60022

Interconnec-
2915 – Standard telegrams

tion is made
according to
Telegram 30
PZD1 S_STW1 S_ZSW1
PZD2
PZD3
PZD4
PZD5
PZD6
Receive telegram from
PRPFIBUS/PROFINET

Send telegram to
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
PZD7
PZD8
PZD9
PZD10
PZD11
PZD12
PZD13
PZD14
PZD15
PZD16
PZD17
PZD18
PZD19
PZD20
PZD21
PZD22
PZD23
PZD24
PZD25
PZD26
PZD27
PZD28
PZD29
PZD30

3.11 Safety Integrated PROFIsafe

PZD31
PZD32

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated PROFIsafe fp_2915_97_63.vsd Function diagram
- 2915 -
Standard telegrams 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_DP/ PN (_F)
647
648

3.11 Safety Integrated PROFIsafe

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-77 Ps telegram_sel
p60022

Interconnec-
2917 – Manufacturer-specific telegrams

tion is made
according to
Telegram 900
PZD1 S_STW1 S_ZSW1
PZD2 S_STW5 S_ZSW5
PZD3
PZD4
PZD5
PZD6
PZD7
PRPFIBUS/PROFINET

PROFIBUS/PROFINET
Receive telegram from

PZD8 Send telegram to

PZD9
PZD10
PZD11
PZD12
PZD13
PZD14
PZD15
PZD16
PZD17
PZD18
PZD19
PZD20
PZD21
PZD22
PZD23
PZD24
PZD25
PZD26
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

PZD27
PZD28
PZD29
PZD30
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

PZD31
PZD32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated PROFIsafe fp_2917_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 2917 -
Manufacturer-specific telegrams 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 CU240E-2_DP_F/PN_F
 3 Function diagrams
3.12 Setpoint channel

3.12 Setpoint channel

Function diagrams

3001 – Overview 650

3010 – Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2) 651

3011 – Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1) 652

3020 – Motorized potentiometer 653

3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 654

3040 – Direction limitation and direction reversal 655

3050 – Skip frequency bands and speed limitations 656

3060 – Basic ramp-function generator 657

3070 – Extended ramp-function generator 658

3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 659

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 649
650

3.12 Setpoint channel

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-78
STW seq_ctrl
r0898
r0898.8
STW seq_ctrl
r0898
3001 – Overview

Main setpoint r0898.9

p1070 [C] RFG setp at inp
(2050[1]) 0 0 [rpm]
Suppl setp + r1119
p1071 +
p1075 [C] 0 1 Setp after limit [6300.1]
(0) [rpm] [6850.1]
n_set_1
p1076
1 0
+/- r1114

Jog 1 n_set
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [rpm] pos
p1058 [D] (150.000)
Jog 2 n_set 1 1 neg
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [rpm] (-1)
p1059 [D] (-150.000)
[3030] Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint [3040] Direction of rotating [3050] Skip (suppression)
scaling, jogging limiting/changeover bandwidth and speed limiting

RFG selection RFG n_set at outp [rpm]

0 ... 1 r1150
n_set_fixed eff [rpm] p1115 (1) n_ctrl n_set 1
r1024 p1155 [C]
n_set_4 n_ctrl setp sum
0 (0) + [rpm]
r1170
n_ctrl n_set 2 +
1 + [6020.1]
p1160 [C] [6820.1]
[3010], [3011] Fixed speed setpoints [3060] Basic ramp-function (0) [8005.5]
generator n_ctrl n_set [rpm]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

raise r1438
+
RFG ZSW –
n_act
Mop setp after RFG [rpm] r1199
ZSW
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

r1050 r1199
n_set_5
Ramp-function
generator M_limit
lower tracking

[3020] Motorized potentiometer [3070] Extended ramp-function

generator
[3080] Ramp-function generator selection,
status word, tracking
Simulate ramp-function generator

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3001_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 3001 -
Overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-79
n_set_fix select
1 ... 2
p1016 (1)
n_set_fixed No act
0.000 0 0 0 0 r1197
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0
3010 – Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2)

p1020 r1198 1 [3011]

n_set_fixed 1 [rpm]
[2505.6] r1198.0 2 0 0 0 1
p1001 [D] (0.000)
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 1
p1021 r1198 1 n_set_fixed 2 [rpm]
[3011] 0 0 1 0
p1002 [D] (0.000)
[2505.6] r1198.1 2
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 2 n_set_fixed 3 [rpm]
0 0 1 1
p1022 r1198 1 p1003 [D] (0.000)
[3011]
[2505.6] r1198.2 2 n_set_fixed 4 [rpm]
0 1 0 0
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 3 p1004 [D] (0.000)
p1023 r1198 1 [3011]
n_set_fixed 5 [rpm]
[2505.6] r1198.3 2 p1005 [D] (0.000)
0 1 0 1

n_set_fixed 6 [rpm]
0 1 1 0
p1006 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 7 [rpm]
0 1 1 1
p1007 [D] (0.000) n_set_fixed eff [rpm]
r1024
n_set_fixed 8 [rpm]
1 0 0 0
p1008 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 9 [rpm]
1 0 0 1
p1009 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 10 [rpm]
1 0 1 0
p1010 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 11 [rpm]
1 0 1 1
p1011 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 12 [rpm]
1 1 0 0
p1012 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 13 [rpm]
1 1 0 1
p1013 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 14 [rpm]
1 1 1 0
p1014 [D] (0.000)

3.12 Setpoint channel

3 Function diagrams
n_set_fixed 15 [rpm]
1 1 1 1
p1015 [D] (0.000)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3010_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 3010 -
Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
651
652

3.12 Setpoint channel

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-80 n_set_fix select
1 ... 2
p1016 (1)

1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0

p1020 r1198 1
3011 – Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1)

[2505.6] r1198.0 2
[3010]
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 1
1
p1021 r1198
[2505.6] r1198.1 2 n_setp_fix status
[3010]
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 2 r1025
1
p1022 r1198
[2505.6] r1198.2 2
[3010]
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 3
p1023 r1198 1

[2505.6] r1198.3 2
[3010]

n_set_fixed 1 [rpm]
0001
p1001 [D] (0.000)

n_set_fixed 2 [rpm]
0010
p1002 [D] (0.000)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

n_set_fixed 3 [rpm]
0100
p1003 [D] (0.000)
+ + + n_set_fixed eff [rpm]
n_set_fixed 4 [rpm]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

1000 r1024
p1004 [D] (0.000) + + +

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3011_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 3011 -
Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-81
Data save active 0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
0 1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a ashion after OFF and after ON set to the saved value.
Automatic mode Ramp-function generator active 0 Without ramp-function generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1 1 With ramp-function generator in automatic mode.
Mop configuration Initial rounding-off active 0 Without initial rounding.
p1030 [D] (0000 0110 bin) 2 1 With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.
3020 – Motorized potentiometer

Save in NVRAM active 0 Not saved in the NVRAM (NVRAM = Non Volatile Random Access Memory).
3 1 Save in NVRAM active.
Ramp-function generator is always active 0 Ramp-up encoder inactive with pulse inhibit.
4 1 The ramp-up encoder is calculated independently of the pulse enable.

Old value is kept 0

STW setpoint chan
p1035 r1198 -1
1 = Motorized potentiometer, 1
[2505.7] r1198.13
setpoint, raise

STW setpoint chan Mop manual/auto p1030.1

p1036 r1198 p1041 [C] <2> <2>
1 = Motorized potentiometer, &
[2505.7] r1198.14 (0)
setpoint, lower Mop ramp-up time Mop ramp-down time
00 0.000 ... 1000.000 [s] 0.000 ... 1000.000 [s]
p1047 [D] (10.000) p1048 [D] (10.000)
Mop n_set bef RFG [rpm]
r1045
MotP n_max
01 y
p1037 [D] (0.000)
<1> p1082
0
0 1 Mop setp after
-1 1 x y RFG [rpm]
MotP n_min
10 r1050
p1038 [D] (0.000) 1 0 x
<1> e.g. to [3030.1]

-p1082
11 y=0
Reference value for the ramp-
MotP inv function generator
p1039 [C] [3050.8] Mop start value
(0) Mop set val -210000.000 ... 210000.000 [rpm]
p1044 [C] p1040 [D] (0.000)
Mop auto setpoint
p1042 [C] (0) <3>
(0) MotP acc set val
p1043 [C]
(0)
p1030.4
<1> For automatic commissioning, p1037 and p1038 are set to the maximum motor speed (p0322) or to the

3.12 Setpoint channel

rated motor speed (p0311), provided that the maximum motor speed has not been specified.

3 Function diagrams
[2634.8] 1: OFF1 enable missing (r0046.0) 0
<2> If initial rounding-off is active (p1030.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded
accordingly. 0:
<3> Only effective if p1030.0 = 0. 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3020_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 3020 -
Motorized potentiometer 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
653
654

3.12 Setpoint channel

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-82 PcCtrl active 1 = Jog 1
r0807.0 p1055 r0898 <1>
[2501.7] r0898.8

Setpoint from external operating tool or operator panel.

1 = Jog 2
3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging

p1056 r0898
[2501.7] r0898.9
Main setpoint eff [rpm] Total setpoint eff [rpm]
Main setpoint r1073 r1078
p1070 [C] <4> 1
0 0 0
(2050[1])
+
+ 0
Total setp 1
Main setp scal Jog 1 n_set
p1109 [C] 0 1
p1058 [D] (150.000)
p1071 [C] <3> (0)
(1) n_set_1
Total setp sel [3040.1]
p1108 [C] Jog 2 n_set
<2> 1 0
(0) p1059 [D] (-150.000)

1 1

Keep old setpoint

Suppl setp scal 1

p1076 [C] r0898.8
(1) 0 t
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

1
Suppl setp r0898.9
p1075 [C] <4> Suppl setpoint eff [rpm] 0 t
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

(0) r1077 n
p1082
p1058

t
p1059

<1> Jogging can only be activated in the operating state “Ready for operation (S2)“. -p1082

p1120

p1121

p1120

p1121
<2> If technology controller is activated (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) connected with r2349.4.
<3> If technology controller is activated (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) connected with r2294.
<4> The connection to the source for the main and additional setpoint is estabished automatically via the setting in p1000.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3030_97_59.vsd Function diagram
- 3030 -
Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-83
3040 – Direction limitation and direction reversal

STW setpoint chan STW setpoint chan STW setpoint chan

p1113 r1198 p1110r1198 p1111 r1198
[2505.6] r1198.11 [2505.2] r1198.5 [2505.2] r1198.6
1 = Setpoint inversion 1 = Inhibit negative direction 1 = Inhibit positive direction
of rotation of rotation

Setp_chan n_lim
0.000 ... 210000.000 [rpm]
p1063 [D] (210000.000)

0 0 0 Setp after limit [rpm]

n_set_1
[3030.8] 0 r1114 [3050.1]
-1 1
0 1 1

3.12 Setpoint channel

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3040_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 3040 -
Direction limitation and direction reversal 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
655
656

3.12 Setpoint channel

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-84
n_skip 1 [rpm] n_skip 2 [rpm] n_skip 3 [rpm] n_skip 4 [rpm] n_limit pos
p1091 [D] (0.000) p1092 [D] (0.000) p1093 [D] (0.000) p1094 [D] (0.000)
p1085 [C]
<1> <1> <1> <1> (1083[0]) n_limit pos eff [rpm]
n_skip scal Min r1084
p1098 [C] [6030.1], [6640.5],
0
(1)
3050 – Skip frequency bands and speed limitations

n_limit pos [rpm] [6822.1], [6828.5],

p1083 [D] (210000.000) [7958.6], [8010.2]

n_min s_src
p1106 [C]
-1 -1 -1 -1
(0) Reference value for the ramp-
n_max [rpm] function generator
n_min [rpm] y p1082 [D] (1500.000)
p1080 [D] (0.000) [3020.6]
<2>
[3060.4]
[3070.4]
w
n_limit RFG pos
Max p1051 [C]
(1083[0]) Maximum
w limiting
0 1 active
effective [3080.4]
minimum speed
w n_set aft min_lim [rpm]
r1112
w = p1101[D] <3>
RFG setp at inp
Setp after limit [rpm] Skip speed [rpm]
w bandwidth y
r1114 r1119
x
[3040.8] [3060.1]
-1 [3070.1]
-1 [6031.1]
w [8022.1]

n_limit RFG neg

p1052 [C] 0
w
(1086[0])
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

w
n_limit neg
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p1088 [C] 0 n_limit neg eff [rpm]

w (1086[0]) Max r1087
1 = r1170 within the
n_ctrl setp sum [rpm] 1 skip band Limiting to negative
values [6030.1], [6640.5],
r1170 r1099.0 [6822.1], [6828.5],
0 [7958.6], [8010.2]
[3080.8] n_limit neg [rpm]
p1086 [D] (-210000.000)

<1> A skip speed of "0" deactivates the skip band.

<2> Value of p1082 is limited to maximum motor speed (p0322).
<3> If the drive is not stopped via the input setpoint, but via controlled intervention, the lower hysteresis branch is relevant after a subsequent run-up.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3050_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 3050 -
Skip frequency bands and speed limitations 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-85
RFG ramp-up time [s] RFG ramp-down time [s] OFF3 t_RD [s]
p1120 [D] (10.000) p1121 [D] (30.000) p1135 [D] (30.000)
RFG t_RD scal
<5>
p1139 [C]
(1)
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator

RFG t_RU scal 0 1

0 = Internal quick stop
p1138 [C] [2634.8]
(1)

0 0
STW setpoint chan
<3> p1122 r1198 0 1 0 1
[2505.7] r1198.15
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator

Ramp flattening-off
[3080.8]
STW seq_ctrl
Tup Tdn
p1142 r0898
Freeze ramp-function generator
[2501.7] r0898.6
1 = Setpoint enable
x Tup Tdn
RFG setp at inp [rpm] 0 0
1 1 p1082 0 n_set_4
[3050.8] r1119 x y [3080.1]
1 t 1
0 0 0 0 -p1082 STW seq_ctrl
p1140 r0898 1 = Enable ramp-function generator
STW seq_ctrl <2>
y [2501.7] r0898.4
<1> p1141 r0898 1
[2501.7] r0898 .5 p1082
0 = Freeze ramp-function generator
t
1 = Internal RFG enable -p1082
[2634.8] RFG acceleration [rev/s²]
Tup Tdn
r1149
0 = Internal quick stop <4>
[2634.8]
RFG accept set v Other status bits
p1143 [C] 1
(0) x Ramp-up active
RFG setting value
+ 0
p1144 [C]
y – Ramp-down active
(0)
p1082
Ramp-function generator, status bits
[3050.8] [3080.5]
Reference value for the ramp-

3.12 Setpoint channel

<1> Inhibited during jogging. RFG tol HL/RL act [rpm]

3 Function diagrams
<2> After a 0/1 signal the ramping is re-started. function generator p1148 [D] (19.800)
<3> With activated Technology controller (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) the ramp-function generator is bypassed (r2349.5).
<4> With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator).
<5> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3060_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 3060 -
Basic ramp-function generator 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
657
658

3.12 Setpoint channel

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-86
RFG ramp-down time
0.000 ... 999999.000 [s] OFF3 t_RD RFG t_start_round RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd RFG t_end_delay RFG OFF3 t_end_del
p1121 [D] (10.000) 0.000 ... 5400.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s]
RFG t_RD scal <4> p1135 [D] (30.000) p1130 [D] (2.000) p1136 [D] (0.000) p1131 [D] (2.000) p1137 [D] (0.000)
RFG ramp-up time p1139 [C] <4> <4> <4> <4>
0.000 ... 999999.000 [s] (1)
p1120 [D] (10.000)
3070 – Extended ramp-function generator

RFG t_RU scal 0 1 0 1 0 1

0 = Internal quick stop
p1138 [C] [2634.8]
(1)

STW setpoint chan 0 0

p1122 r1198 0 1 0 1
<5> 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
[2505.7] r1198.15

1 = Speed setpoint enable Ramp flattening-off

[3080.8]
p1142 r0898
[2501.7] r0898.6 Freeze ramp-function generator

RFG setp at inp [rpm] 0 y Ti Tf

1 1
r1119 x Tup Tdn
[3050.8] 1
p1082
x Extended ramp-function
0 0 y
0 0 generator 1
n_set_5
STW seq_ctrl
y
<1>
p1141 r0898
0 = Freeze ramp- 1 0
0 [3080.1]
[2501.7] r0898.5
function generator
1 = Internal RFG enable STW seq_ctrl
[2634.8]
p1140 r0898
0 = Internal quick stop [2501.7] r0898.4
[2634.8] 1 = Enable ramp-function generator
<3> -p1082

RFG round-off type dy/dt Ti Tf Ti Tf Ti Tf Ti Tf

RFG accept set v 0 ... 1
p1134 [D] (0)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p1143 [C] RFG acceleration [rev/s²]

(0) r1149
t
RFG setting value
p1144 [C] Other status bits
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

(0)
Tup_eff <2> Tdn_eff <2>
1 Ramp-up active
<1> Inhibited during jogging.
x Ramp-down active
<2> Effective ramp-up time: Tup_eff = Tup + (Ti/2 + Tf/2) +
Effective ramp-down time: Tdn_eff = Tdn + (Ti/2 + Tf/2) 0
y –
<3> p1134 = 0: Rounding-off is always active. t p1082
Overshoots can occur.
p1134 = 1: Final rounding-off is not effective t [3050.8]
when the setpoint is suddenly nsoll Reference value for the ramp- RFG tol HL/RL act
reduced during ramp-up. t
function generator 0.000 ... 1000.000 [rpm]
<4> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module. p1148 [D] (19.800) [3080.5]
<5> With activated Technology controller (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) the ramp-function generator is bypassed (r2349.5). Ramp-function generator,
status bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3070_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 3070 -
Extended ramp-function generator 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-87
r0898
[2501.7]
r0898.6
Ramp-function generator enable
STW seq_ctrl
r0898.4
n_ctrl n_set 1
[2501.7]
p1155 [C]
1 n_ctrl n_set 1/2 [rpm]
Ramp-function generator selection <2> (0)
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking

1
<5>
<3> r1169
0
n_ctrl n_set 2 0 x,y x
0 T1
0 + y
p1160 [C] x y
<2> (0) Plot friction characteristic
+ No OFF2
t &
No OFF3
Interpolator
RFG selection
p1115
n_set_4
[3060.8] +
RFG n_set at outp [rpm] x,y T1 x 0
From the basic ramp-function generator y n_ctrl setp sum [rpm]
0 r1150
x y r1170 [3050.1]
n_set_5 + [6030.1]
[3070.8] 1
1 [6822.1]
From the extended ramp-function t [8011.2]
generator RFG track intens
0.0 ... 50.0 Interpolator From the ramp-function generator
p1145 [D] (0.0) friction characteristic [7010.6]

ZSW n_ctrl <4> Ramp-function generator tracking Ramp flattening-off [3060.1]

r1407
[2522.7] [3070.3]
r1407.7 RFG ZSW
1 = Torque limit reached r1199
r1199.5

Ramp-function generator status word RFG ZSW

r1199
Bit Ramp-function generator status word
r1199
0 Ramp-up active
[3060.8], [3070.8]
1 Ramp-down active
2 Ramp-function generator active r1199.2 (p2148)
1 3 Ramp-function generator set
<1> For p1145 > 0, ramp-function generator tracking is activated when the torque limiting 4 Ramp-function generator held
responds. This means that the speed controller output only exceeds the torque limit by a 5 Ramp-function generator tracking active <1>
deviation that can be set via p1145.
[3050.8] 6 Maximum limiting active
<2> For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is active. The ramp-function generator is set to
7 Ramp-function generator acceleration positive
the setpoint (r1170) and stops the drive with the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). STW1.4 (enable
ramp-function generator) is effective while the drive is stopped via the ramp-function generator. 8 Ramp-function generator acceleration negative
Depending on the p1115, the basic ramp-function generator [3060] or the extended ramp-function 9 Reserved
generator [3070] is effective. 10 Reserved
<3> If technology controller is activated (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 1) connected with r2294. 11 Reserved

3.12 Setpoint channel

<4> Behavior of the response ramp of the torque limiting: 12 Reserved

3 Function diagrams
p1145 = 0.0: No ramp-function generator tracking. The ramp-function generator ramp is no longer in the range of the speed actual value. 13 Reserved
p1145 = 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp remains as close as possible to the speed actual value. Reserved
14
p1145 > 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp is steeper than for p1145 = 1.0 (higher "speed following error").
15 Reserved
<5> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_3080_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 3080 -
Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
659
3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control

3.13 Vector control

Function diagrams

6019 – Application classes (p0096), overview 661

6020 – Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview 662

6030 – Speed setpoint, droop 663

6031 – Precontrol balancing, acceleration model 664

6035 – Moment of inertia estimator 665

6040 – Speed controller 666

6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation 667

6060 – Torque setpoint 668

6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230/PM240) 669

6300 – U/f control, overview 670

6301 – U/f characteristic and voltage boost 671

6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f) 672

6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (PM230/PM240) 673

6490 – Speed control configuration 674

6491 – Flux control configuration 675

6630 – Upper/lower torque limit 676

6640 – Current/power/torque limits 677

6700 – Current control, overview 678

6710 – Current setpoint filter 679

6714 – Iq and Id controllers 680

6721 – Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) 681

6722 – Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 682

6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 683

6724 – Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) 684

6730 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 685

6731 – Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) 686

6799 – Display signals 687

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

660 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-88
6019 – Application classes (p0096), overview

Possible application classes (p0096) <1>

For induction motor For synchronous motor For reluctance motor

Applicable function diagrams:
(p0300 = 1xx) (p0300 = 2xx) (p0300 = 6xx)

p0096 = 0 p0096 = 0 p0096 = 0 Chapter "Vector control"

Power Module
PM240 Chapter "Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)"
p0096 = 1 Not available. Not available.
PM240-2 + [6799]
PM340
Chapter "Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)"
p0096 = 2 p0096 = 2 p0096 = 2
+ [6490], [6491], [6799]

p0096 = 0 p0096 = 0 Not available. Chapter "Vector control"

Power Module
PM330
p0096 = 2 p0096 = 2 Not available. Chapter "Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)"

other
No application class (p0096) possible. Chapter "Vector control"
Power Module

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
<1> p0096 = 0: Expert
p0096 = 1: Standard Drive Control (SDC)
p0096 = 2: Dynamic Drive Control (DDC)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6019_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 6019 -
Application classes (p0096), overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
661
662

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-89
[6050] Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation
Kp adaptation Tn adaptation M_suppl 1
n_ctrl setp sum [rpm] n_ctrl SL Kp n_ctrl SL Tn p1511 [C]
Mot MomInert Ratio p1470 p1472
r1170 p0342 (0)
[3001.8] Mot M_mom of inert M_suppl 1 scal For Kp
6020 – Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview

p0341 a_prectrl scal p1512 [C] adaptation

p1496 (0)
n_set_filt 1 T M_suppl 2 scal
p1416 p1514 M_suppl total
M_suppl 2 r1515
n_ctrl n_set [rpm] p1513 [C]
n_set after filter [rpm] r1438 (0)
r0062 M_accel [Nm]
r1518 [0]
–
Kp Tn
Symmetrizing p1300
Droop input (r1407.2)
p1488 –

[6030] Speed setpoint filter [6031] Acceleration model

M_set [Nm]
r0079
r1508 [6700.1]
n_pre-control
[6700.1] Integrator control M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm]

n_modell
[6060] Torque setpoint
n_act [rpm]
r0063[0..2]

n_C n_act T_s SL

p1452
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

[6040] Speed controller

Changeov n/M_ctrl Current limit I_Ausg max
M_set p1501 [C] p0640
r0067
p1503 [C] (0)
M_max upper
(0)
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p1522 [C] M_max upper eff [Nm]

M_max upper
(1520[0]) r1538
p1520 [D] (0.00)
M_max lower Generating the
torque limits
p1523 [C] M_max lower eff [Nm]
M_max lower
p1400 p1401 r0056 r1408 (1521[0]) r1539
p1521 [D] (0.00)

P_max mot P_max gen

[6490] Closed-loop speed control configuration p1530 p1531
[6491] Closed-loop flux control configuration
[2526] Status word closed-loop control (r0056) [6630] Upper/lower torque limit
[2530] Status word closed-loop current control (r1408) [6640] Current/power/torque limits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6020_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6020 -
Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-90 Droop input

Droop input source Droop M_comp scal
n_ctrl I-M_outp [Nm] 0 ... 3 -2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%]
p1487 [D] (100.0) <1>
[6040.8] r1482 p1488 [D] (0)
Droop M_comp Droop scal
p1486 [C] 0.000 ... 0.500
6030 – Speed setpoint, droop

<2> p1489 [D] (0.050)

3
(0)
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm]
2 – Droop n_reduction [rpm]
[6060.6] r1508
1 r1490
150 ms
M_set [Nm]
0 0
[6060.8] r0079 nN

0 MN
STW n_ctrl
0 1 ZSW n_ctrl
p1492 r1406
r1407
[2520.7] r1406.11
r1407.10
[2522.3]
n_set before filt. [rpm] ZSW n_ctrl n_set_filt 1 T
r0060 r1407 0.00 ... 5000.00 [ms]
p1416 [D] (0.00)
[2701.1] r1407.11
[6799.1] [2522.3]
n_ctrl setp sum [rpm] – n_set after filter [rpm]
r1170 r0062 [6031.1]
[3080.8]
+

n_limit pos eff [rpm]

r1084
[3050.8]
n_limit neg eff [rpm]
r1087
[3050.8]
0
Mot M_mom of inert 1 = Sensorless vector control,
0.000000 ... 100000.000000 [kgm²] speed pre-control active 1 0
p0341 [D] (0.000000) n_ctrl config
p1400.15
Mot MomInert Ratio a for M_ctrl scal
1.000 ... 10000.000 0.0 ... 400.0 [%] ZSW n_ctrl
p0342 [D] (1.000) p1499 [D] (100.0) r1407
r1407.11 0
Pre-control speed
M_set [Nm] [2522.3] [6730.1]
r0079
1
[6060.8] ZSW n_ctrl
r1407
r1407.2

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
[6060.3]
<1> Scaling: p1489 = 0.100 - for a rated motor torque of r0333 - results in a speed setpoint reduction of 0.1 x p0311.
<2> Only active, if p1488 > 0.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6030_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6030 -
Speed setpoint, droop 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
663
664

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-91
6031 – Precontrol balancing, acceleration model

ZSW cl-loop ctrl

r0056
M_inert tot scal [kgm²] [2526.6]
r0056.14
r1493
[6035.8]

1
0 Calculated accelerating torque
[6060.1]
Acceleration calculation 0

n_C n_act T_s SL a_prectrl scal

0.00 ... 32000.00 [ms] 0.0 ... 10000.0 [%]
p1452 [D] (10.00) n_set I_comp [6040.1]
p1496 [D] (0.0) r1439

>0
n_set after filter [rpm]
Pre-control balancing n_ctrl n_set [rpm]
r1438 [6040.1]
[6030.8] r0062
0

r1084

RFG setp at inp [rpm] Steady-state setpoint calculation PcCtrl active

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

[3050.8] r1119 r0807.0

r1084

n_ctrl n_set 1 n_set via PC 1

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

r1087 + n_ctrl n_set stat

p1155 [C]
r1444
(0)
+ 0
+
n_ctrl n_set 2 r1087
p1160 [C]
(0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6031_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6031 -
Pre-control balancing, acceleration model 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-92
n_ctrl config
Mot M_mom of inert p1400 .18
[D]
p0341 [D]
1 = moment of inertia estimator active

Mot MomInert Ratio 0 M_inert tot scal [kgm²]

p0342 [D]
r1493 [6031.2]
6035 – Moment of inertia estimator

1
ZSW n_ctrl
r1407 a_prectrl scal
r1407.24 1 = moment of inertia estimator active p1496 [D]
r1407.26 1 = moment of inertia estimator stabilized

J_est t J
p1561 [D]
Only for initialization
J_est config
M_act [Nm] p5310 .1
[D]
r0080 Moment of inertia Moment of inertia <1> 1 = moment of inertia precontrol activated
n_act [rpm] estimator calculation
1
r0063

0
J_est M thresh J_est config
p1560 [D] J_est t load p5310 [D] J_prectrl t J
p1562 [D] p5316 [D]
<1>

Active for p5310.0 = 1

Load torque Cyclic calculation of
estimator the coefficients

ZSW n_ctrl
r1407
J_est M pos [Nm] Positive direction of J_est lin pos
r1407.25
p1563 [D] (0.00) rotation p5312 [D]
1 = load estimator active <2>
J_est const pos
Basic function p5313 [D]

<1> Possible bit combinations p5310:

Bit 1, 0
= 0, 0 --> Function not active.

3 Function diagrams
= 0, 1 --> Cyclic calculation of the coefficients without moment of inertia precontrol (commissioning).

3.13 Vector control

= 1, 0 --> Moment of inertia precontrol activated (without cyclic calculation of the coefficients).
= 1, 1 --> Moment of inertia precontrol activated (with cyclic calculation of the coefficients).
<2> p1564, p5314 and p5315 for negative direction of rotation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6035_97_63.vsd Function diagram
- 6035 -
Moment of inertia estimator 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
665
666

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-93
n_ctrl SL Kp n_ctrl SL Tn
0.000 ... 999999.000 0.0 ... 100000.0 [ms]
p1470 [D] (0.300) p1472 [D] (20.0)
<1>
Kp_n_basic
To Kp/Tn adaptation
Tn_n_adapt Tn_n_basic
From Kp/Tn adaptation [6050.3]
6040 – Speed controller

[6050.7] Kp_n_adapt

[6490.7] 1 0 1 0
n_ctrl config 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active
p1400.5
n_ctr Tn eff [ms]
[6490.7] r1469
n_ctrl config Dynamic reduction, field weakening
p1400.0
n_ctr Kp eff
1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
r1468
Speed controller
n_ctrl sys dev [rpm]
r0064 Kp Kp Tn
n_ctrl n_set [rpm] Kp
M_set from speed controller
[6031.8] r1438 [6060.1]
+ +
n_C n_act T_s SL
– M_max upper eff [Nm]
+
0.00 ... 32000.00 [ms] [6640.8] r1538
p1452 [D] (10.00)
M_max lower eff [Nm]
[6640.8] r1539
n_act [rpm] n_act smooth [rpm]
r1445 Kp Tn
r0063 n_ctrl sys dev Tn [rpm]
– r1454 n_ctrl I-M_outp [Nm]
n_set I_comp [rpm] r1482 [6030.1]
[6031.8]
r1439 + Set
Enable speed controller Hold Set Val ZSW n_ctrl
from sequence control S4: Operation r1407
STW n_ctrl [2522.3]
r1407.3
p1476 r1406
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

1 = Speed controller, hold I component 1 = Speed controller active

[2520.7] r1406.4
ZSW n_ctrl
p1477 r1406 r1407
1 = Speed controller, set I component [2522.3]
[2520.7] r1406.5 r1407.5
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

STW n_ctrl
n_ctrl I_val scal Integrator control 1 = Speed controller, I component held
p1479 [C]
n_ctr integ_setVal (1) ZSW n_ctrl
p1478 [C] r1407
[2522.3]
(0) r1407.6
n_ctrl M_sv MHB 1 = Speed controller, I component set
p1475 [C] n_ctrl config
Torque setting value, speed controller
(0) [6721.8] p1400 .1
ZSW n_ctrl 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component
[6490.7]
r1407
<1> For p1472 = 0.0 s or 100.0 s, the I component is disabled [2522.7] 1 = Torque limit reached
(integral action time = infinite). r1407.7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6040_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6040 -
Speed controller 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-94 Free Kp_n adaptation

Free Tn adaptation active (p1400.6)

[6490.7]
6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation

Adapt_factor upper
n_ctr adapt_sig Kp y 0
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] 1
p1455 [C] p1459 [D] (100.0) x
(0)
1
Adapt_factor lower
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] x
p1458 [D] (100.0)
n_ctrl AdaptKpLow <1>
0.00 ... 400.00 [%]
p1456 [D] (0.00)
n_ctrl AdaptKp up <1>
0.00 ... 400.00 [%]
n_ctrl Kp scal p1457 [D] (0.00)
p1466 [C]
(1)

Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation

Kp_n_basic (p1470) Kp
[6040.8]
n_act [rpm] n Kp_n_adapt
Kp
r0063 [0]
n_ctr Kp n up scal To the speed controller
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] n [6040.4]
p1461 [D] (100.0)

n_ctrl n upper <1>

0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm]
p1465 [D] (210000.00)

n_ctrl n lower <1>

0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm]
p1464 [D] (0.00)

n_ctr Tn n up scal
Tn
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%]
p1463 [D] (100.0) n Tn Tn_n_adapt
To the speed controller
[6040.8] n [6040.4]
Tn_n_basic (p1472)

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
<1> If the lower transition point exceeds the upper transition point, the Kp-adaptation also changes over.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6050_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6050 -
Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
667
668

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-95
M_suppl 1 <5> 0
0
p1511 [C] M_suppl total [Nm]
r1515
(0)
+ 1
p1400.14 1 = Torque pre-control <1>
+ STW seq_ctrl [6490.7]
M_suppl 1 scal
p1512 [C] M_suppl 2 scal r0898 1 = Speed controller enable 1
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] [2501.7] r0898.12
6060 – Torque setpoint

(0)
p1514 [D] (100.0)
M_suppl 2 M_accel T_smooth
p1513 [C] 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
<1> <2> p1517 [D] (4.00) <1> <2>
(0) M_accel [Nm] M_accel [Nm]
<3>
r1518 [0] r1518 [1]
Calculated accelerating torque 1 +
[6031.8]
M_suppl + M_accel [Nm]
0 + r1516
0
M_max upper eff [Nm]
[6640.8] r1538 1 = Current/torque limiting
active
M_max up w/o offs r0056
p1552 [C] r0056.13
(1)
[2526.2]
M_max up w/o offs [Nm] M_max outp n_ctrl [Nm]
[6630.8] r1526 r1547 [0] 1 = Torque limit reached
r1407
STW n_ctrl 1 = Torque limiting, upper, 1 r1407.7 [2522.3]
p1501 r1406 1 = Closed-loop torque active
1 = Torque control control active
[2520.7] r1406.12 r1407
r1407 1 = Torque limiting, upper,
p1300 = MReg 1 r1407.2
r1407.8
active
[2522.3] r1407
[6030.6]
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm] r1407.8 [2522.3]
M_set r1508
<5>
p1503 [C] [6030.1]
(0)
1 + M_set [Nm] [6030.1]
[6722.1]
M_set from the speed controller r0079 [6710.1]
[6040.8] + [8012.1]
0 1 = Torque limit reached <4>
(without pre-control) Torque
limiting
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r1407
[2522.3]
M_max low w/o offs r1407.15
p1554 [C] 1 = Torque limiting, lower,
1 = Torque limiting, lower, active
(1) active
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

r1407 r1407
r1407.9 r1407.9 [2522.3]
M_max low w/o offs [Nm] [2522.3] M_max outp n_ctrl [Nm]
[6630.8] r1527 r1547[1]

M_max lower eff [Nm]

[6640.8] r1539

<1> The signal is only effective after magnetization has been <3> Acceleration control is inhibited for p1517 = 100 ms. <5> The connection to the source for the torque setpoint is
completed (r0056.4 = 1). <4> M_set is also influenced by the speed limit controller. estabished automatically via the setting in p1500.
<2> No pre-control if the Vdc controller is active [6220.8].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6060_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6060 -
Torque setpoint 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-96 Vdc_ctrl Tn

p1251 [D]

Vdc_max (Vector control) Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate

p1250 [D] p1252 [D]
6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230/PM240)

Vdc ctr config vec

p1240 [D] 0

Vdc act val [V] 1 = Vdc_max controller active

1,3
r0070 1 r0056
+
– 0 0 r0056.14
0,2 0
[2526.2]
Calculate on_level

Vdc_max on_level [V]

r1242
Vdc_max dyn_factor
Vdc_max SenseOnLev p1243 [D] Vdc controller active
p1254 1
Vdc_ctrl output [Arms] [6710.2]
r1258
Iq_max
U_connect [6710.1]
Operating point
1 ... 63000 [V] 0
selection Iq_min
p0210 (400)
[6710.1]

Vdc_min (Vector control)

Vdc_min on_level Vdc_ctrl Tn

p1245 [D] p1251 [D]
Vdc_min on_level [V]
r1246
Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1250 [D] p1252 [D]
Calculate on_level

Vdc act val [V] – 0 1 = Vdc_min controller active

2,3
r0070 1 r0056
+
0 r0056.15
0,1 0
[2526.2]

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1247 [D]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6220_97_62.vsd Function diagram
- 6220 -
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230/PM240) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
669
670

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-97
6300 – U/f control, overview

Flying restart Slip Uf Res_damp

Vdc_ctrl config Speed actual
mode value calculation compensation gain
p1280 p1334, p1335 p1338
p1200
[6320] [6310.8] [6310.4]
n_ctrl setp sum [rpm]
[6310]
r1170
RFG setp at inp [rpm] + + + f_outp [Hz]
[3001.8] r1119 Ramp-function
generator r0066
+ + + [6310]
[3060]
[3070] 60
[3080] I_max_ctrl f_outp [rpm] f_outp smooth [Hz]
r1343 Mot PolePairNo act 100 ms r0024
r0313 [D]
I_max reduction
[8016.8] Transformat_angle [°]
I_outp max [Arms] r0094
r0067 Imax closed-loop
I_max PM frequency control
p1340 ... p1341 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
[6730.4]
r0056 I_max_ctrl U_outp [Vrms] U_angle
P_act [kW] MIN [6730.1]
– r0056.13 r1344
[6799.8] r0082 [0] + Imax closed-loop
voltage control
p1345 ... p1346
PU P_rated [kW] <1>
r0206[2]

I_act abs val [Arms]

[6714.8] r0068 [0] Soft starting
p1350
Control mode U_output [Vrms]
Iq_set [Arms]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p1300 r0072
r0077
V_boost perm
p1310 +
f_set V_set [6730.1]
V_boost accelerate
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

[6301.8] + [6731.1]
p1311
r0056 V_boost starting
. U_outp smooth [Vrms]
p1312 U/f Eco fac act v [%]
. r0025
Eco mode r1348 100 ms
.
[6301]

[2526]

<1> PM250, PM260: The current limit is calculated out of r0206[2] in generative operation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6300_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6300 -
U/f control, overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-98
Linear

U_output max r0071

Mot U_rated p0304
6301 – U/f characteristic and voltage boost

U/f Eco fac act v [%]

Eco Mode r1348 Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
0 ... 22
Mot f_rated [Hz] p1300 [D] (0)
p0310 [D] (0.00) Flux current control (FCC)
Dependent on the load
U_output max r0071 current
0/5
Mot U_rated p0304
1/6
2
r0077 3 [6300.4]
Iq_set [Arms] 4
Uf U_set independ. 7
U/f FCC f_start [Hz] Mot f_rated [Hz] p1330 [C]
Parabolic 19
p1333 [D] (0.00) p0310 [D] (0.00) (0)
U_output max r0071
Mot U_rated p0304
f_set
[6300.2]

Freely programmable

Mot f_rated [Hz] U_output max r0071

p0310 [D] (0.00)
Uf char U4 p1327

I_start (Ua) perm R_stator act Uf char U3 p1325

I_outp max [Arms] r0395
p1310
r0067
1 = Acceleration voltage active Uf char U2 p1323
Ramp-up active r0056 + Uf char U1 p1321
[2526.2]
r1199 r0056.6 Mot I_rated
r1199.0 p0305
+ U_boost total
0 r1315
0 0 3
I_start accel
p1311 + <1>
1 0 +
0 Uf char f1 Uf char f3
I_start start 1 = Starting boost active p1320 p1324

3 Function diagrams
p1312 1 r0056
<2>

3.13 Vector control

r0056.5
<1> For p1320 = 0, the voltage boost via p1310 is not effective. Uf char f2 Uf char f4
[2526.2] p1322 p1326
<2> p1312 is only effective for the first acceleration phase after pulse enable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6301_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6301 -
U/f characteristic and voltage boost 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
671
672

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-99

U/f resonance damping U/f slip compensation

6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f)

Uf Res_damp gain
0.00 ... 100.00
p1338 [D] (0.00)

Brake f_start
Brake f_start p1352 [C]
f_res damp <2>
[6300.7] -300.00 ... 300.00 [%] (1351[0])
– p1351 [D] (0.00)
Uf Res_damp T +
1.00 ... 1000.00 [ms]
p1339 [D] (20.00)

Iq_act [Arms] Slip comp scal Slip comp lim val

0.0 ... 600.0 [%] 0.00 ... 600.00 [%]
r0078 p1336 [D] (250.00)
p1335 [D] (0.0)
[6714.8] Mot slip_rated [Hz]
r0330 [D]
Slip
f_Slip [Hz] compensation
r0065 250 ms
[6300.6]
1 100 %
Mot slip_rated [Hz] -1 Slip comp act val [%]
r0330 [D] r1337
6% 10 % 95 % f/f Mot N
0

ZSW cl-loop ctrl

<1> 1
f_outp [Hz] Uf res_damp f_max r0056
r0066
0.00 ... 3000.00 [Hz] 1 r0056.10
[2526.2]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p1349 [D] (0.00) 0

[6730.4] 1 = Slip limiting active
[6731.4]
1
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p1334 f/f Mot N

p1334 + 4 %

<1> If p1349 = 0: the limit is 0.95 x f Mot N ” 45 Hz.

<2> Activation with r0056.4 = 1 till r0066 • p1334 and p1216 has expired.
100 % equal r0330 (Rated motor slip)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6310_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6310 -
Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-100 Vdc_ctrl Tn

p1291 [D]

Vdc_max (U/f control) Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate

p1290 [D] p1292 [D]
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (PM230/PM240)

Vdc_ctr config U/f

0 ... 3
p1280 [D] (1)
Vdc_min outp_lim 0
p1293 [D]
Vdc act val [V] ZSW cl-loop ctrl
1,3
r0070 1 r0056
+
– 0
0 r0056.14
0,2 0 0
[2526.2]
Calculate on_level

Vdc_max on_level [V]

r1282
Vdc_max dyn_factor
Vdc_max SenseOnLev p1283 [D]
p1294
Vdc_ctrl output [rpm]
r1298

U_connect 0 [6300.4]
p0210 Vdc_ctrl config

Vdc_min (U/f control)

(only for PM240)

Vdc_min on_level Vdc_ctrl Tn

p1285 [D] p1291 [D]
Vdc_min on_level [V]
r1286 Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1290 [D] p1292 [D]
Calculate on_level

0
Vdc act val [V] – 0
2,3 0 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0070 1 r0056
+
0 r0056.15
0,1 0
[2526.2]
Vdc_min outp_lim
p1293 [D]

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1287 [D]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6320_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6320 -
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (PM230/PM240) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
673
674

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-101
n_ctrl config
p1400 [D] Factory setting
Speed control configuration
Bit No. Meaning
6490 – Speed control configuration

[6040.2]
00 1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active 1 [6824.4]

1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component [6040.6]

01 0 [6824.6]

... Reserved

1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active [6040.2]

05 1 [6824.4]

06 1 = Free Tn adaptation active 0 [6050.6]

... Reserved

1 = Torque pre-control always active [6060.4]

14 0 [6826.4]
0 = Torque pre-control for n_ctrl enabled

[6030.6]
15 1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active 1 [6822.4]

16 1 = I component for limiting enabled 0

... Reserved

18 1 = Moment of inertia estimator active <1> 0

19 Reserved
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

20 1 = Acceleration model 0

21 Reserved
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

22 1 = Obtain moment of inertia estimator value for pulse inhibit <1> 0

23 Reserved 0

24 1 = moment of inertia estimator is actively accelerating the motor 0

25 1 = Acceleration torque instantaneous in the I/f mode 0

<1> Not for PM230/PM230_STO Power Modules.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6490_97_63.vsd Function diagram
- 6490 -
Speed control configuration 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-102
Flux ctrl config
p1401 [D] Factory setting
Flux control, configuration
Bit No. Meaning
6491 – Flux control configuration

00 1 = Flux setpoint, soft starting active 0 [6722.5]

01 1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active 1 [6723.6]

02 1 = Flux build-up control active 1 [6722.5], [6723.6]

03 Reserved

04 Reserved

05 Reserved

06 1 = Quick magnetization 0 [6722.5]

07 1 = Pre-control speed limitation 0

08 Reserved

09 Reserved

10 Reserved

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
15 Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6491_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6491 -
Flux control configuration 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
675
676

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-103

Upper torque limit

6630 – Upper/lower torque limit

M_max upper
!
M_max upper p1522 [C] <1> M_max up w/o offs [Nm]
-1000000.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] (1520[0]) r1526
p1520 [D] (0.00) [6640.1]

M
M_max upper scal
2 1 M_max upper scal p1528 [C]
n (1524[0])
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%]
p1524 [D] (100.0)

Lower torque limit

M_max lower
!
M_max lower p1523 [C] M_max low w/o offs [Nm]
<2>
-20000000.00 ... 1000000.00 [Nm] (1521[0]) r1527
p1521 [D] (0.00) [6640.1]
M
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

M_max lower scal

n M_max lower scal p1529 [C]
3 4 -2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] (1525[0])
p1525 [D] (100.0)
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> Danger: Negative values at <1>

<2> ! positive values at <2>
represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6630_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6630 -
Upper/lower torque limit 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-104
Stall limit scal
Mot L_leak total [mH] 80.0 ... 130.0 [%]
Current limiting r0377 [D] p1553 [D] (100.0) Speed limiting
Kp from speed controller [6040.5]

[6723.3] U_output max [Vrms] Iq stall Tn from speed controller [6040.6]

6640 – Current/power/torque limits

[6724.4] calculation 1 = Speed limiting control

r0071 active
I_outp max [Arms] n_limit pos eff [rpm]
Current limit + r1407.17
0.00 ... 10000.00 [Arms] r0067 [3050.8] r1084
p0640 [D] (0.00) [2522.3]
[6722.1] [3050.8] r1087 +
Iq_max total [Arms] – –
I_max reduction r1533 n_limit neg eff [rpm] Speed limiting
[8016.8] Min controller
x
[6730.4] I_max PM x2 y2 Sign <2>
[6731.4] + or -
y
[6721.8] Id_setp total [Arms] -1
[6723.8] r1624 Pre-control

Max Min
Flux ctrl config
p1401.7

n_act [rpm]
r0063[0]
Isq_max stall [Arms]
r1548 [1]
M_max up w/o offs [Nm] Lower limit
[6630.8] r1526 + M_max upper eff [Nm]

[6721.8] M
Min r1538
Isq_max stall [Arms] + [6040.4], [6060.1],
r1548 [0] [6730.1] Iq
[8012.1]
M_max low w/o offs [Nm] Upper limit
[6630.8] r1527 + M_max lower eff [Nm]
Max r1539
Power limiting + [6040.4], [6060.1],
[8012.1]
<1>
Iq
Isq_max [Arms]
Min r1536
P_max gen
-100000.00 ... -0.01 [kW] [6710.1]
p1531 [D] (-0.01)
n
P_max mot Isq_min [Arms]
0.00 ... 100000.00 [kW] Max r1537
p1530 [D] (0.00)
[6710.1]
<1>

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
<1> Intervention by the Vdc controller.
<2> Intervention when the speed limit is exceeded + 2 % n_rated.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6640_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6640 -
Current/power/torque limits 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
677
678

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-105
I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
p1715 p1717 Vdc act val [V]
U_output [Vrms]
Iq_set [Arms] r0070
r0072
r0077
6700 – Current control, overview

M_set [Nm] Mod_depth [%]

U_set
r0079 K r0074
+ U_angle
[6020.8] – P
Iq controller +
M +
Iq

[6710] Current setpoint filter

I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
p1715 p1717
U_output max [Vrms] Id_set [Arms]
r0071 r0075

[6722.1]
[6723.4] + – +
[6724.4] – + – Iq_act [Arms]
Field weakening Id controller
controller r0078
V_set
Flex setp
50.0 ... 200.0 [%]
Id_act [Arms] I_phase actual value
p1570 [D] (100.0) Transformation
Efficiency opt. + r0076
<1> 0 ... 100 [%] +
p1580 [D] (80) Field weakening
M_set static characteristic
-200.0 ... 200.0 [%]
p1610 [D] (50.0) [6714] Current controller
M_suppl_accel
0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
p1611 [D] (30.0)
Current calculation V_phase actual value

[6722] Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)

[6723] Field weakening control, flux controller for induction motors
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

(ASM, p0300 = 1) f_outp [Hz]

[6724] Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2) r0066
n_pre-control
[6020.2]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

+ + p1764 p1767 +
+

Current model f_Slip [Hz] Motor model

r0065
M
n_model Iq
[6020.1]

[6730] Interface to the Power Module for an induction motor (p0300 = 1)

<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module. [6731] Interface to the Power Module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6700_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6700 -
Current control, overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-106
6710 – Current setpoint filter

ZSW cl-loop ctrl ZSW cl-loop ctrl

[2526.7] r0056 1 = Vdc_max controller active
r0056
1 = Frequency, negative
[2526.7]
[6220.8] r0056.14 r0056.7

Iq_max 1
[6220.8]
1
Isq_max [Arms]
[6640.8]
r1536 0
0

ZSW cl-loop ctrl

[2526.7] r0056 1 = Vdc_min controller active
[6220.8] r0056.15

0
Iq_min 1
[6220.8]
Isq_min [Arms] 1
[6640.8]
r1537 0

M_set [Nm] Interpolator and Iq_set [Arms]

[6714.1]
[6060.8] r0079 smoothing for r0077
+ voltage limits [6721.1]
+
Frict outp [Nm]
[7010.7] r3841 Isq_s T_smth FW
p1654 [D]

M
[6721.8] Iq
[6730.1]

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6710_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6710 -
Current setpoint filter 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
679
680

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-107
Transv_decpl scal TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] 0.0 ... 200.0 [%] <2>
Mot L_leak total [mH]
r0377 [D] p1726 [D] (75.0) p1727 [D] (50.0) U_quad_decoupl [Vrms]
r1729
Flux setp total [%] U_set 1 [6723.1] <1>
<1> [6723.5] r1598 [6724.1] <2>
<2> [6724.8]
6714 – Iq and Id controllers

Pre-control, de-coupling and U_max 1 [6723.3] <1>

U_dir-axis_decoupl [Vrms]
limiting [6724.3] <2>
r1728
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Isd_ctrl I_limit [Vrms] r0056
r1725
r0056.9 [2526.2]
Isd_ctr_prectrScal Isq_ctr_prectrScal
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] 0.0 ... 200.0 [%] 1 = Voltage limit active
ZSW I_ctrl
p1702 [D] (70.0) p1703 [D] (60.0) Direct U set [Vrms]
r1408
<2> r1732[0..1]
r1408 .1 [2530.3] ZSW I_ctrl
Id_set [Arms]
Id current controller r1408
r0075
Isd_ctrl I_comp [Vrms] r1408.3 [2530.3]
+ r1724 + + 1 = Voltage limitation
<1> [6723.8] Id_set total
Symmetrizing
<2> [6721.8] + + + U_set [6730.1] <1>
– K
Kp_I Tn_I Isd_ctrl outp [Vrms] [6731.1] <2>
r1723
Coordinate converter

I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
0.000 ... 100000.000 0.00 ... 1000.00 [ms] p U_angle [6730.1] <1>
p1715 [D] (0.000) p1717 [D] (2.00) [6731.1] <2>
+
+

Isq_ctrl I_comp [Vrms]

Iq_set [Arms] + r1719 + + Quad U set [Vrms]
[6710.8] r0077 Symmetrizing r1733[0..1]
+ + Isq_reg Ausg + +
–
Kp_I Tn_I r1718
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Transformat_angle [°] Iq current controller

<1> [6730.1]
r0094
<2> [6731.1]

<1> [6730.4] Phase U

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Ia I_act abs val [Arms] [6300.1]

<2> [6731.4] [6799.1]
x2 y2 r0068 [0]
3 [8021.1]
<1> [6730.4] Phase V [8022.1]
<2> [6731.4]
VD-
Ib Iq_act [Arms]
2 [6310.1]
<1> [6730.4] Phase W r0078
[6799.6]
<2> [6731.4]

Id_act [Arms]
<1> For induction motors. r0076 [6799.6]
<2> For synchronous motors.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6714_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6714 -
Iq and Id controllers 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-108
I_set T_smooth
4 ... 10000 [ms]
MotMod status p1616 [D] (40)
[6731.3]
r1751.0
From Id_field weakening
[6724.8]
Mot phi_load opt 0
6721 – Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx)

0.0 ... 135.0 [°] MIN Id_setp total [Arms]

p0327 [D] (90.0) r1624
Id_inject
1 [6640.1], [6714.1]
Iq_set [Arms]
[6710.8] r0077 Load angle correction
Id_set

2 2
Iabs Iq_set

M
(r1407.2)
Iq [6640.5]
0 = M-Ctrl [6710.2]
1 = n-Ctrl Mot kT_reluctance [6799.7]
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [mH] kt Rel
Mot t_excitation p0328 [D] (0.00)
0.000 ... 20.000 [s]
p0346 [D] (0.000)
Mot L_leak total
Lq
M_set static 0 r0377 Iq
-200.0 ... 200.0 [%] 0.9 x
M
p1610 [D] (50.0) r0067 Mot L_stator d
1 Ld
r0378
M_suppl_accel
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] Id
p1611 [D] (30.0) MotMod kT corr
Iabs [6731.3]
M r0067 MAX r1797
r1538
M adaptation
Iabspre
M_suppl total Torque setting value, speed controller
[6060.6] [6040.4]
r1515

M_accel [Nm]
[6060.4] r1518 r1539

MotMod dev comp 1

[6731.2]
r1762

3 Function diagrams
n-Ctrl = 1

3.13 Vector control

PMSM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6721_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6721 -
Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
681
682

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-109
Mot t_excitation
0.000 ... 20.000 [s]
Field weak T_smth Field weak scal p0346 [D] (0.000)
0 ... 20000 [ms] 80.0 ... 120.0 [%]
p1584 [D] (0) p1586 [D] (100.0) ZSW cl-loop ctrl
p1401.0
r0056
1 = Flux setpoint soft starting active
r0056.4 [2526.2]
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)

U_output max [Vrms] p1401.2 1 = Magnetization completed

[6723.3] 1 = Flux build-up control active
r0071
Quick magnetizing active
p1401.6
ZSW cl-loop ctrl 1 = Quick magnetizing [6723.8]
Flex setp
y r0056 Magnetization control
50.0 ... 200.0 [%]
r0056.8 [2526.2]
p1570 [D] (100.0)
1 = Field weakening active
n_act [rpm]
r0063 [0]
f
Field weakening characteristic
MotMod status
[6730.4]
Mot T_rotor/T_Dd [ms] r1751
r0384 [D]
0
MIN Flux setp smooth [%]
Efficiency opt.
0 ... 100 [%] r1583
p1580 [D] (80) <0.3 s 1 [6723.1]

Flux setp T_smth

Efficiency optimization 4 ... 5000 [ms]
0.9 p1582 [D] (15)
I_outp max [Arms] Id current limit
[6640.3] r0067
[6723.1]

M_set static
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

-200.0 ... 200.0 [%] I_set T_smooth

p1610 [D] (50.0) 4 ... 10000 [ms]
M_suppl_accel
+ p1616 [D] (40)
0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
+
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p1611 [D] (30.0)

–
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm] Id_set Flux setpoint
[6060.5] r1508 calculation calculation

Mot I_mag_rtd act [Arms]

r0331 [D]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6722_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6722 -
Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-110
Drv filt type mot Pulse freq setp
0 ... 4 [kW] 2.000 ... 16.000 [kHz] 0 ... 10 20.0 ... 150.0 [%]
p0230 (0) p1800 [D] (4.000) p1802 [D] (0) p1803 [D] (106.0)
<1> <1>
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)

Calculation, max. modulation depth

Modulat_depth max [%] U_output max [Vrms]

r0073 r0071
[6640.1], [6722.1]

Field_ctrl Tn
10 ... 10000 [ms]
p1596 [D] (300)
0.0 ... 150.0 [Veff]
p1574 [D] (10.0)
0
<1>
Vdc act val [V] – Field_ctrl outp [%]
r0070 r1597
[6730.1]
+ +
–
-200 %
1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active
1 = Flux build-up control active Flux ctrl config
2
U_max 1 Flux ctrl config p1401.1
[6714.8] p1401.2

U_set 1 0
0
[6714.8] Quick magnetizing active
1 [6722.8]
Flux setp total [%]
r1598
Id_set stationary [Arms]
[6714.1]
r1623

+ +
Flux setp smooth [%] 0
r1583 + + Id_setp total [Arms]
[6722.8] r1624
1 [6640.1], [6714.1]
Saturation characteristic -1
p0362 ... p0369
Id current limit
[6722.8]

3 Function diagrams
3.13 Vector control
<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on p0500.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6723_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6723 -
Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
683
684

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-111
Drv filt type mot Pulse freq setp Modulator mode Modulat depth max
0 ... 4 [kW] 2.000 ... 16.000 [kHz] 0 ... 19 20.0 ... 120.0 [%]
p0230 (0) p1800 [D] (4.000) p1802 [D] (10) p1803 [D] (115.0)
<1> <1>

Calculation, max. modulation depth

6724 – Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx)

U_reserve dyn Field_ctr add_setp

Modulat_depth max [%] 0.0 ... 150.0 [Vrms] -80.00 ... 50.00 [%] Mot I_mag_rtd act [Arms]
r0073 p1574 [D] (2.0) p1595 [D] (0.00) r0331 [D]
<1>
Field_ctrl Tn
10 ... 10000 [ms]
p1596 [D] (300)

0
Vdc act val [V] – + Field/Fl_ctrl outp [Arms]
r0070 r1593[0..1]
[6731.1]
+ + +
–
2 U_max 1 U_output max [Vrms] Mot U_rated
[6714.8] r0071 0 ... 20000 [Vrms]
[6640.1] p0304 [D] (0)

U_set 1
[6714.8]

+
–
n_act [rpm] -nF nF
+
Id_field weaken. Ctrl
r0063 [0] [6721.1]
+
I_FieldWeak prectr [Arms]
r1589
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Id
Ȍnom
Mot I_mag_rtd act [Arms]
r0331 [D]
+ Flux setp total [%]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

0.9 100 % r1598

+
Flux setp T_smth
I_outp max [Arms]
Min -1 4 ... 5000 [ms]
r0067 p1582 [D] (15)
[6640.3]

Flux setp smooth [%]

r1583

<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on p0500. PMSM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6724_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 6724 -
Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-112 Control Unit Power Module

[6723.1] Vdc act val [V]
[6799.1] r0070 DC link voltage (Vdc)
[8022.1]
6730 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1)

U_output [Vrms] Mod_depth [%]

Pulse enable HW -
r0072 r0074
[6799.1] [6799.5]
[2701.8] +
2 [8022.1]
U_set U
[6300.8]
U_angle
[6300.8]
ZSW cl-loop ctrl PWM
Gain res_damp
p1740 V
r0056
f_Slip
r0056.11 ~
M

r0065 Current model Vibration damping [2526.2] W

f_outp [Hz]
[6310.5] r0066
+ +
Pre-control speed [6310.1] [6799.1]
[6030.8]

Power Module Interface

n_act [rpm] + +
r0063[0..2] MotMod n_adapt Kp + Sign
[rpm] + or -
p1764 p1767
r1770
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Kp Tn r0056
r0056.07

+ [6300.1] I_max Power Module I_max Power Module

+
[6640.1]
MotMod n_adapt Tn
n_act Adaptation controller [rpm]
r1771 I_phase act val [A]
r0069[0..8]
R_stator act [6714.1]
r0395
[6799.1]
Cos phi act Motor model U_phase act val [V]
r0087 r1762, r1763, r1778 r0089[0..2]
Flux act val [%]
r0084
Outp_ph_seq rev
p1820
Stall monitoring r1408.12 [8012.3]
Transformat_angle [°] p1745 P24 + BRP
[6714.1] r0094
M Model control [6722.6]
M - BRN

3 Function diagrams
Iq

3.13 Vector control

[6640.5] MotMod status
r1751 Brake control
[6710.1]
p1750 p1755 p1756 p1758 p1759

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6730_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6730 -
Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
685
686

3.13 Vector control

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-113
Control Unit Power Module

[6724.1] Vdc act val [V]

[6799.1] r0070 DC link voltage (Vdc)
[8022.1]
Pulse enable HW
6731 – Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx)

U_output [Vrms] Mod_depth [%] -

r0072 r0074 [2701.8]
+
[6799.1] [6799.5]
U_set 2 [8022.1]
[6714.8] U
U_angle
[6714.8] PWM
ZSW cl-loop ctrl V
Gain res_damp
p1740 r0056
r0056.11 ~
M

[2526.2] W
Current model Vibration damping f_outp [Hz]
r0066
+ + [6799.1]
Pre-control speed
[6030.8]

Power Module Interface

+ +
p1764 p1767 r1770
+ p1795
Sign
+ or -

MotMod kT corr [Nm/A]

r1797 [D] ZSW cl-loop ctrl
[6721.6] r0056
r0056.7
r1771
[6640.1] I_max PM
Quad U set [Vrms]
I_max PM
r1733
kT estimator
p0328 Direct U set [Vrms]
r0334 r1732[0]
p0357
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p1780.3 Id_act [Arms]

R_stator act [Ohm] r0076
r0395 [D] Iq_set [Arms]
r0077
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Outp_ph_seq rev
p1820
I_phase act val [A]
Transformat_angle [°] [6714.1] r0069[0..6] P24 + BRN
Motor model
[6714.1] r0094 r1762, r1778
M – BRN
MotMod status
Model control r1751 Brake control
U_phase act val [V]
[6721.4] r0089[0..2]
PMSM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
p1755 p1756

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6731_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 6731 -
Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-114
n_set before filt. [rpm] Mod_depth [%]
n_set smth [rpm] Mod_depth smth [%]
[6030.2] r0060 [6730.4] r0074
100 ms r0020 100 ms r0028
[6731.4]

n_act smooth [rpm]

6799 – Display signals

n_act [rpm] r0021 Id_act [Arms]

Id_act smooth [Arms]
[4715.6] r0063 [0] [6714.8] r0076
100 ms n_act rpm smooth [rpm] 300 ms r0029
r0022
Disp_val T_smooth
p0045
Iq_act [Arms]
Iq_act smooth [Arms]
n_act [rpm] [6714.8] r0078
300 ms r0030
r0063[1]
<1> [6730.1] M
<2> [6721.8] Iq
M_act [Nm]
f_outp [Hz] r0080 [0] [6799.6]
[6730.4] f_outp smooth [Hz] Disp_val T_smooth
r0066
[6731.4] 100 ms r0024 p0045

M_act [Nm]
U_output [Vrms] U_outp smooth [Vrms] r0080 [1]
n_act [rpm]
[6730.4] r0072 r0025
[6731.4] 100 ms r0063 [0]
P_act [kW]
r0082 [0] [6799.6]
Disp_val T_smooth
Vdc act val [V] Vdc smooth [V] p0045
<1> [6730.1]
r0070 r0026
<2> [6731.1] 100 ms
P_act [kW]
r0082 [1]

I_act abs val [Arms] I_act abs val smth [Arms]

[6714.8] r0068 [0] r0027 M_act [Nm]
300 ms M_act smooth [Nm]
[6799.8] r0080 [0]
100 ms r0031
Disp_val T_smooth
p0045

I_act abs val [Arms] P_act [kW] P_actv_act smth [kW]

r0068 [1] [6799.8] r0082 [0] r0032
100 ms

Cos phi act

<1> [6730.1] r0087 U_output [Vrms]
r0072 3 Cos phi act
Cos phi smooth
<1> [6730.4] [6730.1] r0087

3 Function diagrams
P_act [kW] 300 ms r0038

3.13 Vector control

r0082 [2]
<1> For induction motors.
<2> For synchronous motors.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control fp_6799_97_66.vsd Function diagram
- 6799 -
Display signals 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
687
3 Function diagrams
3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)

Function diagrams

6850 – U/f control, overview (p0096 = 1) 689

6851 – U/f characteristic and voltage boost (p0096 = 1) 690

6853 – Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f) (p0096 = 1) 691

6854 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (p0096 = 1) 692

6856 – Interface to the Power Module (p0096 = 1) 693

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

688 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-115
r0056
.
.
Flying restart Slip Uf Res_damp
6850 – U/f control, overview (p0096 = 1)

. Vdc_ctrl config Speed actual

mode value calculation compensation gain
p1280 p1334, p1335 p1338
p1200
[6854] [6853.8] [6853.4]
[2526] n_ctrl setp sum [rpm] [6853]
r1170
RFG setp at inp [rpm] + + + f_outp [Hz]
Ramp-function
[3001.8] r1119 generator r0066 [6856.1]
+ + +
Mot PolePairNo act
r0313 [D] 60
I_max_ctrl f_outp [rpm] f_outp smooth [Hz]
r1343 100 ms r0024

I_max reduction Transformat_angle [°]

[8016.8]
I_outp max [Arms] r0094 [6856.3]
r0067 Imax closed-loop
I_max PM frequency control
[6856.4] p1340 ... p1341 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056 I_max_ctrl U_outp [Vrms]
P_act [kW] MIN
– r0056.13 r1344
[6799.8] r0082 [0] Imax closed-loop
+ voltage control
p1345 ... P1346
+

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)

U_angle
PU P_rated [kW] [6856.1]
r0206[2] +
I_act abs val [Arms]
[6856.1] r0068 [0]

U_output [Vrms]
Mot I_mag_rtd act [Arms] V_boost perm + r0072
r0331 [D] p1310 K

Iq_act [Arms] + +
V_set
[6856.1] r0078 V_boost accelerate [6856.1]
p1311
[6851.8] + p

f_set U_outp smooth [Vrms]

V_boost starting
[6851.1] p1312 r0025
100 ms

[6851]

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Standard Drive Control fp_6850_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6850 -
U/f control, overview (p0096 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
689
690

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-116
Linear
U_output max [Vrms]
U_output max r0071 r0071
Mot U_rated p0304
6851 – U/f characteristic and voltage boost (p0096 = 1)

Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
0 ... 22
p1300 [D] (0)

Mot f_rated
p0310 [D] Dependent on the load 0
Iq_act [Arms] current
[6856.1] r0078 [6850.3]
2

Parabolic

U_output max r0071

Mot U_rated p0304
f_set
[6850.2]

Mot f_rated
p0310 [D]

I_outp max [Arms] R_stator act

p0305² - r0331² r0395
r0067 U_boost total [Veff]
r1315
I_start (Ua) perm x
p1310 [D] x² + r0331²
+
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

+
RFG ZSW
r1199 0 3
r1199.0 Mot I_rated
p0305 [D]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

ZSW cl-loop ctrl

r0056
r0056.6
0
0 [2526.2]
I_start accel
p1311 [D] +
1 0 +
0
I_start start
p1312 [D] 1 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
<1>
r0056
<1> p1312 is only effective for the first acceleration phase after pulse enable. r0056.5 [2526.2]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Standard Drive Control fp_6851_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 6851 -
U/f characteristic and voltage boost (p0096 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-117

U/f resonance damping U/f slip compensation

6853 – Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f) (p0096 = 1)

Uf Res_damp gain
0.00 ... 100.00
p1338 [D] (0.00)

Brake f_start
f_res damp Brake f_start p1352 [C]
<2>
[6850.7] -300.00 ... 300.00 [%] (1351[0])
– p1351 [D] (0.00)
Uf Res_damp T +
1.00 ... 1000.00 [ms]
p1339 [D] (20.00)

Iq_act [Arms] Slip comp scal Slip comp lim val

0.0 ... 600.0 [%] 0.00 ... 600.00 [%]
r0078 p1335 [D] (0.0) p1336 [D] (250.00) Mot slip_rated [Hz]
r0330 [D]

Slip
f_Slip [Hz] compensation
r0065 250 ms
[6850.6]
[6856.1]
1 100 %

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)

Mot slip_rated [Hz] -1 Slip comp act val [%]
r0330 [D] r1337
6% 10 % 95 % f/f Mot N
0
<1>
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
f_outp [Hz] Uf res_damp f_max 1
0.00 ... 3000.00 [Hz] r0056
r0066 p1349 [D] (0.00) r0056.10
0
[2526.2]

p1334 f/f Mot N

p1334 + 4 %

3 Function diagrams
<1> If p1349 = 0: the limit is 0.95 x f Mot N ” 45 Hz.
<2> Activation with r0056.4 = 1 till r0066 • p1334 and p1216 has expired.
100 % equal r0330 (Rated motor slip)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Standard Drive Control fp_6853_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6853 -
Resonance damping and slip compensation (U/f) (p0096 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
691
692

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-118 Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1291 [D]

Vdc_max (U/f control) Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate

p1290 [D] p1292 [D]
6854 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (p0096 = 1)

0 ... 1
p1280 [D] (1)
0
Vdc act val [V] ZSW cl-loop ctrl
1,3
r0070 1 r0056
[6856.1]
+
– 0
0 r0056.14
0,2 0 0
[2526.2]

Calculate on_level

Vdc_max on_level [V]

r1282 Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1283 [D]
Vdc_max SenseOnLev
p1294 Vdc_ctrl output [rpm]
r1298

U_connect 0 [6850.4]
p0210 Vdc_ctrl config

Vdc_min (U/f control)

Vdc_min on_level Vdc_ctrl Tn

p1285 [D] p1291 [D]
Vdc_min on_level [V]
r1286
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate

p1290 [D] p1292 [D]
Calculate on_level

0
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Vdc act val [V] – 0

2,3 0 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0070 1 r0056
[6856.1]
+
0 r0056.15
0,1 0
[2526.2]

Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1287 [D]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Standard Drive Control fp_6854_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6854 -
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (p0096 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-119 Control Unit Power Module

[6854.1] Vdc act val [V]
[6799.1] r0070 DC link voltage (Vdc)
[8022.1]
6856 – Interface to the Power Module (p0096 = 1)

U_output [Vrms] Mod_depth [%]

r0072 r0074
Pulse enable HW -
[6799.1] [6799.5] +
2 [8022.1]
U_set U
[6850.8] U_angle

ZSW cl-loop ctrl PWM

V
r0056
r0056.11 ~
M

[2526.2] W
f_outp [Hz]
r0066
[6850.8] ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056

Power Module Interface

Sign
+ or - r0056.07

R_stator act
r0395

Outp_ph_seq rev I_max PM

[6850.1]
p1820
I_max PM

3.14 Vector control, Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1)

Cos phi act I_phase act val [A]
[6799.1] [6799.1]
r0087 r0069 [0..6]
Motor model
Flux act val [%]
r0084

f_Slip [Hz] U_phase act val [V]

r0065 r0089[0..2]
[6853.4]

Transformation angle
[6850.8]
x2 y2
I_act abs val [Arms]
[6850.1] r0068
P24 + BRP
Ia 2
Id_act [Arms]
r0076 VD- M - BRN

3 Function diagrams
Iq_act [Arms] 3
[6850.1] Brake control
r0078 Ib
[6851.1]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Standard Drive Control fp_6856_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6856 -
Interface to the Power Module (p0096 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
693
3 Function diagrams
3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

Function diagrams

6820 – Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview (p0096 = 2) 695

6821 – Current control, overview (p0096 = 2) 696

6822 – Speed setpoint, precontrol symmetrization, acceleration model (p0096 = 2) 697

6823 – Moment of inertia estimator (p0096 = 2) 698

6824 – Speed controller with Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation (p0096 = 2) 699

6826 – Torque setpoint (p0096 = 2) 700

6827 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (p0096 = 2) 701

6828 – Current/power/torque limits (p0096 = 2) 702

6832 – Current setpoint filter (p0096 = 2) 703

6833 – Iq and Id controller (p0096 = 2) 704

6836 – Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) 705

6837 – Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) 706

6838 – Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) 707

6839 – Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) 708

6841 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) 709

6842 – Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) 710

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

694 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-120
n_pre-control
[6821.1]
Kp adaptation Tn adaptation M_suppl 1
n_ctrl setp sum [rpm] n_ctrl SL Kp n_ctrl SL Tn p1511 [C]
Mot MomInert Ratio p1470 p1472 (0)
r1170 p0342
6820 – Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview (p0096 = 2)

M_suppl 1 scal For Kp

[3001.8] Mot M_mom of inert adaptation
p0341 p1512 [C]
a_prectrl scal
p1496 (0)
M_suppl 2 scal
n_set_filt 1 T p1514 M_suppl total
p1416 M_suppl 2 r1515
p1513 [C]
n_ctrl n_set [rpm]
(0)
n_set after filter [rpm] r1438
r0062 M_accel [Nm]
r1518 [0]
Kp Tn
Symmetrizing
–

[6822] Speed setpoint, Pre-control balancing, acceleration model (p0096 = 2)

M_set [Nm]
r0079
r1508 [6821.1]

M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm]

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

n_modell [6826] Torque setpoint (p0096 = 2)
n_act [rpm]
r0063[0..2]

n_C n_act T_s SL

p1452
Current limit I_Ausg max
[6824] Speed controller with Kp_n/Tn_n p0640
adaptation (p0096 = 2) r0067
M_max upper
p1522 [C] M_max upper eff [Nm]
M_max upper
(1520[0]) r1538
p1520 [D] (0.00)
M_max lower Generating the
torque limits M_max lower eff [Nm]
p1523 [C]
p1400 p1401 r0056 r1408 M_max lower
(1521[0]) r1539
p1521 [D] (0.00)

3 Function diagrams
[6490] Closed-loop speed control configuration P_max mot P_max gen
[6491] Closed-loop flux control configuration p1530 p1531
[2526] Status word closed-loop control (r0056)
[2530] Status word closed-loop current control (r1408) [6828] Current/power/torque limits (p0096 = 2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6820_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6820 -
Speed control and generation of the torque limits, overview (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
695
696

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-121
I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
p1715 p1717 Vdc act val [V]
U_output [Vrms]
Iq_set [Arms] r0070
r0072
r0077
6821 – Current control, overview (p0096 = 2)

M_set [Nm] Mod_depth [%]

U_set
r0079 K r0074
+ U_angle
[6820.8] – P
M Iq controller +
+
Iq

[6832] Current setpoint filter I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn

p1715 p1717
U_output max [Vrms] Id_set [Arms]
r0071 r0075

–
– + – Iq_act [Arms]
Field weakening Id controller
controller r0078
V_set
Flex setp
50.0 ... 200.0 [%] I_phase actual
p1570 [D] (100.0) Id_act [Arms] value
Transformation
Efficiency opt. + r0076
<1> 0 ... 100 [%] +
p1580 [D] (80) Field weakening
characteristic
M_set static
-200.0 ... 200.0 [%] [6834] Iq and Id controllers
p1610 [D] (50.0)
M_suppl_accel
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] V_phase actual
p1611 [D] (30.0) Current calculation value

[6837] Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

[6838] Field weakening control, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1)

[6839] Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2) f_outp [Hz]
r0066
n_pre-control
[6820.3]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

+ p1764 p1767
+ +

f_Slip [Hz] Motor model

Current model r0065
M
n_model Iq

[6841] Interface to the Power Module for an induction motor (p0300 = 1)

<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module. [6842] Interface to the Power Module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6821_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6821 -
Current control (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-122 ZSW cl-loop ctrl

r0056
M_inert tot scal [kgm²] [2526.6] r0056.14
r1493
6822 – Speed setpoint, precontrol symmetrization, acceleration model (p0096 = 2)

[6823.8]

1
0 Calculated accelerating torque
[6826.1]
Acceleration calculation 0

ZSW n_ctrl
n_set before filt. [rpm]
r1407
r0060
r1407.11
[6799.1] n_C n_act T_s SL
[2522.3]
0.00 ... 32000.00 [ms]
p1452 [D] (10.00) a_prectrl scal
0.0 ... 10000.0 [%]
n_set_filt 1 T p1496 [D] (0.0)
0.00 ... 5000.00 [ms]
p1416 [D] (0.00)
Pre-control balancing >0 n_ctrl n_set [rpm]
n_ctrl setp sum [rpm] r1438 [6824.1]
r1170
0
[3080.8]

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

n_limit pos eff [rpm] n_set after filter [rpm]
r1084 r0062
[3050.8]
n_limit neg eff [rpm]
r1087
[3050.8]

1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active

n_ctrl config
p1400.15

0
0 Pre-control speed [6841.1]
[6842.1]
1

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6822_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6822 -
Speed setpoint, Pre-control balancing, acceleration model (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
697
698

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-123
n_ctrl config
Mot M_mom of inert p1400 .18
[D]
p0341 [D]
1 = moment of inertia estimator active

Mot MomInert Ratio 0 M_inert tot scal [kgm²]

p0342 [D]
r1493 [6822.4]
6823 – Moment of inertia estimator (p0096 = 2)

1
ZSW n_ctrl
r1407 a_prectrl scal
r1407.24 1 = moment of inertia estimator active p1496 [D]
r1407.26 1 = moment of inertia estimator stabilized

J_est t J
p1561 [D]
Only for initialization
J_est config
M_act [Nm] p5310 .1
[D]
r0080 Moment of inertia Moment of inertia <1> 1 = moment of inertia precontrol activated
n_act [rpm] estimator calculation
1
r0063

0
J_est M thresh J_est config
p1560 [D] J_est t load p5310 [D] J_prectrl t J
p1562 [D] p5316 [D]
<1>

Active for p5310.0 = 1

Load torque Cyclic calculation of
estimator the coefficients

ZSW n_ctrl
r1407
J_est M pos [Nm] Positive direction of J_est lin pos
r1407.25
p1563 [D] (0.00) rotation p5312 [D]
1 = load estimator active <2>
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

J_est const pos

Basic function p5313 [D]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> Possible bit combinations p5310:

Bit 1, 0
= 0, 0 --> Function not active.
= 0, 1 --> Cyclic calculation of the coefficients without moment of inertia precontrol (commissioning).
= 1, 0 --> Moment of inertia precontrol activated (without cyclic calculation of the coefficients).
= 1, 1 --> Moment of inertia precontrol activated (with cyclic calculation of the coefficients).
<2> p1564, p5314 and p5315 for negative direction of rotation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6823_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6823 -
Moment of inertia estimator (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-124
n_act [rpm]
r0063[0]

n_ctr Tn n up scal n_ctrl SL Kp n_ctrl SL Tn

Tn
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] 0.000 ... 999999.000 0.0 ... 100000.0 [ms]
6824 – Speed controller with Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation (p0096 = 2)

p1463 [D] (100.0) n Tn p1470 [D] (0.300) p1472 [D] (20.0)

<1>
[6824.8] Kp_n_basic
n
Tn_n_basic To Kp/Tn adaptation
Tn_n_adapt Tn_n_basic [6824.1]
n_ctrl n upper <2>
0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] Kp_n_adapt
p1465 [D] (210000.00)
n_ctrl n lower <2> [6490.6] 1 0 1 0
0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] n_ctrl config 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active
p1464 [D] (0.00) p1400.5
n_ctr Tn eff [ms]
Kp_n_basic Kp r1469
[6824.8] n_ctrl config Dynamic reduction, field
p1400.0 weakening
[6490.6] n_ctr Kp eff
n_ctr Kp n up scal Kp 1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
r1468
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] n
p1461 [D] (100.0) Speed controller
n_ctrl sys dev [rpm] Kp Tn
Kp
r0064
n_ctrl n_set [rpm] Kp
M_set from speed controller
[6822.8] r1438 [6826.1]
+ M_max upper eff [Nm]
+ +
–
[6828.8] r1538

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

M_max lower eff [Nm]
[6828.8] r1539
n_C n_act T_s SL Tn
0.00 ... 32000.00 [ms] Kp
p1452 [D] (10.00)
n_ctrl I-M_outp [Nm]
r1482
n_act [rpm] n_act smooth [rpm] Set ZSW n_ctrl
Enable speed controller Hold Set Val
r0063 r1445 r1407
from sequence control S4: Operation
r1407.3 [2522.3]
1 = Speed controller active
ZSW n_ctrl
r1407
r1407.5 [2522.3]
n_ctrl M_sv MHB
1 = Speed controller, I component held
p1475[C] Integrator control
ZSW n_ctrl
(0)
r1407
r1407.6 [2522.3]
Torque setting value, speed controller

3 Function diagrams
[6836.8] 1 = Speed controller, I component set
<1> For p1472 = 0.0 s or 100.0 s, the I component is
ZSW n_ctrl n_ctrl config
disabled (integral action time = infinite).
r1407 1 = Torque limit reached p1400.1
<2> If the lower transition point exceeds the upper transition [2522.7]
point, the Kp-adaptation also changes over. r1407.7 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6824_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6824 -
Speed controller with Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
699
700

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-125
M_suppl 1 <5> 0
0
p1511 [C] M_suppl total [Nm]
[7010.8] r1515
(0)
+ 1
p1400.14 1 = Torque pre-control <1>
+ STW seq_ctrl [6490.7]
M_suppl 1 scal
p1512 [C] M_suppl 2 scal r0898 1 = Speed controller enable 1
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] [2501.7] r0898.12
6826 – Torque setpoint (p0096 = 2)

(0)
p1514 [D] (100.0)
M_suppl 2 M_accel T_smooth
p1513 [C] 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
<1> <2> p1517 [D] (4.00) <1> <2>
(0) M_accel [Nm] M_accel [Nm]
<3>
r1518 [0] r1518 [1]
+
Calculated accelerating torque
[6822.8] M_suppl + M_accel [Nm]
+ r1516
M_max upper eff [Nm]
[6828.8] r1538 1 = Current/torque limiting
active
M_max up w/o offs r0056
p1552 [C] r0056.13
(1)
[2526.2]
M_max up w/o offs [Nm] M_max outp n_ctrl [Nm]
[6828.5] r1526 r1547 [0] 1 = Torque limit reached
r1407
1 = Torque limiting, upper, 1 r1407.7 [2522.3]
active
r1407
r1407.8 1 = Torque limiting, upper,
active
[2522.3] r1407
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm] r1407.8 [2522.3]
r1508
[6837.1]
+ M_set [Nm]
M_set from the speed controller [6832.1]
[6824.8] r0079
+ [8012.1]
1 = Torque limit reached <4>
(without pre-control) Torque
limiting
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r1407
[2522.3]
M_max low w/o offs r1407.15
p1554 [C] 1 = Torque limiting, lower,
1 = Torque limiting, lower, active
(1) active
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

r1407 r1407
r1407.9 r1407.9 [2522.3]
M_max low w/o offs [Nm] [2522.3] M_max outp n_ctrl [Nm]
[6828.5] r1527 r1547[1]

M_max lower eff [Nm]

[6828.8] r1539

<1> The signal is only effective after magnetization has been <3> Acceleration control is inhibited for p1517 = 100 ms. <5> The connection to the source for the torque setpoint is
completed (r0056.4 = 1). <4> M_set is also influenced by the speed limit controller. estabished automatically via the setting in p1500.
<2> No pre-control if the Vdc controller is active [6220.8].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6826_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6826 -
Torque setpoint (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-126 Vdc_ctrl Tn

p1251 [D]

Vdc_max (Vector control) Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate

p1250 [D] p1252 [D]
6827 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (p0096 = 2)

Vdc ctr config vec

p1240 [D] 0

Vdc act val [V] 1 = Vdc_max controller active

1,3
r0070 1 r0056
+
– 0 0 r0056.14
0,2 0
[2526.2]
Calculate on_level

Vdc_max on_level [V]

r1242
Vdc_max dyn_factor
Vdc_max SenseOnLev p1243 [D] Vdc controller active
p1254 1
Vdc_ctrl output [Arms] [6832.1]
r1258
Iq_max
U_connect [6832.1]
Operating point
1 ... 63000 [V] 0
selection Iq_min
p0210 (400)
[6832.1]

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

Vdc_min (Vector control)

Vdc_min on_level Vdc_ctrl Tn

p1245 [D] p1251 [D]
Vdc_min on_level [V]
r1246
Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1250 [D] p1252 [D]
Calculate on_level

Vdc act val [V] – 0 1 = Vdc_min controller active

2,3
r0070 1 r0056
+
0 r0056.15
0,1 0
[2526.2]

3 Function diagrams
Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1247 [D]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6827_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 6827 -
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
701
702

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-127 Current limiting Speed limiting
Mot L_leak total [mH]
r0377 [D]
Kp from speed controller [6824.5]
Tn from speed controller [6824.6]
6828 – Current/power/torque limits (p0096 = 2)

[6838.4] U_output max [Vrms] Iq stall 1 = Speed limiting control

[6839.4] r0071 calculation active
I_outp max [Arms] n_limit pos eff [rpm]
Current limit + r1407.17
r0067 [3050.8] r1084
p0640 [D]
[6837.1], [6839.1] [2522.3]
[3050.8] r1087 +
Iq_max total [Arms] – –
I_max reduction x r1533 n_limit neg eff [rpm] Speed limiting
[8016.8] Min controller
[6841.4] I_max PM x2 y2 Sign <4>
[6842.4] + or -
y -1
[6836.8] Id_setp total [Arms]
[6838.8] r1624

Max Min

n_act [rpm]
r0063[0]

M_max upper
! Isq_max stall [Arms]
p1522 [C] M_max up w/o offs [Nm]
M_max upper [Nm] <1> r1548 [1]
(1520[0]) r1526 [6826.1]
p1520 [D] (0.00) Lower limit
M_max upper scal + M_max upper eff [Nm]
M_max upper scal p1528 [C] Min r1538
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] (1524[0]) Isq_max stall [Arms] [6836.8] M +
r1548 [0] [6841.1] Iq [6824.4], [6826.1]
p1524 [D] (100.0)
M_max lower
Upper limit
p1523 [C]
M_max lower [Nm]
(1521[0])
+ M_max lower eff [Nm]
p1521 [D] (0.00) ! Max r1539
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

r1527 [6826.1]
<2> + [6824.4], [6826.1]
M_max lower scal M_max low w/o offs [Nm]
M_max lower scal p1529 [C]
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] (1525[0]) <3>
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p1525 [D] (100.0) Iq

Isq_max [Arms]
Min r1536
P_max gen
-100000.00 ... -0.01 [kW] [6832.1]
p1531 [D] (-0.01)
n
P_max mot Isq_min [Arms]
0.00 ... 100000.00 [kW] Max r1537
p1530 [D] (0.00) [6832.1]
Power limiting <3>

!
<1> Danger: Negative values at <1> represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and <3> Intervention by the Vdc controller.
<2> positive values at <2> can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably. <4> Intervention when the speed limit is exceeded + 2 % n_rated.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6828_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6828 -
Current/power/torque limits (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-128
6832 – Current setpoint filter (p0096 = 2)

ZSW cl-loop ctrl ZSW cl-loop ctrl

[2526.7] r0056 1 = Vdc_max controller active
r0056
1 = Frequency, negative
[2526.7]
[6827.8] r0056.14 r0056.7

Iq_max 1
[6827.8]
1
Isq_max [Arms]
[6828.8]
r1536 0
0

ZSW cl-loop ctrl

[2526.7] r0056 1 = Vdc_min controller active
[6827.8] r0056.15

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

0
Iq_min 1
[6827.8]
Isq_min [Arms] 1
[6828.8]
r1537 0

M_set [Nm] Interpolator and Iq_set [Arms] [6834.1]

[6826.8] r0079 smoothing for r0077 [6836.1]
+ voltage limits [6842.3]
+
Frict outp [Nm]
[7010.6] r3841

M
[6836.8] Iq
[6841.1]

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6832_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 6832 -
Current setpoint filter (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
703
704

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-129
Mot L_leak total [mH]
r0377 [D]

Flux setp total [%]

<1> [6838.5] U_soll 1 [6838.1] <1>
r1598
<2> [6839.8] [6839.1] <2>
Pre-control, de-coupling and
6833 – Iq and Id controller (p0096 = 2)

limiting U_max 1 [6838.3] <1>

[6839.3] <2>

ZSW cl-loop ctrl

Isq_ctr_prectrScal r0056
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] ZSW I_ctrl r0056.9 [2526.2]
p1703 [D] (60.0) r1408 Direct U set [Vrms]
r1408.1 r1732[0..1]
Id current controller [2530.2] ZSW I_ctrl
r1408
+ r1408.3 [2530.2]
<2> [6836.8] Id_setp total [Arms]
Symmetrizing
<1> [6838.8] r1624 + +
– U_set [6841.1] <1>
Kp_I Tn_I K [6842.1] <2>
Id_set [Arms]
r0075
Coordinate converter
I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
0.000 ... 100000.000 0.00 ... 1000.00 [ms]
p1715 [D] (0.000) p1717 [D] (2.00) p U_angle [6841.1] <1>
+ [6842.1] <2>
+

Iq_set [Arms] + Quad U set [Vrms]

[6832.8] r0077 Symmetrizing r1733[0..1]
+ +
–
Kp_I Tn_I
Transformat_angle [°] Iq current controller
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

<1> [6841.1]
r0094
<2> [6842.1]

<1> [6841.4] Phase U

Ia
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<2> [6842.4]
3 I_act abs val [Arms]
<1> [6841.4] Phase V x2 y2 r0068[0] [6799.1]
<2> [6842.4]
VD-
Ib Iq_act [Arms]
2
<1> [6841.4] Phase W r0078 [6799.6]
<2> [6842.4]
Id_act [Arms]
r0076 [6799.6]

<1> For induction motors.

<2> For synchronous motors.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6833_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6833 -
Iq and Id controllers (p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-130
I_set T_smooth
4 ... 10000 [ms]
MotMod status p1616 [D] (40)
[6842.3]
r1751.0
From Id_field weakening
[6839.8]
Mot phi_load opt 0
6836 – Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2)

0.0 ... 135.0 [°] MIN Id_setp total [Arms]

p0327 [D] (90.0) r1624
Id_inject [6828.1], [6834.1]
1
Iq_set [Arms]
[6832.8] r0077 Load angle correction
Id_set

2 2
Iabs Iq_set

M
(r1407.2)
Iq [6828.5]
0 = M-Ctrl [6832.2]
1 = n-Ctrl Mot kT_reluctance [6799.7]
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [mH] kt Rel
p0328 [D] (0.00)

Mot L_leak total

Lq
Mot t_excitation 0 r0377 Iq
0.000 ... 20.000 [s] M

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

p0346 [D] (0.000) Mot L_stator d
1 Ld
r0378
M_set static
-200.0 ... 200.0 [%] 0.9 x Id
p1610 [D] (50.0) r0067 MotMod kT corr
[6842.3]
r1797
M_suppl_accel
M adaptation
0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
p1611 [D] (30.0)
Iabs Torque setting value, speed controller
M r0067 MAX [6824.4]
r1538

M_accel [Nm] Iabspre

[6826.4] r1518

M_suppl total
[6826.6] r1539
r1515

3 Function diagrams
n-Ctrl = 1

PMSM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6836_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6836 -
Id setpoint (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
705
706

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-131
Mot t_excitation
0.000 ... 20.000 [s]
p0346 [D] (0.000)

ZSW cl-loop ctrl

p1401.0
r0056
1 = Flux setpoint soft starting active
r0056.4 [2526.2]
6837 – Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2)

U_output max [Vrms] p1401.2 1 = Magnetization completed

[6838.4] 1 = Flux build-up control active
r0071
Quick magnetizing active
p1401.6
ZSW cl-loop ctrl 1 = Quick magnetizing [6838.8]
Flex setp
y r0056 Magnetization control
50.0 ... 200.0 [%]
r0056.8 [2526.2]
p1570 [D] (100.0)
1 = Field weakening active
n_act [rpm]
r0063 [0]
f
Field weakening characteristic
MotMod status
[6841.3]
Mot T_rotor/T_Dd [ms] r1751
r0384 [D]
0
MIN Flux setp smooth [%]
Efficiency opt.
0 ... 100 [%] r1583
p1580 [D] (80) <0.3 s 1 [6838.1]

Flux setp T_smth

Efficiency optimization 4 ... 5000 [ms]
0.9 p1582 [D] (15)
I_outp max [Arms] Id current limit
[6828.3] r0067
[6838.1]

M_set static
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

-200.0 ... 200.0 [%] I_set T_smooth

p1610 [D] (50.0) 4 ... 10000 [ms]
M_suppl_accel
+ p1616 [D] (40)
0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
+
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p1611 [D] (30.0)

–
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm] Id_set Flux setpoint
[6826.6] r1508 calculation calculation

Mot I_mag_rtd act [Arms]

r0331 [D]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6837_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6837 -
Field weakening characteristic, flux setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-132

Drv filt type mot Pulse freq setp Modulator mode Modulat depth max
6838 – Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2)

0 ... 4 [kW] 2.000 ... 16.000 [kHz] 0 ... 10 20.0 ... 150.0 [%]
p0230 (0) p1800 [D] (4.000) p1802 [D] (0) p1803 [D] (106.0)
<1> <1>

Calculation, max. modulation depth

Modulat_depth max [%] U_output max [Vrms]

r0073 r0071
[6828.1], [6837.1]

Field_ctrl Tn
10 ... 10000 [ms]
U_reserve dyn p1596 [D] (300)
0.0 ... 150.0 [Vrms]
p1574 [D] (10.0)
0
<1>
Vdc act val [V] – Field_ctrl outp [%]
r0070 r1597
[6841.1]
+ +
–
-200 % 1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active
1 = Flux build-up control active Flux ctrl config
2
U_max 1 Flux ctrl config p1401.1
[6834.8] p1401.2

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

U_set 1 0
0
[6834.8] Quick magnetizing active
1 [6837.8]
Flux setp total [%]
r1598
Id_set stationary [Arms]
[6834.1]
r1623

+ +
Flux setp smooth [%] 0
r1583 + + Id_setp total [Arms]
[6837.8] r1624
1 [6828.1], [6834.1]
Saturation characteristic -1
p0362 ... p0369
Id current limit
[6837.8]

3 Function diagrams
<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on p0500.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6838_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6838 -
Field weakening controller, flux controller, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
707
708

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-133
Drv filt type mot Pulse freq setp Modulator mode Modulat depth max
0 ... 4 [kW] 2.000 ... 16.000 [kHz] 0 ... 19 20.0 ... 120.0 [%]
p0230 (0) p1800 [D] (4.000) p1802 [D] (10) p1803 [D] (115.0)
<1> <1>

Calculation, max. modulation depth

6839 – Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2)

U_reserve dyn Field_ctr add_setp

Modulat_depth max [%] 0.0 ... 150.0 [Vrms] -80.00 ... 50.00 [%] Mot I_mag_rtd act [Arms]
r0073 p1574 [D] (2.0) p1595 [D] (0.00) r0331 [D]
<1>
Field_ctrl Tn
10 ... 10000 [ms]
p1596 [D] (300)

0
Vdc act val [V] – + Field/Fl_ctrl outp [Arms]
r0070 r1593[0..1]
[6842.1]
+ + +
–
2 U_max 1 U_output max [Vrms] Mot U_rated
[6834.8] r0071 0 ... 20000 [Vrms]
[6828.1] p0304 [D] (0)

U_set 1
[6834.8]

+
–
n_act [rpm] -nF nF
+
Id_field weaken. Ctrl
r0063 [0] [6836.1]
+
I_FieldWeak prectr [Arms]
r1589
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Id
Ȍnom
Mot I_mag_rtd act [Arms]
r0331 [D]
+ Flux setp total [%]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

0.9 100 % r1598

+
Flux setp T_smth
I_outp max [Arms]
Min -1 4 ... 5000 [ms]
r0067 p1582 [D] (15)
[6828.3]

Flux setp smooth [%]

r1583

<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on p0500. PMSM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6839_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6839 -
Field weakening controller (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-134 Control Unit Power Module

[6838.1] Vdc act val [V]
[6799.1] r0070 DC link voltage (Vdc)
[8022.1]
6841 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2)

U_output [Vrms] Mod_depth [%]

Pulse enable HW -
r0072 r0074
[6799.1] [6799.5]
+
2 [8022.1]
U_set U
[6834.8]
U_angle
[6834.8]
ZSW cl-loop ctrl PWM
Gain res_damp
p1740 V
r0056
r0056.11 ~
M

Current model Vibration damping [2526.2] W

f_outp [Hz]
f_Slip [Hz]
r0065 r0066
+ +
Pre-control speed [6799.1]
[6822.8]

Power Module Interface

n_act [rpm] + +
r0063[0..2] MotMod n_adapt Kp + Sign
[rpm] + or -
p1764 p1767
r1770
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Kp Tn r0056
r0056.07

I_max PM
+ I_max PM

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

+ [6828.1]
MotMod n_adapt Tn
n_act Adaptation controller [rpm]
r1771

R_stator act
r0395 Cos phi act I_phase act val [A]
[6834.1] r0069[0..6]
[6799.1] r0087
[6799.1] Motor model
Flux act val [%]
r0084
Outp_ph_seq rev U_phase act val [V]
p1820 r0089[0..2]
Transformat_angle [°] Stall monitoring r1408.12 [8012.3]
r0094 p1745 P24 + BRP

Model control MotMod status

M r1751 M - BRN

3 Function diagrams
[6837.6]
[6828.5] Iq
Brake control
[6832.1]
p1755 p1756 p1758 p1759

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6841_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6841 -
Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1, p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
709
710

3.15 Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2)

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-135
Control Unit Power Module

[6839.1] Vdc act val [V]

[6799.1] r0070 DC link voltage (Vdc)
[8022.1]
Pulse enable HW
6842 – Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2)

U_output [Vrms] Mod_depth [%] -

r0072 r0074
+
[6799.1] [6799.5]
U_set 2 [8022.1]
[6834.8] U
U_angle
[6834.8] PWM
ZSW cl-loop ctrl V
Gain res_damp
p1740 r0056
r0056.11 ~
M

[2526.2] W
Current model Vibration damping
f_outp [Hz]
r0066
+ + [6799.1]
Pre-control speed
[6822.8]

Power Module Interface

+ +
p1764 p1767
+
MotMod n_adapt
Kp [rpm]
Sign
r1770 + or -

MotMod kT corr [Nm/A]

r1797 [D] ZSW cl-loop ctrl
[6836.6] r0056
MotMod n_adapt r0056.7
Tn [rpm]
[2526.2]
r1771 I_max PM
Quad U set [Vrms] I_max PM
r1733 [6828.1]
kT estimator
p0328 Direct U set [Vrms]
r0334 r1732[0]
p0357
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p1780.3 Id_act [Arms]

R_stator act [Ohm] r0076
r0395 [D] Iq_set [Arms]
r0077
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Outp_ph_seq rev
p1820
I_phase act val [A]
Transformat_angle [°] [6834.1] r0069[0..6] P24 + BRN
Motor model
r0094 r1762, r1778
M – BRN
MotMod status
Model control r1751 Brake control
U_phase act val [V]
[6836.4] r0089[0..2]
PMSM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
p1755 p1756

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control, Dynamic Drive Control fp_6842_97_56.vsd Function diagram
- 6842 -
Interface to the Power Module (PMSM, p0300 = 2xx, p0096 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
 3 Function diagrams
3.16 Technology functions

3.16 Technology functions

Function diagrams

7010 – Friction characteristic 712

7017 – DC braking (ASM, p0300 = 1) 713

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 711
712

3.16 Technology functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-136 Record friction characteristic
Friction ZSW
r3840
Frict rec t_RU/RD
0.000 ... 999999.000 [s] r3840
p3846 [D] (10.000)
7010 – Friction characteristic

Frict rec t_warm Friction characteristic record activated

0.000 ... 3600.000 [s] r3840.1
p3847 [D] (0.000)
Friction characteristic record completed
r3840.2
[3080.7] Friction characteristic record aborted
Frict rec act Drive ON from the sequence control
r3840.3
0 ... 3 Start ramp-function generator
p3845 (0) <1>
Friction characteristic record active (p3845 > 0) A07961
"Friction characteristic record activated"

F07963
"Friction characteristic record
interrupted"
Play friction characteristic
Friction M0 Friction M9
p3830 [D] p3839 [D] M_max lower eff [Nm]
[6640.8] r1539

Friction characteristic OK
r3840.0
M [Nm] Frict act
A07960 p3842
"Friction characteristic incorrect"
n_act [rpm]
r0063 1 Frict outp [Nm]
r3841 [6710.1]
Sign 0 [6832.1]
n [rpm] 0
+ or -
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

n_act [rpm]
r0063 [0]
Friction n0 Friction n9 M_max upper eff [Nm]
p3820 [D] p3829 [D]
[6640.8] r1538
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Friction characteristic positive direction

r3840.8

<1> p3845
= 0: Friction characteristic record deactivated
= 1: Friction char record activated for all directions
= 2: Friction char record activated for positive direction
= 3: Friction char record activated for negative direction

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology functions fp_7010_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 7010 -
Friction characteristic 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-137
<1> <2>
Mot t_de-excitat DCBRK I_brake DCBRK time DCBRK n_start Current actual values I_act abs val [Arms]
0.000 ... 20.000 [s] 0.00 ... 10000.00 [Arms] 0.0 ... 3600.0 [s] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] [6714] r0068[0..1]
p0347 [D] (0.000) p1232 [D] (0.00) p1233 [D] (1.0) p1234 [D] (210000.00)
7017 – DC braking (ASM, p0300 = 1)

n_act Pulse suppression The parameters of the

DCBRK config
n_set To pulse inhibit I_max current controller are also used.
0 ... 14
To sequence control
p1231 [D] (0) p1234 I_max_U_ctrl Kp I_max_U_ctrl Tn
DCBRK Akt DCBRK ZSW 0.000 ... 100000.000 0.000 ... 50.000 [s]
p1230 [C] r1239 p1345 [D] (0.000) p1346 [D] (0.030)
<3> 14
4
(0) t r1239.10
OFF |I_set| p0347 1 = DC braking ready U_output [Vrms]
0 Kp Tn
r0072
p1232 |I_set| –
DCBRK ZSW |I_act|
From I²t control [8021] MIN
r1239 p1233 t To control [6730]
r1239 To U/f characteristic
[6301]
Pulse suppression
n_act
n_set
I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
0.000 ... 100000.000 0.00 ... 1000.00 [ms]
p1715 [D] (0.000) p1717 [D] (2.00)
p1231 = 4 (control command) t To pulse inhibit
p0347 To sequence control
|I_set|
DCBRK ZSW
r1239 p1232
r1239 |I_act|
t

Braking response
n_act Pulse suppression
p1231 = 5 (OFF1/OFF3)
n_set
p1234
DCBRK ZSW To pulse inhibit
r1239 t To sequence control
r1239 |I_set| p0347 DCBRK ZSW
DC brake fault response r1239
p1232

3.16 Technology functions

r1239.8 [2511.1]
|I_act|
1 = DC braking active
p1233 t

3 Function diagrams
<1> The de-magnetization time is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, 3).
<2> The DC braking current is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1).
<3> DC braking when starting speed for DC braking (p1234) is fallen below.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology functions fp_7017_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7017 -
DC braking (ASM, p0300 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
713
3 Function diagrams
3.17 Free function blocks

3.17 Free function blocks

Function diagrams

7200 – Sampling times of the runtime groups 715

7210 – AND 0 ... 3 716

7212 – OR 0 ... 3 717

7214 – XOR 0 ... 3 718

7216 – NOT 0 ... 5 719

7220 – ADD 0 ... 2, SUB 0 ... 1 720

7222 – MUL 0 ... 1, DIV 0 ... 1 721

7224 – AVA 0 ... 1 722

7225 – NCM 0 ... 1 723

7226 – PLI 0 ... 1 724

7230 – MFP 0 ... 3, PCL 0 ... 1 725

7232 – PDE 0 ... 3 726

7233 – PDF 0 ... 3 727

7234 – PST 0 ... 1 728

7240 – RSR 0 ... 2, DFR 0 ... 2 729

7250 – BSW 0 ... 1, NSW 0 ... 1 730

7260 – LIM 0 ... 1 731

7262 – PT1 0 ... 1 732

7264 – INT 0, DIF 0 733

7270 – LVM 0 ... 1 734

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

714 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-138
7200 – Sampling times of the runtime groups

Run-time group

1 2 3 4 5 6
r20001[1] = 8 ms r20001[2] = 16 ms r20001[3] = 32 ms r20001[4] = 64 ms r20001[5] = 128 ms r20001[6] = 256 ms RTG sampling time [ms]
r20001[0..9]
Logic function blocks
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
X X X X X X
Arithmetic function blocks
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, AVA, NCM, PLI
- - - - X X
Time function blocks
MFP, PCL, PDE, PDF, PST
- - - - X X
Memory function blocks
RSR, DSR
X X X X X X
Switch function block
NSW
- - - - X X
Switch function block
BSW
X X X X X X
Control function blocks
LIM, PT1, INT, DIF
- - - - X X
Complex function blocks
LVM
- - - - X X

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free Function Blocks fp_7200_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7200 -
Sampling times of the runtime groups 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
715
716

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-139 AND (AND function blocks)
AND 0 AND 2
7210 – AND 0 ... 3

AND 0 RTG AND 2 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20032 (9999) p20040 (9999)

AND 0 inputs AND 2 inputs

p20030 p20038
I0 I0
[0] [0]
I1 AND 0 output Q I1 AND 2 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20031 I2 r20039
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3

AND 0 RunSeq AND 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20033 (10) p20041 (30)

AND 1 AND 3

AND 1 RTG AND 3 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20036 (9999) p20044 (9999)

AND 1 inputs AND 3 inputs

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p20034 p20042
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 AND 1 output Q I1 AND 3 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20035 I2 r20043
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3

AND 1 RunSeq AND 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20037 (20) p20045 (40)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Logic function blocks fp_7210_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7210 -
AND 0 … 3 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-140 OR (OR function blocks)

OR 0 OR 2
OR 0 RTG OR 2 RTG
7212 – OR 0 ... 3

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999

p20048 (9999) p20056 (9999)

OR 0 inputs OR 2 inputs
p20046 p20054
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 OR 0 output Q I1 OR 2 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20047 I2 r20055
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3

OR 0 RunSeq OR 2 RunSeq
0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20049 (60) p20057 (80)

OR 1 OR 3

OR 1 RTG OR 3 RTG
1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20052 (9999) p20060 (9999)

OR 1 inputs OR 3 inputs
p20050 p20058
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 OR 1 output Q I1 OR 3 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20051 I2 r20059
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3

OR 1 RunSeq OR 3 RunSeq
0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000

3.17 Free function blocks

p20053 (70) p20061 (90)

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Logic function blocks fp_7212_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7212 -
OR 0 … 3 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
717
718

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-141 XOR (XOR function blocks)
XOR 0 XOR 2
XOR 0 RTG XOR 2 RTG
1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
7214 – XOR 0 ... 3

p20064 (9999) p20072 (9999)

XOR 0 inputs XOR 2 inputs

p20062 p20070
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 XOR 0 output Q I1 XOR 2 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20063 I2 r20071
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3

XOR 0 RunSeq XOR 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20065 (110) p20073 (130)

XOR 1 XOR 3

XOR 1 RTG XOR 3 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20068 (9999) p20076 (9999)

XOR 1 inputs XOR 3 inputs

p20066 p20074
I0 I0
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

[0] [0]
I1 XOR 1 output Q I1 XOR 3 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20067 I2 r20075
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

XOR 1 RunSeq XOR 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20069 (120) p20077 (140)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Logic function blocks fp_7214_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7214 -
XOR 0 … 3 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-142 NOT (inverter)

NOT 0 NOT 3

NOT 0 RTG NOT 3 RTG

7216 – NOT 0 ... 5

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999

p20080 (9999) p20092 (9999)
NOT 0 input I NOT 3 input I
p20078 NOT 0 inv output p20090 NOT 3 inv output
I Q I Q
(0) 1 r20079 (0) 1 r20091

NOT 0 RunSeq NOT 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20081 (160) p20093 (190)

NOT 1 NOT 4

NOT 1 RTG NOT 4 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20084 (9999) p20302 (9999)
NOT 1 input I NOT 4 input I
p20082 NOT 1 inv output p20300 NOT 4 inv output
I Q I Q
(0) 1 r20083 (0) 1 r20301

NOT 1 RunSeq NOT 4 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20085 (170) p20303 (770)

NOT 2 NOT 5

NOT 2 RTG NOT 5 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20088 (9999) p20306 (9999)
NOT 2 input I NOT 5 input I
p20086 NOT 2 inv output p20304 NOT 5 inv output
I Q I Q

3.17 Free function blocks

(0) 1 r20087 (0) 1 r20305

3 Function diagrams
NOT 2 RunSeq NOT 5 RunSeq
0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20089 (180) p20307 (780)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Logic function blocks fp_7216_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7216 -
NOT 0 … 5 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
719
720

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-143
ADD (adder) SUB (subtracter)
ADD 0 ADD 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20096 (9999)
SUB 0
7220 – ADD 0 ... 2, SUB 0 ... 1

ADD 0 inputs
p20094 SUB 0 RTG
X0
[0] 5 ... 9999
X1 ADD 0 output Y p20104 (9999)
[1] Y
[2]
X2 + r20095
X3
[3]
SUB 0 inputs
p20102
X1 SUB 0 difference Y
[0] Y
[1]
X2 X1 - X2 r20103
ADD 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20097 (210)

ADD 1 ADD 1 RTG

5 ... 9999 SUB 0 RunSeq
p20100 (9999) 0 ... 32000
p20105 (240)
ADD 1 inputs
p20098
X0
[0]
X1 ADD 1 output Y
[1] Y
[2]
X2 + r20099
X3
[3]
SUB 1

ADD 1 RunSeq SUB 1 RTG

0 ... 32000 5 ... 9999
p20101 (220) p20108 (9999)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

ADD 2 ADD 2 RTG

SUB 1 inputs
5 ... 9999
p20310 (9999) p20106
X1 SUB 1 difference Y
[0] Y
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

ADD 2 inputs [1]

X2 X1 - X2 r20107
p20308
X0
[0]
X1 ADD 2 output Y
[1] Y
[2]
X2 + r20309
X3 SUB 1 RunSeq
[3]
0 ... 32000
p20109 (250)

ADD 2 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20311 (800)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Arithmetic function blocks fp_7220_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7220 -
ADD 0 … 2, SUB 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-144 MUL (multiplier) DIV (divider)

MUL 0 DIV 0
7222 – MUL 0 ... 1, DIV 0 ... 1

MUL 0 RTG DIV 0 RTG

5 ... 9999 5 ... 9999
p20112 (9999) p20121 (9999)

MUL 0 inputs
p20110 DIV 0 inputs DIV 0 quotient
X0 Y
[0] p20118 r20119 [0] DIV 0 Quotient
X1 MUL 0 product Y X1 YIN
[1] Y [0] [1] DIV 0 Multiple integer quotient
X2 x r20111 [1]
X2 X1 / X2 MOD
[2] DIV 0 Division remainder
[2]
X3 QF
[3] r20120
DIV 0 divisor=0 QF

MUL 0 RunSeq DIV 0 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20113 (270) p20122 (300)

MUL 1 DIV 1

MUL 1 RTG DIV 1 RTG

5 ... 9999 5 ... 9999
p20116 (9999) p20126 (9999)

MUL 1 inputs
p20114 DIV 1 inputs DIV 1 quotient
X0 Y
[0] p20123 r20124 [0] DIV 0 Quotient
X1 MUL 1 product Y X1 YIN
[1] Y [0] [1] DIV 0 Multiple integer quotient
X2 x r20115 [1]
X2 X1 / X2 MOD
[2] DIV 0 Division remainder
[2]
X3 QF
[3] r20125
DIV 1 divisor=0 QF

MUL 1 RunSeq DIV 1 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000

3.17 Free function blocks

p20117 (280) p20127 (310)

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Arithmetic function blocks fp_7222_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7222 -
MUL 0 … 1, DIV 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
721
722

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-145
7224 – AVA 0 ... 1 AVA (absolute value generator)

AVA 0
AVA 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20131 (9999)

AVA 0 input X AVA 0 output Y

Y
p20128 r20129
X
(0) AVA 0 input neg SN
SN
r20130

AVA 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20132 (340)

AVA 1
AVA 1 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20136 (9999)

AVA 1 input X AVA 1 output Y

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Y
p20133 r20134
X
(0) AVA 1 input neg SN
SN
r20135
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

AVA 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20137 (350)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Arithmetic function blocks fp_7224_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7224 -
AVA 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-146
7225 – NCM 0 ... 1 NCM (numeric comparator)

NCM 0

NCM 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20316 (9999)

NCM 0 inputs X1 > X2

p20312
X1
> QU r20313 NCM 0 output QU
[0] X1 = X2
[1]
= QE r20314 NCM 0 output QE
X2 X1 < X2
< QL r20315 NCM 0 output QL

NCM 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20317 (820)

NCM 1

NCM 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20316 (9999)

NCM 1 inputs X1 > X2

p20318 X1 > QU r20319 NCM 1 output QU
[0] X1 = X2
[1] = QE r20320 NCM 1 output QE
X2 X1 < X2
< QL r20321 NCM 1 output QL

NCM 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20323 (830)

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Arithmetic function blocks fp_7225_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7225 -
NCM 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
723
724

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-147 PLI (polyline scaling)
<1>
PLI 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20376 (9999)
7226 – PLI 0 ... 1

PLI 0 X-coordinate Breakpoint 0 (A0/B0 = p20374[0]/p20375[0]) ... Breakpoint 19 (A19/B19 = p20374[19]/p20375[19])

-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A18/B18
p20374 (0.0000) Y

A19/B19
PLI 0 input X
p20372 PLI 0 output Y
PLI 0 X Xn Y
(0) X r20373

PLI 0 Y-coordinate A0/B0

Yn
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A1/B1
p20375 (0.0000)

PLI 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20377 (980)

PLI 1 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20382 (9999)

PLI 1 X-coordinate
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A18/B18 Breakpoint 0 (A0/B0 = p20380[0]/p20381[0]) ... Breakpoint 19 (A19/B19 = p20380[19]/p20381[19])
p20380 (0.0000) Y

A19/B19
PLI 1 input X
PLI 1 output Y
PLI 1 p20378
X Xn Y
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

(0) X r20379

PLI 1 Y-coordinate A0/B0

Yn
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A1/B1

p20381 (0.0000)

PLI 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20383 (990)

<1> This function block randomly adapts output variable Y to input variable X by means of up to 20 breakpoints in 4 quadrants.
Interpolation is carried out linearly between the breakpoints. Outlying the area A0 to A19, the characteristic curve runs horizontally.
During configuration, you must ensure that the values of A0 to A19 are arranged in ascending order. Otherwise the values at the output will not be correct. The values B0 to B19 can be selected at random, i.e., independently of
the previous value.
If breakpoints are not needed (e.g., A16/B16 and higher), the following values of the X- and Y-coordinates (A16/B16 to A19/B19) must be assigned the same values as A15/B15.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Arithmetic function blocks fp_7226_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7226 -
PLI 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-148 MFP (pulse generator) PCL (pulse contractor)

MFP 0 MFP 2 PCL 0

7230 – MFP 0 ... 3, PCL 0 ... 1

MFP 0 RTG MFP 0 pulse_dur ms MFP 2 RTG MFP 2 pulse_dur ms PCL 0 RTG PCL 0 pulse_dur ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20141 (9999) p20139 (0.00) p20357 (9999) p20355 (0.00) p20151 (9999) p20149 (0.00)
T T T
MFP 0 inp_pulse I MFP 2 inp_pulse I PCL 0 inp_pulse I
p20138 T MFP 0 output Q p20354 T MFP 2 output Q p20148 T PCL 0 output Q
I Q I Q I Q
(0) r20140 (0) r20356 (0) r20150

MFP 0 RunSeq MFP 2 RunSeq PCL 0 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20142 (370) p20358 (950) p20152 (400)

MFP 1 MFP 3 PCL 1

MFP 1 RTG MFP 1 pulse_dur ms MFP 3 RTG MFP 3 pulse_dur ms PCL 1 RTG PCL 1 pulse_dur ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20146 (9999) p20144 (0.00) p20362 (9999) p20360 (0.00) p20156 (9999) p20154 (0.00)
T T T
MFP 1 inp_pulse I MFP 3 inp_pulse I PCL 1 inp_pulse I
p20143 T MFP 1 output Q p20359 T MFP 3 output Q p20153 T PCL 1 output Q
I Q I Q I Q
(0) r20145 (0) r20361 (0) r20155

MFP 1 RunSeq MFP 3 RunSeq PCL 1 RunSeq

3.17 Free function blocks

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20147 (380) p20363 (960) p20157 (410)

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Time function blocks fp_7230_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7230 -
MFP 0 … 3, PCL 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
725
726

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-149 PDE (ON delay)

PDE 0 PDE 2
7232 – PDE 0 ... 3

PDE 0 RTG PDE 0 t_del ms PDE 2 RTG PDE 2 t_del ms

5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20161 (9999) p20159 (0.00) p20337 (9999) p20335 (0.00)
T T
PDE 0 inp_pulse I PDE 2 inp_pulse I
p20158 T 0 PDE 0 output Q p20334 T 0 PDE 2 output Q
I Q I Q
(0) r20160 (0) r20336

PDE 0 RunSeq PDE 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20162 (430) p20338 (890)

PDE 1 PDE 3
PDE 1 RTG PDE 1 t_del ms PDE 3 RTG PDE 3 t_del ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20166 (9999) p20164 (0.00) p20342 (9999) p20340 (0.00)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

T T
PDE 1 inp_pulse I PDE 3 inp_pulse I
p20163 T 0 PDE 1 output Q p20339 T 0 PDE 3 output Q
I Q I Q
(0) r20165 (0) r20341
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

PDE 1 RunSeq PDE 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20167 (440) p20343 (900)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Time function blocks fp_7232_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7232 -
PDE 0 … 3 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-150 PDF (OFF delay)

PDF 0 PDF 2
7233 – PDF 0 ... 3

PDF 0 RTG PDF 0 t_ext ms PDF 2 RTG PDF 2 t_ext ms

5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20171 (9999) p20169 (0.00) p20347 (9999) p20345 (0.00)
T T
PDF 0 inp_pulse I PDF 2 inp_pulse I
p20168 0 T PDF 0 output Q p20344 0 T PDF 2 output Q
I Q I Q
(0) r20170 (0) r20346

PDF 0 RunSeq PDF 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20172 (460) p20348 (920)

PDF 1 PDF 3

PDF 1 RTG PDF 1 t_ext ms PDF 3 RTG PDF 3 t_ext ms

5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20176 (9999) p20174 (0.00) p20352 (9999) p20350 (0.00)
T T
PDF 1 inp_pulse I PDF 3 inp_pulse I
p20173 0 T PDF 1 output Q p20349 0 T PDF 3 output Q
I Q I Q
(0) r20175 (0) r20351

PDF 1 RunSeq PDF 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000

3.17 Free function blocks

p20177 (470) p20353 (930)

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Time function blocks fp_7233_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7233 -
PDF 0 … 3 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
727
728

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-151 PST (pulse stretcher)

PST 0
7234 – PST 0 ... 1

PST 0 RTG PST 0 pulse_dur ms

5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20181 (9999) p20179 (0.00)
T
PST 0 inputs
p20178 T
Input pulse I PST 0 output Q
[0] Q
Reset input R r20180
[1]

PST 0 RunSeq
0 ... 7999
p20182 (490)

PST 1

PST 1 RTG PST 1 pulse_dur ms

5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 5400000.00
p20186 (9999) p20184 (0.00)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

T
PST 1 inputs
p20183 T
Input pulse I PST 1 output Q
[0] Q
Reset input R r20185
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

[1]

PST 1 RunSeq
0 ... 7999
p20187 (500)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Time function blocks fp_7234_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7234 -
PST 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-152
RSR (RS flip-flop) DFR (D flip-flop)

RSR 0 RSR 0 RTG DFR 0 DFR 0 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
7240 – RSR 0 ... 2, DFR 0 ... 2

p20191 (9999) p20201 (9999)

DFR 0 inputs
RSR 0 inputs p20198
RSR 0 output Q Trigger input I DFR 0 output Q
p20188 Q [0] Q
Set S r20189 D input D r20199
[0] [1]
Reset R Set S
[1] RSR 0 inv outp QN [2] DFR 0 inv outp QN
QN Reset R QN
r20190 [3] r20200

RSR 0 RunSeq DFR 0 RunSeq

0 ... 7999 0 ... 32000
p20192 (520) p20202 (550)

RSR 1 RSR 1 RTG DFR 1 DFR 1 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20196 (9999) p20206 (9999)
DFR 1 inputs
RSR 1 inputs p20203
RSR 1 output Q Trigger input I DFR 1 output Q
p20193 Q [0] Q
Set S r20194 D input D r20204
[0] [1]
Reset R Set S
[1] RSR 1 inv outp QN [2] DFR 1 inv outp QN
QN Reset R QN
r20195 [3] r20205

RSR 1 RunSeq DFR 1 RunSeq

0 ... 7999 0 ... 32000
p20197 (530) p20207 (560)

RSR 2 RSR 2 RTG DFR 2 DFR 2 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20327 (9999) p20332 (9999)
DFR 2 inputs
RSR 2 inputs p20329
RSR 2 output Q Trigger input I DFR 2 output Q
p20324 Q [0] Q
Set S r20325 D input D r20330
[0] [1]
Reset R Set S
[1] RSR 2 inv outp QN [2] DFR 2 inv outp QN
QN Reset R QN

3.17 Free function blocks

r20326 [3] r20331

3 Function diagrams
RSR 2 RunSeq DFR 2 RunSeq
0 ... 7999 0 ... 32000
p20328 (850) p20333 (870)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Flipflop function blocks fp_7240_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7240 -
RSR 0 … 2, DFR 0 … 2 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
729
730

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-153 BSW (binary change-over switch) NSW (numeric change-over switch)

BSW 0 NSW 0
7250 – BSW 0 ... 1, NSW 0 ... 1

BSW 0 RTG BSW 0 RunSeq NSW 0 RTG NSW 0 RunSeq

1 ... 9999 0 ... 7999 5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
p20211 (9999) p20212 (580) p20221 (9999) p20222 (610)

BSW 0 inputs NSW 0 inputs

p20208 I0 0 BSW 0 output Q p20218 X0 0 NSW 0 output Y
[0] Q [0] Y
I1 r20210 X1 r20220
[1] [1]
1 1

BSW 0 sw_setting I NSW 0 sw_setting I

p20209 p20219
(0) (0)

BSW 1 NSW 1

BSW 1 RTG BSW 1 RunSeq NSW 1 RTG NSW 1 RunSeq

1 ... 9999 0 ... 7999 5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
p20216 (9999) p20217 (590) p20226 (9999) p20227 (620)

BSW 1 inputs NSW 1 inputs

p20213 I0 0 BSW 1 output Q p20223 X0 0 NSW 1 output Y
[0] Q [0] Y
r20215 r20225
I1 X1
[1] [1]
1 1
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

BSW 1 sw_setting I NSW 1 sw_setting I

p20214 p20224
(0) (0)
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Switch function blocks fp_7250_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7250 -
BSW 0 … 1, NSW 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-154
7260 – LIM 0 ... 1 LIM (limiter)

LIM 0
LIM 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20234 (9999)

LIM 0 upper lim LU LIM 0 QU

LIM 0 input X LU QU
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20232
p20228 p20229 (0.0000) LIM 0 output Y
X Y
(0) r20231
LIM 0 lower lim LL LIM 0 QL
LL QL
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20233
p20230 (0.0000)

LIM 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20235 (640)

LIM 1
LIM 1 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20242 (9999)

LIM 1 upper lim LU LIM 1 QU

LIM 1 input X LU QU
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20240
p20236 p20237 (0.0000) LIM 1 output Y
X Y
(0) r20239
LIM 1 lower lim LL LIM 1 QL
LL QL
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20241
p20238 (0.0000)

LIM 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20243 (650)

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Control function blocks fp_7260_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7260 -
LIM 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
731
732

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-155
7262 – PT1 0 ... 1 PT1 (smoothing element)

PT1 0 PT1 1

PT1 0 T_smooth ms PT1 1 T_smooth ms

0.00 ... 340.28235E36 0.00 ... 340.28235E36
p20246 (0.00) p20252 (0.00)
PT1 0 RTG PT1 0 RunSeq PT1 1 RTG PT1 1 RunSeq
5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000 5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
p20248 (9999) p20249 (670) p20254 (9999) p20255 (680)
T T
PT1 0 inputs PT1 1 inputs
p20244 PT1 0 output Y p20250 PT1 1 output Y
Input X Y Input X Y
[0] r20247 [0] r20253
Set value SV Set value SV
[1] [1]

PT1 0 acc set val S PT1 1 acc set val S

p20245 p20251
(0) (0)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Control function blocks fp_7262_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7262 -
PT1 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-156 INT (integrator)

INT 0
INT 0 RTG INT 0 RunSeq
5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
7264 – INT 0, DIF 0

p20264 (9999) p20265 (700)

INT 0 T_Integr ms
0.00 ... 340.28235E36
p20259 (0.00)
TI
INT 0 inputs INT 0 upper lim LU INT 0 QU
LU QU
p20256 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20262
Input X p20257 (0.0000) INT 0 output Y
[0] Y
Set value SV r20261
[1] INT 0 lower lim LL INT 0 QL
LL QL
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20263
INT 0 acc set val p20258 (0.0000)
p20260 S
(0)

Integrating algorithm: Y(n) = Y(n-1) + (T_sample / Ti) * X(n)

DIF (derivative-action element)

DIF 0
DIF 0 T_diff ms
0.00 ... 340.28235E36
p20285 (0.00)
TD
DIF 0 input X
p20284 d DIF 0 output Y
X Y
(0) dt r20286

DIF 0 RTG DIF 0 RunSeq

5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000

3.17 Free function blocks

p20287 (9999) p20288 (750)

3 Function diagrams
Differentiating algorithm: Y(n) = (X(n) - X(n-1)) * (TD / T_sample)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Control function blocks fp_7264_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7264 -
INT 0, DIF 0 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
733
734

3.17 Free function blocks

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-157 LVM (double-sided limit monitor with hysteresis)

LVM 0 LVM 1
7270 – LVM 0 ... 1

LVM 0 avg value M LVM 1 avg value M

-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36
p20267 (0.0000) p20276 (0.0000)
LVM 0 limit L LVM 0 hyst HY LVM 1 limit L LVM 1 hyst HY
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36
p20268 (0.0000) p20269 (0.0000) p20277 (0.0000) p20278 (0.0000)
LVM 0 RTG LVM 0 RunSeq LVM 1 RTG LVM 1 RunSeq
5 ... 9999 0 ... 7999 5 ... 9999 0 ... 7999
p20273 (9999) p20274 (720) p20282 (9999) p20283 (730)
L M HY L M HY

LVM 0 X above QU LVM 1 X above QU

1 QU 1 QU
r20270 r20279

0 0
1 1
LVM 0 input X LVM 0 X within QM LVM 1 input X LVM 1 X within QM
p20266 QM p20275 QM
X r20271 X r20280
(0) 0 (0) 0
1 1
LVM 0 X below QL LVM 1 X below QL
QL QL
r20272 r20281
0 0
M-L M M+L M-L M M+L
HY HY HY HY
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

L L L L
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free function blocks - Complex function blocks fp_7270_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7270 -
LVM 0 … 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
 3 Function diagrams
3.18 Technology controller

3.18 Technology controller

Function diagrams

7950 – Fixed value selection binary (p2216 = 2) 736

7951 – Fixed value selection direct (p2216 = 1) 737

7954 – Motorized potentiometer 738

7958 – Closed-loop control 739

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 735
736

3.18 Technology controller

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-158 Tec_ctr FixVal sel
1 ... 2
p2216 [D] (1)
23 20 0 ... 15
Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
0.00 % 0000 Tec_ctrl No. act
p2220 [C] 1 [7951] r2229
7950 – Fixed value selection binary (p2216 = 2)

(0)
2
Tec_ctrl fix val1 [%]
0001
Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 p2201 [D] (10.00)
p2221 [C] 1 [7951]
(0) Tec_ctr fix val 2 [%]
2 0010
p2202 [D] (20.00)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
p2222 [C] 1 [7951] Tec_ctr fix val 3 [%] Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
0011
(0) p2203 [D] (30.00) r2225
2
r2225.0
Tec_ctrl sel bit 3 Tec_ctr fix val 4 [%]
0100
p2223 [C] 1 [7951] p2204 [D] (40.00)
(0)
2 Tec_ctr fix val 5 [%]
0101
p2205 [D] (50.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 6 [%]

0110
p2206 [D] (60.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 7 [%]

0111
p2207 [D] (70.00) Tec_ctr FixVal eff [%]
r2224
Tec_ctr fix val 8 [%]
1000
p2208 [D] (80.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 9 [%]

1001
p2209 [D] (90.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 10 [%]

1010
p2210 [D] (100.00)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Tec_ctr fix val 11 [%]

1011
p2211 [D] (110.00)
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

Tec_ctr fix val 12 [%]

1100
p2212 [D] (120.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 13 [%]

1101
p2213 [D] (130.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 14 [%]

1110
p2214 [D] (140.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 15 [%]

1111
p2215 [D] (150.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology controller fp_7950_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7950 -
Fixed value selection binary (p2216 = 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-159
Tec_ctr FixVal sel
1 ... 2
p2216 [D] (1)

Tec_ctrl sel bit 0 p2220 [C] 1

7951 – Fixed value selection direct (p2216 = 1)

(0)
2 [7950]

Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 p2221 [C] 1

(0) Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
2 [7950]
r2225
1 r2225.0
Tec_ctrl sel bit 2 p2222 [C]
(0)
2 [7950]

Tec_ctrl sel bit 3 p2223 [C] 1

(0)
2 [7950]

Tec_ctrl fix val1 [%]

0001
p2201 [D] (10.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 2 [%]

0010
p2202 [D] (20.00)

Tec_ctr fix val 3 [%]

0100
p2203 [D] (30.00)
+ + + Tec_ctr FixVal eff [%]
Tec_ctr fix val 4 [%]
1000 r2224
p2204 [D] (40.00) + + +

3.18 Technology controller

3 Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology controller fp_7951_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7951 -
Fixed value selection direct (p2216 = 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
737
738

3.18 Technology controller

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-160
Tec_ctr mop config
p2230 [D] (0000 0100 bin)

Data save active 0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
0 1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON is entered using r2231.
7954 – Motorized potentiometer

1
Initial rounding-off active 0 Without initial rounding.
2 1 With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.
Non-volatile data save active 0 Non-volatile data save not activated
3 1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1)
Ramp-function generator is always active 0 Ramp-up encoder inactive with pulse inhibit.
4 1 The ramp-up encoder is calculated independently of the pulse enable.

Tec_ctrl mop raise Old value is kept

p2235 [C]
(0)

Tec_ctrl mop lower <2> <2>

p2236 [C]
(0) Tec_ctr mop t_r-up Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
0.0 ... 1000.0 [s] 0.0 ... 1000.0 [s]
p2247 [D] (10.0) p2248 [D] (10.0)
0 0

y
Tec_ctrl mop max p2237
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 Tec_ctr mop befRFG [%]
p2237 [D] (100.00) r2245
Tec_ctr mop aftRFG [%]
x y
r2250
Tec_ctrl mop min x
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 0
p2238 [D] (-100.00)
-p2238
y=0
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

1 1
Tec_ctrl mop start
Missing enable sig -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

r0046 p2240 [D] (0.00)

1 = OFF1, enable missing
r0046.0 <1>

Tec_ctrl mop mem [%]

r2231
<1> For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
<2> If initial rounding-off is active (p2230.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology controller fp_7954_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 7954 -
Motorized potentiometer 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-161
Tec_ctr integ hold Tec_ctrl outp scal
p2252 r0056 p2286 [C] <3> Tec_ctrl outp scal p2296 [C]
. r0056.13 (56.13) Tec_ctrl lim enab -100.00 ... 100.00 [%] (2295[0])
. p2290 [C] p2295 (100.00)
. Tec_ctrl thr_skip (1) Tec_ctrl status
p2339
Tec_ctr set aftRFG [%] Tec_ctrl sys_dev [%] r2349
Tec_ctrl set1 scal Tec_ctr prectr_sig
7958 – Closed-loop control

r2260 r2273 r2349.13

p2255 p2263 = 1 p2289 [C]
Tec_ctrl setp 1 Tec_ctr set aftFlt [%] (0)
p2253 [C] Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up Tec_ctrl set T r2262
(0) 0.00 ... 650.00 [s] 0.000 ... 60.000 [s] Tec_ctrl Kp Tec_ctrl Tn Tec_ctrl status
Tec_ctr SysDev inv r2349
Tec_ctrl set2 scal p2257 (1.00) p2261 (0.000) p2280 p2285
p2306
p2256 <1> r2349.11
<1> Tec_ctr start val
Tec_ctrl setp 2 <7> 0.00 ... 200.00 [%]
p2254 [C] + 1 + p2302 (0.00)
-1
(0)
+ + 0 + +
+ + Tec_ctrl status
1 p2263 = 0 r2349
Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn r2273 r2349.10
0.00 ... 650.00 [s] -1 0 r2349.1
Tec_ctrl sys_dev [%]
Tec_ctrl u_lim act p2258 (1.00)
Tech_ctrl act inv 1 0 Tec_ctrl <2>
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 ... 1 n_setp_sm Tech_ctrl flt resp
p2267 (100.00) Tec_ctrl type 0 ... 2
p2271 (0) RFG n_set at [%]
0 ... 1 p2345 (0)
Tec_ctrl act T outp [rpm] r2344
0.000 ... 60.000 [s] Tech_ctrl gain act Tec_ctr ActVal fct p2263 (0) Tec_ctrl
0.00 ... 500.00 [%] r1150 10 s 0 outp_sig [%]
p2265 (0.000) 0 ... 3
p2269 (100.00) p2270 (0) Tech_ctrl act 1 r2294
scal [%] Tec_ctr fix val 15
Tec_ctrl act val y 1
r2272 -200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 2
p2264 [C] p2215 [D] (150.00)
(0)
x -1 r2349 <5>
Tec_ctrl status
r2349.12
F07426
Tec_ctrl D comp T
Tec_ctrl status 0.000 ... 60.000 [s]
Tec_ctrl l_lim act p2274 (0.000)
r2349 n_limit pos eff [rpm] Tec_ctrMaxLimS_src
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
r2349.12 <5> <1> r1084 p2297 [C]
p2268 (-100.00)
r2349.8 d (1084[0])
Tec_ctrl max_lim
Tec_ctr act aftFlt [%] r2349.9 dt
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
+
ZSW 1 r2266
–
p2291 (100.00)
r0052
[2510.6] 1 = Operation enabled <6>
r0052.2
<1> Depending on the setting of p2350 a different equation will be used to calculate the end values of p2274, Tech_ctrl lim offs p2299 [C]
p2280 and p2285. <4> (0)
By p2350=0 the P, I and D components can be disabled by entering a zero. n_limit neg eff [rpm] Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
<2> The start value p2302 is only used in mode p2251 = 0 (Technology controller as –

3.18 Technology controller

Tec_ctrl enable r1087 p2298 [C]
speed main setpoint). After enable of technology controller the start value is Tec_ctrl status
present as long as the RFG output reaches this value. p2200 [C] Tec_ctrl min_lim (1087[0])
r2349 +
<3> I component stop, only when r2273 and r2294 in same direction. (0) 1 r2349.0 -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]

3 Function diagrams
<4> By p2251 = 1: p2299 = 0 (default), recommendation: p2299 connected to r1150. p2292 (0.00)
[2513.2]
<5> r2349.12 = 1, if p2345 > 0 and actual value limited and start value p2302 not active.
<6> Signal = 0 --> factor = 0, when setpoint from external operating tool or operator panel. Tec_ctr t_RU/RD
0.00 ... 100.00 [s]
<7> p2251 = 0: I component is stopped, when r2294 is below the minimum speed or within a suppression bandwidth. p2293 (1.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology controller fp_7958_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 7958 -
Closed-loop control 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
739
3 Function diagrams
3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

Function diagrams

8005 – Overview 741

8010 – Speed messages 1 742

8011 – Speed messages 2 743

8012 – Torque signals, motor blocked/stalled 744

8013 – Load monitoring (Part 1) 745

8014 – Load monitoring (Part 2) 746

8016 – Thermal monitoring, motor, motor temperature status word, faults/alarms 747

8017 – Motor temperature model 1 (I2t) 748

8018 – Motor temperature model 2 749

8019 – Motor temperature model 3 750

8021 – Thermal monitoring, power unit 751

8022 – Monitoring functions 1 752

8023 – Monitoring functions 2 753

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

740 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-162
n_act [rpm] n_act smth message [rpm]
r0063 [0] r2169
8005 – Overview

n_ctrl setp sum

[rpm]
n_max r1170
[3001.8]

n_ctrl n_set [rpm]

r1438
[6031]
[8011] Speed messages 2

M_set [Nm]
r0079
[8010] Speed messages 1 [6060]

M_max upper eff [Nm]

r1538 Limit value monitor
[6640]

M_max lower eff [Nm]

r1539
[6640]

Motor locked

[8012] Torque messages

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

M_act [Nm]
r0080[0]
[6799.8]

3 Function diagrams
[8013] Load monitoring

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8005_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 8005 -
Overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
741
742

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-163
n_limit pos eff [rpm] F07901 "motor overspeed"
r1084
From setpoint limiting
[3050.8] r1087
8010 – Speed messages 1

n_limit neg eff [rpm]

0 ZSW monitor 1
n_act [rpm]
n r2197
r0063 [1]
r2197.6 [2534.3]
[6799.4] n
|n_act| > n_max
n_thresh val 3
n_act_filt T 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm]
0 ... 1000000 [ms] p2161 [D] (5.00)
p2153 [D] (0)
Hyst n_act>n_max
0.00 ... 60000.00 [rpm]
p2162 [D] (0.00) 1 ZSW monitor 3
n_act [rpm]
r2199
r0063 [0]
r2199.0 [2537.3]
0
n_thresh val 1 |n_act| < speed threshold value 3
Smoothing 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm]
n_act smth message [rpm] <1> t_on cmpr val rchd
p2141 [D] (5.00)
r2169 0.0 ... 10000.0 [ms]
n_hysteresis 3 p2156 [D] (0.0)
[8011.1], [8012.5], 0.00 ... 300.00 [rpm]
[8013.1], [8022.1], p2150 [D] (2.00) ZSW monitor 3
1
1
[8023.1] T 0 r2199
r2199.1 [2537.3]
0
0
f or n comparison value
n_thresh val 2 t_on cmpr val rchd reached or exceeded
<1> 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 0.0 ... 10000.0 [ms]
p2155 [D] (900.00) Monit config
n_hysteresis 1 p2149 .3 p2156 [D] (0.0)
0.00 ... 300.00 [rpm]
p2142 [D] (2.00) ZSW monitor 1
1 1 T 0 r2197
r2197.1 [2534.3]
0 |n_act| ” speed threshold value 2
0
t_on cmpr val rchd
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

n_thresh val 2 <1> 1 0.0 ... 10000.0 [ms]

0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] p2156 [D] (0.0)
p2155 [D] (900.00) n_hysteresis 2
0.00 ... 300.00 [rpm]
p2140 [D] (90.00) ZSW monitor 1
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

0 1 T 0 r2197
1
1 r2197.2 [2534.3]
|n_act| > speed threshold value 2
1 0
0
0

<1>
n_hysteresis 2
0.00 ... 300.00 [rpm]
p2140 [D] (90.00)

<1> Calculated.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8010_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 8010 -
Speed signals 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-164 0

ZSW monitor 1
n_act smth message [rpm] 1
r2197
8011 – Speed messages 2

[8010.2] r2169
r2197.3 [2534.3]
0 n_act • 0
<1>
0
n_hysteresis 3
0.00 ... 300.00 [rpm]
n_set for msg p2150 [D] (2.00)
ZSW monitor 2
p2151 [C] 1
r2198
(1170[0])
r2198.5 [2536.3]
[3080.8] 0 n_thresh val 3
0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] n_set > 0
p2161 [D] (5.00)
<1>
n_hysteresis 3
0.00 ... 300.00 [rpm] ZSW monitor 2
p2150 [D] (2.00) 1
r2198
r2198.4 [2536.3]
n_thresh val 4 0
0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] |n_set| < p2161
p2163 [D] (90.00)
<1> t_del_off n_i=n_so
<1> 0.0 ... 10000.0 [ms]
n_hysteresis 3 p2166 [D] (200.0)
0.00 ... 300.00 [rpm]
+ 1 p2150 [D] (2.00)
ZSW monitor 1
– 0 T r2197 <2>
0 r1407
1 = Torque
1 r2197.7 [2534.3]
r1407.2
control active Monit config Speed setp - act val deviation in
<1> ZSW n_ctrl p2149.0 tolerance t_off
n_hysteresis 4
0.00 ... 200.00 [rpm]
p2164 [D] (2.00) 1
A07903 "Motor speed deviation"
t_on n_act=n_set
0.0 ... 10000.0 [ms] 1 A07903 is only signaled for p2149.0 = 1
0 and r2197.7 = 0.
p2167 [D] (200.0)

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

ZSW monitor 3
T 0 r2199
r2199.4 [2537.3]
Speed setp - act val deviation in
tolerance t_on
1 = RESET

ZSW monitor 3
<1> Calculated. RFG active SET r2199
(Q=1) Q Priority r2199.5 [2537.3]

3 Function diagrams
<2> Evaluation only for: Pulse enable and operating enable p2148 [C]
(r0899.2) RESET 1 RESET Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
(0)
or OFF1 (Q=0) Q 2 SET
or OFF3
or rotating measurement.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8011_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 8011 -
Speed signals 2 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
743
744

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-165
Torque messages M_util t_off Motor locked detection or motor locked monitoring
(not for U/f control) 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms] function (not for closed-loop torque control)
p2195 [D] (800.0)

ZSW monitor 3 Mot stall enab neg

r2199 0 T p2144 [C]
[2537.7] Ramp-function generator operating
r2199.5 1
8012 – Torque signals, motor blocked/stalled

(0) 1
r1407 Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
[2522.7] 1 = Torque limit reached p1300
M_thresh val 1 r1407.7
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] Mot lock n_thresh
p2174 [D] (5.13) 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] Mot lock t_del
n_act smth message [rpm] p2175 [D] (120.00) p2177
•20

signal < p2175

[8010.2] r2169

n_act smooth
ZSW monitor 2
5,6, T 0 r2198
M_set [Nm] 1 0
ZSW monitor 2 Load monit n_act 19 r2198.6
[6060.8]

MIN
r0079 r2198 p3230 [C] [2536.3]
[6826.8] <1>
0 1 r2198.10 (0) 0..4, 7
F07900
[2536.3]
r0056
1 = Current limiting controller,
[2526.6] r0056.12
voltage output active
1
2 % of p2174
r0056
[2526.6]
r0056.13
1 = Current/torque limiting active

x1 > x2 = y = 1 Stall detection or stall monitoring (not for U/f control)

x1 (positive torque requested)
y
0 x2 Mot stall t_del
M_thresh val 2 p2178
0.00 ... 100.00 [%]
M_set [Nm] Requested p2194 [D] (90.00)
1 ZSW monitor 2
[6060.8] r0079 torque r1408
[6730.3] 1 = Motor stalled T 0 r2198
r1408.12
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

-1 0 ZSW monitor 3 r2198.7

x1 r2199
1 [2536.3]
[Nm]
[%] 1 r2199.11
y [2537.3] F07902
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

x2 0
x1 • 100 %
M_max upper eff [Nm] x2
1
[6640.8] r1538
2 % of p2194
[6640.8] r1539 -1 0
M_util smooth [%]
M_max lower eff [Nm] r0033
100 ms
M_Utilization [%]
r0081

<1> Only evaluated with p2193 = 2 and U/f control.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8012_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 8012 -
Torque signals, motor blocked/stalled 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-166
M_act_filt T p2149.1 A07926 "Envelop characteristic, parameter not valid"
0 ... 1000000 [ms] <2>
p3233 [D] (100)
1
M_act [Nm]
r0080[0]
0
[6799.8]
8013 – Load monitoring (Part 1)

M_thresh no load Load monit config Load monit resp

0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] 0 ... 5 0 ... 8
p2191 [D] (0.00) p2193 [D] (1) Load monit t_del p2181 [D] (0)
Stall_mon M_thresh 0.00 ... 65.00 [s]
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] p2192 [D] (10.00)
p2168 [D] (10000000.00) r2198
Stall_mon up thr 0 0 [2536.3]
r2198.11
0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 1
p2165 [D] (0.00) 0 T 1 = Load monitoring signals an
2 Evaluation alarm
M_thresh 3 upper
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] 3 r2198
p2189 [D] (10000000.00) Load characteristics: 0 [2536.3]
M_thresh 3 lower [8014] load monitoring (part 2) 4 r2198.12
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] 5 1 = Load monitoring signals a
p2190 [D] (0.00) fault
M_thresh 2 upper
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] (0) Load monitoring disabled
p2187 [D] (10000000.00)
M_thresh 2 lower (1) A07920
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] Torque/speed too low
p2188 [D] (0.00)
M_thresh 1 upper (2) A07921
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] Torque/speed too high
p2185 [D] (10000000.00)
M_thresh 1 lower (3) A07922
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] Torque/speed outside tolerance
p2186 [D] (0.00) F07923 <1>
(4)
Torque/speed too low
n_act smth message [rpm]
0 (5) F07924 <1>
r2169 Torque/speed too high
[8010.2]
(6) F07925 <1>
1
Torque/speed outside tolerance

(7) A07891 … A07893

n_thresh 1 n_thresh 3
p2149.1 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] Pump/fan load monitoring as alarm
p2182 [D] (150.00) p2184 [D] (1500.00)
Load monit n_dev F07894 … F07896 <1>

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

n_thresh 2 (8)
p3231 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] Pump/fan load monitoring as fault
p2183 [D] (900.00)
Load monit n_act Load monit t_del
p3230 [C] – 1 0.00 ... 65.00 [s]
(0) p2192 [D] (10.00)
+ 0 1 = Load monitoring
signals a fault
Load_moni fail_det 1 0
0 T F07936 r2198
p3232 [C] 1
(1) Drive: Load loss r2198.12
1,2,3,4,5

3 Function diagrams
[2536.3]

<1> The response to these faults can be defined.

<2> Fault evaluation only with p2181 > 0 and p2193 > 0.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8013_97_54.vsd Function diagram
- 8013 -
Load monitoring (part 1) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
745
746

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-167 Monitoring torque and load drop (p2193 = 1) Pump/fan monitoring (p2193 = 4/5)

M [Nm] M [Nm]
8014 – Load monitoring (Part 2)

Blocked
M_thresh 3 upper
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
p2189 [D] (10000000.00)
M_thresh 3 lower
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
p2190 [D] (0.00)

Stall_mon M_thresh
Tolerance bandwidth 0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
p2168 [D] (10000000.00) Pump/fan characteristics

M_thresh 2 upper M_thresh 3 lower

0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
p2187 [D] (10000000.00) p2190 [D] (0.00)
M_thresh 2 lower
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
p2188 [D] (0.00)
M_thresh 1 upper
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
p2185 [D] (10000000.00) M_thresh 2 lower
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
M_thresh 1 lower p2188 [D] (0.00)
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] Leakage
p2186 [D] (0.00) M_thresh 1 lower <1>
0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

p2186 [D] (0.00)

M_thresh no load Dry running protection/broken belt

0.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm]
p2191 [D] (0.00) rpm
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

rpm
n_thresh 1 n_thresh 3 n_thresh 1 n_thresh 2
0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm]
p2182 [D] (150.00) p2184 [D] (1500.00) p2182 [D] (150.00) p2183 [D] (900.00)

n_thresh 2 Stall_mon up thr n_thresh 3

0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [rpm]
p2183 [D] (900.00) p2165 [D] (0.00) p2184 [D] (1500.00)

<1> Only for pump applications.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8014_97_54.vsd Function diagram
- 8014 -
Load monitoring (part 2) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-168
Mot_temp_sens type
0 ... 6 Mot temp [°C]
p0601 [D] (0) r0035 [8017.1]
8016 – Thermal monitoring, motor, motor temperature status word, faults/alarms

via motor temperature model 2

[8018.8] 0 = No sensor
Thermal monitoring motor
Motor temperature sensor 1 = PTC alarm and time
[2201.1] 2 = KTY84
via CU terminal KL. 14/15 (T1/T2) Mod1/2/sens T_thr Mot temp response
4 = Bimetallic NC contact alarm with p0605 p0610
time step
6 = PT1000
1
Fault response
0 &

p0610 = 1
KTY/PT1000 sensor type

with p0610 = 0
Suppress fault
Motor temperature status word faults/alarms (threshold not applicable for PTC)
Mot_temp ZSW F/A
I_max reduction
Bit
Motor temperature status word faults/alarms
r5389 & [6300.1], [6640.2]
No. r5389 Mod 2/sens A_thr Mod 2/sens timer
p0604 1650 p0606
0 1 = Motor temperature measurement fault active r5389.0
<4> <5>
F07011 [8016.7] 1 1 = Motor temperature model fault active r5389.1 <3> PTC F07011
Sensor type T 0 & "Motor overtemperature"
2 1 = Encoder temperature measurement fault active r5389.2
1
3 Reserved [8017.8] ZSW fault/alarm 2
[8019.8] r2135 1 = Fault motor
A07910 [8016.7] 4 1 = Motor temperature measurement alarm active r5389.4 1 r2135.12 overtemperature
A07012 [8017.7] [2548.2]
5 1 = Motor temperature measurement alarm active r5389.5
A07910 [8016.7] 1
A07910
<1> 6 Reserved "Motor overtemperature"
7 Reserved 0
A07910 [8016.7] 8 1 = Current reduction active <2> r5389.8
ZSW fault/alarm 2
9

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

Sensor fault time r2135 1 = Alarm motor
... Reserved p0607 1 r2135.14 overtemperature
15
-140 °C 250 °C <6> [2548.2]
T 0 F07016
<1> Motor temperature model 1/3: A07012 "Motor temperature
Motor temperature model 2: A07910 sensor fault, fault"
<2> Only for p0610 = 1. A07015
<3> Only applies for p0601 = 0, 2, 6. "Motor temperature
<4> The relevant rated response temperature in °C depends on the temperature sensor chosen by the sensor fault alarm"
motor manufacturer.

3 Function diagrams
<5> For KTY/PT1000 and PTC / bimetallic NC contact, the value p0606 = 0 has a different meaning:
KTY/PT1000: 0 means the output of the timer is switched out (logical 0).
PTC / bimetallic NC contact: 0 means the delay time is 0 s.
<6> Switch-on delay p0607 = 0 suppresses fault F07016.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8016_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 8016 -
Thermal monitoring motor, motor temperature status word faults/alarms 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
747
748

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-169 1 = Activate motor temperature
model 1 expansions
p0612.8

I2t F thresh
8017 – Motor temperature model 1 (I2t)

0
p0615

F thresh 1
p5391

1 = Activate motor temperature model 1 (I2t) Mot temp response

p0612.0 (0) p0610
<5>

Mot I_rated
I_act abs val [Arms] p0305 <6>
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t)
r0068 [0] model 1
not smoothed [8016.6]
0
Mot temp [°C]
Only for:
[8016.4] r0035 - Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PMSM)
- Reluctance synchronous motor (RESM) Mod T_winding [°C]
<1> r0632 [D]
I2t mot_mod T
p0611

Standst boost_fact <2> <4>

p5350 Mot T_ambient
<3>
p0625 1 A07012
"Motor temperature model 1/3 overtemperature"
Mod1/2/sens T_thr
0 0
p0605

Mot T_over stator 1 1 = Motor temperature model (I2t) ambient

p0627 temperature can be adjusted
p0612.12
1 = Activate motor temperature model – 40 K
model 1 expansions
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

• 100 [%]
p0612.8 Threshold value – 40 K 0 Mot_util therm [%]
r0034
Mod1/2/sens T_thr
model – p0613
0 1
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

p0605 • 100 [%]

Threshold value – p0613
A thresh Threshold value
1
p5390

<1> Only if there is a temperature sensor (p0601 > 0).

<2> Only if <1> are not met.
<3> Only if p0612.8 = 1.
<4> p0605 also defines the target temperature for p0034 = 100 %. Therefore, p0605 has no influence on the time up to alarm A07012.
<5> If p0610 = 12.
<6> The lower p0611 and the lower the reference current of the motor temperature model 1 (I2t), the faster A07012 is reached.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8017_97_59.vsd Function diagram
- 8017 -
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-170
8018 – Motor temperature model 2

1 = Activate motor 1 = Activate motor temperature

temperature model 2 model 2 expansions
Rated motor temperature rise p0612.1 (1) p0612.9 (1) Calculated motor temperatures

Mot T_ambient Mod T_ambient [°C]

p0625 r0630 [D]

Mot T_over core Motor temperature model 2 (Thermal 3-mass-model) Mod T_stator [°C]
p0626 r0631 [D]
[8016.1]
Mot T_over stator Only for: Mod T_winding [°C]
p0627 Induction motor (ASM) r0632 [D]

Mot T_over rotor Mod rotor temp [°C]

p0628 r0633 [D]

<1>

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

Mot temp response Mot weight th mod
p0610 p0344

3 Function diagrams
<1> If p0610 = 12.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8018_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 8018 -
Motor temperature model 2 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
749
750

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-171
8019 – Motor temperature model 3

Mot temp response 1 = Activate motor temperature model 3 Mod T_winding [°C] F thr image p5391 [°C]
p0610 p0612.2 (0) r0632 [D] r5399 [D]

<1>
Threshold value for 1
F07011: <2>
Motor temperature model 3
0 T 0 1 [8016.6]
I_act abs val [Arms]
Mod T_stator [°C]
r0068 [0] r0631 [D]
Only for:
not smoothed Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
(PMSM) 1FK7 without encoder (p0300 = A thr image p5390 [°C]
n_act [rpm] 277) Mod rotor temp [°C] r5398 [D]
r0063 r0633 [D]

1
A07012
"Motor temperature model 1/3 overtemperature"
0

r0632 – r5397 Mot_util therm [%]

• 100 [%] r0034
r5398 – r5397
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<1> If p0610 = 12.

<2> Only for Power Modules PM240/PM250/PM260.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8019_97_58.vsd Function diagram
- 8019 -
Motor temperature model 3 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-172
Power module Control Unit Thermal monitoring for the power module
ZSW fault/alarm 2
Maximum power module temperature r2135
T_max heatsink 1 r2135.13 [2548.2]
1 = Fault power unit
8021 – Thermal monitoring, power unit

Temperature measurement thermal overload

1
Max Faults "Power unit overtemperature"
0 F30004 "Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter"
F30024 "Overtemperature thermal model"
F30025 "Chip overtemperature"
F30035 "Air intake overtemperature"
Pulse freq setp PU temperatures [°C]
2.000 ... 16.000 [kHz] 5 °C
p1800 [D] (4.000) r0037 [0..19]
–
+

1
Alarms "Power unit overtemperature"

Power Module Interface

0 A05000 "Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter"
A05001 "Overtemperature depletion layer chip"
I_act abs val [Arms] A05002 "Air intake overtemperature"
r0068[0] 100 % A05006 "Overtemperature thermal model"
[6714.8]

i²t model 1
power F30005 "Power unit: Overload I2t"
module 0
PU overload I2t [%]
r0036

PU PI_rated [Arms]
r0207[0..4] ZSW fault/alarm 2
r2135
1 r2135.15 [2548.2]
1 = Alarm power unit
thermal overload

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

Overload response

PU I2t alrm thresh

10.0 ... 100.0 [%]
p0294 (95.0)
PU overld response
0 ... 13
p0290 (2)
1
A07805 "Power unit overload I2t"

3 Function diagrams
0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8021_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 8021 -
Thermal monitoring, power module 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
751
752

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-173
n_min
p1080

n_act smth message [rpm] 1 r2197

[8010.2] r2169
0 r2197.0 [2534.2]
r0053 1 = |n_act| ” n_min p1080
8022 – Monitoring functions 1

0 1 r0053.2
+ n_hysteresis 3 [2511.6]
RFG setp at inp [rpm] 1 p2150 r2197
[3050.8] r1119
– 0 r2197.4 [2534.2]
0
r0053 1 = |n_act| • n_set
n_standst n_thresh r0053.6
1 p1226 Pulse suppr t_del
n_hysteresis 3 [2511.6]
p2150 p1228
-1
n_act [rpm] 1 T 0 r2197
r0063
r2197.5 [2534.2]
0 r0053
Vdc thresh val 1 1 = |n_act| ”
p2172 t_del Vdc r0053.1 n_standst p1226
p2173
[2511.6]
Vdc act val [V] 1 T 0 r2197
r0070
r2197.9 [2534.2]
<1> [6730.1], [6731.1], [6792.1] 0 r0053 1 = Vdc_act ”
<3> [6841.1], [6842.1], [6843.1] t_del Vdc r0053.7 Vdc_threshold value p2172
<2> [6856.1] p2173
[2511.6]

T 0 r2197
1 r2197.10 [2534.2]
M_act_filt T
0 ... 1000000 [ms] I_thres r0053 1 = Vdc_act >
p3233 [D] (100) p2170 I_thresh rch t_del r0053.8 Vdc_threshold value p2172
p2171 [2511.6]
I_act abs val [Arms] 1 0 T r2197
<1> [6714.8] r0068 [0]
r2197.8 [2534.2]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

<3> [6833.8] 0
I_thres r0053 1 = I_act •
<2> [6856.1]
p2170 I_thresh rch t_del r0053.3 I_threshold value p2170
0 p2171
[2511.6]
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

1 0 T r2198
U_output [Vrms] 1
r0072 r2198.8 [2536.2]
0
<1> [6730.4], [6731.4], [6792.4] 0 Outp_ld iden I_lim 1 = |I_act| <
p2179 Out_load det t_del I_threshold value p2170
<3> [6841.4], [6842.4], [6843.4] p2180
<2> [6856.4] Drive: No motor detected
Enable Pulses A07929
1 T 0 r2197
r2197.11 [2534.2]
<1> p0096 = 0: Expert 0
1 = Output load is not
<2> p0096 = 1: Standard Drive Control (SDC) present
<3> p0096 = 2: Dynamic Drive Control (DDC)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8022_97_52.vsd Function diagram
- 8022 -
Monitoring functions 1 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-174
n_thresh val 5
p2157 Del compar n_5
p2158

n_act smth message [rpm] 1 r2198

0 T
[8010.2] r2169 r2198.0 [2536.2]
8023 – Monitoring functions 2

0 1 = |n_act| ” p2157
n_thresh val 5
p2157 Del compar n_5
n_hysteresis 3 p2158
p2150

1 0 T r2198
r2198.1 [2536.2]
0 1 = |n_act| > p2157
n_thresh val 6
p2159 Del compar n_6
n_hysteresis 3 p2160
p2150
1 r2198
T 0
r2198.2 [2536.2]
0 1 = |n_act| ” p2159
n_thresh val 6
p2159 Del compar n_6
n_hysteresis 3 p2160
p2150
1 T 0 r2198
r2198.3 [2536.2]
0 1 = |n_act| > p2159

n_hysteresis 3
M_thresh val 1 p2150
M_thrsh comp T_del
p2174 p2176

M_act [Nm] 1 T 0 r2198

[6799.8] r0080 r2198.13 [2536.2]

3.19 Signals and monitoring functions

0 1 = |M_act| > p2174

r2198
r2199 r2198.9 [2536.2]
[2537.7] 1 = |M_act| > p2174 and
r2199.5
n_set reached
1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down
completed Del n > n_max
p2152

3 Function diagrams
r2197 0 T r2197
[2534.7]
r2197.6 r2197.12 [2534.2]
1 = |n_act| > n_max 1 = |n_act| > n_max delay

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signals and monitoring functions fp_8023_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 8023 -
Monitoring functions 2 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
753
3 Function diagrams
3.20 Diagnostics

3.20 Diagnostics

Function diagrams

8050 – Overview 755

8060 – Fault buffer 756

8065 – Alarm buffer 757

8070 – Faults/alarms trigger word (r2129) 758

8075 – Faults/alarms configuration 759

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

754 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-175 Fxxxxx

Fyyyyy r0945 r0949 r0948 r2109
III
III
8050 – Overview

t_System relative Code Value coming going Fault cases qty

Fzzzzz 0 ... 4294967295 [ms]
faults 0 ... 65535
p0969 (0) p0952 (0)
[8060] Fault buffer

Axxxxx
Ayyyyy r2122 r2124 r2123 r2125
III

Azzzzz Code Value coming going Alarm counter

alarms 0 ... 65535
p2111 (0)
[8065] Alarm buffer

r2129
p2128
[0]

[15]

[8070] Faults/alarms trigger word

Changes the fault response Changes the message type

[0] p2100 p2101 [0] p2118 p2119
[1] [1]

[19] [19]

Changing the acknowledge mode

[0] p2126 p2127
[1]

3 Function diagrams
[19]

3.20 Diagnostics
[8075] Faults/alarms configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diagnostics fp_8050_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 8050 -
Overview 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
755
756

3.20 Diagnostics
3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-176
LED "RDY" [= red for fault]
Act fault code Act fault val Comp_no act
r2131 r3131 r3132
1 ms t_System relative <2> 0 = "No fault present"
0 ... 4294967295 [ms]
p0969 (0) Diagnostic
8060 – Fault buffer

32 bit counter, Fault time Fault time Component attribute

free running Fault code Fault value "received" "removed" fault fault

Fault times
III
r0949[0] [I32] r0948[0] [ms] r2109[0] [ms]
Fault 1 r0945[0] 3120[0] r3122[0]
r2133[0] [Float] r2130[0] [d] r2136[0] [d]
[8065.1] Counter
Operating time r0949[1] [I32] r0948[1] [ms] r2109[1] [ms] 16 bit
Fault 2 r0945[1] 3120[1] r3122[1]
r2133[1] [Float] r2130[1] [d] r2136[1] [d] Fault cases qty
Fault case
Actual III 0 ... 65535
appears p0952 (0)
fault case RESET
1 = Acknowledge fault
p2103 ... p2105 r2138 Delete fault buffer p0952 = 0:
RESET Fault buffer is deleted/
[2546.7] r2138.7 r0945 = 0
r0949[7] [I32] r0948[7] [ms] r2109[7] [ms] cleared
Fault 8 r0945[7] 3120[7] r3122[7] r0948 = 0
r2133[7] [Float] r2130[7] [d] r2136[7] [d] r0949 = 0
POWER ON Faults <1>
r2109 = 0
Acknowledging r2130 = 0 1 Automatic
Fault 1 r0949[8] [I32] r0948[8] [ms] r2109[8] [ms] r2133 = 0
Faults ackn DO r0945[8] 3120[8] r3122[8]
r2133[8] [Float] r2130[8] [d] r2136[8] [d] r2136 = 0
p3981 r3120 = 0
r0949[9] [I32] r0948[9] [ms] r2109[9] [ms] Fault buffer change [8065.6]
Fault 2 r0945[9] 3120[9] r3122[9] r3122 = 0
r2133[9] [Float] r2130[9] [d] r2136[9] [d]
1. Acknow-
1 = External fault 1 ledged 16 bit counter,
(F07860) effective fault case Fault appears free running
p2106 r2138 Fault buff change
Fault disappears
1 III r0944
[2546.7] r2138.13 r0949[15] [I32] r0948[15] [ms] r2109[15] [ms]
Fault 8 r0945[15] 3120[15] r3122[15] Fault case RESET
1 = External fault 2 r2133[15] [Float] r2130[15] [d] r2136[15] [d]
(F07861) effective acknowl.
p2107 r2138
r0949[56] [I32] r0948[56] [ms] r2109[56] [ms]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fault 1 r0945[56] POWER ON

[2546.7] r2138.14 r2133[56] [Float] r2130[56] [d] r2136[56] [d]
3120[56] r3122[56]
1 = External fault 3
(F07862) effective Fault 2 r0945[57] r0949[57] [I32] r0948[57] [ms] r2109[57] [ms]
3120[57] r3122[57]
p2108, p3110 ... p3112 r2138 r2133[57] [Float] r2130[57] [d] r2136[57] [d] ZSW fault/alarm 1
7. Acknow-
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

[2546.7] r2138.15 ledged r2139

fault case r2139.3 1 = Fault present
[oldest] r2139.15 1 = Fault gone/can be acknowledged
[2548.2]
Fault 8 r0945[63] r0949[63] [I32] r0948[63] [ms] r2109[63] [ms]
3120[63] r3122[63]
r2133[63] [Float] r2130[63] [d] r2136[63] [d]

Fault responses to the sequence control

<1> This fault is overwritten when "more recent" faults occur.

<2> The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to the status signal in r2139).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diagnostics fp_8060_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 8060 -
Fault buffer 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-177
Actual alarm code
r2132
<1> 0 = "No alarm present"
Alarm code Alarm value Alarm time Alarm time Diagnostic
"received" "removed" Component attribute
Operating time alarm alarm
[8060.1] Alarm times
8065 – Alarm buffer

Counter
16 bit
1 = External alarm 1
(A07850) effective Alarm appears Alarms
Alarm 1 r2124[0] [I32] r2123[0] [ms] r2125[0] [ms]
p2112 r2138 (oldest) r2122[0] 3121[0] r3123[0] III counter
r2134[0] [Float] r2145[0] [d] r2146[0] [d]
[2546.7] r2138.10 RESET p2111
r2124[1] [I32] r2123[1] [ms] r2125[1] [ms] p2111 = 0:
1 = External alarm 2 Alarm 2 r2122[1] 3121[1] r3123[1]
r2134[1] [Float] r2145[1] [d] r2146[1] [d] Alarm buffer is deleted
(A07851) effective
p2116 r2138 Delete alarm buffer POWER ON
RESET 1
[2546.7] r2138.11 r2122 = 0
1 = External alarm 3 r2123 = 0
(A07852) effective r2124 = 0
p2117 r2138 Alarm 8 r2124[7] [I32] r2123[7] [ms] r2125[7] [ms] r2125 = 0
(most recent) r2122[7] 3121[7] r3123[7]
r2134[7] [Float] r2145[7] [d] r2146[7] [d] r2134 = 0
[2546.7] r2138.12
r2145 = 0
r2146 = 0
Alarm history r3121 = 0
r3123 = 0
Alarm 1 r2124[8] [I32] r2123[8] [ms] r2125[8] [ms]
(most recent) r2122[8] 3121[8] r3123[8]
r2134[8] [Float] r2145[8] [d] r2146[8] [d] Delete alarm 16 bit counter,
r2124[9] [I32] r2123[9] [ms] r2125[9] [ms] buffer free running
Alarm 2 r2122[9] 3121[9] r3123[9] Alarm
r2134[9] [Float] r2145[9] [d] r2146[9] [d] Alrm buff changed
appears III r2121
1 RESET
Alarm
disappears
POWER ON
Alarm 56 r2124[63] [I32] r2123[63] [ms] r2125[63] [ms]
(oldest) r2122[63] 3121[63] r3123[63]
r2134[63] [Float] r2145[63] [d] r2146[63] [d]
16 bit counter,
free running
Sum buffer changed
Alarm number 1 III r2120
r2110 ZSW fault/alarm 1 Fault buffer change RESET
r2139 [8060.8]
r2139.7 1 = Alarm present
POWER ON
r2139.11 1 = Alarm class bit 0
r2139.12 1 = Alarm class bit 1
r2139.13 1 = Maintenance required
r2139.14 1 = Maintenance urgently required
[2548.2]

3 Function diagrams
3.20 Diagnostics
<1> The buffer parameters are updated cyclically in the background (see status signal in r2139).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diagnostics fp_8065_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 8065 -
Alarm buffer 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
757
758

3.20 Diagnostics
3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-178
8070 – Faults/alarms trigger word (r2129)

F/A trigger sel

0 ... 65535
p2128 (0)
F/A trigger word
r2129 Fault/alarm trigger word
0. Message/signal present
[0] 0. Fault/alarm code r2129
r2129.0 (e.g. as trigger condition to record traces)
1. Message/signal present
[1] 1. Fault/alarm code r2129.1

15. Message/signal present

[15] 15. Fault/alarm code r2129.15
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Setting fault/alarm trigger

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diagnostics fp_8070_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 8070 -
Faults/alarms trigger word (r2129) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-179
Changing the fault response for maximum 20 faults <1> Changing the message type - fault ”=> alarm for maximum 20 faults/alarms <1>

Chng resp F_no Chng resp resp Chng type msg_no Change type type
0 ... 65535 0 ... 6 0 ... 65535 1 ... 3
8075 – Faults/alarms configuration

p2100 (0) p2101 (0) p2118 (0) p2119 (1)

[0] 0. Fault code [0] Fault response 0 = NONE [0] 0. Fault/alarm code [0] Fault/alarm type 1 = Fault

[1] 1. Fault code [1] Fault response 1 = OFF1 [1] 1. Fault/alarm code [1] Fault/alarm type 2 = Alarm
2 = OFF2 3 = No message
3 = OFF3

5 = STOP2

6 = IASC/DCBRK

[19] 19. Fault code [19] Fault response [19] 19. Fault/alarm code [19] Fault/alarm type

Changing the acknowledge mode for maximum 20 faults <1>

Chng ackn F_no Chng ackn mode

0 ... 65535 1 ... 2
p2126 (0) p2127 (1)

[0] 0. Fault code [0] Acknowledge mode 1 = Acknowledgment is only possible using POWER ON
2 = Acknowledgment IMMEDIATELY after the cause has been
[1] 1. Fault code [1] Acknowledge mode removed.

[19] 19. Fault code [19] Acknowledge mode

3 Function diagrams
<1> The fault response, acknowledge mode and message type for all faults and alarms are set to meaningful default values in the factory setting.

3.20 Diagnostics
Changes are only possible in specific value ranges specified by SIEMENS. DCBRK = DC Brake
When the message type is changed, the supplementary information is tranferred from fault value r0949 to alarm value r2124 and vice versa. IASC = Internal Armature Short-Circuit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diagnostics fp_8075_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 8075 -
Faults/alarms configuration 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
759
3 Function diagrams
3.21 Data sets

3.21 Data sets

Function diagrams

8560 – Command Data Sets (CDS) 761

8565 – Drive Data Sets (DDS) 762

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

760 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

Fig. 3-180 Example:

Change over command data set
CDS0 --> CDS1
8560 – Command Data Sets (CDS)

BI: p0810 = "0" BI: p0810 = "1"

CDS0 selected CDS1 selected
r0836.0 = 0 r0836.0 = 1

t
t
Source CDS Target CDS Start copy process
CDS0 effective CDS1 effective p0809[0] (0) p0809[1] (1) p0809[2] (0)
r0050.0 = 0 r0050.0 = 1

CDS selected
r0836
r0836.0 [2513.2]
t r0836.1
CDS select., bit 0
p0810
(722.3) CDS count
2 ... 4
p0170 (2)
CDS select., bit 1
p0811
(0) CDS3
CDS2
CDS effective
CDS1 r0050
r0050.0
CDS0 r0050.1

3 Function diagrams
<1>

3.21 Data sets

<1> Data sets can only be applied and cleared when p0010 = 15 is set.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Data sets fp_8560_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 8560 -
Command Data Sets (CDS) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
761
762

3.21 Data sets

3 Function diagrams
Fig. 3-181
8565 – Drive Data Sets (DDS)

Copy DDS, source Copy DDS, target Copy DDS, start

p0819[0] (0) p0819[1] (1) p0819[2] (0)

DDS selected
r0837
DDS select., bit 0 DDS count r0837.0
p0820 [C] 1 ... 4 r0837.1
p0180 (1)
(0) [2513.2]

DDS select., bit 1

p0821 [C] DDS3
(0) A07530 "Drive data set does not exist"
DDS2
DDS1
DDS effective
<1> DDS0 r0051
r0051.0
r0051.1
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2
List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529

<2>

<1> A BICO interconnection to a parameter which is part of a drive data set always influences the currently effective data set.
<2> Data sets can only be applied and cleared when p0010 = 15 is set.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Data sets fp_8565_97_54.vsd Function diagram
- 8565 -
Drive Data Sets (DDS) 09.12.2015 V4.7.6 G120 CU240B/E-2
Faults and alarms 4
Content

4.1 Overview of faults and alarms 764

4.2 List of faults and alarms 775

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 763
4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

4.1.1 General

Display of faults/alarms (messages)

In the case of a fault, the drive signals the corresponding fault(s) and/or alarm(s).
For example, the following methods for displaying faults and alarms are available:
• Display via the fault and alarm buffer with PROFIBUS/PROFINET
• Display online via the commissioning software
• Display and operating unit (e.g. BOP, AOP)

Differences between faults and alarms

The differences between faults and alarms are as follows:

Table 4-1 Differences between faults and alarms

Type Description

Faults What happens when a fault occurs?

• The appropriate fault response is triggered.
• Status signal ZSW1.3 is set.
• The fault is entered in the fault buffer.

How are faults eliminated?

• Remove the original cause of the fault.
• Acknowledge the fault.
Alarms What happens when an alarm occurs?
• Status signal ZSW1.7 is set.
• The alarm is entered into the alarm buffer.

How are alarms eliminated?

• Alarms acknowledge themselves. If the cause of the alarm is no longer
present, they automatically reset themselves.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

764 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Fault reactions
The following fault reactions are defined:

Table 4-2 Fault reactions

List PROFIdrive Reaction Description

NONE - None No response when a fault occurs.

Note
With "Basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1), the following applies:
When a fault occurs with fault reaction "NONE", an active traversing
task is interrupted and the system switches to tracking mode until the
fault has been rectified and acknowledged.
OFF1 ON/ Brake along the Closed loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)
OFF ramp-function • n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the ramp-
generator down function generator ramp down (p1121).
ramp followed by
• When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
pulse inhibit
parameterized) is closed (p1215). The pulses are suppressed when
the brake application time (p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below the
threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227) started when
speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) has expired.

Torque control (p1300 = 22, 23)

• The following applies for closed-loop torque control:
Reaction as for OFF2.
• When the system switches to closed-loop torque control with p1501,
the following applies:
No separate braking reaction.
If the actual speed value drops below the speed threshold (p1226)
or the timer stage (p1227) has expired, the motor holding brake (if
one is being used) is closed. The pulses are suppressed when the
brake application time (p1217) expires.
OFF1_ - As for OFF1, Faults with this fault response only become effective after the delay
DELAYED however delayed time in p3136 has expired.
The remaining time up to OFF1 is displayed in r3137.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 765
4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Table 4-2 Fault reactions, continued

List PROFIdrive Reaction Description

OFF2 COAST Internal/external Closed-loop speed and torque control

STOP pulse disable • Instantaneous pulse suppression, the drive "coasts" to a standstill.
• The motor holding brake (if one is being used) is closed
immediately.
• Switching-on inhibited is activated.
OFF3 QUICK Brake along the Closed loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)
STOP OFF3 down ramp • n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3
followed by pulse ramp down (p1135).
disable
• When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
parameterized) is closed. The pulses are suppressed when the
holding brake's closing time (p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below the
threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227) started when
speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) has expired.
• Switching-on inhibited is activated.

Torque control (p1300 = 22, 23)

• Changeover to speed-controlled operation and other reactions as
described for speed-controlled operation.
STOP2 - n_set = 0 • n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3
ramp down (p1135).
• The drive remains in closed-loop speed control.
IASC/ - - • For synchronous motors, the following applies:
DCBRAKE If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, an internal armature short-
circuit is triggered.
The conditions for p1231 = 4 must be observed.
• For induction motors, the following applies:
If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, DC braking is triggered.
DC braking must have been commissioned (p1230 to p1239).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

766 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Acknowledging faults
The list of faults and alarms specifies how to acknowledge each fault after the cause has been
eliminated.

Table 4-3 Acknowledging faults

Acknowledgment Description

POWER ON The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON (switch drive unit off and on again).

Note
If this action has not removed the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immediately after power up.
IMMEDIATELY Faults can be acknowledged on one drive object (Points 1 to 3) or on all drive objects (Point 4) as
follows:
1 Set acknowledgment by parameter:
p3981 = 0 --> 1
2 Acknowledging via binector inputs:
p2103 BI: 1. Acknowledge faults
p2104 BI: 2. Acknowledge faults
p2105 BI: 3. Acknowledge faults
3 Acknowledging using a PROFIBUS control signal:
STW1.7 = 0 --> 1 (edge)
Note
• These faults can also be acknowledged by a POWER ON operation.
• If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault will continue to be displayed after
acknowledgment.
• Safety Integrated faults
The "Safe Torque Off" (STO) function must be deselected before these faults are acknowledged.
PULSE The fault can only be acknowledged when the pulses are inhibited (r0899.11 = 0).
SUPPRESSION The same options are available for acknowledging as described under IMMEDIATE acknowledgment.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 767
4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

4.1.2 Explanation of the list of faults and alarms

The data in the following example have been chosen at random. The information listed below
is the maximum amount of information that a description can contain. Some of the information
is optional.
The "List of faults and alarms" (Page 775) has the following layout:

- - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Axxxxx (F, N) Fault location (optional): Name

Message class: Text of the message class (number according to PROFIdrive)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledgement: NONE
Cause: Description of possible causes.
Fault value (r0949, interpret format): or alarm value (r2124, interpret format): (optional)
Information about fault or alarm values (optional).
Remedy: Description of possible remedies.

- - - - - - - - - - - - End of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Axxxxx Alarm xxxxx

Axxxxx (F, N) Alarm xxxxx (message type can be changed to F or N)
Fxxxxx Fault xxxxx
Fxxxxx (A, N) Fault xxxxx (report type can be changed to A or N)
Nxxxxx No message
Nxxxxx (A) No message (message type can be changed to A)
Cxxxxx Safety message (separate message buffer)
A message comprises a letter followed by the relevant number.
The meaning of the letters is as follows:
• A means "Alarm"
• F means "Fault"
• N means "No message" or "Internal message"
• C means "Safety message"
The optional brackets indicate whether the type specified for this message can be changed
and which message types can be adjusted via parameters (p2118, p2119).
Information on reaction and acknowledgment is specified independently for a message with an
adjustable message type (e.g. reaction to F, acknowledgment for F).

Note
You can change the default properties of a fault or alarm by setting parameters.
References: /BA6/ SINAMICS G120 Operating Instructions
Frequency Converter with CU240B/E-2 Control Units,
Section "Alarms, faults, and system messages"
The "List of faults and alarms" (Page 775) supplies information referred to the properties of a
message set as default. If the properties of a specific message are changed, the corresponding
information may have to be modified in this list.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

768 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Fault location (optional): Name

The fault location (optional), the name of the fault or alarm and the message number are all
used to identify the message (e.g. with the commissioning software).

Message class:
For each message, specifies the associated message class with the following structure:
Text of the message class (number according to PROFIdrive)
The message classes are transferred at different interfaces to higher-level control systems and
their associated display and operating units.
The message classes that are available are shown in Table "Message classes and coding of
various diagnostic interfaces" (Page 770). In addition to the text of the message class and their
number according to PROFIdrive – as well as a brief help text regarding the cause and remedy
– they also include information about the various diagnostic interfaces:
• PN (hex)
Specifies the "Channel error type" of the PROFINET channel diagnostics.
When activating the channel diagnostics, using the GSDML file, the texts listed in the table
can be displayed.
• DS1 (dec)
Specifies the bit number in date set DS1 of the diagnostic alarm for SIMATIC S7.
When the diagnostic alarms are activated, the texts listed in the table can be displayed.
• DP (dec)
Specifies the "Error type" of the channel-related diagnostics for PROFIBUS.
When the channel diagnostics are activated, the texts listed in the standard and the GSD
file can be displayed.
• ET 200 (dec)
Specifies the "Error type" of the channel-related diagnostics for the
SIMATIC ET 200pro FC-2 device.
When the channel diagnostics are activated, the texts listed in the standard and the GSD
file of the ET 200pro can be displayed.
• NAMUR (r3113.x)
Specifies the bit number in parameter r3113.
For the interfaces DP, ET 200, NAMUR, in some instances, the message classes are
combined.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 769
4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Table 4-4 Message classes and coding of various diagnostic interfaces

Text of the message class (number according to PROFIdrive) Diagnostics interface

Cause and remedy.
PN DS1 DP ET 200 NAMUR
(hex) (dec) (dec) (dec) (r3113.x)

Hardware/software errors (1) 9000 0 16 9 0

A hardware or software malfunction was detected. Carry out a
POWER ON for the relevant component. If it occurs again, contact the
hotline.
Line fault (2) 9001 1 17 24 1
A line supply fault has occurred (phase failure, voltage level ...).
Check the line supply and fuses. Check the supply voltage. Check the
wiring.
Supply voltage fault (3) 9002 2 21 21 15
2 2
An electronics supply voltage fault (48 V, 24 V, 5 V …) was detected. 3 3
Check the wiring. Check the voltage level.
DC-link overvoltage (4) 9003 3 18 24 2
The DC-link voltage has assumed an inadmissibly high value. Check
the dimensioning of the system (line supply, reactor, voltages). Check
the infeed settings.
Power electronics fault (5) 9004 4 19 24 3
An impermissible operating state of the power electronics was
detected (overcurrent, overtemperature, IGBT failure …). Check
compliance with the permissible load cycles. Check the ambient
temperatures (fan).
Overtemperature of the electronic component (6) 9005 5 20 5 4
The temperature in the component has exceeded the highest
permissible limit. Check the ambient temperature / control cabinet
ventilation.
Ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit detected (7) 9006 6 21 20 5
A ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit was detected in the power
cables or in the motor windings. Check the power cables (connection).
Check the motor.
Motor overload (8) 9007 7 22 24 6
The motor was operated outside the permissible limits (temperature,
current, torque …). Check the load cycles and set limits. Check the
ambient temperature / motor cooling.
Communication to the higher-level controller faulted (9) 9008 8 23 19 7
The communication to the higher-level controller (internal coupling,
PROFIBUS, PROFINET …) is faulted or interrupted. Check the state
of the higher-level controller. Check the communication
connection/-wiring. Check the bus configuration/cycles.
Safety monitoring channel has detected an error (10) 9009 9 24 25 8
A safe operation monitoring function has detected an error.
Actual position/speed value incorrect or not available (11) 900A 10 25 29 9
An illegal signal state was detected while evaluating the encoder
signals (track signals, zero marks, absolute values …). Check the
encoder / state of the encoder signals. Observe the maximum
permissible frequencies.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

770 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Table 4-4 Message classes and coding of various diagnostic interfaces, continued

Text of the message class (number according to PROFIdrive) Diagnostics interface

Cause and remedy.
PN DS1 DP ET 200 NAMUR
(hex) (dec) (dec) (dec) (r3113.x)

Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication faulted (12) 900B 11 26 31 10

The internal communication between the SINAMICS components is
faulted or interrupted. Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring. Ensure an EMC-
compliant installation. Observe the maximum permissible quantity
structures / cycles.
Infeed fault (13) 900C 12 27 24 11
The infeed is faulty or has failed. Check the infeed and its environment
(line supply, filters, reactors, fuses …). Check the infeed control.
Braking controller / Braking Module faulted (14) 900D 13 28 24 15
The internal or external Braking Module is faulted or overloaded
(temperature). Check the connection/state of the Braking Module.
Comply with the permissible number of braking operations and their
duration.
Line filter fault (15) 900E 14 17 24 15
The line filter monitoring has detected an excessively high
temperature or another impermissible state. Check the temperature /
temperature monitoring. Check the configuration to ensure that it is
permissible (filter type, infeed, thresholds).
External measured value / signal state outside of the permissible 900F 15 29 26 15
range (16)
A measured value / signal state read in via the input area
(digital/analog/temperature) has assumed an impermissible
value/state. Identify and check the relevant signal. Check the set
thresholds.
Application / technological function faulty (17) 9010 16 30 9 15
The application / technological function has exceeded a (set) limit
(position, velocity, torque …). Identify and check the relevant limit.
Check the setpoint specification of the higher-level controller.
Error in the parameterization/configuration/commissioning 9011 17 31 16 15
procedure (18)
An error was identified in the parameterization or in a commissioning
procedure, or the parameterization does not match the actual device
configuration. Determine the precise cause of the fault using the
commissioning tool. Adapt the parameterization or device
configuration.
General drive fault (19) 9012 18 9 9 15
Group fault. Determine the precise cause of the fault using the
commissioning tool.
Auxiliary unit fault (20) 9013 19 29 26 15
The monitoring of an auxiliary unit (incoming transformer, cooling
unit …) has detected an illegal state. Determine the exact cause of the
fault and check the relevant device.
1. Undervoltage condition of the electronics power supply
2. Overvoltage condition of the electronics power supply

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 771
4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Reaction: Default fault reaction (adjustable fault reaction)

Specifies the default reaction in the event of a fault.
The optional parentheses indicate whether the default fault reactions can be changed and
which fault reactions can be adjusted via parameters (p2100, p2101).

Note
See Table "Fault reactions" (Page 765)

Acknowledgment: Default acknowledgment (adjustable acknowledgment)

Specifies the default method of acknowledging faults after the cause has been eliminated.
The optional parentheses indicate whether the default acknowledgment can be changed and
which acknowledgment can be adjusted via parameters (p2126, p2127).

Note
See Table "Acknowledging faults" (Page 767)

Cause:
Describes the possible causes of the fault or alarm. A fault or alarm value can also be specified
(optional).
Fault value (r0949, format):
The fault value is entered in the fault buffer in r0949[0...63] and specifies additional, more
precise information about a fault.
Alarm value (r2124, format):
The alarm value specifies additional, more precise information about an alarm.
The alarm value is entered in the alarm buffer in r2124[0...7] and specifies additional, more
precise information about an alarm.

Remedy:
Describes the methods available for eliminating the cause of the active fault or alarm.

WARNING
On a case for case basis, service and maintenance personnel are responsible for choosing
a suitable method for eliminating the cause of faults.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

772 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

4.1.3 Number ranges of faults and alarms

Note
The following number ranges represent an overview of all faults and alarmsused in the
SINAMICS drive family.
The faults and alarms for the product described in this List Manual are described in detail in
"List of faults and alarms" (Page 775).

Faults and alarms are organized into the following number ranges:

Table 4-5 Number ranges of faults and alarms

of To Area

1000 3999 Control Unit

4000 4999 Reserved
5000 5999 Power section
6000 6899 Infeed
6900 6999 Braking Module
7000 7999 Drive
8000 8999 Option Board
9000 12999 Reserved
13000 13020 Licensing
13021 13099 Reserved
13100 13102 Know-how protection
13103 19999 Reserved
20000 29999 OEM
30000 30999 DRIVE-CLiQ component power unit
31000 31999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 1
32000 32999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 2

Note
Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the encoder is
parameterized as a direct measuring system and does not intervene in
the motor control.
33000 33999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 3

Note
Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the encoder is
parameterized as a direct measuring system and does not intervene in
the motor control.
34000 34999 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
35000 35199 Terminal Module 54F (TM54F)
35200 35999 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
36000 36999 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
37000 37999 HF Damping Module

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 773
4 Faults and alarms
4.1 Overview of faults and alarms

Table 4-5 Number ranges of faults and alarms, continued

of To Area

40000 40999 Controller Extension 32 (CX32)

41000 48999 Reserved
49000 49999 SINAMICS GM/SM/GL
50000 50499 Communication Board (COMM BOARD)
50500 59999 OEM Siemens
60000 65535 SINAMICS DC MASTER (closed-loop DC current control)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

774 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

4.2 List of faults and alarms

Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4707900, Language: eng
Objects: CU240B-2, CU240B-2_DP, CU240E-2, CU240E-2_DP, CU240E-2_DP_F, CU240E-2_F, CU240E-2_PN_F, CU240E-2 PN

F01000 Internal software error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - evaluate fault buffer (r0945).
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- if required, check the data on the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace the Control Unit.

F01001 FloatingPoint exception

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An exception occurred during an operation with the FloatingPoint data type.
The error may be caused by the basic system or an OA application (e.g., FBLOCKS, DCC).
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note:
Refer to r9999 for further information about this fault.
r9999[0]: Fault number.
r9999[1]: Program counter at the time when the exception occurred.
r9999[2]: Cause of the FloatingPoint exception.
Bit 0 = 1: Operation invalid
Bit 1 = 1: Division by zero
Bit 2 = 1: Overflow
Bit 3 = 1: Underflow
Bit 4 = 1: Inaccurate result
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- check configuration and signals of the blocks in FBLOCKS.
- check configuration and signals of DCC charts.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.

F01002 Internal software error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 775
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01003 Acknowledgment delay when accessing the memory

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A memory area was accessed that does not return a "READY".
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- contact Technical Support.

N01004 (F, A) Internal software error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - read out diagnostics parameter (r9999).
- contact Technical Support.
See also: r9999 (Software error internal supplementary diagnostics)

F01005 File upload/download error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The upload or download of EEPROM data was unsuccessful.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxxxx hex: yy = component number, xxxx = fault cause
xxxx = 000B hex = 11 dec:
Power unit component has detected a checksum error.
xxxx = 000F hex = 15 dec:
The selected power unit will not accept the content of the EEPROM file.
xxxx = 0011 hex = 17 dec:
Power unit component has detected an internal access error.
xxxx = 0012 hex = 18 dec:
After several communication attempts, no response from the power unit component.
xxxx = 008B hex = 140 dec:
EEPROM file for the power unit component not available on the memory card.
xxxx = 008D hex = 141 dec:
An inconsistent length of the firmware file was signaled. It is possible that the download/upload has been interrupted.
xxxx = 0090 hex = 144 dec:
When checking the file that was loaded, the component detected a fault (checksum). It is possible that the file on the
memory card is defective.
xxxx = 0092 hex = 146 dec:
This SW or HW does not support the selected function.
xxxx = 009C hex = 156 dec:
Component with the specified component number is not available (p7828).
xxxx = Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Save a suitable firmware file or EEPROM file for upload or download in folder "/ee_sac/" on the memory card.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

776 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A01009 (N) CU: Control module overtemperature

Message class: Overtemperature of the electronic components (6)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature (r0037[0]) of the control module (Control Unit) has exceeded the specified limit value.
Remedy: - check the air intake for the Control Unit.
- check the Control Unit fan.
Note:
The alarm is automatically withdrawn once the limit value has been fallen below.

F01010 Drive type unknown

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An unknown drive type was found.
Remedy: - replace Power Module.
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.

F01015 Internal software error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.

A01016 (F) Firmware changed

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: At least one firmware file in the directory was illegally changed on the non-volatile memory (memory card/device
memory) with respect to the version when shipped from the factory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Checksum of one file is incorrect.
1: File missing.
2: Too many files.
3: Incorrect firmware version.
4: Incorrect checksum of the back-up file.
Remedy: For the non-volatile memory for the firmware (memory card/device memory), restore the delivery condition.
Note:
The file involved can be read out using parameter r9925.
The status of the firmware check is displayed using r9926.
See also: r9925 (Firmware file incorrect), r9926 (Firmware check status)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 777
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A01017 Component lists changed

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: On the memory card, one file in the directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA or /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA has been
illegally changed with respect to that supplied from the factory. No changes are permitted in this directory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
zyx dec: x = Problem, y = Directory, z = File name
x = 1: File does not exist.
x = 2: Firmware version of the file does not match the software version.
x = 3: File checksum is incorrect.
y = 0: Directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/
y = 1: Directory /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA/
z = 0: File MOTARM.ACX
z = 1: File MOTSRM.ACX
z = 2: File MOTSLM.ACX
z = 3: File ENCDATA.ACX
z = 4: File FILTDATA.ACX
z = 5: File BRKDATA.ACX
z = 6: File DAT_BEAR.ACX
z = 7: File CFG_BEAR.ACX
Remedy: For the file on the memory card involved, restore the status originally supplied from the factory.

F01018 Booting has been interrupted several times

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Module booting was interrupted several times. As a consequence, the module boots with the factory setting.
Possible reasons for booting being interrupted:
- power supply interrupted.
- CPU crashed.
- parameterization invalid.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on). After switching on, the module reboots from the valid
parameterization (if available).
- restore the valid parameterization.
Examples:
a) Carry out a first commissioning, save, carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
b) Load another valid parameter backup (e.g. from the memory card), save, carry out a POWER ON (switch-
off/switch-on).
Note:
If the fault situation is repeated, then this fault is again output after several interrupted boots.

A01019 Writing to the removable data medium unsuccessful

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The write access to the removable data medium was unsuccessful.
Remedy: Remove and check the removable data medium. Then run the data backup again.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

778 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A01020 Writing to RAM disk unsuccessful

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A write access to the internal RAM disk was unsuccessful.
Remedy: Adapt the file size for the system logbook to the internal RAM disk (p9930).
See also: p9930 (System logbook activation)

A01021 Removable data medium as USB data storage medium from the PC used
Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The removable data medium is used as USB data storage medium from a PC
As a consequence, the drive cannot access the removable data medium. When backing up, the configuration data
cannot be saved on the removable data medium.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: The know-how protection as well as the copy protection for the removable data medium is active. Backup is
inhibited.
2: The configuration data are only backed up in the Control Unit.
See also: r7760 (Write protection/know-how protection status), r9401 (Safely remove memory card status)
Remedy: De-activate the USB connection to the PC and back up the configuration data.
Note:
The alarm is automatically canceled when disconnecting the USB connection or when removing the removable data
medium.
See also: r9401 (Safely remove memory card status)

F01023 Software timeout (internal)

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An internal software timeout has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.

A01028 (F) Configuration error

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The parameterization that was downloaded was generated with a different module type (Order No., MLFB).
Remedy: Save parameters in a non-volatile fashion (p0971 = 1).

F01030 Sign-of-life failure for master control

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For active PC master control, no sign-of-life was received within the monitoring time.
The master control was returned to the active BICO interconnection.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 779
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Set the monitoring time higher at the PC or, if required, completely disable the monitoring function.
For the commissioning software, the monitoring time is set as follows:
<Drive> -> Commissioning -> Control panel -> Button "Fetch master control" -> A window is displayed to set the
monitoring time in milliseconds.
Notice:
The monitoring time should be set as short as possible. A long monitoring time means a late response when the
communication fails!

F01033 Units changeover: Reference parameter value invalid

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When changing over the units to the referred representation type, it is not permissible for any of the required
reference parameters to be equal to 0.0
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Reference parameter whose value is 0.0.
See also: p0505 (Selecting the system of units), p0595 (Technological unit selection)
Remedy: Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0.0.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004

F01034 Units changeover: Calculation parameter values after reference value change
unsuccessful
Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The change of a reference parameter meant that for an involved parameter the selected value was not able to be re-
calculated in the per unit representation. The change was rejected and the original parameter value restored.
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Parameter whose value was not able to be re-calculated.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Remedy: - Select the value of the reference parameter such that the parameter involved can be calculated in the per unit
representation.
- Technology unit selection (p0595) before changing the reference parameter p0596, set p0595 = 1.

A01035 (F) ACX: Parameter back-up file corrupted

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When the Control Unit is booted, no complete data set was found from the parameter back-up files. The last time that
the parameterization was saved, it was not completely carried out.
It is possible that the backup was interrupted by switching off or withdrawing the memory card.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
aa = 01 hex:
Power up was realized without data backup. The drive is in the factory setting.
aa = 02 hex:
The last available internal backup data record was loaded. The parameterization must be checked. It is
recommended that the parameterization is downloaded again.
aa = 03 hex:
The last available data record from the memory card was loaded. The parameterization must be checked.
aa = 04 hex:
An invalid data backup was loaded from the memory card into the drive. The drive is in the factory setting.
dd, cc, bb:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0971 (Save parameters)
Remedy: - Download the project again with the commissioning software.
- save all parameters (p0971 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

780 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01036 (A) ACX: Parameter back-up file missing

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When downloading the device parameterization, a parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.ACX associated with a drive
object cannot be found.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 2, 3, 4:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project.
Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0971 = 1.
This means that the parameter files are again completely written into the non-volatile memory.
Note:
If the project data have not been backed up, then a new first commissioning is required.

F01038 (A) ACX: Loading the parameter back-up file unsuccessful

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error has occurred when downloading PSxxxyyy.ACX or PTxxxyyy.ACX files from the non-volatile memory.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 2:
255: Incorrect drive object type.
254: Topology comparison unsuccessful -> drive object type was not able to be identified.
Reasons could be:
- incorrect component type in the actual topology
- Component does not exist in the actual topology.
- Component not active.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Byte 4, 3:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - if you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, download the project again. Save using the
function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0971 = 1. This means that the parameter files are again completely written to
the non-volatile memory.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.

F01039 (A) ACX: Writing to the parameter back-up file was unsuccessful
Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Writing to at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful.
- in the directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/ at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** has the "read only" file
attribute and cannot be overwritten.
- there is not sufficient free memory space available.
- the non-volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 781
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):

dcba hex
a = yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
a = 000 --> consistency back-up file
a = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
a = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
b = xxx in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
b = 000 --> data save started with p0971 = 1
b = 010 --> data save started with p0971 = 10
b = 011 --> data save started with p0971 = 11
b = 012 --> data save started with p0971 = 12
d, c:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the file attribute of the files (PSxxxyyy.***, CAxxxyyy.***, CCxxxyyy.***) and, if required, change from "read
only" to "writeable".
- check the free memory space in the non-volatile memory. Approx. 80 kbyte of free memory space is required for
every drive object in the system.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.

F01040 Save parameter settings and carry out a POWER ON

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: A parameter has been changed that requires the parameters to be backed up and the Control Unit to be switched
OFF and ON again.
Remedy: - Save parameters (p0971).
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for the Control Unit.

F01042 Parameter error during project download

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software (e.g. incorrect parameter
value).
For the specified parameter, it was detected that dynamic limits were exceeded that may possibly depend on other
parameters.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
0: Parameter number illegal.
1: Parameter value cannot be changed.
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded.
3: Sub-index incorrect.
4: No array, no sub-index.
5: Data type incorrect.
6: Setting not permitted (only resetting).
7: Descriptive element cannot be changed.
9: Descriptive data not available.
11: No master control.
15: No text array available.
17: Task cannot be executed due to operating state.
20: Illegal value.
21: Response too long.
22: Parameter address illegal.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

782 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

23: Format illegal.

24: Number of values not consistent.
108: Unit unknown.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - enter the correct value in the specified parameter.
- identify the parameter that restricts the limits of the specified parameter.

F01043 Fatal error at project download

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fatal error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Device status cannot be changed to Device Download (drive object ON?).
2: Incorrect drive object number.
8: Maximum number of drive objects that can be generated exceeded.
11: Error while generating a drive object (global component).
12: Error while generating a drive object (drive component).
13: Unknown drive object type.
14: Drive status cannot be changed to "ready for operation" (r0947 and r0949).
15: Drive status cannot be changed to drive download.
16: Device status cannot be changed to "ready for operation".
18: A new download is only possible if the factory settings are restored for the drive unit.
20: The configuration is inconsistent.
21: Error when accepting the download parameters.
22: SW-internal download error.
100: The download was canceled, because no write requests were received from the commissioning client (e.g. for
communication error).
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - use the current version of the commissioning software.
- modify the offline project and download again (e.g. compare the motor and Power Module in the offline project and
on the drive).
- change the drive state (is a drive rotating or is there a message/signal?).
- carefully note any other messages/signals and remove their cause.
- boot from previously saved files (switch-off/switch-on or p0970).

F01044 CU: Descriptive data error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non-volatile memory.
Remedy: Replace the memory card or Control Unit.

A01045 Configuring data invalid

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX, or
CCxxxyyy.ACX saved in the non-volatile memory. Because of this, under certain circumstances, several of the saved
parameter values were not able to be accepted. Also see r9406 up to r9408.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 783
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - check the parameters displayed in r9406 up to r9408, and correct these if required.
- Restore the factory setting using (p0970 = 1) and re-load the project into the drive unit.
Then save the parameterization in STARTER using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0971 = 1. This
overwrites the incorrect parameter files in the non-volatile memory – and the alarm is withdrawn.
See also: r9406 (PS file parameter number parameter not transferred), r9407 (PS file parameter index parameter not
transferred), r9408 (PS file fault code parameter not transferred)

A01049 It is not possible to write to file

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to write into a write-protected file (PSxxxxxx.acx). The write request was interrupted.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Drive object number.
Remedy: Check whether the "write protected" attribute has been set for the files in the non-volatile memory under
.../USER/SINAMICS/DATA/... When required, remove write protection and save again (e.g. set p0971 to 1).

F01054 CU: System limit exceeded

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one system overload has been identified.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Computing time load too high (r9976[1]).
5: Peak load too high (r9976[5]).
Note:
As long as this fault is present, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971).
See also: r9976 (System utilization)
Remedy: For fault value = 1, 5:
- reduce the computing time load of the drive unit (r9976[1] and r9976[5]) to under 100 %.
- check the sampling times and adjust if necessary (p0115, p0799, p4099).
- de-activate function modules.
- de-activate drive objects.
- remove drive objects from the target topology.
- note the DRIVE-CLiQ topology rules and if required, change the DRIVE-CLiQ topology.
When using the Drive Control Chart (DCC) or free function blocks (FBLOCKS), the following applies:
- the computing time load of the individual run-time groups on a drive object can be read out in r21005 (DCC) or
r20005 (FBLOCKS).
- if necessary, the assignment of the run-time group (p21000, p20000) can be changed in order to increase the
sampling time (r21001, r20001).
- if necessary, reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks (DCC) and/or function blocks (FBLOCKS).

A01064 (F) CU: Internal error (CRC)

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A checksum error (CRC error) has occurred in the Control Unit program memory
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

784 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A01066 Buffer memory: 70% fill level reached or exceeded

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The non-volatile buffer memory for parameter changes is filled to at least 70%.
This can also occur if the buffer memory is active (p0014 = 1) and parameters are continually changed via a fieldbus
system.
Remedy: If required, de-activate and clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 0).
If required, clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 2).
In the following cases, the entries in the buffer memory are transferred into the ROM and then the buffer memory is
cleared:
- p0971 = 1
- switch off/switch on the Control Unit
See also: p0014 (Buffer memory mode)

A01067 Buffer memory: 100 % fill level reached

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The non-volatile buffer memory for parameter changes is filled to 100%.
All additional parameter changes will no longer be taken into account in the non-volatile buffer memory. However,
parameter changes can still be made in the volatile memory (RAM).
This can also occur if the buffer memory is active (p0014 = 1) and parameters are continually changed via a fieldbus
system.
Remedy: If required, de-activate and clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 0).
If required, clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 2).
In the following cases, the entries in the buffer memory are transferred into the ROM and then the buffer memory is
cleared:
- p0971 = 1
- switch off/switch on the Control Unit
See also: p0014 (Buffer memory mode)

F01068 CU: Data memory memory overflow

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The utilization for a data memory area is too large.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: High-speed data memory 1 overloaded
Bit 1 = 1: High-speed data memory 2 overloaded
Bit 2 = 1: High-speed data memory 3 overloaded
Bit 3 = 1: High-speed data memory 4 overloaded
Remedy: - de-activate the function module.
- de-activate drive object.
- remove the drive object from the target topology.

A01069 Parameter backup and device incompatible

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The parameter backup on the memory card and the drive unit do not match.
The module boots with the factory settings.
Example:
Devices A and B. are not compatible and a memory card with the parameter backup for device A is inserted in device
B.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 785
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - insert a memory card with compatible parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON.
- insert a memory card without parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON.
- if required, withdraw the memory card and carry out POWER ON.
- save the parameters (p0971 = 1).

F01072 Memory card restored from the backup copy

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The Control Unit was switched-off while writing to the memory card. This is why the visible partition became
defective.
After switching on, the data from the non-visible partition (backup copy) were written to the visible partition.
Remedy: Check that the firmware and parameterization is up-to-date.

A01073 (N) POWER ON required for backup copy on memory card

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The parameter assignment on the visible partition of the memory card has changed.
In order that the backup copy on the memory card is updated on the non-visible partition, it is necessary to carry out
a POWER ON or hardware reset (p0972) of the Control Unit.
Note:
It is possible that a new POWER ON is requested via this alarm (e.g. after saving with p0971 = 1).
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for the Control Unit.
- carry out a hardware reset (RESET button, p0972).

F01105 (A) CU: Insufficient memory

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Too many data sets are configured on this Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - reduce the number of data sets.

F01107 Save to memory card unsuccessful

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A data save to the memory card was not able to be successfully carried out.
- Memory card is defective.
- insufficient space on memory card.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The file on the RAM was not able to be opened.
2: The file on the RAM was not able to be read.
3: A new directory could not be created on the memory card.
4: A new file could not be created on the memory card.
5: A new file could not be written on the memory card.
Remedy: - try to save again.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

786 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01112 CU: Power unit not permissible

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The connected power unit cannot be used together with this Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Power unit is not supported (e.g. PM340).
Remedy: Replace the power unit that is not permissible by a component that is permissible.

F01120 (A) Terminal initialization has failed

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal software error occurred while the terminal functions were being initialized.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace the Control Unit.

F01122 (A) Frequency at the measuring probe input too high

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input is too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: DI 1 (term. 6)
2: DI 3 (term. 8)
Remedy: Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input.

F01152 CU: Invalid constellation of drive object types

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: It is not possible to simultaneously operate drive object types SERVO, VECTOR and HLA.
A maximum of 2 of these drive object types can be operated on a Control Unit.
Remedy: - switch off the unit.
- restrict the use of drive object types SERVO, VECTOR, HLA to a maximum of 2.
- re-commission the unit.

F01205 CU: Time slice overflow

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Insufficient computation time.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Contact Technical Support.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 787
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01250 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-only data

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.

A01251 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-write data

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: For alarm value r2124 < 256, the following applies:
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.
For alarm value r2124 >= 256, the following applies:
- clear the fault memory (p0952 = 0).
- replace the Control Unit.

F01257 CU: Firmware version out of date

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The Control Unit firmware is too old.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
bbbbbbaa hex: aa = unsupported component
aa = 01 hex = 1 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Control Unit.
aa = 02 hex = 2 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Control Unit.
aa = 03 hex = 3 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Power Module.
aa = 04 hex = 4 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Control Unit.
Remedy: For fault value = 1, 2, 4:
- Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit.
For fault value = 3:
- Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit.
- Replace the Power Module by a component that is supported.

F01340 Topology: Too many components on one line

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For the selected communications clock cycle, too many DRIVE-CLiQ components are connected to one line of the
Control Unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

788 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):

xyy hex: x = fault cause, yy = component number or connection number.
1yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all read
transfers.
2yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all write
transfers.
3yy:
Cyclic communication is fully utilized.
4yy:
The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application. An additional dead time must be added to the
control. Sign-of-life errors can be expected.
The conditions of operation with a current controller sampling time of 31.25 µs have not been maintained.
5yy:
Internal buffer overflow for net data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
6yy:
Internal buffer overflow for receive data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
7yy:
Internal buffer overflow for send data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
8yy:
The component clock cycles cannot be combined with one another
900:
The lowest common multiple of the clock cycles in the system is too high to be determined.
901:
The lowest common multiple of the clock cycles in the system cannot be generated with the hardware.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring.
- reduce the number of components on the DRIVE-CLiQ line involved and distribute these to other DRIVE-CLiQ
sockets of the Control Unit. This means that communication is uniformly distributed over several lines.
For fault value = 1yy - 4yy in addition:
- increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115, p4099). If necessary, for DCC or FBLOCKS, change the assignment of
the run-time group (p21000, p20000) so that the sampling time (r21001, r20001) is increased.
- if necessary, reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks (DCC) and/or function blocks (FBLOCKS).
- reduce the function modules (r0108).
- establish the conditions for operation with a current controller sampling time of 31.25 µs (at the DRIVE-CLiQ line,
only operate Motor Modules and Sensor Modules with this sampling time and only use a permitted Sensor Module
(e.g. SMC20, this means a 3 at the last position of the order number)).
- For an NX, the corresponding Sensor Module for a possibly existing second measuring system should be
connected to a free DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the NX.
For fault value = 8yy in addition:
- check the clock cycles settings (p0112, p0115, p4099). Clock cycles on a DRIVE-CLiQ line must be perfect integer
multiples of one another. As clock cycle on a line, all clock cycles of all drive objects in the previously mentioned
parameters apply, which have components on the line involved.
For fault value = 9yy in addition:
- check the clock cycles settings (p0112, p0115, p4099). The lower the numerical value difference between two clock
cycles, the higher the lowest common multiple. This behavior has a significantly stronger influence, the higher the
numerical values of the clock cycles.

F01505 (A) BICO: Interconnection cannot be established

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A PROFIdrive telegram has been set (p0922).
An interconnection contained in the telegram was not able to be established.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter receiver that should be changed.
Remedy: Establish another interconnection.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 789
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01510 BICO: Signal source is not float type

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested connector output does not have the correct data type. This interconnection is not established.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number to which an interconnection should be made (connector output).
Remedy: Interconnect this connector input with a connector output having a float data type.

F01511 (A) BICO: Interconnection with different scalings

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested BICO interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and
BICO input using the reference values.
- the BICO output has different normalized units than the BICO input.
- message only for interconnections within a drive object.
Example:
The BICO output has, as normalized unit, voltage and the BICO input has current.
This means that the factor p2002/p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input.
p2002: contains the reference value for current
p2001: contains the reference value for voltage
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy: Not necessary.

F01512 BICO: No scaling available

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An attempt was made to determine a conversion factor for a scaling that does not exist.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Unit (e.g. corresponding to SPEED) for which an attempt was made to determine a factor.
Remedy: Apply scaling or check the transfer value.

F01513 (N, A) BICO: Interconnection cross DO with different scalings

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested BICO interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and
BICO input using the reference values.
An interconnection is made between different drive objects and the BICO output has different normalized units than
the BICO input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different.
Example 1:
BICO output with voltage normalized unit, BICO input with current normalized unit, BICO output and BICO input lie in
different drive objects. This means that the factor p2002/p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO
input.
p2002: contains the reference value for current
p2001: contains the reference value for voltage
Example 2:
BICO output with voltage normalized unit in drive object 1 (DO1), BICO input with voltage normalized unit in drive
object 2 (DO2). The reference values for voltage (p2001) of the two drive objects have different values. This means
that the factor p2001(DO1)/p2001(DO2) is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input.
p2001: contains the reference value for voltage, drive objects 1, 2
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

790 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Not necessary.

A01514 (F) BICO: Error when writing during a reconnect

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: During a reconnect operation (e.g. while booting or downloading - but can also occur in normal operation) a
parameter was not able to be written to.
Example:
When writing to BICO input with double word format (DWORD), in the second index, the memory areas overlap (e.g.
p8861). The parameter is then reset to the factory setting.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy: Not necessary.

F01515 (A) BICO: Writing to parameter not permitted as the master control is active
Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When changing the number of CDS or when copying from CDS, the master control is active.
Remedy: If required, return the master control and repeat the operation.

A01590 (F) Drive: Motor maintenance interval expired

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected service/maintenance interval for this motor was reached.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Motor data set number.
See also: p0650 (Actual motor operating hours), p0651 (Motor operating hours maintenance interval)
Remedy: carry out service/maintenance and reset the service/maintenance interval (p0651).

F01600 SI P1 (CU): STOP A initiated

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on processor 1 has detected an error and initiated a STOP A.
- forced checking procedure (test stop) of the safety switch-off signal path on processor 1 unsuccessful.
- subsequent response to fault F01611 (defect in a monitoring channel).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Stop request from processor 2.
1005:
- Pulses suppressed although STO not selected and there is no internal STOP A present.
- For a Power Module with "STO via terminals at the Power Module" (STO_A/STO_B), these terminals are active
(DIP switch to "ON"). However, the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function has not been enabled (p9601.7
= p9801.7 = 0).
1010: Pulses enabled although STO is selected or an internal STOP A is present.
1011: Internal fault for the pulse enable in the Power Module.
1030: Feedback signal of the safety switch-off signal paths for the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function
different.
9999: Subsequent response to fault F01611.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 791
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again.

- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- replace Power Module involved.
For fault value = 1005:
- de-activate terminals STO_A/STO_B on the Power Module (set both DIP-switches to "OFF") or enable the "STO via
terminals at the Power Module" function.
For fault value = 1030:
- check the discrepancy time, and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850).
- check the STO terminal at the Power Module (contact problems).
For fault value = 9999:
- carry out diagnostics for fault F01611.
Note:
PM: Power Module
STO: Safe Torque Off

F01611 (A) SI P1 (CU): Defect in a monitoring channel

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on processor 1 has detected a fault in the crosswise data
comparison between the two monitoring channels and has initiated a STOP F.
Fault F01600 (SI P1: STOP A initiated) is output as a consequence of this fault.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Stop request from the other monitoring channel.
1 ... 999:
Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this fault. This number is also displayed in r9795.
2: SI enable safety functions (p9601, p9801). Crosswise data comparison is only carried out for the supported bits.
3: SI F-DI changeover discrepancy time (p9650, p9850).
8: SI PROFIsafe address (p9610, p9810).
9: SI debounce time for STO (p9651, p9851).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired.
Within the time of approx. 5 x p9650, alternatively, the following was defined:
- the signal at F-DI continually changed with time intervals less than or equal to the discrepancy time (p9650/p9850).
- via PROFIsafe, STO (also as subsequent response) was continually selected and deselected with time intervals
less than or equal to the discrepancy time (p9650/p9850).
1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer.
1950: Module temperature outside the permissible temperature range.
1951: Module temperature not plausible.
2000: Status of the STO selection for both monitoring channels different.
2001: Feedback signal of safe pulse suppression for both monitoring channels different.
2002: Status of the delay timer SS1 for both monitoring channels different (status of the timer in p9650/p9850).
2003: Status of the STO terminal for both monitoring channels different.
6000 ... 6166:
PROFIsafe fault values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET).
For these fault values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions.
6000: An internal software error has occurred (only for internal Siemens troubleshooting).
6064 ... 6071: error when evaluating the F parameter. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the
expected values in the PROFIsafe driver.
6064: Destination address and PROFIsafe address are different (F_Dest_Add).
6065: Destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add).
6066: Source address not valid (F_Source_Add).
6067: Watchdog time not valid (F_WD_Time).
6068: Incorrect SIL level (F_SIL).
6069: Incorrect F-CRC length (F_CRC_Length).
6070: Incorrect F parameter version (F_Par_Version).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

792 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

6071: CRC error for the F parameters (CRC1). The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the
value calculated in the PROFIsafe driver.
6072: F parameterization is inconsistent.
6165: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram. The fault may also occur if an
inconsistent or out-of-date PROFIsafe telegram has been received after switching the Control Unit off and on or after
plugging in the PROFIBUS/PROFINET cable.
6166: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
Remedy: For fault values 1 ... 999 described in "Cause":
- check the cross data comparison that resulted in a STOP F.
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
For fault value = 1000:
- check the wiring of the F-DI (contact problems).
- PROFIsafe: Remove contact problems/faults at the PROFIBUS master/PROFINET controller.
- check the discrepancy time, and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850).
For fault value = 1001, 1002:
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
For fault value = 1950, 1951:
- Operate the Control Unit in the permissible temperature range.
- replace Control Unit.
For fault value = 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003:
- check the discrepancy time, and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850).
- check the wiring of the F-DI (contact problems).
- check the causes of the STO selection in r9772. When the SI Motion functions are active (p9501 = 1), STO can also
be selected using these functions.
For fault value = 6000:
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace Control Unit.
For fault value = 6064:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the setting of the PROFIsafe address on processor 1 (p9610) and on processor 2 (p9810).
For fault value = 6065:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the
destination address to be either 0 or FFFF!
For fault value = 6066:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Source_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the
source address to be either 0 or FFFF!
For fault value = 6067:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_WD_Time at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the
watch time to be 0!
For fault value = 6068:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_SIL at the PROFIsafe slave. The SIL level must correspond to
SIL2!
For fault value = 6069:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_CRC_Length at the PROFIsafe slave. The setting of the CRC2
length is 2-byte CRC in the V1 mode and 3-byte CRC in the V2 mode!
For fault value = 6070:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Par_Version at the PROFIsafe slave. The value for the F
parameter version is 0 in the V1 mode and 1 in the V2 mode!
For fault value = 6071:
- check the settings of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at the
PROFIsafe slave and, if required, update.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 793
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

For fault value = 6072:

- check the settings of the values for the F parameters and, if required, correct.
The following combinations are permissible for F parameters F_CRC_Length and F_Par_Version:
F_CRC_Length = 2-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 0
F_CRC_Length = 3-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 1
For fault value = 6165:
- if the fault occurs after powering up or after inserting the PROFIBUS/PROFINET cable, acknowledge the fault.
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary.
- check whether all F parameters of the drive match the F parameters of the F host.
For fault value = 6166:
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary.
- evaluate diagnostic information in the F host.
- check PROFIsafe connection.
- check whether all F parameters of the drive match the F parameters of the F host.
For fault values that are described in "Cause":
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- contact Technical Support.
- replace Control Unit.
Note:
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
STO: Safe Torque Off

N01620 (F, A) SI P1 (CU): Safe Torque Off active

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "Safe Torque Off" (STO) function has been selected on processor 1 using the input terminal and is active.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: Not necessary.
Note:
STO: Safe Torque Off

F01625 SI P1 (CU): Sign-of-life error in safety data

Message class: Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error (12)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on processor 1 has detected an error in the sign-of-life of the safety
data and initiated a STOP A.
- there is a communication error between processor 1 and processor 2 or communication has failed.
- a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again.
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- check whether additional faults are present and if required, perform diagnostics.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

794 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01640 SI P1 (CU): component replacement identified and acknowledgment/save required

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive has identified that a component has been replaced.
It is no longer possible to operate the drive.
When safety functions are active, after a component has been replaced it is necessary to carry out a partial
acceptance test.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1:
It has been identified that the Control Unit has been replaced.
Bit 1 = 1:
It has been identified that the Motor Module/Hydraulic Module has been replaced.
Bit 2 = 1:
It has been identified that the Power Module has been replaced.
Bit 3 = 1:
It has been identified that the Sensor Module channel 1 has been replaced.
Bit 4 = 1:
It has been identified that the Sensor Module channel 2 has been replaced.
Bit 5 = 1:
It has been identified that the sensor channel 1 has been replaced.
Bit 6 = 1:
It has been identified that the sensor channel 2 has been replaced.
Remedy: - acknowledge component replacement (p9702 = 29).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or p0971 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").
- acknowledge fault (e.g. BI: p2103).
Note:
In addition to the fault, diagnostics bits r9776.2 and r9776.3 are set.
See also: r9776 (SI diagnostics)

F01641 SI P1 (CU): component replacement identified and save required

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive has identified that a component has been replaced.
No additional fault response is initiated, therefore operation of the particular drive is not restricted.
When safety functions are active, after a component has been replaced it is necessary to carry out a partial
acceptance test.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1:
It has been identified that the Control Unit has been replaced.
Bit 1 = 1:
It has been identified that the Motor Module/Hydraulic Module has been replaced.
Bit 2 = 1:
It has been identified that the Power Module has been replaced.
Bit 3 = 1:
It has been identified that the Sensor Module channel 1 has been replaced.
Bit 4 = 1:
It has been identified that the Sensor Module channel 2 has been replaced.
Bit 5 = 1:
It has been identified that the sensor channel 1 has been replaced.
Bit 6 = 1:
It has been identified that the sensor channel 2 has been replaced.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 795
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or p0971 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").

- acknowledge fault (e.g. BI: p2103).
See also: r9776 (SI diagnostics)

F01649 SI P1 (CU): Internal software error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on processor 1 has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- re-commission the "Safety Integrated" function and carry out a POWER ON.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace Control Unit.

F01650 SI P1 (CU): Acceptance test required

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on processor 1 requires an acceptance test.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
130: Safety parameters for processor 2 not available.
Note:
This fault value is always output when Safety Integrated is commissioned for the first time.
1000: Reference and actual checksum on processor 1 are not identical (booting).
- at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective.
- safety parameters set offline and loaded into the Control Unit.
2000: Reference and actual checksum on processor 1 are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered on processor 1 (p9799 not equal to r9798).
- when de-activating the safety functions, p9501 was not deleted.
2001: Reference and actual checksum on processor 2 are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered on processor 2 (p9899 not equal to r9898).
- when de-activating the safety functions, p9501 was not deleted.
2002: Enable of safety-related functions between the processor 1 and processor 2 differ (p9601 not equal to p9801).
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
2004: An acceptance test is required because a project with enabled safety-functions has been downloaded.
2005: The Safety logbook has identified that a functional safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test is
required.
2010: Enable of safety-related brake control between the two monitoring channels differ (p9602 not equal to p9802).
2020: Error when saving the safety parameters for the processor 2.
9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred when booting that requires an acceptance
test.
Remedy: For fault value = 130:
- carry out safety commissioning routine.
For fault value = 1000:
- again carry out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
- Using STARTER, activate the safety parameters for the drive involved (change settings, copy parameters, activate
settings).
For fault value = 2000:
- check the safety parameters on processor 1 and adapt the reference checksum (p9799).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

796 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

For fault value = 2001:

- check the safety parameters on processor 2 and adapt the reference checksum (p9899).
For fault value = 2002:
- enable the safety-related functions on processor 1 and check processor 2 (p9601 = p9801).
For fault value = 2003, 2004, 2005:
- carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report.
The fault with fault value 2005 can only be acknowledged when the "STO" function is de-selected.
For fault value = 2010:
- check the enable the safety-related brake control on both monitoring channels (p9602 = p9802).
For fault value = 2020:
- again carry out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
For fault value = 9999:
- carry out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present.
Note:
STO: Safe Torque Off
See also: p9799 (SI setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 1)), p9899 (SI setpoint checksum SI parameters
(processor 2))

F01651 SI P1 (CU): Synchronization safety time slices unsuccessful

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function requires synchronization of the safety time slices between processor 1 and
processor 2. This synchronization routine was unsuccessful.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).

F01653 SI P1 (CU): PROFIBUS/PROFINET configuration error

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: There is a PROFIBUS/PROFINET configuration error for using Safety Integrated monitoring functions with a higher-
level control.
Note:
For safety functions that have been enabled, this fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
200: A safety slot for receive data from the control has not been configured.
210, 220: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the control has an unknown format.
230: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
231: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
250: A PROFIsafe slot is configured in the higher-level F control, however PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive.
300: A safety slot for the send data to the control has not been configured.
310, 320: The configured safety slot for the send data to the control has an unknown format.
330: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
331: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
Remedy: The following generally applies:
- check and, if necessary, correct the PROFIBUS/PROFINET configuration of the safety slot on the master side.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
For fault value = 250:
- remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive.
For fault value = 231, 331:
- configure the PROFIsafe telegram matching the parameterization in the F-PLC.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 797
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

The following applies for p9501.30 = 1 (F-DI via PROFIsafe is enabled):

- PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured.
For p9501.30 = 0 (F-DI not enabled via PROFIsafe), the following applies:
- PROFIsafe telegram 30 must be configured.

A01654 (F) SI P1 (CU): Deviating PROFIsafe configuration

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration of a PROFIsafe telegram in the higher-level control (F-PLC) does not match the parameterization
in the drive.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1:
A PROFIsafe telegram is configured in the higher-level control, however PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive
(p9601.3).
2:
PROFIsafe is parameterized in the drive; however, a PROFIsafe telegram has not been configured in the higher-level
control.
Remedy: The following generally applies:
- check and, if necessary, correct the PROFIsafe configuration in the higher-level control.
For alarm value = 1:
- remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive.
For alarm value = 2:
- configure the PROFIsafe telegram to match the parameterization in the higher-level F-control.

F01655 SI P1 (CU): Align monitoring functions

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on processor 1 and processor 2. No
common set of supported SI monitoring functions was able to be determined.
- there is a communication error between processor 1 and processor 2 or communication has failed.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance

F01656 SI P1 (CU): Parameter processor 2 error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the processor 2 in the non-volatile memory, an error has
occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
129: Safety parameters for processor 2 corrupted.
131: Internal software error
132: Communication errors when uploading or downloading the safety parameters.
255: Internal software error on the Control Unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

798 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - re-commission the safety functions.

- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
For fault value = 129:
- activate the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 95).
- adapt the PROFIsafe address (p9610).
- start the copy function for SI parameters (p9700 = D0 hex).
- acknowledge data change (p9701 = DC hex).
- exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 0).
- save all parameters (p0971 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for the Control Unit.
For fault value = 132:
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance

F01658 SI P1 (CU): PROFIsafe telegram number not suitable

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The PROFIsafe telegram number in p60022 is unsuitable for the enabled safety functions.
Possible causes:
- When PROFIsafe is not enabled (p9601.3 = 0), then it is not permissible to select a PROFIsafe telegram in p60022.
- When PROFIsafe is enabled (p9601.3 = 1), then a PROFIsafe telegram must be selected in p60022.
- When the transfer of the F-DIs via PROFIsafe (p9501.30 = 1) is selected, then telegram 900 must be selected in
p60022 (this only applies to Control Units, which support Extended Functions via PROFIsafe (r9771.4 = 1)).
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p9501, p9601, p60022
Remedy: Select the telegram number that matches the Safety functions that have been enabled.

F01659 SI P1 (CU): Write request for parameter rejected

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on processor 1 was rejected.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The Safety Integrated password is not set.
2: A reset of the drive parameters was selected. However, the Safety Integrated parameters were not reset, as
Safety Integrated is presently enabled.
3: The interconnected STO input is in the simulation mode.
10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported.
14: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communications although this cannot be supported.
15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be
supported.
18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported.
20: An attempt was made to simultaneously enable both the drive-integrated motion monitoring functions via
integrated F-DI and STO via terminals, even though these cannot be supported at the same time.
21: An attempt was made to enable the Safety Integrated functions although these cannot be supported by the
connected Power Module.
26: At a digital input of the Control Unit used by Safety Integrated, an attempt was made to activate the simulation
mode.
28: An attempt was made to enable the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function although this cannot be
supported.
See also: p0970, p3900, r9771, r9871

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 799
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: For fault value = 1:

- set the Safety Integrated password (p9761).
For fault value = 2:
- inhibit Safety Integrated (p9501, p9601) or reset safety parameters (p0970 = 5), then reset the drive parameters
again.
For fault value = 3:
- end the simulation mode for the digital input (p0795).
For fault value = 10, 14, 15, 18:
- check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out
diagnostics for the faults involved.
- use a Control Unit that supports the required function.
For fault value = 20:
- correct the enable setting (p9601).
For fault value = 21:
- use a Power Module that supports the Safety Integrated functions.
For fault value = 26:
- de-activate the simulation mode for the set signal source for STO (p9620) (p0795).
- de-activate the simulation mode (p0795) for the F-DIs used by the Safety Integrated functions (r10049, p10006,
p10009).
- For the set test stop of the F-DO with feedback signal input (p10046, p10047), check the simulation mode, and if
required, de-activate (p0795).
For fault value = 28: use the power unit with the feature "STO via terminals at the Power Module".
Note:
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
STO: Safe Torque Off
See also: p9501, p9601, p9761, p9801

F01660 SI P1 (CU): Safety-related functions not supported

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The Power Module does not support the safety-related functions. Safety Integrated cannot be commissioned.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: - use a Power Module that supports the safety-related functions.

F01661 SI P1 (CU): Simulation of the safety inputs active

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The simulation of the digital inputs of the Control Unit (p0795) is active.
It is not permissible that safety inputs are simulated.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
The displayed bits indicate which digital inputs must not be simulated.
Remedy: - de-activate the simulation of the digital inputs of the Control Unit for the safety inputs (p0795).
- acknowledge fault.

F01662 Error internal communications

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: A module-internal communication error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

800 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).

- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.

F01663 SI P1 (CU): Copying the SI parameters rejected

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: In p9700, the value 87 or 208 is saved or was entered offline.
This is the reason that when booting, an attempt is made to copy Safety Integrated parameters from processor 1 to
processor 2. However, no safety-relevant function has been selected on processor 1 (p9501 = 0, p9601 = 0). This is
the reason that copying is not possible.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9700 (SI copy function)
Remedy: - set p9700 to 0.
- check p9501 and/or p9601 and if required, correct.
- restart the copying function by entering the corresponding value into p9700.

F01665 SI P1 (CU): System is defective

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A system defect was detected before the last boot or in the actual one. The system might have been rebooted
(reset).
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
40 hex:
- For a Power Module with "STO via terminals at the Power Module" (STO_A/STO_B), these terminals are active
(DIP switch to "ON"). However, the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function has not been enabled (p9601.7
= p9801.7 = 0).
200000 hex, 400000 hex, 8000yy hex (yy any):
- fault in the actual booting/operation.
Additional values:
- defect before the last time that the system booted.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
For fault value = 40 hex:
- de-activate terminals STO_A/STO_B on the Power Module (set both DIP-switches to "OFF") or enable the "STO via
terminals at the Power Module" function.
For fault value = 200000 hex, 400000 hex, 8000yy hex (yy any):
- ensure that the Control Unit is connected to the Power Module.
- deselect the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function.

A01666 (F) SI Motion P1 (CU): Steady-state (static) 1 signal at the F-DI for safe acknowledgment
Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A logical 1 signal is present at the F-DI configured in p10006 for more than 10 seconds.
If, at the F-DI no acknowledgment was performed for safe acknowledgment, then a steady-state logical and 0 signal
must be present. This avoids unintentional safety-relevant acknowledgment (or the "Internal Event Acknowledge"
signal) if a wire breaks or one of the two digital inputs bounces.
Remedy: Set the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) to a logical 0 signal (p10006).
Note:
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 801
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A01669 (F, N) SI Motion: Unfavorable combination of motor and power unit

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The combination of motor and power unit used is not suitable for using safe motion monitoring functions without an
encoder.
The ratio between the power unit rated current (r0207[0]) and rated motor current (p0305) is greater than 5.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the motor data set, which caused the fault.
Notice:
If this alarm is not observed, then message C01711 or C30711 – with the value 1041 ... 1044 – can sporadically
occur.
Remedy: Use a suitable power unit with a lower power rating or a motor with a higher power rating.

A01678 (F) SI: Test stop for STO via terminals required at the PM
Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time (p9661) set to monitor the forced checking procedure (test stop) for the "STO via the terminals at the Power
Module" function has been exceeded. A new forced checking procedure is required.
After the next time the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function is deselected, the message is withdrawn
and the monitoring time is reset.
Note:
- this message does not result in a safety stop response.
- the test must be performed within a defined, maximum time interval (p9661, maximum of 9000 hours) in order to
comply with the requirements as laid down in the standards for timely fault detection and the conditions to calculate
the failure rates of safety functions (PFH value). Operation beyond this maximum time period is permissible if it can
be ensured that the forced checking procedure is performed before persons enter the hazardous area and who are
depending on the safety functions correctly functioning.
See also: p9661 (SI forced checking procedure STO via PM terminals time), r9662 (SI forced checking procedure
STO via PM terminals remaining time)
Remedy: Select the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function and then deselect again.
Note:
PM: Power Module
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off

F01680 SI Motion P1 (CU): Checksum error safety monitoring functions

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The actual checksum calculated by the drive and entered in r9728 via the safety-relevant parameters does not match
the reference checksum saved in p9729 at the last machine acceptance.
Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Checksum error for SI parameters for motion monitoring.
1: Checksum error for SI parameters for actual values.
2: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment.
Remedy: - check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct.
- execute the function "Copy RAM to ROM".
- perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified.
- carry out an acceptance test.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

802 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01681 SI Motion P1 (CU): Incorrect parameter value

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter
yyyy = 0:
No information available.
xxxx = 9501:
It is not permissible to enable the function "n < nx hysteresis and filtering" (p9501.16) in conjunction with the function
"Extended functions without selection" (p9601.5).
xxxx = 9522:
The gear stage was set too high.
xxxx = 9547:
Parameter p9547 has been set too low.
xxxx = 9585:
For Safety without encoder and synchronous motor, p9585 must be set to 4.
Remedy: Correct the parameter value.
If xxxx = 9547:
With hysteresis/filtering enabled (p9501.16 = 1), the following applies:
Set parameters p9546/p9346 and p9547/p9347 acc. to the following rule: p9546 >= 2 x p9547; p9346 >= 2 x p9347
If xxxx = 9522 and 9585:
Correct the parameter value.

F01682 SI Motion P1 (CU): Monitoring function not supported

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9501, p9601 or p9801 is not supported in this firmware version.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Monitoring function SLP not supported (p9501.1).
2: Monitoring function SCA not supported (p9501.7 and p9501.8 ... 15).
3: Monitoring function SLS override not supported (p9501.5).
4: Monitoring function external ESR activation not supported (p9501.4).
5: Monitoring function F-DI in PROFIsafe not supported (p9501.30).
6: Enable actual value synchronization not supported (p9501.3).
9: Monitoring function not supported by the firmware or enable bit not used.
11: Only encoderless monitoring functions integrated in the drive are supported.
12: Safety Integrated for SINUMERIK is not supported on this Control Unit.
20: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive are only supported in conjunction with PROFIsafe
(p9501/p9601.1 ... 2 and p9801.1 ... 2).
21: PROFIsafe only supported in conjunction with motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9501/p9601.1
... 2 and p9801.1 ... 2).
23: CU240 does not support monitoring functions requiring an encoder.
25: Drive-integrated motion monitoring functions not supported (p9501, p9601.2).
28: Encoderless monitoring functions are not supported for synchronous motors (p9507.2).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 803
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Deselect the monitoring function involved (p9501, p9601, p9801).

Note:
SCA: Safe Cam
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SLP: Safely Limited Position
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
See also: p9501, r9771

F01683 SI Motion P1 (CU): SLS enable missing

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The safety-relevant function "SLS" is not enabled in p9501 although other safety-relevant monitoring functions are
enabled.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: Enable the function "SLS" (p9501.0) and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
Save the changes before POWER ON (copy from RAM to ROM).
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 1))

F01690 SI Motion: Data save problem for the NVRAM

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: There is not sufficient memory space in the NVRAM on the drive to save parameters r9781 and r9782 (safety
logbook).
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: There is no physical NVRAM available in the drive.
1: There is no longer any free memory space in the NVRAM.
Remedy: For fault value = 0:
- use a Control Unit NVRAM.
For fault value = 1:
- deselect functions that are not required and that take up memory space in the NVRAM.
- contact Technical Support.
Note:
NVRAM: Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (non-volatile read and write memory)

F01692 SI Motion P1 (CU): Parameter value not permitted for encoderless

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the parameter cannot be parameterized with this value.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with the incorrect value.
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 1))
Remedy: Correct the parameter specified in the fault value.
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 1))

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

804 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A01693 (F) SI P1 (CU): Safety parameter setting changed, POWER ON required

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Safety parameters have been changed; these will only take effect following a POWER ON.
Notice:
All changed parameters of the safety motion monitoring functions will only take effect following a POWER ON.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the safety parameter which has changed, necessitating a POWER ON.
Remedy: - execute the function "Copy RAM to ROM".
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).

A01696 (F) SI Motion: Test stop for the motion monitoring functions selected when booting
Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The forced checking procedure (test stop) for the safe motion monitoring functions is already selected when booting,
which is not permissible.
This is the reason that the test is only carried out again after first selecting the forced checking procedure.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source)
Remedy: De-select the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions and then select again.
The signal source to select the forced checking procedure is set via binector input p9705.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated

A01697 (F) SI Motion: Test stop for motion monitoring functions required
Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time set in p9559 for the forced checking procedure (test stop) for the safe motion monitoring functions has been
exceeded. A new forced checking procedure is required.
After the next time the forced checking procedure is selected, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring time is
reset.
Note:
- this message does not result in a safety stop response.
- As the switch-off signal paths are not automatically checked during booting, an alarm is always issued once booting
is complete.
- the test must be performed within a defined, maximum time interval (p9559, maximum of 9000 hours) in order to
comply with the requirements as laid down in the standards for timely fault detection and the conditions to calculate
the failure rates of safety functions (PFH value). Operation beyond this maximum time period is permissible if it can
be ensured that the forced checking procedure is performed before persons enter the hazardous area and who are
depending on the safety functions correctly functioning.
See also: p9559 (SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (processor 1)), r9765 (SI Motion forced checking
procedure remaining time (processor 1))
Remedy: Carry out the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions.
The signal source to select the forced checking procedure is set via binector input p9705.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 805
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A01698 (F) SI P1 (CU): Commissioning mode active

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The commissioning of the "Safety Integrated" function is selected.
This message is withdrawn after the safety functions have been commissioned.
Note:
- this message does not result in a safety stop response.
- in the safety commissioning mode, the "STO" function is internally selected.
See also: p0010 (Drive commissioning parameter filter)
Remedy: Not necessary.

A01699 (F) SI P1 (CU): Test stop for STO required

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time set in p9659 for the forced checking procedure (test stop) for the "STO" function has been exceeded. A new
forced checking procedure is required.
After the next time the "STO" function is de-selected, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset.
Note:
- this message does not result in a safety stop response.
- the test must be performed within a defined, maximum time interval (p9659, maximum of 9000 hours) in order to
comply with the requirements as laid down in the standards for timely fault detection and the conditions to calculate
the failure rates of safety functions (PFH value). Operation beyond this maximum time period is permissible if it can
be ensured that the forced checking procedure is performed before persons enter the hazardous area and who are
depending on the safety functions correctly functioning.
See also: p9659 (SI forced checking procedure timer), r9660 (SI forced checking procedure remaining time)
Remedy: Select STO and then de-select again.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off

C01700 SI Motion P1 (CU): STOP A initiated

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP A (pulses are suppressed via the safety switch-off signal path of processor 1).
Possible causes:
- stop request from processor 2.
- Pulses not suppressed after test stop selection.
- subsequent response to the message C01706 "SI Motion P1: SAM/SBR limit exceeded".
- Subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion P1: Safely Limited Speed exceeded".
- Subsequent response to the message C01701 "SI Motion P1: STOP B initiated".
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault on the monitoring channel of processor 2.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01706.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01701.
- check the switch-off signal path of processor 1.
- replace Power Module.
- replace Control Unit.
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON using "Acknowledge internal event":
Note:
SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

806 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

C01701 SI Motion P1 (CU): STOP B initiated

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE (OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP B (braking along the OFF3 deceleration ramp).
As a result of this fault, after the speed threshold parameterized in p9560 is fallen below, message C01700 "STOP A
initiated" is output.
Possible causes:
- stop request from processor 2.
- Subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion P1: Safely Limited Speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01711 "SI Motion P1: Defect in a monitoring channel".
- subsequent response to the message C01707 "SI Motion P1: tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded".
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault on the monitoring channel of processor 2.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01711.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01707.
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON using "Acknowledge internal event".

C01706 SI Motion P1 (CU): SAM/SBR limit exceeded

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Motion monitoring functions with set acceleration monitoring (SAM, p9506 = 3):
- after initiating STOP B (SS1) the velocity has exceeded the selected tolerance.
Motion monitoring functions with set brake ramp monitoring (SBR, p9506 = 1):
- after initiating STOP B (SS1) or SLS changeover to the lower speed stage, the speed has exceeded the selected
tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C01700 "SI Motion: STOP A initiated".
Remedy: Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the parameterization of the parameter settings of the "SAM" or
the "SBR" function.
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON using "Acknowledge internal event".
Note:
SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring)
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9548, p9581, p9582, p9583

C01711 SI Motion P1 (CU): Defect in a monitoring channel

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When cross-comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between the input data or results
of the monitoring functions and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably functions - i.e.
safe operation is no longer possible.
If at least one monitoring function is active, then message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output.
The message value that resulted in a STOP F is displayed in r9725. The message values described involve the
crosswise data comparison between processor 1 and processor 2.
The following message values may also occur in the following cases if the cause that is explicitly mentioned does not
apply:
- synchronization error between processor 1 and processor 2.
Message value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0 to 999: Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this fault.
0: Stop request from the other monitoring channel.
1: Status image of monitoring functions SLS or SAM/SBR (result list 1) (r9710[0], r9710[1]).
2: Status image of monitoring function n < nx (result list 2) (r9711[0], r9711[1]).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 807
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

3: The position actual value differential (r9713[0/1]) between the two monitoring channels is greater than the
tolerance in p9542/p9342.
4: Error when synchronizing the crosswise data comparison between the two channels.
5: Function enable signals (p9501/p9301) Safety monitoring clock cycle too small (p9500/p9300).
6: Limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0])
7: Limit value for SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1])
8: Limit value for SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2])
9: Limit value for SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3])
31: Position tolerance (p9542/p9342).
42: Shutdown speed, pulse canc. (p9560/p9360)
43: Memory test, stop response (STOP A).
44 ... 57: General
Possible cause 1 (during commissioning or parameter modification)
The tolerance value for the monitoring function is not the same on the two monitoring
channels.
Possible cause 2 (during active operation)
The limit values are based on the actual value (r9713[0/1]). If the safe actual values on the two monitoring channels
do not match, the limit values, which have been set at a defined interval, will also be different (i.e. corresponding to
message value 3). This can be ascertained by checking the safe actual positions.
Permissible deviation between the two monitoring channels: p9542/p9342.
44: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) + limit value SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
45: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) - limit value SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
46: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) + limit value SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
47: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) - limit value SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
48: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) + limit value SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
49: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) - limit value SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
50: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) + limit value SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
51: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) - limit value SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3]) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
54: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms) +
tolerance (p9542/p9342).
55: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
56: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms).
57: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346) * safety monitoring clock cycle (12 ms) -
tolerance (p9542/p9342).
58: Actual stop request.
75: Velocity limit nx (p9546, p9346).
76: Stop response for SLS1 (p9563[0]/p9363[0])
77: Stop response for SLS2 (p9563[1]/p9363[1])
78: Stop response for SLS3 (p9563[2]/p9363[2])
79: Stop response for SLS4 (p9563[3]/p9363[3])
81: Velocity tolerance for SAM (p9548/p9348)
83: Acceptance test timer (p9558/p9358)
230: Filter time constant for n < nx.
231: Hysteresis tolerance for n < nx.
232: Smoothed velocity actual value.
233: Smoothed velocity actual value + limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle + hysteresis tolerance.
234: Smoothed velocity actual value + limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle.
235: Smoothed velocity actual value - limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle.
236: Smoothed velocity actual value - limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle - hysteresis tolerance.
237: SGA n < nx.
238: Speed limit value for SAM (p9568/p9368).
239: Acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383).
240: Inverse value of acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383).
241: Deceleration time for SBR (p9582/p9382).
244: Encoderless actual value sensing filter time (p9587/p9387).
245: Encoderless actual value sensing minimum current (p9588/p9388).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

808 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

246: Voltage tolerance acceleration (p9589/p9389).

247: SDI tolerance (p9564/p9364).
248: SDI positive upper limit (7FFFFFFF hex).
249: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) - SDI tolerance (p9564/p9364).
250: Position actual value (r9713[0/1]) + SDI tolerance (p9564/p9364).
251: SDI negative lower limit (80000001 hex).
252: SDI stop response (p9566/p9366).
253: SDI delay time (p9565/p9365).
254: Setting, behavior during pulse suppression (p9509/p9309).
256: Status image of monitoring functions SOS, SLS, SLP, test stop, SBR, SDI (result list 1 ext) (r9710).
258: Fault tolerance, actual value sensing encoderless (p9585/p9385).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Too many signal changes have occurred at the F-DI.
1001: Initialization error of watchdog timer.
1005: Pulses already suppressed for test stop selection.
1011: Acceptance test status between the monitoring channels differ.
1020: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. cycles.
1041: Current absolute value too low (encoderless)
1042: Current/voltage plausibility error
1043: Too many acceleration phases
1044: Actual current values plausibility error.
6000 ... 6999:
Error in the PROFIsafe control.
For these message values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions.
The significance of the individual message values is described in safety fault F01611.
Message values that have not been listed are only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: r9725 (SI Motion diagnostics STOP F)
Remedy: For message value = 0:
- no error was identified in this monitoring channel. Note the error message of the other monitoring channel (for
processor 2: C30711).
For message value = 3:
Commissioning phase:
- check the setting of the gear parameters on both monitoring channels (p9521/p9321, p9522/p9322).
- check the numerator of the gear ratio to ensure that it takes into account the motor pole pair number (p9522/p9322).
In operation:
- increase the ramp-function generator ramp-up/down time (p1120/p1121), reduce the dynamic performance of the
drive.
For message value = 1 ... 999:
- if the message value is listed under cause: Check the crosswise-compared parameters to which the message value
refers.
- copy the safety parameters.
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
For message value = 1000:
- investigate the signal associated with the F-DI (contact problems).
For message value = 1001:
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
For message value = 1005:
- check the conditions for pulse enable.
For message value = 1011:
- for diagnostics, refer to parameter (r9571).
For message value = 1020:
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- replace Control Unit.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 809
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

For message value = 1041:

- reduce the minimum current (p9588).
For message value = 1042:
- increase the ramp-function generator ramp-up/down time (p1120/p1121).
- check that the current/speed control is set correctly (torque-generating/field-generating current and actual speed
value may not fluctuate).
- reduce the dynamic response of the setpoint value.
- increase the minimum current (p9588).
For message value = 1043:
- increase the voltage tolerance (p9589).
- increase the ramp-function generator ramp-up/down time (p1120/p1121).
- check that the current/speed control is set correctly (torque-generating/field-generating current and actual speed
value may not fluctuate).
- reduce the dynamic response of the setpoint value.
For message value = 6000 ... 6999:
Refer to the description of the message values in safety fault F01611.
This message can be acknowledged using "Acknowledge internal event".

C01712 SI Motion P1 (CU): Defect in F-IO processing

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When cross checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between
parameters or results of the F-IO processing and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer
reliably functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible.
The safety message C01711 with message value 0 is also displayed due to initiation of STOP F.
If at least one monitoring function is active, then safety message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output.
Message value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this message.
1: SI discrepancy monitoring time inputs (p10002, p10102).
2: SI acknowledgment internal event input terminal (p10006, p10106).
3: SI STO input terminal (p10022, p10122).
4: SI SS1 input terminal (p10023, p10123).
7: SI SLS input terminal (p10026, p10126).
13: Different states for static inactive signal sources (p10006, p10022 ... p10026).
14: SI discrepancy monitoring time outputs (p10002, p10102).
15: SI acknowledgment internal event (p10006, p10106).
46: SI digital inputs debounce time (p10017, p10117)
47: Selection F-DI for PROFIsafe (p10050, p10150)
48: Selection F-DI for PROFIsafe (p10050, p10150)
49: SI SDI positive input terminal (p10030, p10130).
50: SI SDI negative input terminal (p10031, p10131).
Remedy: - check parameterization in the parameters involved and correct if required.
- ensure equality by copying the SI data to processor 2 and then carry out an acceptance test.
Note:
This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe.
Note:
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
SS1: Safe Stop 1
STO: Safe Torque Off

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

810 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

C01714 SI Motion P1 (CU): Safely Limited Speed exceeded

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive has moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9531). The drive is stopped as a result of
the configured stop response (p9563).
Message value (r2124, interpret decimal):
100: SLS1 exceeded.
200: SLS2 exceeded.
300: SLS3 exceeded.
400: SLS4 exceeded.
Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control.
- check limits for SLS and if required adapt accordingly (p9531).
This message can be acknowledged using "Acknowledge internal event".
Note:
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
See also: p9531 (SI Motion SLS limit values (processor 1)), p9563 (SI Motion SLS-specific stop response (processor
1))

C01716 SI Motion P1 (CU): Tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The tolerance for the "safe motion direction" function was exceeded. The drive is stopped as a result of the
configured stop response (p9566).
Message value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Tolerance for the "safe motion direction positive" function exceeded.
1: Tolerance for the "safe motion direction negative" function exceeded.
Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control.
- check the tolerance for "SDI" function and if required, adapt (p9564).
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- Deselect the "SDI" function and select again.
- carry out safe acknowledgment via "Acknowledgment internal event".
Note:
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9564 (SI Motion SDI tolerance (processor 1)), p9565 (SI Motion SDI delay time (processor 1)), p9566 (SI
Motion SDI stop response (processor 1))

C01770 SI Motion P1 (CU): Discrepancy error of the fail-safe inputs

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI) show a different state longer than that parameterized in p10002 / p10102.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Discrepancy error for F-DI 0
Bit 1: Discrepancy error for F-DI 1
...
Note:
If several discrepancy errors occur consecutively, then this message is only signaled for the first error that occurs.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 811
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - check the wiring of the F-DI (contact problems).

Note:
This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe.
Discrepancy errors of an F-DI can only be acknowledged if safe acknowledgment was carried out once after the
cause of the error was resolved (p10006, acknowledgment via PROFIsafe, extended message acknowledgment). As
long as safety acknowledgment was not carried out, the corresponding F-DI stays in the safe state internally.
When the "Extended message acknowledgment" function (p9507.0) is active, the following applies:
If the F-DI assigned for STO or SS1 is in a fail-safe state due to a discrepancy error, then when deselecting via this F-
DI, safe acknowledgment can no longer be executed.
For cyclic switching operations at the F-DI, it may be necessary to adapt the discrepancy time to the switching
frequency.
If the period of a cyclic switching pulse corresponds to twice the value of p10002, then the following formulas should
be checked:
- p10002 < (tp / 2) - td (discrepancy time must be less than half the period minus the actual discrepancy time)
- p10002 >= 12 ms (discrepancy time must be no less than 12 ms)
- p10002 > td (discrepancy time must be greater than the switch discrepancy time which may actually apply)
td = possible actual discrepancy time (in ms) that can occur with a switching operation. It must be at least 12 ms.
tp = period for a switching operation in ms.
When debounce p10017 is active, the discrepancy time is directly specified by the debounce time.
If the period of a cyclic switching pulse corresponds to twice the debounce time, then the following formulas should
be checked.
- p10002 < p10017 + 1 ms - td
- p10002 > td
- p10002 >= 12 ms
Example:
For a 110 ms switching frequency and p10017 = 0, the maximum discrepancy time that can be set is as follows:
p10002 <= (110/2 ms) - 12 ms = 43 ms
Rounded off, p10002 <= 36 ms is obtained (as the discrepancy time is rounded off as a multiple of 12 ms).
Note:
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

A01788 SI: Automatic test stop waits for STO deselection via motion monitoring functions
Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic test stop (forced checking procedure) was not able to be carried out after powering up.
Possible causes:
- the STO function is selected via safe motion monitoring functions.
- a safety message is present, that resulted in a STO.
Note:
STO: Safe Torque Off
Remedy: - deselect STO via safe motion monitoring functions.
- remove the cause of the safety messages and acknowledge the messages.
Note:
The automatic test stop is performed after removing the cause.

A01790 SI: Power up stopped due to STO via terminals

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When powering up, the automatic internal self test of the Control Unit was not able to be completed as the pulses
were not enabled. It is possible that the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function is being used, and STO is
selected in at least one hardware switch-off signal path at the Power Module.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

812 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - Deselect STO via the STO terminals at the Power Module (connect STO_A and STO_B to 24 V).
- if required, de-activate the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function via the DIP switch (both DIP switches
set to "OFF").
Note:
- After the cause has been removed, the Control Unit continues to power up.
- While the alarm remains, a possibly existing brake is kept closed.
STO: Safe Torque Off

A01796 (F, N) SI P1 (CU): Wait for communication

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive waits for communication to be established to execute the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Note:
In this state, the pulses are safely suppressed.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
3: Wait for communication to be established to PROFIsafe F-Host.
Remedy: If, after a longer period of time, the message is not automatically withdrawn, the following checks have to be made:
- check any other PROFIsafe communication messages/signals present and evaluate them.
- check the operating state of the F-Host.
- check the communication connection to the F Host.
See also: p9601, p9801

C01798 SI Motion P1 (CU): Test stop for motion monitoring functions running
Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The forced checking procedure (test stop) for the safe motion monitoring functions is currently in progress.
Remedy: Not necessary.
The message is automatically withdrawn when the test stop has been completed.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated

C01799 SI Motion P1 (CU): Acceptance test mode active

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The acceptance test mode is active.
Remedy: Not necessary.
The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode.

A01900 (F) PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
2: Too many PZD data words for input or output. The number of possible PZD is specified by the number of indices in
r2050/p2051.
3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
211: Unknown parameterizing block.
501: PROFIsafe parameter error (e.g. F_dest).
502: PROFIsafe telegram does not match.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 813
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Check the bus configuration on the master and slave sides.
For alarm value = 2:
Check the number of data words for input and output.
For alarm value = 211:
Ensure offline version <= online version.
For alarm value = 501:
Check the set PROFIsafe address (p9610).
For alarm value = 502:
Check the enable of F-DI (p9501.30).

F01910 (N, A) Fieldbus interface setpoint timeout

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The reception of setpoints from the fieldbus interface has been interrupted.
- bus connection interrupted.
- communication partner switched off.
For PROFIBUS:
- PROFIBUS master set into the STOP state.
See also: p2040 (Fieldbus interface monitoring time), p2047 (PROFIBUS additional monitoring time)
Remedy: Ensure bus connection has been established and switch on communication partner.
- if required, adapt p2040.
For PROFIBUS:
- set the PROFIBUS master to the RUN state.
- if the error is repeated, check the set response monitoring in the bus configuration (HW Config).
- slave redundancy: For operation on a Y link, it must be ensured that "DP alarm mode = DPV1" is set in the slave
parameterization.

A01920 (F) PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
Remedy: Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master in the cyclic mode.
Note:
If there is no communication to a higher-level control system, then p2030 should be set = 0 to suppress this
message.
See also: p2030 (Field bus int protocol selection)

A01945 PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher failed

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer, the connection to at least one Publisher has failed.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection failed.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection failed.
Remedy: Check the PROFIBUS cables.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

814 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F01946 (A) PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher aborted

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The connection to at least one Publisher for PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer in cyclic operation has been
aborted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection aborted.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection aborted.
Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables.
- check the state of the Publisher that has the aborted connection.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)

F01951 CU SYNC: Synchronization application clock cycle missing

Message class: Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error (12)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Internal synchronization of the application cycles unsuccessful.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.

A01953 CU SYNC: Synchronization not completed

Message class: Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error (12)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: After the drive system was switched on, synchronization between the basic clock cycle and application clock cycle
was started but was not completed within the selected time tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).

A02050 Trace: Start not possible

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace has already been started.
Remedy: Stop the trace and, if necessary, start again.

A02051 Trace: recording not possible as a result of know-how protection

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: TRACE recording is not possible as at least one signal or trigger signal being used is under know-how protection.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Recorder 0
2: Recorder 1
3: Recorders 0 and 1
Remedy: - Temporarily activate or de-activate know-how protection (p7766).
- include the signal in the OEM exception list (p7763, p7764).
- Where relevant do not record the signal.
See also: p7763 (KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764), p7764 (KHP OEM exception list)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 815
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A02055 Trace: Recording time too short

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace duration is too short.
The minimum is twice the value of the trace clock cycle.
Remedy: Check the selected recording time and, if necessary, adjust.

A02056 Trace: Recording cycle too short

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected recording clock cycle is lower than the basic clock cycle 500µs.
Remedy: Increase the value for the trace cycle.

A02057 Trace: Time slice clock cycle invalid

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
Remedy: Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)

A02058 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for endless trace not valid
Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for the endless trace
Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 2 ms for up to 4 recording channels or >= 4 ms
from 5 recording channels per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)

A02059 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for 2 x 8 recording channels not valid
Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for more than 4 recording channels.
Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 4 ms or reduce the number of recording channels
to 4 per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)

A02060 Trace: Signal to be traced missing

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a signal to be traced was not specified.
- the specified signals are not valid.
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

816 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A02061 Trace: Invalid signal

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal can no longer be traced (recorded).
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.

A02062 Trace: Invalid trigger signal

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a trigger signal was not specified.
- the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal is not a fixed-point signal.
- the specified signal cannot be used as a trigger signal for the trace.
Remedy: Specify a valid trigger signal.

A02063 Trace: Invalid data type

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The specified data type to select a signal using a physical address is invalid.
Remedy: Use a valid data type.

A02070 Trace: Parameter cannot be changed

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace parameter settings cannot be changed when the trace is active.
Remedy: - stop the trace before parameterization.
- if required, start the trace.

A02075 Trace: Pretrigger time too long

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected pretrigger time must be shorter than the trace time.
Remedy: Check the pretrigger time setting and change if necessary.

F02080 Trace: Parameterization deleted due to unit changeover

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The trace parameterization in the drive unit was deleted due to a unit changeover or a change in the reference
parameters.
Remedy: Restart trace.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 817
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A02095 MTrace 0: multiple trace cannot be activated

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following functions or settings are not permissible in conjunction with a multiple trace (trace recorder 0):
- measuring function
- long-time trace
- trigger condition "immediate recording start" (IMMEDIATE)
- trigger condition "start with function generator" (FG_START)
Remedy: - if required, de-activate the multiple trace (p4840[0] = 0).
- de-activate function or setting that is not permissible

A02096 MTrace 0: cannot be saved

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to save the measurement results of a multiple trace on the memory card (trace recorder 0).
A multiple trace is not started or is canceled.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Memory card cannot be accessed.
- card is not inserted or is blocked by a mounted USB drive.
3: data save operation to slow.
- a second trace has been completed before the measurement results of the first trace were able to be saved.
- writing the measurement result files to the card is blocked by the parameter save.
4: Data save operation canceled.
- for instance, the file required for the data save operation was not able to be found.
Remedy: - insert or remove the memory card.
- use a larger memory card.
- configure a longer trace time or use an endless trace.
- avoid saving parameters while a multiple trace is running.
- check whether other functions are presently accessing measurement result files.

A02097 MTrace 1: multiple trace cannot be activated

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following functions or settings are not permissible in conjunction with a multiple trace (trace recorder 1):
- measuring function
- long-time trace
- trigger condition "immediate recording start" (IMMEDIATE)
- trigger condition "start with function generator" (FG_START)
Remedy: - if required, de-activate the multiple trace (p4840[1] = 0).
- de-activate function or setting that is not permissible

A02098 MTrace 1: cannot be saved

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to save the measurement results of a multiple trace on the memory card (trace recorder 1).
A multiple trace is not started or is canceled.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Memory card cannot be accessed.
- card is not inserted or is blocked by a mounted USB drive.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

818 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

3: data save operation to slow.

- a second trace has been completed before the measurement results of the first trace were able to be saved.
- writing the measurement result files to the card is blocked by the parameter save.
4: Data save operation canceled.
- for instance, the file required for the data save operation was not able to be found.
Remedy: - insert or remove the memory card.
- use a larger memory card.
- configure a longer trace time or use an endless trace.
- avoid saving parameters while a multiple trace is running.
- check whether other functions are presently accessing measurement result files.

A02099 Trace: Insufficient Control Unit memory

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory space still available on the Control Unit is no longer sufficient for the trace function.
Remedy: Reduce the memory required, e.g. as follows:
- reduce the trace time.
- increase the trace clock cycle.
- reduce the number of signals to be traced.

A02150 OA: Application cannot be loaded

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The system was not able to load an OA application.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
16:
The interface version in the DCB user library is not compatible to the DCC standard library that has been loaded.
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
For alarm value = 16:
Load a compatible DCB user library (compatible to the interface of the DCC standard library).
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
DCB: Drive Control Block
DCC: Drive Control Chart

F02151 (A) OA: Internal software error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal software error has occurred within an OA application.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace the Control Unit.
Note:
OA: Open Architecture

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 819
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F02152 (A) OA: Insufficient memory

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets, OA
applications, blocks, etc).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications,
blocks, etc).
- use an additional Control Unit.
Note:
OA: Open Architecture

F03000 NVRAM fault on action

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault occurred during execution of action p7770 = 1 or 2 for the NVRAM data.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = fault cause, xx = application ID
yy = 1:
The action p7770 = 1 is not supported by this version if Drive Control Chart (DCC) is activated for the drive object
concerned.
yy = 2:
The data length of the specified application is not the same in the NVRAM and the backup.
yy = 3:
The data checksum in p7774 is not correct.
yy = 4:
No data available to load.
Remedy: - Perform the remedy according to the results of the troubleshooting.
- if necessary, start the action again.

F03001 NVRAM checksum incorrect

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error occurred when evaluating the non-volatile data (NVRAM) on the Control Unit.
The NVRAM data affected was deleted.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.

F03505 (N, A) Analog input wire breakage

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The wire-break monitoring for an analog input has responded.
The input value of the analog input has undershot the threshold value parameterized in p0761[0...3].
p0756[0]: analog input 0 (only CU240D-2)
p0756[1]: analog input 1 (only CU240D-2)
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yxxx dec
y = analog input (0 = analog input 0 (AI 0), 1 = analog input 1 (AI 1))
xxx = component number (p0151)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

820 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Note:
For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active:
p0756[0...1] = 1 (2 ... 10 V with monitoring)
Remedy: - check the connection to the signal source for interruptions.
- check the magnitude of the injected current - it is possible that the infed signal is too low.
Note:
The input current measured by the analog input can be read in r0752[x].

A03510 (F, N) Calibration data not plausible

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: During booting, the calibration data for the analog inputs is read and checked with respect to plausibility.
At least one calibration data point was determined to be invalid.
Remedy: - switch off/switch on the power supply for the Control Unit.
Note:
If it reoccurs, then replace the module.
In principle, operation could continue.
The analog channel involved possibly does not achieve the specified accuracy.

A05000 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached. The response is set using
p0290.
If the temperature of the heat sink increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30004 is initiated.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?

A05001 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature depletion layer chip

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for overtemperature of the power semiconductor in the AC converter has been reached.
Note:
- the response is set using p0290.
- if the depletion layer temperature increases by an additional 15 K, then fault F30025 is triggered.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
- pulse frequency too high?
See also: r0037 (Power unit temperatures), p0290 (Power unit overload response)

A05002 (N) Power unit: Air intake overtemperature

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For chassis power units, the following applies:
The alarm threshold for the air intake overtemperature has been reached. For air-cooled power units, the threshold is
42 °C (hysteresis 2 K). The response is set using p0290.
If the air intake temperature increases by an additional 13 K, then fault F30035 is output.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 821
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Check the following:

- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.

A05004 (N) Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for the overtemperature of the rectifier has been reached. The response is set using p0290.
If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30037 is triggered.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
- has a phase of the line supply failed?
- is an arm of the supply (incoming) rectifier defective?

A05006 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (blocksize
power units only).
Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated.
See also: r0037 (Power unit temperatures)
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot.
Note:
If the alarm does not disappear automatically and the temperature continues to rise, this can result in fault F30024.
See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response)

A05065 (F, N) Voltage measured values not plausible

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The voltage measurement does not supply any plausible values and is not used.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 1: Phase U
Bit 2: Phase V
Bit 3: Phase W
Remedy: The following parameterization must be made in order to de-activate the alarm:
- De-activate voltage measurement (p0247.0 = 0).
- De-activate flying restart with voltage measurement (p0247.5 = 0) and de-activate fast flying restart (p1780.11 = 0).

F06310 (A) Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized

Message class: Network fault (2)
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The measured DC voltage lies outside the tolerance range after precharging has been completed.
Permissible range:
1.16 * p0210 < r0070 < 1.6 * p0210
Note:
The fault can only be acknowledged when the drive is switched off.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

822 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
- check the line supply voltage.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)

A06921 (N) Braking resistor phase unsymmetry

Message class: Braking Module faulted (14)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - the three resistors of the braking chopper are not symmetrical.
- DC link voltage oscillations caused by fluctuating loads of the connected drives.
Remedy: - check the feeder cables to the braking resistors.
- if required, increase the value for detecting dissymmetry (p1364).

F06922 Braking resistor phase failure

Message class: Braking Module faulted (14)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A phase failure for the brake resistor was detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
11: Phase U
12: Phase V
13: Phase W
See also: p3235 (Phase failure signal motor monitoring time)
Remedy: Check the feeder cables to the braking resistors.

F07011 Drive: Motor overtemperature

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: KTY84/PT1000:
The motor temperature has exceeded the fault threshold (p0605) or the timer (p0606) after the alarm threshold was
exceeded (p0604) has expired. The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active. The alarm is withdrawn if the
response threshold for wire breakage or sensor not connected is exceeded (R > 2120 Ohm).
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened and the timer (p0606) has expired.
The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
Possible causes:
- motor is overloaded.
- motor ambient temperature too high.
- wire breakage or sensor not connected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
200:
The motor temperature model 1 (I2t) signals an overtemperature (p0612.0 = 1, p0611 > 0, p0615 reached).
See also: p0604, p0605, p0606, p0612, p0613, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628
Remedy: - reduce the motor load.
- check the ambient temperature and the motor ventilation.
- check the wiring and the connection of the PTC or bimetallic NC contact.
See also: p0604, p0605, p0606, p0612, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628

A07012 (N) Drive: Motor temperature model 1/3 overtemperature

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor temperature model 1/3 identified that the alarm threshold was exceeded.
Hysteresis:2K.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 823
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):

200:
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t): Temperature too high (p0605).
300:
Motor temperature model 3: Temperature too high (p5398).
See also: r0034 (Motor utilization thermal), p0605 (Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value),
p0611 (I2t motor model thermal time constant), p0612 (Mot_temp_mod activation), p0613 (Mot_temp_mod 1/3
ambient temperature)
Remedy: - check the motor load and if required, reduce.
- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check activation of the motor temperature model (p0612).
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t):
- check the thermal time constant (p0611).
- check the alarm threshold (p0605).
Motor temperature model 3:
- check the motor type.
- check the alarm threshold (p5398).
- check the model parameters.
See also: r0034 (Motor utilization thermal), p0605 (Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value),
p0611 (I2t motor model thermal time constant), p0612 (Mot_temp_mod activation), r5397 (Mot_temp_mod 3 ambient
temperature image p0613)

A07014 (N) Drive: Motor temperature model configuration alarm

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A fault has occurred in the configuration of the motor temperature model.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1:
All motor temperature models: It is not possible to save the model temperature
See also: p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)
Remedy: - set the response for motor overtemperature to "Alarm and fault, no reduction of I_max" (p0610 = 2).
See also: p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)

A07015 Drive: Motor temperature sensor alarm

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0601.
With the fault, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault F07016 is
output; however, at the earliest, 50 ms after alarm A07015.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 2120 Ohm, PT1000: R > 2120 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm).
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0601).
See also: r0035 (Motor temperature), p0601 (Motor temperature sensor type), p0607 (Temperature sensor fault
timer)

F07016 Drive: Motor temperature sensor fault

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0601.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

824 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 2120 Ohm, PT1000: R > 2120 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm).
Note:
If alarm A07015 is present, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault
F07016 is output; however, at the earliest, 50 ms after alarm A07015.
See also: p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0601).
- induction motors: De-activate temperature sensor fault (p0607 = 0).
See also: r0035 (Motor temperature), p0601 (Motor temperature sensor type), p0607 (Temperature sensor fault
timer)

F07080 Drive: Incorrect control parameter

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The closed-loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly (e.g. p0356 = L_spread = 0).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the parameter number involved.
See also: p0310, p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p0640, p1082, p1300
Remedy: Modify the parameter indicated in the fault value (r0949) (e.g. p0640 = current limit > 0).
See also: p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0640, p1082

F07082 Macro: Execution not possible

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The macro cannot be executed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccccbbaa hex:
cccc = preliminary parameter number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause
Fault causes for the trigger parameter itself:
19: Called file is not valid for the trigger parameter.
20: Called file is not valid for parameter 15.
21: Called file is not valid for parameter 700.
22: Called file is not valid for parameter 1000.
23: Called file is not valid for parameter 1500.
24: Data type of a TAG is incorrect (e.g. Index, number or bit is not U16).
Fault causes for the parameters to be set:
25: Error level has an undefined value.
26: Mode has an undefined value.
27: A value was entered as string in the tag value that is not "DEFAULT".
31: Entered drive object type unknown.
32: A device was not able to be found for the determined drive object number.
34: A trigger parameter was recursively called.
35: It is not permissible to write to the parameter via macro.
36: Check, writing to a parameter unsuccessful, parameter can only be read, not available, incorrect data type, value
range or assignment incorrect.
37: Source parameter for a BICO interconnection was not able to be determined.
38: An index was set for a non-indexed (or CDS-dependent) parameter.
39: No index was set for an indexed parameter.
41: A bit operation is only permissible for parameters with the parameter format DISPLAY_BIN.
42: A value not equal to 0 or 1 was set for a BitOperation.
43: Reading the parameter to be changed by the BitOperation was unsuccessful.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 825
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

51: Factory setting for DEVICE may only be executed on the DEVICE.
61: The setting of a value was unsuccessful.
Remedy: - check the parameter involved.
- check the macro file and BICO interconnection.
See also: p0015, p1000, p1500

F07083 Macro: ACX file not found

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The ACX file (macro) to be executed was not able to be found in the appropriate directory.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with which the execution was started.
See also: p0015, p1000, p1500
Remedy: - check whether the file is saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card.

F07084 Macro: Condition for WaitUntil not fulfilled

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The WaitUntil condition set in the macro was not fulfilled in a certain number of attempts.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number for which the condition was set.
Remedy: Check and correct the conditions for the WaitUntil loop.

F07086 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to reference value change
Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A reference parameter was changed in the system. This resulted in the fact that for the parameters involved, the
selected value was not able to be written in the per unit notation.
The values of the parameters were set to the corresponding violated minimum limit/maximum limit or to the factory
setting.
Possible causes:
- the steady-state minimum limit/maximum limit or that defined in the application was violated.
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Diagnostics parameter to display the parameters that were not able to be re-calculated.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter value and if required correct.

F07088 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to units changeover

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A changeover of units was initiated. This resulted in a violation of a parameter limit
Possible causes for the violation of a parameter limit:
- When rounding off a parameter corresponding to its decimal places, the steady-state minimum limit or maximum
limit was violated.
- inaccuracies for the data type "FloatingPoint".
In these cases, when the minimum limit is violated then the parameter value is rounded up and when the maximum
limited is violated the parameter value is rounded down.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Diagnostics parameter r9451 to display all parameters whose value had to be adapted.
See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0505 (Selecting the system of units), p0595 (Technological unit selection)
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
See also: r9451 (Units changeover adapted parameters)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

826 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A07089 Changing over units: Function module activation is blocked because the units have
been changed over
Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An attempt was made to activate a function module. This is not permissible if the units have already been changed
over.
See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0505 (Selecting the system of units)
Remedy: Restore units that have been changed over to the factory setting.

A07092 Drive: moment of inertia estimator still not ready

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The moment of inertia estimator still has no valid values.
The acceleration cannot be calculated.
The moment of inertia estimator is ready, if the frictional values (p1563, p1564) as well as the moment of inertia value
(p1493) have been determined (r1407.26 = 1).
Remedy: Repeat the operation when the moment of inertia estimator is ready (r1407.26 = 1).

A07094 General parameter limit violation

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: As a result of the violation of a parameter limit, the parameter value was automatically corrected.
Minimum limit violated --> parameter is set to the minimum value.
Maximum limit violated --> parameter is set to the maximum value.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number, whose value had to be adapted.
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.

A07200 Drive: Master control ON command present

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The ON/OFF1 command is present (no 0 signal).
The command is either influenced via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control.
Remedy: Switch the signal via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control to 0.

F07220 (N, A) Drive: Master control by PLC missing

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The "master control by PLC" signal was missing in operation.
- interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" is incorrect (p0854).
- the higher-level control has withdrawn the "master control by PLC" signal.
- data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive) was interrupted.
Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" (p0854).
- check the "master control by PLC" signal and, if required, switch in.
- check the data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive).
Note:
If the drive should continue to operate after withdrawing "master control by PLC" then fault response must be
parameterized to NONE or the message type should be parameterized as alarm.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 827
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07300 (A) Drive: Line contactor feedback signal missing

Message class: Auxiliary unit faulted (20)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor dropped out during operation
- the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is switched off.
Remedy: - check the setting of p0860.
- check the feedback circuit from the line contactor.
- increase the monitoring time in p0861.
See also: p0860 (Line contactor feedback signal), p0861 (Line contactor monitoring time)

F07320 Drive: Automatic restart interrupted

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - the specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been completely used up because within the monitoring time
(p1213) the faults were not able to be acknowledged. The number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented at
each new start attempt.
- the monitoring time for the power unit has expired (p0857).
- when exiting commissioning or at the end of the motor identification routine or the speed controller optimization, the
drive unit is not automatically switched on again.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214.
- increase the delay time in p1212 and/or the monitoring time in p1213.
- either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit (p0857).
- reduce the delay time to reset the start counter (p1213[1]) so that fewer faults are registered in the time interval.

A07321 Drive: Automatic restart active

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic restart (AR) is active. When the line supply returns and/or the causes of the existing faults are
removed the drive is automatically restarted. The pulses are enabled and the motor starts to rotate.
For p1210 = 26, restarting is realized with the delayed setting of the ON command.
Remedy: - the automatic restart (AR) should, if required, be inhibited (p1210 = 0).
- an automatic restart can be directly interrupted by withdrawing the switch-on command (BI: p0840).
- for p1210 = 26: by withdrawing the OFF2- / OFF3 command.

F07330 Flying restart: Measured search current too low

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During a flying restart, it was identified that the search current reached is too low.
It is possible that the motor is not connected.
Remedy: Check the motor feeder cables.

F07331 Flying restart: Function not supported

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: It is not possible to power up with the motor rotating (no flying restart).
In the following cases, the "flying restart" function is not supported:
PMSM: operation with U/f characteristic and sensorless vector control.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

828 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Note:
PMSM: permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Remedy: De-activate the "flying restart" function (p1200 = 0).

A07400 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller active

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated because the upper switch-in threshold has been exceeded (r1242,
r1282).
The ramp-down times are automatically increased in order to maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) within the
permissible limits. There is a system deviation between the setpoint and actual speeds.
When the DC link voltage controller is switched out (disabled), this is the reason that the ramp-function generator
output is set to the speed actual value.
See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control), p1240 (Vdc controller configuration (vector control)), p1280 (Vdc
controller configuration (U/f))
Remedy: If the controller is not to intervene:
- increase the ramp-down times.
- switch off the Vdc_max controller (p1240 = 0 for vector control, p1280 = 0 for U/f control).
If the ramp-down times are not to be changed:
- use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit.

A07401 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller de-activated

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Vdc_max controller can no longer maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) below the limit value (r1242, r1282) and
was therefore switched out (disabled).
- the line supply voltage is permanently higher than specified for the power unit.
- the motor is permanently in the regenerative mode as a result of a load that is driving the motor.
Remedy: - check whether the input voltage is within the permissible range (if required, increase the value in p0210).
- check whether the load duty cycle and load limits are within the permissible limits.

A07402 (N) Drive: DC link voltage minimum controller active

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated as the lower switch-in threshold has been undershot (r1246,
r1286).
The kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC link. The drive is therefore braked.
See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control), p1240 (Vdc controller configuration (vector control)), p1280 (Vdc
controller configuration (U/f))
Remedy: The alarm disappears when power supply returns.

F07404 Drive: DC link voltage monitoring Vdc_max

Message class: DC-link overvoltage (4)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring of the DC link voltage p1284 has responded (only U/f control).
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage.
- check the braking module.
- adapt the device supply voltage (p0210).
- adapt the DC link voltage monitoring (p1284).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 829
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07405 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering minimum speed fallen below

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During kinetic buffering the speed fell below minimum speed (p1257 or p1297 for vector drives with U/f control) and
the line supply did not return.
Remedy: Check the speed threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1257, p1297).
See also: p1257 (Vdc_min controller speed threshold), p1297 (Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f))

F07406 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum buffer time (p1255 and p1295 for vector drives with U/f control) has been exceeded without the line
supply having returned.
Remedy: Check the time threshold for Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1255, p1295).
See also: p1255 (Vdc_min controller time threshold), p1295 (Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f))

A07409 (N) Drive: U/f control, current limiting controller active

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The current limiting controller of the U/f control was activated because the current limit was exceeded.
Remedy: The alarm is automatically withdrawn after one of the following measures:
- increase current limit (p0640).
- reduce the load.
- slow down the ramp up to the setpoint speed.

F07410 Drive: Current controller output limited

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The condition "I_act = 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit" is present and can be caused by the following:
- motor not connected or motor contactor open.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- no DC link voltage present.
- power unit defective.
- the "flying restart" function is not activated.
Remedy: - connect the motor or check the motor contactor.
- check the motor parameterization and the connection type (star-delta).
- check the DC link voltage (r0070).
- check the power unit.
- activate the "flying restart" function (p1200).

F07411 Drive: Flux setpoint not reached when building up excitation

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When quick magnetizing is configured (p1401.6 = 1) the specified flux setpoint is not reached although 90% of the
maximum current is specified.
- incorrect motor data.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- the current limit has been set too low for the motor.
- induction motor (encoderless, open-loop controlled) in I2t limiting.
- power unit is too small.
- the magnetizing time is too short.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

830 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - correct the motor data. Perform motor data identification and rotating measurement.
- check the motor configuration.
- correct the current limits (p0640).
- reduce the induction motor load.
- if necessary, use a larger power unit.
- check motor supply cable.
- check power unit.
- increase p0346.

A07416 Drive: Flux controller configuration

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration of the flux control (p1401) is contradictory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
1: Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for soft starting (p1401.0).
2: Quick magnetizing for flux build-up control (p1401.2).
3: Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for Rs identification after restart (p0621 = 2).
Remedy: For fault cause = 1:
- Shut down soft start (p1401.0 = 0).
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
For fault cause = 2:
- De-energize flux build-up control (p1401.2 = 0).
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
For fault cause = 3:
- Re-parameterize Rs identification (p0621 = 0, 1)
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).

F07426 (A) Technology controller actual value limited

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual value for the technology controller, interconnected via connector input p2264, has reached a limit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: upper limit reached.
2: lower limit reached.
Remedy: - adapt the limits to the signal level (p2267, p2268).
- check the actual value normalization (p0595, p0596).
See also: p0595 (Technological unit selection), p0596 (Technological unit reference quantity), p2264 (Technology
controller actual value), p2267 (Technology controller upper limit actual value), p2268 (Technology controller lower
limit actual value)

A07428 (N) Technology controller parameterizing error

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The technology controller has a parameterizing error.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1:
The upper output limit in p2291 is set lower than the lower output limit in p2292.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 831
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: For alarm value = 1:

Set the output limit in p2291 higher than in p2292.
See also: p2291 (Technology controller maximum limiting), p2292 (Technology controller minimum limiting)

F07435 (N) Drive: Setting the ramp-function generator for sensorless vector control
Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During operation with sensorless vector control (r1407.1) the ramp-function generator was stopped (p1141). An
internal setting command of the ramp-function generator output caused the set setpoint speed to be frozen.
Remedy: - de-activate the holding command for the ramp-function generator (p1141).
- suppress the fault (p2101, p2119). This is necessary if the ramp-function generator is held using jogging and the
speed setpoint is simultaneously inhibited (r0898.6).

A07444 PID autotuning is activated

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Automatic setting of the PID controller parameters (PID autotuning) was activated (p2350).
See also: p2350 (Enable PID autotuning)
Remedy: Not necessary.
This alarm is automatically withdrawn after the PID autotuning has been completed.

F07445 PID autotuning canceled

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The PID autotuning was canceled as a result of an error.
Remedy: - increase the offset.
- check system configuration.

A07530 Drive: Drive Data Set DDS not present

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected drive data set is not available (p0837 > p0180). The drive data set was not changed over.
See also: p0180 (Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS)), p0820 (Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0), p0821 (Drive Data
Set selection DDS bit 1), r0837 (Drive Data Set DDS selected)
Remedy: - select the existing drive data set.
- set up additional drive data sets.

A07531 Drive: Command Data Set CDS not present

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected command data set is not available (p0836 > p0170). The command data set was not changed over.
See also: p0810 (Command data set selection CDS bit 0), p0811 (Command data set selection CDS bit 1), r0836
(Command Data Set CDS selected)
Remedy: - select the existing command data set.
- set up additional command data sets.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

832 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07563 (A) Drive encoder: XIST1_ERW configuration incorrect

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An incorrect configuration was identified for the "Absolute position for incremental encoder" function.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault cause:
1 (= 01 hex):
The "Absolute value for incremental encoder" function is not supported (r0459.13 = 0).
Note regarding the message value:
The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124):
yyxx dec: yy = fault cause, xx = encoder data set
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- upgrade the Sensor Module firmware version.
- check the mode (p4652 = 1, 3 requires the property r0459.13 = 1).

F07754 Drive: Incorrect shutoff valve configuration

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An incorrect shutoff valve configuration was detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
100:
Enable Safety Integrated (p9601/p9801), but p0218.0 = 0 (shutoff valve not available).
101:
The manipulated variable inhibit time is set less than the wait time to evaluate the feedback signal contacts when
switching on the shutoff valve (p0230 < p9625[0]/p9825[0]).
102:
The manipulated variable inhibit time is set less than the wait time to evaluate the feedback signal contacts when
switching off the shutoff valve (p0230 < p9625[1]/p9825[1]).
Remedy: For fault value = 100:
Check the enable of Safety Integrated and the shutoff valve (p9601/p9801, p0218.0).
For fault value = 101:
Set the manipulated variable inhibit time higher than the wait time to evaluate the feedback signal contacts when
switching on the shutoff valve (p0230 > p9625[0]/p9825[0]).
For fault value = 102:
Set the manipulated variable inhibit time higher than the wait time to evaluate the feedback signal contacts when
switching off the shutoff valve (p0230 > p9625[1]/p9825[1]).
See also: p0230 (Drive filter type motor side)

F07800 Drive: No power unit present

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit parameters cannot be read or no parameters are stored in the power unit.
Note:
This fault also occurs if an incorrect topology was selected in the commissioning software and this parameterization
is then downloaded to the Control Unit.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual)
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- check the power unit and replace if necessary.
- check the Control Unit, and if required replace it.
- after correcting the topology, the parameters must be again downloaded using the commissioning software.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 833
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07801 Drive: Motor overcurrent

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The permissible motor limit current was exceeded.
- effective current limit set too low.
- current controller not correctly set.
- U/f operation: Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high.
- U/f operation: Short-circuit in the motor cable or ground fault.
- U/f operation: Motor current does not match current of power unit.
- Switch to rotating motor without flying restart function (p1200).
Note:
Limit current = 2 x minimum (p0640, 4 x p0305 x p0306) >= 2 x p0305 x p0306
Remedy: - check the current limits (p0640).
- vector control: Check the current controller (p1715, p1717).
- U/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 ... p1346).
- increase the up ramp (p1120) or reduce the load.
- check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
- check the motor for the star-delta configuration and rating plate parameterization.
- check the power unit and motor combination.
- Choose "flying restart" function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor.

F07802 Drive: Infeed or power unit not ready

Message class: Infeed faulted (13)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After an internal switch-on command, the infeed or drive does not signal ready.
- monitoring time is too short.
- DC link voltage is not present.
- associated infeed or drive of the signaling component is defective.
- supply voltage incorrectly set.
Remedy: - increase the monitoring time (p0857).
- ensure that there is a DC link voltage. Check the DC link busbar. Enable the infeed.
- replace the associated infeed or drive of the signaling component.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time)

A07805 (N) Drive: Power unit overload I2t

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for I2t overload (p0294) of the power unit exceeded.
The response parameterized in p0290 becomes active.
See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response)
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the assignment of the motor and power unit rated currents.

F07806 Drive: Regenerative power limit exceeded (F3E)

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For blocksize power units, types PM250 and PM260, the regenerative rated power r0206[2] was exceeded for more
than 10 s.
See also: r0206 (Rated power unit power), p1531 (Power limit regenerative)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

834 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - increase the down ramp.

- reduce the driving load.
- use a power unit with a higher regenerative feedback capability.
- for vector control, the regenerative power limit in p1531 can be reduced so that the fault is no longer triggered.

F07807 Drive: Short-circuit/ground fault detected

Message class: Ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit detected (7)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A phase-phase short-circuit or ground fault was detected at the motor-side output terminals of the converter.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Short-circuit, phase UV.
2: Short-circuit, phase UW.
3: Short-circuit, phase VW.
4: Ground fault with overcurrent.
1yxxx: Ground fault with current in phase U detected (y = pulse number, xxxx = component of the current in phase V
in per mille).
2yxxx: Ground fault with current in phase V detected (y = pulse number, xxxx = component of the current in phase U
in per mille).
Note:
Also when interchanging the line and motor cables is identified as a motor-side short circuit.
The ground fault test only functions when the motor is stationary.
Connecting to a motor that is either not de-energized or partially de-energized is possibly detected as ground fault.
Remedy: - check the motor-side converter connection for a phase-phase short-circuit.
- rule-out interchanged line and motor cables.
- check for a ground fault.
For a ground fault the following applies:
- do not enable the pulses when connecting to a rotating motor without the "Flying restart" function activated (p1200).
- increase the de-energization time (p0347).
- increase pulse suppression delay time (p1228) to ensure standstill.
- if required, de-activate the monitoring (p1901).

F07810 Drive: Power unit EEPROM without rated data

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: No rated data are stored in the power unit EEPROM.
See also: p0205, r0206, r0207, r0208, r0209
Remedy: Replace the power unit or inform Siemens Customer Service.

A07850 (F) External alarm 1

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The condition for "External alarm 1" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External alarm 1" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2112.
See also: p2112 (External alarm 1)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 835
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A07851 (F) External alarm 2

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The condition for "External alarm 2" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External alarm 2" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2116.
See also: p2116 (External alarm 2)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.

A07852 (F) External alarm 3

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The condition for "External alarm 3" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External alarm 3" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2117.
See also: p2117 (External alarm 3)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.

F07860 (A) External fault 1

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The condition for "External fault 1" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External fault 1" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2106.
See also: p2106 (External fault 1)
Remedy: - eliminate the causes of this fault.
- acknowledge fault.

F07861 (A) External fault 2

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The condition for "External fault 2" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External fault 2" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2107.
See also: p2107 (External fault 2)
Remedy: - eliminate the causes of this fault.
- acknowledge fault.

F07862 (A) External fault 3

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The condition for "External fault 3" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External fault 3" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via the following parameters.
- AND logic operation, binector input p2108, p3111, p3112.
- switch-on delay p3110.
See also: p2108 (External fault 3), p3110 (External fault 3 switch-on delay), p3111 (External fault 3 enable), p3112
(External fault 3 enable negated)
Remedy: - eliminate the causes of this fault.
- acknowledge fault.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

836 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A07891 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan blocked

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is blocked.
It is possible that the blocking torque threshold (p2168) is set too low (e.g. heavy duty starting).
See also: p2165 (Load monitoring stall monitoring upper threshold), p2168 (Load monitoring stall monitoring torque
threshold), p2181 (Load monitoring response), p2193 (Load monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - check whether the pump/fan is blocked, and if blocked, then resolve the problem.
- check that the fan can freely move, and if necessary, resolve the problem.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load (p2165, p2168)..

A07892 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan no load condition

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is operating under no load conditions.
The pump is running in the dry state (no medium to be pumped) – or the fan has a broken belt.
It is possible that the detection torque threshold is too low (p2191).
See also: p2181 (Load monitoring response), p2191 (Load monitoring torque threshold no load), p2193 (Load
monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - for a pump, check the medium being pumped, and if required, provide the medium.
- for a fan, check the belt, and if required, replace.
- if necessary, increase the detection torque threshold (p2191).

A07893 Drive: Load monitoring pump leakage

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump (p2193 = 4).
The monitoring function detects a leak in the pump circuit.
In this case, the pump requires a torque that is lower than in normal operation to pump the reduced quantity.
See also: p2181, p2182, p2183, p2184, p2186, p2188, p2190, p2193
Remedy: - remove the leak in the pump circuit.
- for a nuisance trip, reduce the torque thresholds of the leakage characteristic (p2186, p2188, p2190).

F07894 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan blocked

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is blocked.
It is possible that the blocking torque threshold (p2168) is set too low (e.g. heavy duty starting).
See also: p2165 (Load monitoring stall monitoring upper threshold), p2168 (Load monitoring stall monitoring torque
threshold), p2181 (Load monitoring response), p2193 (Load monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - check whether the pump/fan is blocked, and if blocked, then resolve the problem.
- check that the fan can freely move, and if necessary, resolve the problem.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load (p2165, p2168)..

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 837
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07895 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan no load condition

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is operating under no load conditions.
The pump is running in the dry state (no medium to be pumped) – or the fan has a broken belt.
It is possible that the detection torque threshold is too low (p2191).
See also: p2181 (Load monitoring response), p2191 (Load monitoring torque threshold no load), p2193 (Load
monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - for a pump, check the medium being pumped, and if required, provide the medium.
- for a fan, check the belt, and if required, replace.
- if necessary, increase the detection torque threshold (p2191).

F07896 Drive: Load monitoring pump leakage

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump (p2193 = 4).
The monitoring function detects a leak in the pump circuit.
In this case, the pump requires a torque that is lower than in normal operation to pump the reduced quantity.
See also: p2181, p2182, p2183, p2184, p2186, p2188, p2190, p2193
Remedy: - remove the leak in the pump circuit.
- for a nuisance trip, reduce the torque thresholds of the leakage characteristic (p2186, p2188, p2190).

F07900 (N, A) Drive: Motor blocked

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Motor has been operating at the torque limit longer than the time specified in p2177 and below the speed threshold
set in p2175.
This signal can also be triggered if the speed is oscillating and the speed controller output repeatedly goes to its limit.
It may also be the case that thermal monitoring of the power unit reduces the current limit (see p0290), thereby
causing the motor to decelerate.
See also: p2175 (Motor blocked speed threshold), p2177 (Motor blocked delay time)
Remedy: - check that the motor can freely move.
- check the effective torque limit (r1538, r1539).
- check the parameter, message "Motor blocked" and if required, correct (p2175, p2177).
- check the direction of rotation enable signals for a flying restart of the motor (p1110, p1111).
- for U/f control: check the current limits and acceleration times (p0640, p1120).

F07901 Drive: Motor overspeed

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible speed was either positively or negatively exceeded.
The maximum permissible positive speed is formed as follows: Minimum (p1082, CI: p1085) + p2162
The maximum permissible negative speed is formed as follows: Maximum (-p1082, CI: 1088) - p2162
Remedy: The following applies for a positive direction of rotation:
- check r1084 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1085 and p2162.
The following applies for a negative direction of rotation:
- check r1087 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1088 and p2162.
Activate pre-control of the speed limiting controller (p1401.7 = 1).
Increase the hysteresis for the overspeed signal p2162. This upper limit is dependent upon the maximum motor
speed p0322 and the maximum speed p1082 of the setpoint channel.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

838 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07902 (N, A) Drive: Motor stalled

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The system has identified that the motor has stalled for a time longer than is set in p2178.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Reserved.
2: Stall detection using r1408.12 (p1745) or via (r0084 ... r0083).
See also: p2178 (Motor stalled delay time)
Remedy: Steps should always be taken to ensure that both motor data identification and the rotating measurement were
carried out (see p1900, r3925).
- check whether the drive stalls solely due to the load in controlled mode or when the speed setpoint is still zero. If
yes, then increase the current setpoint using p1610.
- if the motor excitation time (p0346) was significantly reduced and the drive stalls when it is switched on and run
immediately, p0346 should be increased again.
- check whether a line phase failure is affecting power unit PM230, PM250, PM260.
- check whether the motor cables are disconnected (see A07929).
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1745) or the delay time (p2178) can be increased.
- check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too low, then the drive cannot be magnetized.
- if the fault occurs with fault value 2 when the motor accelerates very quickly to the field weakening range, the
deviation between the flux setpoint and flux actual value can be reduced and, in turn, the message prevented, by
reducing p1596 or p1553.

A07903 Drive: Motor speed deviation

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The absolute value of the speed difference from the setpoint (p2151) and the speed actual value (r2169) exceeds the
tolerance threshold (p2163) longer than tolerated (p2164, p2166).
The alarm is only enabled for p2149.0 = 1.
Possible causes:
- the load torque is greater than the torque setpoint.
- when accelerating, the torque/current/power limit is reached. If the limits are not sufficient, then it is possible that the
drive has been dimensioned too small.
- for closed-loop torque control, the speed setpoint does not track the speed actual value.
- for active Vdc controller.
For U/f control, the overload condition is detected as the I_max controller is active.
See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - increase p2163 and/or p2166.
- increase the torque/current/power limits.
- for closed-loop torque control: The speed setpoint should track the speed actual value.
- de-activate alarm with p2149.0 = 0.

A07910 (N) Drive: Motor overtemperature

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: KTY84/PT1000 or no sensor:
The measured motor temperature or the temperature of the motor temperature model 2 has exceeded the alarm
threshold (p0604). The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
11: No output current reduction.
12: Output current reduction active.
See also: p0604 (Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor alarm threshold), p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 839
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - check the motor load.

- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check KTY84/PT1000.
- check overtemperatures of the motor temperature model 2 (p0626 ... p0628).
See also: p0612 (Mot_temp_mod activation), p0625 (Motor ambient temperature during commissioning), p0626
(Motor overtemperature, stator core), p0627 (Motor overtemperature, stator winding), p0628 (Motor overtemperature
rotor)

A07920 Drive: Torque/speed too low

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too low).
See also: p2181 (Load monitoring response)
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.

A07921 Drive: Torque/speed too high

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too high).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.

A07922 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.

F07923 Drive: Torque/speed too low

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too low).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

840 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07924 Drive: Torque/speed too high

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too high).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.

F07925 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.

A07926 Drive: Envelope curve parameter invalid

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Invalid parameter values were entered for the envelope characteristic of the load monitoring.
The following rules apply for the speed thresholds:
p2182 < p2183 < p2184
The following rules apply for the torque thresholds:
p2185 > p2186
p2187 > p2188
p2189 > p2190
Load monitoring configuration and response must match.
It is not permissible that the individual load torque monitoring areas overlap.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the parameter with the invalid value.
The load torque monitoring has not been activated as long as the alarm is active.
Remedy: - set the parameters for the load monitoring according to the applicable rules.
- if necessary, de-activate the load monitoring (p2181 = 0, p2193 = 0).

A07927 DC braking active

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor is braked with DC current. DC braking is active.
1)
A message with response DCBRK is active. The motor is braked with the braking current set in p1232 for the
duration set in in p1233. If the standstill threshold p1226 is undershot, then braking is prematurely canceled.
2)
DC braking has been activated at binector input p1230 with the DC braking set (p1230 = 4). Braking current p1232 is
injected until this binector input becomes inactive.
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears once DC braking has been executed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 841
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A07929 (F) Drive: No motor detected

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The absolute current value is so small after enabling the inverter pulses that no motor is detected.
Note:
- for vector control and induction motor, fault F07902 follows this alarm.
See also: p2179 (Output load identification current limit)
Remedy: - check the motor feeder cables.
- reduce the threshold value (p2179), e.g. for synchronous motors.
- check the voltage boost of the U/f control (p1310).
- carry out a standstill measurement to set the stator resistance (p0350).

F07936 Drive: load failure

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring has detected a load failure.
Remedy: - check the sensor.
- if necessary, de-activate the load monitoring (p2193).
See also: p2193 (Load monitoring configuration), p3232 (Load monitoring failure detection)

F07950 (A) Motor parameter incorrect

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The motor parameters were incorrectly entered while commissioning (e.g. p0300 = 0, no motor)
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number involved.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Remedy: Compare the motor data with the rating plate data and if required, correct.

A07960 Drive: Incorrect friction characteristic

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The friction characteristic is incorrect.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1538:
The friction torque is greater than the maximum from the upper effective torque limit (p1538) and zero. This is the
reason that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value.
1539:
The friction torque is less than the minimum from the lower effective torque limit (p1539) and zero. This is the reason
that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value.
3820 ... 3829:
Incorrect parameter number. The speeds entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond
to the following condition:
0.0 < p3820 < p3821 < ... < p3829 <= p0322 or p1082, if p0322 = 0
Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero.
3830 ... 3839:
Incorrect parameter number. The torques entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond
to the following condition:
0 <= p3830, p3831 ... p3839 <= p0333
Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero.
See also: r3840 (Friction characteristic status word)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

842 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Fulfill the conditions for the friction characteristic.

For alarm value = 1538:
Check the upper effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range).
For alarm value = 1539:
Check the lower effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range).
For alarm value = 3820 ... 3839:
Fulfill the conditions to set the parameters of the friction characteristic.
If the motor data (e.g. the maximum speed p0322) are changed during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 3), then the
technological limits and threshold values, dependent on this, must be re-calculated by selecting p0340= 5).

A07961 Drive: Friction characteristic record activated

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic friction characteristic record is activated.
The friction characteristic is recorded at the next switch-on command.
When plotting the friction characteristic, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977).
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the friction characteristic record has been successfully completed or the
record is de-activated (p3845 = 0).

F07963 Drive: Friction characteristic record interrupted

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The conditions to record the friction characteristic are not fulfilled.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0046: Missing enable signals (r0046).
1082: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (p1082).
1084: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1084, p1083, p1085).
1087: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1087, p1086, p1088).
1110: Friction characteristic record, negative direction selected (p3845) and negative direction inhibited (p1110).
1111: Friction characteristic record, positive direction selected (p3845) and positive direction inhibited (p1111).
1198: Friction characteristic record selected (p3845 > 0) and negative (p1110) and positive directions (p1111)
inhibited (r1198).
1300: The control mode (p1300) has not been set to closed-loop speed control.
1755: For encoderless closed-loop control (p1300 = 20), the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820) is less
than or equal to the changeover speed, open-loop controlled operation (p1755).
1910: Motor data identification activated.
1960: Speed controller optimization activated.
3820 ... 3829: speed (p382x) cannot be approached.
3840: Friction characteristic incorrect.
3845: Friction characteristic record de-selected.
Remedy: Fulfill the conditions to record the friction characteristic.
For fault value = 0046:
- establish missing enable signals.
For fault value = 1082, 1084, 1087:
- Select the highest speed value to be approached (p3829) less than or equal to the maximum speed (p1082, r1084,
r1087).
- Re-calculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5).
For fault value = 1110:
- Select the friction characteristic record, positive direction (p3845).
For fault value = 1111:
- Select the friction characteristic record, negative direction (p3845).
For fault value = 1198:
- Enable the permitted direction (p1110, p1111, r1198).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 843
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

For fault value = 1300:

- set the control mode (p1300) on the closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21).
For fault value = 1755:
- For encoderless closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) select the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820)
greater than the changeover speed of open-loop controlled operation (p1755).
- Re-calculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5).
For fault value = 1910:
- Exit the motor data identification routine (p1910).
For fault value = 1960:
- Exit the speed controller optimization routine (p1960).
For fault value 3820 ... 3829:
- check the load at speed p382x.
- check the speed signal (r0063) for oscillation at speed p382x. Check the settings of the speed controller if
applicable.
For fault value = 3840:
- Make the friction characteristic error-free (p3820 ... p3829, p3830 ... p3839, p3840).
For fault value = 3845:
- Activate the friction characteristic record (p3845).

F07967 Drive: Incorrect pole position identification

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the pole position identification routine.
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.

F07968 Drive: Lq-Ld measurement incorrect

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the Lq-Ld measurement.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
Remedy: For fault value = 10:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
De-activate technique (p1909).
For fault value = 12:
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
De-activate technique (p1909).
For fault value = 16:
De-activate technique (p1909).
For fault value = 17:
Repeat technique.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

844 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07969 Drive: Incorrect pole position identification

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the pole position identification routine.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Current controller limited
2: Motor shaft locked.
10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
11: Stage 2: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
13: Stage 2: The maximum current was exceeded.
14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
18: First harmonic too low.
20: Pole position identification requested with the motor shaft rotating and activated "flying restart" function.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Replace the power unit involved.
For fault value = 2:
Bring the motor into a no-load condition.
For fault value = 10:
When selecting p1980 = 4: Increase the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Increase the value for p0329.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
For fault value = 11:
Increase the value for p0329.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
For fault value = 12:
When selecting p1980 = 4: Reduce the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Reduce the value for p0329.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
For fault value = 13:
Reduce the value for p0329.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
For fault value = 14:
Increase the value for p0329.
For fault value = 15:
Increase the value for p0325.
Motor not sufficiently anisotropic, change the technique (p1980 = 1, 10).
For fault value = 16:
Change the technique (p1980).
For fault value = 17:
Repeat technique.
For fault value = 18:
Increase the value for p0329 (if required, first set p0323).
Saturation not sufficient, change the technique (p1980 = 10).
For fault value = 20:
Before carrying out a pole position identification routine ensure that the motor shaft is absolutely stationary (zero
speed).

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 845
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A07980 Drive: Rotating measurement activated

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The rotating measurement (automatic speed controller optimization) is activated.
The rotating measurement is carried out at the next switch-on command.
Note:
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971).
See also: p1960 (Rotating measurement selection)
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the speed controller optimization has been successfully completed or for
the setting p1900 = 0.

A07981 Drive: Enable signals for the rotating measurement missing

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The rotating measurement cannot be started due to missing enable signals.
For p1959.13 = 1, the following applies:
- enable signals for the ramp-function generator missing (see p1140 ... p1142).
- enable signals for the speed controller integrator missing (see p1476, p1477).
Remedy: - acknowledge faults that are present.
- establish missing enable signals.
See also: r0002 (Drive operating display), r0046 (Missing enable sig)

F07983 Drive: Rotating measurement saturation characteristic

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The rotor flux did not reach a steady-state condition.
3: The adaptation circuit did not reach a steady-state condition.
4: The adaptation circuit was not enabled.
5: Field weakening active.
6: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
7: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
8: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
9: Several values of the determined saturation characteristic are not plausible.
10: Saturation characteristic could not be sensibly determined because load torque too high.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (p0341, p0342).
De-select rotating measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, re-calculate the speed controller p0340
= 4 and repeat the measurement.
For fault value = 1 ... 2:
- increase the measuring speed (p1961) and repeat the measurement.
For fault value = 1 ... 4:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
For fault value = 5:
- the speed setpoint (p1961) is too high. Reduce the speed.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

846 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

For fault value = 6:

- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or minimum limiting (p1080).
For fault value = 7:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
For fault value = 8:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
For fault value = 9, 10:
- the measurement was carried out at an operating point where the load torque is too high. Select a more suitable
operating point, either by changing the speed setpoint (p1961) or by reducing the load torque. The load torque may
not be varied while making measurements.
Note:
The saturation characteristic identification routine can be disabled using p1959.1.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)

F07984 Drive: Speed controller optimization, moment of inertia

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the minimum limiting is active.
6: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
7: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the maximum limiting is active.
8: The torque difference after the speed setpoint step is too low in order to be able to still reliably identify the moment
of inertia.
9: Too few data to be able to reliably identify the moment of inertia.
10: After the setpoint step, the speed either changed too little or in the incorrect direction.
11: The identified moment of inertia is not plausible. The measured moment of inertia is less than the 0.1x or greater
than 500x the preset moment of inertia of the motor p0341.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
For fault value = 2, 5:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
For fault value = 3, 6:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
For fault value = 4, 7:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
For fault value = 8:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (refer to p0341, p0342). De-select rotating
measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, re-calculate the speed controller p0340 = 4 and repeat the
measurement.
For fault value = 9:
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change, re-calculate (p0340 = 3 or 4).
For fault value = 10:
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
For fault value = 11:
- reduce the moment of inertia of the motor p0341 (e.g., factor of 0.2) or increase (e.g. factor of 5) and repeat the
measurement.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 847
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Note:
The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959.2.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)

F07985 Drive: Speed controller optimization (oscillation test)

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the vibration test.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: Torque limits too low for a torque step.
6: No suitable speed controller setting was found.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
For fault value = 2:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
For fault value = 3:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
For fault value = 4:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
For fault value = 5:
- increase the torque limits (e.g. p1520, p1521).
For fault value = 6:
- reduce the dynamic factor (p1967).
- disable the vibration test (p1959.4 = 0) and repeat the rotating measurement.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)

F07986 Drive: Rotating measurement ramp-function generator

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During the rotating measurements, problems with the ramp-function generator occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The positive and negative directions are inhibited.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
Enable the direction (p1110 or p1111).

F07988 Drive: Rotating measurement, no configuration selected

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When configuring the rotating measurement (p1959), no function was selected.
Remedy: Select at least one function for automatic optimization of the speed controller (p1959).
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

848 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F07990 Drive: Incorrect motor data identification

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the identification routine.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Current limit value reached.
2: Identified stator resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
3: Identified rotor resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
4: Identified stator reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 500 % of Zn.
5: Identified magnetizing reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 500 % of Zn.
6: Identified rotor time constant lies outside the expected range 10 ms ... 5 s.
7: Identified total leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 4 ... 50 % of Zn.
8: Identified stator leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
9: Identified rotor leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
10: Motor has been incorrectly connected.
11: Motor shaft rotates.
12: Ground fault detected.
15: Pulse inhibit occurred during motor data identification.
20: Identified threshold voltage of the semiconductor devices lies outside the expected range 0 ... 10 V.
30: Current controller in voltage limiting.
40: At least one identification contains errors. The identified parameters are not saved to prevent inconsistencies.
Note:
Percentage values are referred to the rated motor impedance:
Zn = Vmot.nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom
Remedy: For fault value = 1 ... 40:
- check whether motor data have been correctly entered in p0300, p0304 ... p0311.
- is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the power unit? The ratio of the
power unit to the rated motor current should not be less than 0.5 and not be greater than 4.
- check connection type (star-delta).
For fault value = 4, 7:
- check whether the inductance in p0233 is correctly set.
- check whether motor has been correctly connected (star-delta).
For fault value = 11 in addition:
- De-activate oscillation monitoring (p1909.7 = 1).
For fault value = 12:
- check the power cable connections.
- check the motor.
- check the CT.

A07991 (N) Drive: Motor data identification activated

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor data identification routine is activated.
The motor data identification routine is carried out at the next switch-on command.
If rotating measurement is selected (see p1900, p1960), it will not be possible to save the parameter assignment.
Once motor data identification has been completed or de-activated, the option to save the parameter assignment will
be made available again.
See also: p1910 (Motor data identification selection)
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after the motor data identification routine has been successfully completed or for
the setting p1900 = 0.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 849
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A07994 (F, N) Drive: motor data identification not performed

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "vector control" mode has been selected and a motor data identification has still not been performed.
The alarm is initiated when changing the drive data set (see r0051) in the following cases:
- vector control is parameterized in the actual drive data set (p1300 >= 20).
and
- motor data identification has still not been performed in the actual drive data set (see r3925).
Note:
For SINAMICS G120, a check is made and an alarm is output also when exiting commissioning and when the system
powers up.
Remedy: - Perform motor data identification (see p1900).
- if required, parameterize "U/f control" (p1300 < 20).
- switch over to a drive data set, in which the conditions do not apply.

F08010 (N, A) CU: Analog-to-digital converter

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The analog-to-digital converter on the Control Unit has not supplied any converted data.
Remedy: - check the power supply.
- replace Control Unit.

F08501 (N, A) PROFINET: Setpoint timeout

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The reception of setpoints from PROFINET has been interrupted.
- bus connection interrupted.
- controller switched off.
- controller set into the STOP state.
Remedy: - Restore the bus connection and set the controller to RUN.
- if the error is repeated, check the update time set in the bus configuration (HW Config).

F08502 (A) PROFINET: Monitoring time sign-of-life expired

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the sign-of-life counter has expired.
The connection to the PROFINET interface was interrupted.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- contact Technical Support.

A08511 (F) PROFINET: Receive configuration data invalid

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive unit did not accept the receive configuration data.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Return value of the receive configuration data check.
2: Too many PZD data words for input or output. The number of possible PZD is specified by the number of indices in
r2050/p2051.
3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

850 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

501: PROFIsafe parameter error (e.g. F_dest).

502: PROFIsafe telegram does not match.
Remedy: Check the receive configuration data.
For alarm value = 2:
- check the number of data words for output and input.
For alarm value = 501:
- check the set PROFIsafe address (p9610).
For alarm value = 502:
Check the enable of F-DI (p9501.30).

A08526 (F) PROFINET: No cyclic connection

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: There is no connection to a PROFINET controller.
Remedy: Establish the cyclic connection and activate the controller with cyclic operation.
Check the parameters "Name of Station" and "IP of Station" (r61000, r61001).

A08564 PN/COMM BOARD: syntax error in the configuration file

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Communication Board Ethernet. The saved
configuration file has not been loaded.
Remedy: - correct the PROFINET interface configuration (p8920 and following) and activate (p8925 = 2).
- reinitialize the station (e.g. using the STARTER commissioning software)
Note:
The configuration is not applied until the next POWER ON!
See also: p8925 (PN interface configuration)

A08565 PROFINET: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8925) for the PROFINET interface. The
currently set configuration has not been activated.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: general consistency error
1: error in the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask or standard gateway)
2: Error in the station names.
3: DHCP was not able to be activated, as a cyclic PROFINET connection already exists.
4: a cyclic PROFINET connection is not possible as DHCP is activated.
See also: p8920 (PN Name of Station), p8921 (PN IP address), p8922 (PN Def Gateway), p8923 (PN Subnet Mask)
Remedy: - check the required interface configuration (p8920 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8925).
or
- Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software).
See also: p8925 (PN interface configuration)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 851
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F08700 (A) CAN: Communications error

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF3 (NONE, OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A CAN communications error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The error counter for the send telegrams has exceeded the BUS OFF value 255. The bus disables the CAN
controller.
- bus cable short circuit.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
2: The master no longer interrogated the CAN node status longer than for its "life time". The "life time" is obtained
from the "guard time" (p8604[0]) multiplied by the "life time factor" (p8604[1]).
- bus cable interrupted.
- bus cable not connected.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
- master fault.
Note:
The fault response can be set as required using p8641.
Remedy: - check the bus cable
- check the baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing (p8623).
- check the master.
The CAN controller must be manually restarted with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the fault has been resolved!

F08701 CAN: NMT state change

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational" or after "stopped".
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational".
2: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "stopped".
Note:
In the NMT state "pre-operational", process data cannot be transferred and in the NMT state "stopped", no process
data and no service data can be transferred.
Remedy: Not necessary.
Acknowledge the fault and continue operation.

F08702 (A) CAN: RPDO Timeout

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: OFF3 (NONE, OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time of the CANopen RPDO telegram has expired because the bus connection was either interrupted
or the CANopen Master was switched-off.
Remedy: - check the bus cable
- check the master.
- if required, increase the monitoring time (p8699).

A08751 (N) CAN: Telegram loss

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The CAN controller has lost a receive message (telegram).
Remedy: Reduce the cycle times of the receive messages.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

852 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A08752 CAN: Error counter for error passive exceeded

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error counter for the send or receive telegrams has exceeded the value 127.
Remedy: - check the bus cable
- set a higher baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).

A08753 CAN: Message buffer overflow

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A message buffer overflow.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Non-cyclic send buffer (SDO response buffer) overflow.
2: Non-cyclic receive buffer (SDO receive buffer) overflow.
3: Cyclic send buffer (PDO send buffer) overflow.
Remedy: - check the bus cable.
- set a higher baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).
For alarm value = 2:
- reduce the cycle times of the SDO receive messages.
- SDO request from master only after SDO feedback for previous SDO request.

A08754 CAN: Incorrect communications mode

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the "operational" mode, an attempt was made to change parameters p8700 ... p8737.
Remedy: Change to the "pre-operational" or "stopped" mode.

A08755 CAN: Obj cannot be mapped

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The CANopen object is not provided for the Process Data Object (PDO) Mapping.
Remedy: Use a CANopen object intended for the PDO mapping or enter 0.
The following objects can be mapped in the Receive Process Data Object (RPDO) or Transmit Process Data Object
(TPDO):
- RPDO: 6040 hex, 6060 hex, 60FF hex, 6071 hex; 5800 hex - 580F hex; 5820 hex - 5827 hex
- TPDO: 6041 hex, 6061 hex, 6063 hex, 6069 hex, 606B hex, 606C hex, 6074 hex; 5810 hex - 581F hex; 5830 hex -
5837 hex
Only sub-index 0 of the specified objects can be mapped.
Note:
As long as A08755 is present, the COB-ID cannot be set to valid.

A08756 CAN: Number of mapped bytes exceeded

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The number of bytes of the mapped objects exceeds the telegram size for net data. A max. of 8 bytes is permissible.
Remedy: Map fewer objects or objects with a smaller data type.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 853
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

A08757 CAN: Set COB-ID invalid

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For online operation, the appropriate COB-ID must be set invalid before mapping.
Example:
Mapping for RPDO 1 should be changed (p8710[0]).
--> set p8700[0] = C00006E0 hex (invalid COB-ID)
--> set p8710[0] as required.
--> p8700[0] enter a valid COB-ID
Remedy: Set the COB-ID to invalid.

A08759 CAN: PDO COB-ID already available

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An existing PDO COB-ID was allocated.
Remedy: Select another PDO COB-ID.

A08760 CAN: maximum size of the IF PZD exceeded

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The maximum size of the IF PZD was exceeded.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: error for IF PZD receive.
2: error for IF PZD send.
Note:
IF: interface
Remedy: Map fewer process data in PDO.
Apply one of the following options to delete the alarm:
- POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- carry out a warm restart (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2).
- execute CANopen NMT command reset node.
- change CANopen NMT state.
- delete alarm buffer [0...7] (p2111 = 0).

A08800 PROFIenergy energy-saving mode active

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The PROFIenergy energy-saving mode is active
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Mode ID of the active PROFIenergy energy-saving mode.
See also: r5600 (Pe energy-saving mode ID)
Remedy: The alarm is automatically withdrawn when the energy-saving mode is exited.
Note:
The energy-saving mode is exited after the following events:
- the PROFIenergy command end_pause is received from the higher-level control.
- the higher-level control has changed into the STOP operating state.
- the PROFINET connection to the higher-level control has been disconnected.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

854 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F13009 Licensing OA application not licensed

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one OA application which is under license does not have a license.
Note:
Refer to r4955 and p4955 for information about the installed OA applications.
Remedy: - enter and activate the license key for OA applications under license (p9920, p9921).
- if necessary, de-activate unlicensed OA applications (p4956).

F13100 Know-how protection: Copy protection error

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The know-how protection with copy protection for the memory card is active.
An error has occurred when checking the memory card.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: A memory card is not inserted.
1: An invalid memory card is inserted (not SIEMENS).
2: An invalid memory card is inserted.
3: The memory card is being used in another Control Unit.
12: An invalid memory card is inserted (OEM input incorrect, p7769).
13: The memory card is being used in another Control Unit (OEM input incorrect, p7759).
See also: p7765 (KHP configuration)
Remedy: For fault value = 0, 1:
- insert the correct memory card and carry out POWER ON.
For fault value = 2, 3, 12, 13:
- contact the responsible OEM.
- De-activate copy protection (p7765) and acknowledge the fault (p3981).
- De-activate know-how protection (p7766 ... p7768) and acknowledge the fault (p3981).
Note:
In general, the copy protection can only be changed when know-how protection is de-activated.
KHP: Know-How Protection
See also: p3981 (Faults acknowledge drive object), p7765 (KHP configuration)

F13101 Know-how protection: Copy protection cannot be activated

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error occurred when attempting to activate the copy protection for the memory card.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: A memory card is not inserted.
1: An invalid memory card is inserted (not SIEMENS).
Note:
KHP: Know-How Protection
Remedy: - insert a valid memory card.
- Try to activate copy protection again (p7765).
See also: p7765 (KHP configuration)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 855
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F13102 Know-how protection: Consistency error of the protected data

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was identified when checking the consistency of the protected files. As a consequence, the project on the
memory card cannot be run.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = object number, xxxx = fault cause
xxxx = 1:
A file has a checksum error.
xxxx = 2:
The files are not consistent with one another.
xxxx = 3:
The project files, which were loaded into the file system via load (download from the memory card), are inconsistent.
Note:
KHP: Know-How Protection
Remedy: - Replace the project on the memory card or replace project files for download from the memory card.
- Restore the factory setting and download again.

F30001 Power unit: Overcurrent

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an overcurrent condition.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- U/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- U/f operation: rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit.
- High discharge and post-charging current for line supply voltage interruptions.
- High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- short-circuit currents at switch-on due to the missing line reactor.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power unit defective.
- line phase interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Bit 3: Overcurrent in the DC link.
Note:
Fault value = 0 means that the phase with overcurrent is not recognized.
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta).
- U/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- U/f operation: Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit.
- check the line supply quality.
- reduce motor load.
- correct connection of line reactor.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
- check the line supply phases.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

856 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

F30002 Power unit: DC link voltage overvoltage

Message class: DC-link overvoltage (4)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an overvoltage condition in the DC link.
- motor regenerates too much energy.
- line supply voltage too high.
- line phase interrupted.
- DC-link voltage control switched off.
- dynamic response of DC-link voltage controller excessive or insufficient.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V].
Remedy: -increase the ramp-down time (p1121).
- set the rounding times (p1130, p1136). This is particularly recommended in U/f operation to relieve the DC link
voltage controller with rapid ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator.
- Activate the DC link voltage controller (p1240, p1280).
- adapt the dynamic response of the DC-link voltage controller (p1243, p1247, p1283, p1287).
- check the line supply and DC link voltage. set p0210 as low as possible (also see A07401, p1294 = 0).
- check and correct the phase assignment at the power unit.
- check the line supply phases.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage), p1240 (Vdc controller configuration (vector control))

F30003 Power unit: DC link voltage undervoltage

Message class: Infeed faulted (13)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an undervoltage condition in the DC link.
- line supply failure
- line supply voltage below the permissible value.
- line phase interrupted.
Note:
The monitoring threshold for the DC link undervoltage is the minimum of the following values:
- for a calculation, refer to p0210.
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage
- check the line supply phases.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)

F30004 Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 857
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A05000 has been undershot.
See also: p1800 (Pulse frequency setpoint)

F30005 Power unit: Overload I2t

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit was overloaded (r0036 = 100 %).
- the permissible rated power unit current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
I2t [100 % = 16384].
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the motor and power unit rated currents.
- reduce the current limit (p0640).
- during operation with U/f characteristic: reduce the integral time of the current limiting controller (p1341).
See also: r0036 (Power unit overload I2t), r0206 (Rated power unit power), p0307 (Rated motor power)

F30011 Power unit: Line phase failure in main circuit

Message class: Network fault (2)
Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At the power unit, the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value.
Possible causes:
- a line phase has failed.
- the 3 line phases are inadmissibly unsymmetrical.
- the capacitance of the DC link capacitor forms a resonance frequency with the line inductance and the reactor
integrated in the power unit.
- the fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured.
- a motor phase has failed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the main circuit fuses.
- check whether a single-phase load is distorting the line voltages.
- Detune the resonant frequency with the line inductance by using an upstream line reactor.
- Dampen the resonant frequency with the line inductance by switching over the DC link voltage compensation in the
software (see p1810) – or increase the smoothing (see p1806). However, this can have a negative impact on the
torque ripple at the motor output.
- check the motor feeder cables.

F30012 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink wire breakage

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The connection to a heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

858 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.

F30013 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink short-circuit

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is short-circuited.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.

F30015 (N, A) Power unit: Phase failure motor cable

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A phase failure in the motor feeder cable was detected.
The signal can also be output in the following cases:
- the motor is correctly connected, but the drive has stalled in U/f control. In this case, a current of 0 A is possibly
measured in one phase due to asymmetry of the currents.
- the motor is correctly connected, however the closed-speed control is instable and therefore an oscillating torque is
generated.
Note:
Chassis power units do not feature phase failure monitoring.
Remedy: - check the motor feeder cables.
- increase the ramp-up or ramp-down time (p1120) if the drive has stalled in U/f control.
- check the speed controller settings.

A30016 (N) Power unit: Load supply switched out

Message class: Network fault (2)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage is too low.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V].
Remedy: Under certain circumstances, the AC line supply is not switched on.

F30017 Power unit: Hardware current limit has responded too often
Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The hardware current limitation in the relevant phase (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has responded too often. The
number of times the limit has been exceeded depends on the design and type of power unit.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529 859
4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

- motor load too high

- power unit defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Phase U
Bit 1: Phase V
Bit 2: Phase W
Remedy: - check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.

F30021 Power unit: Ground fault

Message class: Ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit detected (7)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power has detected a ground fault.
Possible causes:
- ground fault in the power cables.
- ground fault at the motor.
- CT defective.
- when the brake closes, this causes the hardware DC current monitoring to respond.
- short-circuit at the braking resistor.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0:
- the hardware DC current monitoring has responded.
- short-circuit at the braking resistor.
> 0:
Absolute value, summation current [32767 = 271 % rated current].
Remedy: - check the power cable connections.
- check the motor.
- check the CT.
- check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire is possibly broken).
- check the braking resistor.
See also: p0287 (Ground fault monitoring thresholds)

F30022 Power unit: Monitoring U_ce

Message class: Ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit detected (7)
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: In the power unit, the monitoring of the collector-emitter voltage (U_ce) of the semiconductor has responded.
Possible causes:
- fiber-optic cable interrupted.
- power supply of the IGBT gating module missing.
- short-circuit at the power unit output.
- defective semiconductor in the power unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Short-circuit in phase U
Bit 1: Short circuit in phase V
Bit 2: Short-circuit in phase W
Bit 3: Light transmitter enable defective
Bit 4: U_ce group fault signal interrupted
See also: r0949 (Fault value)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B-2/CU240E-2

860 List Manual (LH11), 01/2016, A5E33839529
 4 Faults and alarms
4.2 List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - check the fiber-optic cable and if required, replace.

-